213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-04-012024-03-31213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-04-012024-03-31pennongroupplc:BeforeNonUnderlyingItemsMemberiso4217:GBP213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-04-012024-03-31pennongroupplc:NonUnderlyingItemsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-04-012023-03-31pennongroupplc:BeforeNonUnderlyingItemsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-04-012023-03-31pennongroupplc:NonUnderlyingItemsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-04-012023-03-31iso4217:GBPxbrli:shares213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-04-012024-03-31pennongroupplc:BeforeNonUnderlyingItemsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-04-012024-03-31pennongroupplc:NonUnderlyingItemsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-04-012023-03-31pennongroupplc:BeforeNonUnderlyingItemsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-04-012023-03-31pennongroupplc:NonUnderlyingItemsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232024-03-31213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-03-31213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-03-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-03-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-03-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-03-31pennongroupplc:RetainedEarningsAndOtherReservesMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-03-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-03-31213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-04-012023-03-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-04-012023-03-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-04-012023-03-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-04-012023-03-31pennongroupplc:RetainedEarningsAndOtherReservesMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232022-04-012023-03-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-03-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-03-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-03-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-03-31pennongroupplc:RetainedEarningsAndOtherReservesMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-03-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-04-012024-03-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-04-012024-03-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-04-012024-03-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-04-012024-03-31pennongroupplc:RetainedEarningsAndOtherReservesMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232023-04-012024-03-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232024-03-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232024-03-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232024-03-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232024-03-31pennongroupplc:RetainedEarningsAndOtherReservesMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232024-03-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800V1CCTS41GWH4232021-04-012022-03-31
Annual Report and Accounts
2024
Bringing
Water to
Life
Supporting the
livesof people and
the places they
lovefor generations
to come
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Contents
Strategic Report
Year at a glance - Our fundamentals are strong 1
Pennon at a glance 2
Chair’s letter 4
Our CEO’s review 5
Pennon, a business that listens and acts
How we listen 8
How we act 13
The markets in which we operate 17
The water sector regulatory framework 18
Our future plans: 2025 to 2030 19
Our Ambitions to 2050 21
Our business model 22
How we deliver 23
Our operational review 32
Our KPIs - non-financial metrics 42
Our KPIs - financial metrics 45
Our CFO’s review 47
Our risk management 55
Viability statement 65
Our integrated approach to ESG 67
ESG performance and targets 68
Net Zero - our promise to the planet 69
Sustainability reporting
Streamlined Energy and Carbon Report (SECR) 71
SASB Pennon 2023/24 disclosure 74
Task Force on Climate-related Disclosures (TCFD)
andTaskForce on Nature-related Disclosures (TNFD)
78
Non-financial and sustainability information sheet 110
Governance
Our governance at a glance 112
Our Chair’s introduction to governance 114
Our Board of Directors
The Board 116
Pennon Executive Board 118
Monitoring purpose and culture 119
Board leadership and Company purpose 120
Division of responsibilities 121
An effective Board 122
Key activities of the Board 124
How the Board engages with stakeholders 126
Our s172(1) statement 128
Composition, succession and evaluation 130
Nomination Committee report 131
Audit Committee report 136
Audit risk and internal control 142
ESG Committee report 144
Health and Safety Committee report 146
Remuneration Committee report 148
Directors’ Remuneration report 151
Directors’ report 171
Financial Statements
Independent auditor’s report 175
Financial statements 185
Notes to the financial statements 191
Other Information
Alternative performance measures 239
Five-year financial summary 243
Glossary 244
Shareholder information 245
Living our purpose, we are bringing water to life
supporting the lives of people and the places they love for generations to come
Our reporting suite
Clear and transparent reporting is important to us and
our stakeholders. Our Annual Report is supported by
additional disclosures contained in our wider corporate
reporting suite. These include:
Our Annual Report and the
other reports in our corporate
reporting suite can be
found on our website: www.
pennon-group.co.uk/investor-
information/financial-reports-
and-presentations
Net Zero plan
Modern slavery
statement
ESG Databook 2023
Gender and Ethnicity
PayGap Report 2023
Cover photo credits/captions
1. New abstraction pontoon at Blackpool Pit, Cornwall.
2. Thickener plant and sludge transfer pumps, as part of the
new GAC structure at Stithians Water Treatment Works,
Cornwall.
3. New storm tank capacity to reduce reliance on storm overflows
at our Hatherleigh, Wastewater Treatment Works, Devon.
4. New storm tank capacity storage at Lifton Wastewater
Treatment Works, Devon.
5. Membrane Transportable Treatment Units building at
Alderney Water Treatment Works, Bournemouth.
6. Works to divert surface water to reduce overload
onthesewer system at Bere Alston Wastewater
Treatment Works, Devon.
7. Newly constructed storm tank at Hawkchurch Wastewater
Treatment Works, Devon.
8. Construction of the state-of-the-art ceramic membrane,
Alderney Water Treatment Works, Bournemouth.
1
8
4
5
2
7
3
6
The acquisition of Sutton and East Surrey Water (SES Water) on
10
th
January 2024 and the CMA’s hold separate order has presented
reporting challenges for the data for the 52 weeks ended 31
st
March 2024.
Data presented in pages 32 to 39 relate to the Group, excluding SES Water.
SES Water operational review information can be found at pages 40 to 41.
Year at a glance - Our fundamentals are strong
Making progress on what matters to our customers
Breaking the drought cycle: c.100% reservoir peak capacity
achieved with 1/3 improvement as a result of our investment.
Maintaining gains on storm overflows and pollutions: We are
expected to retain a 2
EPA rating with a road map to EPA 4 .
Driving environmental gains: c.127,000 cumulative hectares
of drinking water catchments restored, over 250,000 trees
planted, both ahead of target.
Affordability: 132,000 customers benefiting from our schemes.
Robust financial position
Water group gearing: 63.5% reflecting increased capex spend
and timing of RCV build, within K7 policy.
Liquidity: c.£1.2bn raised since March 2023, in addition to the
successful equity raise of £180m for the SES Water acquisition.
Cost management: operational efficiency programmes
keeping cost increases below inflation despite impacts of
unprecedented wet weather.
Solid building blocks in place
Accelerated transition to K8: ‘Amplify’ a 10-year delivery
alliance with suppliers, already mobilised on c.1,000 projects.
Transformational programmes: improvements in operational
effectiveness delivering annualised synergies of £26m in 2023/24,
targeting £86m run rate into K8.
Investing in people: One in 10 colleagues have been through
our apprenticeship or graduate programmes.
Leveraging technology: Using predictive modelling in our
wastewater operations.
Sound business - growing sustainably
Peak capital delivery for the wholesale water businesses:
investment increased 63% year on year to £583m. Cumulative
RCV growth (organic and acquisitive) of c.65% excluding SES
Water.
The Pennon Power programme on track: investment of £59m
in 2023/24, ramping up EBITDA contribution from H2 2024/25
with delivery of 39 GWh and 60 MWh battery storage.
Delivering on our acquisition strategy: Bristol Water
acquisition benefits programme on track, c.£17m annualised
operating synergies to 2023/24. SES Water acquisition is fast
tracking through the CMA process.
1Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
All figures as at 31
st
March 2024, other than population
and litres of drinking water per day which are as at 31
st
March 2023, as shown in Annual Performance Report -
January 2024.
c. 1.8m
population served
490m litres
of drinking water per day
Supplying Cornwall, Devon
and small areas of Dorset
andSomerset
c. 500,000
population served
160m litres
of drinking water per day
Supplying parts of Dorset,
Hampshire and Wiltshire
Acquired in 2015
c. 2,000
population served
700,000 litres
of drinking water per day
Assumed responsibility
in2020
Pennon at a glance
Pennon is an environmental infrastructure group focused on the UK water sector.
Our team of around 4,000 talented colleagues work around the clock to deliver over
1 billion litres of water to 4.24 million people every day.
c. 1.2m
population served
280m litres
of drinking water per day
Supplying the city of Bristol
and surroundings
Acquired in 2021
c. 740,000
population served
160m litres
of drinking water per day
Supplying parts of Surrey,
Kent and South London
Acquired in 2024
Our locations
Key:
Water services
Wastewater services
Non-household water and
wastewater services (England-wide)
Renewable power services
Fife – Solar and battery
energy storage system
Aberdeenshire – Solar
Cumbria – Solar
Buckinghamshire – Solar
Our businesses
2 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Our businesses continued
95,000
customers accounts including Rolls Royce,
Pets at Home and Nuffield Health
4.8
out of 5 Trustpilot score
115,000
customers accounts including Aldi, Pirelli
andVision Express
4.9
out of 5 Trustpilot score
135 GW hours
of future annual power generation
Enough electricity to power
50,000 homes
Our Group
Communities
Over 500
water-saving devices
distributed across the
South West per day
4,000
children taught in 116
lessons using South
West Water education
resources
Over
55,000
people at 28 events
reached by our Awesome
Water campaign
Over 1,300
LeakBot devices sent out
to homes across Devon
and Cornwall to detect
customer leaks
Customers
4.24m
people served
23,000
customers moved onto
social tariffs in FY23/24
£100m
of financial support
provided to customers since
2020
98%
of South West Water
and Bournemouth Water
customers find their bill
affordable
100%
of Bristol Water customers
find their bill affordable
People
4,000
colleagues
470
apprentices supported
since 2020
85
graduates recruited
to graduate programme
since its launch in 2021,
with 55% female and over
half ethnically diverse or
international
200
days of work experience
opportunities created
for year 12 students from
low-income backgrounds
across Exeter and Bristol
expanding to Plymouth,
Truro and St Austell
in2024
Operations
23,000
kilometres of sewers
41
reservoirs
29,000
kilometres of water pipes
66
water treatment works
655
wastewater treatment
works
860
miles of coastline
3Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Chair’s letter
In my last letter as Chair, I want to thank our 4,000 employees that live and
work in the communities we serve. They continue to work tirelessly to deliver
a water system that everyone can be proud of. Our responsibility goes beyond
pipes, treatment works and reservoirs; it’s about ensuring the natural rivers and
860 miles of coastline continue to thrive and to make our waters the benchmark
for quality. It’s also about ensuring that customers have a clean and plentiful
supply of water. From apprentices to graduates, data scientists to lab technicians,
environmentalists, engineers and customer service teams, everyone who works at
Pennon shares the same ambition.
Today we are investing more than ever to improve our assets, in new and
innovative ways, both nature first and future proof, building resilience in the
face of a changing climate and population growth. It’s no longer acceptable
to build more concrete, or complex infrastructures, that have long term
environmental impacts. From using reed beds to smart ponds and smart water
butts, we want to protect the planet and use less. Our investment in Pennon
Power will support our commitment to ensuring 50% of our energy needs come
from renewable sources as part of our Net Zero ambitions.
In 2022, the South West experienced one of the driest years on record,
with reservoirs hitting their lowest ever levels as we worked to protect both
river health and ensure a continuous supply of clean drinking water to our
customers. We moved quickly, innovating to repurpose ex quarries and
mines to store water across Devon and Cornwall. Together with this, and by
You can read more on how we are engaging with our stakeholders
in our Section 172(1) statement on page 128.
“We’re doing
this, for a water
system that
everyone can
be proud of”
Gill Rider
Group Chair
investing in desalination, we will continue to use innovative techniques to
re-use what we have and break the cycle of drought.
Whilst 2022 was one of the driest, 2023 will be known for being one of the
wettest. Whilst good for water resources, this has triggered more use of
storm overflows and more pollution incidents than any of us agree is right. If
we could go back to the Victorian era when the UK’s infrastructure was built,
we would make significant changes, and the design is the same the world
over. What does set us apart from the rest of the world, is the monitoring. As
one of the first water companies to achieve 100% monitoring, we will use the
data and information to target our efforts to fix this.
We know this will take time and we can fix this, because 30 years ago, half of our
sewage in the South West did go directly untreated into the sea. In a journey
starting in the 1990s with Clean Sweep, and a £13 billion investment, we created
a legacy of wastewater services, and a first for the South West. The result is that
we now have some of the best bathing water quality in the UK, up from c.29% in
the 90s to 100% for the last three years running. Whilst excellent in between May
and September, (when bathing water quality is monitored) it’s clear we need to
go further, ensuring excellent water all year round. We do need to reduce the use
of storm overflows.
Post 2025 and as part of a wider £2.8 billion investment plan across the
Greater South West, our plans will also support 2,200 jobs directly and in the
supply chain. It’s a plan grounded in extensive customer research, and the
Board and I met regularly with the independent Chair and deputy Chair of
the Watershare+ panel who led the engagement. We also received feedback
from our 90,000 customers who are shareholders through our WaterShare+
scheme. We’re pleased this plan received strong support from customers,
stakeholders and our shareholders – to invest more in the region, and we
believe it’s also aligned with Ofwat’s objectives.
At the same time, the Board has committed to extend our zero-water poverty
pledge to 2030, with a £200 million support package, as we find new ways
to help our customers to save money. From our “Stop the Drop” to “Water is
Precious” campaigns and innovative tariffs, we are helping customers to save
water, save money and change how we all use water.
That same care for customer service is being demonstrated in the growth
of our non-household retail businesses Pennon Water Services and
Water2Business. And with the acquisition of SES Water earlier this year, and
our continued focus on the local delivery of local services, the Board are
pleased to be able to enhance SES Water’s ongoing financial resilience to
better deliver for customers and stakeholders and demonstrate our ongoing
commitment to the UK Water Sector.
Finally, I want to extend my thanks to our Board, our CEO Susan and her
executive team for their support. I am grateful to have worked alongside
such a talented and dedicated team over many years and I look forward
tocontinuing my relationship with Pennon as a customer.
Gill Rider
Group Chair
20
th
May 2024
4 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
At Pennon, we all work in water because it is too
important not to
150 years ago, water professionals were seen as one of the founding
champions of public health. This is at our core of what we do. Today,
climate change is the single biggest threat facing people and planet, water
companies also need to demonstrate that we are also custodians of the
environment, and as we look ahead.
That’s why when asked, I always say that we all work in water because
itis too important not to. Our c.4,000 employees, who live and work in
the communities we support are bolstered by the wider supply chain, now
collectively known as Amplify and nearly doubling the number of people we
support as one of the largest private employers in the Greater South West.
We are also a growing team, through our acquisition of SES Water, and we
were delighted to be able to safeguard c.470 jobs.
In the year, we have also signed the Armed Forces Covenant and become a
disability confident employer and continue to increase our responsibility on
social mobility as a tier 1 funder of the Social Mobility Partnership, launching
work experience clusters, and as we look to offer 5,000 work placements for
young people by 2030.
I want to pay tribute to everyone who works for the Group and with us,
aswecouldn’t deliver any of this without talented people doing great things
for customers and each other and they are the real heroes in delivering
thisset of results.
Doing what’s right
This has also been a year where we have refreshed our values, an
opportunity to galvanise everyone who works for Pennon and our supply
chain, as we grow and continue to evolve how we deliver for customers,
Our fundamentals are strong
As I look back on the year, the fundamentals are strong for a more
sustainable future, reflected in record levels of investment, record support
for customers, and as we create record numbers of jobs directly and in the
supply chain, supporting the economic health of the regions we support.
With a strong balance sheet and good liquidity, we retain the agility and
ability to respond when it matters most and for the longer term, and in
delivering on our strategy focused on UK Water. We are growing sustainably,
whether through acquisition or investment, with an efficiently funded and
robust balance sheet, growing shareholder value. And this in turn, is ensuring
we can make good operational progress, delivering on our 4 priorities and
what matters most to our customers.
We are listening
The UK Water sector remains firmly in the spotlight, with regulatory, political
and public scrutiny at an all-time high. It’s difficult for any water company to
ignore. We are listening
Our customer and community roadshows have been a personal highlight for
me as we have directly faced into public anger of the sector, head on and
we have focused on talking about what really matters most. From Bristol to
Bournemouth, and across Devon, Cornwall and the Isles of Scilly, and soon to
be in Sutton and East Surrey Water, we are slowly changing perceptions, one
conversation at a time. At the same time, we have embarked on our largest
ever direct customer engagement, gathering the views and feedback of over
250,000 customers and 1,000 stakeholders as part of our £2.8 billion PR24
business plan submission.
Our CEO’s review
“The fundamentals
are strong for a
more sustainable
future”
Susan Davy
Group Chief Executive Officer
5Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
This is a year in which the weather has been both our friend and our foe.
With 10 named storms and 12 yellow weather warnings since September, it is
a sobering statistic that 5 of the 10 wettest Februarys have been in the last
5 years, and with average rainfall increasing by 50% when compared to long
term averages in the second half of the year. On one hand with more rainfall,
we have been able to break the back of the drought we experienced in 2022,
and in doing what we said we would by achieving 100% strategic reservoir
capacity for Devon and Cornwall by April, ahead of target.
This has been a monumental undertaking, from teams across South West
Water and the supply chain as we have opened 2 reservoirs at Blackpool
Pit this year and Hawks Tor last year, and increased treatment capacity at
Rialton, alongside pump recharge schemes. We are also on track to deliver
a 2-phase desalination scheme for Cornwall. It is not just been about fixing
the here and now. We are investing enough now to protect resources over
the next 25 years, building trust in our services for the longer term. We have
delivered on our 2025 target for Devon, with 30% greater resource availability
and are on track for 45% in Cornwall, with 30% delivered to date.
There are always two sides to the coin, as in addition to diversifying our portfolio,
it has also been about reducing demand. We are delivering on our leakage
targets. And our sector-leading demand reduction schemes, are focused on
supporting customers to use less water and save money, with c.500 water saving
devices provided every single day last year and we are piloting trial tariff schemes
to better distribute charges and encourage water efficiency.
Overall, water quality continues to deliver upper quartile performance. We have
delivered a step change in the Isles of Scilly, with zero failures of water treatment
processes for Devon, Cornwall and Bournemouth, and with a robust action plan in
place for Bristol to address the legacy issues we inherited.
The significantly increased wastewater flows have also impacted our headline
performance for wastewater pollutions and the use of storm overflows, with
rising groundwater levels and increasing flows into the network. Historically,
70% of our pollutions have occurred in our networks. The work we have
done over the last few years is working, with performance stabilising. We are
achieving sector-leading internal sewer flooding performance, outperforming
regulatory targets for sewer collapses and blockages and maintaining the
gains we have made previously in reducing network pollutions.
Turning to the 20% increase in flows we have seen in 2023; we are focused
on infiltration work. We have redoubled efforts at both our treatment works
and pumping stations, where the higher levels of flows have driven spikes in
performance. By reinvigorating action plans, our treatment works performance
has recovered from the degradation we saw last year, stabilising performance
into 2024, with a combination of inlet and storm tank cleansing and risk-based
generator servicing, site-based compliance, reedbed surveys and refurbishments.
Efforts have now turned to the 1,250 pumping stations, with improved site MOTs,
and enhanced cleansing as well as tackling power resilience.
Reducing pollutions remains a top priority for the Board, and everyone
who works in Wastewater. I am reassured that we have maintained serious
pollution incidents at the lowest level for 2023 (2), noting we are aiming for
zero. For all other incidents, we have a revised trajectory to achieving 4 star
performance for the 2025 calendar year.
communities and the environment. I am proud of our new values. Developed
bottom up with employee engagement sessions and with our top 100 leaders
and in response to our customer and stakeholder feedback as part of PR24
preparations, our values will help us to stand apart.
They epitomise everything we do as a good corporate citizen, as we continue
to deliver strong performance in external ESG benchmarks, retain the Fair
Tax mark for the 6
th
year running, move 23,000 customers on to social tariffs
and welcome over 2 million visitors to our lakes and reservoirs This ensures
that any customer or visitor to the region is never more than an hour away
from water, and able to use them for health and recreation.
We remain the only water company in the sector to reinvest outperformance
directly with customers, by giving them a unique opportunity to become
shareholders in their local water company with Watershare+. With over 78,000
customer shareholders, all stakeholders can be assured that customers
directly benefit. As we have acquired businesses as part of our growth strategy,
Watershare+ is now one of the first commitments we make.
As CEO, it’s also my job to lead from the front, and champion living our
values. With executive remuneration continuing to be in the media, and
regulatory spotlight, I recommended to the Remuneration Committee, that
the annual bonus was foregone. It’s the right thing to do.
A sound business - growing sustainably
We have a clear twin track organic and acquisitive growth strategy. With
peak capital investment up nearly two thirds, year on year, this represents
our largest ever water programme. That translates in accumulative RCV
growth, of 65% and on track to 70% to 2025. This investment delivers asset
backed, inflationary returns.
Our operations in the Group require reliable and efficient power supply
and we are investing to increase our renewable energy provision through
Pennon Power, with its first EBITDA contribution due in 2024/25, supporting
our Net Zero ambitions and targeting to meet 40% of energy requirements
of the Group. We are also delivering on our acquisition and consolidation
strategy. We are realising the benefits we set out as part of the Bristol Water
acquisition, and having acquired SES Water in January, safeguarding their
financial resilience through a successful equity raise, we are now fast-
tracking through the CMA process, ahead of plan.
Making progress on what matters most to customers,
delivering on our four priorities
Turning to performance, we remain resolutely focused on our 4 customer
priorities across the Greater South West. We are investing to protect water
quality and enhance resilience; tackling storm overflows at our beaches and
eradicating pollutions across Devon and Cornwall and driving environmental
gains, wherever we serve. At the same time, we have successfully managed
customer bills to be lower than they were 10 years ago, and as we pledge
to eradicate water poverty. Bills in the region are no longer the outliers in
the sector they once were, in the aftermath of post privatisation, and the
£13 billion legacy costs involved in putting waste water treatment into the
region for the first time.
Our CEO’s review continued
Water quality and
resilience
Addressing affordability
and delivering for
customers
Storm overflow and
pollutions
Net zero and environmental
gains
Our four strategic priorities
£
6 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
“We have a robust financial
position with solid financial
performance and well
positioned for the next
regulatory period.”
We are clear and transparent about where we are, and over time, we have
improved self-reporting of pollutions incidents, and now are one of the best
in the sector.
The same higher levels of flows impacting pollutions, has made demonstrable
improvements in storm overflows numbers, challenging to see at a headline
number. On a like for like basis, the investments we are making today, are
delivering underlying performance improvements and which we will see in future
years. Of the c.280 interventions planned, they have all been completed or are
underway. And we’re equally focused on a nature first approach.
As we focus on improving 49 of 151 beaches through our WaterFit
investment programme by 2025, WaterFit Live is giving communities and
visitors to the region near real time information about their favourite beach,
alongside community roadshows, as we place communities at the heart of
our future plans. And whilst beaches are a priority, we are equally focused on
improving river waterquality with RNAGs reduced from 19% to 12.4% and on
track to get to our 2025 target.
One of the benefits of taking a nature-based approach is reduced costs for
customers over the longer term. With a nature first approach to investment,
our award-winning catchment management programme is leading the way
for biodiversity gains as well as continuing to help the way others manage
their land, improve water quality, biodiversity and climate resilience.
Activities range from installing water side fencing, building ponds, improving
farm tracks, slurry storage, under sowing maize, as well as planting trees and
buffer strips to catch and filter water. With c.127,000 cumulative hectares
restored, we are also exceeding our tree planting target at over 250,000.
Having worked on our catchments for the last 15 years, we have the science
to back up the improvements and I was delighted that we officially opened
our partnership with the University of Exeter in March 2024 providing
research through a state-of-the-art laboratory into the key challenges and
issues facing water, wastewater and the environment globally.
In tackling affordability, it is about two things, keeping bills as low as they can
be for all customers, and secondly, supporting those who are struggling. We
have always been focused on being as efficient as we can be in delivering
services, and in keeping bill increases to 2025 well below inflation. In fact bills
for Devon and Cornwall are lower today than they were 10 years ago. That’s
why we continue to support customers and communities having provided
over £100 million of customer support with 132,000 customers benefiting
from one or more of our affordability initiatives tariffs, building awareness
of our customer outreach engagement programmes. As a result, 100% of
customers in Bristol find their bills affordable and 98% across other regions.
And given you can’t choose your water provider; we believe you should have
asay which is why we plan to grow our unique Watershare+ scheme to one
inevery 10 households and will extend this scheme to SES Water customers
for the firsttime.
A sustainable future in the UK Water Sector
We’re reshaping the Group to be even more efficient, as we grow, and to
ensure we are performance led, with planned improvements in processes and
operational effectiveness which will deliver synergies. We are bolstering delivery
of the wider supply chain, collectively known as Amplify, with a two-tier supplier
model already in place and supporting 1,000 projects and in support of our
£2.8 billion investment plan for the region and delivery of RCV growth.
And to be a sustainable business, I’ve always been clear, our investments
can’t just be in assets, they’re in people too. We are the only water company
to have been recognised as a Top 100 employer for apprenticeships. With
over 470 apprenticeships to date and accredited as a gold employer for
our “earn and learn” approach, c.1 in 10 colleagues have either undertaken
an apprenticeship or graduate programmes. As we promote social mobility,
we are giving young people the opportunity to dive into their local water
company. For the third-year running we have had our best health and safety
performance, as we deliver on our HomeSafe strategy to ensure everyone
who works for us and with us goes home safe every single day.
We’re also leveraging technology, trialling AI in customer services and using
predictive modelling to support wastewater operations.
Robust Financial Position
Overall, we have a robust financial position with solid financial performance
and well positioned for the next regulatory period. Our efficiency programmes
are focused on keeping costs below inflationary levels and despite the
impacts of the unprecedented wet weather. Furthermore, with a robust
balance sheet, we are also efficiently funded and growing shareholder value.
Our strategy for financing will continue to seek to ensure we remain one of
the most efficient in the sector, and delivered in the right way as we continue
to make progress.
We have raised £1.2 billion of liquidity since March 2023, and completed
thesuccessful equity raise of £180 million for the SES Water acquisition.
Ourwater group gearing at 63.5% is in line with policy, reflecting the
increased investment spend in assets and the timing of RCV build and with
a near doubling of sector-leading base returns. And the development of the
B2B retailers, Pennon Water Services and Water2Business, are delivering a
c.50% increase in EBITDA and increase in market share through providing
excellent customer services.
We have carefully considered the final dividend position for 2023/24,
considering the new guidance from Ofwat in March 2024. We’ve made an
assessment on the performance of the Group in the round, including the
performance of the B2B retailers and the development of Pennon Power, and
the overall robust performance of our water businesses.
It’s in this context, we think it’s right to reflect on Ofwat’s guidance on dividends.
The final Pennon dividend has therefore been adjusted to reflect the fines linked
to a SWW prosecution we had in May 2023, where we were fined £2.4 million, with
theultimate shareholders of the Group, bearing that impact, and not customers.
The revised recommended final dividend is 30.33 pence per share.
In Summary
Our fundamentals are strong, reflected in record levels of investment, record
support for customers, and creating record levels of jobs directly and in the
supply chain, supporting the economic health of the region. We are growing
sustainably, whether through acquisition or investment with an efficiently
funded and robust balance sheet, growing shareholder value.
The building blocks are in place, focusing on not only what we do, but how
we do business. And this in turn, is ensuring we are making good operational
progress, delivering on our 4 priorities and what matters most to customers.
With a strong balance sheet and good liquidity, we maintain the agility to
deliver on our strategy in UK Water and are well positioned for a sustainable
future, with robust financials.
And finally
I could not end this update, without paying my personal respects to Gill
Rider, our out-going Chair. She has been both a mentor and a Chair, and her
championing of diversity and inclusion across Pennon is a fitting legacy on
which we intend to build. On behalf of everyone who works for the Group,
and will join us in the future, thank you Gill.
Susan Davy
Group Chief Executive Officer
20
th
May 2024
7Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Pennon, a business that listens and acts
How we listen
We constantly listen carefully to our stakeholders to understand their concerns on the important issues of the day and to review and refine our strategy and actions to
deliver maximum benefit to the communities we serve. Our engagement approach involves regular dialogue so that we can build open, meaningful relationships,
based on trust and transparency. Understanding our stakeholders’ needs and priorities helps to shape our strategy and social purpose as well as shape our
Board decisions. For more information on how stakeholder feedback shapes our Board decisions, read our Section 172(1) statement on pages 128 and 129.
In the table below, we outline in detail our approach to engagement with each of our key stakeholders.
Customers
Who they are
Our businesses supply water and wastewater services to 3.5 million residents across the South West region. We also have
10 million visitors a year to the region who receive our services. Through our acquisition of SES Water, – a further 740,000 people
are also served by the Group.
We serve 210,000 business customers nationally across England through our non-household retail businesses.
Why we engage How we engage Key challenges and how we are responding
Understanding customer needs,
expectations and concerns helps
us to share our engagement
with the people we serve and
find better ways of meeting their
needs.
We engage with our customers
and communities every day,
whether by phone, in communities
or through one-to-one
interactions. We understand their
concerns and priorities and share
their sense of urgency about
improving our network.
We also know that broader
engagement is vital, whether it’s
educating children about the
water cycle, supporting customers
who need additional help
through one-to-one meetings,
or answering questions at public
events.
We also engage and work with
the Consumer Council for Water
(CCW) - the voice for water
consumers.
Our customer contact and support centres – we now hold the BSI
ISO 22458 KiteMark for Vulnerability and Inclusive Service.
Customer feedback – has driven improvements to MyAccount and
Incident Management.
WaterShare+ Customer Advisory Panel – an independent group of
customer, business, and social representatives. The membership
of the Panel is strengthened with expert advisors from the
Consumer Council for Water, the Environment Agency and Natural
England. 1 in 14 of our customers are now shareholders thanks to
the WaterShare+ scheme.
PR24 Business Plan - we engaged with more than 250,000
customers to inform the strategic priorities for our plan to reflect
the views of households, visitors, retailers and housing developers.
Customer AGM.
WaterFit Live – our interactive map with real-time storm overflow,
and investment information for coastal communities.
Awesome Water – attending over 28 events and reaching 55,000
people through fun, interactive displays and activities.
Roadshows and local events – bringing the experts into
communities to address concerns and answer key questions.
Customer research and focus groups.
Community, charity and education projects.
Neighbourhood and Water- Saving Community Funds.
Communication campaigns – water-efficiency and leakage
messaging targeting households, businesses and visitors to
theregion.
The provision of clean, safe drinking water
continues to be the number one priority for
our customers – we are focused on building
new resources, investment to upgrade
infrastructure and reducing leakage.
Reducing pollution and protecting our bathing
waters – we are building trust through a
commitment to a programme of sampling and
monitoring. WaterFit Live is evolving to share
the near-real-time status of all 1,600 overflows
including rivers and is supported by face-to-
face roadshows in coastal communities to
respond to customer concerns.
Ensuring we are a socially responsible
business - focus on achieving net zero by
2030, focusing on key environmental projects.
We are also creating an independent WaterFit
environmental advisory board.
As the cost-of-living crisis continued, keeping
bills affordable for everyone and supporting
those who need additional help is crucial.
We are focused on extending our zero water
poverty pledge to 2030, ensuring fair pricing
for all customers and to accelerate smart
metering.
WaterShare+ Customer Panel at the WaterShare+ AGM - Oct 2023
8 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Communities
Who they are
Our businesses operate in the heart of local communities and we engage with the groups that represent them and provide forums
for our customers to come together as a community to express their views.
Why we engage How we engage Key challenges and how we are responding
We are integral to the communities across our
region and we are committed to listening and
engaging regularly to understand their needs,
working together to ensure water for all and
protecting our environment today and for
futuregenerations.
Our charitable donations and community funds
support hundreds of amazing causes making
a real difference to the lives of people and the
places they love. Our education programme has
the goal of inspiring future champions across the
region to learn about the value of water in fun and
interactive ways.
Our community outreach programme works
directly in the communities we serve. It achieves
this by offering support to those who need a
little extra help when it matters most and talking
directly to customers about environmental
challenges and how we can work together to
secure the future we all want to see.
For over a decade, we have been working with
local community partners to protect and restore
our environment using nature-based solutions
to make a difference. This includes working
with local farmers to create more sustainable
farming practices, planting trees and restoring
the South West’s precious peatlands to boost
nature and reduce harmful runoff into waterways.
Our partnerships with charities also seek to
provide health and recreational benefits to local
communities through the use of our lakes and
reservoirs – helping us support the health and
wellbeing in our region.
Our Stakeholder Forum – that has brought
over 1,000 stakeholders across the region
together over the last two years to review and
co-develop plans.
A roadshow programme across the South West
Water region, focused on providing information
at a local level and delivered in coastal
communities. This provides a forum to talk
about local upcoming plans, and listen to and
answer customer concerns.
Print, digital and social media – including our
‘Water is Precious’ campaign and engaging our
communities in behavioural change campaigns
such as Love Your Loo, and Think Sink!
An education programme working with primary
schools. This has delivered a record year,
with116 lessons relating to the water cycle,
sewer misuse and water efficiency to over
4,000 children.
The Awesome Water programme; this consisted
of 28 event days across the South West
involving over 55,000 people. This enabled
direct feedback and the sharing of important
messages around sewage misuse, water
efficiency, drought and the hosepipe ban.
The South West Water Neighbourhood Fund;
this has been running for three years, in that
time we have given out £100,000 to 56 different
charities and groups helping 22,000 individuals
across the South West.
Bristol Water ‘Together for good’ programme;
this is a community lottery providing the
opportunity for a different charity or community
scheme to win £500 towards a project that
benefits the community.
Bi-annual Conservation and Recreation Forum.
Specific partner engagement to support access
to our land and sites for recreation in the South
West – e.g. South West Lakes Trust.
Our region has over a third of the nation’s
bathing waters and it is important that we
protect these vital recreational areas – we have
for three years maintained 100% bathing water
quality where we operate.
We continue to progress rivers into bathing
waters, with our River Dart and Tavy pilot
studies complete allowing communities
tosuccessfully seek designation on 4
stretchesof river.
We provide access to our 40 inland lakes
and reservoirs, so that local communities
can continue enjoying them for health and
recreation – used by two million visitors a year.
All of this means that any customer or visitor
is never more than an hour away from a
bathing water, with nature and recreation on
everyone’sdoorsteps.
Our Exmouth Community Roadshow
9Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Pennon, a business that listens and acts continued
People
Who they are
A total of c.4,000 (including SES Water) people work across the Group and its brands, in corporate and operational roles. It’s our
people that keep things moving 24/7 to deliver drinking and wastewater services and to ensure our customers receive clean and
safe drinking water.
Why we engage How we engage Key challenges and how we are responding
Our employees are our greatest asset. We provide
the opportunity for them to be engaged at multiple
levels of the business and through a variety of
two-way dialogue and feedback channels so we
can listen to them and make improvements based
on their feedback of what’s important to them. We
continually engage and communicate with our
people on topics such as their health, safety and
wellbeing, our organisational culture, promoting
diversity and inclusion, training and development.
We use a variety of mechanisms to engage with
colleagues including pulse surveys, listening
sessions, employee forums and trade union
representation.
Great Place To Work pulse surveys and work
with senior leaders to develop local action plans.
100% employee representation either through
RISE (employee forum) or collective bargaining
agreements with our Trade Union partners
GMB and Unite in our operational teams.
Two-way communication activities, including
fortnightly Big Chats, ‘Ask Susan’, monthly
senior leadership calls and listening sessions.
Executive and Board site visits.
Employee training programmes.
Internal communication activities including,
weekly internal newsletter, social channels
eg.Viva Engage and our Group-wide intranet.
Monthly ‘Time to Talk’ sessions, primarily
focusing on wellbeing, featuring both internal
and external speakers.
Regular ‘This is Me’ features including videos
and podcasts.
Regular appraisals and one-to-ones.
Proactively recognising and addressing
employees’ mental health and wellbeing
by delivering a broad and comprehensive
programme of offerings for all employees and
their family members.
Maintaining focus on Health and Safety with
continued investment through HomeSafe.
Supporting diversity and inclusion by launching
our new employee networks.
Involving existing colleagues as we recruit and
train the next generation of employees through
our apprenticeship, internship and graduate
programmes.
Addressing employee survey feedback by
enhancing Group communications and
employee pay and bonuses.
Environment
What they are
Beaches, bathing waters, rivers and our natural environment set us apart as a region. We recognise that is what makes us unique.
They also creates a similarly unique set of challenges and opportunities. We recognise that to meet these properly, we need to
collaborate and to build strong, value-filled partnerships with a wide range of environmental stakeholders in the region. These
stakeholders include South West Lakes Trust, Westcountry Rivers Trust, local Wildlife Trusts, Natural England and various
conservation, environmental and recreational interest groups and charities.
Why we engage How we engage Key challenges and how we are responding
We seek to identify and build strategic
relationships around shared ambitions and
objectives. By working in collaboration with our
partners we can amplify the impact of our work.
Our core activities are directly linked to the health
and wellbeing of the people and environment
of our unique region. We seek to carry out our
business in a sustainable and responsible way
and recognise that to do this, collaboration and
partnership working are key.
It is our role to listen and respond, innovate and help
find solutions to the challenges we all face today
and for generations to come. We see that we need
to work collectively to do this. For example, through
our CREWW partnership with Exeter University.
We want to ensure we are delivering on our
environmental commitments and support stakeholders
in the work they do, in partnership with us.
Regular meetings and liaison with
environmental partners in our operational
areasin relation to specific strategic projects
and objectives.
Regular attendance by operational colleagues
at local, regional and national working groups,
forums and partnership meetings to ensure our
priorities and actions are represented and that
insight gathered is fed back into the business.
Our senior leadership team, including CEO
Susan Davy, meets routinely with CEOs
andleaders of environmental organisations
andcharities.
Regular meetings with the Environment
Agency as our environmental regulator,
bothatstrategic and catchment level.
Every two months we host our ‘Let’s Talk
Water’ stakeholder forum to share progress
onourenvironmental programme and share
ideas for collaboration.
We keep stakeholders abreast of latest news
from the business through regular review and
revision of our stakeholder communication and
engagement programme.
We ensure the business keeps abreast
of stakeholder news and development
through regular review and revision of our
engagementprogramme.
10 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Suppliers
Who they are
As a large organisation we work with a large and diverse supply chain. Our supply chain partners play a vital role in supporting
sustainable growth and cost-base efficiency across the business.
Why we engage How we engage Key challenges and how we are responding
We want to be ready to meet the challenges
of the future through our investment
programmes and have made extensive
preparations to ensure that our programme
is deliverable. We are ready to meet the
step change in the scale of the programme
forK8.
We are committed to ensuring our supply
chain partners align with the same values,
standards and behaviours we expect
of ourselves. Through rationalising and
segmenting our supply base to reflect either
strategic, key, preferred or transactional
relationships, we are developing an
approach that maximises our engagement
with each supply chain partner. As a
signatory to the EU Skills Accord, we work
collaboratively tosupport skills development
and investment throughout the supply
chain and as part of our ESG and Net Zero
strategies we engage our supply chain
so that we can better understand and
manage our collective environmental impact
throughcollaboration.
We unveiled our major new alliance, Amplify, with
some of the country’s best engineering companies to
deliver South West Water’s major infrastructure plan for
2025-2030, worth £2.8 billion. It will drive investment
into the local economy, creating around 2,000 new jobs,
with new treatment works and reservoirs among the
investments planned as part of the company’s ongoing
commitment to its customers, communities, and the
environment. To help deliver these projects, BAM
Nuttall, Clancy, Mott McDonald Bentley, Tilbury Douglas,
MWH Treatment and Network Plus Envolve are
Amplify’s main construction partners, following ahighly
competitive tendering process. They will be supported
by a range of consultancy organisations: Stantec, Long
O’Donnell, and Turner & Townsend will provide project
management; Aecom, ChandlersKBS and Turner &
Townsend will ensure best value for money; while
Aecom, Arcadis, Pell Frischmann, Stantecand WSP will
produce innovative designs.
Supplier reviews and audits.
Code of Conduct for Supply Chain Partners.
Sustainable Procurement Policy.
Formal contracts and framework agreements.
E-procurement and Risk Management platforms.
We are driving alternative ways of working
through our new partnership.
We are adopting a ‘nature first’ approach
andsecuring the best talent and expertise
fromour partners.
Our established mobilisation board is already
working on the delivery of current schemes.
We minimise risk of supplier failure and/
or insolvency through comprehensive due
diligence checks, and continually seek to
strengthen resilience within our supply chain.
Investors
Who they are
We have a range of debt providers, institutional equity investors and retail investors, including customers, following the launch
of WaterShare+, with one in 14 customers in the South West Water region opting to become shareholders.
Around 50% of Pennon’s shares are held by UK-based investors including individuals, pension funds, and charities. Over a third
of the Group’s c.4,000 employees (including SES Water) are shareholders.
Our diverse debt portfolio includes institutional debt investors, lessors and bank debt.
Why we engage How we engage Key challenges and how we are responding
As a publicly listed company, access to
capital and debt markets is vital to fund our
growth. We run an extensive global investor
relations programme to ensure that debt
providers and institutional equity investors,
retail shareholders and research analysts
areinformed of our business, its strategy
and prospects.
Comprehensive institutional equity investor
relationsprogramme.
Engagement with investor representative bodies
including proxy agencies via the Investor Forum.
Our AGM is attended by retail shareholders and
provides them with the opportunity to put questions
to the Board.
Through our unique WaterShare+ scheme, customers
have the opportunity to become shareholders in
Pennon Group, giving customers a stake and a say
intheir water company. Working with our independent
WaterShare+ Customer Advisory Panel gives us an
opportunity to continuously engage our customers
andto share our work and hear feedback on our
business performance and business plans.
We engage with our debt investors through regular
meetings and investor conferences to ensure our lenders
are up to date with our plans and funding strategy.
In October 2023 we submitted our Business Plan
for 2025-30 to Ofwat. We published an Investor
Summary of our plan and held an investor
presentation where we explained our plan
andanswered investor questions.
In January 2024 we announced that we
hadacquired 100% of the holding company
ofSES Water and raised c.£180 million gross,
excluding transaction costs, through an equity
issuance to institutional and retail investors.
An investor presentation was held where we
explained the rationale andbenefits of the
acquisition for the Group andits stakeholders.
In April 2023 South West Water issued its first
syndicated private placement of £300 million.
We met with a number of potential UK and
USinvestors to explain our business and
fundingstrategy.
11Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Pennon, a business that listens and acts continued
Regulators
Who they are
We have an open dialogue and meet regularly with our regulatory bodies: Ofwat, the Environment Agency, the Drinking Water
Inspectorate, Natural England, and the Health and Safety Executive (HSE).
Why we engage How we engage Key challenges and how we are responding
We ensure that our business plans address
ourregulators’ priorities and concerns relating to
our strategy, performance, risks and opportunities,
and delivery for customers.
We also engage with key trade and customer
bodies, including CCW – the voice for water
consumers.
Our independent WaterShare+ Customer Advisory
Panel is now well established and provides reviews
and challenges of all aspects of our business
performance and business plans.
Regular meetings.
Action plans, reports and reviews.
Consultations.
Workshops and our Stakeholder Forum.
One-to-one meetings.
With technological advances and a heightened
focus on the environment, our customers and
stakeholders want us to go further to protect
the environment by assessing and responding
to water quality and water scarcity issues.
Thisisagainst the backdrop of changing
weather patterns, increased growth and
urbanisation, andwider pressures on household
incomes. Weare collaborating with our
regulators to ensure the regulatory framework
can meet these challenges, and support the
identification of the right business plans to
meet current and future needs.
Policy makers
Who they are
We create open and transparent relationships with the widest range of policy makers, from local MPs, who seek to reflect the
priorities of their constituents, to UK government who ultimately set water priorities and policy, through bodies such as the
Department for Environment, Food & Rural Affairs (Defra), Natural England, and the Environment Agency. We engage with
Parliamentary Committees regularly to set the tone of legislative activity, ensuring that Pennon’s voice is heard at the heart
of government. But we don’t just engage with the Government, we work cross-party to ensure that Pennon’s values are heard
across the political divide. In addition, and as a FTSE-listed business, we collaborate with third parties such as the CBI and
Chambers of Commerce, to ensure that the voice of business in the UK isheard.
Why we engage How we engage Key challenges and how we are responding
Water is a precious national resource, requiring
water companies and policy makers to work
together to deliver the best possible outcomes
for the environment, customers and communities.
Asone of the largest employers and businesses in
the Greater South West, we have a responsibility
to support the local economy and support
growth in the region. Working with regional and
national political stakeholders, we are able to talk
about our best-in-class skills agenda to those
across ourarea, delivering vital up-skilling across
the Greater South West as we play our part in
growingthe economy.
We are a member of Water UK, which works
with government, regulators and stakeholders
to develop policy on water and the sustainable
delivery of water services in the UK.
We meet on a regular basis with MPs,
hosting site visits and constituency-based
meetings, as well as events in Westminster.
We also contribute to round table debates
whilst briefing MPs and ministers ahead of
parliamentary debates, setting the narrative
before a word is spoken.
We regularly respond to consultations, such as
the Government’s consultation on wet wipes,
which has seen cross-party promises to ban
non-flushables in the next parliament.
We are one of the founding members of the
Back the South West campaign, and in July
2021, published our response to the G7 legacy,
‘Levelling Up the Great South West’. This has
helped focus our social mobility activity and
recruitment opportunities across the region,
offering varying roles and opportunities for the
range of our communities, providing jobs across
our operations and bringing talent and diversity
into the business.
Our sector faces generational change, with
challenges from population growth, climate
change, rising environmental standards from
theEnvironment Act and evolving customer
andpolitical priorities. These challenges will
requirefurther investment, and continuing
evolution of the sector’s regulatory framework,
to be able to flex to meet changing priorities
and meet the needs sustainably, whilst keeping
customer bills low.
We continue to work collaboratively with
policy makers, to ensure we can deliver these
commitments, now and in the future, playing our
societal role as well as investing for the future.
For example, South West Water’s c.£82 million
investment in Green Recovery for the region,
our Net Zero plans to 2030, and our evolving
WaterFit Live programme, which sets out our
plan to improve river and sea health, working
incollaboration with others in the region.
12 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Water quality and resilience
3
new sources in development
including desalination plant
£369.3m
of total Investment in clean water
Storm overflows and pollutions
2,732m
3
of storage increases
£213.6m
of total Investment in wastewater
Water quality and resilience –
Increasing water resources
In 2022/23 we announced our approach to breaking the cycle
of drought in the South West which would be achieved through
enhancing our supplies across Devon and Cornwall as well as targeting
water efficiency. These measures are part of a £125 million shareholder
injection and would bring an increase in resources in Cornwall and
Devon by 45% and 30% by 2025.
During 2023/24 we have broken the drought cycle with our strategic
reservoirs reaching 100% peak capacity in early April 2024 – a third
ofthis storage was achieved through our interventions.
A new supply at Gatherley was delivered in the year (adding to the
Lydpumping scheme last year), reaching our 30% target for Devon.
We have also achieved 30% in Cornwall with the completion of a
new 22km pipeline network and raw water pump station at another
redundant quarry in Mid-Cornwall, named Blackpool Pit. This new
pipeline network and pump station will supply raw water straight
to Cornwall’s strategic water treatment works in Lostwithiel.
Theabstraction pontoon at Blackpool Pit is pictured opposite.
We continue with our investments at Porth Rialton and desalination
todeliver the remaining 15% for Cornwall.
How we act
2023/24 investment highlights
Financial year 2023/24 has seen our largest in-year capex investment to date coupled with the first phase of funding to enable the creation of Pennon Power.
Here are some of our Group highlights mapped against our four strategic priorities:
£
Net zero and environmental
gains
4
Solar Sites acquired
£59m
of Investment
Addressing affordability and
delivering for our customers
23,000
Customers moved onto social tariffs
in the year
£18.3m
of financial support to customers
13Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Beals Mill
New rising main control infrastructure
Beals Mill has historically been a site where we have experienced
our highest number of spills; hence it was at the top of our list of
engineering priorities this year.
A number of interventions to reduce infiltration of groundwater into
the sewer network have been completed in the year. These include
thereplacement of the rising main on the network, the rehabilitation
of31 manholes within the area and 600 million of new sewer lining.
Attention now moves to ancillary works, to ensure the full spill
reduction benefits are achieved.
Bere Alston
Bere Alston Wastewater Treatment Works
The investment at Bere Alston has focused on reducing groundwater
infiltration into the sewer network and removing the flow of surface
water from the combined drainage and sewer network in the area.
Works included the installation of 1,640 million of new sewer
lining, the rehabilitation of 60 manholes, 245 dig-down repairs to
pipework andthe separation of three areas of surface water from the
combinedsystem.
Hatherleigh
New storage tank installed at our Hatherleigh site with a capacity of 120m
3
Prior to the project being completed the site had no existing storm
storage. Following agreement with the Environment Agency, a
below-ground storm tank with a capacity of 120m
3
was installed at the
end of Q1 2023; this was a year ahead of the original regulatory deadline.
As part of the programme a new inlet pumping station control kiosk
andinstrumentation for the storm tank were also installed.
The investment has led to a c.90% year-on-year reduction in spills
incalendar year 2023, with this trend continuing into Q1 2024.
Thisissetagainst a backdrop of increasing frequency and volume
ofrainfall sinceinstallation.
Chittlehamholt
New balancing tank installed at our Chittlehamholt site with a capacity
of 62m
3
Completed at the end of Q4 2023, the project comprised the
installation of a balancing tank to reduce flows during periods of high
rainfall, and an intervention to remove an unpermitted connection
tothe sewer network which materially increased flow into the system.
The combination of the investment made and action taken by South
West Water has led to a c.70% year-on-year reduction in spills in
Q12024.
Storm overflows and pollutions – increasing storm storage capacity
andreducing infiltration
Pennon, a business that listens and acts continued
14 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Storm overflows and pollutions –
WaterFit Live
Addressing affordability and delivering for our customers - water poverty
model and affordability toolkit
To achieve our target of eradicating water poverty by 2030, we have worked with CACI and ICS to develop a water poverty model, supported by an
extensive suite of data, allowing us to identify with high levels of probability those customers who are in water poverty and in need of our support.
To deliver this we have announced our largest ever package of support, of over £200 million by 2030.
We launched Waterfit Live ahead of the 2023 bathing season, to give
customers more information about the impact of our wastewater
network on their local beach. Our interactive beach maps provide a live
view to see if a storm overflow is in operation at their local beach and
the potential for it to be temporarily affecting bathing water quality.
Alongside the map, we have also shared information about the bathing
water quality at that beach, the improvement over time, and the work
we are undertaking to further enhance water quality at our bathing
waters through our WaterFit programme.
Our community engagement programme has responded to interest
around the near-real-time information we have been sharing on storm
overflows, by holding both online and face-to-face events with local
communities such as Exmouth, Harlyn Bay and Lyme Regis.
As well as giving customers the opportunity to challenge us, these
roadshows have allowed us to explain our short- and long-term
plans, provide data on sampling in their local area and explain how
we manage the impact of new developments on our network. We
also gathered feedback from local communities that will help shape
investment priorities and the way in which we continue to engage with
them in the future.
This includes:
Proactive auto-enrolment of customers onto tariffs to remove them
from water poverty.
Affordability toolkits to give customers flexibility in how they
receivesupport.
Taking a water-efficiency-first approach.
Working with partners to ensure we engage with and
supportcustomers.
Using this tool, we have already identified those in water poverty
and begun to auto-enrol these customers onto support tariffs. In the
South West Water area, we auto-enrolled 8,000 customers onto our
WaterCare tariff in 2022/23 and a further 18,000 in 2024/25; with more
customers set to benefit into 2025 and beyond.
Our approach to helping those in water poverty is supported by our
affordability toolkit. This provides a range of options to help customers
lower their water bill, including switching to a metered tariff, payment
breaks, water efficiency advice and home visits, low tariffs and help with
managing debt.
15Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Net zero and environmental gains -
Pennon Power, Fife
In April 2023, Pennon Power acquired its first renewable energy site
fordevelopment in Dunfermline, Fife. The site comprises a 45MWp
solar farm, with a 30MW 2-hour co-located battery storage system,
situated on the site of a former open-cast coal mine. The annual
generation from this single asset will be equivalent to the entire current
Group renewable energy portfolio.
Since acquisition, a series of activities have been completed to prepare
the site for construction including design specification, geotechnical
investigations, grid connection designs, planning condition discharge
and identifying an EPC contractor to build the site.
Construction contracts were signed in early 2024, and the site is
currently working towards commissioning of the solar array in late
2024, with the battery storage unit connecting in Q1 2025.
Groundworks pull-out testing conducted in preparation of construction
of the solar array.
How we are preparing for the future
We are not just focused on meeting the immediate challenges we face. CREWW, is a 25-year research partnership between South West Water and the University
of Exeter (UoE). It builds on many years of collaboration between the two organisations including our catchment management programme, Upstream Thinking
(first pioneered in 2006) which has acted as a beacon of change which others in the water sector have followed.
CREWW is bringing together subject matter experts from SWW and UoE,
under one roof, who will combine their knowledge and expertise to undertake
innovative research into some of the most pressing challenges facing both
the business and the water industry. The outcomes will help inform our
operations and enable us to better deliver for our customers, the region and
the environment.
Officially opened in March 2024, the new dedicated, operationally net
zero research facility is underpinned by a £21 million capital and research
investment by South West Water. It is the only water sector partnership
to receive support from the UK Research Partnership Investment Fund
(UKRPIF), as well as being the largest RPIF-sponsored project in the
SouthWest.
CREWW has already begun working on projects including the creation of
a state-of-the-art laboratory which will tackle the scourge of microplastics
in our environment. The project represents an investment of £1.4 million
from South West Water and will initially develop our understanding of
the presence of microplastics in sewage sludge to inform our wastewater
operations. In the long-term, the ambition is to provide guidance and support
to any stakeholders involved in sewage operations, their management or
monitoring, as well as regulators. The project team at CREWW is headed
up by Professor Tamara Galloway, an internationally renowned scientist in
the field of microplastics. Tamara and her team work alongside wastewater
experts from South West Water, including Helen Dobby, the company’s
Headof Environmental Performance.
Susan Davy and Lisa Roberts, Vice Chancellor and CEO, Exeter University,
opening the CREWW building, March 2024
Pennon, a business that listens and acts continued
16 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
The markets in which we operate
Household water sector
The industry was privatised in 1989 in response to the demands for high-
quality water and the need to clean up routine pollution to rivers and seas.
Since then, £200 billion has been invested, catching up the previous decades
of under-investment, improving services and protecting the environment.
Every day, homes and businesses receive a continuous supply of world-class
water – ranked consistently as among the best in the world. Household and
non-household consumers have seen significant improvements to customer
service. And with the installation and upgrade of vital infrastructure across
communities, environmental standards are higher than they have ever been,
with improvements to the quality of rivers, lakes and coastal waters.
This is particularly so in the regions we serve. When South West Water
was privatised, nearly half of all sewage in the region was untreated and
discharged directly into the sea. Testing carried out to assess levels of
harmful bacteria showed bathing water quality was low, with only 28%
passing the most stringent tests. We invested, including through our Clean
Sweep programme, to ensure that world class wastewater services were put
in place for the first time – so that all sewage is now treated through one of
our 655 treatment works.
Privatisation was set alongside the establishment of independent regulators,
which has provided powerful incentives to the industry to innovate and
transform in order to drive efficiency, deliver against the obligations, and
ensure a stable operating environment for investors.
Greater innovation and efficiencies have been delivered alongside record
investment – due to the sector’s stable regulation, which has long attracted
investors. Investors are essential to the sector, providing investment that
has supported record levels of investment whilst keeping bills affordable,
with bills remaining at around £1 a day. Without this investment, all water
companies would collect all expenditure requirements through customer
billson a ‘pay as you go’ basis – which would make bills much more volatile
and higher than they are today.
Consolidation and mergers across the sector over the last 30 years have
provided benefits to customers, setting new benchmarks for the sector.
Today, there are 16 privately owned water companies – of which 11 provide
water and wastewater services and five provide water only services.
Collectively these provide clean water through a mains network that is
340,000km long, and wastewater services through 567,000km of sewers
and6,000 wastewater treatment plants.
Pennon is one of the three FTSE-listed companies that supply water
and wastewater services across England and Wales. Pennon’s group
ofcompanies provides water and wastewater services to a population
ofc.4.24 million across the South of England.
The non-household retail market
The non-household retail market allows up to 1.2 million businesses and
other non-household customers across the country to choose which retailer
they buy water and wastewater services from.
The non-household market operates through a controlled portal operated
by Market Operator Services Limited. This has required the separation
ofthewholesale and retail arms of water businesses.
Pennon Water Services was established to manage the non-household
retailbusiness for Pennon via a retail venture with South Staffordshire
plc. Our reach into non-household has grown from the addition of
Water2Business and SES Business Water to the group.
The power market
Pennon Power is a start-up business, wholly owned by Pennon Group to
generate clean energy. The energy market is regulated by the independent
energy regulator, Ofgem. To date Pennon Power has acquired four projects
in the UK and each site has a capacity less than 50MW which is considered
to be small-scale solar development for planning purposes, this means
planning permission was granted by the relevant local planning authorities.
Each of the projects has attained planning consent and Pennon Power
will construct them. Once operational the projects will generate enough
electricity each year to power c.50,000 homes.
Pennon Power was established to support delivery of the Group’s Net Zero
commitments and to provide financial protection from energy price volatility
whilst providing sustainability financial returns and to contribute towards
Group profitability.
17Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Water companies have a vital role in society, operating in the public interest to ensure safe and reliable water and wastewater services for all.
As a provider of water and wastewater services, we are subject to regulation on price and performance by economic, quality and environmental regulators.
Thisregulatory framework is designed to safeguard the best interests of customers and the environment.
Defra sets the overall water and sewerage policy framework in England, while our regulators focus on specific aspects including water and sewerage policy,
economic, environmental, drinking water quality and the customers we serve.
The water sector regulatory framework
Our regulators
Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs (Defra)
Defra sets the overall policy framework in England, including the environmental and service requirements.
Climate change, growth, consumer expectations, and macroeconomic trends all impact on the policies
that Defra sets.
Ofwat
Ofwat is the economic regulator, with duties to protect the interests of consumers, and ensure companies can
carry out their functions, and ensure companies can finance their functions – through promoting efficiency,
innovation, competition and economic growth.
Environment Agency (EA)
The EA is the environmental regulator focused on protecting and improving the environment.
It is also responsible for managing and reducing flood risk. The EA is a principal advisor to Defra
on the water environment.
Drinking Water Inspectorate (DWI)
The DWI is the drinking water quality regulator, with responsibility for ensuring that companies supply
wholesome water that is clean and safe to drink.
Consumer Council for Water (CCW)
CCW represents the needs of customers, and supports customers who have complaints about their
water company.
Natural England
Natural England is the government’s advisor on the natural environment, with the aim to protect and improve
the natural environment.
Market Operator Services Limited (MOSL)
The non-household retail market allows up to 1.2 million businesses and other non-household customers
across the country to choose which retailer they buy water and wastewater services from. MOSL manages
the day-to-day running of the non-household retail market, ensuring that wholesalers and suppliers who trade
in the competitive market work together effectively.
Our regulatory positioning
What we do now is crucial in terms of delivering plans now and planning
forthe future. And, as we operate at the forefront of the changing regulatory
water markets, we remain well placed to respond to change and to identify
further growth opportunities.
Our strategy is to be a responsible leader for the regions we serve today
and every day. Our vision is to create collaboration opportunities and drive
transformational changes through innovation across the value chain of the
water sector.
We are focused on demonstrating leadership within the water sector.
Attheheart of this is how we manage water and the water cycle.
We are pioneering new technologies and methods to improve customer
service, efficiency and resilience while working closely with industry peers,
as appropriate, and with our supply chain, to identify and implement best
working practices across all areas of the business:
We are continuing to upgrade and modernise our networks and assets
toaddress climate change and accommodate a growing population.
We are leveraging digital technology to better monitor and understand
factors that impact water quality and availability, enhancing our ability
totrack and understand consumption to support customer engagement
and affordability, optimising performance, and to understand and prioritise
the innovations in water quality management.
We are learning more about the use of nature-based solutions which
restore or imitate natural processes – such as improving water storage by
creating smart ponds or restoring peatlands. We see these as mainstream,
scalable options for water management.
We are exploring opportunities to build water resilience through non-
climate-dependent water sources, such as repurposing quarries and
wastewater treatment and reuse – with only a fraction of wastewater
currently reused this is important area for future development.
With the opportunities that we see, we welcome the development of market
mechanisms within the sector to drive innovation and value for customers,
the environment and stakeholders.
18 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Our Future Plans: 2025 to 2030
The five-yearly business
planning cycle
Every five years, we submit our future plans to the economic regulator, Ofwat.
Our business plans set out our investment proposals, performance
improvements and targets, the benefits of our plans for customers and
communities, and the impacts on customer bills.
In October 2023 all 16 regional companies submitted their business plans
to Ofwat as part of the 2024 Periodic review of prices (PR24), covering
the period 2025-30 (AMP8). This saw an unprecedented £96 billion of
investment planned for AMP8 – a near-doubling of the £51 billion of AMP7.
Our plan for the South West
In October 2023 we shared our Plan for
Change 2025-2030.
Our PR24 Business Plan represents a step-change in our long-term strategic
approach. It includes a clear outline for all stakeholders of our purpose and
strategic ambition, and our priorities for the next 25 years and five year focus.
This has reinforced how we will prioritise, plan and manage for the future
and ensure that we are focused on things that matter the most to people,
communities and the local economies where we operate.
Our plan 2025-2030 is a no surprises plan, as we continue to do what we
said we would. It’s a plan that goes further in tackling the biggest challenges
in our region, as we invest to protect water quality and enhance resilience,
tackle storm overflows at our beaches, eradicate pollutions and protect
theenvironment from climate change.
Our £2.8 billion investment will create c.2,000 jobs in the region, as we
commit to providing 1,000 apprentices and graduate opportunities to 2030.
It will provide much needed job security in the wider supply chain across
theregion. It’s also a balanced plan, between water and wastewater, and one
we are well placed to deliver. To further bolster our best-in-class approach
toaccountability, we are developing our new Environmental Advisory
Panel to hold us to the same high standards as our WaterShare+ Customer
Advisory Panel protecting customer interests.
Overall this plan has received strong support that we should invest more,
with universal agreement that the priorities are the right ones. We therefore
consider that it meets Ofwat’s quality and ambition assessments, with an
outcome framework anchored in customers’ expectation and aligned with
Ofwat’s objectives for PR24.
In summary, our 2025-2030 business plan is a plan building on the
momentum we have today, and which goes further in tackling the biggest
challenges in our region, as we invest to protect water quality and resilience,
tackle storm overflows at our beaches, eradicate pollutions and protect the
environment from climate change. With a laser like focus on efficiency, it is
also a plan that supports customer affordability. Our £2.8 billion investment
isan ambitious plan, the right plan, and the right deal for our region.
The next steps in PR24
In October 2023 all companies submitted their business plans to
Ofwat following 18 months of analysis and engagement. Ofwat
will issue its PR24 Draft Determinations in June, and its Final
Determinations in December.
Ofwat’s timetable for PR24:
2023
2
nd
October
Submitted our business
plans toOfwat
2024
12
th
June
Ofwat issues Draft
Determinations (DD)
14
th
August
Company written response
to the DD
September
Company representation
meeting on the DD
December
Final Determinations issued
19Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Delivering 1,000
apprenticeships
and graduates
Doubling our
investment to
£2.8 billion
90,000
WaterShare+
customers
250,000
customers
engaged
Quadrupling
oursupply chain
Creating 2,000
jobs
Water quality and
resilience
Water quality and
resilience
Upgrading a third of water
treatment works across our
region and investing in two
new treatment works in Bristol,
alongside the completion of
Bournemouth’s state-of-the-art
ceramic new treatment works.
Resurrecting plans for the
Cheddar 2 reservoir to boost
water resources in the Greater
South West.
Creating a water grid to ensure
all our strategic reservoirs
areconnected, ensuring we
can move resources across
theregion.
Reducing leakage levels to less
than 10% on our network and
less than 4% on customers’
networks.
Storm overflow and
pollutions
By 2030, we will have tackled all
storm overflows at our bathing
beaches, shellfish waters
and high-spilling sites given
the importance of tourism to
ourregion.
In the meantime, and to restore
confidence in our bathing
waters, we will implement a first-
of-its-kind monitoring regime
so everyone can feel they can
enjoy being in the water at their
favourite beach.
We are implementing our
“GreenFirst” approach to
investment, working with nature
to improve drainage and reduce
storm overflows.
Addressing
affordability and
delivering for
customers
Addressing affordability
anddelivering for customers
Importantly, in a cost of living
crisis, we appreciate how
unwelcome it is for any bills to
increase. In response, we have
challenged ourselves to ensure
that the necessary increases
are fair. The Board has pledged
to extend our commitment to
ensure zero customers in water
poverty to 2030.
Delivering our largest ever
package of support with over
£200 million of affordability
measures.
Expanding our unique
Watershare+ scheme to one
inevery 10 households.
Introducing a range of fair tariffs
to help customers use less and
save more.
Storm overflow and
pollutions
Net zero and
environmental
gains
Net zero and
environmental gains
We will continue with our
‘Promise to the Planet’ to
become Net Zero by 2030 by
decarbonising our operations,
and reducing emissions of
nitrous oxide and repurposing
methane.
Expanding our nature recovery
programme - extending
Upstream Thinking into new
catchments, planting 300,000
trees and re-naturalising
waterways for wildlife – working
with nature to build resilience.
Transforming sludge treatment
processes to protect rivers.
£
Price Review 2024 (PR24) investment highlights
Our Future Plans: 2025 to 2030 continued
Our strategic priorities
Customer driven plan
Our customers have been at the heart of developing our Business Plan for 2025 to 2030; to this end, we have had more direct feedback and engagement than
ever before and we have listened to the views of more than 250,000 customers. These interactions have led to the creation of our four strategic priorities.
20 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Each and every day we operate a water recycling system for the region.
Over 30 years we have invested more than £13 billion in the areas we serve,
innovating to deliver world-class drinking water, cleaner, safer bathing
beaches and more reliable services. We have also supported nature to
thrive and pioneered ways to give our customers a say in our business and
a share in our success – all for a little over £1 a day.
Our Strategic Direction to 2050 sets out our ambition for this water system
for the next 25 years. It sets out the leadership and action we will take,
the action needed from others, and the opportunities we must collectively
grasp if we are to ensure high-quality, reliable and resilient water services
for future generations.
Significant challenges lie ahead and some are very real today. Between now
and 2050 we are striving to provide the services society needs, expects
and values.
Over the next 25 years we will invest to address storm overflows into
beaches and rivers, minimise nutrients in rivers, innovate to remove
plastics from sludge and maximise the beneficial use of sludge, achieve net
zero, data transparency, decommission lead pipes, protect supplies from
emerging contaminants, achieve world class leakage levels, build drought
resilience, ensure affordable bills for all and do our bit to address the
environmental crisis. We are truly on a journey to a water and wastewater
system that we can all be proud of.
Sequencing and balancing this investment is a great challenge, and we
have long term adaptive plans to make sure that we tackle the biggest
challenges and deliver the greatest outcomes first.
Our Ambitions to 2050
As a responsible business we
have set out our Strategic
Direction to 2050, driven by our
purpose, to support the lives of
people and the places they love
for generations to come.
Our aims and outcomes by 2050:
Resilient infrastructure systems – able to withstand the impacts
of changing and more extreme weather patterns and meet
environmentalstandards.
Incentives to innovate – innovation in frontier technologies to drive
efficiency, and to enhance mitigation and adaptation to change.
Working with nature – to manage flows in a different way,
generatingsocio-economic benefits and biodiversity, – rather than
pouring concrete.
Improved water efficiency – conservation is essential for economic
andenvironmental sustainability. Working with others to address water
use across households and industry: agriculture to manufacturing.
Growth and support for local economies – water is an economic driver
that can facilitate growth and development, supporting agriculture,
tourism, manufacturing, energy and mining.
Support for the circular economy – maximising the beneficial use of
waste and ending the use of high grade drinking-quality water to water
gardens and clean driveways – through more local storage and recycling
of rainwater.
Building talent – ensuring our pool of talented, diverse people.
Working with stakeholders – to together deliver transformational
change. The water cycle is a common good, a finite resource, and crucial
segment of our economy, that needs to be protected through multi-
stakeholder approaches to partnerships and investment.
Protect vulnerable customers – maintaining our pledge to end water
poverty by 2025.
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
21Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Our business model
Delivering water services
through...
Our business model is shaped by our purpose: Bringing water to life, supporting the
lives of people and the places they love for generations to come. This means we are
not only seeking to create value for our stakeholders today but reinvesting in our
business in a carefully planned andsustainable way for the future.
1. Renewable energy production
We are building a portfolio of renewable energy projects to secure
c.50% of the Group’s energy.
2. Water resources, treatment and distribution
Ensuring an available and sufficient supply of raw water is critical to
ensuring a continuous supply to customers. Our operations play a vital
part in maintaining the level of river flows and their ecological health
– from the level of water we release from our reservoirs into rivers,
tothelevel we abstract and take to our treatment plants. Protecting
the region’s precious natural resources is at the heart of what we do.
We take water from our reservoirs, river and groundwater sources
and transport it to our treatment works, where it is treated to a high
standard using a number of processes. Once the water is clean, safe
and reliable we transport this to customers’ homes and businesses
through our c.29,000km of water pipes.
Bringing water to life – supporting
the lives of people and the places
they love for generations to come
1
2
4
3
3. Services to homes, businesses and wider
communities
We manage an extensive network to deliver uninterrupted supplies to
our customers whilst keeping customers’ bills affordable. Our household
and business retail contact centres are focused on providing excellent
end-to-end customer experiences. From providing water and sanitation,
through to environmental protection, recreational facilities, education,
local jobs and investment for future generations. The services we
provide are essential for the health and economic wellbeing of our local
communities.
4. Wastewater collection, treatment and recycling
We maintain and operate c.23,000km of sewers in the South West
region,removing waste from the homes and properties of our
customers. Through our programme of proactive interventions,
informed by extensive data and AI, we keep our network in the best
possible condition, identifying and repairing issues alongside an
extensive sewer cleaning programme.
We treat wastewater to a high standard at our 655 wastewater
treatment works before returning treated wastewater to the
environment, safely. Bioresources created during the treatment process
are a valuable source of both nutrients and energy and contributes
toacircular economy.
Water resources,
treatment and
distribution
Wastewater collection,
treatment and recycling
Renewable energy production
Services to homes,
businesses and wider
communities
22 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Environmental, social and governance
(ESG) considerations are at the heart of
how we deliver our business model. We
pride ourselves on doing the right thing.
The quality of the services that we provide is of critical importance to our
business, however we place equal weight on how we deliver those services
through strong financial governance, a focus on the environment and
investment in our people – in effect our ESG DNA. In this section, we reflect
of how we have, this year, brought this approach to life.
Firstly, we focus on our approach to ensuring that we are financially
sustainable, both from a balance sheet point of view and in relation to our
ESG responsibilities; next we focus on our environmental delivery strategy
which is central to everything we do; then we look at how we invest in our
4,000 colleagues to ensure they are valued and safe in turn delivering
excellent customer service and driving growth and opportunity in the
regionswe serve.
Strong and ethical financial
governance
We continue to maintain financial resilience underpinned by an ethical
approach, as evidenced by retaining our Fair Tax Mark accreditation and
adherence to our sustainable financing framework.
Financial resilience
Our current gearing is at a relatively low level compared to the sector, and as
we move into the next regulatory period our gearing will benefit from regulatory
true-up adjustments, taking our opening Regulatory Capital Value (RCV)
to c.£5.4 billion excluding SES Water. Through 2025 to 2030 we anticipate
nominal RCV growth of 38% (real – 25%) reflecting our long-term investments
and the value being created for customers, the environment and our investors
of which two thirds are pension savings, and charities, as well as employees and
customers.
Having considered Ofwat’s cost of capital and retail net margins, we have
prepared our plan on that basis. We plan to continue to finance activities
in away that will maintain key financial ratios, consistent with a strong
investment grade rating. We will take a balanced approach to the sharing
How we deliver
Fair Tax Mark
We are proud to have been awarded the Fair Tax Mark for the sixth
year in a row in December 2023.
The Fair Tax Mark accreditation scheme is the gold standard of
responsible tax conduct. It seeks to encourage and recognise
organisations that pay the right amount of corporation tax at the
right time and in the right place. Accredited businesses include
listed companies, co-operatives, social enterprises and large private
businesses.
As a FTSE 250 UK-focused company, Pennon takes its responsibility
to transparency and societal contribution seriously which includes
ensuring it pays the right amount of tax, in the right way, at the right
time.
The Group became the first UK business in the water industry to be
awarded the Fair Tax Mark in 2018 and has now successfully retained
it each year since.
How we deliver value
For investors and the Group
We focus on our approach to ensuring that we are
financially sustainable, both from a balance sheet point
of view and in relation to our ESG responsibilities.
For the environment and our communities
We focus on our environmental strategy, which is central
to everything we do, as evidenced by the fact that the
environment and ‘nature first’ solutions underpin three
of our four strategic priorities.
For our colleagues and customers
We focus on how we manage and work with our 4,000
colleagues to ensure they both feel valued and deliver
excellent customer service.
For our wider stakeholders
We focus on how we communicate, engage and work with
our other key stakeholders namely, our regulators, our
investors, our suppliers and policy makers.
Key resources and relationships
Quality of the services we
provide
Focus on the environment
Our people and investment in
their wellbeing and development
Customer engagement and wider
stakeholder relationships
Strong financial governance
23Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
ofdelivery and operational risks between our shareholders and our
customers. We have set stretching targets and a cost base that assumes
efficiency is delivered to ensure we play our part in making this plan efficient
and affordable. We are confident in our abilities, and well positioned in our
capital delivery capability across the South West. We have appointed new
delivery partners with long-term contracts that can run out to 10 years.
Advance planning for the transition to the plan’s delivery model has been
underway since September 2022, broadening our supply chain alliance,
withpartners already in place and delivering our current plans.
We have considered how else to rebuild trust with our actions. We have
demonstrated restraint in our approach to executive pay and our dividend
policy ensures we take a holistic view of performance including outcomes
forboth customers and the environment.
Sustainable Financing Framework
Created in 2018 and updated in 2021, Pennon Group’s Sustainable Financing
Framework, in alignment with the ICMA Green Bond Principles (GBP), Social
Bond Principles (SBP) and the LMA Green Loan Principles (GLP) and
Sustainability linked loan principles (SLL). Under the Framework, Pennon
Group can issue securities as well as enter into financing relationships to
support investment across the Group’s activities. The Group aims to raise
allnew debt through the framework and in FY23/24 the proportion achieved
was c.80%.
Investing in our environment
The environment and nature first solutions underpin three of our four
strategic priorities set out in our K8 Business Plan evidencing our
commitment to improving our communities and in turn the lives of our
customers. We have delivered against this commitment in a multitude
ofways as set out below.
Collaborating for nature recovery
Pennon is engaged and participating in a range of local and regional public,
private and third sector partnerships tacking action to tackle climate change
and nature recovery, including the local nature partnerships and catchment
partnerships. We also convene forums and events, including our Let’s Talk
Water stakeholder forum, to engage partners and share best practice, reflecting
together on progress and developing shared plans for the future. We are proud
of the delivery partnerships with whom we monitor, collaborate and deliver
ourenvironmental improvement and biodiversity enhancement activities.
Biodiversity enhancement
Catchment management protects and improves river quality and critical
water abstraction sources to provide clean, safe drinking water, reducing
the need for treatment. It is supported by our customers as part of Pennon’s
commitment to protect and enhance the environment in the drinking
water catchments in which we operate. This performance commitment
is designed to incentivise an increase in the area of land under active
improved catchment management as part of the ‘Upstream Thinking’ and
the more recent ‘Green Recovery’ project interventions. The annual target
for Upstream Thinking is 10,000 hectares of new land under active improved
catchment management (50,000 more hectares over the five-year regulatory
period). The Green Recovery programme will deliver a further 10,000
hectares of new land under active management during the four years it will
be active leading up to 2025. In 2023/24 a further 11,854 hectares of land
were added to our Upstream Thinking project whilst a further 3,364 hectares
were added to the Green Recovery programme, resulting in an annual
delivery of 15,218 hectares against an annual combined target of 13,000
hectares. This brings our cumulative position to 126,733 hectares ofnew
areas under active catchment management since April 2015, well overthe
target for this plan period of 123,209 hectares.
Biodiversity compliance
In order for Pennon to avoid pollution harming the most special and rare
habitats and species present across the South West, we have a particular
focus on freshwater locations. This includes sites which are designated as
a Site of Special Scientific Interest, as a Special Area of Conservation, as a
Special Protected Area, or as a County Wildlife Site. During 2023/24, there
were no pollutions events at any of these locations and therefore, as in the
previous three years, the target was met. This outcome supports the Pennon
commitment to achieving the outcomes of the Government Environmental
Improvement plan and its ambitions to improve the condition of all Sites
ofSpecial Scientific Interest in the next ten years.
Preventing biodiversity deterioration
The maritime nature, climate and geography of the South West means
that wildlife and nature are particularly under threat of deterioration from
the presence and spread of invasive non-native species (INNS). INNS can
impact on all aspects of the business with significant operational, compliance,
reputational and financial risks and are considered to be one of the most
significant causes of biodiversity loss globally. We have delivered biosecurity
installations at Pennon sites, to prevent the introduction of new and spread
of existing INNS and over the last year we have accelerated our delivery of
guidance and awareness raising signage which are now installed at 121 sites.
We have also installed biosecurity wash down facilities and are scoping two
further watercraft washdowns. Our exemplar biosecurity wash down facilities
at Roadford, includes a pressure washer for watercraft, an angling dip tank
and a boot scrub.
Putting non-native trees to good use to help restore
damaged peatlands
The Natural Resources Team have removed non-native trees from two
wastewater treatment sites to remove large conifer trees as part of
biodiversity improvements. The trees that have been removed have been
replaced with native broadleaf species such as oak, hazel, lime and rowan
that offer much greater benefits to birds and other species.
The logs from the cut conifer trees have been recycled for use in peatland
restoration work at two South West Water sites – Burrator Reservoir in Devon
and Park Pit in Cornwall. This work is being carried out by the South West
Peatland Partnership, a £13 million project, led by South West Water, which
isdelivering peatland restoration in the South West of England.
The wood removed from the sites has been used by the South West Peatland
Partnership to create leaky wooden dams, or timber rounds, which help to
trap water in the environment, restoring dried and degraded peat bogs. The
work will ultimately help to prevent run-off from the land into the watercourse,
improving water quality in the area and trapping carbon in the landscape.
Our business model continued
Beach clean at Portwinkle - Sept 2023
24 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Investing in our People
As one of the largest employers in the region, with almost 4,000 colleagues,
we have a responsibility and duty to make a positive societal contribution.
Our goal is to be the Employer of Choice across our region through
promoting social mobility, prioritising Diversity and Inclusion by addressing
racial and gender inequality. We provide safe, secure and meaningful
employment where all employees are paid fairly for the work they do and
where trust is high. We want to show that it is a dynamic and exciting time
tobe working in the water industry.
Over the past 10 years our region has seen significant population growth.
It’s been estimated that more people moved to the South West during and
following the pandemic than had been anticipated by 2050. This increase
in population has an impact on many different areas of society, including
employment, housing and opportunities for young people.
With a double coastline and dispersed population, many coastal towns
around the South West suffer from high rates of poverty, unemployment and
health risk factors, together with poor housing and public service provision,
poor public transport and communication connections.
All this goes to show that whilst the greater South West region has
traditionally had a reputation as a well-off area, in reality the picture is far
more complex. This places an even greater responsibility on Pennon, as the
largest private sector employer in the region, and given the wider supply
chain we support.
Our Reward Strategy continues to evolve each year, noting the feedback
we receive from colleagues ensuring it aligns to our People Strategy and
our new Group Values. The key focus for this year has been on supporting
colleagues during the cost-of-living crisis. Prioritising those colleagues that
need it most and bringing forward the employee bonus payments to help
those in most need.
At Pennon we take our social stewardship role seriously, whether that’s
through driving our environmental improvements or growing the number
of jobs we support. Our exciting business plan, submitted to our regulators
this year, targets the creation of 2,000 new jobs as part of a wider £2.8 billion
investment planned across the Greater South West – a doubling of
investment from the first half of this decade. Our business plan fosters our
new Values and aims to have a positive impact on customers, communities,
colleagues and the environment.
Our approach to Human Capital seeks to go further: supporting Community
Investment and social mobility across the Greater South West by creating
education and employment opportunities across our region; ensuring we pay
our employees a fair wage for doing a fair day’s work and therefore be well
placed to be able to make a wider societal contribution; and delivering our
Diversity and Inclusion strategy by prioritising diversity of thought, gender
and ethnicity to promote social mobility and opportunity for all.
This is all part of a wider strategy to be the employer of choice in the region,
and in creating a Great Place to Work.
Colleagues from our Laboratory team
at Countess Wear, Exeter
Our new Group Values
Pennon Group has evolved in recent years, with the sale of Viridor
in 2020, the acquisitions of Bristol Water and SES Water, and the
formation of new divisions including Pennon Power. These changes
created an opportunity to evaluate and refresh our corporate values
that had been in place for some years, resulting in a new set of values
that more properly reflect who the Group is today and represent
ourpeople at their best.
Corporate values are guiding concepts that shape our culture,
behaviour, and decision-making processes. They help colleagues match
their actions and behaviours with the company’s overarching mission
and objectives, giving a framework for how colleagues should engage
with one another, with customers, and with other stakeholders. This will
help strengthen Pennon’s collective values, offer everyone with a set
of authentic and emotive guiding principles, provide clear direction for
supporting behaviours, and distinguish us from the rest of the industry.
It was critical to develop a set of values that not only reflect today’s
business and teams, but are also more than just words on a poster.
Weintended to develop a set of values that are distinctively Pennon,
are interwoven into daily actions, and are consistently demonstrated
byour teams across the Group.
Our new values were developed after intensive involvement and
listening sessions with the Pennon Executive Board, the larger
leadership group, colleague representative groups such as the
employee forum, and comprehensive colleague listening groups. Our
values also incorporate the views of our customers collated during our
biggest ever customer listening exercise conducted during PR24.
Our new values acknowledge a significant shift in how we seek to
deliver our strategic priorities across the Group and are intended to
serve as a unifying thread across all areas of the Group. The goal is
to distinguish ourselves from all other water firms and environmental
infrastructure businesses. The new values will differentiate how we
carry out our plans.
The new values are:
Be you
We want you to bring your best every day.
Be open and inclusive, work together and win
as one team. Let your passion inspire those
around you. Be authentic, make your mark
and be you.
Be rock solid
We want you to be the one we all look up to.
Be trusted. Act with integrity and make good
on your promises. Build trust, one relationship
at a time. Be rock solid.
Be the
Be the future
We encourage you to be curious and challenge
convention. Share ideas with confidence and
purpose, and help share our future. Embrace
change. Drive progress. Own the challenge.
Bethe future.
25Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Speak Up
Our Speak Up whistleblowing policy continued to operate throughout the
year, providing another engagement channel. Speak Up helps to create an
open, transparent and safe working environment, where employees feel able
to speak up and are supported if they do so. Read more on Speak Up on
page 143 in the Corporate Governance report.
Additionally, all employees are invited to pose questions or comments to our
senior leaders through our new ‘open door’ communication channels. This
new approach brings together several employee communication channels
and encourages employees and senior leaders to keep connecting more.
Enhancing our employee communications
Each year, we review and seek to enhance our employee communications
and engagement channels.
Our regular Big Chat video calls with our CEO and the executive team
continue to be very well supported by employees, with strong engagement.
Items discussed largely focus on the topical business issues of the time plus
key employee highlights. We have also broadened the group of speakers,
involving colleagues from all areas and levels across the company.
Our Time to Talk sessions focus on a broad range of topics and are
supported by many external specialist speakers and facilitators. Topics
discussed include mental health, the cost-of-living crisis, financial wellbeing,
apprenticeships and business-specific initiatives including nature and
catchment management.
Our internal communications tool and discussion platform, Viva Engage, is
growing in popularity and is now used regularly by over 2,000 Group employees.
For our remote teams working tirelessly around the clock, we host regular
breakfast meetings supported by our senior leaders. These have proved to
be helpful in promoting more effective two-way communication with front-
line operational teams.
WaterWorks is the name given to the monthly performance measures
dashboard, which helps employees keep updated on how we are delivering
for our customers, communities and the environment. It’s important that all
our employees are regularly updated on these critical measures regardless of
which part of the Group they work for.
Talent development
We have a strong commitment to investing in the development of our
employees and in building and recognising talent across the Group. Training
and development are available for employees at all levels within the Group
and all are actively encouraged to participate. Our aim is to increase
productivity, job satisfaction and safety, and to equip the next generation
of leaders and employees with appropriate knowledge, skills and the
competencies they need to thrive.
Our business model continued
Launch of our Reciprocal Mentoring Programme -
Dec 2023
Immersing the organisation
A complete Values launch programme has been established to ensure that
the values are followed as guiding principles by all colleagues. This began
inJanuary 2024 and will continue through 2025.
To properly embed the values, we need behavioural change accompanied by
a new structure for recruitment, induction, performance management, and
reward. Setting the tone from the top is also important in ensuring that these
principles are reflected across the company and the Group.
To ensure a successful launch and embedding of the new values, as well
as to accelerate our cultural transformation, the strategy includes the
development of a behavioural framework and training, both in workshop
format for leaders and e-learning for all colleagues. This supporting training
component will ensure that all colleagues understand what the values
mean and how their actions at work affect performance. Senior executives
will participate in face-to-face workshops as part of a series of leadership
sessions held throughout the year.
An internal communication campaign will also continue for several months
through all business areas, informing colleagues about what each of the
values implies, how they can bring these to life, and where they will see the
values interwoven into daily company operations.
Across the Group we have developed a coherent approach to leadership,
culture, talent, and skills development which will not only help us unlock the
full potential in our business, ensuring we are match fit today, but also in
anticipation of future challenges.
Ensuring our people are at the heart of all these key areas of focus will mean
we continue to successfully deliver for all our customers and stakeholders
that rely on us. Our people are our greatest asset. We are proud of the values
we live by in all that we do and we have been delighted in how our employees
have risen to the challenges we have faced throughout the last year and in
going above and beyond to deliver for our business and our customers.
We continue to work to develop strong relationships with our employees
and Trade Union Partners, ensuring we are engaging with these important
stakeholders in our business in all aspects of our People Strategy.
As a purpose-led organisation, Pennon has strong values and ethics which
are important barometers in fostering the culture and beliefs that we require
to be successful. One of the key reasons why we use Great Place to Work
to survey our employees is that it is one of the few providers that seeks to
measure values and ethics. These are notoriously difficult areas to measure
as they are impacted by individual’s personal values and ethics. See page 119
on how the Board monitors culture.
Great place to work
To enhance our Great Place To Work (GPTW) Colleague Survey, we have
introduced pulse surveys during the year to give colleagues additional
opportunities to provide structured feedback during the year. The pulse
surveys provide a regular stream of feedback in additional to the full survey
which we conduct annually. We are delighted to be recognised as a Great
Place To Work and continue to work hard to keep engaging and supporting
our employees to enable them to be able to bring their best to work and
to ensure we are creating the best work environment and supporting
themappropriately.
Listening and acting on employees’ views
Under the Financial Reporting Council’s (FRC) code of standards, companies
are required to explain how they are incorporating employee views in Board
decisions. You can read more on how the Board is engaging and making
decisions in our Section 172(1) statement on pages 128 and 129.
26 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc26 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
As a business we joined the 5% Club, an organisation with over
1,000 members that aims to address the issue of poverty arising from high
youth unemployment and a shortage of the right skills for the workplace of
today and tomorrow. For the second year running, we were delighted to be
awarded Gold Membership status of the 5% Club as we have around 10%
of our employees undertaking apprenticeships or on a formal structured
graduate programme. We are the only utility sector company to achieve the
Gold Membership accolade and have done so for two years. Achieving Gold
status demonstrates our long-term commitment to investing in structured
apprenticeship and graduate programmes for our employees.
Apprenticeships
We are delighted that one of our apprentices, Meg Ginsberg, was awarded a
Special Recognition Award at the National Apprenticeship Awards for being
an outstanding apprentice and ambassador. Meg is a Project Management
Apprentice in our Engineering Department. Despite being a wheelchair user,
nothing holds Meg back and she thrives in this role, leading by example and
promoting apprenticeship and women in engineering at every opportunity.
We have a long-standing commitment to apprenticeships. After doubling
our commitment and target for apprenticeships where we now pledge to
support 1,000 roles by 2030, we are delighted to report we are ahead of
schedule and have welcomed 470 since 2020. Attracting and developing
thenext generation of talented employees is vital in building resilience in our
workforce and ensuring we can deliver the essential services our customers
and communities deserve.
Our graduate programme
After launching our new graduate programme in 2021 and setting a
long-term commitment to recruit 100 graduates, we have doubled this
commitment to now support 200 new graduates on a structured two-year
development programme by 2030.
Since the launch, the graduate programme has recruited 85 talented
graduates, with 55% being female and over half being ethnically diverse or
international graduates. Attracting larger numbers of female and ethnically
diverse employees has been a core part of our People Strategy. We are
delighted our graduate programme is helping deliver this outcome whilst
providing high-quality career opportunities for all these individuals.
Leadership development
We continue to invest in our leaders and, utilising our ‘Best of the Best’
mindset following our integration with Bristol Water, we have rolled out
two leadership programmes across the business, LEAD Aspire and LEAD
Programme.
LEAD Aspire is a four-day programme for employees who have been
recognised as being a leader of the future and are working towards this
as part of their personal development plan. The programme allows them
to develop their leadership mindsets and approaches, explore leadership
theories, models and best practices, and learning that you don’t need a title
to be a leader. The four-day programme also has senior leaders from across
the business sharing their thoughts on leadership, providing great insight
into their personal experiences of leadership and how it has shaped them.
Our LEAD Programme is for our current manager and leadership population
to help them hone their leadership skills, working across a six-month
programme on leadership mindset, such as personal impact and purpose-
led leadership and skills areas such as coaching and mentoring, inclusive
leadership, and building high-performing teams.
Throughout 2023/24, we delivered 20,000 training days, ensuring that
onaverage each employee received 50 hours of training – 7 days.
Prioritising health and wellbeing
Our wellbeing strategy is a core area in our People Strategy to ensure our
people know that we care about them. It is estimated that in any given week,
one in six people of working age experiences a common mental health
problem like stress, depression or anxiety. Most of us will understand,
from personal experiences or friends and family, the huge personal cost
that this can bring.
Separately, data from Champion Health, our online wellbeing platform
provider, supports the outcomes from the Great Place to Work survey. 93% of
employees who completed the health assessment were motivated to change,
with their three key areas being improving energy levels, reducing stress and
improving mental wellbeing.
Our wellbeing strategy focuses on the following four main
areas:
Mental
Taking care of our minds, coping effectively with life and
creating satisfying relationships.
Physical
Taking care of our bodies, acknowledging the importance of
activity, nutrition and sleep.
Financial
Taking care of our financial wellbeing, being in control over
ourfinancial future.
Community
Encompassing the major external and internal factors such
associal health.
Our approach to wellbeing, incorporates a number of initiatives including:
Mental Health First Aiders: We have trained over 100 Mental Health
First Aiders across the Group – one for every 40 employees, ahead of our
target of one for every 50 employees.
Wellbeing Champions: We have established a network of wellbeing
champions across the business to help us engage colleagues.
Time To Talk: Regular sessions where colleagues are invited to join online
webinars focusing on a range of health and wellbeing issues, primarily
mental health.
Champion Health: Our Champion Health portal gives colleagues a broad
range of resources, advice and guidance across all areas of wellbeing,
from healthy recipes to fitness regimes, mental health support and health
assessments. It is free to both employees and their families.
FinWell partnership: We have launched a new partnership with FinWell,
a financial wellness organisation, to provide employees with help, support
and advice about their personal finances.
Inside Out partnership: Our close partnership with the Inside Out
Leaderboard provides a tangible way of demonstrating leadership,
commitment and action to the mental health agenda.
EAP Helpline: Our Employee Assistance Programme (EAP) had a 6%
uptake compared to the industry average of 1.39%. The service is also
available for employees’ families.
Our 2023 cohort of graduates
27Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
HomeSafe Bite-size Live event - July 2023
HomeSafe, the Group’s flagship health and safety programme
HomeSafe has targeted three specific areas this year, building on the
foundations delivered last year to drive continued improvements in all health
and safety activities. This focus has seen the Group’s Lost Time Injury
Frequency Rate (employees and agency, excluding contractors) almost halve
in the year, and furthermore seen a 75% reduction in actual lost working days,
delivering an additional 450 productive days back into the business.
The three areas we focused on:
1. Visible Safety Leadership
HomeSafe Live events
i. 17 conferences across Devon, Cornwall, Bournemouth and Bristol.
Led by the Senior Management Team from all departments.
ii. Over 2,300 employees attended fun engaging sessions, with real-life
experiences of the consequences of not ‘Taking Ownership’.
iii. Leaders owning HomeSafe, celebrating success with the intention
ofencouraging others to develop good practice and behaviours.
iv. Leaders hosting safety ‘stand-downs’ to discuss recent events and
immediate lessons to be adopted.
v. The use of external expert speakers delivering real life stories of the
impact of incidents.
vi. A ‘12 days of Christmas’ campaign where each day for 12 days one
department owned a key HomeSafe message for the Group ranging
from simple pictures and messages through to scripted and acted
out videos to engage the audience.
2. Driving a culture of accountability throughout the organisation:
With a focus on over 20 leading indicators, driving up performance
against these areas and embedding these behaviours as the ‘way
wework’.
Building on our 2.2.2 approach to incident reporting and investigating,
ramping up the pace and quality of our response to ensure individuals
were supported immediately in the event of an incident, improvements
identified and shared rapidly across the Group.
3. Using analytics to target interventions on the key areas at the right time
todrive down harm, particularly in manual handling and slips, trips and falls.
These focus areas were supported through the core elements within the
HomeSafe strategy, building our internal competence, elevating our Site
Pride initiative across all areas, strengthening the health and safety team,
achieving ISO45001 accreditation, and implementing a process safety
framework.
The Lost Time Injury Frequency Rate (LTIFR) for employees and agency
staff continues to be the Group’s primary measure of health and safety
performance. Following reductions year on year for the last three years for
the Group, this year we delivered a 46% reduction in actual Lost Time Injury
(LTI) numbers, with 15 LTI’s in the year compared to 28 last year, and an
LTIFR of 0.30 compared to 0.59 last year.
While the number of incidents reduced, we also significantly reduced the
severity and impact of these incidents, through a focus on rapid intervention,
treatment and support to the individual involved, delivering a 75% reduction
in the actual number of days lost due to injury. This means we delivered
anextra 450 productive days back into the business through improved
safety performance.
We continue to broaden the reach of HomeSafe to everyone working for or
on our behalf, and this was in evidence at a joint event between our Bristol
Water Operations team and Network Plus who provide water networks
expertise within Bristol, bringing to life HomeSafe across the broader
supplychain.
While we have delivered year-on-year improvements, we continue to
recognise that HomeSafe is not a project to be completed. It continues to be
the way we work and deliver all our performance commitments. Our roadmap
to HomeSafe 2025 has provided the framework to deliver improved health
and safety performance across the Group.
Over the year we will evolve our strategy, plans and approach to look ahead
to HomeSafe 2030, building on the strong successful elements of HomeSafe
while aligning our strategy to the new Group values, ensuring we support
our people to be the best version of themselves and that everyone goes
HomeSafe every day.
Diversity, equity and inclusion
As one of the largest employers in the Greater South West, we have a
responsibility to promote social mobility, address inequality and drive
inclusivity across our region.
We continue to champion diversity and promote an inclusive workplace.
Wehave published our Gender Pay Gap report for the last six years and are
now pleased that this incorporates our Ethnicity Pay Gap report. These can
both be found on our website: www.pennon-group.co.uk
It is important to be open and transparent about the gender and ethnic
diversity of our employees and this report is a key tool for us to do that,
whilst also allowing us to share the measures we have taken and will be
taking to continue to create a more diverse workforce across all roles and
levels within the organisation.
We understand that fostering an inclusive workplace is imperative for both
attracting and retaining talent within our organisation. As one of the largest
employers in the region, we have a duty to contribute positively within our
communities, providing a work environment that promotes social mobility,
celebrates and drives diversity and inclusion and ensures an equitable
andpsychologically safe space for all our employees.
Our business model continued
28 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Inclusion Week at Pennon - Sept 2023
In the latest edition of the FTSE Women Leaders Report, we have once again
solidified our standing as a trailblazer for female representation, claiming the
bronze position for best performers in the Women on Boards category within
the entire FTSE 250. The report, independently conducted and backed by
the government, is a ringing endorsement of Pennon’s relentless efforts
to lead the charge in fostering equality and inclusivity, with Pennon one
ofthe rare FTSE-listed entities where women on the board outnumber their
malecounterparts.
We are pleased with the recent progress made but know there is more
todoin increasing the diversity of our workforce during the coming year.
Last year, 30% of job applicants were female and similarly 30% were
ethnically diverse. We offer additional support to our new employees on
our graduate programme and the 10,000 Black Interns programme as we
recognise many of them move to the region to start in these new positions.
Employee Led Inclusion
Our Employee Network Groups continue to play a significant role in raising
awareness and driving change. Areas of focus for these groups include
raising awareness around challenges that under-represented groups
face, which has included educating employees on LGBTQ+ topics and
experiences, including a session led by a transgender speaker, celebrating
different cultures and customs through in-person events, sessions on racism
and allyship, promoting understanding of neurodiversity, developing a
webinar on sexism and misogyny and creating an ED&I awareness session,
which is delivered to all new starters to the business.
Recruitment
We continue to develop our careers website to leverage our employer
value proposition and the creative campaign that sits alongside this,
#JustAddWater. We have forged new partnerships with third parties to
enhance and drive our work in the recruitment space to support our ED&I
agenda. In June 2023 we celebrated signing the Armed Forces Covenant
andalso signed up to be a Disability Confident Employer at ‘Committed’
status during the year.
We regularly review our approach to monitoring diversity and inclusion
withaspecific focus on job applications. We use a software gender decoder
tool which allows us to check all our job adverts for masculine bias to reduce
the potential risk of alienating female applicants. We ensure that our brand
imaginary represents both the communities we serve and our workforce,
which encourages more diverse candidates to apply. We are pleased that
we are seeing significant increases in the number of applications we are
receiving from ethnically diverse applicants and women into what is still
amale-dominated industry.
Induction day for some of the 2023 apprenticeship
intake
Gender Diversity dashboard
Pennon is one of only a few businesses in the UK to have both a female
Chief Executive Officer and Chair. The following dashboard shows
abreakdown of gender diversity across the Group.
Gender – Board
Male 3
Female
5
2023/24
38%
62%
Gender – Senior Management
Male 30
Female
18
2023/24
62%
38%
Gender – Employees
Male 2,664
Female
1,246
2023/24
68%
32%
29Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our two new network groups this year, brought about through employee
feedback, are the Veterans Network and the Neurodiverse Network. All of
our groups have members sat on the overall ED&I Steering Group to ensure
collaboration across the whole ED&I agenda and drives communication
between the groups.
We have also introduced flexible bank holidays, as we recognise that half
ofthe UK bank holidays are linked to the Christian calendar, but many of our
employees do not follow the Christian faith. The scheme enables colleagues
to swap traditional bank holidays based on their religious or cultural beliefs,
or personal need.
Progression
One of our key challenges has been enabling a diverse workforce at all
levels through internal progression. The REACH (Racial, Ethnic and Cultural
Heritage) Network and Women’s Network have both been key drivers in
looking at how we can better support them with career progression across
the organisation.
This year we launched our Women’s Mentoring Programme, which supports
women whether they are seeking professional guidance, building their
network, or navigating their working environment and some of the challenges
it entails. In January, we launched our Reciprocal Mentoring pilot, which
paired eight members of the REACH Network with eight members of our
executive and senior leadership team, with the goal being for individuals
toshare their lived experiences and encourage actionable behaviours from
those involved.
We have also partnered with the Inclusive Village to design a REACH
development programme. The programme is designed to support the career
ambitions of those who may experience career disadvantage orinequalities
due to their racial identity, whilst also enabling Pennon to foster the
realisation of our commitment to the Change the Race Ratio campaign.
This programme will cover a range of career-enabling topics identified by
research as most pertinent in supporting ethnic minorities in the workplace,
including; leveraging line manager and ally relationships, impact and
influence, and developing a credible professional/personal brand.
We will continue to work with these groups in relation to career progression
opportunities, to understand the challenges they face, and how as an
organisation we can address these.
Change the Race Ratio initiative
Back in 2020, Pennon pledged its support to the Change the Race Ratio
initiative, a campaign to increase racial and ethnic participation in the senior
leadership of companies, as a route to encouraging more diversity at all levels
and was the first water company to do so. During the last year, our pledge
and ongoing commitment continued to help shape our business activities
and decisions.
10,000 Black Interns initiative
We are pleased to be a proud supporter and sponsoring business of the
10,000 Black Interns initiative. Over the last two years we have supported
10 placements and are set to support at least 15 for this coming year.
Following successful completion of their internships, most students returned
to university to complete their degrees. We are pleased that so far, four
of our interns have already secured permanent position on our graduate
programme. This important scheme not only offers Black students an
opportunity to understand our business but also to improve the levels
ofethnic diversity across our industry.
Our business model continued
Social Mobility Business Partnership (SMBP) students
visit Pennon - July 2023
30 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Diversity awareness and training
We have continued our programme of unconscious bias training and have
rolled this out to the majority of our senior leadership and hiring managers
during the year. We have held ‘lived experience’ group sessions to understand
what it is like to work at Pennon for employees from minority groups.
Theoutputs have been shared with our Diversity Committee to understand
these perspectives and consider appropriate actions when issues are raised.
Our gender and ethnicity pay gap
In recent years, the composition of Pennon Group has further evolved with
the acquisition of Bristol Water plc and the inclusion of these employees into
the growing Group. This is the second year we have included Bristol Water in
the Pennon Group results and next year will be the first year we include SES
Water. Our mean gender pay gap has remained fairly consistent this year and
stands at 8.51%, but sits lower than the national average of 14.3%. Our median
gender pay gap has seen a decrease of over 1% to 14.4%, indicative of a shift
in the representation of women, notable within the upper quartiles, where
we have seen an uplift from 21.4% to 25.6% in female representation, which
reflects our efforts to enhance female representation at leadership levels.
Since 2022, we have voluntarily produced and published our ethnicity pay
gap, which stands at 11.9%. We know that there is still more for us to do in this
area, including increasing the employee self-disclosure diversity rates across
the Company and continuing to attract more ethnically diverse candidates
atall levels across the Group.
Furthermore, by offering dedicated support to new employees through the
graduate programme and supporting the 10,000 Black Interns Programme,
wehave been able to attract more ethnically diverse applicants. As many of these
applicants are recruited and progress their careers, we anticipate them having
afurther positive impact on our ethnicity pay gap.
A full report breakdown and an update on our performance and plans,
canbefound on our website.
Social mobility
We continue to be a proud signatory of the Social Mobility Pledge and have
set further commitments across the Group during this year to strengthen
our resolve to deliver for our customers and communities and support the
drive to address social injustice. To this end we have become a tier 1 funder
of the registered charity Social Mobility Business Partnership and launched
work experience clusters in Exeter and Bristol with Plymouth, Truro and St
Austell to follow later this year. During the FY23/24 year we have doubled our
commitment to apprentice and graduate recruitment and set new targets to
support 1,000 apprentices and 200 graduates on structured programmes
by 2030. We have set a new commitment and target to offer 5,000 work
placements for young people by 2030, significantly growing our previous
work in this area. We believe this initiative is vitally important in helping young
people understand our Company and the water industry, and supporting them
in their early careers.
Slave-Free Alliance membership
Pennon has maintained its membership of the Slave-Free Alliance, which is part
of Hope for Justice, the global anti-slavery charity. Our membership demonstrates
our commitment to the highest employment standards for both our direct
employees and those within our supply chain. Our Modern Slavery Report is
published annually and can be found on our website www.pennon-group.co.uk.
Human rights
We are fully supportive of the principles set out in the UN Declaration of
Human Rights, and the Group ethics policy outlines the high standards
of employment practice with which all employees of Pennon Group are
expected to comply. The Group also supports the International Labour
Organisation’s core conventions for the protection and safety of employees
wherever they may work throughout the Group. These standards are
also embedded in our sustainable supply chain and documented in our
procurement policy and Code of Conduct for supply chain partners.
Pennon welcomes SES Water to the Group
Pennon is delighted to welcome SES Water colleagues to the
growing Pennon Group and looks forward to working with them
all during the coming year.
In 2024/25, SES Water will continue to deliver in line with their
People Plan, the three priority areas being - Building capability
for the future, Developing a culture that thrives and Enabling our
business to be future ready.
SES Water invest in their people through learning, development,
effective communications, reward and recognition. Unlocking
the potential of all their people by investing in their skills
development, leadership capability, professional development,
creating a performance management culture, and opportunities
for career progression through internal transfers and promotions.
Throughout 2023/24 SES Water delivered 934 training days,
in addition to those studying an apprenticeship or professional
qualification.
In the past year, a new Working Group was established, aligned
with the key themes of diversity, inclusion, wellbeing, the
environment, and health and safety. By adopting this collaborative
approach and a new internal communications plan, more
opportunities have been made available for everyone to get
involved with the activities they are most enthusiastic about and
brings the Company purpose to life.
Finally, making work life easier for colleagues through investment
in new physical equipment and the HR digital transformation
programme is fundamental to being ready for the future. SES
Water has upgraded their people systems and processes from an
online Welcome Portal for new colleagues during the recruitment
process to sickness and absence management, digital
correspondence and learning management.
SES Water has long term commitments in the arena of social
responsibility and wants their people to feel they can make a
difference working as part of a business set in the heart of the
community they serve.
A new Working Group was established in 2023/24 which
collaborates with many stakeholders to create an internal
events calendar for the year, aligned with our purpose and our
People Plan. This has provided colleagues with opportunities
toparticipate in events and support some great local causes.
467
SES Water employees
36%
Female employees
7.1%
Mean gender pay gap
153
Colleague volunteering days
(As at 31
st
March 2024)
31Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our operational review
We are making progress in the areas that matter most, focusing
onour four priorities and delivering for customers, communities
and the environment.
Investing to secure resilience, now and into the future
Across the Group we are trusted to provide a clean, safe and reliable water
supply to c.3.5million people across Bristol, Bournemouth, Devon, Cornwall,
the Isles of Scilly and parts of Dorset. The health of our environment is
intricately linked to the state of our water supply, so as we look to ensure
robust supplies into the future, we focus on protecting the environment from
which we take raw water to be treated and put into supply.
Building water resources
Delivering a resilient water service requires us to invest smartly in securing
new sources of supply as well as reducing the demand placed on our
infrastructure. Our twin-track approach has been to invest in new resources
and accelerate plans for improvement, whilst seeking to tackle leakage and
reduce customer demand.
Our programme to diversify the Group’s portfolio of water resources in Devon
is now complete, with two thirds of the programme of work in Cornwall also
complete. Wet weather through 2023/24 has benefited our storage position
augmenting the investments that have contributed one-third of the gains
tostrategic storage in the region, with the early achievement of 100% storage
for our strategic reservoirs ahead of 31
st
March 2024.
Supply Schemes
Construction work at Blackpool Pit is now complete which brings our
portfolio of repurposed quarries to four. Blackpool Pit, along with Stannon,
Park and Hawks Tor, have all been used this year to support an improvement
in water resources in Cornwall. In Devon, our winter pump storage work at
Gatherley is also now operational, and along with the Lyd pumping scheme
delivered last year, both new schemes have been used this year to support
improvement in our water resources in Devon.
In addition to these, our desalination plant in South Cornwall is on track
to be operational in 2024/25 and our Porth Rialton water abstraction and
treatment scheme will be operational under its winter licence in 2024/25.
With these projects, we are improving the long-term resilience of the region
following a year-long drought in 2022/23.
We are on track to reach our target of a 45% increase in Cornwall water
resources by 2025, having already achieved our targeted 30% increase
inDevon water resources one year ahead of schedule.
In Bristol, supply levels remain in surplus but our long-term plans include
investment in Cheddar 2 Reservoir which will support resources across
thewider South West region.
Water quality
Compliance Risk Index (CRI)
The Compliance Risk Index score as reported by the Drinking Water
Inspectorate (DWI) measures water quality compliance.
Our CRI score for South West Water of 3.02 is slightly higher than last year
but is again likely to be better than the industry average. We continue to
make progress through our ‘Quality First’ programme with investment at
our Water Treatment Works and there were no failures in the treatment
processes in 2023. Our performance is above target and has been impacted
due to higher incidents on our networks, particularly at consumer taps
following network burst events. We have implemented an enhanced mains
flushing programme to mitigate this risk further.
In Bristol, our CRI performance remains challenging for the region, and
performance for Bristol was a score of 7.05. Our investigations have identified
the condition of the treated water tank and a valving arrangement as
the likely causes for these failures. While we have implemented remedial
actions, longer-term improvements are required within our future regulatory
investment programmes.
Further enhanced maintenance and resilience improvements are being
delivered across our Bristol water treatment works with specific sites
targeted for improvement. Consistent with our action plan published for
South West Water, we are rolling out our Quality First programme in Bristol,
targeting key areas for improvement, which includes tank cleaning and
mainsflushing.
Water Quality and Resilience
32 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Water Quality Upgrades
As part of our business plan to 2025 we committed to building two state
ofthe art treatments works in the Bournemouth area and work is progressing
well at Alderney and Knapp Mill following planning permission being
achieved at this site during the year. We are on track to achieve water into
supply at Alderney by March 2025, and customers will then benefit from the
enhanced ceramic membrane treatment. In addition, upgrades at four works
in Devon and Cornwall are also progressing well with investments made
toreduce manganese and install Granular Activated Carbon Treatment.
Taste, smell and colour contacts
We recognise that consumers expect their drinking water to look and taste
great and that this is important in maintaining consumers’ trust in the quality
of our supplies. We continue to invest in all aspects of our operations from
source to tap to maintain that trust.
South West Water contacts at 1.66 per 1,000 population, have increased
slightly compared to last year, and are outside the performance commitment
target for this year. This increase in contacts has followed a continued
temporary suspension on maintenance flushing of the drinking water
network during the periods of temporary use restrictions, following the
drought in 2022, which in some areas lasted until September 2023.
Bristol has separate regulatory targets for taste and smell contacts, as
well asseparate targets for appearance contacts. 2023 saw improved
performance in both of these metrics and there has been a substantial
reduction in water quality contacts over this reporting period. The target
fortaste and smell was achieved reflecting the Company’s focus in this area,
with a systematic flushing programme which is helping to alleviate those
tastes and smells that may develop in the mains water before it reaches
thecustomer. Although the appearance metric was missed, this year saw
the Company’s best performance in this area to date and to further improve
performance, we are increasing our flushing activities across a greater
proportion of the network to be flushed.
Reducing leakage and supply interruptions
Leakage
We recognise that the prevention of water being lost in leakage from our
(and customers) pipes and assets is a key issue for all customers and is
something we work continuously to reduce.
In South West Water we are focused on reducing leakage with a target of
c.15% by 2025 (based on a three-year average). Leakage in 2023/24 has been
impacted by two ‘cold snaps’ in November and January as well as a decline
in the number of reported leaks (where the wetter weather has reduced
the visibility water arising from leaks). This has placed greater focus on our
detection activities which have increased, pressure management to continue
to calm our network and using innovation. We have also focused on reducing
losses from our trunk mains and continuing to support customers to identify
and fix leaks within their supply pipes. Whilst this year is higher than 2022/23,
the three year rolling average performance commitment has been met.
Weknow that there is still more we need to do to find, fix and prevent leaks
and we continue to focus on action plans to significantly reduce leakage
in2024/25 to meet this target.
Bristol Water has not performed well with regard to leakage. In order to
make improvements going forward, we are focused on enhanced data and
monitoring with c.7,000 acoustic monitors installed to support quicker and
more accurate detection. In addition, a key mains replacement programme
is60% complete and will support further resilience of our networks. As a
result of our activities leakage in the year has reduced, but remains elevated
and with the impact of the cold weather (over the last two years) we have
not met our performance commitment in this area.
Minimising customer supply interruptions
We understand the inconvenience that supply interruptions can cause.
The importance of ‘always on’ supplies, maintaining both public health and
customer confidence is one of our key priorities. In both South West and
Bristol, a relatively small number of events of scale have continued to impact
our performance.
Three significant events in Devon and Cornwall occurred in June, although
these were partially mitigated through re-valving and deployment of
Alternative Water Supply tankers. For South West Water, we continue to
develop and deliver against our action plans, including increased 24/7
alternative water supply availability, incident management improvements,
training and further calm network assessments. After June, performance in
the remainder of the year returned to normal levels, however larger events
continue to disproportionately impact our overall performance, which was
9 minutes 20 seconds for the year.
Bristol has been primarily impacted by third-party damage in Hallen and
a complex Christmas Day burst trunk main in Winterbourne – these two
incidents accounted for 70% of supply interruptions in the Bristol area, with
overall performance of 9 minutes 24 seconds.
Whilst we have not delivered against our performance commitment this
year, we expect to still be above the industry average (based on 2022/23
comparative data).
Managing demand and ensuring efficiency
Demand reductions
To reduce demand we are focused on minimising our own use, tackling
leakage and reducing customer demand through water efficiency.
We have successfully reduced our own use by 11Ml/day over the last two
years and we continue to improve efficiency within our processes.
33Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Per capita consumption (PCC)
This measure is to incentivise companies to conserve natural resources and
to target and support customers in using less water. Like all companies we
saw a significant change in usage as a result of the COVID pandemic where
behaviours and consumption for household customers has permanently
changed. Therefore, both South West Water and Bristol Water will not meet
this performance commitment this year.
In South West Water we have continued our significant water efficiency
programmes including:
Launching our ‘Water is Precious’ campaign– as part of this we have
provided around 500 water saving devices every day this financial year.
Our North Devon smart metering programme is now 50% complete and on
track for completion in 2025 – which will result in 76,000 meters deployed
in this area.
Following on from the ‘Stop the Drop’ campaign last year, we launched
atariff incentive so that customers in Cornwall could receive a £10 credit
to their bill if they collectively reduced their water consumption by c.5% -
which they achieved.
Launched our progressive charging trials for 2024/25 to include standard
seasonal tariffs (both households and businesses), rising block tariffs and
peak period seasonal tariff.
Water efficiency initiatives in Bristol are also targeting customers to use less,
through water saving devices, as well as donations to charities that promote
and educate on water consumption.
Water availability
Following one of the hottest and driest years on record in 2022 we
introduced water restrictions in Cornwall and parts of Devon which were
inplace until September 2023. We have invested record amounts to deliver
our drought plan and by the end of March 2024 total reservoir levels for
South West Water stood at nearly 100%, ahead of our targeted levels.
Whilst the recent wetter winter has helped reservoir levels, our interventions
and the hard work of customers to reduce their water usage has combined
to recharge our reservoirs ahead of the summer months and peak demand
for the region’s water resources – with one third of capacity delivered by
ourinterventions. On a longer term basis, many of the investments will
deliver a sustained increase in capacity where we have seen most challenge
and demand on our network, whether through the new reservoir Blackpool
Pit onBodmin Moor, a new treatment works at Porth Rialton or a new
desalination works in Par. We are therefore confident that there will be
norestrictions in the coming year.
Bristol’s water resources remain robust and storage at the ends of March
2024 was c.100%, as it was in March 2023, despite the challenges of hot,
dryconditions in 2022.
Maintaining asset health
Mains repairs
When our mains get damaged or fail, it is vitally important that these are
repaired to ensure that we do not waste valuable water and that customers
are kept in supply.
South West Water has had a focus on optimising the operation and control
ofour network by pressure management and other ‘network calming’
activities. This has included the delivery of training through our innovative
network training centre. We also minimise the likelihood of mains bursts by
replacing targeted sections or whole areas of poorly performing pipes.
For 2023/24, our performance has returned to target in both areas, despite
an increased focus from our leakage programme, with performance of 134.6
in South West Water and 124.8 in Bristol per 1,000km of mains respectively.
Unplanned outages
Water treatment unplanned outage provides a means of assessing reliability
of our water treatment works. It tracks the temporary loss of production
capacity across all water treatment works, resulting from unplanned
breakdowns and asset failure.
South West Water has once again met its target for unplanned outage with
a figure of 1.15% compared to the industry target of 2.34%. This means we
have achieved this target in each year of the current regulatory period.
Thisis founded on effective investment and maintenance regimes to ensure
that unplanned failures are minimised. This in turn minimises the risk of any
production outages resulting in service impacts for our customers.
For Bristol, outages at Purton Treatment Works, which commenced in the
prior year, carried on into the early part of 2023/24. However, following
resolution of the immediate issues, performance for the year achieved target
with performance of 2.58% unplanned outages. A multi-year programme is
ongoing to reduce future risks through the replacement of relevant assets.
34 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
2023 has seen some of the most tumultuous weather on record – particularly
in the second half of the year. Across the South West Region, 2023 was
the fifth wettest year on record, with a 34% increase in rainfall from 2022
and we experienced 50% more rainfall than the long-term average in the
second half-of the year, peaking at 130% in July. We have also experienced
ten named storms back to back in the latter months of the year, along with
yellow weather warnings which has tested the resilience of our assets and
operations. This exceptional weather continued into the early part of 2024
which has continued to place pressures on our wastewater infrastructure.
The impact of the extreme weather has varied across our operations, with
the wetter weather supporting the recovery of our reservoir storage and
water resources, but the increased rainfall and high groundwater levels has
driven up the use of storm overflows which are used in wet weather as a
‘release valve’ on the network to avoid flooding to homes and businesses
aswell as increasing the number of pollution incidents in the year.
Reducing flooding incidents
Sewer flooding
We understand how distressing sewer flooding can be and that how we react
when these situations occur is a good indicator of the commitment of care to
our customers.
In 2023/24, despite the wetter weather, we have again seen significant
outperformance, with performance of 0.76 internal sewer flooding incidents
per 10,000 connections against a target of 1.44. This is a slight increase in
the metric from 2022/23, resulting from a small increase in the number of
overloaded sewers following heavy rainfall. We have however outperformed
this target in each of the four years of the regulatory period and are one of
the best performers in the industry for this measure.
Despite the very high level of rainfall experienced in the winter the total
number of external sewer flooding incidents has reduced by 13% compared
to the prior year. Although we have missed the target for this metric
(performance of 1,578 incidents with a target of 1,260), a clear focus on
avoiding repeat flooding incidents with an increase of planned cleansing and
routine jetting, is having a positive impact.
Improving asset health
Sewer collapses and blockages
Targets for both sewer collapses and sewer blockages have been met for
2023/24, with performance of 11.4 collapses per 1,000km of sewer and 6,448
blockage incidents respectively. We are proud to report that 2023/24 was our
best-ever performance on blockages.
Proactive management of our network, including enhanced cleansing
removing debris from sewers, an increase in the number of repairs as well
as sewer overflow inspections being completed. In addition, a focus on
improving compliance of commercial premises who dispose fat, oil and
grease into our sewers, as well as other operational change initiatives, have
all contributed to this achievement.
Targeting improvements in the Environmental
Performance Assessment (EPA)
The EPA is the Environment Agency’s assessment of environmental
performance. The assessment covers a combination of measures, with
an overall ranking out of four stars. Our provisional rating for the 2023
calendar year is again 2 stars, maintaining improvements from the previous
year. However, following the extreme levels of rainfall and high number of
storms over the winter of 2023/24, the full benefits of our Pollution Incident
Reduction Plan (PIRP) have not yet been seen and we have a road map to
achieve a 4 star EPA status in 2025.
Pollution incidents
Total wastewater pollution incidents (category 1-3) remains our most
challenging area. 2023 saw a deterioration in performance following the
winter weather in 2023/24, which was the fifth wettest on record with a
significant increase in the number of storms and intense periods of rain.
The rain also led to exceptionally high groundwater, which also provides
challenging operating conditions and tends to result in less time to respond
to issues that arise at our treatment works pumping stations, as the issues
escalate more rapidly.
Despite the overall increase in pollution incidents, serious pollution incidents
(category 1 – 2) have remained stable. We know there is much more to do
and we continue to target a step change in performance.
Our key initiatives to deliver continued improvements in pollutions
performance include acceleration of additional telemetry on our sewer
network (including 12,000 sewer level monitors and deployment of
AI technology), continuation of our ‘hotspot’ investment programme
at problematic locations and completion of a proactive rising mains
replacement programme. Investment in power resilience and increased
operational activities such as sewer cleansing and pumping station MOTS
are all targeted in 2024.
Numeric compliance
Numeric permits place measurable conditions on the final effluent
discharged to the environment and measure compliance with these
conditions. Our performance of 96.2% was below the target for this year,
following our best ever score of 99.4% in 2022/23.
We experienced some challenges at individual sites over the summer of
2023/24, however we took immediate action to contain issues with activities
including reedbed surveys and remediation, enhanced targeted maintenance
and enhanced monitoring and review of Critical Asset Plans.
We have enhanced our action plans across our treatment works, including
regular reviews with the Environment Agency taking place. We are focused
on delivering our 2024 target, with no wastewater failures in the first four
months of the year.
Storm Overflows and Pollutions
35Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Net Zero and Environmental Gains
Net Zero
Lowering the carbon emissions from our operational activities and
throughout our supply chain is the responsible thing to do and aligns
withefforts being taken by businesses, institutions and customers across
the region to tackle the climate crisis and increase our resilience to
climatechange.
Our Net Zero 2030 plan is well underway, and we are making good progress,
reducing our carbon footprint by c.45% to date against our 2020/21 baseline.
Investment in renewable energy generation is an important part of achieving
our Net Zero strategy and is aligned with our long term sustainable growth
strategy in UK environmental infrastructure.
Pennon Power Limited, a direct subsidiary to Pennon Group plc, has been
formed as an entity to deliver on this element of the Net Zero strategy.
Todate, investment of c.£145 million has been announced by Pennon Power
in four projects across the UK, generating up to 135 GWh once operational,
along with a two-hour battery system providing 30 MW of storage. When
combined with the smaller scale on-site solar generation roll out, this puts
the Group on track to secure c.50% of its energy from renewable sources.
This strategy will also benefit the Group by reducing our exposure to future
volatility in wholesale power markets that we have experienced in recent
years, and will provide commercial returns ahead of those earned from the
regulated water business. The sites, acquired by Pennon Power, have the
required consents in place and will see construction commence in 2024,
withenergisation for the full portfolio in financial year 2025/26.
Our operational review continued
Continued quality levels at our bathing waters
South West Water has over 860 miles of coastline to protect, representing
over one-third of the UK’s designated bathing waters. This is something we,
and our customers, have always valued and prioritised.
In the 2023 bathing water season, 100% of bathing waters (where South West
Water has assets that can impact on bathing waters) achieved the stringent
quality standards for the third year in a row.
We were particularly pleased that the newly designated Plymouth Firestone
Bay achieved excellent status. For the 2024 bathing water season, six
further bathing waters in our region including four on the River Dart
(Dittisham, Stoke Gabriel, Steamer Quay and Warfleet) will be included
intheassessment.
Tackling spills from storm overflows
Despite the exceptional rainfall over the summer, we maintained 100%
bathing water quality for the third consecutive year.
This extraordinary weather has triggered an increase in the use of storm
overflows, operating to protect thousands of homes and businesses from
flooding and higher spills have been recorded from new monitors (installed at
the end of 2022) with 100% coverage of our overflows. This position has been
seen across the industry and for South West Water we recorded an average
of 43.4 spills, compared with 28.5 in 2022.
On a like for like basis (taking account of the first full year of monitoring and
the impacts of exceptional rainfall and higher groundwater) the number of
spills is lower reflecting the c.80 interventions delivered in 2023 and these
actions will continue to support reductions into 2024. We have already
ramped up our plans with c.60 interventions already delivered by the end of
March 2024 – including 20 additional storm storage schemes.
We are seeing tangible benefits from our interventions which are focused
on not only increasing storage but reducing the water entering our systems
through groundwater infiltration and surface water separation.
We continue to present our storm information through WaterFit Live
launched in March 2023 to cover all our bathing beaches, we are in the final
stages of rolling this out across our rivers which will give live updates on all
our storm overflows.
Furthermore, in March 2024, we were one of the nine water companies in
England that published a National Storm Overflows Plan setting out how
the sector will meet or exceed all Government targets – this is the most
expansive programme for overflows in the world, and South West Water
hassubmitted an ambitious plan which, if approved, meets the targeted
spillreduction a decade earlier than required in 2040.
36 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
The first site to enter construction is a 45 MWp solar site with co-located
battery storage in Dunfermline, acquired in May 2023. With total build
costs expected to be c.£60 million, we are targeting a split connection with
generation expected late in calendar year 2024, with the battery storage
unit connecting in Q1 2025. A further three sites, located in Aberdeenshire,
Cumbria and Buckinghamshire, were acquired in July 2023. These sites, with
total anticipated build costs of c.£85 million, will add a further 98.5 MWp of
generation capacity. The sites in Aberdeenshire and Cumbria are targeted to
be operational early in financial year 2025/26, and Buckinghamshire following
later in the year.
Pennon Power continues to identify further acquisition targets and
anticipates making further investments once the Dunfermline project is
fullyoperational.
Environmental Gains
A healthy environment is important for our region, and in the face of climate
change, ecological decline and greater recreational use of rivers and seas.
Nature and the environment is a priority for us, as we look to work with
nature to provide sustainable solutions for the challenges we face. Putting
the journey to net zero and nature recovery at the heart of what we do,
working with partners, means we can create climate resilient places and
infrastructure.
Catchment management and Upstream Thinking
Since 2010, we have been working with local delivery partners, farmers and
landowners to deliver our award-winning Upstream Thinking programme.
Today we have well established relationships with key delivery partners
across the region including Cornwall Wildlife Trust, Devon Wildlife Trust,
Natural England, Farming and Wildlife Advisory Group, South West Lakes
Trust and Westcountry Rivers Trust.
To date, this approach has improved the management of 127,000 hectares
ofland across 80% of our drinking water catchments, outperforming our
target of 123,000 hectares by March 2025; this has been achieved through
working with partners to deliver initiatives across the region including
Exmoor, Dartmoor and Bodmin Moor. We have restored 1,550 hectares of
peatland since 2020. Over 250,000 trees have been planted since 2020,
meeting our 2025 target one year early.
The range of pollutants which the programme helps to remove from
the water course includes farming-derived nutrients, pesticides, faecal
coliforms, sediment, veterinary medicines and antibiotics. The benefits of
thisinvestment are reliable clean water supplies, better wastewater dilution
and natural flood management.
Nature recovery
Our sites include reservoirs, moorlands, major operational sites, former clay
pits, estuaries, farmland and forests, and small urban sites with pumping
stations and pipework. Many of our sites are already well-established havens
for wildlife, with some designated as Special Areas of Conservation (SAC)
and County Wildlife Sites (CWS).
We own and manage 1,251 hectares of Sites of Special Scientific Interest
(SSSIs), of which 88.5% is in favourable condition and all but 9.5 hectares
ofthe remainder is classed as in recovery.
We have proven experience of habitat restoration, including land adjacent
to two former industrial mining quarries in Cornwall, Park Pit and Stannon.
South West Water bought Park Pit and the surrounding industrial land on
Bodmin Moor in 2007. At the time, ecologists described the area around Park
Pit as a “moonscape of waste sand and mica”. Fast forward to today, and
the industrial wasteland has been transformed into a nature-rich heathland
andreservoir.
We take our biodiversity responsibilities seriously – we have surveyed our
land and ensured biodiversity enhancement plans to boost nature and
to monitor and control the invasive non-native species are in place for all
ofoursites.
Addressing Affordability and
Delivering for Customers
Keeping bills affordable
Managing affordability starts with ensuring we deliver quality services
efficiently, keeping bills as low as possible and minimising any bills rises.
Soits only right that we continue to be at the forefront of the sector when
itcomes to cost efficiency.
In all the areas we serve, average bill increases for 2023/24 and 2024/25 were
below the headline rates of inflation. Our current bill for South West Water
islower in real terms today than a decade ago, bolstered by initiatives such
as WaterShare+ and our innovative tariffs and incentive schemes, which give
customers lower bills for lower water usage. We are pleased that our latest
water efficiency tariff across Cornwall has been successful, leading to a 5%
reduction in water use and a rebate on customer bills.
37Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Business Retail
Pennon Water Services (PWS)
PWS continues to deliver for its business customers offering a range of
attractive tariffs and value-added services, whilst also delivering year-on-year
improvements in its revenue, EBITDA and PBT.
Serving its customers
PWS maintained its focus upon high quality customer interactions, resulting
in a Trustpilot of 4.8 out of 5 measured through the independent review
platform comparing favourably to its peers. Its large strategic users of
water rated the quality of service from their account team at 4.94 out of 5,
demonstrating its ability to provide tailored support services to meet varying
business needs. Its customer service teams issued over 300,000 customer
bills in the year and answered over 90,000 phone calls, assisting with simple
queries as well as complex customer challenges relating to their site and its
future requirements. Its focus upon root causes of complaints into its own
service and those it recorded against wholesalers has supported a 16.5%
reduction in its volume of complaints compared to the prior year.
Financial performance
Revenue increased by 8% from £218 million in 2022/23 to £233.8 million
in2023/24. A direct result of continued customer growth and low
customerattrition despite a reduction in customer consumption in our
incumbent areas.
EBITDA and PBT grew by 67% and 128% in the year respectively,
demonstrating its operational efficiency against its higher revenues, a
disciplined approach to winning new business and control of operating costs.
Since the market opened in 2017, PWS has provided strong customer
support and high quality of services to maintain a stable market share of
c. 6% in England and Wales. The market share for the UK is 5.2% including
Scotland, serving over 154,800 business accounts (c. 95,000 customers) intotal.
Our operational review continued
Eradicating water poverty
In 2019 we made a pledge to eradicate water poverty and ensure everyone
has an affordable bill by 2025, a full five years ahead of the industry target.
This was set for South West Water and Bournemouth Water, with a similar
target independently set by Bristol Water, to achieve 0% in water poverty.
With households feeling the impacts of the cost-of-living crisis, we have
extended our package of affordability measures, unlocking £100m of financial
support for customers, and we are pleased that we are on track to achieve
our industry leading commitments to eradicate water poverty by 2025.
Acommitment we have doubled down on in our Business Plan to 2030.
98% of South West Water and Bournemouth Water households have been
independently assessed as having an affordable bill. This is up from 96.8%
last year. 100% of Bristol Water customers receive an affordable bill.
Over 132,000 unique customers have benefited from one or more of our
affordability initiatives across South West Water, Bournemouth Water and
Bristol Water to date.
We are focused on lifting a further 10,000 customers out of water poverty in
the next year as we continue to evolve our affordability toolkit. This includes
our innovative data model allowing us to identify and auto enrol customers
who are within the group who are often the most vulnerable and hardest to
reach onto social tariffs. We are also continue to work with local councils and
debt partners to identify customers who may be in financial difficulty and
may need support.
Supporting vulnerable customers
Our priority services programme is underpinned by the following pillars:
Providing easy ways to register for our Priority Services Register, so those
who may need support reading their bills or meters can find the right help.
Data sharing with key utility partners so customers who need extra
support are added to our Register.
Ensuring customers who have needs that rely on a constant supply of
water have the right help if an incident occurs interrupting that supply.
WaterShare+
We have a unique structure, through our WaterShare+ scheme, which gives
customers the chance to either own a share in our business or receive a
reduction in their water bills.
To date, we have shared £38m with customers through shares or bill
reductions, and 1 in 14 households in the South West are now shareholders.
We are looking to increase this to 1 in 10 by 2030 so that more customers
have a stake in our business.
38 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
PWS continued to win new customer contracts across a diverse range of
business sectors. This was achieved despite ongoing economic uncertainty.
The combination of strong growth in new contracts and high retention
delivered a cumulative net consumption gain of c. 4% (2,105 megalitres) in
the current year.
As a result, PWS has taken its cumulative position since the market opened
to c. 51,000 megalitres, the equivalent of c. 20,330 Olympic-sized swimming
pools. New contracts in the year included Agrial Fresh Produce, Aggregate
Industries, and Welcome Break.
Whilst growth in new contracts continued PWS maintained its low levels of
customer attrition. Our continued focus on value and service with existing
customers ensured we renewed a number of contracts including Unite, GSK
and Kerry Ingredients.
Outlook
Pennon Water Services remains well placed to deliver against its long-term
strategic objectives, growing organically and sustainably, investing in its
people, systems, processes, and innovative customer solutions.
Water2Business
Pennon’s 30% shareholding in Water2Business continues to deliver market
leading customer service performance, maintaining their Trustpilot score of
4.9/5, the highest of all water retailers. Further customer growth has seen
Water2Business grow to a c.7% market share. Water2Business has continued
their strong financial performance during the year, contributing c.£0.7 million
of associated companies’ profit after tax to the Group’s results, supported
by the addition of c.5,100 new customers. Water2Business has also topped
the MOSL holistic retailer reporting tables for the entire 2023/24 financial
year, demonstrating its commitment and effectiveness of data management,
process control and customer service.
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
39Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
SES Water
How SES Water Deliver
Like the rest of Pennon Group, the SES Water approach to delivering its
business model has ESG at its core.
Strong Financial Governance
The SES Water Board has a Code on principles of good governance
(including financial governance) and assesses compliance with the UK
Corporate Governance Code 2018 on an annual basis. The SES Water Board
takes its obligations for good corporate governance extremely seriously
and applies standards appropriate to the nature and ownership structure
of the business. These standards are kept under continuous review and are
amended in line with business developments and to reflect best practice.
With respect specifically to Financial Governance, the SES Water Board
is provided with assurance that the principles of good governance are
maintained via input from the SES Water Audit Committee and the
SES Water Financing Committee. The former includes insights and
recommendations from the external financial auditor, PwC, on various
aspects of financial governance such as internal control improvements,
enhancing transparent external reporting and assessments on areas
offinancial judgement, which management appropriately actions
whererequired.
Investing in the Environment
SES Water has continued to invest in local catchment initiatives, contributing
to land management changes and supporting local groups with enhanced
nature conservation. SES Water achieved its third Biodiversity Benchmark
with The Wildlife Trusts, delivering on their bespoke performance
commitment and remain on track with their WINEP delivery.
SES Water has continued with its fleet decarbonisation and energy
efficiencyprojects, whilst also progressing external assurance for its GHG
emissions reporting.
SES Water colleagues are building strong partnerships with a range of
stakeholders in readiness for their ambitious catchment work, including
non-statutory proposals to invest in catchment resilience and long-term
future sustainable water resources. Local estate projects are gaining
momentum with integration to the South East’s regional water resource and
landscapeplanning.
Investing in the Community
SES Water has long term commitments in the arena of social responsibility
and wants their people to feel they can make a difference working as part
ofa business set in the heart of the community they serve.
A new working group established in 2023/24 collaborated to create an
internal events calendar for the year, aligned with the SES Water Purpose
and People Plan. This has provided everyone with opportunities to
participate in events and support some great local causes. For example,
SES Water colleagues participated in the Give A Day (153 colleagues in
total) initiative, supporting a wide range of local charities including Stripey
Stork, Community Fridge, The Wildlife Aid Foundation, The Orpheus Centre,
The Conservation Volunteers, Crossroads Care, and Methodist Homes
Association.
Building relationships with local education providers further strengthens the
early careers strategy implementation by continuing attendance at career
fairs, offering a structured work experience week and apprenticeships.
Thesemeasures are bolstered by the highly successful education
programme held at the Flow Zone centre at Bough Beech Treatment Works.
Health & Safety
SES Water has had another excellent health and safety performance in the
past year, with no Lost Time Accidents (LTAs), and no reportable incidents
or injuries at year end. Numbers of minor Non-Lost Time Accidents (NLTAs)
were also lower than the previous year. They were proud to achieve two
RoSPA Gold Awards (The Royal Society for the Prevention of Accidents) –
one for health and safety performance and the other for fleet safety and the
management of occupational road risk.
Delivering for its Customers
SES Water prides itself on continually seeking to improve the quality of the
service for its customers. The following is a summary of in year performance
and Performance Commitments (PCs).
Leakage
The SES Water overall leakage reduction performance continues to meet
its required three-year rolling target, and the Company remains on track to
deliver the 15% in-year reduction required by 2025. SES Water has stayed at
or below the maximum allowed level of leakage every year since the target
was first set more than 20 years ago and has once again met our leakage
reduction, which is industry leading.
Per capital consumption (PCC)
SES Water has progressed its universal metering programme and continued
to support in-home water efficiency assistance. The Company also deployed
a targeted water efficiency campaign from which it has gained important
insight to inform its 2024 concept. SES Water has historically had relatively
high PCC and whilst its 2023/24 PCC is reduced compared to 2022/23, it is
in the process of designing a water efficiency pilot to inform the best value
support it can give to its customers.
Our operational review continued
40 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Improving Water Quality
SES Water has continued to deliver excellent water quality performance in
2023. It has determined its Compliance Risk Index (CRI) score to be just 0.01,
with only three sample exceedances for lead or nickel, linked to the condition
of service pipework and customer fittings, contributing to this score. SES
Water expects its performance to be confirmed as an industry leader when
the DWI publishes industry results in July 2024.
SES Water has had a very challenging target to minimise the number of
customers that need to contact it about the taste, smell or appearance of
their water. In 2023, SES Water received 0.58 contacts per 1000 population,
which was above its target for the year of 0.50, and so it will receive a small
financial penalty from Ofwat. Whilst it is disappointing that the business did
not meet the target set, it expects its contact rate performance to continue
to be in the industry upper quartile.
Maintaining water resilience and asset health
SES Water continued work to make sure it operates, maintains and invests in its
water treatment work assets, which has ensured it has once again outperformed its
target on unplanned treatment work outages, achieving 0.81% against a target of
2.34%. SES Water continues to invest in the long-term resilience of its network and
remains on target to have every property connected to two water treatment works
by 2025. The level of mains repairs has improved significantly since last year, but
the business will not meet its target and will receive a financial penalty from Ofwat
this year. Despite that, its performance will likely remain upper quartile within the
industry. SES Water’s smart network, which helps it find and fix leaks in near real-
time, has enabled them to reduce its leakage run times by up to 40%. SES Water
are the first UK water company to roll out this intelligent technology across its entire
water distribution network, with the aim of more than halving their leakage by 2045.
SES Water have once again achieved its supply interruptions target as it nears
the completion of a 15-year resilience programme it has been progressing since
2010. By 2025, every property across its region will be supplied by more than one
treatment works if, due to operational challenges, this is needed. SES Water has also
not had to implement any water restrictions within their area for over a decade.
Clean, safe and reliable water
Clean, safe and reliable water (CRI score)
SES Water – Non-financial metrics
76.05
76.3 5
72.45
2021
2022
2023
84.91
77.39
Subject to assurance
2021
2022
2023
Supporting customers in financial hardship
Customer Measure of Experience (C-MeX)
Delivering for our customers
Developer Measure of Experience (D-MeX)
19,476
19,994
22, 250
2021
2022
2023
6.8%
5.6%
9.3%
2021
2022
2023
38%
32.1%
39.5%
2021
2022
2023
PSR reach
This is measured as the number of households that are registered as part of our
Priority Services Register at the end of the Financial year, divided by the number
ofoverall households in our supply area that have active accounts at the time.
Supply interruptions (Duration per property per year)
Taste, smell and colour (contact per 1,000 population)
Leakage (3-year average – Megalitres per day)
0.01
0.00
0.01
2021
2022
2023
0.64
0.58
0.58
2021
2022
2023
0:03:51
0:02:58
0:03:36
2021
2022
2023
0.93
1.36
0.81
2021
2022
2023
23
23.6
21.5*
2021
2022
2023
101.5
57.9
63.8*
2021
2022
2023
Unplanned outages (%)
Mains repairs (Number of repairs per 1,000km)
* unassured forecast
Vulnerable support scheme awareness
The percentage of customers that answer “yes” to the question “Are you aware of
the additional support SES Water offers customers in vulnerable situations through
their `Here for you` Scheme and Priority Services Register?” The survey takes place
quarterly to a sample of 500 household customers (100 of which are on the vulnerable
support schemes). The survey is conducted by a third-party research company (in
this case Explain, SES Water’s Voice of the Customer agency). The % reported is for all
4quarters combined in the applicable year. Vulnerable support scheme awareness.
41Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our KPIs – non-financial metrics
Clean, safe and reliable water
Asset Health is essential for ensuring a robust supply of water to our customers. Mains repairs performance has improved despite an increase in repairs we have
undertaken to reduce leakage and address bursts, ensuring that we have meet targets in SWB and Bristol Water. In SWB, our unplanned outages increased, but
remains well within the regulatory target for the year. Bristol Water unplanned outage performance improved over 2022/23, but an unplanned event at one of
our largest treatment works in Bristol meant the target was narrowly missed for 2023/24.
Water quality (CRI score)
The Compliance Risk Index (CRI) is the Drinking Water Inspectorate’s
measure of water quality. In 2023/24 we continued with our ‘Quality First’
transformation programme. Performance in our SWB region (consisting of
South West Water and Bournemouth Water but not Bristol Water, which is
subject to separate cost and performance reporting to Ofwat) was impacted
by tanks on one site. There were no failures from water treatment processes
in 2023, and our performance remains upper quartile for the industry.
Bristol Water was below average but is learning from the SWW approach
and applying the ‘Quality First‘ programme (rolled out with enhanced mains
flushing, tank inspection and cleaning and staff survey and training) to
improve Bristol Water’s performance. Performance for 2023 was impacted by
3 events at our larger sites.
Supply interruptions (Duration per property per year)
Performance across the Group is often impacted by colder weather
and third-party damage. At SWB, 35 incidents contribute c. 5 minutes
to performance, 10 events contributed c. 2.5 minutes to performance and
third-party damage contributed c. 30 seconds. At Bristol Water, performance
has been primarily impacted by third-party damage in Hallen and the
complex Winterbourne Christmas Day burst trunk main. The two incidents
have dominated performance this year accounting for c.70% of our supply
interruptions (6 mins 41 secs).
Our underlying operational performance indicates that the 2024/25 target
level (at 5 minutes) is achievable.
Taste, smell and colour (contact per 1,000 population)
We recognise that customers expect their drinking water to look and taste
great and this is important in maintaining customers’ trust in the quality of
our supplies.
At SWB our performance had been consistently improving in line with our
targets, however as a result of the drought conditions in summer 2022, we
limited our flushing activities in areas until restrictions were lifted which
has impacted performance in 2023/24. At Bristol Water there has been a
substantial reduction in appearance contacts and taste and odour contacts
over this reporting period.
Leakage (3-year average – Megalitres per day)
Reducing leaks is a critical component of ensuring a sustainable
watersupply.
Most companies saw an increase in annual leakage in 2022/23 reporting
higher levels of bursts resulting from a hot, dry summer and the winter
freeze-thaw. Whilst leakage has remained stable in South West Water and
Bristol, in the year, the position in 2022/23 has an enduring impact on the
regulatory three-year rolling performance.
South West Water (SWB)
Bristol Water
00:09:18
00:08:42
00:13:40
00:08:03
00:02:31
00:09:24
21/22
22/23
23/24
21/22
22/23
23/24
South West Water (SWB)
Bristol Water
3.02
2.39
3.86
4.60
4.19
7.05
2021
2022
2023
2021
2022
2023
South West Water (SWB)
Bristol Water
1.66
1.51
1.55
1.21
1.39
0.82
2021
2022
2023
2021
2022
2023
South West Water (SWB)
Bristol Water
107.1
113.0
116.7
37.0
36.0
37.6
21/22
22/23
23/24
21/22
22/23
23/24
Unplanned outages (%) Mains repairs (Number of repairs per 1,000km)
South West Water (SWB)
Bristol Water
1.15
0.70
0.96
6.27
1.74
2.58
2021
2022
2023
2021
2022
2023
South West Water (SWB)
Bristol Water
134.6
141.1
111.4
170.8
106.4
124.8
21/22
22/23
23/24
21/22
22/23
23/24
42 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Pollution incidents (number of wastewater incidents)
Category 1-3 pollutions is our most challenging area. The 2023 weather
(fifthwettest on record and increased number of storms) and operating
conditions (exceptionally high groundwater and scale of rainfall) has
resulted in less time to respond to issues that arise at our 655 treatment
works and c.1,200 pumping stations. This has meant the benefits of our
Pollution Incidents Reduction Plan (PIRP) will not be seen until 2025.
Serious pollutions (category 1-2) have however remained stable this year.
Weknow there is more to do and we continue to target a further step change
inperformance.
Numeric Compliance (%)
We measure the compliance of our discharges against our permits.
Biodiversity (Hectares)
We are continuing our pioneering catchment management approach.
Catchment management protects and improves river quality and critical
water abstraction sources to provide clean, safe drinking water without the
need to provide additional infrastructure.
Environmental Performance Assessment
A combination of a basket of measures, the EPA is the Environment Agency’s
assessment of environmental performance. Our performance this year results
in a provisional 2 star rating this year.
Protecting the environment – robust wastewater delivery
194
108
151
2021
2022
2023
South West Water
96.19%
99.40%
97.46%
2021
2022
2023
South West Water
126,733
111,515
95,453
21/22
22/23
23/24
South West Water
2
2
1
21/22
22/23
23/24
South West Water
Sewer flooding is a key area that significantly impacts on customers. For 2023/24 we are maintaining our industry-leading internal sewer flooding performance
and have delivered c.8% reduction in external flooding incidents, despite the prolonged periods of significant rainfall and high groundwater levels.
These measures reflect service impacts to our customers as well as being a lead indicator of asset health. Although there has been a slight increase in sewer
collapses, both measures have outperformed the targets for 2023/24, and reflect the increased cleaning activity completed on our network.
Internal sewer flooding (Incidents per 10,000 sewer
connections)
External sewer flooding (Number of incidents)
0.74
0.63
0.76
21/22
22/23
23/24
South West Water
1,578
1,816
1,407
21/22
22/23
23/24
South West Water
Sewer collapses (Incidents per 1,000km) Sewer blockages (Number)
6,448
7,056
6,545
21/22
22/23
23/24
South West Water
11.42
8.3
6.7
21/22
22/23
23/24
South West Water
43Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Overall satisfaction with PSR (%)
We provide the Priority Services Register (PSR) services for vulnerable
customers across the Group and we measure customer satisfaction with these
services each year. At SWB there are over 107,000 customers registered for
PSR. This is an increase of 36% compared to the previous year. South West
Water and Bristol Water have both outperformed our target (both companies
had a target of achieving 7% customer registration by 2024/25).
Customer Measure of Experience (C-MeX)
C-MeX is Ofwat’s measure for customer experience both for those customers
who contact us as well as the perceptions of all our customers. For SWB,
our C-MeX rankings have remained consistent year-on-year with results
impacted by customer perception scores, whilst for Bristol performance has
been consistently strong.
Delivering for our customers
South West Water
13
th
in ranking
Bristol Water
3
rd
in ranking
South West Water
Bristol Water
93
91
83
88
89
80
21/22
22/23
23/24
21/22
22/23
23/24
Customer affordability (%)
We are targeting zero water poverty by 2025 and we have a range
ofaffordability schemes to address customer needs. South West Water
and Bristol Water have a measure which assesses customer affordability
which is improving year-on-year. For SWB we have achieved target
inboth: ‘Percentage of Customers who find their Water Bill Affordable’
and ‘Numberof Customers on one of our Support Tariffs’ performance
commitments for each year of the AMP so far.
Developer Measure of Experience (D-MeX)
D-MeX is Ofwat’s measure of service experience for developers which
directly compares us with our peers.
South West Water
9
th
in ranking
Bristol Water
3
rd
in ranking
South West Water
Bristol Water
98.0
96.3
93.3
100.0
99.0
100.0
21/22
22/23
23/24
21/22
22/23
23/24
Bathing waters
South West Water has over 860 miles of coastline to protect, representing
over one third of the UK’s bathing waters. In 2023 there were 151 designated
bathing waters in the region, including one new bathing water at Plymouth
Firestone Bay. However, only 150 bathing waters were classified as
Watcombe was not classified by the EA due to access issues and so
wasexcluded from the 2023 assessment (Watcombe was classified as
‘excellent’ in 2019).
In 2023, 100% of our bathing beaches where South West Water assets
would have an impact on the bathing beach met the high standards set
forwater quality for the third year in a row (one bathing water (Porthluney)
was classed as poor but SWW do not have any assets impacting this
bathingwater).
Average Spills
Our Waterfit programme is focused on protecting rivers and seas. During
2023, the average number of spills has increased - the increase this year can
be accounted for by the amount of named storms and weather warnings in
2023. But we will continue to deliver our plans to reduce to an average of
20spills per overflow by 2025.
99
100
99
98
100
100
Met standards (%)
Good/excellent (%)
South West Water
23/24
22/23
21/22
43.4
28.5
38.9
21/22
22/23
23/24
South West Water
Our KPIs – Non-financial metrics continued
44 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
KPIs – financial metrics
Annual
1
Operational
Profit before tax (£m)
Why is this KPI important to us?
Profit before tax is a key measure of the Group’s financial performance after
deducting all operating and finance costs. Underlying Profit before tax is
measured to exclude any distorting non-underlying items as explained in
ourAlternative Performance Measures on pages 239 to 242.
Our performance in 2024
Commentary on performance is set out in the Group Chief Financial Officer’s
report on pages 47 to 54.
Link to remuneration, bonus/LTIP
Annual bonus performance measure.
^ Measures with this symbol are defined in the Alternative Performance Measures
(APMs) as outlined on pages 239 to 242.
1. For further information on the relevance to Executive Directors’ remuneration
seepage 148.
2. Cumulative K7 measure.
3. South West Water ROCE measure used for 2020/21 and 2021/22. This provides
acomparative figure to previous Group performance. See calculations provided
inthe alternative performance measures section on pages 239 to 242.
Return on capital employed (ROCE) (%)
Why is this KPI important to us?
ROCE provides a measure of the return being generated by the Group
compared to the total equity and debt capital deployed to generate
thatreturn.
Our performance in 2024
Commentary on performance is set out in the Group Chief Financial Officer’s
report on pages 47 to 54.
Link to remuneration, bonus/LTIP
LTIP performance measure.
4.1
4.5
8.6
9.1
9.3
19/20
20/21
3
21/22
3
22/23
23/24
Return on regulated equity (RORE)^ (%)
WaterShare
Why is this KPI important to us?
Return on regulated equity (RORE) expresses the return the water
businesses have managed to earn above and beyond expectations set by the
regulator through financial and operational performance as explained in our
Alternative Performance Measures on pages 239 to 242.
Our performance in 2024
Commentary on performance is set out in the operational performance
review on pages 32 to 41.
Link to remuneration, bonus/LTIP
LTIP performance measure.
21/22
22/23
23/24
2
South West Water
Bristol Water
New regulatory period
19/20
20/21
7.6
4.2
8.0
8.2
6.3
7.8
12.1
5.2
21/22
22/23
23/24
Statutory (continuing/discontinued)
Underlying^ (continuing/discontinued)
Sale of Viridor
19/20
20/21
(9.1)
16.8
(8.5)
127.7
143.5
157.0 200.3
132.1
193.1
183.0
301.5
287.6
16.8
+£1,650.4m
statutory profit on
discontinued operations
45Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
KPIs – financial metrics
Long-term
Earnings per share (pence)
Why is this KPI important to us?
Earnings per share (EPS) is a key financial metric indicating the Group’s
profitability after tax and provides a relative measure of profitability in
comparison to the Group’s share price. Underlying^ EPS excludes the impact
of potentially distorting non-underlying items as explained in our Alternative
Performance Measures on pages 239 to 242.
Our performance in 2024
Commentary on performance is set out in the Group Chief Financial Officer’s
report on pages 47 to 54.
Link to remuneration, bonus/LTIP
LTIP performance measure.
Group dividend cover (times)
Why is this KPI important to us?
Group dividend cover ensures that the profitability of the Group supports the
sustainable delivery of our dividend policy.
Our performance in 2024
Commentary on performance is set out in the Group Chief Financial Officer’s
report on pages 47 to 54.
Link to remuneration, bonus/LTIP
LTIP sustainable dividend measure.
0.1x
0.2x
1.4x
1.5x
1.4x
19/20
20/21
21/22
22/23
23/24
Sale of Viridor
Dividend per share (pence)
WaterShare
Why is this KPI important to us?
Our sector-leading dividend policy is a key measure of the success of our
sustainable growth strategy.
Our performance in 2024
Commentary on performance is set out in the Group Chief Financial Officer’s
report on pages 47 to 54.
Link to remuneration, bonus/LTIP
LTIP sustainable dividend measure.
21/22
22/23
23/24
Dividend per share
EBITDA dividend cover^ (times)
Sale of Viridor
19/20
20/21
44.4
2.7x
42.7
38.5
3.8x
3.7x
21.7
43.8
3.2x
2.8x
21/22
22/23
23/24
19/20
20/21
(3.6)
6.2
nil
4.9
50.2
31.9 10.2 42.1
25.5
27.7 47.7
35.2 26.5 61.7
7.3
Statutory (continuing/discontinued)
Underlying^ (continuing/discontinued)
Sale of Viridor
+393.0p
statutory EPS on
discontinued operations
46 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Our CFO’s review
Underlying profitability improving
Full year underlying profit before tax of £16.8 million following losses in the
second half of 2022/23.
More information on pages 47 to 50
Investing for growth
Group capital investment up c.80% versus 2022/23, with investment
weighted towards the end of the AMP.
More information on page 49
Robust liquidity and flexible financing
strategy
Pennon Group available liquidity in excess of £1 billion.
More information on pages 51 to 52
Acquisition of SES Water
The business acquired on 10
th
January 2024, representing our ambitions to
be a leader in the UK water sector.
More information on pages 49 to 50
Financial highlights of the year
I am excited to have joined Pennon at this time in the Company’s
development. As I look back on the fourth year of our 2020-2025 business
plan we continued to outperform the regulatory cost of equity, maintained
financial discipline by managing gearing, raised debt to sustain liquidity and
made an early start on cost reduction for K8. Furthermore, we are gaining
momentum in the build out of our renewable energy generation sites through
Pennon Power and see further positive progress in our non-household retail
business, Pennon Water Services.
In addition to our organic development, soon after I joined the Company in
January, we announced the acquisition of SES Water and the £180 million
equity raising to fund the acquisition. This successful transaction represents
the ambitions we have as a Company to grow and be a leader in the UK
Water sector whilst maintaining our commitment to financial discipline.
Delivery of our regulatory programmes, the reinvestment of RORE, investing
in Pennon Power and the acquisition of SES Water have resulted in the
largest capital expenditure programme in one year. The level of regulatory
investment demonstrates our capacity and capability to deliver at investment
rates set out in our PR24 submission.
As I look ahead into the fifth and final year of the K7 plan, we are working to
ensure that we are in a strong position financially to support our 2025-30
business plan. We will: diversify our debt portfolio, supported by our debut
credit ratings; de-gear the SES Water balance sheet; continue to achieve
outperformance on regulatory returns and deliver a step change in our
cost base. We have already realised c.£9 million of total benefits in 2023/24
through our existing transformation programmes (including optimisation
of sites to reduce power and chemical costs and enhancing contract
management processes). We expect to continue and extend this programme,
with targeted annualised savings of c. £55 million during K8. We expect
further sustainable growth from Pennon Water Services and are expecting
Steve Buck
Group Chief Financial Officer
47Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our CFO’s review continued
our first renewable energy site to start generation late in financial year
2024/25.
The improving performance, following a loss before tax in H2 2023, is
expected to continue to the end of K7. The start of K8 will be a point of reset
for the financial position of the Group, enabling a return to stronger income
statement performance and recognition of the K7 true-ups to Regulated
Capital Value^ (RCV). We continue to deliver regulatory outperformance and
our investments have generated RCV growth of around 10% in the year, with
overall RCV growth of c.65% since the start of K7. Despite the current low
level of earnings per share, there is significant retained shareholder value in
the regulated business.
Overall, our financial performance for 2023/24 is in line with our expectations.
As we have said previously, the impact of high inflation on our cost base
reduces our earnings, in particular due to power costs remaining high, and
in part due to hedging our power at previous higher prices. The second half
of 2023/24 experienced some of the highest levels of rainfall seen in recent
times and this contributed to higher wastewater treatment costs. Despite this
upward pressure on costs, we have managed to keep our regulated costs
broadly flat year on year. Despite increased borrowing levels and rising base
rates, our effective interest rate^, in South West Water, has remained broadly
constant at 5.6%
5
(2022/23: 5.5%), with the inflationary impact on finance
costs stabilising, in part through the £300 million RPI swaps that were put in
place in 2022/23. Tariff increases have recovered previous inflationary cost
increases. Underlying profit before tax for 2023/24 is up from £16.8 million to
£19.3 million before the impact of the acquisition of SES Water, an increase of
c.15% compared with 2022/23.
SES Water has contributed to the financial results since 10
th
January 2024
and is performing in line with our expectations, contributing £35.7 million of
revenue and a £2.5 million loss before tax for the c.2.5 months of ownership.
In late January 2024, the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) stated
that it did not consider a parallel formal investigation under the Enterprise
1. Includes K and inflation.
2. Includes ODI impacts and prior year revenue over recovery.
3. Includes K, ODI penalties and prior year over recovery of revenue.
4. PWS - 80:20 joint venture with South Staffs, Water2Business - 30% share of joint venture with Wessex Water.
5. Based on South West Water Group, including Bristol Water, excluding SES.
6. References to organic movements throughout this commentary refer to the performance of the business excluding the contribution from SES Water from 10
th
January 2024.
^ Measures with this symbol are defined in the alternative performance measures section of the annual report on pages 239 to 242.
Revenue underlying^ (£m)
2022/23
Revenue
Water
Inflationary
factors
1
Other revenue
movements
including
regulatory
adjustments
2
PWS
contract
wins
PWS
Inflationary
factors
SES Other 2023/24
Revenue
825.0
61.6
(31.6)
8.5
7.3
35.7
907.8
1.3
2022/23
PBT
Inflationary
tariff
increases
Regulatory
revenue
adjustments
3
Cost
inflation
and
pressures
Early
transitioning
to K8
benefits
and Bristol
integration
Depreciation Interest PWS,
JV PAT
4
& other
Group
movements
2023/24
PBT
(excl. SES)
SES 2023/24
PBT
16.8
16.8
19.3
61.6
(31.6)
(13.2)
6.9
(13.7)
(11.2)
3.7
(2.5)
Act for the non-household aspect of the acquisition to be needed. The
regulated aspect of the acquisition of SES Water is progressing through the
CMA review and as expected, has been referred for a Phase 2 review under
the prescribed process. The CMA has indicated that there are reasonable
grounds for believing that the undertakings offered by the parties under
the process might be accepted. Whilst the CMA review is ongoing, SES
Water and South West Water will continue to be operated independently
ofeachother.
The merger of South West Water and Bristol Water completed on 1
st
February
2023 with the combined water business now operating under one licence held
by South West Water Limited. Within this report, to aid comparability both now
and ongoing, the results of South West Water include the operating performance
ofBristol Water in both 2023/24 and the comparative period, 2022/23.
Group performance – summary
The Group’s statutory revenue for 2023/24 was £907.8 million compared
with £797.2 million in 2022/23 which included non-underlying reductions of
£27.8 million in respect of the second issuance under WaterShare+ (£20.2 million)
and our “Stop The Drop” demand reduction incentive (£7.6 million). Group
underlying revenue increased by £82.8 million, or 10.0%, to £907.8 million, with
SES Water contributing £35.7 million of the increase.
Organically
6
, underlying revenue has increased by £47.1 million (5.7%) with
South West Water’s revenue increased by £28.5 million with inflationary
tariff increases being offset by ODI penalties and prior year over recovery
of revenue. Pennon Water Services’ revenue increased by £15.8 million to
£233.8 million, with new contracts, predominantly outside South West Water’s
regions, contributing c.£9 million to this increase.
Overall, underlying EBITDA has increased 9.9% from £307.8 million
to £338.3 million with South West Water and Pennon Water Services
contributing £332.5 million and £7.4 million respectively of this overall
increase. SES Water contributed £3.6 million to the overall increase.
48 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Further details of the performance of South West Water, Pennon Water
Services and SES Water are outlined below.
We recognise the pressure the ongoing cost-of-living crisis puts on our
customers, so we are determined to continue to assist customers with access
toa broad range of affordability measures to support those in financial need.
Across all Group businesses, the potential impact of significant increases in the
cost of living on affordability has been considered in assessing our expected
credit loss charges.
Cash collections across the Group have remained robust during the financial
year. Expected credit loss charges for 2023/24 of £6.3 million for South West
Water (0.9% of revenue) are in line with previous levels (2022/23: 1.0%). For
Pennon Water Services, the expected credit loss charge of £1.0 million (0.4%
of revenue) is also in line with previous levels (2022/23: 0.4% of revenue).
The Group reported a statutory loss before tax of £9.1 million (2022/23:
loss of £8.5 million) after net non-underlying costs of £25.9 million
(2022/23: £25.3 million). Group underlying profit before tax is in line with prior
year at £16.8 million (2022/23: £16.8 million) with SES Water contributing
an underlying loss before tax of £2.5 million. Organically, Group underlying
profit before tax increased by £2.5 million to £19.3 million. While this outturn
reflects a marginal overall improvement in earnings compared with 2022/23,
it represents an overall marked improvement in performance given the
challenging operating conditions, caused by the excessive rainfall during the
second half of 2023/24. Underlying, organic profit before tax in H2 2023/24
was £10.2 million compared to an underlying loss of £5.7m in H2 2022/23.
Segmental performance – Water
South West Water
Since 1
st
February 2023, the trade and the significant majority of assets and
liabilities of Bristol Water plc were transferred to South West Water Limited under
a statutory transfer mechanism set out in the Water Industry Act. The Bristol
Water brand continues as a trading name of South West Water. As noted above,
the financial performance of South West Water includes the performance of
Bristol Water in both this financial year and the comparative year.
South West Water’s statutory revenue for 2023/24 was £729.8 million
compared with £673.5 million in 2022/23. Last year’s revenue included
non-underlying reductions of £27.8 million in respect of the second
issuance under WaterShare+ (£20.2 million) and our ‘Stop The Drop’
demand reduction incentive (£7.6 million). Underlying revenue of
£729.8 million for 2023/24 has increased by 4.1% compared with the prior
period (2022/23: £701.3 million). The revenue growth of £28.5 million is
explainedabove.
Underlying operating costs of £397.3 million are largely flat year on year
witha small increase of £4.4 million (2022/23: £392.9 million). Normal
inflationary increases have been offset by early benefits from our
transformation programme and continuing integration efficiencies. Energy
unit prices, which were specifically impacted by high levels of inflation
over the last two years are now stabilising with a year on year decrease of
£1.0 million. However, in order to de-risk the business from the volatility of
the wholesale energy markets, some of the recent higher power prices were
locked in through our hedging strategy. We expect the impact of those to
decline over the coming year.
South West Water’s underlying EBITDA increased by 7.8% to £332.5 million.
Underlying operating profit has increased by 6.7% reflecting the improved
EBITDA performance and an increase in the depreciation charge of
£13.4 million compared to last year as our accelerated capital investment
programme starts to impact the depreciation charge.
The net interest charge of £155.5 million is £10.2 million higher than prior
year (2022/23: £145.3 million), reflecting an effective interest rate^ of 5.6%
1
(2022/23: 5.5%).
South West Water’s statutory loss before tax was £1.0 million (2022/23: loss of
£29.6 million) after non-underlying costs of £15.6 million (2022/23: £43.7 million).
South West Water’s capital expenditure was £582.9 million, an increase of
£224.7 million (62.7%) on the prior year (2022/23: £358.2 million). The final
determination, Green Recovery, Defra accelerated delivery, and the RORE
reinvestment were weighted towards the end of the K7.
Major categories of Capital expenditure (£m)
Enhancement spend has been pulled forward from year 5 to year 4
byc.£80 million due to our investment in water resources and network
monitoring. This expenditure is delivering new water treatment works in
Bournemouth, a desalination plant in Cornwall, additional reservoirs to
improve resilience to drought, and enhanced network monitoring including
acoustic loggers and sewer level monitors.
Base expenditure has increased by c.£80 million as a result of spend to
mitigate the impact of the weather on our assets, and the expansion of our
Quality First programme across the regions. The exceptional weather we
have experienced over the year has resulted in spend to minimise pollutions
and spills and to drive targeted reductions in leakage. We expect 50%
(£40 million) of the increase to be recovered in our RCV in K8.
SES Water
SES Water has contributed to the financial results since 10
th
January 2024.
Since that date, the business has contributed £35.7 million of revenue and
£3.6 million of EBITDA to the Group results. The business continues to
be impacted by high levels of financing costs which the Group intends to
address where possible once it is able to leverage benefits from the Group’s
financing strategy, as and when CMA clearance is obtained. In the period
since acquisition, the business has performed in line with our expectations.
Over the 12 month period to 31
st
March 2024, SES Water has benefited from
higher revenues, mainly due to tariff rises allowed under the regulatory
regime and increased non-household demand. Operating costs have
increased in the year, mainly driven by supply chain pressures resulting in
higher electricity costs and chemical spend. Financing costs continue to be
adversely impacted by high inflation on the index linked bond although this
pressure is starting to reduce as RPI comes down.
South West Water (Water): £369.3m
South West Water (Wastewater): £213.6m
Pennon Power: £59.0m
Other: £7.6m
£649.5m
TOTAL
1. A measure of the mean average interest rate payable on net debt associated with
South West Water Ltd’s group of companies, which excludes interest costs not
directly associated with net debt.
Major categories of Capital expenditure
(£m)
49Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our CFO’s review continued
Segmental performance - non-household retail
Pennon Water Services
1
Pennon Water Services has delivered a strong financial performance for the
year through its continued focus on key strategic initiatives; growing through
long-term contracts in targeted business sectors, good customer retention
and strong control of operating costs despite additional cost pressures.
Non-household demand within our wholesale water region fell due to usage;
however, year on year revenue, EBITDA and profit before tax have continued
to grow throughout 2023/24.
The overall impact on revenues for Pennon Water Services, including
the impact of new contract wins, is an increase of 7.2% compared to the
prior year. New business wins have contributed £8.5 million of additional
revenue compared to the last year, with inflation (net of customer attrition)
contributing further to the increase.
The non-household market continues to be very competitive with low
margins, as a result, a clear focus on cost control and efficiencies is critical
to the success of the business. The business has improved its performance
year on year, with underlying operating costs growing marginally behind
improving revenues, the business has improved its underlying EBITDA
by c.72% to £7.4 million (2022/23: £4.3 million). This strong performance
has resulted in the business reporting a profit before tax of £4.7 million
(2022/23: £1.8 million), an increase of 161%.
Group net finance costs
Total net finance costs were £150.2 million compared to £118.2 million in
2022/23, which included a non-underlying gain of £18.4 million resulting from
the repayment of the Bristol Water plc index linked bond due 2041. There are
no non-underlying finance costs in 2023/24.
Underlying net finance costs for the Group of £150.2 million are £13.6 million
higher than last year (2022/23 £136.6 million) arising from: c.£29 million
increased levels of net debt, including post-acquisition finance costs of the
SES Group; continued rate rises (c.£9 million), offset by reduction in inflation
(c.£15 million) and increased levels of capitalised interest on our capital
programme (c.£9 million).
The non-cash element of our finance charges, which accretes to the debt
principal, was c.£56 million (2022/23 c.£67 million).
Overall, the efficient funding mix and hedging strategy has resulted in an
effective interest rate of 5.6% (2022/23 5.5%) for South West Water. The
Group continues to efficiently secure funding for South West Water through
its Sustainable Financing Framework and to ensure c.60% of its interest rate
risk is mitigated in line with the Group Treasury Policy, which is achieved
both through issuing fixed rate debt and effective interest rate hedging, with
a further element being index-linked.
5.6
5.5
3.9
2.5
3.4
2022/232021/222020/212019/20 2023/24
from our associated company, in our 2023/24 results (2022/23: £0.3 million),
an increase of 133%.
Acquisition accounting
As part of the requirements of acquisition accounting, we have determined
the provisional fair values of the acquired balance sheet of SES Water.
Goodwill arising from the acquisition of £15.6 million, based on these
provisional fair values, has been recorded in the Group consolidated balance
sheet and is attributable to the recognition of deferred tax liabilities on fair
value gains recognised as part of the acquisition. The acquisition of the SES
Water Group provides a strategic fit for Pennon Group plc as the Group
expands its presence in water supply across Southern England.
These provisional values will continue to be reviewed and will be finalised
within 12 months from the date of the acquisition. The most material areas of
adjustment relate to the fair value of acquired property, plant and equipment,
including the network infrastructure, and the fair value of SES Water’s
debtportfolio.
Non-underlying items
Non-underlying items for 2023/24 were a net charge before tax of
£25.9 million (2022/23: net charge of £25.3 million). Non-underlying items
are those that in the Directors’ view should be separately identified by virtue
of their size, nature or incidence and where they believe excluding non-
underlying items provides a more useful comparison of business trends and
performance.
The non-underlying charge includes:
£13.9 million of costs in connection with the setting up of a business
transformation programme in South West Water following the merger of
Bristol Water into South West Water.
£0.6 million of expenses in connection with the strategic review of
renewable energy generating investments, not directly attributable to the
intangible assets acquired.
£9.6 million of expenses in connection with the acquisition of SES Water
and the related merger review by the CMA.
£1.8 million of further specifically identifiable costs in respect of mitigating
measures and one-off expenditure to address the impacts of severe
drought conditions following costs of £17.0 million incurred in 2022/23.
The non-underlying charges in 2023/24 give rise to a net tax credit of
£4.9 million in relation to the above items.
Responsible approach to tax
We are proud of our responsible approach to tax. The Group has maintained
the Fair Tax Mark accreditation for the year, having been the first water
company to achieve this status and holding the award continuously
since2018.
The overall 2023/24 tax credit for the Group is £0.6 million (2022/23: credit of
£8.9 million). On an underlying basis, the net tax charge for 2023/24 for the
Group of £4.3 million (2022/23: credit of £3.6 million) consists of:
Current tax credit of £0.6 million, reflecting an effective tax credit rate of
3.6% (2022/23: credit of £2.7 million, 16.1%). The reduction in rate is due to the
Group generating tax losses, all of which are carried forward for future relief.
These tax losses reflect the enhanced capital allowances available because
of full expensing and first year allowances, along with pension payments
made during recent years where tax relief is now due, and capitalised interest
which for tax purposes is deductible in the year incurred. Around 50% of the
Group’s capital additions qualify for enhanced capital allowances. This current
tax credit relates to prior year adjustments in respect of additional interest
deductions due in accordance with UK tax legislation.
Deferred tax charge of £4.9 million (2022/23: credit of £0.9 million). This
primarily reflects a current year deferred tax charge in relation to capital
allowances in excess of depreciation charged across the Group, largely due to
full expensing, and a charge in respect of pension payments paid in previous
years and where tax relief is now due. These are offset by a credit for tax
losses carried forward for utilisation in later periods. The prior year deferred
tax charge is £nil.
Progression of effective interest rates
Share of post-tax profit from associated companies
The Group has a 30% interest in Water2Business Limited (W2B), a water
retailer joint venture with Wessex Water. This investment is accounted for
under the equity method and following a period of losses as the business
reached scale, we are pleased to recognise £0.7 million of profit after tax
1. PWS - 80:20 joint venture with South Staffordshire.
50 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
There is also a non-underlying deferred tax credit of £4.9 million in 2023/24
relating to the non-underlying items set out above. This relates to losses
carried forward for utilisation in later years.
Full expensing deductions which originally applied for the three years from 1
st
April 2023 to 31
st
March 2026 together with 50% first year allowances on long
life assets and integral features, were made permanent in the recent Autumn
Statement. Given the Group’s continued capital investment programme,
these changes mean that the Group does not expect to generate taxable
profits for the foreseeable future, and therefore does not expect to make
anycorporation tax payments during this time.
Earnings per share
The earnings per share calculations reflect an increase in average shares
due to the equity raise in January 2024. The Group has recorded a statutory
loss per share of 3.6 pence per share for the year ended 31
st
March 2024
(2022/23: earnings of nil pence per share). This includes a net non-
underlying charge before tax of £25.9 million (2022/23: £25.3 million) and a
net non-underlying tax credit of £4.9 million (2022/23: credit of £5.3 million).
Our adjusted earnings per share excludes the impact of deferred tax charges
and non-underlying items. For the Group, we have generated adjusted
earnings per share^ for 2023/24 of 6.2 pence (2022/23: 7.3 pence). Excluding
the impact of the loss generated by SES Water in the period post acquisition,
our adjusted earnings per share would be 7.2 pence.
Net debt movements
The Group’s cash flow from operating activities for 2023/24 was
£261.7 million (2022/23: £313.7 million). Cash collections have remained
robust and we continue to monitor these closely and are focused on
providing a broad range of affordability measures to support those in
financial need. The reduction in operating cashflow reflects the lower
levels of underlying profitability in the last two financial years, caused by
inflationary pressures, alongside the cash impact of our Watershare+ and
‘Stop the Drop’ bill credits which were recognised the income statement in
H2 2022/23.
Net interest payments were £109.1 million (2022/23: £154.8 million) with the
higher payment in 2022/23 driven by £51.5 million of interest paid on lease
settlements relating to interest which accretes to the lease principal.
Capital expenditure has resulted in an increase in capital investment cash
outflows of £267.6 million to £598.1 million (2022/23: £330.5 million). This
includes c.£49 million of cash outlay from the total £59 million investment
recognised in Pennon Power.
The acquisition of SES Water resulted in net cash outflows of £62.7 million
being £90.2 million gross consideration, net of £27.5 million cash acquired.
The Group’s net debt is further increased by the £360.1 million book value of
SES Water’s net debt including fair value adjustments of c.£15 million at the
point of acquisition. In addition, £9.6 million of acquisition transaction costs
and costs associated with the CMA review have been recognised as non-
underlying operating costs and cash flows.
In connection with the acquisition, we completed an equity capital raise in
order to ensure we maintain financial discipline with the leverage and capital
structure for the Group. Proceeds from the equity raise, net of associated
expenses, were £175.7 million.
Other significant movements in net debt in 2023/24 include payment of our
interim and final dividends for 2022/23 (£111.7 million) and £46.8 million of
non-cash indexation on our loan instruments.
The Group’s IFRS net debt at 31
st
March 2024 was £3,809.2 million (31
st
March 2023 £2,965.4 million). This includes fair value adjustments on
acquired debt of £125.7 million which are released over the life of the related
debt instruments. The Group’s net debt position excluding these adjustments
is £3,683.5 million.
Sustainable net debt
Pennon Group – summarised net debt flow
(£m)
2023/24
flows
Net debt excluding fair value uplifts 1 April (2,841.4)
Opening balance 1 April (2,965.4)
Cash generated from operations 261.7
Corporation tax received 3.4
Net interest paid (109.1)
Capital investment (598.1)
SES acquisition, net of cash acquired
1
(62.7)
Debt acquired on acquisition including fair value
adjustments (360.1)
Proceeds from share issue 175.7
Ordinary dividends paid (111.7)
Non-cash index-linked accretion (46.8)
Other movements
2
3.9
Closing balance 31 March (3,809.2)
Net debt excluding fair value uplifts 31 March (3,683.5)
3
Robust liquidity and flexible funding strategy
As at 31
st
March 2024, the Group has £601.4 million of cash and committed
facilities. This consists of cash and cash deposits of £171 million (including
£26 million of restricted funds representing deposits with lessors against
future lease obligations) and £335 million of undrawn committed facilities.
Afurther £500 million has been raised since March 2024, providing the
Group with in excess of c.£1 billion of available liquidity, providing enough
funding to support its obligations for at least the next 18 months.
Since 31
st
March 2023, the Group has secured c.£675 million of new debt,
through its diverse portfolio of debt, consisting of:
£475 million in private placements with an average maturity of 13 years
£100 million of new term loans and leasing with an average maturity
of9years
£100 million bilateral facility to support Group investments.
In addition, further pre-funding of £500 million has been secured.
The issuance of private placements signals the move to more benchmark-
sized transactions in both the private placement and public bond markets,
as the capital expenditure and ongoing refinancing continues. Our most
recent private placements were at least 4.5 times oversubscribed, showing
continued support for the Group.
This will see South West Water obtain two strong investment grade
credit ratings during 2024 and it plans to establish a EMTN
4
programme
to facilitate further public issuances and maintain our diverse financing
portfolio.
We look to raise all new and renewed facilities under our Sustainable
Financing Framework where possible with 82% achieved in 2023/24.
The Group took steps during the previous financial year to re-balance the
proportion of index-linked debt to align with previously maintained levels for
the longer-term. Whilst the current level is around 20% including SES Water
we expect this to increase in March 2025 as the swaps mature.
Resulting from the changes above and drawing of new debt during the year,
South West Water gross debt at 31
st
March 2024 was £3,323 million (31
st
March 2023 £2,918 million). The debt has a maturity of up to 33 years with
aweighted average maturity of 13 years.
1. Reflecting £90.2 million on acquisition of SES Water, offset by £27.5 million
cash acquired.
2. Includes unwind of fair value adjustments.
3. Carrying value of fair value acquisition adjustments to net debt as at 31
st
March
2024 – £32.8 million Bournemouth Water, £79.3 million Bristol Water and SES Water
£13.6 million.
4. Euro Medium Term Note.
51Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our CFO’s review continued
South West Water
1
net debt at 31
st
March 2024 is a mix of fixed / swapped
(£2,147 million, 65%), floating (£696 million, 21%) and index-linked borrowings
(£452 million, 14%), which reflects our diverse debt portfolio and compares
to an industry average
2
of fixed / swapped 40%, floating 7% and index-linked
53%. New debt raised during this regulatory period has been fixed to align
to iBoxx indices in line with Ofwat’s approach to allowed cost of debt. Where
appropriate, derivatives are used to fix the rate on floating ratedebt.
At 31
st
March 2024, South West Water’s net debt to RCV ratio
3
stood at 63.5%
(31
st
March 2023 60.8%). This is due to increased capital expenditure and
reduced operating cashflows.
South West Water’s cost of finance, with an effective interest rate in 2023/24
of 5.6%
1
, continues to benefit from the diverse portfolio of debt.
Strong investment grade gearing levels
As we progress through the remainder of K7, we expect the mix of our debt
portfolio to evolve. We are currently considering the most effective debt
structure to provide best value for our shareholders whilst maintaining
theflexibility to adjust to market challenges and to remain within our
treasury policy of at least 60% fixed rate debt throughout the current
regulatory period.
As the Group continues to grow through capital investment in our
infrastructure so will our funding requirements. In the coming years,
weexpect the Group to manage its portfolio with larger, and more diverse
debt instruments, taking advantage of the public ratings once established.
The Group plans to raise c.£500 million in new funding by March 2025
tocomplete the K7 business plan.
We will continue to maintain a diverse portfolio of debt to support flexibility
and growth opportunities. In the long term, this investment will provide
returns through K8 revenues and a higher RCV.
As we look to obtain strong investment grade credit ratings during the year,
a target gearing level of below 72% will need to be maintained and South
West Water remains well within the level.
As the year progresses, further clarity will be provided through the draft and
final determinations. The Group and Water business balance sheets will be
optimised post SES Water CMA clearance and the PR24 outcomes. The start
of the new PR24 business plans, in April 2025, will provide a point of re-set
and policy review.
Retaining value in the regulated business
In the first four years of K7, South West Water has created c.£820 million
of value for the Group from base returns, RORE outperformance and the
growth in RCV. The South West Water Board has taken a prudent approach
to its dividend payments in making distributions to Pennon Group and as
result c.£250 million has been distributed in K7 to date. This results in over
£500 million of retained value in South West Water, which the South West
Water Board will consider as K7 closes.
Internal borrowing
South West Water’s funding is treated for regulatory purposes as ring-fenced.
This means that funds raised by South West Water are not available for other
areas of the Group.
Bristol Water was transferred to South West Water in February 2023 and
all the debt is now managed on the South West Water standard covenant
package as unsecured and unrated.
Following its acquisition, SES Water continues to maintain its current Group
structure, which will be reviewed as part of the integration process.
Pennon Water Services funding is predominantly provided by Pennon. Pennon will
continue to use funds to support the Group’s ongoing operations as appropriate.
Taxation strategy
Transparency remains a critical component of our approach, recognising that
openness and honesty with our customers is essential. Optimising our tax
position benefits them, for example by keeping water bills down, but we do
not enter into artificial tax arrangements, use tax havens or take an aggressive
stance in the interpretation of tax legislation. As a long-term business with a
long-term approach to financial management, there have been no changes to
the Group’s overall tax strategy this year compared to last.
We continue to hold the Fair Tax Mark. Launched in 2014, the Fair
Tax Foundation’s purpose is to encourage and recognise businesses
through their Fair Tax Mark accreditation scheme. This is an independent
accreditation scheme for businesses paying their fair share of corporation
tax and reporting on their tax practices transparently. We have also inspired
other water companies to apply for the accreditation, thereby improving the
tax transparency of the sector in which we operate.
Under our tax strategy we:
At all times, consider the Group’s corporate and social responsibilities in
relation to its tax affairs.
Operate appropriate tax risk governance processes to ensure that the
policies are applied throughout the Group.
Comply with our legal requirements, file all appropriate returns on time
and make all tax payments by the due date.
Consider all taxes as part of ongoing decisions.
Do not enter into artificial tax arrangements nor take an aggressive stance
in the interpretation of tax legislation.
Do not undertake transactions that are outside the Group’s low-risk
appetite for tax or not in line with the Group’s Code of Conduct.
Engage with HMRC in a proactive and transparent way and discuss our
interpretation of tax laws in real time, such interpretations following both
the letter and spirit of the laws.
1. Based on South West Water Group, including Bristol Water excl. SES.
2. UK water position as at 31
st
March 2023 as per published Annual Performance
Reports – weighted average.
3. Based on South West Water group including Bristol Water net debt/shadow RCV.
Index-linked: £452m
Floating: £696m
Fixed: £2,147m
£3,295m
TOTAL
South West Water Net Debt Structure (£m)
South West Water
£5,186m
£4,716m
£4,209m
£3,393m
£3,573m
2023202220212020 2024
South West Water RCV^
52 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Do not have any connections with tax havens unless it is necessary
forthepurposes of trading within those jurisdictions.
As a long-term business with a long-term approach to financial
management, there have been no changes to the tax strategy which is
reviewed and reaffirmed on an annual basis.
Further details are given in the Group’s tax strategy report available on the
Pennon Group website www.pennon-group.co.uk
Tax contribution 2023/24 – borne/collected
The Group’s total tax contribution (TTC) for 2023/24 amounted to £100 million
(excluding £144 million of VAT receipts) (2022/23 £95 million excluding
£150 million of VAT receipts). TTC is a standardised measure ofagroup’s total
tax contribution, having been developed by PwC and the 100 Group (FTSE
100 Finance Directors). It is acknowledged as being a fair and comparable
representation of total tax cost.
TTC looks at taxes borne, and taxes collected. Taxes borne includes all taxes
which are a cost to the Group, such as business rates, corporation tax and
employers’ National Insurance contributions (NICs). Taxes collected and
recovered highlights where the business is collecting tax on behalf ofHMRC.
Employment taxes totalled £52 million (2022/23 £41 million) including employees’
Pay As You Earn (PAYE) and total NICs. The total amount of £52 million includes
PAYE of £5 million (2022/23 £4 million) on pension payments made by the Group
pension scheme. A net amount of £37 million (2022/23 £30 million) was collected
on behalf of the authorities for employee payroll taxes.
Business rates of £30 million (2022/23 £35 million) were paid to local
authorities. This is a direct cost to the Group and reduces profit before tax.
UK Corporation Tax receipts from HMRC in the year were £3 million (2022/23
£1 million payment) in relation to over-payments made in prior years. There
were no payments due in respect of 2023/24 as the Group has generated tax
losses in the year.
Payments to the Environment Agency and other regulatory bodies total
£20 million (2022/23 £17 million). This reduces profit before tax.
Fuel excise duty of £1 million (2022/23 £1 million) related to transport costs.
This reduces profit before tax.
VAT repayments of £144 million (2022/23 £150 million) have been received by
the Group from HMRC. VAT has no material impact on profit and is excluded
from the TTC figure to avoid distortions in this.
Contingencies
Ofwat and the Environment Agency (EA) announced an industry-wide
investigation into sewage treatment works on 18
th
November 2021. On 27
th
June 2022, as part of its ongoing investigation, Ofwat announced enforcement
action against South West Water Limited, the company is now included
alongside five other companies which received enforcement notices in
March 2022. The Group continues to work openly with Ofwat to comply with
the notice as part of this ongoing investigation. The Group has undertaken
its own internal investigation and investment interventions have been
undertaken at a small number of our sites. In addition, the Group has looked for
opportunities for additional future investment to include further storm storage
and an extension of its sewer misuse programme which has been shared
with Ofwat. Ofwat have yet to formally respond on the investigation and the
timing ofaresponse is unknown, although has been potentially indicated for
Summer2024.
Until such time that an initial response is received, the potential outcome of
these investigations continues to be unknown. Ofwat has a range of options
that it could apply from closing the investigation with no further action,
agreeing to formal S.19 undertakings through to fining the Group up to 10%
of its revenue in relation to the regulated wastewater business. Given the
wide range of possible outcomes therefore the potential outcome of this
investigation continues to be unknown, and it is not possible to estimate
anyobligations arising from the investigation with any certainty.
On 23
rd
May 2023 Ofwat announced an investigation into South West Water's
2021/22 operational performance data relating to leakage and per capita
consumption. This operational performance data was reported in South
Employment taxes: £52m
Business rates: £30m
Corporation tax: £-3m
Environmental payments: £14m
Fuel excise duty: £1m
Other: £6m
£100m
TOTAL
West Water's Annual Performance Report 2021/22. This report is subject
to assurance processes which include independent checks and balances
carried out by an external technical auditor. The Group continues to work
openly and constructively with Ofwat to comply with the formal notice issued
to South West Water as part of this investigation. The Group has undertaken
its own internal investigation into the data and third party experts have
concluded the calculations are within a tolerance as reported, as a result
there were no detrimental impacts to customers through Outcome Delivery
Incentives (‘ODIs’). The Group recognises opportunities to enhance data
quality to improve the estimation process and these have been shared
withOfwat.
Until such time that an initial response is received, the potential outcome of
these investigations continues to be unknown. Ofwat has a range of options
that it could apply from closing the investigation with no further action,
agreeing to formal S.19 undertakings through to fining the Group up to 10%
of its revenue in relation to the regulated drinking water business. Given the
wide range of possible outcomes therefore the potential outcome of this
investigation continues to be unknown, and it is not possible to estimate any
obligations arising from the investigation with any certainty.
Pensions
At 31
st
March 2024, the overall surplus on retirement obligations of
£26.6 million compares to a surplus of £29.3 million at 31
st
March 2023.
The small reduction in the overall Group surplus in 2023/24 of c.£3 million reflects:
c. £8 million net reduction in surplus of the Group’s principal pension
scheme, Pennon Group Pension Scheme (PGPS), recognised in other
comprehensive income, reflecting adverse experience losses on deferred
revaluation and pension increases, offset by favourable movements in
gains in demographic assumptions.
c. £3 million recognition of net pension surplus acquired with SES Water.
c. £2 million increase on Bristol Water scheme surplus arising from change
in income tax rate which is applied to restrict the surplus recognised.
The triennial valuation of PGPS as at 31
st
March 2022 was finalised in March
2023 and no deficit recovery contributions were required. The ongoing funding
requirements for the Company to the scheme are limited to the continuing
administration expenses.
The Group pension surplus includes a net surplus of c.£9 million (31
st
March
2023: c.£7 million) relating to the Bristol Water Section of the Water Companies
Pension Scheme (WCPS). The gross surplus remains largely unchanged as the
liabilities of the scheme are fully insured through a bulk annuity policy. The net
surplus has increased as the tax rate on the restriction applied to the surplus
under UK tax legislation has reduced from 35% to 25%. The trustee of WCPS
Total Tax Contribution
53Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
continues to work through the process to wind up the Bristol Water section of
WCPS and has indicated its intention to return the surplus to the Company.
The net surplus recognised from the SES Water acquisition reflects the surplus in
the SES Water section of WCPS. The trustee of WCPS has recently fully insured
the liabilities of the scheme through a bulk annuity policy. The surplus has been
restricted for income tax, consistent with the Bristol Water scheme.
Dividends
The Group continues to strive to deliver on its commitments to customers,
shareholders and stakeholders as our investments drive strong and
sustainable results. Around 50% of Pennon’s shareholders are UK-based
investors including individuals, pension funds, and charities. Over a third of
the Group’s c.3,500 employees (excluding SES Water) are shareholders and
following the second issuance of our unique WaterShare+ initiative, around
90,000 customers are now also shareholders.
Pennon’s 2020-2025 dividend policy of growth of CPIH +2% reflects the
Board’s ongoing confidence in the Group’s strategy and is underpinned by
continued RORE outperformance in South West Water.
The Board has recommended a final dividend of 30.33 pence per share for
the year ended 31
st
March 2024. Together with the interim dividend of 14.04
pence per share paid on 5
th
April 2024 this gives a total dividend for the year
of 44.37 pence. This represents an increase of 3.84% on 2022/23 which is per
our policy (March 2024 CPIH + 2%) with a 1.96% reduction for the £2.4 million
fine from the Environment Agency. Pennon offers shareholders the
opportunity to invest their dividend in a Dividend Reinvestment Plan (DRIP).
The proposed dividends totalling £126.9 million are covered 2.7 times by
underlying EBITDA (2022/23 2.8 times). Pennon Group plc has substantial
retained earnings and a sustainable balance sheet to support its stated
dividend policy. The strong fundamentals of its principal operating subsidiary,
South West Water Limited, underpin this policy with its strong RORE and
growing RCV. Dividends are charged against retained earnings in the year
inwhich they are paid.
Investing for sustainable growth – renewable energy
generation
In line with both our long-term sustainable growth strategy in UK
environmental infrastructure and our commitment to deliver Net Zero
by 2030, we have committed c.£145 million for investment in renewable
energy generation. This strategy will also benefit the Group by reducing
our exposure to future volatility in wholesale power markets and will deliver
attractive and sustainable financial returns.
Pennon Power, a wholly owned subsidiary to Pennon Group plc, has acquired
the rights to build four solar farms, one of which includes a co-located
battery storage asset in the UK. Specifically these investments include:
A co-located solar (45 MWp) and battery storage (60 MWh) site in Fife, acquired
in May 2023. This is a ready to build site, with consents in place, with total build
costs expected to be c.£60 million. Solar generation is expected to be c.39 GWh
commencing at the end of next financial year 2024/25.
A further three sites, located in Aberdeenshire, Cumbria and Buckinghamshire,
acquired in July 2023. These sites, with total anticipated build costs of
c.£85 million, are expected to provide a further 98.5MWp of generation capacity,
generating c.96 GWh and are targeted to be operational during 2025 and first
half of 2026.
Of this overall commitment, we have incurred total costs of c.£59 million for
the acquisition of these sites and construction costs to date on our first project
at Fife. This is expected to commence energy generation late in financial year
2024/25. Aberdeenshire and Cumbria sites will enter construction during late
summer 2024 and Buckinghamshire in 2025. The financial contribution will
accelerate in financial year 2025/26 and all four sites will generate income
during 2026/27.
Return on Regulated Equity^
During K7 to date we have continued to deliver South West Water group
RORE performance (excluding SES Water) of 7.3% cumulatively, equating
toc.£160 million of outperformance. This consists of c.£255 million financing
outperformance, net of c.£60 million totex^ overspend, and c.£35 million
ODI net penalty impact. This has enabled the funding of additional capital
investment initiatives as noted above.
The cumulative benefits from the structure of our debt book on financing
costs persist, but have reduced due to the impact of falling inflation. Totex
performance has been impacted in year due to peak levels of capital
expenditure following past outperformance.
ODI performance across the South West Water group in 2023/24 has been
impacted by the extreme weather events, including heavy rainfall through to
March 2024. As a consequence, South West Water has incurred a penalty of
c. £12.1m
3
(FY2022/23: penalty c. £4.2m). South West Water continues to build
on its ODI performance with c.70% either on track or ahead of target
1
across
abroad range of challenging bespoke, common, and comparative measures.
This performance will contribute to the potential ODI award at the end of K7.
ODI performance for Bristol Water is on track to achieve c. 70% of its ODIs and
has resulted in a net financial penalty of c. £1.7m
9
(FY2022/23: penalty of c. £5.9m).
Financial outlook
2
Looking to 2024/25, we expect overall organic revenue growth with the
combined impact of inflation on our 2024/25 tariffs (net of the year on year
impact of regulatory adjustments and ODI penalties) and ongoing expected
growth in our non-household retail business. The full year impact of trading
at SES Water will improve this further.
Overall, we expect total operating costs in South West Water to be broadly
flat compared to 2023/24 levels. Total power costs
4
in 2023/24 were
£110 million (wholesale costs £73 million, non-commodity costs £37 million).
Whilst wholesale power cost levels are falling, we anticipate a more modest
improvement in our overall power costs as the impact of hedging over the
last two years continues to unwind. These expected reductions coupled
with other efficiencies from our transformation programmes will be largely
offset by normal inflationary pressures on other input costs. In particular we
continue to recognise the pressures of the cost of living on our colleagues
and pay increases of c.4% have been agreed. Total Group operating costs will
increase overall, with growth in the non-household retail business outside our
region increasing wholesale water costs, and the impact of an additional nine
months of trading at SES Water.
Further increases in depreciation are expected as a result of our capital
investment programme and the full year impact of SES Water.
Increased debt levels to support our capital investment profile are expected
to result in an overall increase in net finance costs. The total Group net
finance costs are also expected to increase with the full year impact of SES.
Overall capital expenditure is expected to reduce in 2024/25. In South West
Water, following the peak in 2023/24, we expect overall capital expenditure of
c.£930 million in the last two years of K7. However we will continue to assess
the benefits of early start expenditure for K8. The build-out of our Pennon
Power renewable energy sites will continue. The full year impact of SES
Water will represent a small increase in our overall capital expenditure.
We remain in a strong position from a liquidity perspective with additional
facilities already raised in the early part of the year, and with further
programmes planned, supported by our plan to have two strong public
ratings by the end of the year.
The Group’s RCV is expected to increase in line with K7 business plan
levels of investment in addition to additional and accelerated investment,
regulatory true-ups ad inflationary impacts. SES Water’s RCV at 31
st
March
2024 was c.£0.4 billion.
Steve Buck
Group Chief Financial Officer
20
th
May 2024
Our CFO’s review continued
1. On track or ahead of target, or within regulatory tolerances (deadband).
2. All guidance measured on an underlying basis.
3. Excludes impact of Per Capita Consumption, as under review by Ofwat
4. Based on current market pricing and current hedged position of c.85% for 2024/25
and c.30% for 2025/26
54 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Our risk management
The Group operates within a complex and evolving risk
environment which includes responding to changing Government
policy, multipleregulatory frameworks and increasing customer
andsocietal expectations.
the context of the Group’s strategic priorities and the external environment
within which the Group operates.
The consideration of these risks and the effectiveness of their management
against the desired risk appetite is informed by, and reviewed against
other data points including; key performance metrics, operational
insights, theoutcome of assurance activities and broader geopolitical and
economicdevelopments.
This is underpinned by an established risk management framework which
forms part of our governance structure and is embedded into our processes,
culture and ways of working ensuring that there is robust identification,
review, challenge and assurance over the management of both our current
and emerging risks and opportunities.
The long-term success of the Group is dependent on the effective
management of risks and opportunities and remains a key focus for the
Pennon Board andExecutive.
The Group’s risk management framework considers risk from both a strategic
(top down) and tactical (bottom up) perspective. This enables a common
understanding of risks and opportunities and their interdependencies,
allows risks and opportunities to be cascaded and escalated effectively
andprovides amulti-layered approach to the review and challenge of risk.
Pennon’s risk management framework
Principal and emerging risks are regularly reviewed by both the Pennon
Board and the Pennon Executive throughout the year and are considered in
Operational Risk and Assurance Steering Group
Risk Management Responsibilities
Review of highest priority tactical risks within the Water
relatedactivities.
Perform horizon scanning of emerging tactical risks.
Share innovation and encourage collaboration in the management
of common risk themes.
Operate as a conduit for the escalation of risks.
Key Assurance Activities
Ensuring the completion of actions to mitigate risks identified.
Pennon Executive Committee
Risk Management Responsibilities
Ensuring the operation of the Group’s risk management
andinternal control frameworks.
Quarterly review of the Group’s principal risks and mitigation
strategies.
Review of significant bottom-up tactical risks.
Provides challenge to individual functional areas over the
management of their risks.
Horizon scanning to identify emerging risks and opportunities.
Oversight
Pennon Board
Risk Management Responsibilities
Sets the Group’s strategic objectives.
Establishes the Group’s risk appetite.
Determines the Group’s principal risks.
Ensures an effective internal control framework.
Key Assurance Activities
Quarterly review of the Group’s principal risks against the
determined risk appetite.
Quarterly review of emerging risks and horizon scanning.
Audit Committee
Risk Management Responsibilities
Reviews the effectiveness of the Group’s risk management
andinternal control frameworks.
Key Assurance Activities
Performs regular deep-dive reviews on principal risks.
Ensures an appropriate level of assurance coverage over the
Group’s principal risks.
Approves the risk-based Group Internal Audit Plan.
Receives reports on the outcomes of key assurance activities.
Second line
Group Internal Audit
Risk Management Responsibilities
Provides independent, risk-based assurance on the effectiveness
ofthe internal control framework.
Coordination of independent assurance activities.
Key Assurance Activities
Quarterly reporting to Audit Committee and Pennon Executive
on the effectiveness of internal controls and the outcomes of key
assurance activities.
Operational Risk Management
Risk Management Responsibilities
Identification, evaluation and monitoring of strategic
andtacticalrisks.
Maintaining robust internal controls to mitigate key risks.
Monitoring compliance with internal control framework.
Key Assurance Activities
Ensure robust first line assurance across key business processes
Annual self-assessment and certification of compliance.
Third line
First line
55Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our risk management continued
O
v
e
r
s
i
g
h
t
Risk appetite
and identification
Risk
assessment
Risk monitoring
and reporting
Risk
mitigation
4
3
2
1
A B C D
4
3
2
1
A B C D
Risks Matrix
Likelihood
Likelihood
Impact Impact
Opportunity Matrix
Key: Likelihood of risk occurring over 5 year period
1. Rare 2. Unlikely 3. Possible 4. Probable
Only in
extreme
circumstances
Less than
evenchance
Even chance Above average
Key: Financial Impact (over 5 years)
A. Minor B. Moderate C. Major D. Severe
<2% Profit
AfterTax
2-5% Profit After
Tax
5-7.5% Profit
After Tax
>7.5% Profit
AfterTax
A consistent methodology is applied when assessing the Group’s risks and
opportunities (including climate-related risks and opportunities), which
considers both the likelihood of a risk occurring and its potential impact.
Risk impact is assessed across various financial and non-financial categories
including: financial, safety, environmental, stakeholder and customer impact,
reputation, sustainability, and quality. Likelihood is defined as the probability
of a risk event occurring over the next five years under four categories
(probable, possible, unlikely or rare) with defined probability thresholds.
Risks are assessed on both a ‘gross’ (without the consideration of existing
control measures) and ‘net’ (with consideration of existing control measures)
basis enabling the effectiveness of control measures to be assessed and
assured. The combined impact and likelihood determines the overall Red,
Amber, Green (RAG) risk rating which is assessed against the relevant risk
appetite to determine and prioritise further action.
Environmental, social and governance risk management
Our purpose and values recognise the broader societal role that the
Group plays within the regions and communities it serves. Consequently
environmental, social and governance (ESG) considerations are at the
heart of the Group’s activities and how we operate as a responsible
business. Theidentification, assessment and management of ESG risks
and opportunities is integrated into the Group’s overall risk management
framework and methodology. The delivery of ESG metrics and targets, and
the associated risks and opportunities, are monitored thorough the ESG
framework by the ESG Committee. Further detail is provided on page 144.
As the owner of a water and wastewater company, the Group acknowledges
the fundamental impact that climate change has on the Group’s strategy
andpriorities and is considered to be pervasive across the Group’s principal
risk profile. The assessment of the individual principal risks, as detailed
within the table below, has included the consideration of both physical and
transitional climate change influences, where relevant, and the mitigating
actions being taken.
Further detail on the specific physical and transitional climate change risks
and opportunities relevant to the Group, along with mitigating actions being
taken, are detailed further within TCFD on pages 78 to 110.
South West Water technical (non-financial) data
In addition to the risk management framework detailed above which
applies across the Group, recognising the importance of the regulatory ODI
framework, South West Water engages independent, third-party auditors
to audit the accuracy of the technical (non-financial) data reported within
the various annual performance reports and regulatory publications and
submissions, including its performance commitments and environmental
data. Furthermore, a third party provider, DNV, has also performed additional
assurance work over selected sustainability measures.
Continuous improvements to risk management
andinternal control
The Group is committed to continuously improving its ability to identify
and respond to current and emerging risks. Examples of risk management
improvements during the year include:
The Group’s confidential Speak Up process has been reviewed and
furtherenhanced.
A dedicated second line function has been established focused on
environmental permit assurance across the Group’s water and wastewater
sites, providing an additional layer of assurance in this area.
South West Water has successfully achieved external ISO45001
accreditation of its Occupational Health and Safety Management System.
The formation of the Operational Risk and Assurance Steering Group
has enhanced the bottom up process through the collective review
and discussion of key tactical risks, enabling greater collaboration
andinnovation.
Sutton and East Surrey (SES Water) Risk Management
Framework
Following the acquisition of Sutton and East Surrey Water (SES Water) plc
on 10
th
January 2024, the transaction is currently subject to review by the
Competition and Market’s Authority. In line with the requirements of the
CMA’s Initial Enforcement Order (IEO) SES Water has continued to operate
separately from the wider Pennon Group.
Throughout 2023/24 SES Water has continued to operate their established
risk management framework and processes to identify, manage and mitigate
risks. This has included regular review of the SES Water principal and emerging
risks and mitigation strategies by the Executive Management Team and twice
a year principal risks are reviewed by the Audit Committee who report to the
SES Water Board. SES Water will continue to separately operate their risk
management processes until such a time that regulatory approval is received.
56 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Management of South West Water within the Group’s
risk management framework
Pennon manages its risks in such a way that South West Water, as
a regulated company, is protected from risk elsewhere in the Group.
TheGroup’s principal risks and uncertainties include those Group-level
risksthat could materially impact on South West Water.
Pennon’s risk management and internal control frameworks ensure that
it does not take any action that would cause South West Water to breach
its licence obligations. Further, the Group’s governance and management
structures mean that there is full understanding and consideration of
South West Water’s duties and obligations under its respective licences,
aswell asan appropriate level of information sharing and disclosure to give
South West Water assurance that it is not exposed as a result of activities
elsewhere within the Group.
Horizon scanning
Emerging risks and opportunities are considered to be factors or events
which could have a future impact on the achievement of the Group’s
strategic priorities, but lack the required clarity or certainty in order to
adequately assess their impact. Horizon scanning of emerging risks and
opportunities is embedded within the risk management process.
Emerging risks are reviewed by the Pennon Executive and Pennon Board as
part of their regular assessment of the Group’s risk profile. Notable emerging
risks and opportunities are detailed within the table below:
Risk appetite
There are inherent risks that exist within the water sector and all risk cannot
be completely eliminated in the delivery of the Group’s activities. The Group
therefore seeks to strike an appropriate balance between risk and reward
which aligns not only with the Group’s strategic priorities but also its purpose
and values.
Recognising that it is not possible to apply a single risk appetite to all risks
that the Group is exposed to, the Board has developed overarching risk
appetite statements foreach risk category which then informs the risk
appetite statement for individual principal risks.
This allows the business to pursue value-enhancing opportunities, while
maintaining an overall level of risk exposure that the Board considers to
beappropriate.
The risk appetite statement for each risk category is detailed below:
Geopolitical Tensions
Comment Risk category Time horizon
Increased escalation of conflict in the
Middle East combined with the ongoing
war in Ukraine could further impact the
global economy, heighten energy resilience
risks and disrupt key supply chains such
as chemicals.
Market and
Economic
Conditions
Short-
Medium
term
Artificial intelligence and machine learning
Comment Risk category Time horizon
There is a risk that automated intelligence
and learning deployed within operational
processes develops faster than
Government regulations and standards.
Operating
performance
Long term
Quality of water resources
Comment Risk category Time horizon
Changes in regulatory requirements over
the treatment of micro-plastics, micro-
pollutants and ‘forever chemicals’ (e.g.
PFAS) as a result of ongoing research may
require significant changes in operational
processes in the water treatment process.
Operating
performance
Business
Systems
and Capital
Investment
Medium-
Long term
Changes to demographics within the areas that
weserve
Comment Risk category Time horizon
Increases in population migration to the
South West due to climate change and
an increasingly aging population could
place greater demand on our resources
and assets.
Operating
performance
Long term
Law, regulation and finance
Risk Appetite
The Board is committed to complying fully with, and being seen to be complying
with, all relevant laws, regulations and obligations and has no appetite for non-
compliance in this area. This includes, but is not limited to, environmental and
health and safety laws and regulations.
The Group also operates a low risk appetite in respect of our financing strategy,
ensuring our long-term financing commitments are met.
The Board acknowledges, however, that the Group operates in a complex
environment influenced by Government and regulatory policy. Consequently,
there is a greater risk appetite in these areas whilst seeking to mitigate any
potential downside and leverage opportunities that may arise from Government
policy and regulatory change.
Market and Economic Conditions
Risk Appetite
The Board recognises that the Group’s activities are exposed to changes in
macroeconomic and external market conditions. The Group seeks to take well-
judged and informed decisions to mitigate these risks where possible but accepts
that a level of residual risk may remain beyond the Board’s control.
Operating performance
Risk Appetite
Whilst the Board recognises that unforeseen events do occur from time to time,
the Board has no appetite for significant operational failure of our water and
wastewater assets and seeks to reduce both the likelihood and impact through
long-term planning and careful management of our operational assets.
There is greater appetite for well-informed risk taking to develop further markets,
subject to this not detrimentally impacting on the level of service expected of our
regulators, customers and wider stakeholders.
Business Systems and Capital Investment
Risk Appetite
The Board has a low risk appetite for risk associated with the delivery of capital
investment within our regulated business plan.
There is greater appetite for broader value accretive investments with risk
weighted against the expected level of return on a case-by-case basis and
subject to this not detrimentally impacting on the level of service expected of our
regulators, customers and wider stakeholders within our core water business.
The Group seeks to minimise technology and security risk to the lowest possible
level without detrimentally impacting on the Group’s operations.
57Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our risk management continued
Principal risks and uncertainties
During the year the Board has carried out a detailed review of the Group’s principal risks in the context of the Group’s strategic objectives and priorities as well
as the external environment within which it operates. This has included:
Confirming that the Group’s risk appetite statements remain appropriate.
Receiving and reviewing updates on the Group’s principal risks, including movements in the risk exposure.
Undertaking horizon scanning of emerging risks and trends.
Performing deep dive reviews into key risk areas.
Through the Audit Committee, confirmed the effectiveness of the risk management and internal control framework.
This has resulted in the following material changes to the Group’s principal risks compared with those previously reported:
The water resources and operational water treatment risks have been combined into a single drinking water principal risk, reflecting the interconnectivity
ofthese individual elements.
Delivery of the Group’s net zero programme has been removed as a standalone principal risk and instead reflected within the delivery of the Group’s broader
environmental commitments and associated risks.
A new principal risk has been established reflecting the ongoing CMA process over the SES Water acquisition.
These principal risks have also been considered in preparing the viability statement on page 65.
58 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc58 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Overview of Pennon’s principal risk profile
The chart below summarises the net risk assessment of the Group’s Principal risks relevant to the risk categories.
Category Reference Strategic priorities Risk description
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Law. Regulation
and finance
A
1, 2, 3, 4
Changes in Government policy
B
1, 2, 3, 4
Changes in regulatory frameworks and requirements
C
1, 2, 3, 4
Non-compliance with laws and regulations
D
1, 2, 3, 4
Inability to secure sufficient finance and funding, within our debt covenants,
tomeet ongoing commitments
E
1, 2
Non-compliance or occurrence of an avoidable health and safety incident
F
3
Failure to pay all pension obligations as they fall due and increased costs
totheGroup should the defined benefit pension scheme deficit increase
Market and
economic conditions
G
3, 4
Macroeconomic near term risks impacting on inflation, interest rates and
powerprices
Operating
performance
H
2
Failure to secure, treat and supply clean drinking water
I
1, 3
Failure to improve wastewater performance resulting in environmental
commitments not being delivered
J
4
Failure to provide excellent service or meet the needs and expectations of our
customers and communities
K
1, 2, 3, 4
Difficulty in recruiting and retaining staff with the skills required to deliver the
Group’s strategy
Business systems and
capital investment
L
1, 2, 3
Insufficient capacity and resilience of the supply chain to support the delivery
of the Group’s operational and capital programmes in K8
M
1, 2, 4
Inadequate technological security results in a breach of the Group’s assets,
systems and data
N
4
Failure to receive CMA approval for the acquisition of SES Water
C
D
L
M
J
K
I
A
E
F
N
G
H
B
L
a
w
,
r
e
g
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
a
n
d
f
i
n
a
n
c
e
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s
s
y
s
t
e
m
s
a
n
d
c
a
p
i
t
a
l
i
n
v
e
s
t
m
e
n
t
M
a
r
k
e
t
a
n
d
e
c
o
n
o
m
i
c
c
o
n
d
i
t
i
o
n
s
Key for pages 59 to 64 – Strategic priorities
1
Water Quality and Resilience
2
Storm Overflows and pollutions
3
Net Zero and Environmental gains
4
Addressing affordability and delivering for our customers
Net risk level
High
Medium
Low
Direction of travel
Increasing
Stable
Decreasing
Climate change and nature-based impacts
T
Transitional climate change/nature based influence
P
Physical climate change/nature based influence
59Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Law regulation and finance
Principal risk
A
Changes in
Governmentpolicy
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
1, 2, 3, 4
Climate change influence
T
Nature related influence
T
Changes in Government
policy and direction may
fundamentally impact
our ability to deliver the
Group’s strategic priorities,
impacting shareholder
value.
Mitigation
There remains a significant focus on the water sector across all political parties
ahead of a General Election which is expected to take place later in 2024.
We actively engage and respond to policy consultations and the Group regularly
engages with a MPs and other political stakeholders, both directly and via Water
UK. This includes highlighting the impact that our proposed capital investment
of £2.8bn in the next regulatory period will have on our operational performance
as well as our wider contribution to society and the economy.
Additionally, horizon scanning of emerging changes in Government policy,
including climate change related policies, is regularly undertaken to monitor
andassess the potential direct or indirect impact on the Group.
Appetite
We recognise that Government policy evolves which presents both risks and
opportunities. The Group seeks to minimise the potential risks and maximise
opportunities through regular engagement and robust scenario planning.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Principal risk
B
Changes in regulatory
frameworks and
requirements
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
1, 2, 3, 4
Climate change influence
T
Nature related influence
T
Changes to regulatory
frameworks may impact
on the deliverability and
affordability of the Group’s
priorities, which can impact
shareholder value.
Mitigation
South West Water has an established and experienced regulatory function.
Arobust governance framework remains in place over the PR24 business plan.
Following the submission of South West Water’s business plan in October
2023, South West Water has been working proactively with Ofwat and other
regulators as part of Ofwat’s standard review process.
A significant degree of uncertainty will remain until such time that Ofwat
confirms their Draft Determination, particularly whether the levels of funding
approved will be sufficient enable the significant levels of investment set out
within the business plan.
Appetite
We accept that regulatory frameworks evolve which creates both risks and
opportunities. We seek to minimise the potential risks by targeting changes
which are NPV neutral over the longer-term to protect customer affordability
and shareholder value.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Principal risk
C
Non-compliance with
lawsand regulations
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
1, 2, 3, 4
Climate change influence
T P
Nature related influence
T P
The Group is required
to comply with a range
of regulated and non-
regulated laws and
regulations across
our businesses. Non-
compliance with one or
a number of these may
result in financial penalties
negative impact on our
ability to operate effectively
and reputational damage to
the Group.
Mitigation
The Group operates within robust and mature frameworks, which includes
second line compliance functions, ensuring compliance with permit and
other requirements of Ofwat, the Environment Agency and other relevant
regulators. These frameworks are regularly reviewed and assured to ensure the
Group remains compliant with the increasingly complex legal and regulatory
landscape. The control framework has been further enhanced during the year
with the creation of a dedicated internal Environmental Permit Assurance Team.
The Group also maintains a comprehensive internal framework, overseen by the
Legal Compliance function, to ensure compliance with corporate laws applicable
to public limited companies, reinforced through key policies approved by the
Pennon Board and compliance training provided to staff.
The Group operates a confidential whistleblowing process which has been
comprehensively reviewed during the year. This is overseen by the Executive-
led Ethics Management Committee.
There remains an increased appetite amongst regulators for pursuing
enforcement action for perceived non-compliance with industry-wide
investigations of wastewater treatment works permit compliance ongoing.
Appetite
The Group maintains the highest standards of compliance and has no appetite
for legal or regulatory breaches.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Our risk management continued
60 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Law regulation and finance
Principal risk
D
Inability to secure
sufficient finance and
funding, within our debt
covenants, to meet
ongoing commitments
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
1, 2, 3, 4
Climate change influence
T P
Nature related influence
T P
Failure to maintain funding
requirements could lead
to additional financing
costs and put our growth
agenda at risk. Breach of
covenants could result in
the requirement to repay
certain debt.
Mitigation
The Group has well established treasury, funding and cash flow arrangements
inplace, underpinned by a Treasury Management Policy endorsed by the
Pennon Board.
The Group’s financing commitments and cash flow, funding and covenant
compliance is regularly reviewed by the Pennon Executive and Pennon Board.
Since March 2023 over £700m has been secured through the Group’s
Sustainable Financing Framework.
The Group retains £601.4m of cash and committed facilities as at 31
st
March2024.
Appetite
The Group operates a prudent approach to our financing strategy, maintaining
an appropriate mix of cash and pre-funding facilities, to ensure our funding
requirements are fully met.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Principal risk
E
Non-compliance or
occurrence of an
avoidable health and
safety incident
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
1, 2
Climate change influence
P
Nature related influence
P
A significant health and
safety event could result
in financial penalties,
significant legal costs and
damage to the Group’s
reputation.
Mitigation
The Group has continued to deliver and embed the 2025 Homesafe strategy.
Established health and safety training, procedures and reporting systems are
complimented with site based investment, regular site visits by senior staff,
initiatives such as Site Pride and Homesafe Live as well a regular programme
ofwellbeing events.
Health and safety performance is monitored by the Pennon Executive and
therespective Board and Executive Health and Safety Committees.
During the year South West Water successfully achieved ISO45001
accreditation of its Occupational Health and Safety Management System and
the Group achieved its best ever health and safety performance with 15 LTIs
during the year – a reduction of 46% on the prior year.
Appetite
The Group has no appetite for health and safety related incidents and
maintainsthe highest standards of compliance for our staff, contractors and
other third parties.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Principal risk
F
Failure to pay all pension
obligations as they fall
due and increased costs
to the Group should the
defined benefit pension
scheme deficit increase
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
3
Climate change influence
n/a
Nature related influence
n/a
The Group could be called
upon to increase funding
to reduce the deficit,
impacting our cost base.
Mitigation
The Group has in-house pensions expertise supplemented by external
specialists, including professional advisors who manage the scheme’s
investment strategy.
The Pennon Group Pension Scheme is overseen by an independent Board
ofTrustees.
The liabilities of the Bristol Water Section of the Water Companies Pension
Scheme are fully insured through a bulk annuity policy.
As at 31
st
March 2024 the Group’s pension schemes remain in surplus of
£26.6m. The triennial valuation of PGPS at 31
st
March 2022 did not require any
deficit recovery contributions.
Appetite
The Group will ensure that all obligations are met in full but seeks to manage
this without unnecessary costs to the Group.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
61Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Market and economic conditions
Principal risk
G
Macroeconomic near
term risks impacting on
inflation, interest rates
and power prices
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
3, 4
Climate change influence
T
Nature related influence
T
Significant changes in
inflation, interest rates and
power prices could increase
the Group’s near term cost
base.
Mitigation
The macroeconomic volatility has eased during the year with power prices and
inflation softening. With ongoing global conflicts the potential remains for this
position to change.
The Group maintains a manageable debt maturity profile and diverse funding
mix with c. 15% index linked which is continuously monitored. Additionally,
asignificant proportion of the Group’s power prices has been hedged for the
next 12 months in line with defined levels.
The Group’s in-house procurement function drives value within strategic
contracts and consumables through competitive sourcing and tendering
processes.
Long-term protection from an increasing inflationary environment is provided
through regulatory mechanisms with inflation linked revenues and RCV growth,
along with regulatory true-ups.
Appetite
The Group seeks to de-risk volatility by having set proportions of inflation
linked debt, fixed interest, and power prices. These are implemented over time
to avoid concentrated exposure to one particular cycle of the macroeconomic
environment. The macroeconomic environment sets the financial background
for performance and 5 yearly regulatory reviews provide a natural long-term
mitigation.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Operating Performance
Principal risk
H
Failure to secure, treat
and supply clean drinking
water
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
1
Climate change influence
T P
Nature related influence
T P
An inability to secure,
produce or supply clean
drinking water could result
in financial penalties,
regulatory enforcement
and damage to the Group’s
reputation.
Mitigation
The Group continues to diversify its water resource capacity and the resilience
of our network and assets, informed by key plans including Water Resources
Management Plan and drought plans. As a result of this investment and higher
rainfall no water restrictions are anticipated for 2024. Furthermore, delivery of
phase 1 of the desalination project is expected during 2024/25, enabling more
time to develop the application for a larger desalination plant.
During the year we have extended our ‘Quality First’ continuous improvement
culture and training programme to our Bristol colleagues.
Asset health is managed through a well-established programme of routine
planned and preventative maintenance works with asset and network
performance managed by the 24/7 Control Centre.
Where such events do occur, these are managed through established incident
management procedures and utilises the Group’s supply chain partners.
Appetite
The Group operates a low tolerance for significant operational failure of its
water treatment assets or quality of water produced and seeks to mitigate these
risks where possible.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Principal risk
I
Failure to improve
wastewater performance
resulting in environmental
commitments not being
delivered
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
2, 3
Climate change influence
T P
Nature related influence
T P
An inability to improve
waste wastewater
could result in adverse
environment impacts,
financial penalties,
regulatory enforcement
and damage to the Group’s
reputation.
Mitigation
Minimising the impact of our activities on the environment remains a strategic
priority for the Pennon Board and Executive.
The Group continues to make progress in delivering environmental
improvements through the WaterFit programme which combines enhanced
processes, targeted capital investment and proactive asset maintenance.
Robust governance structures also ensure there is regular reporting on
pollution, storm overflow and numeric compliance activities.
Despite this progress the significant increase in rainfall and named storms
during the second half of the year have increased wastewater flows and
impacted headline performance for pollutions and use of storm overflows.
Appetite
The Group operates a low tolerance for significant operational failure of
its wastewater processes and assets and maintains the highest level of
environmental standards.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Our risk management continued
62 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Operating Performance
Principal risk
J
Failure to provide
excellent service
or meet the needs
and expectations of
our customers and
communities
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
4
Climate change influence
T P
Nature related influence
T P
Failure to meet the needs of
both customers and wider
stakeholders may result
in reputational damage
to the Group and lower
performance resulting
in financial penalties
impacting on shareholder
value.
Mitigation
The Group continues to enhance and invest in its customer services teams,
expanding the channels by which it can interact with and support house-hold
and business customers.
The Group offers a range of schemes and tariffs to support customers with
affordability challenges. Additionally, from April 2024 the Smart Saver tariff
trialoffers customers water rates reflecting their level of consumption.
During the year both South West and Bristol Water successfully achieved
kitemark certification to the vulnerable customer ISO22458 standard.
The Group also undertakes a range of initiatives to engage with the wider
communities it serves including community road-show events, Neighbourhood
Fund and funding to support water retention and leakage reduction.
Whilst Bristol Water’s regulatory customer service metric was positive, further
improvement is required for South West Water. Both Pennon Water Services
and Water2Business continue to maintain high customer satisfaction scores,
with ratings 4.8 and 4.9 out of 5 respectively on Trustpilot.
Appetite
The Group continually seeks to engage with and improve satisfaction levels
amongst customers and wider stakeholders.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Principal risk
K
Difficulty in recruiting and
retaining staff with the
skills required to deliver
the Group’s strategy
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
1, 2, 3, 4
Climate change influence
T
Nature related influence
T
Failure to maintain a
workforce of skilled and
motivated individuals will
detrimentally impact all of
our strategic priorities. We
need the right people in the
right places to innovate,
share best practice, deliver
synergies and move the
Group forward.
Mitigation
The demands for high quality skills and expertise across the Group remains
high, which mirrors the national and regional skills demands for our industry.
The Group’s People strategy, aligned to the new Group Values, enables the
Group to attract, retain and develop our employees as well as recognising the
significant contribution that our people make in delivering for our customers
and communities every day. The key areas of focus during the year have been
on supporting our customers and colleagues during the cost-of-living crisis,
reallocating resources to align with customer and business priorities and
building capacity to manage a growing capital programme.
We regularly engage with our employees, both individually and in groups across
multiple communication methods, to really understand their issues, concerns
and obtain feedback. We undertake employee pulse surveys throughout
the year, conduct Big Chat’s for all employees to hear from our Executive
most weeks, have an Employee Engagement Forum attended by functional
representatives, provide employee newsletters sharing topical updates and
have an employee collaboration platform via Viva Engage. These are all in
addition to the countless team meeting, breakfast meetings and toolbox talks
which take place every day across the company, to share updates and gather
employee feedback.
We have continued to develop a diverse and inclusive talent pipeline and have
doubled our long-term commitments with enhanced recruitment targets for
graduates and apprentices through to 2030 and continued prioritisation of our
diversity and inclusion agenda.
The Group continues to invest in leadership development with two leadership
programmes rolled out across the business helping current and prospective
senior leaders develop key skills and mindsets.
Appetite
We ensure the appropriate skills, knowledge and experience are in place, which
combined with our Reward Strategy and robust succession plans provide
adequate resilience to keep employee turnover at a minimum.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
63Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Business systems and capital investment
Principal risk
L
Insufficient capacity and
resilience of the supply
chain to support the
delivery of the Group’s
operational and capital
programmes in K8
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
1, 2, 3
Climate change influence
T P
Nature related influence
T P
The inability of our
supply chain to support
in the delivery of our
operational and capital
programmes may result in
increased costs and delays,
detrimentally impacting our
ability achieve our change
and growth agenda.
Mitigation
Delivery of the investment included within South West Water’s PR24 business
plan will require a significant increase in the Group’s capital programme.
The integrated delivery model for K8 will enable greater flexibility and broadens
the number of supply chain partners providing enhanced resilience for the
Group. The framework procurement for professional services and Tier 1
contractors has been completed and is well progressed for Tier 2.
The Group also regularly monitors the financial health of key partners and we
work in partnership with our supply chain to identify and manage potential
issues and challenges. Where action is required there are established plans
andalternative arrangements which provide mitigation and early intervention.
Appetite
The Board has a low appetite for risk associated with the delivery of key
operational and capital programmes within our regulated business plan.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Principal risk
M
Inadequate technological
security results in a
breach of the Group’s
assets, systems and data
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
1, 2, 4
Climate change influence
n/a
Nature related influence
n/a
Failure of our technology
security, due to inadequate
internal processes or
external cyber threats,
could result in the
business being unable to
operate effectively and
the corruption or loss of
data. This could have a
detrimental impact on
our customers and result
in financial penalties and
reputational damage to the
Group.
Mitigation
External threats are increasing in complexity and sophistication with the
National Cyber Security Centre (NCSC) highlighting the heightened risk
tocritical national infrastructure and an increased focus on the water sector.
The Group maintains a dedicated Information Security team with a strong
preventive and detective information security framework, aligned to guidance
issued by the NCSC supported by regular training, communications and
awareness to staff. South West Water continues to hold the ISO27001
accreditation.
Enhanced technical controls introduced during the year across the Group’s
corporate and operational technology sector are informed by best practice
and learnings from across sectors. Furthermore, the regulated water business
continues to progress actions as part of the roadmap to meet the requirements
of the Network and Information Systems Directive (NIS), with activities aligned
to the priorities identified by the Drinking Water Inspectorate.
The Group also maintains established disaster recovery plans which are subject
to regular review and testing.
Appetite
The Group seeks to minimise technology and security risk to the lowest
possible level without detrimentally impacting on the Group’s operations.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Principal risk
N
Failure to receive
CMA approval for the
acquisition of Sutton and
East Surrey Water (SES)
Strategic impact
Strategic priorities
4
Climate change influence
n/a
Nature related influence
n/a
Failure to obtain the
necessary regulatory
approvals could result in
the Group having to divest
the acquired business,
impacting on shareholder
value.
Mitigation
The Group has a senior project team with experience of the regulatory
approvals process following the acquisitions of Bournemouth Water and, most
recently, Bristol Water.
The CMA have confirmed that it will refer the transaction for a Phase 2 review
unless acceptable undertakings are offered. Pennon intends to offer appropriate
undertakings and, in line with the CMA’s guidance, the CMA will then consider
whether to provisionally accept the proposed undertakings. Should those
undertakings be provisionally accepted, in line with standard procedure, the
CMA would then launch a consultation on those proposals.
Robust controls have been implemented to ensure the Group is fully compliant
with all CMA requirements during the process.
Appetite
Opportunities that support the Group’s strategic priorities are assessed against
an expected level of return adopting clearly defined factors and metrics.
Net risk/
Direction
of travel
Our risk management continued
64 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
The Board’s consideration of the longer-term viability of the Group is an
extension of the Group’s strategic business planning, which is managed
through regular long-term modelling and monitoring of key measures
including gearing, debt covenant headroom and level of liquidity. The
resilience of the business and these key viability measures are appropriately
assessed by a number of mechanisms including a robust risk management
assessment, sensitivity analysis and stress tests of financial performance.
The overall market context is a cornerstone of the viability assessment.
The Group’s main operating subsidiary of South West Water now accounts
for the vast majority of the Group’s earnings, being a long-term business
characterised by multi-year investment programmes, with associated
revenue streams with high levels of future visibility.
The viability assessment has been made with reference to the Group’s
current position and prospects, including consideration of the ongoing
impacts of the Ukraine crisis, climate change, its longer-term strategy, the
Board’s risk appetite and the Group’s principal risks and how these are
managed, as detailed on pages 55 to 64 of the Risk report.
Period of assessment
The Board regularly considers the appropriate period for the viability
assessment to be performed in line with the UK Corporate Governance Code.
The Board considers the appropriate period to assess the Group’s viability
remains unchanged at five years, which recognises both the longer-term
visibility in the regulatory environment of the South West Water business
and the corporate activity, including acquisitions and other non-regulated
investments, undertaken by Pennon.
Risks
The Board considers the preventative and risk management actions in
place and the potential impact of the principal risks (as detailed on pages
55 to 64) against our ability to deliver the business plan. This assessment
has considered the potential impact of these and other risks arising on the
business model, future performance, solvency and liquidity over the period
in question. The Group has a strong liquidity and funding position with
£601.4 million of cash and committed facilities as at 31
st
March 2024 and
netassets of £1,162.6 million.
The Group has a mixture of fixed, floating and index-linked debt financing
with a weighted average maturity of non-current debt, excluding leases,
being 12 years. In making their assessment, the Directors reviewed the
principal risks and considered which risks might threaten the Group’s
viability. Over the course of the year the Board, either directly or through
the activities of the Audit Committee, has considered a deep-dive review of
the following principal risks to enable a thorough assessment of the impact
ofthese risks on ongoing viability:
Engineering supply chain resilience.
Water quality.
Cyber security.
Stress testing
The Group’s business plan has been stress-tested. Whilst the Group’s risk
management processes seek to mitigate the impact of principal risks as set
out on pages 55 to 64, individual sensitivities (shown in the table below) have
been identified. These sensitivities, which are ascribed a value with reference
to risk weighting, factoring in the likelihood of occurrence and financial
impact, were applied to the baseline financial forecast which uses the Group’s
annual budget for FY 2024/25 and longer-term strategic business plan
through to March 2029.
The impact of climate risks have been assessed in detail as set out in the
Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) section on
pages 78 to 109. The Group’s strategic business plan includes the expected
investment identified at this stage to meet climate-change adaptation.
Thestress-testing scenarios applied during the viability assessment
period do not include specific reference to climate-change related risks
alone as climate change has been considered as part of the principal risks
identified. Beyond the period of assessment, additional impacts from climate
change are considered in more detail within the TCFD section along with
mitigatingactions.
Viability statement
The Directors of Pennon Group plc are responsible for ensuring
thelong-term viability of the Group. The Directors need to ensure
the resilience of the Company by identifying, managing, avoiding
or mitigating risks which may impact viability.
Principal risk Viability sensitivities tested
A: Changes in Government policy Changes in Government policy affecting the water industry, such as additional environmental
legislation, may impact operational performance or investment requirements. The estimated average
adverse impact on the Group’s cash flows from a range of potential policy changes has been applied
as a sensitivity.
B: Changes in regulatory frameworks and requirements Potential changes in the PR24 price review may impact allowed regulatory returns in the Water
segment. The estimated average adverse impact on the Group’s cash flows from a range of potential
policy or determination changes has been applied as a sensitivity.
C: Non-compliance with laws and regulations The estimated impact of financial penalties and reputational damage from failure to comply with laws
and regulations has been modelled as a sensitivity.
D: Inability to secure sufficient finance and funding,
within our debt covenants, to meet ongoing
commitments
The impact of reduced availability of financing resulting in increased costs has been modelled
asasensitivity.
E: Non-compliance or occurrence of an avoidable
health and safety event
The financial impact and cash outflows related to a major health and safety event has been applied
as a sensitivity.
F: Failure to pay all pension obligations as they fall due
and increased costs for the Group should the defined
benefit pension scheme deficit increase
The financial impact on the Group’s gearing from additional funding being required to support
theGroup’s defined benefit pension schemes has been applied as an adverse scenario.
65Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Principal risk Viability sensitivities tested
G: Macroeconomic near-term risks impacting on
inflation, interest rates and power prices
The adverse impacts of higher operating and finance costs from increasing power prices and
general inflation increases over and above increases assumed in base financial plans, including the
impact on Totex underperformance on regulatory returns and impact on debt financing costs have
been applied as a sensitivity, as well as a reduction in the collection of customer debt from adverse
economic conditions.
H: Failure to secure, treat and supply clean drinking
water
The adverse impacts from non-delivery of regulatory performance targets which result in ODI
penalties, other financial penalties and required additional investment reducing Group revenues
andcash inflows have been applied as a sensitivity to the base plan.
I: Failure to improve wastewater performance results
inenvironmental commitments not being delivered
J: Failure to provide excellent service or meet the
needs and expectations of our customers and
communities
K: Difficulty in recruiting and retaining staff with the
skills required to deliver the Group’s strategy
L: Insufficient capacity and resilience of the supply
chain to support the delivery of the Group’s operational
and capital programmes which more than doubles
inAMP8.
M: Inadequate technological control or cyber attack
results in a breach of the Group's assets, systems
anddata
The adverse financial impacts of a cyber attack resulting in operational disruption, potential loss
ofdata, potential detrimental impacts on customers with potential for financial penalties have been
included in the sensitivity analysis.
N: Failure to receive CMA approval for the acquisition
of Sutton and East Surrey Water (SES Water)
The costs associated with failing to receive CMA approval for the acquisition of SES Water have
been modelled in a downside scenario.
A combined stress-testing scenario has been performed to assess the overall impact of these individual scenarios impacting the Group collectively.
Thecombined weighted impact of the risks occurring is c.£80 million: this value is considered equivalent to an extreme one-off event that could occur within
ayear, though the probability of such an event happening is deemed unlikely.
Stress-testing evaluation and mitigations
Through this testing, it has been determined that none of the individual
principal risks would in isolation, or in aggregate, compromise the Group’s
viability over the five-year period. The assessment has been conducted by
reviewing the impact on the solvency position as well as debt and interest
covenants. The financial impacts of the risks were probability weighted to
obtain a value that was used in the stress testing. While mitigations were not
required in any of the above individual or combined scenarios to ensure that
the Group was viable, additional mitigations could be deployed to reduce
gearing and increase covenant headroom. These include:
Reduction in discretionary operational expenditure.
Deferral of capital expenditure and/or cancellation of non-essential capital
expenditure.
Reduction in the amount of dividend payable.
Raising additional funding.
The Group has confidence in its ability to raise additional funding should it
be required to ensure the Group maintains solvency.
In addition, a reverse-engineered scenario that could possibly compromise
the Group’s viability over the five-year assessment period has been modelled.
This scenario builds on the factors above and additionally assumes all the
Group’s principal risks incurring in any given year across the viability period,
with no probability weightings attached. The Board considered the likelihood
of this scenario on the Group’s viability over the five-year viability period
as remote, concluding the Group could remain viable. Mitigations, as noted
above, could also be deployed over the period if deemed necessary.
In making its assessment of the Group’s viability, the Directors have taken
account of the Group’s strong capital solvency position, the Group’s latest
assessments of forward power and other commodity prices, latest inflation
forecasts, its ability to raise new finance and a key potential mitigating action
of restricting any non-contractual payments. In assessing the prospects
of the Group, the Directors note that, as the Group operates in a regulated
industry which potentially can be subject to non-market influences, such
assessment is subject to uncertainty, the level of which depends on the
proximity of the time horizon. Accordingly, the future outcomes cannot be
guaranteed or predicted with certainty. As set out in the Audit Committee’s
report on pages 136 to 141, the Directors reviewed and discussed the process
undertaken by management, and also reviewed the results of the stress
testing performed.
Viability assessment conclusion
The Board has assessed the Group’s financial viability and confirms that
it has a reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to continue in
operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over a five-year period, the
period considered to be appropriate by the Board in connection with the UK
Corporate Governance Code.
Viability statement continued
66 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Our integrated approach to Environmental,
Social and Governance (ESG)
Our approach to ESG ensures we are focused on what matters most. All that we do
supports our commitment to provide environmental stewardship, whilst supporting
our customers and local communities. We remain focused on employee welfare with
health, safety, and wellbeing being at the heart of everything we do, whilst providing
strong opportunities for development. Our approach is built on the foundations
ofour robust governance framework, upholding our new core values throughout
theorganisation and our value chain.
ESG Capitals
Creating value through our ESG approach
Everything we do links to a capital in some way – the development of our capitals framework is integral to better decision making for the future.
External benchmarking
Our ESG strategy and capitals framework has driven positive change in the
business as we continue to embed sustainability in everything we do. We continue
to show strong performance across external ESG assessments, demonstrating our
commitment to, and management, of risk across our integrated ESG approach.
Latest external assessment scores:
Disclaimer
The use by Pennon Group of any MSCI ESG Research LLC or its affiliates (“MSCI”) data, and the use of MSCI logos, trademarks, service marks
orindex names herein, do not constitute a sponsorship, endorsement, recommendation, or promotion of Pennon Group by MSCI. MSCI services
anddata are the property of MSCI or its information providers and are provided ‘as-is’ and without warranty. MSCI names and logos are trademarks
orservice marks of MSCI.
12.0
ESG Risk
(Previous rating: 13.8)
82.5
ESG Rating
(Previous rating: 80)
B
CDP Climate Change
(Previous rating: B)
B
CDP Water security
(Previous rating: C)
3.7/5
FTSE Russell ESG Score
(Previous rating: 3.9/5)
B+
Prime ISS corporate
rating
(Previous rating: B)
A
GRESB Infrastructure
Public Disclosure
(Previous rating: A)
AA
MSCI ESG Indexes
(Previous rating: AA)
57/100
Corporate
Sustainability
Assessment (CSA)
(Previous rating: 60/100)
Our Natural Capital – Environment
Freshwater
Land (including soils)
Species
Ecological communities
Coasts
Atmosphere
Waste
Our Social & Human Capital – Social
Colleagues
Customers
Communities
Our Manufactured, Intellectual
&Financial Capital – Governance
Supply chain
Responsible business
Stakeholders and partnerships
Finance
E
S
G
67Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
ESG performance and targets
Materiality assessment
In 2021/22, we conducted a thorough materiality assessment with
stakeholders to shape our strategy and ESG targets up to 2025, and plan to
refresh our assessment in 2024/25. The results were disclosed in our 2022
Annual Report. Further stakeholder engagement occurred in December 2022
to inform our 2050 Strategic Direction report: https://www.southwestwater.
co.uk/about-us/documents/business-plan-2020-2025
The 2023 publication of our 2025-2030 business plan emphasises customer
engagement in identifying priorities to enhance customer satisfaction,
community wellbeing, and environmental sustainability. This process involved
gathering feedback on effective approaches and timelines for meeting
statutory requirements. Insights from customers and stakeholders were
instrumental in shaping our investment and service enhancement plans, with
a focus on prioritising impactful initiatives.
Thisfeedback, combined with assessments of business and external risks,
guided the review of our material issues, affirming our alignment with key
concerns. While the importance of certain issues has evolved, we remain
committed to addressing high-priority matters.
UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs)
We actively engage with the UN SDGs to inform our approach and better
understand our impact. We have mapped which of the UN SDGs our ESG
targets most directly support. Our primary contribution is to SDG 6: Clean
water and sanitation. Read more on our ESG targets on page 68 andto read
more on our contribution towards the SDGs visit our website www.pennon-
group.co.uk/sustainability
UN Global Compact
This year we have built on our support for the UN SDGs, by becoming a
signatory of the world’s largest corporate sustainability initiative, The UN
Global Compact. Becoming a participant affirms our commitment to our ESG
targets, as we work to embed the ten principles of the United Nations Global
Compact covering human rights, labour, environment and anti-corruption
into our ESG approach, whilst communicating our progress against these
principles annually.
Highest importance to stakeholders What it means to all stakeholders
Net Zero Taking action to mitigate our own emissions.
Freshwater stewardship Taking care of precious water resources.
Water quality – river and coastal Taking action to deliver a step change in both river and coastal water quality.
Climate resilience Our preparedness for climate change.
Drinking water quality The provision of clean, safe drinking water.
Amenity and recreation Access to high standard bathing water across our region’s coasts and inland waters.
Trust and transparency Being open and transparent in a time of increased water sector scrutiny.
Material issue and associated target Annual performance against target 2023/24 target 2025 Target SDG
Net Zero
% energy usage from renewable generation 8% 13%
Reducing greenhouse gas emissions
68% 70%
Freshwater stewardship
Reduce water use within our operational sites 7.5MI 10Ml
Biodiversity
Trees planting (cumulative) 200,000 250,000
Material issue and associated target Annual performance against target 2023/24 target 2025 Target SDG
Customer and community engagement
Increase our community investment by 10% each year 20% 30%
Diversity and skills
% Female representation 32% 33%
Increase REACH recruitment (excludingBristolWater)
10% 10%
Achieve 5% club status
Gold Accreditation Gold Accreditation
Health, safety and wellbeing
Number of LTIs across the group 20 11
Great Place to Work accreditation
Maintain Maintain
Measure/issue and associated target Annual performance against target 2023/24 target 2025 Target SDG
Trust and transparency
ESG Rating (Sustainalytics Management Score) 78 80
Fair Tax Mark accreditation
Maintain Maintain
% of active institutional investors met or offered to meet
72% 75%
Sustainable finance
New funding raised through Sustainable Financing Framework % 75% 75%
Supply chain
Supplier payment days (average) 35 days 30 days
% of key and strategic suppliers that have established
anESGpolicyorequivalent
75% 100%
Key:
Achieved Not Achieved
68 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Net Zero – our promise to the planet
In 2021, we published our Promise to the Planet – our ambitious plan to reduce
our operational carbon emissions to Net Zero by 2030. During 2023/24 we have
committed to even more ambitious targets, to go beyond reducing our operational
emissions, and set out scope 1, 2 and 3 GHG emission reduction targets, targets
to reduce emissions across our value chain, and to increaseour use of renewable
electricity.
Pillar
Our three-pillar strategy
remains unchanged Progress against our three-pillar strategy
1
Sustainable
living
Reducing emissions through
changes to operational practices,
increasing energy efficiency, and
switching to lower carbon fuel
sources.
Meeting our commitments to
reduce leaks and help customers
to use less water – protecting the
environment and saving carbon.
In 2023/24 our wastewater back-up generators have been switched from using diesel fossil-fuel
to using lower carbon HVO (Hydrotreated Vegetable Oil) made from waste oil.
We are continuing with our programme of pump efficiency testing, pump repair and
replacement. We have installed two new pumps at our Roadford Dam site, one low lift pump
at Restormel water treatment works in Cornwall as well as one at Longham water treatment
works in our Bournemouth region. We have proactively developed a new plan to refurbish our
activated sludge processes on our wastewater treatment works as well as plans to replace some
of our largest blowers providing air to those processes. We have also conducted site-based
energy audits on our Bristol Water sites as part of compliance with Phase 3 of the Government’s
Energy Savings Opportunities Scheme (ESOS).
We have embarked on a nitrous oxide (N2O) emissions monitoring trial at our Countess Wear
(Exeter) wastewater treatment works, as well as a separate trial to measure fugitive emissions
ofmethane (CH4) emissions at the same site.
Our transition to electric vehicles continues with over 50 electric vehicles now on our fleet
ofvans and cars. Whilst the most of our transport fleet is still petrol or diesel fuelled, we plan
togradually transition to a 100% electric vehicle fleet during the next decade.
2
Championing
renewables
Maximising self-generation from
renewables at our sites across
the South West – working with
partnerships and utilising our
expertise.
Where we cannot generate
enough electricity to meet all our
needs ourselves, 100% of what we
purchase will be from renewable
sources.
South West Water continues to source 100% renewable electricity (since 2022). We will
negotiate to switch Bristol Water to 100% renewable electricity at the appropriate contract
renewal time.
Onsite renewables with third parties are a mix of CHP, hydro, solar and wind. SWW has achieved
9.1% and Bristol 1.1% on-site renewable energy generation.
We have completed a feasibility study for the installation of floating solar PV arrays at a number
of our reservoirs and are progressing to the next stages at one of our large drinking water sites.
We have made a significant advance in sourcing off-site renewables through the third party
owned Rexon Cross 500kW wind turbine, which is now feeding renewable electricity into our
Roadford Reservoir site through a private wire. The turbine has the potential to generate 1.5GWh
of energy each year which is approximately 15% of the total energy used on the site.
3
Reversing
carbon
emissions
Reversing carbon emissions from
our core activities.
Working in partnership to ensure
our core activities reverse carbon
emissions through solutions such
as peatland restoration.
Supporting the development
of innovative solutions to
develop low carbon footprint
processes through research and
development.
Our catchment management programmes include improved soil management, wetland
creation, buffer strips, tree planting and other nature-based solutions. We have pioneered
a collaborative partnership approach to peatland restoration across the region, continuing
to develop best practice and build capacity to scale up into the future. Over time these
interventions store more carbon in the landscape and reduce loss to the atmosphere, whilst
retaining water upstream to improve long-term resilience.
In 2023-24 we have planted 80,327 trees to exceed our annual target of 50,000 trees and
restored 493 hectares of peatland towards a total of 1,558 hectares restored so far throughout
AMP7. Once completed our peatland restoration programme planned for AMP7 is expected
to sequester around 650,000 tCO
2
e over the next 50 years. Meanwhile the 253,000 trees
nowplanted (AMP7 delivery) are expected to store an estimated 17,700 tCO
2
e during the next
30years.
Looking forward, we have included a range of nature-based solutions in the PR24 Business
Plansubmission (2025-2030) to increase opportunities to lock up carbon through our activities.
Wecontinue to collaborate across the water industry to investigate other land and marine-
based carbon sequestration opportunities, such as seagrass restoration and development
ofasoil carbon code.
69Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Science Based Targets
As a Group we have committed to near-term Science Based Targets (SBTs).
Our targets were validated and approved by the Science Based Targets
Initiative in May 2024 and we will now focus on delivering our targets.
SBTs provide a clearly defined pathway for companies to reduce greenhouse
gas emissions. Targets are considered ‘science-based’ ifthey are in line
with what the latest climate science deems necessary to meet the goals
oftheParis Agreement – limiting global warming to 1.5°C above pre-
industrial levels.
Our SBTs, presented below, support our water and wastewater greenhouse
gas, and embodied carbon bespoke performance commitments.
The Group commits to reduce absolute scope 1 and scope 2 GHG emissions
68% by 2032/33 from a 2021/22 base year.
The Group commits to reduce absolute Scope 3 GHG emissions from 'well
to tank' electricity and fuels, the delivery of electricity, emissions from waste,
and business travel and commuting, by 30% over the same timeframe.
The Group commits that 60% of its suppliers by emissions covering
purchased goods and services, capital goods and upstream transportation
and distribution will have science-based targets by FY2027/28.
The Group commits to increase annual sourcing of renewable electricity
to100% by 2030.
Further details of how we are integrating climate into our business and
readying for a low carbon future can be found in our TCFD report on pages
78 to 109.
GHG emissions performance
In line with good practice and to reflect the outcome of our
2021/22 materiality assessment, we set new interim Net Zero targets in 2022.
Our 2023/24 performance is presented below.
Net Zero target
2023/24
Performance
2023/24
Target
2025
Target
2030
Target
% Energy usage from
renewable generation 7.5% 8% 13% 50%
Reducing GHG emissions (%)* 71.9% 68% 70% 100%
These figures have been externally assured by DNV.
* Scope 2 market-based emissions only.
GHG emissions
Scope 2 market-based GHG emissions have reduced from 91,330 tCO
2
e
(restated figure due to fuel mix disclosure correction) to 25,662 tCO
2
e this
year from our 2020/21 baseline equating to a 71.9% reduction.
Overall GHG emissions against our Net Zero 2030 emission boundary for
Scope 1, Scope 2 and selected Scope 3 operational emissions within the
boundary of the regulated businesses have decreased by c.45.2%.
Full details of our 2023/24 GHG emissions are provided in our SECR report
from page 71.
Embodied carbon
Our carbon emissions extend beyond our daily operations. Embodied carbon
are emissions associated with the construction, repair, and maintenance of
our physical assets, and we are cognisant that they can account for up to
one-third of the water sectors total emissions. We are committed to reducing
all sources of our carbon emissions, which is why we have developed a
bespoke performance commitment to support our embodied carbon goals.
Embodied carbon accounting is the foundation of decarbonising our capital
projects and our supply chain, and we are working collaboratively with
our supply chain to identify the best technologies for embodied carbon
accounting, and strategies to drive down our emissions.
Net Zero culture
We recognise that achieving our Net Zero goals will be a collaborative effort.
We are working towards creating a working environment in which workers,
customers, and suppliers are motivated to hasten our transition to Net Zero
emissions. We have developed a robust communication and engagement
plan, supported by an effective governance structure working with internal
stakeholders at all levels to ensure carbon emissions and our net zero
commitments are adequately considered in decision making. This is further
corroborated by data, and our benefits realisation work, where we quantify
and monitor the greenhouse gas consequences of our Net Zero initiatives.
Our bespoke approach will ensure an enduring Net Zero culture.
Renewable energy
We remain committed to our target of 50% of energy generation from a mix
of renewable energy sources including onsite Solar PV, floating Solar PV, grid
connected Solar PV, wind power, hydroelectricity and making more use of
our bioresources for generating energy.
We have achieved 7.5 % energy from renewable sources across the group
in2023/24.
This performance is despite below average solar radiation last year and
an enhanced maintenance regime across all our assets. In addition, we
have continued delivery of our latest on-site solar and connection of a
wind turbine to Roadford treatment works via a private wire arrangement.
Overall, our installed renewable energy capacity now totals 18.5MW including
connected private wire assets.
Process and fugitive emissions
Process and fugitive emissions, mainly in the form of methane (CH4)
and nitrous oxide (N2O), arise from our wastewater treatment processes.
Worldwide there is difficulty in measuring process emissions, this mean that
it is difficult to establish a baseline and monitor changes in N2O emissions.
Measuring and monitoring is the first step; without it, we cannot establish
the efficacy of N2O reduction initiatives. We are piloting a N2O monitoring
technology at one of our wastewater treatment sites, Countess Wear. This
pioneering initiative, where the treatment facility has recently been cleaned,
will benchmark ‘low’ N2O emissions under various scenarios, and allow us
to assess seasonal variability in N2O emissions over the course of the year.
We have also commenced with a separate trial to directly measure fugitive
emissions of methane (CH4) at the same site. Findings from these trials will
inform effective process emission reduction strategies in the future.
Transition plan
Through our established strategies, plans and policies, we are preparing for
a changing climate and lower carbon economy. Our annual TCFD response
on pages 78 to 109 sets out further details of this in accordance with the
TCFD recommendations. This identifies one of our key transition risks as
rising energy costs. Through our planned investment in renewable energy
alongside our dynamic hedging strategy we are managing this risk. We
are aware of the work of the newly established Transition Plan Taskforce
(TPT) to develop a ‘gold standard’ framework for transition plans. We are
considering the TPT’s guidance and will look to publish our Group Transition
Plan in due course.
For further information on nature-related disclosures, please see our
Taskforce on Nature-related Financial Disclosures on pages 78 to 109.
Net Zero Plan scope includes Scope 1 & 2 (market based) GHG emissions
and the following Scope 3 activities: outsourced activities; power
transmission & distribution, business travel, grey fleet (private vehicles used
on Company business).
Net Zero – our promise to the planet continued
70 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Sustainability Reporting
Streamlined Energy and Carbon Report (SECR)
Pennon Group plc GHG emissions
2023/24 2022/23
market based location based market based location based
Scope 1 GHG emissions by source (tCO
2
e)
1
Direct emissions from burning of fossil fuels 5,467 5,467 8,003 8,003
Process and fugitive emissions 16,170 16,170 15,389 15,389
Transport: Company owned or leased vehicles 5,100 5,100 5,381 5,381
Total Scope 1 GHG emissions (tCO
2
e) 26,737 26,737 28,773 28,773
Scope 2 GHG emissions (tCO
2
e) 25,662 83,575 31,321 77,217
Total gross Scope 1 & 2 GHG emissions (tCO
2
e) 52,399 110,312 60,094 105,990
Scope 3 GHG emissions
4
(estimated)
2
315,867 315,867 239,653 239,653
Total gross Scope 1, 2 & 3 GHG emissions (tCO
2
e)
4
368,265 426,178 299,747 345,643
GHG emissions removals through purchases of Renewable Energy Guarantees
ofOrigin (tCO
2
e)
6
Included in
scope 2 above
Included in
scope 2 above
GHG emissions saved by exporting self-generated electricity (tCO
2
e) 0 0 0 0
Total annual net GHG emissions (tCO
2
e)
4
368,265 426,178 299,747 345,643
Energy consumption used to calculate Scope 1 and 2 GHG emissions (MWh)
(see Energy usage section) 459,736 459,736 461,716 461,716
GHG emissions intensity measure: tCO
2
e (gross Scope 1+2/£100,000 revenue)
3
6.0 12.7 7.3 12.9
Biogenic GHG emissions outside of Scopes (tCO
2
e) 3,076 3,076 3,148 3,148
SES Water GHG emissions
5
2023/24
market based location based
Scope 1 GHG emissions by source (tCO
2
e)
Direct emissions from burning of fossil fuels 516.54 516.54
Process and fugitive emissions 0 0
Transport: Company owned or leased vehicles 411.60 411.60
Total Scope 1 GHG emissions (tCO
2
e) 928.14 928.14
Scope 2 GHG emissions (tCO
2
e) 0 11,018.64
Total gross Scope 1 & 2 GHG emissions (tCO
2
e) 928.14 11,946.78
Scope 3 GHG emissions (estimated) 1,281.42 1,281.42
Total gross Scope 1, 2 & 3 GHG emissions (tCO
2
e) 2,209.56 13,228.20
GHG emissions removals through purchases of Renewable Energy Guarantees of Origin (tCO
2
e)
Included in
scope 2 above
GHG emissions saved by exporting self-generated electricity (tCO
2
e) 0 0
Total annual net GHG emissions (tCO
2
e) 2,209.56 13,228.20
Energy consumption used to calculate Scope 1 and 2 GHG emissions (MWh) 55,436.58 55,436.58
GHG emissions intensity measure: tCO
2
e (gross Scope 1+2/£100,000 revenue) 1.39 17.84
Biogenic GHG emissions outside of Scopes (tCO
2
e) - -
Notes:
Pennon Group plc total Scope 1 (26,737 tCO
2
e), Scope 2 market-based (25,662 tCO
2
e), Scope 2 location-based (83,575 tCO
2
e) GHG emissions, market-based GHG emissions intensity
measure (6.0 tCO
2
e) (gross Scope1+2/£100,000 revenue), and location-based GHG emissions intensity measure (12.7 tCO
2
e) (gross Scope1+2/£100,000 revenue). These figures
have been independently assuredbyDNV.
Scope 1 (direct GHG emissions): GHG emissions activities owned or controlled by our organisation that release emissions straight into the atmosphere. For Pennon, primary Scope 1
GHG emission sources during 2023/24 include GHG emissions from stationary plant, fugitive emissions from air conditioning plant and wastewater treatment, transport related GHG
emissions from our own vehicles, and fleet Scope 2 (indirect GHG emissions) GHG emissions released into the atmosphere associated with our consumption of imported electricity.
Scope 3 (other GHG indirect emissions) GHG emissions are at a consequence of our actions, which occur at sources which we do not own or control.
1. GHG emission figures are expressed in tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalents (tCO
2
e) whereby emissions of carbon dioxide (CO
2
), methane (CH4), nitrous oxide (N2O),
thefluorinated gases (HFC, PFC, SF6) are shown in terms of the equivalent emissions from CO
2
. A breakdown of emissions by GHG is available in our ESG Databook available
onourwebsite: www.pennon-group.co.uk/reportandpresentations.
2. Estimated GHG emissions for relevant Scope 3 categories calculated in 2023/24 are provided in our ESG Databook available on our website:
www.pennon-group.co.uk/reportandpresentations.
3. Based on relevant Group revenue for 2023/24 (excluding SES Water).
4. 2022/23 Scope 3 figures restated to correctly account for waste generated in operations.
5. SES Water’s GHG Emissions figures have been assured in line with ISO14064-1.
6. Renewable Energy Guarantees of Origin (REGOs) certificate assured by DNV for electricity consumption in period April 2023 to March 2024 for South West Water
electricityconsumption.
71Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
71Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Sustainability reporting continued
Operational Pennon Group plc GHG emissions by business
South West Water Bristol Water Group total*
Scope 1 GHG emissions (tCO
2
e) 20,870 5,548 26,737
Scope 2 GHG emissions (market based) (tCO
2
e) 72 25,238 25,662
Total gross Scope 1 & Scope 2 GHG emissions (tCO
2
e) 20,942 30,787 52,399
Operational intensity measure (kgCO
2
e/Ml) – Water 38.77 209.42 n/a
Operational intensity measure (kgCO
2
e/Ml) – Wastewater 111.15 n/a n/a
Note:
For ‘Water’ measure Ml = measured water into supply.
For ‘Wastewater’ measure Ml = full measured flow treatment.
* Group total includes 670 tCO
2
e from Pennon Water Services and Group shared service, and excludes SES Water.
Change in GHG emissions
Operational Scope 1 and 2 emissions (market-based) decreased by 12.8%
from 2022/23, largely as a result of a reduction in the need for additional
water pumping in 2023/24 as the weather was much wetter than 2022/23,
this also coincided with a reduction in the use of diesel fuel for pumping
and stand-by generation, as well as a reduction in the emissions factor
applied toour Bristol Water grid electricity consumption. The revenue-based
intensity metric has continued to reduce for the Group and the 'market-
based' value now stands at 6tCO
2
e/£100,000 turnover compared to a
value of 7.3 tCO
2
e/£100,000 in the previous year, continuing the trajectory
ofemissions reductions relative to revenue earned.
Scope 3 GHG emissions
Scope 3 categories were evaluated for relevant categories in line with the
reporting guidance. The assessment, carried out by carbon consultants
Eco Act on behalf of Pennon, is based on 2023/24 activity data for the
Group. The estimated Scope 3 GHG emissions for 2023/24 for the Group
are 314,999 tCO
2
e compared to the equivalent figure in 2022/23 of 239,653
tCO
2
e (Restated to correctly account for waste generated in operations).
Bristol Water’s Scope 3 activities have been calculated and reported within
the Group figures for the first time. The change in reported emissions is due
to better interrogation of the spend data used to drive Category 1 purchased
goods and services calculation. This analysis showed that some financial
spend lines were wholly down to financial transactions with zero emissions
associated and therefore these activities were excluded from 2023/24
calculations.
A breakdown of our estimated Scope 3 GHG emissions is provided in
our ESG Databook, published on our website (www.pennon-group.co.uk/
sustainability).
GHG Reporting Methodology
Our approach follows the UK Government’s Environmental Reporting
Guidelines, including Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting guidance
(2019) and the Greenhouse Gas Protocol Corporate Standard including
the Scope 3 Calculation Guidance (collectively referred to here as the
reporting guidelines). In calculating our emissions, we have used the 2023
UKGovernment conversion factors for GHG reporting.
Organisational boundary and scopes
The GHG emissions listed here cover 100% of the Group’s companies, each
of which uses the financial control approach, except equity share for Bristol
Water Holdings Companies, to report GHG emissions. We report our Scope
1, 2 and 3 GHG emissions where relevant. A breakdown of Scope 3 GHG
emissions categories is provided in our supplementary ESG Databook online
at www.pennon-group.co.uk/sustainability.
Market and location-based methodology
We report both market-based and location-based Scope 2 GHG emissions.
Where our supply is backed by Renewable Energy Guarantees of Origin
(REGOs), this qualifies as zero carbon market-based emissions. Where
supply is not REGO backed, in accordance with the reporting guidelines,
wehave used our electricity suppliers’ specific published Fuel Mix Disclosure
emissions factors to report our Scope 2 market-based emissions. Where
FuelMix Disclosure emissions factors are not available, we have used
theresidual grid mix emissions factor.
Self-generated renewable energy export
In accordance with the reporting guidelines, we may report an emissions
reduction in our reported net CO
2
e figure for any renewable electricity
wehave generated and exported to the national grid or a third party.
External assurance statement
Group Scope 1 and 2 GHG emissions and energy use, together with selected
Scope 3 GHG emissions, have been independently assured by DNV. The
assumptions, methods and procedures that are followed in the development
of the reported data have been tested and the data audited for accuracy
and consistency. Assurance statements can be found at www.pennon-group.
co.uk/sustainability.
Offshore Emissions
All of Pennon Group’s energy usage is within the UK and Pennon Group
hadno offshore GHG emissions or energy usage in the reporting period.
Energy usage
Including self-supplied energy, the Group used 484,374 MWh of energy
in 2023/24, compared to 485,823 MWh in 2022/23. A breakdown of Group
energy usage and associated data assessment methodologies is shown
below. Further details and previous years’ data are provided in our ESG
Databook, which can be found at www.pennon-group.co.uk/sustainability.
72 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Energy usage
2023/24 (MWh) 2022/23 (MWh) Methodology
Imported grid electricity
4
404,426 399,301
Metered data except some NHHM supply which is estimated by
electricity supplier
2
Imported private wire electricity (renewable) 5,804 4,819 Metered data
Self-supplied renewable electricity 10,656 12,079 Metered data
Self-supplied heat 7,068 7,141
Estimated that 60% of heat generated by sewage gas CHP is
beneficially used, the rest (40%) is released to atmosphere
Natural gas
4
25,407 23,471 Metered data – from billing (some element of estimates)
Liquid fuels (for stationary applications)
4
6,375 14,904
Estimated based on fuel use/spend data. Reported totals
calculatedbased on raw data provided by the supplier
Energy used by fleet transport
4
24,639 24,107 Estimated based on fuel use/spend and mileage data
2
Total energy usage 484,374 485,823
Intensity measure: MWh/£100,000 revenue
3
55.53 58.97
Energy usage data notes:
1. Total energy usage (484,374 MWh) by has been independently assured by DNV.
2. Hire car fuel usage and grey fleet (use of private vehicles on company business) are included in these SECR volumes – as per SECR guidance.
3. Based on relevant Group revenue for 2023/24.
4. Energy consumption used to calculate Scope 1 and 2 GHG emissions.
Energy efficiency action taken
Our energy efficiency interventions during 2023/24 are estimated to have avoided around c.6.5 GWh of additional energy use, or around 1.4% of our total
energy consumption (excluding transport). We have taken further steps this year to focus on testing, repairing or replacing our largest rotating operational
assets. These actions were prioritised based on the resilience offered to sites, as well as for optimising our energy consumption. We have been modernising
ourrotating assets, including the deployment of more efficient aeration equipment in the form of new blowers (air compressors), and we have also embarked
on a programme of optimising our Ultra-Violet treatment infrastructure, including making sure the calibration of the equipment controlling is carefully set up
todeliver the most efficient usage.
73Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
73Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Sustainability reporting continued
SASB Pennon 2023/24 disclosure
For the third year, we have aligned our non-financial disclosures
tothe Sustainability Accounting Standards Board (SASB)
reporting framework.
Metric Code 2023/24 Disclosure
Energy Management
(1) Total energy consumed,
(2)percentage grid electricity and
(3) percentage renewable
IF-WU-130a.1 (1) 484,374 MWh
(2) 83.5%
(3) 72.9%
Pennon Annual Report, SECR, page 73
*These figures are excluding SES Water
Distribution Network Efficiency
Water main replacement rate IF-WU-140a.1 Mains Repairs, (Number of repairs per 1,000km)
SWW: 136.6
BRL: 126.5
SES: 63.8 *unassured forecast
Pennon Annual Report, Mains Repairs, page 42
Volume of non-revenue real
waterlosses
IF-WU-140a.2 Leakage (3-yr average) (ML/day)
SWW: 107.0
BRL: 37.6
SES: 21.5 *unassured forecast
Pennon Annual Report, Leakage, page 42
Effluent Quality Management
Number of incidents of non-
compliance associated with water
effluent quality permits, standards,
and regulations
IF-WU-140b.1 South West Water EPA data report, 5. Discharge permit compliance metric. Available at:
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/water-and-sewerage-companies-in-england-
environmental-performance-report-2022
Discussion of strategies to manage
effluents of emerging concern
IF-WU-140b.2 South West Water contribute to the Chemical Investigation Programme (CIP), please refer to CIP
data portal – available at:
https://ukwir.org/sign-up-and-access-the-chemical-investigations-programme-data-access-portal
To see the findings from the latest CIP3 report, please refer to: CIP3 reports. Available at:
https://ukwir.org/cip3-information
SASB provides a set of industry specific standards (Water Utilities and Services industry), which each cover topics
which are material to our investors. These topics contain a number ofmetrics we disclose against. SASB metrics
include the full Group including Bristol Water and SES Water unless explicitly stated; however some metrics related to
regulated figures are currently reportedseparately within the South West Water and Bristol Water Annual Performance
Reports (APR’s) respectively. The latest APR’s were published in July 2023.
74 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Metric Code 2023/24 Disclosure
Water Affordability & Access
Average retail water rate for
(1)residential, (2) commercial,
and(3)industrial customers
IF-WU-240a.1 SWW:
(1) avg.: £486/year (£50 Government contribution applies)
(2), (3) Details of wholesale charges can be found at: https://www.southwestwater.co.uk/businesses/
wholesale-services/tariffs
BRL:
(1) avg.: £185/year (clean water only)
(2), (3) Details of wholesale charges can be found at: https://www.bristolwater.co.uk/hubfs/
Wholesale%20Tariffs/BRL%20Wholesale%20Charges%20Schedule%2024-25.pdf
(1) Number of residential
customer water disconnections
for non-payment, (2) percentage
reconnected within 30 days
IF-WU-240a.3 0, we do not disconnect customers for non-payment.
Discussion of impact of external
factors on customer affordability
of water, including the economic
conditions of the service territory
IF-WU-240a.4 We address affordability and vulnerability of customers within our service territory extensively
within our business plan document available at:
www.southwestwater.co.uk/siteassets/document-repository/business-plan-2020-2025/
addressing-affordability-and-vulnerability.pdf
Drinking Water Quality
Number of incidents of non-
compliance associated with
drinking water quality standards
and regulations
IF-WU-250a.1 Drinking Water Quality is reported in our Clean, safe and reliable water scores (CRI Score):
SWW: 3.02
BRL: 7.05
SES: 0.01
Also in our Taste, smell and colour contacts rates (contacts per 1,000 population):
SWW: 1.66
BRL: 0.82
SES: 0.58
Pennon Annual Report, Clean, safe and reliable water, (CRI Score), Taste, smell and colour contacts,
pages 42 to 43
Discussion of strategies to manage
drinking water contaminants of
emerging concern
IF-WU-250a.2 For more information on our specific strategies to improve water quality, such as the Upstream
Thinking Project, please visit: https://www.southwestwater.co.uk/environment/working-inthe-
environment/upstream-thinking/the-project/
For more information about Bristol Water’s catchment sensitive farming partnership
toimprove water quality and enhance habitats please visit: https://www.bristolwater.co.uk/
performancecommitments
End-Use Efficiency
Percentage of water utility revenue
from rate structures designed to
promote conservation and revenue
resilience
IF-WU-420a.1 We do not apply different rate structures.
Customer water savings from
efficiency measures, by market
IF-WU-420a.2 In addition to reducing our own water use by over 11ML/day over the past two years, we provide
funding to support local organisations every year through our Water-Saving Community Fund
which helps to provide water efficiency improvements such as education campaigns, water butts
and rain gardens.
Pennon Annual Report, Water Saving Community Fund, page 33, and more information available at:
https://www.pennon-group.co.uk/sustainability
75Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Metric Code 2023/24 Disclosure
Water Supply Resilience
Total water sourced from regions
with High or Extremely High
Baseline Water Stress; percentage
purchased from a third party
IF-WU-440a.1 You can visit our South West Water Drought Plan (2022)- available at:
https://www.southwestwater.co.uk/siteassets/document-repository/environment/sww-bw-
finaldrought-plan-september-2022.pdf
For further information of classifications, please refer to the EA’s Water Stressed Areas
Classification report available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/water-stressed-
areas-2021-classification
Under the EA classification Bristol Water do not source water from regions with high or extremely
high-water stress
Volume of recycled water delivered
to customers
IF-WU-440a.2 We do not currently deliver recycled water to customers, however South West Water Updated Draft
Water Resources Management Plan 2024 (dWRMP24) highlights plans to do this in the future in
locations such as Poole and Countess Wear. Read more here: https://www.southwestwater.co.uk/
siteassets/documents/about-us/wrmp/revised-wrmp/sww-dwrmp24-appendix-7-sea-report-dec23-
main-report.pdf
Discussion of strategies to manage
risks associated with the quality
and availability of water resources
IF-WU-440a.3 Our dWRMP24 highlights our Drinking Water Safety Plan, and Modelling & Scenario Analysis. Read
more here: https://www.southwestwater.co.uk/siteassets/documents/about-us/wrmp/revised-wrmp/
sww-dwrmp24-appendix-7-sea-report-dec23-main-report.pdf
Network Resiliency & Impacts of Climate Change
Wastewater treatment capacity
located in 100-year flood zones
IF-WU-450a.1 We have published our first Drainage and Wastewater Management Plan (DWMP), in
accordance with new government regulations. Within this plan we have outlined which of our
assets are at risk from coastal erosion and sea level rise, available at: https://www.southwestwater.
co.uk/siteassets/documents/about-us/dwmp/our-plan/dwmp-our-plan.pdf
(1) Number and (2) volume of
sanitary sewer overflows (SSO)
and (3) percentage of volume
recovered
IF-WU-450a.2 Please refer to our 2023 EDM Return – available at: https://www.southwestwater.co.uk/siteassets/
documents/about-us/business-plans/2020-25/edm-return-south-west-water-storm-overflow-
annual-2023---ea-publish-version.xlsx
(1) Number of unplanned service
disruptions and (2) customers
affected, each by duration category
IF-WU-450a.3 “Unplanned outages (%) and Supply interruptions (Duration per property per year):
SWW:
(1) 1.14
(2) 00:09:28
BRL:
(1) 2.58
(2) 00:09:24
SES:
(1) 0.81
(2) 00:03:36
Pennon Annual Report, page 42
Description of efforts to
identify and manage risks and
opportunities related to the impact
of climate change on distribution
and wastewater infrastructure
IF-WU-450a.4 South West Water
WRMP, Section 5. Forecasting our supply requirements, chapter 4. Impacts of climate change on
water supply. Please refer to: South West Water Draft Water Resource Management Plan (WRMP)
2024 - available at: https://www.southwestwater.co.uk/environment/water-resources/
waterresources-management-plan/
Climate change Adaptation Report, 2021. Appendix A: Detailed risk management matrix - available
at: https://www.southwestwater.co.uk/siteassets/document-repository/environment/climatechange-
adaption-2021.pdf
Bristol Water
Bristol Water’s Draft Water Resource Management Plan (WRMP) 2024, Chapter 9. Climate Change
- available at: https://www.bristolwater.co.uk/about-us/our-plans/water-resources/
Please see our Pennon Group plc TCFD statement available in our Pennon Annual Report, pages
78-109
Activity Metric
Number of: (1) residential, (2)
commercial, and (3) industrial
customers served, by service
provided
IF-WU-000.A Populations served:
SWW c1.8m
BW c.500,000
BRW c1.2m
Isles of Scilly c.2,000
SES c.740,000
Pennon Annual Report and Accounts, Pennon at a glance, Page 2.
Sustainability reporting continued
76 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Metric Code 2023/24 Disclosure
Activity Metric (cont.)
Total water sourced, percentage
by source type
IF-WU-000.B South West Water and Bristol Water APR
Additional regulatory information section - Water resources asset and volumes data table
ESG Databook, section 1.5 Water
Total water delivered to: (1)
residential, (2) commercial,
(3) industrial, and (4) all other
customers
IF-WU-000.C South West Water and Bristol Water APR
Additional regulatory information – Water network plus, Treated water distribution – assets and
operations table
Average volume of wastewater
treated per day, by (1) sanitary
sewer, (2) stormwater, and (3)
combined sewer
IF-WU-000.D South West Water and Bristol Water APR
Additional regulatory information -Wastewater network plus, Wastewater network+ – Sewer and
volume data table and Sewage treatment works data table
Length of (1) water mains and (2)
sewer pipe
IF-WU-000.E Pennon Group plc
(1) 29,000km of water pipes
(2) 23,000km of sewers
Pennon Annual Report and Accounts, Pennon at a glance, Page 2.
77Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
77Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
We are driven by our strategic focus of leading on UK environmental infrastructure,
delivering for the benefit of our customers, communities, and the environment.
We are committed to meeting the challenges arising as a result of climate
change, the nature emergency, and the transition to Net Zero.
Our regulated water business is the main focus of our TCFD & TNFD
disclosures, with the majority of our assets, revenues, and expenditures
related to this area of our business.
TCFD recommendations
Created by the Financial Stability Board (FSB), the TCFD published its
recommendations in June 2017. This is our fifth year of TCFD reporting and
the below shows our progress and compliance with the recommendations
including the updated TCFD guidance (2021 Annex).
In alignment with FCA listing rule 9.8.6R(8) we have taken into
account available knowledge and guidance concerning the listing
rule and climate-related risks to develop our compliant TCFD
disclosure. Each year our disclosures have been enhanced as
knowledge and guidance improves. Pennon has addressed the
11 recommended disclosures and has considered the latest best
practice guidance from the TCFD.
As part of our ongoing TCFD programme, we have continued to enhance
our assessment of physical risks, transition risks, and climate-related
opportunities.
TNFD recommendations
The TNFD published its final framework for nature-related financial
disclosures in September 2023. This is our third year of voluntarily reporting
against the TNFD framework. This year we are taking the opportunity to
integrate TNFD into our TCFD disclosures, recognising the substantial
overlap and synergies for our business between action on climate change
and the nature emergency. At the same time, we also recognise some trade-
offs in meeting our goals around resilience, Net Zero, and nature.
We acknowledge there is further work to do on the recommended TNFD
disclosures, and we are continuing to monitor the inclusion on nature-risks
inthe UK sustainability disclosure requirements.
Developments in 2023/2024
2023 was another year of record-breaking weather with higher than average
rainfall rates and frequent storms bringing extreme rainfall and winds. This
has presented operational challenges to overcome and although we have
ensured the safe and secure supply of water and wastewater services in
the region, it further highlights the need for climate change resilience and
preparedness. These events have provided us with significant insight into
our resilience to these kinds of events (which we may see more frequently
in the future), which are factored into our update of our physical climate risk
assessment and our review of adaptive strategies.
In addition to our published Water Resources Management Plan (WRMP24)
and Drainage & Wastewater Management Plan (DWMP), South West Water
developed its £2.8 billion business plan proposal (2025-2030) for PR24,
focusing on water quality and resilience, storm overflows and pollution,
net zero and environmental gains, and addressing customer affordability.
Therefore, our TCFD disclosure reflects updated current and future actions
to mitigate risks and realise opportunities. The updates to our climate
risk assessments also consider new climate-related evidence and recent
publications from the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC)
and Climate Change Committee (CCC), further to recent publications from
Ofwat (our economic regulator) on scenario analysis, adaptive planning,
PR24 methodology, and updates in regulation and legislation, the latter of
which gives us greater confidence in our transition risk impact reporting in
the short term.
Our Company has continued to grow over the past year, with Pennon Power
acquiring four new renewable energy generation projects to accelerate our
transition to Net Zero, and the acquisition of SES Water. Through Pennon
Power we are realising some of the benefits described in our opportunities,
whilst in our view SES Water’s material climate risks and opportunities will
be similar to the SWW water business risks. We are taking the opportunity to
further our resilience this year as we update our Climate Adaptation Report
as part of the UK government’s adaptation reporting cycle to feed into the
next UK Climate Change Risk Assessment.
We are focused on delivering for our stakeholders including our customers
and shareholders. As a result, we are continuing to embed climate change
resilience, sustainability, and nature-positive practices into decision
making within our business, as well as managing the near-term inflationary
pressures including power prices. We will also continue to manage changes
to our investments to explore new technology, materials, and nature-based
solutions, within the current global constraints on capacity and supply chains
to deliver both affordability and fairness for our customers.
As a Group, we maintain consistent and strong reporting with the CDP,
presenting our efforts to combat climate change and our GHG emissions
since 2013. Our GHG emissions performance continues to improve, reported
through our CDP Climate Change submission in which we received a B in
2023 for both climate change and water security. You can read about our
GHG emissions performance on page 71.
Task Force on Climate-related Financial
Disclosures (TCFD) and Task Force on
Nature-related Financial Disclosures (TNFD)
78 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Governance
Our governance around climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities
2023/24 progress 2024 and beyond
We are continuing to enhance our governance framework, including
increased recognition of the role that each Board Committee and
several executive committees play in managing climate-related risk and
opportunities.
We continue to incorporate carbon values into our investment decision-
making, and we continue to incentivise our Executives to deliver climate
and environmental goals.
We will continue to further embed climate resilience and consider
enhancements to our governance around nature-related risks and
opportunities.
We will continue to further embed the assessment and identification
of climate-related risks and nature-related risks within our investment
appraisal processes.
Strategy
The actual and potential impacts of climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities on our business, strategy, and financial planning
2023/24 progress 2024 and beyond
We have reviewed and enhanced our assessments of physical and
transitional climate risks and opportunities. We have re-assessed the
materiality of key risks with stakeholders across the Group and enhanced
the actions we are taking to manage the most pressing risks.
We have considered climate change and nature recovery in South West
Water’s strategic planning for Water Resources (WRMP24) and our PR24
Business Plan.
We will continue to integrate our climate risks within our existing risk
management systems and risk registers across the Group. Risk owners
will continue to drive and monitor action to manage risks and pursue
opportunities.
We will consolidate our assessment of nature-related risks and
opportunities to identify our most material risks.
We will continue to review our policies and strategic decision-making
across the Group in order to enhance considerations of climate and
nature risks and opportunities.
Risk management
The processes we use to identify, assess, and manage climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities
2023/24 progress 2024 and beyond
We have reviewed our principal risks and enhanced our recognition of how
climate change, Net Zero, and the nature emergency impact and influence
our principal risks.
We will continue to review and update our management of climate and
nature risks and our decision-making frameworks to ensure risks are
clearly identified and assessed through the investment processes and
operational decision-making.
Metrics and targets
The metrics and targets we use to assess and manage the relevant climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities
2023/24 progress 2024 and beyond
We have continued to monitor key metrics linked to selected climate risks
and opportunities, and our investments in climate action. We are tracking
progress against our ESG targets and our Net Zero commitments and
renewable energy generation.
We are undertaking analysis to quantify key risks, such as major assets at
risk of coastal flooding.
We are continuing to explore options to develop quantitative metrics
for our key climate risks and opportunities, and exploring our ability to
report on our capital expenditure related to climate action.
Climate-related and nature-related governance
Board oversight
The Group has a strong governance structure in place to oversee the
effective operation of our business and to manage all risks - including
climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities. Overall ownership
and responsibility for risks, opportunities, and mitigation actions is held by
the Pennon Group Board and CEO. Various Board Committees and executive
sub-committees play a key role in overseeing climate-related and nature-
related risks within their domain.
The Group recognises that climate change, the nature emergency, and the
transition to Net Zero impacts and influences several of the Group’s principal
risks (see our Principal Risks report on page 55). Principal risks are reviewed
as part of our audit governance processes. During the regulatory period,
climate change planning is assessed to ensure the business remains resilient
to changes to its capital programme.
79Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Pennon Group and South West Water Boards
The Group and South West Water Boards provide oversight to the management of our climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities, through
the ESG Committee. The Boards have overall responsibility for the Group’s risk management policies and processes, and all principal risks are reviewed by the
Boards on a regular basis. The Boards consider climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities throughout its duties - including when considering
the Group’s strategy and objectives, monitoring business and operational performance, business planning and annual budget setting, reviewing major capital
expenditures and existing investments, and in considering acquisitions/divestments. We are continuing to enhance the awareness and capacity of our Boards
and senior executives relating to climate and nature risks and opportunities. For more information see our Corporate Governance report pages 112 to 174.
Board Committees
All Board Committees play a role in managing our climate-related risks and opportunities, and several play a role in managing our nature
risks and opportunities, and we are continuing to raise awareness of these issues across Board Committees. Matters are escalated to the
Board as appropriate. Board Committees report their actions and decisions to the Board, ensuring robust governance - including for matters influenced
by climate change, nature recovery and the transition to Net Zero. The responsibility for climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities
iscascaded through the business in order to meet our targets and objectives. Governance of nature-related risks and opportunities will be enhanced
inthe next AMP period when our performance commitments will include biodiversity.
Audit Committee
Attendance: Meets 4 times annually.
Attended by the Chair and other Non-
Executive Directors.
Role relating to climate risks and
opportunities: The Committee
monitors the Group’s financial reporting,
including how the impacts of climate
risks are accounted for in financial
statements. The Committee also
reviews key risks and opportunities
(including climate-related risks), and
challenges and tests the Group’s
internal control processes including risk
management and internal audit. Further
information on page 136.
Remuneration Committee
Attendance: Meets 4 times annually.
Attended by the Chair and other Non-
Executive Directors.
Role relating to climate risks and
opportunities: Considers the Group’s
objectives and responsibilities, and
advises the Board on the framework
of executive remuneration for the
Group and for the wider workforce,
including mechanisms to incentivise
achievement of the Group’s objectives
related to climate change, Net Zero, and
sustainability goals. Further information
on page 148.
ESG Committee
Attendance: Meets 4 times annually.
Attended by the Pennon Board, CEO,
and other Group Executives.
Role relating to climate and nature
risks and opportunities: Provides the
platform for discussion of the Group’s
ESG agenda and related climate and
nature risks and opportunities, as well
as setting and reviewing key metrics
relating to our ‘6 capitals’ assessments,
and reviewing performance against
ESG targets and goals. The Sustainable
Financing reporting and monitoring is
reported to the Committee for onward
submission to the Board. Further
information on page 144.
Health and Safety Committee
Attendance: Meets 2 times annually.
Attended by the Chair, CEO, and other
Non-Executive Directors.
Role relating to climate risks and
opportunities: Supports the Executive
Board on matters of risk across all
areas of health and safety, resilience,
and process safety - including areas
impacted by climate-related risks,
particularly related to harm from
extreme weather events. Also reviews
the effectiveness of the Group’s
procedures for H&S reporting and
performance. Further information on
page 146.
Nomination Committee
Attendance: Meets 4 times annually.
Attended by the Chair and other Non-
Executive Directors.
Role relating to climate risks
and opportunities: Considers
competency related to climate risks
and opportunities when reviewing the
structure, size, and composition of the
Board and senior executives In the
Group. Further information on page 131.
PR24 Committee
Attendance: Meets during the Board
cycle to review and monitor the PR24
Business Plan progress. Attended
by the Chair, other Non-Executive
Directors, CEO, CFO, and other Group
Executives.
Role relating to climate and nature
risks and opportunities: Considers
climate change, nature recovery, and
Net Zero as part of business planning
and the Group’s PR24 strategy.
TCFD and TNFD continued
80 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Management’s role
Executive managers play a key role in identifying, assessing, and managing
climate-related risks and opportunities, and Executive managers sit on
relevant Executive committees. The responsibility for climate-related and
nature-related risks is owned, managed, and assessed by a number of the
Group’s management teams across our business including our management
responsible for water resources, wastewater, regulation, procurement,
engineering, natural resources/biodiversity, and finance. Risk is identified and
categorised in different parts of our business prior to being formally passed
onto senior management responsible for those business functions. Each
business function and department maintains a risk register, and management
escalate risks to the Executive Committees as appropriate. We are continuing
to raise awareness and the capacity of teams and executive management
toidentify, assess, and manage climate and nature risks and opportunities.
The Executive Directors’ remuneration policy is set to incentivise the
achievement of key performance objectives. This includes ESG objectives
and performance including targets relating to climate resilience, carbon
reduction, water quality, environmental performance, the working
environment for our employees, and diversity.
Pennon Executive Board
1
Attendance: CEO, CFO, COO, GCCS, CPO, CCDO, Director of Regulation
Strategy and Net Zero of SWW, Chief Engineering Director of SWW, Director
of Drought and Resilience of SWW.
Role relating to climate and nature risks and opportunities: The
Committee monitors, approves and reviews business objectives and plans,
and provides challenge and feedback to investment decisions. Throughout
these processes climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities
are considered and actions to manage risks are embedded in business
planning and investment decision-making. There are several executive
committees who report to Pennon Executive Board (PEX), and below are
some of the key committees which consider climate-related risks and
opportunities within their remit:
South West Bournemouth Bristol Executive Board (SWBB) - oversees and
informs Board Committees on operational performance and risks across
the regulated water businesses, including the impacts of climate-related
and nature-related risks to operations, and the actions being taken to
manage operational risks.
Net Zero Executive Committee - monitors, reviews, and provides support
for the implementation of the Net Zero Strategy, including considering
risks and opportunities relevant to delivery of the strategy, including
nature-based solutions.
1. CEO = Group Chief Executive Officer, CFO = Group Chief Financial Officer, GCCS = Group General Counsel & Company Secretary, COO = Chief Operating Officer of SWW, CPO =
Group Chief People Officer, CCDO = Chief Customer and Digital Officer of SWW
Strategy
We are recommended by TCFD to disclose the actual and potential impacts
of climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities onthe
organisation’s businesses, strategy, and financial planning where such
information is material.
Climate-related risks and opportunities
Our most material physical and transitional climate-related risks and
opportunities are presented on the following pages. These have been
identified by considering the climate scenarios described on page 102.
Therisks have been assessed using the Pennon 4x4 risk assessment matrix
which puts the highest risks in the red category under the RAG rating.
Further information on our risk assessment methodology can be found
on page 55. We have identified impacts over short (0-10 years), medium
(10-30years) and long term (30-100 years) horizons (the rationale behind
these time horizons is presented on page 102).
Due to the nature of our business, the opportunities are not only assessed
ontheir ability to increase our revenues; some are opportunities to save
costs and/or carbon, which supports our ability to provide the best outcomes
for our customers and stakeholders.
We then present our findings from scenario analysis, exploring the potential
range of impacts and our strategic responses under plausible contrasting
climate scenarios (see page 103).
81Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Physical climate risks
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Key physical climaterisks
Increasing frequency and intensity of droughts
- risks to water supply, wastewater networks,
andservices.
Relevant time horizon
Short, medium and long term, with increasing
likelihood and magnitude of risk over each horizon
This year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Last year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Sustained drought can lead to supply shortfalls with a heightened risk for recovering water
storage if there are consecutive drought years.
Risk compounded by high temperature events that increase daily and peak demand for garden
watering, crop irrigation, and tourism exceeding the capacity to redistribute water.
Drought events lead to loss of supply and de-pressurisation of pipelines, greater incidence
ofpipe failure and contamination.
More extreme wetting and drying cycles cause soil movement, more pipe movement/ subsidence
and bursts/ increased leakage.
Lower river flows, as a result of drought events, reduce yields. Could lead to reductions in
our future abstraction allowances and increased need to release more water to rivers/the
environment (see also ‘Climate-related regulation in the Water sector’ transition risk).
Lower groundwater levels reduce borehole yields. Intake, borehole pump and reservoir draw-off
levels may not match reduced levels.
Water companies are legally expected to protect, restore and enhance the environment, which
includes ensuring sustainable abstraction practices to leave enough water for the environment.
This becomes more challenging during droughts.
Saline intrusion due to lowering groundwater compounded by sea level rise (see ‘Rising sea
levels’ risk).
Decreased quality of raw water (see ‘gradual and significant increasing average and high
temperatures - risks to water quality and water treatment’).
Impacts on wastewater networks due to low flows from surface water.
Low water levels lead to increased incidences of invasive non-native species (INNS) as they are
de-stressed and seek new habitats.
Current actions:
Collaborative water resource management planning – West Country Water
Resources and Water Resources South East.
Drought planning including more extreme events. Stochastic and multi-
year drought analysis to test how water supply systems perform in extreme
prolonged droughts.
Prioritisation of support for vulnerable customers during droughts.
Demand management and water efficiency, including increased metering, Per
Capita Consumption (PCC) reductions and leakage reduction strategy.
Smart Saver tariff trial.
Cheddar 2 reservoir in Bristol and water reuse plant in Poole.
Water grid to ensure all strategic reservoirs are connected and improve
resilience.
Leakbot trial to reduce leakage levels.
Smart pond trial to provide a local storage solution.
Investigation of regional water transfers.
Potential Abstraction Incentive Mechanism (AIM) schemes.
Enhancements to distribution system to remove bottlenecks/ support us to
meet peak demand.
Desalination schemes in development to enhance our drought management
in both Isle of Scilly and Cornwall.
Repurposing quarries to provide new storage.
Planned or future actions:
West Country Water Resources Regional Plan 2029 and Water Resources
Management Plan 2029 water treatment improvements and wastewater
reuse.
Potential for additional desalination schemes.
Ability to convert Mayflower Water Treatment Works (WTWs) to water reuse
plant when, and if required in the future.
Mainstream smart ponds.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Opex and Capex) to increase
capacity for water supply infrastructure, and to manage drought conditions
and water demand. Some of these costs could be recoverable through
theregulatory system. Increased energy and material use could impact
ouroperational and embodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Service disruptions could negatively impact our reputation and reduce
ODI rewards/ increase ODI penalties (affecting our revenue). We could
face additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) to recover from service
disruptions, reduce leakage, and manage water demand. Some of our
assets could deteriorate and face impairment due to physical impacts.
Key physical climaterisks
Gradual and significant increasing average and
high temperatures - risks to water quality and
watertreatment
Relevant time horizon
Short, medium and long term, with increasing
likelihood and magnitude of risk over each horizon
This year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Last year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Decreased water quality (odour, discolouration, dissolved organics, cryptosporidium) requiring
additional resources and cost to remove pathogens from drinking water or ensure water quality
meets regulatory standards at water treatment works (WTWs).
Increased microbe propagation and survivability affecting treatment processes.
Higher septicity levels in received wastewater.
Algal blooms, triggered by catchment runoff, are exacerbated by higher temperatures.
Higher peak demand for water compounded by reduced runoff yields due to higher temperatures
increasing evaporation (see ‘Increasing frequency and intensity of droughts’ risk).
Decreased water quality compounded by overheating of equipment/assets.
Cascading impacts to interdependent networks (e.g. power supply) from overheating, leading
toservice disruption.
Increased prevalence of INNS.
Current actions:
Upstream Thinking catchment management programme tackling raw
water quality to increase resource availability in 80% of our drinking water
catchments.
Investment in six treatment works including granular activated carbon at
certain WTWs.
Robust health and safety practices and management.
Farm water efficiency and resilience project – 1,000 pond nature-based
solutions.
Biodiversity management and INNS programmes.
Installation of cooling systems for equipment/assets.
Planned or future actions:
Upgrade to granular activated carbon treatment at further WTWs.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex) for water and
wastewater treatment and odour management, and to increase capacity
for water supply infrastructure. Some of these costs could be recoverable
through the regulatory system. Increased energy and material use could
impact our operational and embodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Service disruptions and lower-quality service provision could negatively
impact our reputation and reduce ODI rewards/increase ODI penalties
(affecting our revenue).
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex) to recover
ourservices or use alternative water supplies.
Some of our assets could deteriorate and face impairment due to
physicalimpacts.
TCFD and TNFD continued
Key
Risk ratings Risk Trend
High Medium Low Increasing Stable Decreasing
82 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Physical climate risks
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Key physical climaterisks
Increasing frequency and intensity of droughts
- risks to water supply, wastewater networks,
andservices.
Relevant time horizon
Short, medium and long term, with increasing
likelihood and magnitude of risk over each horizon
This year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Last year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Sustained drought can lead to supply shortfalls with a heightened risk for recovering water
storage if there are consecutive drought years.
Risk compounded by high temperature events that increase daily and peak demand for garden
watering, crop irrigation, and tourism exceeding the capacity to redistribute water.
Drought events lead to loss of supply and de-pressurisation of pipelines, greater incidence
ofpipe failure and contamination.
More extreme wetting and drying cycles cause soil movement, more pipe movement/ subsidence
and bursts/ increased leakage.
Lower river flows, as a result of drought events, reduce yields. Could lead to reductions in
our future abstraction allowances and increased need to release more water to rivers/the
environment (see also ‘Climate-related regulation in the Water sector’ transition risk).
Lower groundwater levels reduce borehole yields. Intake, borehole pump and reservoir draw-off
levels may not match reduced levels.
Water companies are legally expected to protect, restore and enhance the environment, which
includes ensuring sustainable abstraction practices to leave enough water for the environment.
This becomes more challenging during droughts.
Saline intrusion due to lowering groundwater compounded by sea level rise (see ‘Rising sea
levels’ risk).
Decreased quality of raw water (see ‘gradual and significant increasing average and high
temperatures - risks to water quality and water treatment’).
Impacts on wastewater networks due to low flows from surface water.
Low water levels lead to increased incidences of invasive non-native species (INNS) as they are
de-stressed and seek new habitats.
Current actions:
Collaborative water resource management planning – West Country Water
Resources and Water Resources South East.
Drought planning including more extreme events. Stochastic and multi-
year drought analysis to test how water supply systems perform in extreme
prolonged droughts.
Prioritisation of support for vulnerable customers during droughts.
Demand management and water efficiency, including increased metering, Per
Capita Consumption (PCC) reductions and leakage reduction strategy.
Smart Saver tariff trial.
Cheddar 2 reservoir in Bristol and water reuse plant in Poole.
Water grid to ensure all strategic reservoirs are connected and improve
resilience.
Leakbot trial to reduce leakage levels.
Smart pond trial to provide a local storage solution.
Investigation of regional water transfers.
Potential Abstraction Incentive Mechanism (AIM) schemes.
Enhancements to distribution system to remove bottlenecks/ support us to
meet peak demand.
Desalination schemes in development to enhance our drought management
in both Isle of Scilly and Cornwall.
Repurposing quarries to provide new storage.
Planned or future actions:
West Country Water Resources Regional Plan 2029 and Water Resources
Management Plan 2029 water treatment improvements and wastewater
reuse.
Potential for additional desalination schemes.
Ability to convert Mayflower Water Treatment Works (WTWs) to water reuse
plant when, and if required in the future.
Mainstream smart ponds.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Opex and Capex) to increase
capacity for water supply infrastructure, and to manage drought conditions
and water demand. Some of these costs could be recoverable through
theregulatory system. Increased energy and material use could impact
ouroperational and embodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Service disruptions could negatively impact our reputation and reduce
ODI rewards/ increase ODI penalties (affecting our revenue). We could
face additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) to recover from service
disruptions, reduce leakage, and manage water demand. Some of our
assets could deteriorate and face impairment due to physical impacts.
Key physical climaterisks
Gradual and significant increasing average and
high temperatures - risks to water quality and
watertreatment
Relevant time horizon
Short, medium and long term, with increasing
likelihood and magnitude of risk over each horizon
This year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Last year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Decreased water quality (odour, discolouration, dissolved organics, cryptosporidium) requiring
additional resources and cost to remove pathogens from drinking water or ensure water quality
meets regulatory standards at water treatment works (WTWs).
Increased microbe propagation and survivability affecting treatment processes.
Higher septicity levels in received wastewater.
Algal blooms, triggered by catchment runoff, are exacerbated by higher temperatures.
Higher peak demand for water compounded by reduced runoff yields due to higher temperatures
increasing evaporation (see ‘Increasing frequency and intensity of droughts’ risk).
Decreased water quality compounded by overheating of equipment/assets.
Cascading impacts to interdependent networks (e.g. power supply) from overheating, leading
toservice disruption.
Increased prevalence of INNS.
Current actions:
Upstream Thinking catchment management programme tackling raw
water quality to increase resource availability in 80% of our drinking water
catchments.
Investment in six treatment works including granular activated carbon at
certain WTWs.
Robust health and safety practices and management.
Farm water efficiency and resilience project – 1,000 pond nature-based
solutions.
Biodiversity management and INNS programmes.
Installation of cooling systems for equipment/assets.
Planned or future actions:
Upgrade to granular activated carbon treatment at further WTWs.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex) for water and
wastewater treatment and odour management, and to increase capacity
for water supply infrastructure. Some of these costs could be recoverable
through the regulatory system. Increased energy and material use could
impact our operational and embodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Service disruptions and lower-quality service provision could negatively
impact our reputation and reduce ODI rewards/increase ODI penalties
(affecting our revenue).
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex) to recover
ourservices or use alternative water supplies.
Some of our assets could deteriorate and face impairment due to
physicalimpacts.
83Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Physical Climate Risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Key physical climaterisks
Increasing frequency of heavy rainfall and floods
- risks to assets and services, water quality,
andtheenvironment
Relevant time horizon
Short, medium and long term, with increasing
likelihood and magnitude of risk over each horizon
This year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Last year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Impacts from intense rainfall overwhelming the surface water drainage system and from
prolonged rainfall leading to groundwater flooding.
Flooding of assets and treatment works, loss of access to assets, and greater sediment levels
inraw water which disrupt services and potentially impact the environment.
Cascading impacts to interdependent networks (e.g. power supply) from flooding, leading
toservice disruption.
Increased groundwater leading to increased infiltration into assets.
Increased volumes of storm-water exceed pump capacity leading to service failures.
Exceedance of storm tank design and asset flooding/damage with interruption to service.
Increased frequency and duration of storm overflows, with potential impacts to water bodies -
including potential closure of beaches.
Increased river flows and risk of bank erosion exposing wastewater pipes, increasing the risk
ofcollapse.
Catchment erosion in moorland or peatland areas, with nutrients leaching that increase algal
growth in waterbodies and reservoirs.
Dilution of, and rapid variations in, influent flows – longer retention of water in storm tanks
leadsto increased septicity and operational problems.
Increased flood incidence impacts water quality for some boreholes, may result in temporary
inaccessibility or contamination.
Increased turbidity of water sources.
Increased river flows and riverbank erosion. Risk to riverside pipework and assets.
Current actions:
Drainage & Wastewater Management Plan (DWMP) which includes working closely
withother flood risk management organisations to develop shared solutions.
Asset flood risk assessments undertaken every five years.
Contingency planning in flood risk hotspots e.g. River Otter, including prioritisation
ofsupport for vulnerable customers.
Sites have temporary deployable flood protection.
Investment in current period to improve flood defences at four WTWs to provide resilience
up to 1-in- 1,000-year events.
Catchment management through Upstream and Downstream Thinking.
Continued investment in our WaterFit Plans - reducing storm overflow releases and
improving river and coastal water quality, creating and restoring habitat, and looking
toinspire local champions to improve water quality through schools and communities.
Partnership flood schemes e.g. Countess Wear Wastewater Treatment Works (WWTW)
(Exeter).
Catchment Systems Thinking Co-operative (CaSTCo) project with the Centre for
Resilience in Environment, Water and Waste (CREWW). Considers how nature based
solutions can help reduce surface water inputs to the combined sewer network.
Natural catchment management plan pilot study.
Planned or future actions:
Continue to work closely with other flood risk management organisations on our shared
responsibility for surface water flooding and drainage.
Further sewer separation schemes in areas at risk.
Surface water drainage plans and investment in key areas.
Expand our Upstream Thinking initiative.
Real-time monitoring and control e.g. at all Combined Sewer Overflows (CSO). Improved
data recording has led to more transparency of this risk.
Promote improved understanding that the number of CSOs does not directly equate
toenvironmental or human health impact.
Continue to improve incident management.
Assess storm overflow solutions using the ‘Green First’ principle prioritising the
consideration of nature-based solutions. Pilot study to develop a natural capital plan.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) to
improve operational resilience and flood defences, and to
enhance our Upstream and Downstream Thinking programmes.
Some of these costs could be recoverable through the
regulatory system. Increased energy and material use could
impact our operational and embodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Service disruptions and combined storm overflows could
negatively impact our reputation and reduce ODI rewards/
increase ODI penalties (affecting our revenue).
We could incur additional expenditure (Opex and Capex)
torecover our services and repair damaged assets.
Some of our assets could deteriorate and face impairment
dueto physical impacts.
Key physical climaterisks
Rising sea levels and coastal erosion - risks to assets
and services
Relevant time horizon
Short, medium and long term, with increasing
likelihood and magnitude of risk over each horizon
This year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Last year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Direct asset damage from flooding, storm damage and/or coastal erosion.
Cascading impacts to interdependent networks (e.g. power supply) due to damage from coastal
flooding, storm damage and/or coastal erosion.
Rising sea levels increase the extent of the saline intrusion zone. Tidal limits move upstream,
causing increased salinity at river intakes. This can cause accelerated asset deterioration
andreduced process performance efficacy.
Increased health and safety implications e.g. hydrogen sulphide gas from wastewater
treatmentworks.
Saltwater intrusion of groundwater sources causing source to become unusable (compounded
by lowering groundwater levels – see our ‘Increasing frequency and intensity of droughts’ risk).
Coastal estuarine storm overflow discharges become tide-locked hindering free discharge.
Increased environmental ambition by other stakeholders to replace lost coastal habitat and
manage coastal erosion, impacting our assets and services (in some cases requiring us to carry
out actions which may not be funded through the regulatory system).
Current actions:
Asset flood risk assessments undertaken every five years. Recent risk assessment
incorporates the latest UK Climate Projections. Informs the development of Shoreline
Management Plans to working collaboratively with other land holders on shared solutions.
Managing risk to sites through existing Operational Response and Recovery Plans.
Drainage and Wastewater Management Plan (DWMP)
Prioritisation of support for vulnerable customers.
Improved flood resilience of all assets in the coastal floodplain.
Partnership flood schemes e.g. Countess Wear WWTW (Exeter).
Protection of sites from saline intrusion/incursion (Otter Basin).
Continuing work with stakeholders involved in managing coastal erosion.
Planned or future actions:
Protection of further sites from saline intrusion/incursion.
Desalination programme to replace ‘at risk’ sources such as Isles of Scilly boreholes.
Ongoing work with other risk management authorities to inform the development
oftherelevant Shoreline Management Plans.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) for
protecting our sites and assets from coastal flooding and saline
intrusion. Some of these costs could be recoverable through
the regulatory system.
Increased energy and material use could impact our operational
and embodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Service disruptions could negatively impact our reputation
and reduce ODI rewards/increase ODI penalties (affecting
ourrevenue).
We could face additional expenditure (Opex and Capex)
for using alternative water supply if sites/sources
becomeunusable.
Some of our assets could deteriorate and face impairment
dueto physical impacts.
TCFD and TNFD continued
Key
Risk ratings Risk Trend
High Medium Low Increasing Stable Decreasing
84 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Physical Climate Risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Key physical climaterisks
Increasing frequency of heavy rainfall and floods
- risks to assets and services, water quality,
andtheenvironment
Relevant time horizon
Short, medium and long term, with increasing
likelihood and magnitude of risk over each horizon
This year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Last year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Impacts from intense rainfall overwhelming the surface water drainage system and from
prolonged rainfall leading to groundwater flooding.
Flooding of assets and treatment works, loss of access to assets, and greater sediment levels
inraw water which disrupt services and potentially impact the environment.
Cascading impacts to interdependent networks (e.g. power supply) from flooding, leading
toservice disruption.
Increased groundwater leading to increased infiltration into assets.
Increased volumes of storm-water exceed pump capacity leading to service failures.
Exceedance of storm tank design and asset flooding/damage with interruption to service.
Increased frequency and duration of storm overflows, with potential impacts to water bodies -
including potential closure of beaches.
Increased river flows and risk of bank erosion exposing wastewater pipes, increasing the risk
ofcollapse.
Catchment erosion in moorland or peatland areas, with nutrients leaching that increase algal
growth in waterbodies and reservoirs.
Dilution of, and rapid variations in, influent flows – longer retention of water in storm tanks
leadsto increased septicity and operational problems.
Increased flood incidence impacts water quality for some boreholes, may result in temporary
inaccessibility or contamination.
Increased turbidity of water sources.
Increased river flows and riverbank erosion. Risk to riverside pipework and assets.
Current actions:
Drainage & Wastewater Management Plan (DWMP) which includes working closely
withother flood risk management organisations to develop shared solutions.
Asset flood risk assessments undertaken every five years.
Contingency planning in flood risk hotspots e.g. River Otter, including prioritisation
ofsupport for vulnerable customers.
Sites have temporary deployable flood protection.
Investment in current period to improve flood defences at four WTWs to provide resilience
up to 1-in- 1,000-year events.
Catchment management through Upstream and Downstream Thinking.
Continued investment in our WaterFit Plans - reducing storm overflow releases and
improving river and coastal water quality, creating and restoring habitat, and looking
toinspire local champions to improve water quality through schools and communities.
Partnership flood schemes e.g. Countess Wear Wastewater Treatment Works (WWTW)
(Exeter).
Catchment Systems Thinking Co-operative (CaSTCo) project with the Centre for
Resilience in Environment, Water and Waste (CREWW). Considers how nature based
solutions can help reduce surface water inputs to the combined sewer network.
Natural catchment management plan pilot study.
Planned or future actions:
Continue to work closely with other flood risk management organisations on our shared
responsibility for surface water flooding and drainage.
Further sewer separation schemes in areas at risk.
Surface water drainage plans and investment in key areas.
Expand our Upstream Thinking initiative.
Real-time monitoring and control e.g. at all Combined Sewer Overflows (CSO). Improved
data recording has led to more transparency of this risk.
Promote improved understanding that the number of CSOs does not directly equate
toenvironmental or human health impact.
Continue to improve incident management.
Assess storm overflow solutions using the ‘Green First’ principle prioritising the
consideration of nature-based solutions. Pilot study to develop a natural capital plan.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) to
improve operational resilience and flood defences, and to
enhance our Upstream and Downstream Thinking programmes.
Some of these costs could be recoverable through the
regulatory system. Increased energy and material use could
impact our operational and embodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Service disruptions and combined storm overflows could
negatively impact our reputation and reduce ODI rewards/
increase ODI penalties (affecting our revenue).
We could incur additional expenditure (Opex and Capex)
torecover our services and repair damaged assets.
Some of our assets could deteriorate and face impairment
dueto physical impacts.
Key physical climaterisks
Rising sea levels and coastal erosion - risks to assets
and services
Relevant time horizon
Short, medium and long term, with increasing
likelihood and magnitude of risk over each horizon
This year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Last year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Direct asset damage from flooding, storm damage and/or coastal erosion.
Cascading impacts to interdependent networks (e.g. power supply) due to damage from coastal
flooding, storm damage and/or coastal erosion.
Rising sea levels increase the extent of the saline intrusion zone. Tidal limits move upstream,
causing increased salinity at river intakes. This can cause accelerated asset deterioration
andreduced process performance efficacy.
Increased health and safety implications e.g. hydrogen sulphide gas from wastewater
treatmentworks.
Saltwater intrusion of groundwater sources causing source to become unusable (compounded
by lowering groundwater levels – see our ‘Increasing frequency and intensity of droughts’ risk).
Coastal estuarine storm overflow discharges become tide-locked hindering free discharge.
Increased environmental ambition by other stakeholders to replace lost coastal habitat and
manage coastal erosion, impacting our assets and services (in some cases requiring us to carry
out actions which may not be funded through the regulatory system).
Current actions:
Asset flood risk assessments undertaken every five years. Recent risk assessment
incorporates the latest UK Climate Projections. Informs the development of Shoreline
Management Plans to working collaboratively with other land holders on shared solutions.
Managing risk to sites through existing Operational Response and Recovery Plans.
Drainage and Wastewater Management Plan (DWMP)
Prioritisation of support for vulnerable customers.
Improved flood resilience of all assets in the coastal floodplain.
Partnership flood schemes e.g. Countess Wear WWTW (Exeter).
Protection of sites from saline intrusion/incursion (Otter Basin).
Continuing work with stakeholders involved in managing coastal erosion.
Planned or future actions:
Protection of further sites from saline intrusion/incursion.
Desalination programme to replace ‘at risk’ sources such as Isles of Scilly boreholes.
Ongoing work with other risk management authorities to inform the development
oftherelevant Shoreline Management Plans.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) for
protecting our sites and assets from coastal flooding and saline
intrusion. Some of these costs could be recoverable through
the regulatory system.
Increased energy and material use could impact our operational
and embodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Service disruptions could negatively impact our reputation
and reduce ODI rewards/increase ODI penalties (affecting
ourrevenue).
We could face additional expenditure (Opex and Capex)
for using alternative water supply if sites/sources
becomeunusable.
Some of our assets could deteriorate and face impairment
dueto physical impacts.
85Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Physical Climate Risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Key physical climaterisks
Increasing frequency of extreme weather events,
heatwaves and storms – Acute risks to assets and
services
Relevant time horizon
Short, medium and long term, with increasing
likelihood and magnitude of risk over each horizon
This year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Last year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Power supply failure due to high winds, heavy rainfall/flooding, lightning at key network and
treatment sites and resultant cascading impacts to interdependent networks, including water
supply delivery and wastewater management.
Cold snaps and freeze/thaw events leading to pipe bursts/ increased leakage.
Reduced ability for our services and assets to recover under consecutive storms.
Surges in customer water-use during heatwave events leads to operational challenges to treat
and distribute water at pace even when there is enough water in sources (also see ‘Increasing
frequency and intensity of droughts’ risk).
Damage to our assets due to extreme weather and/or heatwaves e.g. overheating of electrical
equipment.
Decreased water quality during heatwaves.
Current actions:
Cold weather plan, including prioritisation of support for vulnerable customers.
Investment in centralised control room and alternative water supply teams.
Appointment of a new incident management team.
Improved staff incident training.
Working with other water companies to develop a business continuity and visualisation
tool that will support operational decisions and reduce customer impacts, including to the
most vulnerable people.
Backup power at plants to manage risks of energy supply interruption.
Programme of generator roll-outs.
Recovery plans for 100 WWTWs.
Working with other stakeholders (e.g. energy providers) to enhance resilience.
Mutual aid agreements to manage competing responses for aid during emergency events.
Strategic water grid to enhance resilience of supply.
Diversified energy supply with our own generation of renewable energy provides additional
energy resilience.
Planned or future actions:
Extend real-time monitoring and control.
Extend recovery plans at more WWTWs.
Invest in mobile granular activated carbon units.
Further investment in generating renewable energy and back-up power.
Use of drones during drought and high temperature events to identify leaks.
Public value assessments in decision-making (balancing trade-offs of different agendas,
and contradictions in the regulatory framework).
Seeking opportunities for additional funding, making the investment case based on core
water company activities.
Future climate adaptation planning and transition planning.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) for
maintenance and upgrades to assets to enhance resilience to
storms. Some of these costs could be recoverable through the
regulatory system. Increased energy and material use could
impact our operational and embodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Service disruptions could negatively impact our reputation
and reduce ODI rewards/increase ODI penalties (affecting our
revenue).
We could face additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) to
restore services and repair assets. Some of our assets could
deteriorate and face impairment due to physical impacts.
Climate transition risks
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Policy, Regulation and Legal Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
Potential for this risk to decrease over time as
regulation evolves to remove contradictions and
misalignment, and as leadership on climate action
becomes commonplace across Government and the
economy.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Risk of challenges balancing trade-offs in regulation in the Water sector between agendas
of Net Zero, climate resilience, environmental enhancement, and other objectives, posing
the risk of increasing costs and carbon: Potential undesired climate outcomes due to trade-offs
in regulatory priorities. Challenges with balancing objectives to improve environmental outcomes
while reducing carbon emissions at the same time as rapid changes in climate-related policies and
regulations are occurring in the Water sector.
A holistic and balanced approach to delivering our goals for Net Zero, providing a resilient water
supply and protecting and enhancing the environment, could be at risk if one agenda imposes
more stringent regulation, thus presenting a misalignment in the pace with which preferably
holistic actions can be delivered relative to actions that benefit a single more stringent agenda. In
some cases, new/enhanced policies and regulations pose a risk due to increasing costs to Pennon
or increasing Pennon’s carbon footprint, in other cases the absence of policies and regulation
pose arisk due to potential that costs incurred by Pennon may not be recovered through the
regulatorysystem.
Some examples include:
More stringent environmental regulation being imposed in response to the climate adaptation
and nature positive agenda, including the pace with which requirements are being imposed.
Reduced abstraction allowances and increased compensation flows into our rivers being
imposed (see our ‘drought’ physical risk).
Increased environmental ambition by other stakeholders to replace lost coastal habitat and
manage coastal erosion (see our ‘rising sea levels’ physical risk).
Changes to carbon accounting methodologies and scope boundaries, including switch to
location-based GHG accounting methodology instead of market-based accounting (e.g.
disincentivising power purchase agreements (PPAs) for renewable energy).
Use of modular desalination to ensure drought resilience at pace, but leading to increased
energy consumption.
Enhanced requirements which increase Pennon’s energy and carbon footprint e.g. phosphorus
removal, UV disinfection, reducing combined sewer overflows in cases where the scale and pace
required disadvantages nature-based solutions.
Regulation in contradiction to achieve overall Net Zero goals, and regulatory system providing
limited incentives for wider Net Zero action outside of the regulated water business.
Balancing trade-offs from actions to address different agendas in policy and
regulation:
Current actions:
Horizon scanning to identify emerging/changing regulation.
Stakeholder engagement/public relations management.
Net Zero programme.
Engaging with regulators to explain the climate change impacts of new regulation.
Working with others in the sector to clarify carbon accounting approaches.
Widely engaged with around 200,000 customers and stakeholders over the past two
years in developing PR24 business plan. These engagement activities will continue across
theregion.
Working with our WaterShare+ Customer Advisory Panel gives us an opportunity to
continuously engage our customers and share our work on sustainability and resilience.
Adaptive planning approach within WRMP24 and DWMP23, including high, moderate,
andlow environmental ambition.
Considering options which Pennon can take outside of the regulatory framework
(e.g.offsite investment in renewable energy).
Ofwat innovation fund being explored to provide additional investment to support
Pennon’s ambitious objectives.
Establishment of the Centre for Resilience in Environment, Water and Waste (CREWW)
tocollaborate with academia and tackle challenges facing water sector.
Future actions:
Pursuing opportunities through our Upstream Thinking programme which includes
nature-recovery programmes across our region and other nature-based solutions where
these are acceptable under the regulation.
Investment in innovation/ research and development, and investment in enhancements
toresilience to key climate risks.
Considering applying an internal carbon price to consider full costs and benefits
ofdecisions.
Public value assessments in decision-making (balancing trade-offs of different agendas,
and contradictions in the regulatory framework).
Seeking opportunities for additional funding, making the investment case based on
corewater company activities.
Future climate adaptation planning and transition planning.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex)
due to changes to regulation, for example costs related
to installation and operation of new process equipment to
meet enhanced regulations. Some of these costs could be
recoverable through the regulatory system. Increased energy
and material use to meet increased regulatory requirements
has potential to increase our footprint through operational
andembodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
If we fail to balance regulatory requirements, we could face
reduced ODI rewards/ increased ODI penalties (affecting our
revenue). Public perception of how we balance trade-offs could
result in negative impacts on our reputation (see our see our
‘Negative public and stakeholder’ relations risk).
Some of our assets could incur obsolescence and
impairment if they are driving high carbon emissions or poor
environmentaloutcomes.
TCFD and TNFD continued
Key
Risk ratings Risk Trend
High Medium Low Increasing Stable Decreasing
86 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Physical Climate Risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Key physical climaterisks
Increasing frequency of extreme weather events,
heatwaves and storms – Acute risks to assets and
services
Relevant time horizon
Short, medium and long term, with increasing
likelihood and magnitude of risk over each horizon
This year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Last year’s risk rating
Current risk rating
Risk score in 2050 without further action
Power supply failure due to high winds, heavy rainfall/flooding, lightning at key network and
treatment sites and resultant cascading impacts to interdependent networks, including water
supply delivery and wastewater management.
Cold snaps and freeze/thaw events leading to pipe bursts/ increased leakage.
Reduced ability for our services and assets to recover under consecutive storms.
Surges in customer water-use during heatwave events leads to operational challenges to treat
and distribute water at pace even when there is enough water in sources (also see ‘Increasing
frequency and intensity of droughts’ risk).
Damage to our assets due to extreme weather and/or heatwaves e.g. overheating of electrical
equipment.
Decreased water quality during heatwaves.
Current actions:
Cold weather plan, including prioritisation of support for vulnerable customers.
Investment in centralised control room and alternative water supply teams.
Appointment of a new incident management team.
Improved staff incident training.
Working with other water companies to develop a business continuity and visualisation
tool that will support operational decisions and reduce customer impacts, including to the
most vulnerable people.
Backup power at plants to manage risks of energy supply interruption.
Programme of generator roll-outs.
Recovery plans for 100 WWTWs.
Working with other stakeholders (e.g. energy providers) to enhance resilience.
Mutual aid agreements to manage competing responses for aid during emergency events.
Strategic water grid to enhance resilience of supply.
Diversified energy supply with our own generation of renewable energy provides additional
energy resilience.
Planned or future actions:
Extend real-time monitoring and control.
Extend recovery plans at more WWTWs.
Invest in mobile granular activated carbon units.
Further investment in generating renewable energy and back-up power.
Use of drones during drought and high temperature events to identify leaks.
Public value assessments in decision-making (balancing trade-offs of different agendas,
and contradictions in the regulatory framework).
Seeking opportunities for additional funding, making the investment case based on core
water company activities.
Future climate adaptation planning and transition planning.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) for
maintenance and upgrades to assets to enhance resilience to
storms. Some of these costs could be recoverable through the
regulatory system. Increased energy and material use could
impact our operational and embodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Service disruptions could negatively impact our reputation
and reduce ODI rewards/increase ODI penalties (affecting our
revenue).
We could face additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) to
restore services and repair assets. Some of our assets could
deteriorate and face impairment due to physical impacts.
Climate transition risks
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Policy, Regulation and Legal Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
Potential for this risk to decrease over time as
regulation evolves to remove contradictions and
misalignment, and as leadership on climate action
becomes commonplace across Government and the
economy.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Risk of challenges balancing trade-offs in regulation in the Water sector between agendas
of Net Zero, climate resilience, environmental enhancement, and other objectives, posing
the risk of increasing costs and carbon: Potential undesired climate outcomes due to trade-offs
in regulatory priorities. Challenges with balancing objectives to improve environmental outcomes
while reducing carbon emissions at the same time as rapid changes in climate-related policies and
regulations are occurring in the Water sector.
A holistic and balanced approach to delivering our goals for Net Zero, providing a resilient water
supply and protecting and enhancing the environment, could be at risk if one agenda imposes
more stringent regulation, thus presenting a misalignment in the pace with which preferably
holistic actions can be delivered relative to actions that benefit a single more stringent agenda. In
some cases, new/enhanced policies and regulations pose a risk due to increasing costs to Pennon
or increasing Pennon’s carbon footprint, in other cases the absence of policies and regulation
pose arisk due to potential that costs incurred by Pennon may not be recovered through the
regulatorysystem.
Some examples include:
More stringent environmental regulation being imposed in response to the climate adaptation
and nature positive agenda, including the pace with which requirements are being imposed.
Reduced abstraction allowances and increased compensation flows into our rivers being
imposed (see our ‘drought’ physical risk).
Increased environmental ambition by other stakeholders to replace lost coastal habitat and
manage coastal erosion (see our ‘rising sea levels’ physical risk).
Changes to carbon accounting methodologies and scope boundaries, including switch to
location-based GHG accounting methodology instead of market-based accounting (e.g.
disincentivising power purchase agreements (PPAs) for renewable energy).
Use of modular desalination to ensure drought resilience at pace, but leading to increased
energy consumption.
Enhanced requirements which increase Pennon’s energy and carbon footprint e.g. phosphorus
removal, UV disinfection, reducing combined sewer overflows in cases where the scale and pace
required disadvantages nature-based solutions.
Regulation in contradiction to achieve overall Net Zero goals, and regulatory system providing
limited incentives for wider Net Zero action outside of the regulated water business.
Balancing trade-offs from actions to address different agendas in policy and
regulation:
Current actions:
Horizon scanning to identify emerging/changing regulation.
Stakeholder engagement/public relations management.
Net Zero programme.
Engaging with regulators to explain the climate change impacts of new regulation.
Working with others in the sector to clarify carbon accounting approaches.
Widely engaged with around 200,000 customers and stakeholders over the past two
years in developing PR24 business plan. These engagement activities will continue across
theregion.
Working with our WaterShare+ Customer Advisory Panel gives us an opportunity to
continuously engage our customers and share our work on sustainability and resilience.
Adaptive planning approach within WRMP24 and DWMP23, including high, moderate,
andlow environmental ambition.
Considering options which Pennon can take outside of the regulatory framework
(e.g.offsite investment in renewable energy).
Ofwat innovation fund being explored to provide additional investment to support
Pennon’s ambitious objectives.
Establishment of the Centre for Resilience in Environment, Water and Waste (CREWW)
tocollaborate with academia and tackle challenges facing water sector.
Future actions:
Pursuing opportunities through our Upstream Thinking programme which includes
nature-recovery programmes across our region and other nature-based solutions where
these are acceptable under the regulation.
Investment in innovation/ research and development, and investment in enhancements
toresilience to key climate risks.
Considering applying an internal carbon price to consider full costs and benefits
ofdecisions.
Public value assessments in decision-making (balancing trade-offs of different agendas,
and contradictions in the regulatory framework).
Seeking opportunities for additional funding, making the investment case based on
corewater company activities.
Future climate adaptation planning and transition planning.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex)
due to changes to regulation, for example costs related
to installation and operation of new process equipment to
meet enhanced regulations. Some of these costs could be
recoverable through the regulatory system. Increased energy
and material use to meet increased regulatory requirements
has potential to increase our footprint through operational
andembodied carbon.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
If we fail to balance regulatory requirements, we could face
reduced ODI rewards/ increased ODI penalties (affecting our
revenue). Public perception of how we balance trade-offs could
result in negative impacts on our reputation (see our see our
‘Negative public and stakeholder’ relations risk).
Some of our assets could incur obsolescence and
impairment if they are driving high carbon emissions or poor
environmentaloutcomes.
87Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Climate transition risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Policy, Regulation and Legal Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short term the risk is more focused on funding
to achieve Net Zero, over the medium and long term
the risk will increasingly focus on funding to enable
adaptation to climate change.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Regulatory funding risk for achieving Pennon’s goals for operational Net Zero by 2030
andadapting to climate change : Risk that the investment required to transition to operational
Net Zero by 2030, and investment to proactively adapt to climate change in the time period
targeted by Pennon, is not allowed under the regulatory framework.
Managing regulatory funding risk:
Current actions:
Business planning and integration of carbon and multi-capitals into decision-making
frameworks.
Engagement with regulators and customers and stakeholders.
Public campaigns/awareness of investment need for climate action including TCFD
programme.
Exploring options to ensure a return on investment for some climate-related actions.
Demonstrating/communicating that operational Net Zero 2030 for the water sector
isahelpful milestone on the way to Government’s goal for Net Zero 2050.
Pennon Power funded by Pennon Group balance sheet outside of regulatory funding.
Exploring options which Pennon can take outside of the regulated water businesses
(e.g. offsite investment in renewable energy, enhancing revenue through water resource
schemes for other companies).
Horizon scanning for opportunities to achieve Net Zero goals under available regulatory
funding mechanisms.
Future actions:
Explore options for third-party funding or partnerships for climate action.
Potential for Pennon to review climate change objectives if they are not supported by
regulators and Government.
Bioresources investment plan (pending funding).
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex)
totake actions outside of the regulated water business, and
to enhance engagement with regulators and stakeholders.
There is potential for us to increase our revenue through some
actions. See our ‘Products and Services’ climate opportunity.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
If we cannot proactively invest in carbon reduction and climate
resilience we could face reduced ODI rewards/ increased ODI
penalties (affecting our revenue).
Increased costs to our customers in the long-term would
negatively impact our reputation (see our ‘Negative public and
stakeholder relations’ and ‘Customer affordability’ reputation
risks).
Some of our assets could deteriorate and face impairment due
to physical impacts from climate change.
We may be limited in our ability to reduce our carbon emissions
due to funding constraints.
TCFD and TNFD continued
Key
Risk ratings Risk Trend
High Medium Low Increasing Stable Decreasing
88 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Climate transition risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Policy, Regulation and Legal Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short term the risk is more focused on funding
to achieve Net Zero, over the medium and long term
the risk will increasingly focus on funding to enable
adaptation to climate change.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Regulatory funding risk for achieving Pennon’s goals for operational Net Zero by 2030
andadapting to climate change : Risk that the investment required to transition to operational
Net Zero by 2030, and investment to proactively adapt to climate change in the time period
targeted by Pennon, is not allowed under the regulatory framework.
Managing regulatory funding risk:
Current actions:
Business planning and integration of carbon and multi-capitals into decision-making
frameworks.
Engagement with regulators and customers and stakeholders.
Public campaigns/awareness of investment need for climate action including TCFD
programme.
Exploring options to ensure a return on investment for some climate-related actions.
Demonstrating/communicating that operational Net Zero 2030 for the water sector
isahelpful milestone on the way to Government’s goal for Net Zero 2050.
Pennon Power funded by Pennon Group balance sheet outside of regulatory funding.
Exploring options which Pennon can take outside of the regulated water businesses
(e.g. offsite investment in renewable energy, enhancing revenue through water resource
schemes for other companies).
Horizon scanning for opportunities to achieve Net Zero goals under available regulatory
funding mechanisms.
Future actions:
Explore options for third-party funding or partnerships for climate action.
Potential for Pennon to review climate change objectives if they are not supported by
regulators and Government.
Bioresources investment plan (pending funding).
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex)
totake actions outside of the regulated water business, and
to enhance engagement with regulators and stakeholders.
There is potential for us to increase our revenue through some
actions. See our ‘Products and Services’ climate opportunity.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
If we cannot proactively invest in carbon reduction and climate
resilience we could face reduced ODI rewards/ increased ODI
penalties (affecting our revenue).
Increased costs to our customers in the long-term would
negatively impact our reputation (see our ‘Negative public and
stakeholder relations’ and ‘Customer affordability’ reputation
risks).
Some of our assets could deteriorate and face impairment due
to physical impacts from climate change.
We may be limited in our ability to reduce our carbon emissions
due to funding constraints.
89Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Climate Transition Risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Technology Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short term the risk is primarily driven by
limited supply and readiness of technology and
resources (due to past underinvestment in skills
development and infrastructure across the UK and
beyond, particularly in the South West); over the
medium term the risk will be increasingly driven
byhigh demand for technology and resources.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Capacity and readiness of technology and resources to achieve Net Zero before other
sectors and the wider UK: Risks that skills, technology, resources, and infrastructure are not
ready and available to enable Pennon’s transition to Net Zero operational carbon by 2030, resulting
in delays and in some cases resulting in Pennon paying high costs to access resources. Some
examples include:
Availability and capacity of Pennon’s workforce and supply chain to procure and design
low-carbon solutions (which is compounded by wider risks, such as geopolitical events and
macroeconomic conditions such as high inflation).
Availability and capacity of technology and infrastructure, particularly in the South West of
England, to enable development of Pennon’s renewable energy projects and other Net Zero
programme activities.
High demand for resources and technologies from others causing delays and increasing costs
forPennon (e.g. demand for expertise, batteries, electric vehicles).
Unsuccessful investment in new technologies/approaches, or technology which is then
superseded, including risks around recovering costs through the regulatory system.
Innovation required to reduce process emissions is of larger scale than originally understood,
amplifying the risk of potential unsuccessful R&D Investments, and the risk of taking investment
decisions which in future turn out to be suboptimal / high-regret.
Readiness of some nature-based solutions for implementation and some uncertainty in
performance of nature-based solutions.
Managing capacity constraints in Pennon:
Current actions:
Continual enhancement of capacity within Pennon (e.g. training, recruiting key skills).
Collaboration with supply chain partners (e.g. consultants, technology providers,
contractors).
Collaboration with stakeholders (e.g. academia, environmental groups in the South West).
Collaboration with other water companies and across the sector to develop standard
approaches and enhance capacity.
Nature-based solutions capacity enhanced through Pennon’s Green First Framework
andBiodiversity Strategy.
Future actions:
Prioritising actions/solutions which are low-regret/ flexible e.g. nature-based solutions
Piloting options/technology before scaling.
Managing supply chain and infrastructure limitations:
Current actions:
Horizon scanning to identify emerging limitations and risks.
Engagement with key suppliers and partners and enhancing collaboration with partners
and stakeholders.
Engaging with infrastructure providers, regulators, and Government to encourage
investment to enable network capacity.
Enhancing capacity within Pennon to reduce reliance on suppliers.
Purchasing renewable electricity and development of Pennon Power to provide renewable
energy from outside of the South West region.
Future actions:
Procurement strategies for key technologies/expertise.
Enhancing supply chain resilience (e.g. diversification of suppliers).
Exploring options which are less reliant on network capacity (e.g. onsite battery storage).
Managing costs to transition:
Current actions:
Seek to fund investment through the regulatory process (business planning and
pricereviews).
Investment in innovation to reduce costs of low-carbon technology.
Future actions:
Increasing efficiency to reduce costs (see our ‘resource efficiency’ transition opportunity).
Recovering some costs from retired assets (e.g. selling used equipment).
Explore partnership opportunities (e.g. PPAs).
Managing research and development investment:
Current action:
R&D programme with gated investment (e.g. piloting before scaling up).
Horizon scanning to identify emerging technology and risks.
Procurement strategies to reduce costs (e.g. competitive tendering, joint ventures).
Learning from others in the water sector in UK and internationally.
Engagement with regulators and community to test acceptability of strategies and
schemes and seek to build support for innovation culture and understanding across
regulators and government.
Future action:
Prioritising solutions that are low-regret, particularly nature-based solutions through
piloting technology before scaling.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Opex) to build capacity
across our company and supply chain, and increased costs
to access skills and technology to meet our targeted timeline.
Some of these costs could be recoverable through the
regulatory system.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex) due
to delays with implementing solutions to reduce operational
carbon emissions, and due to high demand for resources.
Unsuccessful investment in new technologies could also result
in increased expenditure.
We could incur penalties and/or negative impacts to our
reputation if delays in technology and resources mean we do
not meet our targets and/or Net Zero programme (see our
‘Negative public and stakeholder relations’ risk).
We may be limited in our ability to reduce our carbon emissions.
TCFD and TNFD continued
Key
Risk ratings Risk Trend
High Medium Low Increasing Stable Decreasing
90 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Climate Transition Risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Technology Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short term the risk is primarily driven by
limited supply and readiness of technology and
resources (due to past underinvestment in skills
development and infrastructure across the UK and
beyond, particularly in the South West); over the
medium term the risk will be increasingly driven
byhigh demand for technology and resources.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Capacity and readiness of technology and resources to achieve Net Zero before other
sectors and the wider UK: Risks that skills, technology, resources, and infrastructure are not
ready and available to enable Pennon’s transition to Net Zero operational carbon by 2030, resulting
in delays and in some cases resulting in Pennon paying high costs to access resources. Some
examples include:
Availability and capacity of Pennon’s workforce and supply chain to procure and design
low-carbon solutions (which is compounded by wider risks, such as geopolitical events and
macroeconomic conditions such as high inflation).
Availability and capacity of technology and infrastructure, particularly in the South West of
England, to enable development of Pennon’s renewable energy projects and other Net Zero
programme activities.
High demand for resources and technologies from others causing delays and increasing costs
forPennon (e.g. demand for expertise, batteries, electric vehicles).
Unsuccessful investment in new technologies/approaches, or technology which is then
superseded, including risks around recovering costs through the regulatory system.
Innovation required to reduce process emissions is of larger scale than originally understood,
amplifying the risk of potential unsuccessful R&D Investments, and the risk of taking investment
decisions which in future turn out to be suboptimal / high-regret.
Readiness of some nature-based solutions for implementation and some uncertainty in
performance of nature-based solutions.
Managing capacity constraints in Pennon:
Current actions:
Continual enhancement of capacity within Pennon (e.g. training, recruiting key skills).
Collaboration with supply chain partners (e.g. consultants, technology providers,
contractors).
Collaboration with stakeholders (e.g. academia, environmental groups in the South West).
Collaboration with other water companies and across the sector to develop standard
approaches and enhance capacity.
Nature-based solutions capacity enhanced through Pennon’s Green First Framework
andBiodiversity Strategy.
Future actions:
Prioritising actions/solutions which are low-regret/ flexible e.g. nature-based solutions
Piloting options/technology before scaling.
Managing supply chain and infrastructure limitations:
Current actions:
Horizon scanning to identify emerging limitations and risks.
Engagement with key suppliers and partners and enhancing collaboration with partners
and stakeholders.
Engaging with infrastructure providers, regulators, and Government to encourage
investment to enable network capacity.
Enhancing capacity within Pennon to reduce reliance on suppliers.
Purchasing renewable electricity and development of Pennon Power to provide renewable
energy from outside of the South West region.
Future actions:
Procurement strategies for key technologies/expertise.
Enhancing supply chain resilience (e.g. diversification of suppliers).
Exploring options which are less reliant on network capacity (e.g. onsite battery storage).
Managing costs to transition:
Current actions:
Seek to fund investment through the regulatory process (business planning and
pricereviews).
Investment in innovation to reduce costs of low-carbon technology.
Future actions:
Increasing efficiency to reduce costs (see our ‘resource efficiency’ transition opportunity).
Recovering some costs from retired assets (e.g. selling used equipment).
Explore partnership opportunities (e.g. PPAs).
Managing research and development investment:
Current action:
R&D programme with gated investment (e.g. piloting before scaling up).
Horizon scanning to identify emerging technology and risks.
Procurement strategies to reduce costs (e.g. competitive tendering, joint ventures).
Learning from others in the water sector in UK and internationally.
Engagement with regulators and community to test acceptability of strategies and
schemes and seek to build support for innovation culture and understanding across
regulators and government.
Future action:
Prioritising solutions that are low-regret, particularly nature-based solutions through
piloting technology before scaling.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Opex) to build capacity
across our company and supply chain, and increased costs
to access skills and technology to meet our targeted timeline.
Some of these costs could be recoverable through the
regulatory system.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex) due
to delays with implementing solutions to reduce operational
carbon emissions, and due to high demand for resources.
Unsuccessful investment in new technologies could also result
in increased expenditure.
We could incur penalties and/or negative impacts to our
reputation if delays in technology and resources mean we do
not meet our targets and/or Net Zero programme (see our
‘Negative public and stakeholder relations’ risk).
We may be limited in our ability to reduce our carbon emissions.
91Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Climate Transition Risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Market Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short term the risk is primarily driven
bylimited supply of renewable energy and low-
carbon materials (due to past under investment
in infrastructure and materials across the UK and
beyond); over the medium term the risk will be
increasingly driven by high demand for renewable
energy and low-carbon materials.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Increased costs of energy and materials due to the transition to Net Zero, impacts of
climate change, and wider factors: Increases in costs of energy sources and input materials
- influenced by the Net Zero transition and/or impacts of climate change and compounded
by geopolitical events and macroeconomic conditions (e.g. such as high inflation). Some
examplesinclude:
Record high prices for electricity, particularly 100% renewable electricity/REGOs, which may
remain in high demand/ limited supply.
Price of liquid fuels and gas increasing due to transition to Net Zero and geopolitical events.
Price of chemicals and construction materials (e.g. cement, steel) increasing as energy prices
increase and in some cases as carbon reduction measures increase across supply chains
(addingcosts to production and transport of materials in the short/medium term).
Price of some technologies for generating renewable electricity has increased due to high
demand/limited supply.
Managing cost of energy:
Current actions:
Generation of renewable energy by Pennon, including exploring additional options and
power purchase agreements (PPAs).
Championing upscaling of renewables across our regions.
Acquisition of renewable energy generation projects, supporting energy resilience and
helping to stabilise Pennon’s energy costs.
Increasing efficiency to reduce energy demand (e.g. enhance energy efficiency, reduce
leakage - see our ‘resource efficiency’ opportunity).
Electricity price hedging.
Future actions:
Fuel switching (e.g. eliminating fossil fuels for alternatives, at lower cost where possible).
Changing operational practices to reduce energy use/ energy expenditure (e.g. taking
advantage of off-peak electricity pricing).
Exploring options which require less energy (e.g. nature-based solutions).
Action taken by Government and wider actors to increase energy security and supply
oflow-carbon energy.
Investment and development of solar PV sites and potential innovative renewable
energyprojects (e.g. floating solar).
Managing cost of input materials:
Current actions:
Procurement strategies to reduce cost (e.g. competitive pricing).
Whole life carbon tools allow more complete understanding of costs of high-carbon
materials.
Enhanced supply chain resilience by diversifying and expanding suppliers, helping
toincrease competitiveness and to reduce cost).
Future actions:
Increasing efficiency to reduce material use and light-weighting/reducing material
consumption.
Investing in innovation to use different chemicals and materials, e.g. use of excavated
materials and waste recycling.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex)
due to investment in generating renewable energy or using
alternative/low-carbon materials. Some of these costs could be
recoverable through the regulatory system, and in some cases
there will be a return on investment (see our ‘energy source’
and ‘markets’ climate opportunities).
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex) due
to increased cost of energy/REGOs and materials.
We may be limited in our ability to reduce our carbon emissions.
Type as defined by TCFD
Reputational Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short term customers and stakeholders
are primarily concerned about impacts on water
quality and aquatic environments. Over time it is
likely that customers and stakeholderswill have
higher concern for carbon emissions and other
sustainability objectives.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Negative public and stakeholder relations due to Pennon failing to be a seen as a leader
in environmental sustainability: Negative perception from the public/stakeholders/regulators,
possibly linked to a major climate-related incident/event/failure. Some examples include:
Public concern about climate-induced pollution events and sewer overflows (e.g. after storms
linked to climate change).
Customers and stakeholders concerned about the environmental impact of abstraction
andwastewater discharge in response to the climate adaptation agenda.
Asymmetry of information which customers notice, for example less focus on our action
to reduce carbon and more focus on activities which may be seen as high energy, such as
desalination (even though desalination would be powered by renewable energy). Greater media
coverage of negative impacts than positive actions compounds this risk.
Shifts in stakeholder/customer expectations related to carbon and climate which are difficult
forwater companies to manage.
Potential negative perceptions related to development of renewable energy projects, such
asimpacts on biodiversity.
Stakeholder and customer dissatisfaction if Pennon fails to meet Net Zero commitments.
Managing public and stakeholder relations:
Current actions:
Risk management practices, ISO14001 Environmental Management System.
Investment to reduce key risks, including our WaterFit programme.
Net Zero programme.
Environmental programmes (e.g. Water Industry National Environment Programme –
WINEP) and Biodiversity Strategy.
Customer and stakeholder engagement/public relations (e.g. PR24 engagement with
ourcustomers to discuss and address concerns and priorities).
Community outreach and educational programmes.
Engagement and pilots to test and build customer acceptability for schemes.
‘6 capitals’ considered in decision making.
Continuous engagement with research partnerships like CREWW to strengthen
stakeholder involvement through our innovation programmes.
Involvement of stakeholders in our Nature Recovery Programmes (e.g. farmers and
landowners).
Development of renewable energy project within a disused coal mine.
Future actions:
Consider applying an internal carbon price to consider full costs and benefits of decisions.
Consider new ways to enhance engagement with customers and communities and
increase engagement and raise profile of positive actions (e.g. tree planting).
Launching a WaterFit Advisory Panel to engage stakeholders and help with net zero and
pollution issues.
Expanding the WaterShare+ Scheme to one in every 10 households and ‘walk together’
with our stakeholders/customers.
Continue with our ‘Promise to the Planet’ to become Net Zero by 2030 by decarbonising
our operations and reducing emissions of nitrous oxide and repurposing methane.
Considering enhancements to Pennon’s sustainability policies and practices.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could potentially incur increased expenditure (Opex) to
manage stakeholder relations and public perception to mitigate
reputational impacts.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Public perception of our environmental actions and
performance could result in negative impacts on our reputation
(see also our ‘Challenges balancing trade-offs’ policy
transitionrisk).
TCFD and TNFD continued
Key
Risk ratings Risk Trend
High Medium Low Increasing Stable Decreasing
92 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Climate Transition Risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Market Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short term the risk is primarily driven
bylimited supply of renewable energy and low-
carbon materials (due to past under investment
in infrastructure and materials across the UK and
beyond); over the medium term the risk will be
increasingly driven by high demand for renewable
energy and low-carbon materials.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Increased costs of energy and materials due to the transition to Net Zero, impacts of
climate change, and wider factors: Increases in costs of energy sources and input materials
- influenced by the Net Zero transition and/or impacts of climate change and compounded
by geopolitical events and macroeconomic conditions (e.g. such as high inflation). Some
examplesinclude:
Record high prices for electricity, particularly 100% renewable electricity/REGOs, which may
remain in high demand/ limited supply.
Price of liquid fuels and gas increasing due to transition to Net Zero and geopolitical events.
Price of chemicals and construction materials (e.g. cement, steel) increasing as energy prices
increase and in some cases as carbon reduction measures increase across supply chains
(addingcosts to production and transport of materials in the short/medium term).
Price of some technologies for generating renewable electricity has increased due to high
demand/limited supply.
Managing cost of energy:
Current actions:
Generation of renewable energy by Pennon, including exploring additional options and
power purchase agreements (PPAs).
Championing upscaling of renewables across our regions.
Acquisition of renewable energy generation projects, supporting energy resilience and
helping to stabilise Pennon’s energy costs.
Increasing efficiency to reduce energy demand (e.g. enhance energy efficiency, reduce
leakage - see our ‘resource efficiency’ opportunity).
Electricity price hedging.
Future actions:
Fuel switching (e.g. eliminating fossil fuels for alternatives, at lower cost where possible).
Changing operational practices to reduce energy use/ energy expenditure (e.g. taking
advantage of off-peak electricity pricing).
Exploring options which require less energy (e.g. nature-based solutions).
Action taken by Government and wider actors to increase energy security and supply
oflow-carbon energy.
Investment and development of solar PV sites and potential innovative renewable
energyprojects (e.g. floating solar).
Managing cost of input materials:
Current actions:
Procurement strategies to reduce cost (e.g. competitive pricing).
Whole life carbon tools allow more complete understanding of costs of high-carbon
materials.
Enhanced supply chain resilience by diversifying and expanding suppliers, helping
toincrease competitiveness and to reduce cost).
Future actions:
Increasing efficiency to reduce material use and light-weighting/reducing material
consumption.
Investing in innovation to use different chemicals and materials, e.g. use of excavated
materials and waste recycling.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex)
due to investment in generating renewable energy or using
alternative/low-carbon materials. Some of these costs could be
recoverable through the regulatory system, and in some cases
there will be a return on investment (see our ‘energy source’
and ‘markets’ climate opportunities).
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex) due
to increased cost of energy/REGOs and materials.
We may be limited in our ability to reduce our carbon emissions.
Type as defined by TCFD
Reputational Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short term customers and stakeholders
are primarily concerned about impacts on water
quality and aquatic environments. Over time it is
likely that customers and stakeholderswill have
higher concern for carbon emissions and other
sustainability objectives.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Negative public and stakeholder relations due to Pennon failing to be a seen as a leader
in environmental sustainability: Negative perception from the public/stakeholders/regulators,
possibly linked to a major climate-related incident/event/failure. Some examples include:
Public concern about climate-induced pollution events and sewer overflows (e.g. after storms
linked to climate change).
Customers and stakeholders concerned about the environmental impact of abstraction
andwastewater discharge in response to the climate adaptation agenda.
Asymmetry of information which customers notice, for example less focus on our action
to reduce carbon and more focus on activities which may be seen as high energy, such as
desalination (even though desalination would be powered by renewable energy). Greater media
coverage of negative impacts than positive actions compounds this risk.
Shifts in stakeholder/customer expectations related to carbon and climate which are difficult
forwater companies to manage.
Potential negative perceptions related to development of renewable energy projects, such
asimpacts on biodiversity.
Stakeholder and customer dissatisfaction if Pennon fails to meet Net Zero commitments.
Managing public and stakeholder relations:
Current actions:
Risk management practices, ISO14001 Environmental Management System.
Investment to reduce key risks, including our WaterFit programme.
Net Zero programme.
Environmental programmes (e.g. Water Industry National Environment Programme –
WINEP) and Biodiversity Strategy.
Customer and stakeholder engagement/public relations (e.g. PR24 engagement with
ourcustomers to discuss and address concerns and priorities).
Community outreach and educational programmes.
Engagement and pilots to test and build customer acceptability for schemes.
‘6 capitals’ considered in decision making.
Continuous engagement with research partnerships like CREWW to strengthen
stakeholder involvement through our innovation programmes.
Involvement of stakeholders in our Nature Recovery Programmes (e.g. farmers and
landowners).
Development of renewable energy project within a disused coal mine.
Future actions:
Consider applying an internal carbon price to consider full costs and benefits of decisions.
Consider new ways to enhance engagement with customers and communities and
increase engagement and raise profile of positive actions (e.g. tree planting).
Launching a WaterFit Advisory Panel to engage stakeholders and help with net zero and
pollution issues.
Expanding the WaterShare+ Scheme to one in every 10 households and ‘walk together’
with our stakeholders/customers.
Continue with our ‘Promise to the Planet’ to become Net Zero by 2030 by decarbonising
our operations and reducing emissions of nitrous oxide and repurposing methane.
Considering enhancements to Pennon’s sustainability policies and practices.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could potentially incur increased expenditure (Opex) to
manage stakeholder relations and public perception to mitigate
reputational impacts.
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Public perception of our environmental actions and
performance could result in negative impacts on our reputation
(see also our ‘Challenges balancing trade-offs’ policy
transitionrisk).
93Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Climate Transition Risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Reputational Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
The need for additional investment to meet the
Net Zero and climate adaptation challenges will
likely continue to impact across the medium term,
particularly if global climate action is slow and the
physical impacts are greater.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Customer affordability and fairness concerns for achieving Net Zero and adapting
to climate change: Affordability for customers and questions around fairness become very
challenging, even with Government contribution to water and wastewater bills (this is compounded
by cost-of-living pressures). This risk includes:
Large investment needs related to climate change, which could result in dissatisfaction from
customers and stakeholders.
Questions relating to fairness for paying for climate adaptation, for example high costs/impacts
being imposed on residents in Cornwall and Devon due to greater exposure to coastal change,
whereas other water companies may not have such high costs/impacts.
Multiple agendas and misalignment between different Government departments and regulators
requiring increased investment from water companies.
Managing customer affordability:
Current actions:
Secured Government contribution to customers’ bills.
Customer and stakeholder engagement/public relations (including engaging with
regulators and Government about sharing costs etc.), including community outreach
andeducational programmes to help explain need for investment in climate action.
Seeking return on investment for actions taken to manage climate change.
Arrangements with/requirements on suppliers to cover some costs (e.g. building and
vehicle leases).
Procurement strategies to reduce costs (e.g. competitive tendering, joint ventures etc.)
Support programmes and social tariffs for customers struggling to pay bills.
Phased investment in climate adaptation and Net Zero over time to reduce pressures
onbills.
Exploring actions to reduce costs across the business.
Becoming more efficient to reduce costs and impacts on customer bills.
Exploring innovative tariffs to ensure fair bills.
WaterShare+ engagement scheme to encourage customers to be involved in the
company’s decisions.
A limit to our bill increases until 2025.
On course to meet our Board’s pledge of zero customers in water poverty by 2025.
£200m of affordability support included in PR24 business plan.
PR24 business plan puts forward one of the lowest bill increases in the water sector.
Smart Saver tariff initiative will be trialled for two years with a selection of customers in
theBarnstaple area. 90% of those taking part are expected to see a reduction in their bills.
Future actions:
Innovation programme seeking to reduce costs.
Recovering some costs from retired assets (e.g. selling off).
Seeking third-party sources for investment (e.g. climate action grants/funds,
partnershipfunding).
Considering flexibility in climate commitments to reduce cost pressures on customers.
Rollout of smart meters across Bristol, Bournemouth, Roadford and Colliford by 2040
andcontinuous support of customers through other water efficiency initiatives that
helpwith affordability.
Encourage and ensure that more customers have a stake in the company through
WaterShare+ scheme.
Improvements in digital and self-service options for easy interaction with our customers.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could potentially incur increased expenditure (Opex)
tomanage public perception of our investments to mitigate
reputational impacts (e.g. raising profile of our opportunities).
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Public perception of our investments and expenditure could
result in negative impacts on our reputation if our decisions
and investments do not align with customer priorities (see
alsoour ‘Challenges balancing trade-offs’ policy transition risk).
We could incur penalties if we failed to support customers
inneed /vulnerable customers suffering from high bills.
TCFD and TNFD continued
Key
Risk ratings Risk Trend
High Medium Low Increasing Stable Decreasing
94 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Climate Transition Risks continued
Key impacts identified on our operations and customers Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Reputational Risks
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
The need for additional investment to meet the
Net Zero and climate adaptation challenges will
likely continue to impact across the medium term,
particularly if global climate action is slow and the
physical impacts are greater.
Current risk rating
Last year’s risk rating
Customer affordability and fairness concerns for achieving Net Zero and adapting
to climate change: Affordability for customers and questions around fairness become very
challenging, even with Government contribution to water and wastewater bills (this is compounded
by cost-of-living pressures). This risk includes:
Large investment needs related to climate change, which could result in dissatisfaction from
customers and stakeholders.
Questions relating to fairness for paying for climate adaptation, for example high costs/impacts
being imposed on residents in Cornwall and Devon due to greater exposure to coastal change,
whereas other water companies may not have such high costs/impacts.
Multiple agendas and misalignment between different Government departments and regulators
requiring increased investment from water companies.
Managing customer affordability:
Current actions:
Secured Government contribution to customers’ bills.
Customer and stakeholder engagement/public relations (including engaging with
regulators and Government about sharing costs etc.), including community outreach
andeducational programmes to help explain need for investment in climate action.
Seeking return on investment for actions taken to manage climate change.
Arrangements with/requirements on suppliers to cover some costs (e.g. building and
vehicle leases).
Procurement strategies to reduce costs (e.g. competitive tendering, joint ventures etc.)
Support programmes and social tariffs for customers struggling to pay bills.
Phased investment in climate adaptation and Net Zero over time to reduce pressures
onbills.
Exploring actions to reduce costs across the business.
Becoming more efficient to reduce costs and impacts on customer bills.
Exploring innovative tariffs to ensure fair bills.
WaterShare+ engagement scheme to encourage customers to be involved in the
company’s decisions.
A limit to our bill increases until 2025.
On course to meet our Board’s pledge of zero customers in water poverty by 2025.
£200m of affordability support included in PR24 business plan.
PR24 business plan puts forward one of the lowest bill increases in the water sector.
Smart Saver tariff initiative will be trialled for two years with a selection of customers in
theBarnstaple area. 90% of those taking part are expected to see a reduction in their bills.
Future actions:
Innovation programme seeking to reduce costs.
Recovering some costs from retired assets (e.g. selling off).
Seeking third-party sources for investment (e.g. climate action grants/funds,
partnershipfunding).
Considering flexibility in climate commitments to reduce cost pressures on customers.
Rollout of smart meters across Bristol, Bournemouth, Roadford and Colliford by 2040
andcontinuous support of customers through other water efficiency initiatives that
helpwith affordability.
Encourage and ensure that more customers have a stake in the company through
WaterShare+ scheme.
Improvements in digital and self-service options for easy interaction with our customers.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
We could potentially incur increased expenditure (Opex)
tomanage public perception of our investments to mitigate
reputational impacts (e.g. raising profile of our opportunities).
Impacts of the unmitigated risk:
Public perception of our investments and expenditure could
result in negative impacts on our reputation if our decisions
and investments do not align with customer priorities (see
alsoour ‘Challenges balancing trade-offs’ policy transition risk).
We could incur penalties if we failed to support customers
inneed /vulnerable customers suffering from high bills.
95Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Climate-related opportunities
Potential risks and opportunities Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Resilience
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short, medium, and long term
Enhancing resilience to climate change and extreme
weather events is of high relevance today, with
increasing likelihood and magnitude of risk over
each horizon.
Current opportunity rating
Last year’s opportunity rating
Enhancing resilience across Pennon’s operations, asset base, and supply chain to avoid
costs and enhance value: Opportunity to invest in enhancing resilience across Pennon’s
business and supply chain, in some cases saving costs (e.g. avoided damage to assets, avoided
losses in revenue, avoided penalties on Outcome Delivery Incentives (ODIs), avoided penalties
on Guaranteed Standards Scheme (GSS) and enhancing company reputation and value. Some
examples include:
Enhancing Pennon’s resilience by investing in climate change adaptation (e.g. investing in
drought and flood prevention measures to avoid customer disruption/ penalties/ compensation
payments and avoid asset damage).
Enhancing supply chain resilience by investing in buffers/storage for critical resources,
diversifying suppliers and replacing suppliers who have high climate risks - thereby reducing
potential risks and costs associated with supply chain disruption and delays.
Enhancing Pennon’s resilience:
Current actions:
Investment in diversifying water sources, including desalination and repurposing
ex-quarries and mines.
Pursuing new reservoir capacity through regulatory frameworks.
Company resilience planning.
Climate risk assessments and climate adaptation planning.
Engaging stakeholders, such as regulators and customers.
Investments in response and recovery to operational disruption.
Generation of renewable energy by Pennon, including exploring additional options
andpower purchase agreements (PPAs) (see our ‘market’ transition risk).
Ongoing upgrade and modernisation of our infrastructure. (e.g. water treatment works,
water reservoirs).
Future actions:
Actions to adapt to climate change (e.g. enhancing drought resilience) and to mitigate
climate risks.
Tackling storm overflows at bathing beaches across our regions.
Investing in desalination plant in Cornwall by 2025, and wastewater treatment in the
Islesof Scilly.
Incorporate nature-based solutions to reduce drainage and storm overflows.
Expand sludge treatment processes to protect our rivers.
Our financial plan is solid in order to fund these capital investments to enhance resilience.
Enhancing supply chain resilience:
Current actions:
Enhancing capacity within Pennon to reduce reliance on suppliers (e.g. generating
renewable energy - see our ‘energy source’ opportunity).
Existing storage and buffers for resources (e.g. chemical storage, parts storage).
New commercial framework has expanded supply chain diversity across Tier 1,
2and3suppliers.
Future actions:
Actions to enhance supply chain resilience (e.g. diversifying suppliers/ location of
suppliers) - see also our actions for managing supply chain under our ‘technology’ risks.
Procurement strategies (e.g. requirements on suppliers to meet ESG criteria/ low
climaterisks).
Investments in response and recovery to supply chain disruption.
Continuous engagements and collaboration with our supply chain and discussion on
priorities such as our Nature First principle.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
Potential to reduce and avoid costs (Opex) and enhance
our reputation by preventing disruptions to our services.
Wecould also incur reduced penalties/increased rewards
forperformance on ODIs (e.g. supply interruptions, leakage,
andwater quality), therefore increasing our revenue.
However, this requires significant investment (Opex and
Capex), including strengthening our infrastructure and
enhancing our adaptive capacity. Some of these costs could
be recoverable through the regulatory system. We will need
tomanage the carbon footprint associated with schemes
related to climate resilience.
Type as defined by TCFD
Energy Source
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
This opportunity is of high relevance to meeting our
2030 Net Zero target, with continued relevance into
the medium and long term due to increasing market
risks to energy pricing and resilience of energy
supply as physical risks increase in magnitude and
likelihood over each horizon.
Current opportunity rating
Last year’s opportunity rating
Reducing carbon and enhancing energy resilience and revenue by using and generating
renewable energy: Opportunities to lower carbon emissions by using renewable energy and
opportunities to invest in renewable energy generation which can also lower our carbon emissions,
enhance our energy resilience (e.g. less reliance on energy suppliers), and enhance our revenue
through sale of renewable energy.
Some examples include:
South West Water’s commitment to purchase 100% renewable electricity from 2022 onwards.
Pennon Group plc’s commitment to reach up to 50% renewable energy self-generation by 2030.
Generating renewable energy on Pennon’s sites and through partnerships (e.g. PPAs) such as
through generating energy from wastewater and sludge, and generating electricity through solar
and wind.
Deploying our £160m capital allocation to acquire and develop solar PV sites.
Switching fuels to lower-carbon sources, such as switching diesel to renewable electricity and
Hydrotreated Vegetable Oil as a transition fuel.
Using renewable energy:
Current actions:
Procurement strategy for renewable energy to minimise the impact of increasing
costsofenergy.
Supply contract for 100% renewable energy by 2023 for South West Water (currently
doesnot include Bristol Water operations).
Generation of renewable energy by Pennon, including exploring additional options
andpower purchase agreements (PPAs).
Net Zero programme.
Prioritising investment to deliver highest carbon reductions, and seeking return
oninvestment (ROI) where possible.
Investment in generating renewable energy.
Future actions:
Trialling low-carbon fuels.
Innovation programme (e.g. exploring options to generate and recover energy
fromsewers).
Use of energy recovered from bioresources to power our operations.
Engagement with potential partners for PPAs.
Establishing the commercial and legal arrangements to co-fund renewable
energyinvestments.
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex)
dueto investment in generating renewable energy; however
this has potential to reduce our carbon footprint.
Some of these costs could be recoverable through the
regulatory system.
Investment in renewables could reduce expenditure (Opex)
in the long term if electricity prices continue to rise (see our
‘market’ transition risk and ‘market’ opportunity).
We could enhance our revenue through selling renewable
energy. We will need to manage the carbon footprint associated
with generating renewable energy.
TCFD and TNFD continued
Key
Risk Trend
Increasing Stable Decreasing
96 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Climate-related opportunities
Potential risks and opportunities Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Resilience
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short, medium, and long term
Enhancing resilience to climate change and extreme
weather events is of high relevance today, with
increasing likelihood and magnitude of risk over
each horizon.
Current opportunity rating
Last year’s opportunity rating
Enhancing resilience across Pennon’s operations, asset base, and supply chain to avoid
costs and enhance value: Opportunity to invest in enhancing resilience across Pennon’s
business and supply chain, in some cases saving costs (e.g. avoided damage to assets, avoided
losses in revenue, avoided penalties on Outcome Delivery Incentives (ODIs), avoided penalties
on Guaranteed Standards Scheme (GSS) and enhancing company reputation and value. Some
examples include:
Enhancing Pennon’s resilience by investing in climate change adaptation (e.g. investing in
drought and flood prevention measures to avoid customer disruption/ penalties/ compensation
payments and avoid asset damage).
Enhancing supply chain resilience by investing in buffers/storage for critical resources,
diversifying suppliers and replacing suppliers who have high climate risks - thereby reducing
potential risks and costs associated with supply chain disruption and delays.
Enhancing Pennon’s resilience:
Current actions:
Investment in diversifying water sources, including desalination and repurposing
ex-quarries and mines.
Pursuing new reservoir capacity through regulatory frameworks.
Company resilience planning.
Climate risk assessments and climate adaptation planning.
Engaging stakeholders, such as regulators and customers.
Investments in response and recovery to operational disruption.
Generation of renewable energy by Pennon, including exploring additional options
andpower purchase agreements (PPAs) (see our ‘market’ transition risk).
Ongoing upgrade and modernisation of our infrastructure. (e.g. water treatment works,
water reservoirs).
Future actions:
Actions to adapt to climate change (e.g. enhancing drought resilience) and to mitigate
climate risks.
Tackling storm overflows at bathing beaches across our regions.
Investing in desalination plant in Cornwall by 2025, and wastewater treatment in the
Islesof Scilly.
Incorporate nature-based solutions to reduce drainage and storm overflows.
Expand sludge treatment processes to protect our rivers.
Our financial plan is solid in order to fund these capital investments to enhance resilience.
Enhancing supply chain resilience:
Current actions:
Enhancing capacity within Pennon to reduce reliance on suppliers (e.g. generating
renewable energy - see our ‘energy source’ opportunity).
Existing storage and buffers for resources (e.g. chemical storage, parts storage).
New commercial framework has expanded supply chain diversity across Tier 1,
2and3suppliers.
Future actions:
Actions to enhance supply chain resilience (e.g. diversifying suppliers/ location of
suppliers) - see also our actions for managing supply chain under our ‘technology’ risks.
Procurement strategies (e.g. requirements on suppliers to meet ESG criteria/ low
climaterisks).
Investments in response and recovery to supply chain disruption.
Continuous engagements and collaboration with our supply chain and discussion on
priorities such as our Nature First principle.
Impacts from mitigating the risk:
Potential to reduce and avoid costs (Opex) and enhance
our reputation by preventing disruptions to our services.
Wecould also incur reduced penalties/increased rewards
forperformance on ODIs (e.g. supply interruptions, leakage,
andwater quality), therefore increasing our revenue.
However, this requires significant investment (Opex and
Capex), including strengthening our infrastructure and
enhancing our adaptive capacity. Some of these costs could
be recoverable through the regulatory system. We will need
tomanage the carbon footprint associated with schemes
related to climate resilience.
Type as defined by TCFD
Energy Source
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
This opportunity is of high relevance to meeting our
2030 Net Zero target, with continued relevance into
the medium and long term due to increasing market
risks to energy pricing and resilience of energy
supply as physical risks increase in magnitude and
likelihood over each horizon.
Current opportunity rating
Last year’s opportunity rating
Reducing carbon and enhancing energy resilience and revenue by using and generating
renewable energy: Opportunities to lower carbon emissions by using renewable energy and
opportunities to invest in renewable energy generation which can also lower our carbon emissions,
enhance our energy resilience (e.g. less reliance on energy suppliers), and enhance our revenue
through sale of renewable energy.
Some examples include:
South West Water’s commitment to purchase 100% renewable electricity from 2022 onwards.
Pennon Group plc’s commitment to reach up to 50% renewable energy self-generation by 2030.
Generating renewable energy on Pennon’s sites and through partnerships (e.g. PPAs) such as
through generating energy from wastewater and sludge, and generating electricity through solar
and wind.
Deploying our £160m capital allocation to acquire and develop solar PV sites.
Switching fuels to lower-carbon sources, such as switching diesel to renewable electricity and
Hydrotreated Vegetable Oil as a transition fuel.
Using renewable energy:
Current actions:
Procurement strategy for renewable energy to minimise the impact of increasing
costsofenergy.
Supply contract for 100% renewable energy by 2023 for South West Water (currently
doesnot include Bristol Water operations).
Generation of renewable energy by Pennon, including exploring additional options
andpower purchase agreements (PPAs).
Net Zero programme.
Prioritising investment to deliver highest carbon reductions, and seeking return
oninvestment (ROI) where possible.
Investment in generating renewable energy.
Future actions:
Trialling low-carbon fuels.
Innovation programme (e.g. exploring options to generate and recover energy
fromsewers).
Use of energy recovered from bioresources to power our operations.
Engagement with potential partners for PPAs.
Establishing the commercial and legal arrangements to co-fund renewable
energyinvestments.
We could incur increased expenditure (Capex and Opex)
dueto investment in generating renewable energy; however
this has potential to reduce our carbon footprint.
Some of these costs could be recoverable through the
regulatory system.
Investment in renewables could reduce expenditure (Opex)
in the long term if electricity prices continue to rise (see our
‘market’ transition risk and ‘market’ opportunity).
We could enhance our revenue through selling renewable
energy. We will need to manage the carbon footprint associated
with generating renewable energy.
97Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Climate-related opportunities continued
Potential risks and opportunities Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Markets
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short term the opportunity is more focused
on financing to achieve Net Zero and current
physical risks; over the medium and long term the
opportunity will increasingly focus on environmental
targets and climate change resilience to long
termchallenges.
Current opportunity rating
Last year’s opportunity rating
Generating value and reducing our financing costs through sustainable financing:
Opportunity to reduce our cost of finance and avoid cost increases through access to sustainable
financing and generation of green financial assets. Our Sustainable Finance Framework is part
of ourstrategy for taking action on climate change, and our approach is evolving as policy and
markets change and information becomes available. We are exploring the implications for our
business, including regulatory developments such as the EU Taxonomy/UK Green Taxonomy.
Sustainable finance:
Current actions:
Sustainable financing framework.
TCFD and TNFD programme.
Investigating requirements to access sustainable finance markets.
Procurement and finance strategies.
ESG initiatives.
Future actions:
Establishing commercial and legal arrangements for buying and selling green financial
assets/credits.
Future disclosure/ESG initiatives (e.g. EU/UK Taxonomy, Taskforce on Nature-related
Financial Disclosures, International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB), Transition
Plans/Transition Plan Taskforce (TPT).
Exploring opportunities to attract third-party funding. Our low gearing ratio will enhance
our ability to raise funding for our business plan.
Through sustainable financing, we have potential to reduce
ourexpenditure by avoiding cost increases related to
financing/ cost of capital. We also have potential to enhance
our reputation and mitigate reputational risks (see our
‘reputation’ transition risks).
Type as defined by TCFD
Resource Efficiency
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short and medium term, investment in
resource efficiency is central to many of our options
and decisions in our business plan and WRMP’s
best value plan. This will enhance our resilience,
ourability to meet our environmental and our
NetZero targets and enhance our revenue over
themedium and long term.
Current opportunity rating
Last year’s opportunity rating
Saving water, energy, materials, and carbon by enhancing efficiency, using low-carbon and
nature- based solutions, and reducing emissions across Pennon’s supply chain: Opportunities
to invest in enhancing efficiency and reduce waste of water, energy, and materials, opportunities to
use low-carbon construction, approaches, and nature-based solutions, and opportunity to work with
suppliers to reduce their carbon footprints and enhance their sustainability. Some examples include:
Pennon’s leakage reduction programme, water efficiency programme, smart metering, rainwater
harvesting, grey water, incentivising customers to use less hot and cold water.
Enhancing efficiency of process equipment (reducing energy use and chemical use),
energy-saving measures for buildings and transport.
Substituting construction materials for low-carbon alternatives, local sourcing of materials,
enhancing efficiency of material use in construction.
Using technology to avoid high-carbon interventions, such as using real-time control in
sewerstoincrease operational capacity instead of constructing bigger sewers (see also our
‘technology’ risk).
Constructing wetlands for wastewater treatment and sustainable drainage systems (SuDS)
toreduce capital and operational carbon.
Removing carbon from the atmosphere through investing in marine carbon opportunities,
restoring peatlands, tree planting, and soil and grassland activities.
Working with suppliers to reduce their carbon footprints and enhance their sustainability,
andharness opportunity to access new suppliers with high ESG credentials.
Enhancing water efficiency:
Current actions:
Demand management and water efficiency programme (within Pennon’s own operations
and across customer networks), including Per Capita Consumption (PCC) reductions,
leakage reduction strategy and customer incentive schemes like Cornwall’s Stop the
Dropto protect reservoir levels.
Continuing installation of advanced metering infrastructure (AMI), which is smart metering
that provides data on water usage directly to customers.
Customer education/outreach.
Continuing to support our community fund which supports water saving projects, like
theHeathfield Allotment Trust.
Incorporation of carbon values into capital planning and decision making.
Farm water efficiency and resilience project – 1,000 pond nature-based solutions.
Continue to use data from our customers’ smart meters and make sure we address
waterleaks.
Continuing to offer free fixing of leaks around our customers’ houses if they meet
setcriteria.
Future actions:
Rainwater harvesting.
Incentivising customers to use less water.
Extend real-time monitoring and control.
Help our customers’ affordability levels through water efficiency schemes/devices/home
visits, metered tariffs and helping with debt.
Enhancing process, building, and transport efficiency:
Current actions:
Actions to enhance process efficiency.
Energy efficiency programme for Pennon’s buildings.
Requirements in leases for efficient buildings.
Changes to operational practices to reduce need for travel (e.g. remote monitoring
andcontrol).
Procurement/leasing of efficient vehicles.
Future actions:
Investments in innovation to enhance efficiency.
Changes to operational practices to enhance efficiency (e.g. real time monitoring
andcontrol).
Partnerships with suppliers/outsourcing specific operations.
Employee carpooling.
Light-weighting vehicles.
Potential to reduce our carbon footprint and our Opex in some
cases where there are cost savings from resource efficiency.
However this requires significant investment (Opex
andCapex), including additional monitoring, metering,
andcapital projects.
Some of these costs could be recoverable through the
regulatory system. We will need to manage the carbon
footprint associated with actions to realise resource
efficiencyopportunities.
TCFD and TNFD continued
Key
Risk Trend
Increasing Stable Decreasing
98 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Climate-related opportunities continued
Potential risks and opportunities Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Markets
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short term the opportunity is more focused
on financing to achieve Net Zero and current
physical risks; over the medium and long term the
opportunity will increasingly focus on environmental
targets and climate change resilience to long
termchallenges.
Current opportunity rating
Last year’s opportunity rating
Generating value and reducing our financing costs through sustainable financing:
Opportunity to reduce our cost of finance and avoid cost increases through access to sustainable
financing and generation of green financial assets. Our Sustainable Finance Framework is part
of ourstrategy for taking action on climate change, and our approach is evolving as policy and
markets change and information becomes available. We are exploring the implications for our
business, including regulatory developments such as the EU Taxonomy/UK Green Taxonomy.
Sustainable finance:
Current actions:
Sustainable financing framework.
TCFD and TNFD programme.
Investigating requirements to access sustainable finance markets.
Procurement and finance strategies.
ESG initiatives.
Future actions:
Establishing commercial and legal arrangements for buying and selling green financial
assets/credits.
Future disclosure/ESG initiatives (e.g. EU/UK Taxonomy, Taskforce on Nature-related
Financial Disclosures, International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB), Transition
Plans/Transition Plan Taskforce (TPT).
Exploring opportunities to attract third-party funding. Our low gearing ratio will enhance
our ability to raise funding for our business plan.
Through sustainable financing, we have potential to reduce
ourexpenditure by avoiding cost increases related to
financing/ cost of capital. We also have potential to enhance
our reputation and mitigate reputational risks (see our
‘reputation’ transition risks).
Type as defined by TCFD
Resource Efficiency
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short and medium term
In the short and medium term, investment in
resource efficiency is central to many of our options
and decisions in our business plan and WRMP’s
best value plan. This will enhance our resilience,
ourability to meet our environmental and our
NetZero targets and enhance our revenue over
themedium and long term.
Current opportunity rating
Last year’s opportunity rating
Saving water, energy, materials, and carbon by enhancing efficiency, using low-carbon and
nature- based solutions, and reducing emissions across Pennon’s supply chain: Opportunities
to invest in enhancing efficiency and reduce waste of water, energy, and materials, opportunities to
use low-carbon construction, approaches, and nature-based solutions, and opportunity to work with
suppliers to reduce their carbon footprints and enhance their sustainability. Some examples include:
Pennon’s leakage reduction programme, water efficiency programme, smart metering, rainwater
harvesting, grey water, incentivising customers to use less hot and cold water.
Enhancing efficiency of process equipment (reducing energy use and chemical use),
energy-saving measures for buildings and transport.
Substituting construction materials for low-carbon alternatives, local sourcing of materials,
enhancing efficiency of material use in construction.
Using technology to avoid high-carbon interventions, such as using real-time control in
sewerstoincrease operational capacity instead of constructing bigger sewers (see also our
‘technology’ risk).
Constructing wetlands for wastewater treatment and sustainable drainage systems (SuDS)
toreduce capital and operational carbon.
Removing carbon from the atmosphere through investing in marine carbon opportunities,
restoring peatlands, tree planting, and soil and grassland activities.
Working with suppliers to reduce their carbon footprints and enhance their sustainability,
andharness opportunity to access new suppliers with high ESG credentials.
Enhancing water efficiency:
Current actions:
Demand management and water efficiency programme (within Pennon’s own operations
and across customer networks), including Per Capita Consumption (PCC) reductions,
leakage reduction strategy and customer incentive schemes like Cornwall’s Stop the
Dropto protect reservoir levels.
Continuing installation of advanced metering infrastructure (AMI), which is smart metering
that provides data on water usage directly to customers.
Customer education/outreach.
Continuing to support our community fund which supports water saving projects, like
theHeathfield Allotment Trust.
Incorporation of carbon values into capital planning and decision making.
Farm water efficiency and resilience project – 1,000 pond nature-based solutions.
Continue to use data from our customers’ smart meters and make sure we address
waterleaks.
Continuing to offer free fixing of leaks around our customers’ houses if they meet
setcriteria.
Future actions:
Rainwater harvesting.
Incentivising customers to use less water.
Extend real-time monitoring and control.
Help our customers’ affordability levels through water efficiency schemes/devices/home
visits, metered tariffs and helping with debt.
Enhancing process, building, and transport efficiency:
Current actions:
Actions to enhance process efficiency.
Energy efficiency programme for Pennon’s buildings.
Requirements in leases for efficient buildings.
Changes to operational practices to reduce need for travel (e.g. remote monitoring
andcontrol).
Procurement/leasing of efficient vehicles.
Future actions:
Investments in innovation to enhance efficiency.
Changes to operational practices to enhance efficiency (e.g. real time monitoring
andcontrol).
Partnerships with suppliers/outsourcing specific operations.
Employee carpooling.
Light-weighting vehicles.
Potential to reduce our carbon footprint and our Opex in some
cases where there are cost savings from resource efficiency.
However this requires significant investment (Opex
andCapex), including additional monitoring, metering,
andcapital projects.
Some of these costs could be recoverable through the
regulatory system. We will need to manage the carbon
footprint associated with actions to realise resource
efficiencyopportunities.
99Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Climate-related opportunities continued
Potential risks and opportunities Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities continued Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Resource Efficiency (continued)
Using low-carbon solutions:
Current actions:
Implementing capital carbon accounting.
Implementing carbon values in capital planning and decision making.
Future actions:
Net Zero programme - embodied carbon initiatives,
Engagement with supply chain to promote/ensure low-carbon solutions are prioritised.
Procurement strategies (e.g. requirements on suppliers).
Innovation programme (e.g. exploring alternative materials and approaches).
Collaborations with supply chain (e.g. optioneering to reduce embodied carbon).
Learning from other companies in UK and internationally.
Using nature-based solutions:
Current actions:
Embedding natural capital and valuing carbon in decision making.
Investing in innovation and piloting.
Practising catchment management to improve our land.
Future actions:
Establishing partnerships with stakeholders (e.g. landowners; see our Upstream Thinking
catchment management programme).
Collaborations with supply chain (e.g. optioneering, considering nature-based solutions).
Learning from other companies in UK and internationally.
Use of our Green First principle to make sure that nature-based solutions are prioritised.
Launch our Nature Recovery Fund to help support nature recovery programmes
inourregion.
Reducing supply chain carbon:
Current actions:
Engaging with suppliers.
Future actions:
Procurement strategies (e.g. requirements on suppliers to meet ESG criteria/ low
climaterisks, reduce emissions).
Learning from other companies in UK and internationally.
Diversifying supply chain to lower emissions/risks.
Sourcing locally, where possible.
Life cycle assessment requirements for suppliers.
Type as defined by TCFD
Products and Services
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short, medium, and long term
Opportunity in the short, medium, and long term
to enhance Pennon’s revenue through delivery
of Strategic Water Resource and bioresources
schemes.
Current opportunity rating
Last year’s opportunity rating
Not included last year
Enhancing revenue through providing resilient water solutions, bioresources, and expertise
to other water companies:
Opportunities to invest in water resources schemes linked to climate change, bioresources
opportunities which align with the transition to Net Zero, and other opportunities to enhance
ourrevenues.
Some examples include:
Delivering strategic resource options (SROs) and resilient water solutions for other water
companies (e.g. modular desalination technology).
Opportunities to sell expertise and technologies for water efficiency and leakage reduction.
Opportunities to sell bioresources (e.g. biogas, nutrients, sludge etc.).
Opportunities to provide/sell expertise in bioresources to other companies.
Delivering water resource schemes and bioresources opportunities:
Current actions:
Preparatory work on three Strategic Water Resource schemes.
Engagement with other water companies, engagement with regulators and stakeholders.
Business plan includes opportunity related to pyrolysis for bioresources.
Establishing commercial and legal arrangements for SROs and sale of bioresources.
Continued roll-out of new technology in our region.
Future actions:
Engagement with customers to build support (e.g. social licence).
Innovation and R&D in collaboration with CREWW
Potential to increase our revenue through delivering SROs
and selling bioresources and our expertise to peer companies.
However, this requires significant investment (Opex and
Capex) to enable these opportunities. Some of these costs
could be recoverable through the regulatory system. We will
need to manage the carbon footprint associated with our SRO
and bioresources schemes.
TCFD and TNFD continued
Key
Risk Trend
Increasing Stable Decreasing
100 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Climate-related opportunities continued
Potential risks and opportunities Examples of our actions to mitigate risks and realise opportunities continued Primary financial and reputational impacts to our business
Type as defined by TCFD
Resource Efficiency (continued)
Using low-carbon solutions:
Current actions:
Implementing capital carbon accounting.
Implementing carbon values in capital planning and decision making.
Future actions:
Net Zero programme - embodied carbon initiatives,
Engagement with supply chain to promote/ensure low-carbon solutions are prioritised.
Procurement strategies (e.g. requirements on suppliers).
Innovation programme (e.g. exploring alternative materials and approaches).
Collaborations with supply chain (e.g. optioneering to reduce embodied carbon).
Learning from other companies in UK and internationally.
Using nature-based solutions:
Current actions:
Embedding natural capital and valuing carbon in decision making.
Investing in innovation and piloting.
Practising catchment management to improve our land.
Future actions:
Establishing partnerships with stakeholders (e.g. landowners; see our Upstream Thinking
catchment management programme).
Collaborations with supply chain (e.g. optioneering, considering nature-based solutions).
Learning from other companies in UK and internationally.
Use of our Green First principle to make sure that nature-based solutions are prioritised.
Launch our Nature Recovery Fund to help support nature recovery programmes
inourregion.
Reducing supply chain carbon:
Current actions:
Engaging with suppliers.
Future actions:
Procurement strategies (e.g. requirements on suppliers to meet ESG criteria/ low
climaterisks, reduce emissions).
Learning from other companies in UK and internationally.
Diversifying supply chain to lower emissions/risks.
Sourcing locally, where possible.
Life cycle assessment requirements for suppliers.
Type as defined by TCFD
Products and Services
Relevant time horizon of risk
Short, medium, and long term
Opportunity in the short, medium, and long term
to enhance Pennon’s revenue through delivery
of Strategic Water Resource and bioresources
schemes.
Current opportunity rating
Last year’s opportunity rating
Not included last year
Enhancing revenue through providing resilient water solutions, bioresources, and expertise
to other water companies:
Opportunities to invest in water resources schemes linked to climate change, bioresources
opportunities which align with the transition to Net Zero, and other opportunities to enhance
ourrevenues.
Some examples include:
Delivering strategic resource options (SROs) and resilient water solutions for other water
companies (e.g. modular desalination technology).
Opportunities to sell expertise and technologies for water efficiency and leakage reduction.
Opportunities to sell bioresources (e.g. biogas, nutrients, sludge etc.).
Opportunities to provide/sell expertise in bioresources to other companies.
Delivering water resource schemes and bioresources opportunities:
Current actions:
Preparatory work on three Strategic Water Resource schemes.
Engagement with other water companies, engagement with regulators and stakeholders.
Business plan includes opportunity related to pyrolysis for bioresources.
Establishing commercial and legal arrangements for SROs and sale of bioresources.
Continued roll-out of new technology in our region.
Future actions:
Engagement with customers to build support (e.g. social licence).
Innovation and R&D in collaboration with CREWW
Potential to increase our revenue through delivering SROs
and selling bioresources and our expertise to peer companies.
However, this requires significant investment (Opex and
Capex) to enable these opportunities. Some of these costs
could be recoverable through the regulatory system. We will
need to manage the carbon footprint associated with our SRO
and bioresources schemes.
101Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Short-, medium- and long-term horizons
In determining our strategy, we have processes in place for identifying, assessing, and responding to climate-related risks and opportunities. In shaping
thestrategy, we consider short-, medium-, and long-term horizons.
Short-term – 1 to 10 years
Over this horizon we define key targets (operational, financial, sustainability) and we consider changing regulatory frameworks and emerging Government
policies. We develop business plans every 5 years, defining our actions and investments over this period. Operational risks are planned and budgeted for over
this time frame and planning begins during this period for the next regulatory period. Our operational Net Zero 2030 commitment falls within this time horizon,
as well as the price review in 2029 (PR29). Transition risks and opportunities are likely to have the largest impacts to our business across this period, with
physical risks projected to increase over time.
Medium-term – 10 to 30 years
Water and wastewater treatment assets have a typical life of up to 30 years and will therefore be reviewed over this horizon. Our WRMP and DWMP strategic
plans consider requirements across this period. Major projects and operational plans will be renewed and managed over this time frame to ensure projects
meet the correct regulatory period plans. Our 2045 total Net Zero target falls within this horizon, as well as the UK’s 2050 Net Zero target, which will continue
to present emerging policy and market challenges. Transition risks and physical risks will both impact our business across this period to varying levels
depending on global GHG emissions and the Net Zero pathway taken by the UK and globally.
Long-term – 30 to 100 years
Typically for longer-term strategic direction, risk, and resilience planning. Investment requirements for our long-life assets are considered such as mains pipes
and reservoirs. Over this time period the planet is currently projected to warm by around 3°C; however there is much uncertainty related to the effectiveness
of global climate change mitigation. Physical climate risks are likely to have the largest impacts to our business over this time horizon.
Climate scenario analysis
Scenarios
In alignment with the TCFD guidance, we have assessed the risks and
opportunities associated with climate change and the transition to a Net Zero
climate-resilient economy. We have used plausible contrasting scenarios to
explore the potential range of impacts in the future and in turn the possible
range in our strategic responses required to mitigate risks and build adaptive
capacity in an uncertain future. Our physical risk scenarios are informed by
the IPCC’s Representative Concentration Pathways (RCPs) from the IPCC’s
5
th
assessment (2014), including a high and a low emissions scenario, which are
also used as the basis for planning by Ofwat as part of the PR24 methodology.
The IPCC's 6
th
Assessment report was released in 2023, and in it the IPCC has
adopted new climate scenarios know as Shared Socioeconomic Scenarios
(SSPs). However, Pennon has continued to use the RCP scenarios due to
these being mandated by Ofwat's PR24 methodology. Our transition scenarios
are informed by high and low levels of socio-economic drivers surrounding
policy ambition, the speed at which policy is implemented, and the pace
of technological advancement. This year we have updated our transition
risk assessment to adopt transition scenarios developed by the Network
for Greening the Financial System (NGFS). These transition scenarios have
become widely adopted in the UK and supersede the previous bespoke
transition scenarios we used in the previous years. The two Network for
Greening the Financial System (NGFS) transition scenarios we used are: (1)
Orderly transition, aligned to the NGFS Net Zero 2050 and (2) Hot house world
aligned to the NGFS Current Policies. Also, important to note that the NGFS
Net Zero 2050 aligns fairly closely with the IEA Net Zero 2050 scenario. We
have selected these contrasting scenarios as they span a range of possible
futures, and present different challenges and opportunities for our business.
The NGFS Disorderly Transition Scenario has also been considered, but our
view is that negative impacts for our company are more significant under the
NGFS Current Policies Scenario, so it is this one that has been the focus of
our scenario analysis to provide a stress test of our resilience.
We will continue to re-visit our scenario analysis in future, including
considering the merit of selecting additional scenarios.
Our scenarios can be defined as follows:
1. The IPCC’s Representative Concentration Pathways from the IPCC’s 5
th
assessment (2014)
Key assumptions
For our scenario analysis, the following
assumptions for all scenarios were
made:
Scenarios focus on the UK policy and
regulatory context and are semi-
independent of global action and
temperature pathways.
It is assumed that the current high
energy prices remain high throughout
this decade.
The Government’s ambition around
environmental protection and
conservation remains high, regardless of
the pace of transition.
No significant change to Pennon Group’s
business activities.
Population in our region increases by
0.4 million by 2050, overall water demand
remains unchanged from today (due to
leakage reduction and water efficiency
measures), and overall volume of
wastewater treated remains unchanged
from today (due to actions taken to
reduce surface water flows to sewers).
RCP2.6
1
: Lower Physical Impacts
An approximate 2°C warming scenario by the
year 2100 – corresponding to a low emissions
‘optimistic’ scenario.
1.5 degree scenario: NGFS Net Zero 2050
A scenario which sees the UK as a global leader
with strong policies and actions to mitigate
climate, aligned with the Paris Agreement.
Policy ambition
1.5ºC
Government policy
Immediate and smooth
Technology change
Fast change
RCP8.5
1
: High Physical Impacts
An approximate 4°C warming scenario by the year 2100
– corresponding to a high emissions ‘business-as-usual’
scenario, which is appropriate to use when considering
high risks.
3-degree scenario: NGFS Current Policies
A scenario which sees the UK make incremental progress
to mitigate climate change, but assumes no major policy
changes and results in missing the targets of the Paris
Agreement.
Policy ambition
3ºC+
Government policy
None – current policies
Technology change
Slow change
Physical climate risk scenarios
Climate Transition risk scenarios
TCFD and TNFD continued
102 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Physical climate risks – scenario
analysis
Approach taken
The Group undertook qualitative scenario analysis in 2021 considering the
financial implications of physical climate risks for South West Water under
two climate scenarios based on the IPCC’s Representative Concentration
Pathway (RCP) scenarios. Potential material financial impacts were
considered over the 10-year horizon to 2030, aligning with the Group’s
regulatory financial viability testing. Material impacts on our business and
strategy were considered over the time horizon to 2050 – aligning with a
medium-term view of climate change impacts before uncertainty increases
beyond 2050. We have extended our analysis to cover Bristol Water
(acquired June 2021) and we will look to incorporate SES Water when we
update our scenario analysis in future. This year we have revised our scenario
analysis based on changes over the past year, using the same physical
climate scenarios as the previous years.
Impacts
This section discusses impacts under both of the physical climate risk
scenarios (RCP2.6 and RCP8.5).
Climate resilience will require increased expenditure and investment.
The most significant financial impacts for the Group are on our expenditures
(Opex and Capex), to mitigate future climate risks by: increasing capacity
for water supply infrastructure; managing drought conditions and
water demand; improving water and wastewater treatment and odour
management; improving operational resilience to flooding, saline intrusion
and storms; and enhancing our Upstream and Downstream Thinking
programmes. These financial impacts would be significantly greater under
the higher emissions scenario over the long-term horizon as they will require
higher levels of adaptive capacity, although adaptive planning will seek to
minimise this impact by identifying low-regret options under both high and
low emissions scenarios to inform investment decisions. These costs could
be recoverable through the regulatory system.
Investments in our natural capital will be central to climate
adaptation. Within the water industry, healthy and functioning ecosystems
are critical for resilient operations. Therefore, the risks to Pennon’s
infrastructure are affected by risks to the natural environment. Accordingly,
increased expenditures (Opex and Capex) include heavy investment
in our natural capital schemes, catchment management, partnerships,
and research and development in this area, as well as implementing our
comprehensive Biodiversity Strategy and Environment Plan 2050.
Climate impacts will affect our ability to meet performance
commitments and objectives. The Group could also be impacted
financially by Outcome Delivery Incentive (ODI) penalties and rewards
due to potential failure to achieve performance commitments as part of
the regulatory framework, further resulting in negative impacts to our
reputation. This impact is more likely under the higher emissions scenario
over the long-term horizon due to higher projected magnitude of climate
impacts and frequency of extreme weather events.
Investment required is high, but the cost of inaction is much higher.
Our risk assessment clearly shows long-term significant risks if the impacts of
climate change are not mitigated. South West Water operates over £6 billion
of water assets and over £7 billion of wastewater assets all of which will be
affected by climate change in some way. The unmitigated risk would also
result in additional expenditure (Opex and Capex) to recover from service
interruptions and repair or replace deteriorated assets. The unmitigated risk
would result in more frequent and greater ODI penalties. Although some of
this will be our expenditure, wider flood protection investments will be required
by others to protect wide-ranging coastal assets.
Impacts are worse with every bit of additional warming. We
would experience these impacts for extreme events over all time
horizons; however these impacts would increase over each horizon
as extreme weather events increase in frequency and magnitude and
are compounded by higher average temperatures and drier summer
conditions. This trend is more pronounced for the higher emissions
scenario, particularly over the long-term horizon, where temperature
increases are projected to accelerate.
Our strategic response
Our strategy for managing physical climate risks and financial impacts is
underpinned by the following principles in order to maintain and improve our
Company’s performance to the year 2050:
Adapt to climate change
Enhance resilience
Innovate
Become more efficient
Collaborate
Balance investment over time
This will require significant action and investment by our Company, as well
as action by our supply chain partners and wider actors (e.g. Government
agencies, local authorities, and major land owners in SW England).
Longer-term investment, as outlined in our strategic plans, will be needed
to manage future risks to acceptable/tolerable levels. The long-term risk
is significant and will require additional investment to mitigate its effect.
To achieve this, regulatory and Government support within their policy
frameworks will be needed.
The combined characteristics of low population density, high coastline to land
area ratio and tourism-based seasonal flux on water demand, present a unique
set of challenges. Through the years, by innovating, investing, and adapting,
we have achieved industry-leading results in many areas of the business. The
extensive programme of environmental improvement with Upstream and
Downstream Thinking catchment management has resulted in some of the
finest bathing waters in Europe. This has been instrumental for us to tackle
these challenges and meet the expectations of our customers. Having seen
record visitors to our region following the COVID-19 pandemic, it is expected
further investment will be required to continue building on the progress made
by Pennon Group to protect the environment and our bathing waters.
Our strategic responses within our WRMP24 and DWMP23 for delivering reliable,
efficient, and high-quality drinking water and wastewater services are driven
by best-value adaptive planning, as per Ofwat’s final methodology for PR24.
This means that, using the same physical scenarios analysed here (RCP2.6
and RCP8.5), our WRMP24 has developed adaptive investment programmes
which: 1) fulfil immediate and most probable future needs; 2) respond to external
pressures in the future with alternative investment options that are triggered
under specific conditions; 3) identify low- and least-regret investments that
enable future options or return benefits under the broadest range of potential
futures. Subsequently, our strategies for mitigating climate risks and building
adaptive capacity are similar under the high and low emissions scenario in the
short and medium term; however, additional options will be required under the
RCP8.5 scenario, or options may need to be implemented earlier than the RCP2.6
scenario over the long term. As part of our adaptive planning approach, we have
pre-defined trigger points and decision points to implement strategies of the
appropriate pathway sufficiently early, so that we can have a pro-active and more
resilient response to climate change - including more opportunity to implement
nature-based solutions - rather than more costly reactive approaches which may
have higher operational and embodied carbon.
Impacts on financial planning
Compared to today, overall our revenue is unlikely to be impacted
significantly by climate change as we operate in a regulated environment
funded through Price Reviews. However, there is a higher risk of reduced
regulatory rewards and increased penalties (ODIs) due to climate change.
Our operating costs are likely to increase compared to today due to climate
change, and additional capital investment will be required. The value of our
assets and our cost of capital would remain relatively unchanged compared
to today if we continue to enhance our resilience.
We continue to integrate the outcomes from climate scenario analysis to
inform our business strategy and financial planning.
103Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Climate transition risks – scenario
analysis
Approach taken
The Group undertook qualitative scenario analysis in 2022 considering the
financial implications of transition climate risks and opportunities for South
West Water (including Bristol Water) under two transition scenarios. The
assessment considered impacts to the year 2030; this time horizon was
selected as it aligns with our operational Net Zero target and there is much
uncertainty beyond this time with regard to changes to policy, technology,
markets, and public opinion.
This year we have revised our scenario analysis based on changes over the
past year, and considering the two new transition scenarios developed by the
NGFS described earlier.
Impacts – NGFS Current Policies scenario
This scenario provides a challenging context for meeting our 2030
operational Net Zero target. In this scenario we have identified the following
main impacts for our business:
The cost to our business of achieving our 2030 Net Zero target rises,
with less ability to recover costs through the regulatory pricing
system. This is compounded by the low readiness and higher costs for
access to low-carbon technologies and related skills (due to the UK’s
underinvestment in this scenario), and increased costs related to both our
own renewable energy generation and the purchasing of green electricity
from external suppliers (where demand is likely to outstrip supply).
The current UK policies might not be sufficient to deliver the necessary
carbon emission reductions. As such this could impact our business
transition through increased higher costs from the reliance on carbon-
intensive energy and internal combustion engine vehicles.
Meeting our 2030 target requires greater use of carbon offsets.
The enabling environment for decarbonisation is weaker and costs are
higher, which leads to slower progress in emissions reductions across our
business. As a result, the residual emissions that need to be offset rise,
which adds to our costs.
Environmental targets require additional energy use. New guidance
on targets for both nutrients and storm overflows will require a significant
increase in energy use and associated capital and operational carbon.
While nature-based solutions will form part of the solution (our Green First
Principle), there will be significant reliance on engineered solutions due to
potential inflexibility in regulation and deadlines to improve outcomes. The
increased energy and carbon use compounds impacts above.
Reputational risks are significant and require careful management.
Some of our customers and stakeholders may have differing priorities and
preferences for actions to meet our 2030 target, for example regarding
the increased use of carbon offsets. Some may be highly sensitive to
affordability, and increasingly scrutinise our investment choices.
Opportunities are lower than the Net Zero 2050 Transition scenario.
Opportunities for our business remain; however, they are in general
more limited, and with lower return than in the Net Zero 2050 Transition
scenario. Increasing efficiency of energy and resource use, and pursuing
low-carbon energy alternatives are the primary opportunities and can help
to offset some of the additional energy and carbon costs. There is also an
opportunity to clearly identify and communicate the synergies between
environmental objectives and the transition to a Net Zero business in
order to increase support from customers, stakeholders, and regulators.
Impacts on financial planning
Compared to today, overall our revenue is unlikely to be impacted
significantly in this scenario, but also our non-water revenue is less able to
grow. Our costs to achieve operational Net Zero may increase relative to
our current plans; however, early investment in decarbonising the business
to meet the 2030 target remains more cost-effective in the long term
(post 2030), and reduces the risk to our Company and our customers from
measures such as carbon pricing, as well safeguarding our reputation on
environment and climate change. The value of our assets and our cost of
capital would remain relatively unchanged compared to today.
Impacts – NGFS Net Zero 2050 Scenario
This scenario is more favourable to our business and to the UK’s Net Zero
goals, as it creates a more supportive enabling environment to achieve our
2030 operational Net Zero target, however this may present challenges
balancing trade-offs between the agendas of Net Zero and environmental
gains, water quality and climate resilience, environmental protection,
addressing customer affordability, and other objectives. In this scenario we
have identified the following main impacts for our business:
Cost to our business of achieving our 2030 Net Zero target is
lower than the NGFS Current Policies Transition scenario. There is
much greater regulatory support in order to support the step change in
investment required, with an increase in costs which can be recovered
through customers’ bills. The maturity of technology and associated
business models progresses rapidly, and helps to drive down costs across
many areas, including in renewables, resource efficiency, and demand-side
measures. Greater R&D programmes with gated investment and piloting
will minimise technology investment risks compared to the Current
Policies Transition scenario, where strategies could be more reactive
thanproactive.
Access to the skills and resources needed is costly. There is very
high demand for low-carbon technologies, skills, and expertise across the
economy in this scenario, which significantly outpaces supply (partly due
to the UK’s past underinvestment and the time required to develop supply
chains). This adds to our costs associated with decarbonisation, and risks
delaying key projects.
Environmental targets require additional energy use. This impact
is the same as the Current Policies Transition scenario; however the
regulatory environment may be more favourable for nature-based
solutions (NBS) which can also sequester carbon, as there may be more
stringent carbon management requirements, and carbon markets would
also be stronger and provide more incentives for NBS.
Enhanced support to low-income customers may be needed. Fairness
in the distribution of the costs of the UK’s transition to Net Zero is a key
concern among stakeholders. Increased support to some customers may
be required, and our investments will need to be carefully planned and
phased to ensure they are efficient and avoid sudden price impacts.
Opportunities are higher than in the Current Policies Transition
scenario. The more favourable enabling environment means that our
opportunities are enhanced in this scenario, and they are easier to realise.
There are particular opportunities to further invest and innovate on
energy and resource efficiency, and to attract further investment through
sustainable finance opportunities.
TCFD and TNFD continued
104 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Impacts on financial planning
Compared to today, overall our revenue is unlikely to be impacted
significantly in this scenario, but our non-water revenue has greater potential
to grow. Our costs to achieve Net Zero may remain largely unchanged
compared to today. The value of our assets may increase as we decarbonise
and enhance our natural capital, and our cost of capital may decrease
compared to today.
Our strategic response
Although there are important differences in the impacts between the
different transition scenarios, there are a number of common elements which
will require us to implement a common strategic response. The relative
importance of each, and specific elements within the response, will vary
across the two scenarios, but we have identified six key focus areas which
will enhance resilience to transition risks, and better position the Group to
take advantage of opportunities:
Investing in efficiency. Under both scenarios there are major carbon
savings that can be achieved by increasing efficiency, in energy use (for
example more efficient pumping), reducing water losses, and through
the use of smart technology to enable more efficient water supply and
transmission systems. Some of these opportunities will also reduce costs.
We are currently investing in programmes to further reduce energy
use and carbon across our operations. This will allow us to more rapidly
progress to operational Net Zero and reduce the cost of the transition.
Enhancing our energy resilience. We will continue to invest in
generating our own renewable energy to reduce our exposure to energy
prices and to enhance our options for energy supply, which is favourable
under both scenarios.
Enhancing our access to Green Economy resources. Across both
scenarios there will be a shortage of skills and resources across key areas
of the Green Economy that we will need to support our transition. To
manage this we will diversify our supply chain of low-carbon suppliers,
and invest in a programme of internal capacity-building to ensure access
to the skills needed. We will also work with partners across the industry
and engage with peers, regulators, and Government to enable rapid
investment in the skills and capacity needed to support Net Zero.
Engage and influence environmental targets and trade-offs. New
ambitious targets on nutrients and storm overflows will require increased
energy use and new infrastructure, and subsequently higher operational
and capital carbon. There is a trade-off between action to meet these
targets and action on decarbonisation, with implications for the balance
between nature-based and engineering solutions. We will engage in
ongoing consultations on environmental targets and strategies for
meeting them, and seek clear guidance on managing different trade-offs.
We will advocate for policies which enable flexibility and time to scale up
nature-based solutions so we can maximise co-benefits for our customers
and the environment.
Enhance our stakeholder and customer engagement. There are
significant reputational risks associated with both scenarios, although
the balance of concerns will vary. We will develop plans for enhanced
programmes of engagement and communication with our customers and
stakeholders, in particular focusing on explaining the costs and benefits
of the investments we are making, potential trade-offs and synergies
between Net Zero and other environmental targets, and affordability.
Pursue opportunities to deliver more value for customers and
shareholders. We will continue to pursue opportunities to reduce costs
and enhance sustainability. This includes reducing our financing costs
through our sustainable finance framework, investing in our environmental
programme which includes restoring ecosystems to capture carbon,
and working with partners and suppliers to enhance our resilience and
reduce emissions across our supply chain. We will also continue to explore
opportunities to enhance our revenue through water resource options,
selling renewable energy, and markets for bioresources and naturalcapital.
We continue to integrate the outcomes from climate scenario analysis
toinform our business strategy and financial planning.
Statement of resilience
There are clear impacts on our business under different climate scenarios,
inparticular:
higher costs in the short term to meet our operational Net Zero target
by2030 under the Current Policies Transition scenario.
higher costs in the short, medium, and long term under the RCP8.5 Higher
Physical Impacts scenario.
Several of the strategic responses outlined above are already included in our
strategic plans and business plan, and we have confidence that our Company
has a range of strategic options to manage the impacts, can take advantage
of opportunities, and will remain resilient under the different climate
scenarios considered. Further analysis, including quantitative analysis, is
planned going forward to enhance Pennon’s confidence related to resilience.
There will be the requirement to invest more to improve our resilience to
climate change and deliver Net Zero. Assets are likely to require additional
protection, and planning for new assets will require a greater level of
embedded climate resilience. Significant action and investment will be
required by our Company, as well as action by our supply chain partners and
wider actors (e.g. Government, local authorities, major landowners/users,
other providers of infrastructure and services).
105Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Nature-related risks and
opportunities - strategy
Our business planning and financial planning are underpinned by a series of
environmental strategies, plans and commitments that interlink up to 2050.
Key examples include:
Growing Nature to 2035: our strategy for nature recovery, which sets
out the key activities that we will take to support nature recovery and
biodiversity on our land, in our everyday operations and beyond. There are
three principles in the strategy: 1) Protect the best – take action to protect
the valuable biodiversity that we have on our landholdings, 2) Restore
and enhance the rest – take action across our landholdings and assets
to enhance biodiversity in the everyday management of our sites, and
3) Beyond our landholdings – work in partnership with others across the
region, taking a catchment approach to deliver biodiversity enhancement
and nature recovery. These principles align with the LEAP process
advocated by the TNFD, by taking a site approach (locate), formulating
plans to monitor those sites via undertaking biodiversity baselining and
natural capital assessments (evaluate), and creating management plans
(assess) with actions to work across the estate with own staff (e.g. Nature
Safe) and external partners, to improve the biodiversity condition. The
outputs of these plans will enable Pennon to prepare to respond to and
report on, material nature-related issues. Our biodiversity strategy aligns
fully with our PR24 Business Plan.
Our ‘Green First’ Framework, published May 2023, sets out our approach
to utilise NBS and natural flood management wherever possible and
practicable. As such, our planning assumptions are based on achieving
50% reduction in surface water flow entering sewers, through nature-
based solutions and a minimum removal of 10% of impermeable surfaces.
The launch of WaterFit in 2022 is our plan for healthy rivers and seas as
part of c.£100 million of investment to 2025 focused on the protection of
our 860 miles of coastline and rivers in the South West. This includes an
additional c.£45m reinvestment of out-performance.
Our catchment management initiative, Upstream Thinking, applies natural
solutions to reduce agricultural impact on biodiversity and water quality.
It does so whilst supporting farmers and the rural economy in providing
long-term resilience to climate change, by: installing waterside fencing,
building ponds, improving farm tracks, increasing slurry storage and
planting trees and buffer strips to catch and filter water.
In early 2024, our Board approved a pilot programme of bespoke,
evidence based “Natural Catchment Management Plans” (NCMPs)
at selected catchments in Devon and Cornwall ready for June 2024.
These are intended to create a blueprint to be rolled out for all bathing
water catchments from 2025 onwards, primarily in relation to bathing
water quality issues. These can be used to create a “story map” of
water management issues and opportunities in each catchment for
engaging local stakeholders and partners in identifying actions for local
collaboration.
In preparation for the next Asset Management Period AMP8, our Tier 1
suppliers are being tested for their ability to deliver NBS for wastewater
and drinking water. Our ESG team is investigating the social aspects
and carbon emissions of Pennon’s supply chain and hopes to expand
this to consider nature-related dependencies, risks, and opportunities
inthenearfuture.
Going forward:
From April 2025 onwards, we are establishing an independent
Environmental Advisory Panel composed of environmental experts
which, amongst other functions, will advise on risks and opportunities
and monitor progress on our Biodiversity Performance Commitment.
Wearecurrently developing the Terms of Reference for this Panel.
The new Biodiversity Performance Commitment requires all water
companies to set out their plans for delivering measurable biodiversity
enhancement units using the Defra/Natural England biodiversity metric.
These will be achieved as a result of the actions that we will deliver under
our nature plans and strategies across the areas we serve.
We are creating a ‘Nature Safe Framework’ to support our employees
and contractors across operational sites to understand and protect
nature - inalignment with our Biodiversity Strategy. We are in the scoping
phase and envisage this framework to be analogous to our ‘Home Safe
Framework’ related to employee health and safety.
Over the next year we will continue to develop our approach to
embedding nature-risk and opportunity management across our business.
Risk management
Disclose how the organisation identifies, assesses, and manages climate-
related and nature-related risks.
The Group’s risk management framework is explained in detail on pages 55
to 64, including the methodology for assessing risks.
The Group is continuing to integrate climate-related and nature-related
risk management within the Group’s overall risk management process.
Climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities are assessed
using the same methodology as other business risks. In the past few years
we have undertaken specific work to identify and assess climate-related
risks and opportunities, and we are moving towards this risk identification
and assessment being integrated within business subsidiaries/functions. We
have the processes in place to enable this integration, and a key area we are
continuing to work on is raising awareness and competency so that the key
people across our subsidiaries/business functions can effectively identify
climate-related and nature-related risks, as they do other risks (in many
cases, climate and nature risks are an amplifier or additional driver to risks we
have already identified, rather than presenting novel risks). This year and last
year we convened workshops with senior management from across business
functions to re-visit and re-assess climate-related risks and actions, and
management will take forward the responsibility to integrate climate- risks
into risk registers owned by each business subsidiary/function.
Furthering our progress, the Group has identified several principal risks
which are impacted or influenced by physical and transitional climate and
nature risks and opportunities, and as such we are increasingly cognisant
that climate and nature risk management is integral to the performance and
resilience of our business and strategy. The link between climate-related and
nature-related risks and opportunities and our principal risks is summarised
in the table over the page.
TCFD and TNFD continued
106 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
We recognise that evolving landscape of climate-related and nature-
related risk is reflected in the changing regulatory frameworks, customer
expectations and Government policies that are inherent to our operating
context. This is particularly true for climate change, nature, and Net Zero
where new policies and technologies are rapidly emerging, and markets
arerapidly changing.
For the climate-related risks that have been identified, a desired ‘target’ net
risk level is documented within the Group’s risk framework. This target risk
level or tolerance level reflects the acceptable level of risk by the Group and
also stands as a target and equitable measure for alleviatory measures to
approach the risk going forward. We seek to minimise risks on operational
activities within the regulatory environment. Climate- related risks are
approached with a minimal level of appetite, although this is subject to
Boardapproval where all appetite levels are established.
Environmental compliance requirements are high so our risk appetite
for environmental impacts is low. Where there is no risk to regulatory
compliance, we are willing to take more risks to innovate e.g. NBS.
The appropriate action then follows from the level of difference between the
net risk and the desired risk appetite. Actions to manage risks cover four
response types:
Tolerate: where decisions are taken to tolerate a risk, subject to ongoing
monitoring. An example is climate-related risks where uncertainty is high
and therefore we might decide to monitor risks until such time as it may
be necessary to take further action.
Treat: where actions are taken to manage and reduce risks, such as
implementing operational measures in our drought plan or capital
investments to enhance our resilience to droughts.
Transfer: used where possible to transfer risks to other organisations -
such as through insurance or through contracting out responsibilities.
We recognise it is not possible to fully transfer risks, rather this approach
helps to reduce our exposure; for example, to the impacts of flooding
through flood insurance.
Terminate: where decisions are taken to stop activities so that we are not
exposed to particular risks. For example, we may decide not to undertake
a capital project if risks cannot be effectively mitigated - for example due
to high costs for energy, materials, and specialist resources related to Net
Zero or climate adaptation.
Actions to mitigate risks are allocated to action owners and progress is
monitored through the risk review process.
Climate-related and nature-related risks impact and
influence our principal risks
Below we outline our principal risks which are impacted or influenced by
climate- and nature-related risks and opportunities, including where our
response to these principal risks needs to consider nature recovery, climate
change, and Net Zero. The climate and nature emergency are amplifying our
principal risks.
Physical Risks Transition Risks
Our
Principal
Risks
Law, Regulation and Finance
Changes in Government policy
Changes in regulatory frameworks and requirements
Non-compliance with laws and regulations
Inability to secure sufficient finance and funding, within our debt covenants, to meet ongoing commitments
Non-compliance or occurrence of an avoidable health and safety incident
Failure to pay all pension obligations as they fall due and increased costs to the Group should the defined benefit
pension scheme deficit increase
Market and Economic conditions
Macroeconomic near-term risks impacting on inflation, interest rates and power prices
Operational performance
Failure to secure, treat and supply clean drinking water
Failure to improve wastewater performance results in environmental commitments not being delivered
Failure to provide excellent service or meet the needs and expectations of our customers and communities
Difficulty in recruiting and retaining staff with the skills required to deliver the Group's strategy
Business Systems and Capital Investment
Insufficient capacity and resilience of the supply chain to deliver the Group’s operational and capital programme
Inadequate technological security results in a breach of the Group’s assets, systems, and data
Failure to receive CMA approval for the acquisition of SES Water
We recognise how climate-related and nature-related risks are impacting our principal risks and/or how our response to these risks needs to
consider climate resilience, nature, and Net Zero
107Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Metrics and targets
Disclose the metrics and targets used to assess and manage relevant climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities where such information is material.
We are continuing to enhance the metrics we use to quantify key climate and nature risks and to monitor progress towards managing risks and achieving our
targeted objectives. We have adopted the TCFD guidance relating to metrics and targets, and our progress is shown in the table below.
We continue to disclose comprehensive data relating to our GHG emissions and energy consumption (SECR report on page 71). We report on all Scope 3
categories which are relevant and material to our business (ESG databook). SASB reporting can be found on page 74.
The Group is committed to improving its sustainability and climate change related disclosures and will continue to enhance over the coming years.
Description of the metric Metric for FY22/23
1
Metric for FY23/24
1
Related Targets
GHG emissions Scope 1, 2, and 3 GHG emissions (in tCO
2
e)
(Market-based).
299,747 368,265 Operational Net Zero by 2030 (South West Water &
Bristol Water), Total Net Zero by 2045 (South West
Water).
We have committed to near-term Science Based
Targets (SBTs). Our targets have been validated and
approved by the Science Based Targets Initiative in
May 2024, and can be found on page 70.
Reduce operational emissions by 70% by 2025 (Scope
2 market-based) (tCO
2
e).
GHG Reduction from the baseline year 2021
(Scope 2 market-based) (tCO
2
e).
65.7% 71.9%
Carbon intensity of our water services
in tonnes of CO
2
e per megalitre of water
supplied to customers.
59.7 SWW
358.5 BRW
38.8 SWW
358.5 BRW
Carbon intensity of our business in tonnes
of CO
2
e per £100k of our revenue based on
Scope 1 and 2 GHG emissions (Market-
based).
7.3 6.0
Climate and/or
nature-related
Transition risks
Selected metrics
for some material
risks
Risk of increased energy costs: Proportion
of our operational expenditure on electricity
(%).
c. 28% c. 21% Generate up to 50% of the energy we use through our
own renewable energy generation by 2030. (SWW).
Transition risks in our supply chain:
proportion of our key and strategic
suppliers who have evidenced they are
working towards a Net Zero target.
21% SWW 51% 100% of our key and strategic suppliers will have
established an ESG policy or equivalent by 2025.
(SWW).
We are considering setting a target to encourage our
suppliers to play their part in delivering Net Zero.
We are ensuring that our Tier 1 suppliers have the
experience required to deliver nature-based solutions.
Risk of customer affordability in achieving
Net Zero and adapting to climate change:
our customer affordability measure.
96.9%
SWW 100%
BRW
98.1% SWW
100% BRW
Zero water poverty by 2030 (SWW & BRW).
Maintain zero customers in water poverty by 2050.
Maintain 100% customer and community satisfaction
with our services. (SWW)
Over 100,000 customers supported via social tariffs
by 2030. (SWW)
We are planning to improve our WaterShare+ scheme
uptake to 1 in every 10 households by 2030. (SWW).
Climate and/or
nature-related
Physical risks
Selected metrics
for some material
risks
6
Proportion (%) of customers currently at
risk of severe restrictions in a 1-in-200-year
drought.
62.7% 7.6% Our 2050 target is to achieve 0% of customers at
risk of severe restrictions in a 1-in-500-year drought,
aligning with Government planning guidance.
Proportion (%) of customers at risk of sewer
flooding in 2050 in a 1-in-50-year storm.
7.11% 9.77% Our long-term target is to reduce this to zero,
assuming funding is provided to achieve this through
the regulatory system.
Number of major sites/assets at high risk of
coastal flooding and erosion.
In progress
3
36 Our long-term target is to achieve 0 of our key sites/
assets at high risk, assuming funding is provided to
achieve this through the regulatory system
Annual average number of spills from each
storm overflow (number per year).
28 43 Reduce spills to an average of 20 per year from each
storm overflow by 2025. The increased rainfall seen
in 2023 and early 2024 has seen the number of spills
increase in the period
Zero harm to rivers and seas by 2030.
Water withdrawal from surface water from
rivers, lakes, and natural ponds (%)
92 SWW
86 BRW
92.4* SWW
- * BRW
25-year plan to improve the environment by removing
harmful abstractions
* subject to assurance, verified calculations will be
available through the ESG databook
Bathing water quality standard compliance
(measured by Environmental Agency based
on harmful bacteria in our seas)
100% SWW 100% SWW
TCFD and TNFD continued
108 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Description of the metric Metric for FY22/23
1
Metric for FY23/24
1
Related Targets
Climate and/or
nature-related
opportunities
Selected metric
for some material
opportunities
Enhancing our energy resilience and
reducing our carbon emissions with
renewable energy: Amount of renewable
energy we’ve generated in 2023 (kWh).
31,084.05 34,480.00 Generate more renewable energy every year to 2030.
Commitment to 50% renewable energy self-
generation by 2025 (SWW).
Proportion of our energy use which came
from energy we generated ourselves (%)
4
6.89% 7.5% Generate up to 50% of the energy we use through our
own renewable energy generation by 2025.
Enhancing our resource efficiency to
reduce GHG emissions and save water:
Leakage (3-year average – Megalitres
PerDay).
133.0 (SWW
&BW)
37.0 (BRW)
107.0
(SWW
&BW)
37.6 (BRW)
Reduce leakage by 2030 against the baseline
2024/2025.
Enhancing our resource efficiency to
reduce GHG emissions and save water:
Per capita consumption (PCC) in litres per
day per person
152.6 (SWW
&BW)
148.7
(BRW)
147.1 (SWW
&BW)
144.7
(BRW)
Commitment to an 8% reduction in per capita
consumption by 2030 from the 2024/2025 baseline.
(SWW and BW).
Reducing our financing costs through
sustainable finance: proportion of new
finance under our sustainable finance
framework during the year.
100% 82% >75% of new finance to be through sustainable
financing framework.
Biodiversity enhancement (ha)
(cumulative)
111,515 126,733 80% of the catchments we work in have been
improved through activities such as peatland
restoration and tree planting.
We’ve set a target to deliver at least 10% biodiversity
net gain.
Trees planted (AMP7 Delivery) 220,187 253,134 Exceeded target to plant 250,000 trees by 2025
Capital
deployment
Selected metrics
for material capital
investments
Investment (£) earmarked for our
renewable energy generation capital
plansto 2030.
£160m £160m Accelerate our generation of up to 50% of the
electricity we use through our own renewable energy
generation by 2025.
Additional investment (£) in enhancing
resilience and environmental performance
announced within the year on top of
our ongoing business plan investment.
(Investment in solar PV by Pennon Group).
£120m £145m Our £1.5 bn 2020-25 environmental investment
programme is our largest to date. This reflects the
delivery of additional and accelerated investments
including Green Recovery, WaterFit, our Save Every
Drop water resilience investment and Ofwat’s recently
announced Accelerated Infrastructure Delivery.
Remuneration Proportion of our management incentive
schemes linked to ESG outcomes, including
climate change
20% 20%
Internal carbon
value
Value of carbon used in business cases and
investment planning for PR24 (£/tCO
2
e)
5
£252/tCO
2
e
Sensitivity
testing:
Low: £126/
tCO
2
e
High: £378/
tCO
2
e
£252/tCO
2
e
Sensitivity
testing:
Low: £126/
tCO
2
e
High: £378/
tCO
2
e
1. Some metrics relate only to South West Water (SWW), Bournemouth Water (BW), or Bristol Water (BRW). In future we will be aiming to report combined metrics for the water
businesses.
2. Indicates the trend from the baseline year.
3. We are currently undertaking analysis to investigate and quantify this risk.
4. Does not include energy used in transport.
5. Investment includes repurposing ex-quarries and mines, introducing desalination units to enhance water capacity, and WaterFit and Green Recovery initiatives.
Our Climate Adaptation Report provided to DEFRA in 2021 it shows intolerable levels of physical climate risks if left unmitigated. In addition, at least 17 of the top
20 physical climate risks (>60 risks identified) would exceed this threshold by 2080 without further adaptation. This signals the need for further investment in
climate resilience in future planning rounds.
Our Net Zero carbon commitments will provide a step change to how we run our business and look to manage the risks of climate change; an update on our
progress during the last year is found on pages 69 and 70. The metrics and targets associated with this help to show the investment in the area and the planned
future investment to meet this goal.
Further detail on our progress with nature and environmental initiatives is provided on page 78.
All projects being put forward to the planning committee have a focus on both their carbon impacts and the ESG impacts which are used to manage the
decision-making process.
109Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Read more Related Policies Due diligence processes Policy outcomes Principal risks Non-financial KPIs
Climate and
environment
Our ambition is to become Net Zero by 2030. To achieve this, our Net Zero
strategy is built around three key pillars – Sustainable Living, championing
renewables, Reversing Carbon Emissions. To deliver on our carbon ambition, and
reduce our climate-related risks, we continue to innovate and look for ways to
decarbonise our operations, working with partners and supply chain.
Approach to ESG
– page 67.
Our Task Force
on Climate
related Financial
Disclosures –
pages 78 to 109.
Net Zero – page
69 and 70
Biodiversity policy.
Water management policy.
Environmental policy.
Governance framework in
place led by the Board and its
Committees.
External assurance.
External ESG benchmarking.
Minimising our impact on the
environment.
Meeting our regulatory
commitments.
Net Zero 2030 ambition.
Failure to secure, treat and supply clean
drinking water.
Failure to improve wastewater performance,
resulting in environmental commitments not
being delivered.
Insufficient capacity and resilience of the
supply chain to support the delivery of the
Group’s operational and capital programmes
in K8.
% energy usage from
renewable energy
generation.
% reduction in GHG
emissions (Scope
2 market-based
emissions only)
Tree planting.
People
Our people are at the heart of our Group. We continue to foster a culture
built on our purpose and one that reflects our values, trusted, responsible,
collaborative, progressive. We operate a safety-first mindset to working
across the business with our HomeSafe health and safety approach which is
embedded in the day to day working culture of our business. We encourage
continuous learning and development, providing opportunities for all
employees. We are building a diverse and inclusive workforce.
How we deliver
section – pages
25 to 31.
Health, safety and security
policy.
Code of Conduct.
Workplace policy.
Diversity, respect and
inclusion policy.
Board diversity policy.
Annual all colleague Great Place
to Work survey.
Health & Safety Steering Group
overseeing targets, performance
monitoring and interventions.
Employee representative
groups, including RISE and
Trade Unions relations.
Change the Race Ratio.
Reduced workplace accidents
and improved employee
wellness.
Board diversity target
achievements.
Sustainability target.
Code of Conduct compliance.
Non-compliance or occurrence of an
avoidable health and safety incident.
Difficulty in recruiting and retaining staff
with the skills required to deliver the Group’s
strategy.
LTI number.
GPTW accreditation.
% REACH recruitment.
% female employees.
5% Club achievement.
Social
matters
We work closely with our customers, communities and partners on the things
that matter most to them and have regular engagement with them.
Supporting our customers is a priority. Not only providing safe, clean drinking
water, but supporting them financially when it matters most. We aim to keep
our bills low and have since 2020 provided financial support totalling over
£100million in turn providing 98% of South West Water and 100% of Bristol
Water customers with independently assessed affordable bills in FY23/24.
Our approach to community relations and investment enables strong and clear
governance, making positive community investments which create value, and
benefits both the community and the business. Our Neighbourhood Fund is
about supporting our local community. We’re funding projects that support the
wellbeing of people, the environment and communities in the South West. Since
its launch, we have given out £100,000 to 56 charities and community groups
helping 22,000 people across the South West. In Bristol, our community lottery
provides the opportunity for charities and community groups to win £500 each
month to fund schemes which benefit the community.
We have also this year become tier one funders of the registered charity, the
Social Mobility Business Partnership which facilitates the provision of over
3,000 days of work experience and lifetime career coaching to individuals
from low income backgrounds across the UK. We are leading on bringing this
experience to students across the South West in Exeter, Plymouth, Bristol,
Truro and StAustell.
How we listen –
page 8.
S172(1) – page
112.
Community relations and
investment policy.
Community engagement plan in
place led by the Regulatory and
Customer teams.
Having a positive impact on
our local communities through
our business activities and
investments.
Foster an environment
that encourages employee
engagement with communities
and provides opportunities for
volunteering and establishing
community partnerships.
Failure to provide excellent service or meet
the needs and expectations of our customers
and communities.
£ community
investment.
C-MeX.
% priority services
register – customer
satisfaction.
Human
rights
We are committed to having open and fair dialogue with all our stakeholders
on human rights issues. We have a zero-tolerance approach to modern slavery.
Our policies help prevent and address any human rights impacts on our
business activities and relationships. We ensure all of our partners and suppliers
comply with our policies, which include our Code of Conduct and Anti-Modern
Slavery and Human Rights Policy. Our Modern Slavery Statement identifies the
activities we conduct annually and our Suppliers Code of Conduct further aligns
our supply chain to the standards we expect of ourselves and others.
Modern Slavery
Statement
– foot of
homepage at
www.pennon-
group.co.uk.
Anti-Modern Slavery and
Human Rights.
Modern Slavery Statement www.
pennon-group.co.uk
An open dialogue with our
stakeholders on human rights
issues.
Non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. % Supplier
engagement with
our Sustainable
Procurement
Framework.
Anti-
corruption
One of our guiding principles is to act fairly and responsibly in everything
that we do. We are committed to promoting and maintain the highest level of
ethical standards in relation to how we do business. We have a zero-tolerance
approach to financial crime and corruption and have effective systems in place
to counter them.
Anyone that works with or for the Group must comply with our new
consolidated anti-financial crime policy and are encouraged to report any
breaches to Group Legal Compliance or through the Pennon whistleblowing
reporting Speak Up portal which is provided by a third party to enable
completely anonymous reporting of concerns.
Code of
Conduct –
page142.
Anti-bribery and
corruption –
page 142.
Whistleblowing Policy.
New consolidated Anti-
Financial Crime Policy
Conflicts of Interest Policy
Gifts and Hospitality Policy.
Regulatory and Compliance
Policy.
Ethics Management Committee.
Speak Up portal.
Gifts and Hospitality and
Conflicts of Interest procedures.
Group-wide ant-financial crime
mandatory training.
Supplier due diligence process.
Seeking to prevent detect
and report financial crime,
including instances of bribery
and corruption.
Maintaining and ethical
approach to business
and adhering to our code
ofconduct.
Non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. Number of cases
reported through
Speak Up portal.
% of suppliers who
support our Code.
ofConduct
Non-financial and sustainability information
statement
110 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Read more Related Policies Due diligence processes Policy outcomes Principal risks Non-financial KPIs
Climate and
environment
Our ambition is to become Net Zero by 2030. To achieve this, our Net Zero
strategy is built around three key pillars – Sustainable Living, championing
renewables, Reversing Carbon Emissions. To deliver on our carbon ambition, and
reduce our climate-related risks, we continue to innovate and look for ways to
decarbonise our operations, working with partners and supply chain.
Approach to ESG
– page 67.
Our Task Force
on Climate
related Financial
Disclosures –
pages 78 to 109.
Net Zero – page
69 and 70
Biodiversity policy.
Water management policy.
Environmental policy.
Governance framework in
place led by the Board and its
Committees.
External assurance.
External ESG benchmarking.
Minimising our impact on the
environment.
Meeting our regulatory
commitments.
Net Zero 2030 ambition.
Failure to secure, treat and supply clean
drinking water.
Failure to improve wastewater performance,
resulting in environmental commitments not
being delivered.
Insufficient capacity and resilience of the
supply chain to support the delivery of the
Group’s operational and capital programmes
in K8.
% energy usage from
renewable energy
generation.
% reduction in GHG
emissions (Scope
2 market-based
emissions only)
Tree planting.
People
Our people are at the heart of our Group. We continue to foster a culture
built on our purpose and one that reflects our values, trusted, responsible,
collaborative, progressive. We operate a safety-first mindset to working
across the business with our HomeSafe health and safety approach which is
embedded in the day to day working culture of our business. We encourage
continuous learning and development, providing opportunities for all
employees. We are building a diverse and inclusive workforce.
How we deliver
section – pages
25 to 31.
Health, safety and security
policy.
Code of Conduct.
Workplace policy.
Diversity, respect and
inclusion policy.
Board diversity policy.
Annual all colleague Great Place
to Work survey.
Health & Safety Steering Group
overseeing targets, performance
monitoring and interventions.
Employee representative
groups, including RISE and
Trade Unions relations.
Change the Race Ratio.
Reduced workplace accidents
and improved employee
wellness.
Board diversity target
achievements.
Sustainability target.
Code of Conduct compliance.
Non-compliance or occurrence of an
avoidable health and safety incident.
Difficulty in recruiting and retaining staff
with the skills required to deliver the Group’s
strategy.
LTI number.
GPTW accreditation.
% REACH recruitment.
% female employees.
5% Club achievement.
Social
matters
We work closely with our customers, communities and partners on the things
that matter most to them and have regular engagement with them.
Supporting our customers is a priority. Not only providing safe, clean drinking
water, but supporting them financially when it matters most. We aim to keep
our bills low and have since 2020 provided financial support totalling over
£100million in turn providing 98% of South West Water and 100% of Bristol
Water customers with independently assessed affordable bills in FY23/24.
Our approach to community relations and investment enables strong and clear
governance, making positive community investments which create value, and
benefits both the community and the business. Our Neighbourhood Fund is
about supporting our local community. We’re funding projects that support the
wellbeing of people, the environment and communities in the South West. Since
its launch, we have given out £100,000 to 56 charities and community groups
helping 22,000 people across the South West. In Bristol, our community lottery
provides the opportunity for charities and community groups to win £500 each
month to fund schemes which benefit the community.
We have also this year become tier one funders of the registered charity, the
Social Mobility Business Partnership which facilitates the provision of over
3,000 days of work experience and lifetime career coaching to individuals
from low income backgrounds across the UK. We are leading on bringing this
experience to students across the South West in Exeter, Plymouth, Bristol,
Truro and StAustell.
How we listen –
page 8.
S172(1) – page
112.
Community relations and
investment policy.
Community engagement plan in
place led by the Regulatory and
Customer teams.
Having a positive impact on
our local communities through
our business activities and
investments.
Foster an environment
that encourages employee
engagement with communities
and provides opportunities for
volunteering and establishing
community partnerships.
Failure to provide excellent service or meet
the needs and expectations of our customers
and communities.
£ community
investment.
C-MeX.
% priority services
register – customer
satisfaction.
Human
rights
We are committed to having open and fair dialogue with all our stakeholders
on human rights issues. We have a zero-tolerance approach to modern slavery.
Our policies help prevent and address any human rights impacts on our
business activities and relationships. We ensure all of our partners and suppliers
comply with our policies, which include our Code of Conduct and Anti-Modern
Slavery and Human Rights Policy. Our Modern Slavery Statement identifies the
activities we conduct annually and our Suppliers Code of Conduct further aligns
our supply chain to the standards we expect of ourselves and others.
Modern Slavery
Statement
– foot of
homepage at
www.pennon-
group.co.uk.
Anti-Modern Slavery and
Human Rights.
Modern Slavery Statement www.
pennon-group.co.uk
An open dialogue with our
stakeholders on human rights
issues.
Non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. % Supplier
engagement with
our Sustainable
Procurement
Framework.
Anti-
corruption
One of our guiding principles is to act fairly and responsibly in everything
that we do. We are committed to promoting and maintain the highest level of
ethical standards in relation to how we do business. We have a zero-tolerance
approach to financial crime and corruption and have effective systems in place
to counter them.
Anyone that works with or for the Group must comply with our new
consolidated anti-financial crime policy and are encouraged to report any
breaches to Group Legal Compliance or through the Pennon whistleblowing
reporting Speak Up portal which is provided by a third party to enable
completely anonymous reporting of concerns.
Code of
Conduct –
page142.
Anti-bribery and
corruption –
page 142.
Whistleblowing Policy.
New consolidated Anti-
Financial Crime Policy
Conflicts of Interest Policy
Gifts and Hospitality Policy.
Regulatory and Compliance
Policy.
Ethics Management Committee.
Speak Up portal.
Gifts and Hospitality and
Conflicts of Interest procedures.
Group-wide ant-financial crime
mandatory training.
Supplier due diligence process.
Seeking to prevent detect
and report financial crime,
including instances of bribery
and corruption.
Maintaining and ethical
approach to business
and adhering to our code
ofconduct.
Non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. Number of cases
reported through
Speak Up portal.
% of suppliers who
support our Code.
ofConduct
The following information and the sections referenced, represent our non-financial and sustainability information statement which is required by section 414CA
and 414CB oftheCompanies Act 2006. The table below outlines our policies under the sections defined under the non-financial and sustainability information
statement, as well as where further information in this report can be found. A full list of the Group’s policies, including our business model on page 22, can be
found online athttps://www.pennon-group.co.uk/about-us/policies.
Approval of the Strategic Report
Our strategic report on pages 1 to 111 has been reviewed and approved
bythe Board.
Andrew Garard
Group General Counsel and Company Secretary
20
th
May 2024
111Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our governance at a glance
Board changes
1
st
September 2023 Neil Cooper stepped down as Senior
Independent Director and, Chair of the Audit Committee,
andwas succeeded by Iain Evans, as the new Senior
Independent Director.
Loraine Woodhouse was appointed Chair of the Audit
Committee with effect from 1
st
September 2023.
27
th
November 2023 Steve Buck was appointed as an
ExecutiveDirector.
31
st
December 2023 Paul Boote stepped down as Group Chief
Financial Officer.
1
st
January 2024 Steve Buck was appointed as Group Chief
Financial Officer.
Read more on Steve’s experience in his biography on page 116.
Compliance with the UK Corporate
Governance Code 2018 andother
requirements
Pennon firmly believes that good corporate governance is essential to
enable us to deliver our purpose for all of our stakeholders and it remains
a top priority for the Board. The Company is committed to the principles of
the2018 UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code), which is published on
the Financial Reporting Council (FRC) website.
For the year ended 31
st
March 2024, the Company complied with all the
provisions of the Code except for:
Provision 19 – The Chair should not remain in post beyond nine years
from the date of their first appointment to the Board. More information
regarding our Chair succession plan can be found on page 130.
In numbers
3
rd
top ten best performer in FTSE 250 Women Leaders
Review, and 4
th
in the utility sector.
1 in 14
number of households in the South West Water region
now shareholders, following the second issuance
ofWaterShare+ in 2022.
Key focus areas for the Board
in2023/24
Customer affordability.
Delivery of capital projects.
PR24 Business Plan.
Culture and Values.
Green recovery investment programmes.
Storm overflows and eliminating pollution.
Water quality and resilience.
Strategic acquisitions of Pennon Power and SES Water.
Seepages 124 to 125 for more information .
1. Board leadership and Company purpose Page
A: Board of Directors 116 to 117
B: Purpose, values, strategy and culture 119
C: Resource and control framework 120
D: Stakeholder engagement 126 to 127
E: Workforce policies and practices 123
2. Division of responsibilities
F: Role of the Chair 121
G: Division of responsibilities 121
H: Role of the Non Executive Directors 121
I: Board policies, processes, information, time and resources 122 to 123
3. Composition, succession and evaluation
J: Appointments to the Board 130
K: Board skills, experience and knowledge 113
L: Board Evaluation 134 to 135
4. Audit, risk and internal control
M: Independence and effectiveness of internal and external auditors 139 to 140
N: Fair, balanced and understandable assessment 141
O: Risk and internal control 142 to 143
5. Remuneration
P: Alignment to purpose, values and long term success 151
Q: Remuneration policy 152
R: Independent judgement and discretion 150
Highlights
112 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Meeting attendance during the year and Board skills matrix
Position Chair Non-Executive Directors Executive Directors
Member Gill
Rider
Iain
Evans
Claire
Ighodaro
Jon
Butterworth
Loraine
Woodhouse
Dorothy
Burwell
Neil
Cooper
1
Susan
Davy
Steve
Buck
2
Paul
Boote
3
Attendance 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 2/6 6/6 2/6 4/6
Skills
Independence
Water sector
Regulation
Finance and Accounting
Strategy
Transformation
Health, safety and
wellbeing
ESG incl. climate change
Enterprise Risk
Management
Data, technology and
digital
People
Governance
Remuneration
1. Resigned 1
st
September 2023.
2. Appointed 27
th
November 2023.
3. Resigned 31
st
December 2023.
Board meetings
There were six scheduled Board meetings during the year.
2023 2024
May July September November January March
Board and
Committee meetings
AGM, Board and
Committee meetings
Board and
committee meetings
plus strategy day
Board and
Committee meetings
Board meeting Board and
Committee meetings
plus strategy day
Board gender diversity Board ethnic diversity Board tenure Board independence
Male: 37%
Female:
63%
Ethnic minority: 22%
White:
78%
0 - 3 years: 3 directors
3 - 5 years: 3 directors
5+ years:
2 directors
Independent: 6
Non-independent:
2
As of 31
st
March 2024
113Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our Chair’s introduction to governance
Gill Rider
Group Chair
The Board reaffirms its commitment
to maintaining effective corporate
governance and integrity that enable us
to deliver for the long-term benefit of all
our stakeholders.
Dear Shareholder
I am very pleased to introduce, on behalf of the Board, the Pennon Group
Corporate Governance Report for 2024, which sets out our governance
practices and processes, and how we applied the principles of the UK
Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the Code) throughout the year.
Thereport covers our key focus areas and achievements during 2023/24
andexplains how the Board continues to operate effectively and efficiently
and tosupport the Group’s strategy.
Review of the year
We continue to operate to the highest standards of corporate governance.
Strong governance remains central to the successful management of the
Group, providing the framework we need to deliver our strategy, fulfil our
purpose, create value for all our stakeholders and continuously develop
ourbusiness.
The table on page 112 will help you to navigate our reporting and evaluate
our performance against the Principles of the Code. As we explain below, we
also have processes and procedures in place to safeguard the independence
of decision-making by the Board of South West Water.
Throughout 2023/24 the Board remained focussed on achieving our
strategic priorities and in January 2024 the Board were delighted to
announce the purchase of Sumisho Osaka Gas Water UK Limited, the holding
company of Sutton and East Surrey Water plc (SES Water). SES Water is
a well-run, established business with a long heritage in the region, which
Pennon recognises as key to delivering for our customers and communities.
In addition to the above, in October 2023, the Board approved the Group’s
PR24 plans to double its investment to £2.8 billion from 2025-30 across
four key areas - water quality and resilience; tackling storm overflows and
pollutions; delivering for customers and addressing affordability; reaching
netzero and enhancing environmental gains. More information on the
Board’s activities can be found on pages 124 to 125 and information on our
PR24 framework can be found on pages 19 to 20.
Changes to the Board
There were a number of changes to the Board during the year. As previously
announced, Neil Cooper stepped down from the Board in September 2023
asSenior Independent Director and we were very pleased to appoint Iain
Evans as his successor. Iain has served on the Board since 2018. He brings
awealth of experience in the water business and is well equipped for this
new role. On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank Neil for his wise
counsel, experience and all his work over the years and we wish him all the
best for the future.
Following Neil’s departure, a review of the composition of each Board
Committee was conducted and we were pleased to appoint Loraine
Woodhouse as Chair of the Audit Committee in September 2023. Further
details can be found on page 136.
In December 2023, Paul Boote stepped down from his role as Group Chief
Financial Officer as part of a planned relocation away from the South West.
Iwould like to thank Paul for his contribution and support to Pennon over
thepast 13 years and we wish him and his family the best for their future.
We were delighted to welcome Steve Buck who was appointed to the Board
in November 2023 and succeeded to the role of Group Chief Financial Officer
on 1
st
January 2024. Steve brings to the Board significant water sector
expertise, alongside broad regulated utilities sector knowledge and listed
experience to the Board. Steve’s and Iain’s biographies can be found on
pages 116 to 117.
114 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Promoting diversity
Diversity and inclusion (D&I) continued to be a top priority for the Board and
the Group during the year. Our Board composition is substantially ahead of
the diversity targets suggested by the Parker Review and the FTSE Women
Leaders Review and Pennon is one of the rare FTSE-listed entities where
women on the Board outnumber their male counterparts. During the year,
wewere incredibly proud to achieve third position for best performers
inWomen on Boards within the entire FTSE 250.
Our commitment to diversity is also reflected right across the business;
our widespread commitment and focused drive to recruit talent from all
backgrounds has the heartfelt support of our strong and diverse leadership
team. More information on our D&I initiatives can be found on page 28 and
inthe Nomination Report on page 132.
Engaging with our stakeholders
Engaging with all our stakeholders has never been more essential,
particularly in view of the national and global issues we are facing.
All companies in the water sector face much scrutiny around their
environmental impacts, so it is vital that we listen to and respond to our
stakeholders’ views. We make sure to carefully consider all decisions and
their likely impacts on our stakeholders.
Engagement with customers is of particular interest to the Board and as
part of the PR24 process, we were delighted that Lord Matthew Taylor,
Chair of the WaterShare+ panel, and Peaches Golding OBE, Chair of the
Bristol Water Challenge Group, regularly attended Board meetings to provide
feedback from their discussions with our customers as part of their work with
the WaterShare+ panel. Further information on the important work of the
WaterShare+ panel can be found on page 8.
We continue to foster an open and transparent feedback culture within the
business. All colleagues have the opportunity to share feedback with the
Executive team and Board in several ways, including the Big Chat initiative,
our Great Place to Work survey and our Employee Forum RISE.
You can read more on how we engage with our stakeholders on pages
126to127 and in our Section 172(1) statement on page 128.
Culture
As a Board we pay particular attention to our Group’s culture, ensuring
it is fully aligned with our shared purpose, values, and strategy. We
continue to monitor these essential properties and receive regular reports
from management on the work being done to ensure their continuous
improvement. During the year, the Board were delighted to see the
development of the Group’s new values which reflect the views of our wider
stakeholders and culture. More information on how the new values will be
embedded across the Group can be found on page 25.
Role of the Board and its effectiveness
It is my view that the Board continues to be highly effective with a deep
understanding of the opportunities available to us and the threats facing
the business. The results of this year’s Board and Committee performance
reviews support this view; see page 135 for further detail. We keep all
identified threats to the future success of the business under constant
review. Please see our risk report on pages 55 to 64 for a description of the
risks we identify and review.
Board independence – Pennon and South West Water
In accordance with Ofwat’s principles on board leadership, transparency
andgovernance, the Group maintains separate boards for Pennon and
SouthWest Water.
Our system of governance remains appropriate and effective, while
continuing to support the delivery of our strategy.
Our Board and Committee framework also allows us to remain efficient in
our decision-making processes. The South West Water Board convenes on
the same day as each Pennon Board meeting and considers all key relevant
issues. This arrangement allows full operational oversight and governance
by the boards over the Group’s water interests, while the Pennon Board
continues to focus on strategic forward-looking matters for the Group
as a whole.
Looking ahead
As part of the Board’s focus for 2024/25, we will, once the Competition
and Markets Authority process has completed, look to integrate SES
Water into the Group. We will continue our focus on delivering against our
environmental commitments, and ensuring we are well placed to meet the
vital ambitions of the PR24 framework. And, as we look to our governance
arrangements, we will continue with our ongoing and orderly succession
planning strategy. There is much to do, and we have the talent and
governance in place to achieve our ambitions.
As I reported in last year’s Annual Report, I will be standing down as Chair,
and from the Board, at the conclusion of the AGM on 24
th
July 2024. We are
conducting a formal, rigorous and independently conducted process, in the
line with the Code, I will be announcing the new Chair of the Group shortly.
I would like to take this opportunity to thank my Board colleagues, the
management team and our wider workforce for their outstanding work over
the year just gone.
The Board will continue to focus on delivering against our strategic priorities
in the year ahead, ensuring the wellbeing of our workforce as we build on the
work of the last year in creating a successful and sustainable business.
Gill Rider
Group Chair
20
th
May 2024
115Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Our Board
1. Gill Rider CB, Ph.D, CCIPD
Group Chair
Date of Appointment to the Board
Gill was appointed to the Board as Non-Executive Director on 1
st
September
2012, and became Group Chair on 31
st
July 2020.
Current external appointments
President of the Marine Biological Association.
Skills and experience
Gill has a wealth of experience in leadership and governance across a broad
range of sectors, including professional services, education, not for profit and
government. Formerly, Gill was Head of the Civil Service Capability Group at
the Cabinet Office, reporting to the Cabinet Secretary. Prior to that, Gill held
a number of senior positions with Accenture LLP, culminating in the post of
chief leadership officer for the global firm. Gill is president of the Chartered
Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and chair of the Council of
the University of Southampton. Up until May 2024 she was non-executive
director and chair of the remuneration committee of Intertek Group plc.
2. Susan Davy BSc Hons, ACA
Group Chief Executive Officer
Date of Appointment to the Board
Susan was appointed to the Board as Group Chief Financial Officer in
February 2015, and was appointed as Group Chief Executive Officer on 31
st
July 2020.
Current external appointments
Non-Executive Director and Audit Chair of Restore Plc, a Director of the
Institute of Water, a member of the Water UK Board, member of the Energy
and Utilities Skills Partnership Council, and was previously a member of the
A4S (Accounting for Sustainability) CFO leadership network.
Skills and experience
Susan’s knowledge of the industry, coupled with her financial and regulatory
expertise, has underpinned the development of Pennon’s growth strategy to
become a leader within the water industry. Under Susan’s leadership, the Group
has continued to expand, and become a stronger and more resilient business.
In her 25+ years’ experience in the utility sector, Susan has also held several
other senior roles in the water sector, including at Yorkshire Water, giving her
the knowledge to provide stability and thoughtful leadership to the Group.
3. Steve Buck
Group Chief Financial Officer
Date of Appointment to the Board
Steve was appointed to the Board on 27
th
November 2023 and was appointed
Group Chief Financial Officer on 1
st
January 2024.
Current external appointments
None
Skills and experience
Steve is a Chartered Management Accountant and has spent almost
two decades working across the globe in different roles within the utility
sector – including his most recent role as Chief Financial Officer for Anglian
Water Group, where he worked for four years. Steve has led finance and
transformation functions, focusing on delivering for both shareholders
andmillions of customers in complex and challenging environments.
4. Iain Evans CBE
Senior Independent Director
Date of Appointment to the Board
Iain was appointed to the Board as Independent Non-Executive Director on 1
st
September 2018, and became Senior Independent Director on 1
st
September 2023.
Current external appointments
Iain is a non-executive director of Bologna Topco Limited and HSM Advisory
Limited and continues to act as an independent corporate strategy consultant.
Skills and experience
Iain has 40 years of global experience in advising companies and
governments on issues of complex corporate strategy. In 1983, he co-
founded L.E.K. Consulting in London and built it into one of the world’s
largest and most respected corporate strategy consulting firms, with a global
footprint and active in a wide range of industries. Iain was appointed as a
non-executive director of Welsh Water plc in 1989, and served on the board
for nearly ten years, including five years as chair.
5. Claire Ighodaro CBE
Independent Non-Executive Director
Date of Appointment to the Board
Claire was appointed to the Board as Independent Non-Executive Director
on 1
st
September 2019.
Current external appointments
Chair of the audit board of KPMG LLP.
Skills and experience
Claire has held a number of senior roles and directorships with UK and
international organisations and has extensive board experience, serving
on their audit, remuneration and governance committees. She is a past
president of the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA)
and was the first female to lead this organisation. Claire spent most of her
executive career with BT plc. She has also held non-executive directorships
across a diverse portfolio, including Governance Committee chair of Bank
of America’s Merrill Lynch International, Audit Committee chair of Lloyd’s
of London, Flood Re, The Open University and various UK public bodies,
including UK Trade & Investment and the British Council. Claire was also
non-executive chair of the Board and Governance Committee at Axa XL-UK
Entities until December 2022.
The Board
Working responsibly together
1 2 3
4 5
116 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
6. Jon Butterworth
Independent Non-Executive Director
Date of Appointment to the Board
Jon was appointed to the Board as Independent Non-Executive Director
on8
th
July 2020.
Current external appointments
Chief executive officer at National Gas. Jon is also president of the Pipeline
Industries Guild and a director of E.Tapp & Co Limited, Shopfittings
Manchester Limited and TMA Property Limited.
Skills and experience
Jon has a distinguished track record and an immense depth of experience and
knowledge within the utility sector, having begun his career over 40 years ago
asan apprentice at British Gas. Jon was previously managing director of National
Grid Ventures, driving growth across a range of commercial ventures outside
the regulated energy sector in the UK and the US. He has also been managing
director of Northwest Gas, global Environment and Sustainability manager of
Transco, National Operations director of National Grid, Group Safety, Resilience and
Environmental director of National Grid plc and formerly chief executive officer of
National Grid Ventures. Jon is an ex-chair of the CORGI board, an ex-ambassador of
the HM Young Offenders Programme and trustee of the National Gas Museum Trust.
7. Loraine Woodhouse
Independent Non-Executive Director
Date of Appointment to the Board
Loraine was appointed to the Board as Independent Non-Executive Director
on 1
st
December 2022.
Current external appointments
Non-executive director of The Restaurant Group plc and a member of their
Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committees; non-executive director
andchair of the Audit Committee at British Land plc.
Skills and experience
Loraine is an experienced finance executive, with her experience focused in the
retail and consumer sector, and more recently in real estate and infrastructure
through her roles with Intu Properties plc and British Land Company plc.
Loraine was the chief financial officer of Halfords Group plc until June 2022,
before which she spent five years in executive and senior finance roles within
the John Lewis Partnership, including Waitrose. Prior to that, Loraine was chief
financial officer of Hobbs, finance director of Capital Shopping Centres Limited
(subsequently Intu Properties plc) and finance director of Costa Coffee Limited.
8. Dorothy Burwell
Independent Non-Executive Director
Date of Appointment to the Board
Dorothy was appointed to the Board as Independent Non-Executive Director
on 1
st
December 2022.
Current external appointments
Partner and Global Partnership Board member of FGS Global and non-
executive director at Post Holdings Inc.
Skills and experience
Dorothy has over 20 years’ experience in banking and communications,
specialising in natural resources and advising clients around issues of
sustainability, strategy, and corporate communications. She is well known for
driving substantive diversity and inclusion agendas. Between 2002 and 2006,
Dorothy held analyst and senior roles at Goldman Sachs, in the investment
banking division, in both London and New York, as well as in the firmwide
Strategy Group, where she focused on proprietary mergers and acquisitions
andnew business development. Dorothy graduated from the Florida Agricultural
and Mechanical University, USA with a Bachelor and Master of Business
Administration, Finance and Management.
9. Andrew Garard
Group General Counsel and Company Secretary
Date of Appointment to the Board
Andrew was appointed to the Board as Group General Counsel and Company
Secretary on 1
st
December 2022.
Current external appointments
Non-executive director at Zinc Media Group plc, where he is chair of the
Remuneration Committee.
Skills and experience
Andrew is a very experienced General Counsel having joined from Meggitt
plc, where he was Group General Counsel and Director of Corporate Affairs,
and a member of the group executive responsible for legal, commercial,
trade compliance, government relations, ethics and contract management.
Previously, he was Group General Counsel and Company Secretary at ITV
plc where he was a member of the executive board and led a global team
responsible for legal and business affairs, secretariat, compliance, insurance,
health & safety, rights management and corporate responsibility. Prior to this,
he was Group General Counsel and Company Secretary at Cable & Wireless
plc and Global Head of Legal at Reuters Group plc.
6 87
9
Committee key for the Board:
Audit Committee Nomination Committee
ESG Committee Remuneration Committee
Health & Safety Committee Committee chair
Board members who stepped down in 2023/24
Paul Boote – stepped down from the Board on 31
st
December 2023
Neil Cooper – stepped down from the Board on 1
st
September 2023
117Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Pennon Executive Board
1. Susan Davy
Group Chief Executive Officer
See biography on page 116
2. Steve Buck
Group Chief Financial Officer
See biography on page 116
3. Andrew Garard
Group General Counsel and Company Secretary
See biography on page 117
4. Adele Barker
Group Chief People Officer
Adele joined the Group in 2017 and was appointed as Group Chief People
Officer in 2020. Adele’s role is to lead and execute the Group’s people
strategy, Health and Safety strategy and lead on Corporate Affairs.
Her background includes senior executive roles and HR leadership
across Utilities, banking and retail, including British Gas, Orange and
Marks&Spencer.
1 2
4 5
6
7 8
3
5. John Halsall
Chief Operating Officer of South West Water
John joined the Group in February 2023. John’s role within SWW is
tolead and deliver best in class operational performance across water
andwastewater services.
His background includes senior executive roles and operational delivery
inRail and Utilities, including Network Rail and Thames Water.
6. Laura Flowerdew
Chief Customer and Digital Officer of South West Water
Laura joined the Group in September 2022, post the acquisition of Bristol
Water. Laura’s role within SWW is to lead on the customer experience
delivery and IT services for the Group.
Her background includes senior finance executive roles across Utilities,
including Bristol Water and Bristol Energy.
7. Richard Price
Chief Engineering Director of South West Water
Richard joined the Group in September 2022, post the acquisition of Bristol
Water. Richard’s role within SWW is to lead safe, efficient and innovative
engineering and construction.
His background includes senior executive roles across the water industry,
including Bristol Water and Thames Water.
8. David Harris
Drought and Resilience Director of South West Water
David joined the Group in November 2022. David’s role within SWW is to lead
on drought planning activities as well as longer-term resilience.
His background includes senior executive roles in regulated water and
infrastructure businesses in Australia, including Water NSW.
118 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Monitoring purpose and culture
Purpose, values and culture
As a purpose-led business, committed to the effective stewardship of the
environment, we are shaped by our values and culture. We know that it’s not
only what we do, but how we do it that is really important for our customers,
colleagues, communities and the environment - that’s why we’re focused on
living our values, every day.
During the year, we launched a new set of values which properly reflect who
the Group is today and represent our people at their best. The new values
were developed after intensive involvement and listening sessions with the
Pennon Executive Board, the larger leadership group, colleague organisations
such as the employee forum, and comprehensive colleague listening groups.
To ensure a successful launch and embedding of the new values, as well
as to accelerate our cultural transformation, the strategy includes the
development of a behavioural framework and training in workshop format
for leaders and as e-learning for all colleagues. More information on how the
values will be immersed in the organisation can be found on page 25.
For 2024, the Reward Framework was refreshed, reflecting changes to the
Group composition, our commitment to supporting our colleagues’ wellbeing
and wider societal change.
Our purpose:
Bringing water to life – supporting
the lives of people and the places
they love for generations to come.
Our values:
How the Board monitors culture
The Board plays a vital role in monitoring and assessing the culture of the Group and its alignment with the Company’s purpose, values and strategy.
During the year, the Board considered a number of areas that helped them to assess the development of the Group’s culture.
Area assessed How the Board monitors the culture
Employee
engagement
Great Place to Work survey - The Board reviews the results and feedback from the periodic employee engagement survey and monitors
how the areas of employees’ focus are being addressed.
RISE panel - Through the feedback and reports from the biannual meeting with the CEO and the people panel, RISE, the Board monitors
wellbeing and topics that are of importance to employees.
Big Chat - The Executive team engages with all employees on all business topics and ensures that their views and opinions are shared with the Board.
Workforce policies
and practices
The Board formally reviews the Group’s workforce policies and practices to ensure these remain consistent with the Company’s
Purpose and Values and support the Group’s long-term sustainable success.
Gender and ethnicity pay gap - The Board monitors the culture on gender and ethnicity pay through review, assessment, and approval
of the Gender and ethnicity pay gap report.
Diversity and inclusion - The Nomination Committee monitors diversity and inclusion through regular updates and the Board fosters the
Group ‘s culture on diversity and inclusion through the review and approval of the Group Diversity, Respect and Inclusion policy.
General pay conditions - The Board ensures that reward and pay arrangements support a culture that is transparent, fair, and
consistent to ensure that employees’ trust is maintained and that talent is attracted and retained.
Whistleblowing Speak Up - Employees raise concerns anonymously without fear of reprisal. Any significant concerns, following formal investigation, are
shared with the Audit Committee through the Ethics Management Committee and ultimately, shared with the Board.
Health & Safety HomeSafe - This is monitored through regular updates on safety initiatives adopted for the achievement of the Group’s 2025 strategic
plan to be health and safety leaders in the water sector.
Lost time injuries - Further updates on efforts to reduce injuries of our staff across all sites are assessed at the Health and Safety
Committee and a 46% reduction in actual lost time injuries (employees and agency staff) was recorded in 2023/2024 compared to the
previous year.
Remuneration The Remuneration Committee is regularly provided with feedback from shareholder consultations and customer engagement which
helps the Committee and the Board to monitor the culture on wider workforce pay, and executive and CEO remuneration.
The Committee reviews and approves the wider workforce Group Reward Framework and relevant policies, and ensures that incentives
and rewards align with culture.
CEO pay ratio - The Board ensures that the CEO pay ratio is fair, balancing stakeholder expectations while rewarding leadership success.
Be the
119Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Board leadership and Company purpose
Governance structure and framework
Board Committees
The terms of reference for each Committee are agreed by Board and can be found at https://www.pennon-group.co.uk/about-us/board-committees.
Group Chief Executive Officer and Pennon Executive Board (“PEX”)
Responsible for defining and driving the business priorities that will achieve delivery of the Group’s strategy and ensuring, to the extent of the authority
delegated by the Board, the proper and prudent management of Group resources to create and maximise shareholder value while protecting the interests
of the wider stakeholder group. Chaired by the Group Chief Executive Officer, the Pennon Executive Board meets regularly to receive reports from the
management committees and to review and refine recommendations to be presented to the Board.
Disclosure Committee
Draws up and maintains procedures, systems and controls for the
identification, treatment and disclosure of inside information and for
complying with other disclosure obligations falling on the Group.
Monitors compliance with the disclosure procedures and keeps the
adequacy of those procedures under review.
Ethics Management Committee
Oversees the creation, maintenance and execution of the Group’s
approach to anti-bribery, modern slavery, whistleblowing and grievances.
Audit Committee
Ensures the quality
and integrity of the
Group’s financial
reporting, assesses
the application of
accounting policies
given underlying
standards, probes and
tests the accounting
judgements made in
preparing financial
reporting and
evaluates whether
the presentation of
the Group’s activities
is fair, balanced and
understandable.
Reviews and
challenges the
ongoing effectiveness
of the internal control
environment and the
scope and adequacy
of risk management
processes across the
Group.
Audit Committee
Report pages 136
to 143
ESG Committee
Ensures robust
scrutiny of
key aspects of
environmental,
social and
governance (ESG)
performance and
oversees Pennon’s
performance against
its ESG strategy
and strategic
sustainability
objectives.
ESG Committee
Report pages 144
to 145
Nomination
Committee
Regularly reviews
the structure, size
and composition
(including the
skills, knowledge,
independence,
diversity and
experience required)
of the Board,
comparing to its
current position
and the skills and
expertise needed
inthe future.
Nomination
Committee Report
pages 131 to 135
Health and Safety
Committee
Provides a ‘review and
challenge’ function
to support the Board
and the Executive
on all matters
connected to health
and safety including
the deployment of
the health and safety
strategy, resilience
and process safety.
Health and Safety
Committee Report
pages 146 to 147
Remuneration
Committee
Ensures remuneration
is aligned with the
Group’s strategy and
reflects the values of
the Group.
Advises the Board
on the framework
of executive
remuneration for the
Group and for the
wider workforce.
Remuneration
Committee Report
pages 148 to 170
PR24 Committee
Plans, prepares
for, oversees, and
drives the PR24
Business Plan, sets
and approves the
strategy for PR24,
and appoints and
oversees relevant
executive committees
and activities to
ensure the delivery of
the plan in line with
the overall Group
strategy.
Further information
on the PR24 Business
Plan can be found
on pages 19 to 20
and at business-
plan-2025-30.pdf
(southwestwater.
co.uk).
Pennon Group plc – Board Of Directors
The role of the Board is to promote the long-term success of the Company, generating value for its shareholders, customers, employees and the communities
which it serves, by providing effective leadership and direction to the business as a whole.
The Board is responsible for setting the Group’s purpose, values and strategy and overseeing the Group’s operations and performance. The Board makes
decisions in relation to the Group’s business in accordance with its schedule of matters reserved to the Board, which can be found here: www.pennon-group.
co.uk/about-us/governance-and-remuneration
120 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Division of responsibilities
Group Chair: Gill Rider
Leading the Board and promoting a strong culture of openness
and debate to facilitate constructive Board relations and effective
contribution from all Non-Executive Directors.
Promoting the highest standards of integrity and probity and
ensuring the Board holds itself to standards of good and effective
governance.
Managing Board composition, performance, and succession
planning, ensuring the Board continues to have the skill set and
training it requires.
Setting the agenda and ensuring the timely dissemination
ofinformation to the Board to ensure all relevant information
is provided in a timely manner before constructive discussion
anddecision making.
Representing the high standards and values of the Group
andensuring the views of all stakeholders are understood
andconsidered.
Facilitating an open relationship with the Chief Executive Officer
byproviding advice, support, and guidance.
Non-Executive Directors: Claire Ighodaro, Dorothy Burwell,
Jon Butterworth, Loraine Woodhouse
Critically reviewing the strategies, operational performance and
financial reporting proposed for the Group.
Evaluating proposals from management and constructively
challenging its recommendations.
Contributing to corporate accountability and good governance
through being active members of the Committees of the Board.
Playing a key role in succession planning of the Board and the
annual Board and Committee evaluations.
Group Chief Executive Officer: Susan Davy
Managing the Group and providing executive leadership.
Developing, proposing and implementing the Group strategy
asagreed by the Board and in line with the strategic framework.
Leading the operation of the Group in accordance with the
decisions of the Board.
Coordinating with the Chair on important and strategic issues of the
group and providing input to the Board’s agenda.
Contributing to succession planning and implementing the
organisational structure.
Leading on acquisitions, disposals, and business development.
Developing and managing relations with all stakeholders.
Group General Counsel and Company Secretary: Andrew
Garard:
Supports the Board in ensuring all policies, processes, information,
and resources are in order to ensure the Board can operate
effectively and efficiently.
Advises and keeps the Board updated on any changes to Listing
and Transparency Rules and best corporate governance practices.
Facilitates a comprehensive induction for newly appointed directors
that is tailored to the Group’s industry and strategy.
Co-ordinates the annual Board and Committee evaluations in
conjunction with the Chair.
Provides advice and services to all Directors, as needed.
Senior Independent Director: Iain Evans
Assisting the Chair with shareholder communications and being an
additional point of contact for shareholders.
Being available to other Non-Executive Directors if they have
concerns that are not satisfactorily resolved by the Chair.
Ensuring an annual performance evaluation of the Chair, with the
support of the other Non-Executive Directors, and ensuring effective
succession planning for the Board.
Group Chief Financial Officer: Steve Buck
Managing the Group’s financial affairs and supporting the Group
Chief Executive in providing executive leadership and implementing
the Group strategy.
Reporting accurate and detailed financial information to the Board
on performance and developments across the business.
Managing and balancing relationships with areas of the Group,
such as investor relations, finance and treasury, as well as external
stakeholders, such as investors, customers and Pension Trustees.
There is a clear separation of responsibilities between the Chair and the Chief
Executive Officer, divided between managing the Board and the business, while
maintaining a close working relationship.
All Directors are equally accountable for the proper stewardship of the Group’s affairs and have specific roles, which include those set out below:
121Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
An effective Board
How the Board operates
The Pennon Board, in discharging its duties, has a clear strategy for growth
and ensures that its aims and objectives align with the Company’s purpose
and values which have been carefully considered. The Board maintains the
highest standards of governance alongside taking decisions to ensure the
long-term sustainability of the Company.
Thanks to the diverse skillset, independence of thinking and experience
ofthe directors, decisions reached by the Board are fair, focussed and
balanced and they demonstrate that constructive debate has occurred.
Allpossible outcomes for the mutual benefit of our shareholders, customers,
employees, and the communities we serve are at the heart of the Board
decision making process.
The governance framework for the Board is clearly documented
in the Pennon Group plc Articles of Association, Division of
Responsibilities, Schedule of Matters Reserved to the Board and
Terms of Reference for each Committee, which are all available
on our website.
The culture of the Board is one of openness and constructive dialogue with
the senior management team. Regular and effective flow of information
between the non-executive directors and senior management, both in
andout of the Boardroom, ensures that there is good understanding of the
Group’s business. Further information on the effectiveness of the Board is
detailed in the 2024 Board performance review on page 135. As detailed
on page 121, there is a clear division of responsibilities between the roles of
the Chair and Group Chief Executive Officer; however, to ensure that their
responsibilities are discharged effectively, there is consistent communication
on all areas of the business between them.
The Board held six scheduled meetings during the year. Directors’
attendance at scheduled Board meetings held during the year is set out
on page 113. Additional unscheduled Board meetings were held when
circumstances required the Board to meet at short notice. The Board
alsoapproved a number of matters during the year by written resolution.
Agendas for each scheduled Board and Committee meeting are prepared in
advance and are aligned with the annual Board and Committee programmes.
For each scheduled Board meeting there are a number of standing items
such as the monthly performance reports from the Group Chief Executive
Officer and Group Chief Financial Officer, operational reports, deep dives, and
legal and governance updates. All matters are given due consideration by the
Board and are reviewed at the appropriate point in the regulatory and financial
cycles. Flexibility is retained in the programmes to include additional items
requested by the Board, Committees, or senior management. The key activities
of the Board can be found on pages 124 to 125 and the key activities of the
Committees during the year can be found in the Committee Reports.
Directors are provided with papers at least five business days in advance
of each Board or Committee meeting and meeting packs are provided
onasecure Board portal.
The Group Chair has calls with each of the Non-Executive Directors in
advance of each scheduled Board meeting to discuss the papers and the
business of the meeting. If a Director is unable to attend a meeting because
of exceptional circumstances, they will continue to receive all the material for
the meeting and have an opportunity to have a briefing discussion with the
Chair in advance. Feedback is provided to the Directors unable to attend on
the decisions taken at the meeting.
Non-Executive Directors communicate directly with senior management
between Board and Committee meetings, where required. Members of the
Pennon Executive Board also present at the annual strategy Board meeting
and at other times during the year on their areas of responsibility, along
withmembers of their teams.
During the year, the Chair had weekly catch-ups with the Group Chief
Executive Officer and regular catchups with the Group General Counsel,
andCompany Secretary and Group Chief Financial Officer.
Meetings of the Non-Executive Directors, without the presence of the
Executive Directors, are scheduled in the Board’s annual programme. During
the year, Non-Executive Directors met without the Executive Directors after
every Board meeting. These meetings provide the Non-Executive Directors
with the opportunity to share experiences and discuss wider business topics,
fostering debate in Board and Committee meetings and strengthening
working relationships.
Schedule of Matters Reserved to the Board
The Board maintains oversight of the areas material to the delivery of the
Group’s strategy and purpose, and acts as the main governing body for
the purpose of oversight of the Group, with additional supervision of the
regulated business of South West Water provided by South West Water’s
Board. The Board undertakes an annual review of the Matters Reserved to
the Board, with the latest review taking place in November 2023.
Committees
In accordance with the Code, the Board delegates certain responsibilities
to its core committees, which monitor various subject matters in depth and
gain greater understanding in detail. The Committees’ responsibilities and
mode of operation are guided by their respective terms of reference which
have been agreed by the Board and are summarised on the Committee
Report pages. In addition, each committee considers its calendar of business
at every meeting to ensure responsibilities continually remain clear. Each
Committee Chair provides an update on matters discussed at each Board
meeting, reporting on decisions taken, and where appropriate provides a
recommendation to the Board on matters requiring its approval. The reports
from each committee of the Board can be found on pages 131 to 170.
During the year, the PR24 Committee, chaired by Iain Evans, held six
scheduled meetings. The Committee set and recommended the strategy
for PR24 to the Board and oversaw the relevant executive committees
and activities to ensure the delivery of the PR24 Business Plan in line with
the overall Company strategy. The Committee last met in October 2023,
following the submission of the PR24 Business Plan. Following regular
updates to Board, further meetings are due to commence when Ofwat issues
the PR24 Draft Determinations in June 2024. Further meetings will be set up
in 2024 when Ofwat issues the PR24 Draft Determinations. More information
can be found on page 19.
Strategy
The Board recognises its responsibility to create and oversee the framework
for the delivery of the Group’s strategic model, ensuring that the strategy
and purpose continually deliver for our stakeholders. As well as key strategic
items on the Board agenda at every meeting, the Board held two full strategy
days with the executive team during the year, in September 2023 and March
2024, to consider short, medium, and long term financial and operational
strategic goals for the Group and the operational readiness needed to
achieve key strategic outcomes.
At the meetings the Board received presentations from senior management
on the strategies for the business, particularly on the financial outlook
and opportunities for growth. The Board received a presentation on our
renewables development, and held a deep dive with senior managers
on insights into our customer priorities and operational progress on our
wastewater network through the lens of WaterFit Live.
Pennon Executive Board
The Pennon Executive Board meet on a monthly basis and are responsible
for executing the Group’s strategy and the day-to-day management of the
Group’s operations. The Pennon Executive Board is led by the Group Chief
Executive Officer. The biographies of the Executive Board can be foundon
page 118.
122 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
There is a framework of delegated authority approved by the Board,
within which individual responsibilities of senior management of the
Groupcompanies are identified and can be monitored.
Workforce engagement
The Board has decided, at this time, not to adopt any of the three specific
employee engagement methods referred to in the UK Code. Instead, our
chosen method is to adopt a more enhanced approach which includes the
conduct of a periodic ‘Great Place to Work’ engagement survey (including
related management feedback sessions) and continuous employee feedback
through our own in-house forums. These comprise our RISE people panel,
a forum for employee engagement, and the ‘Big Chat’, hosted on a monthly
basis by the Executive team. These forums not only give employees access
to important up-to-date information on key business events; they also
provide the opportunity to hear from the Directors, give feedback and ask
questions. The Board believes Pennon’s chosen approach is an effective
way of communicating with employees and gathering essential feedback
from across the business. This empowers the Board to consider the interests
ofall employees in its discussions and decision-making. You can find further
information on employee engagement on pages 25 to 31.
Stakeholder engagement
In delivering our strategy and ensuring the sustainable, long-term success
of the Company, the Board places utmost importance on the interests of
our stakeholders in its decision-making process. Further details on how the
Board has fulfilled its duties under section 172(1) of the Companies Act 2006,
to consider all stakeholders in its discussions and decisions and that each
decision reached is in line with the company’s purpose and culture, is set
out on pages 128 to 129; and an explanation as to how we engaged with our
different stakeholders during the year can be found on pages 8 to 12.
Workforce policies and Practices
Conflicts of interest
In accordance with the Directors’ interest provision of the Companies Act 2006
and the Company’s Articles of Association, the Board has in place a procedure
for the consideration and authorisation of Directors’ conflicts or possible
conflicts with the Company’s interests. The Board considers this has operated
effectively during the year. Each Director has a duty under the Companies Act
2006 to avoid a situation in which they have or may have a direct or indirect
interest that conflicts or might conflict with the interests of the Company.
This duty is in addition to the duty owed to the Company to disclose to the
Board any interest in a transaction or arrangement under consideration by the
Company. A register of Directors’ conflicts is maintained and reviewed at each
Board meeting. Authorised conflicts disclosed on the register currently involve
cross-directorships with Pennon Water Services Limited and the trustee board
of the Group’s defined benefit pension scheme.
Whistleblowing
The Board maintains overall responsibility for the Company’s Whistleblowing
Policy (the Policy). The Policy provides a clear procedure for employees and
suppliers to report concerns, through the Speak Up service, either to their
line manager or through a third-party whistleblowing hotline. The Policy
is well communicated to employees across the Group. All whistleblowing
cases are investigated by the Ethics Management Committee. The Board,
through the Audit Committee, receives yearly whistleblowing updates which
set out any whistleblowing issues raised during the period and interim
updates on any significant matters. The updates provided are anonymous
and summarise the result of any investigation. The Board is satisfied that the
Policy and the work of the Ethics Management Committee remain effective.
123Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
123Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Key activities of the Board
In 2023/24, the Board considered a wide range of matters. The key activities that
were carried out by the Board during the year, together with an indication of the
stakeholders affected and whose interests the Board considered in its discussions
and decision-making, are set out below.
Area Activity Outcome Stakeholders considered See page
Strategic
Acquisition of SES Water
Approved the acquisition of Sutton
and East Surrey Water.
Subject to approval by the CMA, the
acquisition will enhance the financial
resilience of SES Water and enhance
customer experience/ownership
through the WaterShare+ scheme.
6
PR24 Business Plan
Approved our PR24 business plan.
Investments will benefit our
customers, the environment and
community.
19
Delivery of capital projects
Reviewed and approved the delivery
of capital projects in line with the
framework model for capital delivery.
Successfully deliver capital projects
for the benefit of all stakeholders
and foster long term relationships
with our suppliers.
11
Operational
ODI improvements
Monitored our ODI improvements
to meet regulatory requirements,
ongoing regulatory/ innovation
initiatives were monitored via ESG and
H&S reports and adapted plans where
needed.
Successful regulatory outcomes,
safe customer and employee
experience, enhancing day to day
operations.
32 to 38
Storm overflows and pollutions
Reviewed and assessed measures
tackling storm overflows at bathing
waters and reduced spill rates across
our sites and within our communities.
Delivery against our objective to
ensure continuous supply of safe
and clean water to our customers.
35 to 36
Water quality and resilience
Approved projects to upgrade
treatment works and expanding
reservoir capacity across the regions.
Successfully maintain bathing water
quality all year round. Reduction in
pollution levels to industry-leading
low levels.
32 to 34
Key to stakeholder groups
Customers
Investors
People
Suppliers
Policy makers
Regulators
Environment
Communities
Inform
The agenda for each meeting is discussed and agreed in advance with
the Group Chair in conjunction with the Group CEO and Group General
Counsel and Company Secretary, along with the matters arising from
the previous meeting.
Senior leaders and management prepare written reports for the Board
meetings, based on the annual calendar of business, as well as deep-
dive presentations on key areas of the business, to inform and make
recommendations for the Board’s consideration. In addition, regular
performance reports are shared with the Board to ensure members are
continuously informed.
Approve and action
The Board will consider
matters and agree and
approve actions to take
forward.
Recommend and consider
Recommendations and deep
dives from senior leaders as
well as external advisors to
facilitate decision-making and
accounting for stakeholder
impact are presented to the
Board for consideration.
124 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Area Activity Outcome Stakeholders considered See page
Financial
2022/23 Annual Report and
Accounts
Reviewed and authorised the 2022/23
Annual Report and Accounts.
Delivery against objectives to return
capital where appropriate.
6
Final dividend payment/AGM
Approved the final dividend of 30.33p
per share and held the Annual General
Meeting.
The payment of a final dividend of
30.33p per share and the holding
of a successful Annual General
Meeting.
7
Environmental
Net Zero strategy plan, green
recovery investment programmes
Implementation and alignment of
plans with our strategic priorities by
engaging in, for example:
Investments in bathing waters
to reduce releases from storm
overflows.
Two desalination plants being built
in Cornwall to secure long term
water security in the region.
Accelerate delivery of our Net Zero
plans to achieve a more sustainable
future for all.
69 to 70
Pennon Power acquisition
Approved the purchase of four new
renewable energy generation projects
and implementation of projects to
ensure fit for purpose and in house
energy generation by 2025.
Foster our commitment to the long-
term sustainable growth of the UK’s
environmental infrastructure.
16
Dunfermline solar scheme purchase
Approved the purchase of 40Gwh
Solar PV site for electricity generation.
To increase our energy security and
resilience.
36
Social
Supporting customers on low
income
Monitored customer service levels and
plans to deliver improved diversity mix
and adapting where needed.
Continued alignment of plans to
achieve ever more stringent targets
as well as greater public/regulatory
scrutiny.
37
Investments in job opportunities
and apprenticeships for local
communities
Reviewed and approved investments
for the benefit of the communities.
Create job opportunities and
improve the careers of our people
and retain talent.
37
Culture and values
Reviewed and approved new values
that best align to our vision.
Boost and accelerate cultural
transformation within the Group and
develop an excellence behavioural
framework for our people.
25
Risk
Mitigation of key risks
Ongoing focus on key risks, with deep
dives at Audit Committee meetings.
Continued alignment of plans to
ensure appropriate risk mitigation.
59
Deep dive on cyber security risk
Reviewed our information security
systems and assessed mitigating
measures to avoid cyber attacks.
Continued protection of sensitive
data of our customers and our
people and ensured business
preparedness to tackle this risk.
64
Compliance, Governance, Legal and Regulatory
Regular updates on Corporate
Governance and key legal
developments during the year.
Continued alignment of plans to
ensure appropriate compliance/best
governance practice.
122
125Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
How the Board engages with stakeholders
The Board understands the role the Group has to play in creating
a more sustainable South West and UK as a whole. We are
committed to carrying out our business in a responsible way and
to continuously improving how we provide all our services for the
benefit of all our stakeholders.
Our section 172(1) statement describes in more detail how the Board considers
the interests of all our stakeholders when carrying out its duties. This statement
is on pages 128 to 129; you should read it alongside the ‘How we Listen’ section
on pages 8 to 12 to understand why we engage with our stakeholders, how we
engage, the key challenges we face and how we areresponding.
We actively engage with all our stakeholders, including our customers, our
communities, our people, our suppliers and our investors. We are acutely
aware that many of our stakeholders are struggling with the uncertainty
posed by the cost-of-living crisis, the political landscape and the wider
economic environment.
We are committed to maintaining appropriate and regular dialogue to ensure
our strategy and our performance objectives always reflect our stakeholders’
expectations and needs. Our continuous engagement allows stakeholders to
give feedback on matters they consider of importance to them and raise any
issues which they would like to be addressed.
Engaging with our customers
and communities
The WaterShare+ scheme was developed in direct response to feedback from
our customers who said they would like to share in the success of the Company,
alongside giving them a greater say in our business. The first WaterShare+
scheme was launched in 2020 and returned £20 million to customers as a
reduction of £20 on their bill. Eligible customers had the option of choosing a
minimum of £20 in Pennon shares. In November 2022, the second WaterShare+
scheme was launched and returned c.£20 million to customers of South West
Water (including Bournemouth Water) and for the first time, customers of Bristol
Water. Eligible customers could choose between a £13 reduction on their bill or to
opt for a shareholding in the Pennon Group. As a result of this second issuance,
we have extended customer ownership and 1 in 14 customers of South West
Water are now also a shareholder via this scheme.
The WaterShare+ customer meetings are an opportunity for our customers to
provide direct feedback to our independent WaterShare+ Advisory Panel, who,
inturn, provide direct feedback to our Board.
During the year, as part of our PR24 Business Plan discussion, the Chair and
Deputy Chair of the WaterShare+ Advisory panel, Lord Matthew Taylor and
Peaches Golding OBE, respectively, attended three PR24 Committee meetings to
provide feedback following their discussions with customers. In turn the chair of
the PR24 Committee attended one of the WaterShare+ public meetings that was
focused on PR24. The dialogue at these meetings ensured that the interests of
our customers remain a top priority, and that the delivery of the PR24 Business
plan had the utmost focus on the benefit to our customers and our communities.
The Group Chief Executive Officer’s monthly report, which is presented to the
Board and discussed at every meeting, includes updates on customer engagement
sessions conducted as part of the PR24 Business plan process, through the “Your
Water, Your Say” sessions which were held in May and November 2023.
Customer engagement on the WaterFit programme through the “Your Beach,
Your Say, Our Investment” interaction sessions with local communities and
stakeholder groups, and responses received from our interactive map “WaterFit
Live”, ensure that valuable feedback is provided to the Board, which assists in
ensuring that significant investments are made in order to protect our rivers, seas
and wider environment.
Engaging with our people
The Board receives regular updates on our people from the Group Chief
Executive Officer and Group Chief People Officer at its meetings. The Great
Place to Work survey and feedback from RISE panel provided to the Board
ensure that the decisions made consider employee interests and include what is
of priority to our people. Further details on the engagement with our people can
be found on page 10.
Engaging with our
shareholders and investors
Shareholders are one of our key stakeholder groups and we continued to manage a
comprehensive engagement programme with them throughout the year.
Members of the management team met with 78% of our institutional investors
(based on issued share capital) during 2023/24, holding over 130 meetings and
calls with current and prospective investors, through roadshows, events and
conferences in London, Europe, the Middle East and Australia. We also gave an
investor presentation on our PR24 Business Plan in October 2023 and on our
acquisition of Sutton and East Surrey Water in January 2024.
Pennon Group has a stable shareholder register of which around half are UK
based investors. Institutions hold the majority of our issued share capital,
with the remainder largely held by retail investors. The Group Chief Financial
Officer and Group Head of Investor Relations report regularly to the Board on
the views of shareholders, to ensure the Board is fully briefed on shareholder
views and expectations.
The AGM is an opportunity for our shareholders to meet the Board and
receive updates on the Group. This year’s AGM is to be held on Wednesday,
24
th
July 2024 at 10.00am. The AGM will be convened as a physical meeting,
with an option for shareholders to follow the business of the meeting by
virtual means. Shareholders who wish to join remotely will be able to log
into a live webcast and pose questions to the Board by submitting their
questions, in writing, in advance of the AGM; these can be submitted to
companysecretarial@pennon-group.co.uk. The location of the AGM will be
atPeninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR.
Full details of the resolutions being tabled for shareholder approval can be found
in the Notice of Meeting on our website. The voting results of each AGM are fully
disclosed to the London Stock Exchange and are available on our website.
Engaging with our regulators
and policy makers
The Board receives regular updates on our regulators and policy makers. The
Board, through the Group Chair, Group Chief Executive Officer and Group
Chief Financial Officer proactively engages with our regulators, particularly
Ofwat and the Environmental Agency, and Government, both at a local and
national level, including sharing platforms with local MPs at constituency
meetings, and face to face discussions with Defra throughout the year.
126 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Shareholder and investor engagement calendar
2023 May
WaterShare+ Advisory Panel meeting
June
Announcement of Full Year Results 2022/23
PCIM Roadshow
RBC Utilities & Infrastructure Investor Conference
September
Citi Utilities Conference
Morgan Stanley Clean Energy & Utilities
Conference
August
Investor Forum Group Meeting
October
Trading Statement
Submission of PR24 Business Plan
PR24 Spotlight Presentation & Conference Call
November
Announcement of Half Year Results 2023/24
December
London and Europe Investor Roadshow
PCIM Roadshow
2024 January
Acquisition of SES Water – City Conference Call
Citi Utilities Conference
Middle East & Australia Investor Roadshow
March
Barclays UK Water Conference
UBS Utilities Conference
Trading Statement
May
Announcement of Full Year Results 2023/24
London Investor Roadshow
Feedback was reported to the Board on an MP session held at Westminster
in October 2023 where members of the Executive team engaged with
Members of Parliament on the progress being made across our business
priority areas and presented our PR24 business plan to 2030. Likewise,
theGroup Chief Executive Officer holds regular 1-2-1 meetings with regional
MPs in Westminster to discuss strategic and overarching issues around
performance and our plans for investment.
Engaging with environmental
organisations
The Board regularly receives updates at meetings through the Group Chief
Executive Officer on our engagement with environmental organisations
particularly Defra, DWI and Water UK. The CEO and Executive Team hosted
site visits from the Defra Water Minister, the Shadow Water Minister and the
Chair of the Environment Agency, facilitating discussion on the strategic
issues of particular importance in the South West.
Through our ‘Quality First’ transformation programme in the South West
region and continued engagement we have seen positive improvements
in the relationship with the DWI. The Chief Inspector of Drinking Water
Inspectorate attended the South West Water Board Meeting held in
November 2023 where valuable insights on the strategic approach for
delivering drinking water quality were discussed.
The CEO gave updates to the Board on engagements and collaborations
with Water UK, and its Board, ensuring that the water industry’s position
on increased investments to improve the sector for the benefit of our
stakeholders, remains a key government focus. The CEO also attends, on
occasion, the Let’s Talk Water environmental stakeholder forum which is
a key channel for sharing progress on our environmental programme and
gathering feedback on our PR24 business plan.
To foster our commitment to positive environmental outcomes to our
stakeholders, the Board, as part of the PR24 business plan, approved the
establishment of an Environmental Advisory Panel, who will engage with the
Board and provide independent feedback on our environmental performance
and activities.
Engaging with our suppliers
The Board receives updates at Board meetings on our engagement with
suppliers which is conducted through formal Request for Proposal processes
and periodic supplier review meetings to ensure that our suppliers deliver
outcomes that benefit all our stakeholders.
The Board is regularly informed and involved through the stages of tender
processes which are undertaken to ensure that suitable and experienced
suppliers are contracted to deliver our capital projects, particularly the
execution of Pennon Power projects during the year.
During the year, the Board received updates from the Group Chief Executive
Officer on our engagement with the Cabinet Office on the drafting of the
Procurement Act 2023 which is geared towards making procurement simpler,
quicker and more transparent given the criticality of supply chain in the
future delivery of our business.
The Executive team are actively engaging the wider industry supply chain
directly and indirectly through organisations such as British Water, Future
Water and the Civil Engineering Contractors Association to both understand
and influence emerging trends and mobilise the best suppliers and innovation
for the benefit of the Group. Updates are regularly provided to the Board.
127Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
127Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Section 172(1) statement
All of the Board’s decisions are considered against the importance of acting in a sustainable, ethical and collaborative way, understanding the views of our
different stakeholders and weighing their competing interests, whilst being mindful of the regulatory obligations owed by Pennon Group’s regulated subsidiary,
South West Water Limited. Our Board leads and sets the tone by carefully noting the priorities of our stakeholders during its discussions and when it takes
decisions. We also know the importance of continually assessing the long-term impacts of our decisions, not only at Board level, but across the Group; this is
embedded as part of our culture. This helps us live our purpose and our values as a responsible, trusted and sustainable business acting in a way which benefits
all our stakeholders as much as possible. Properly understanding the impact of what we are doing has become part of how we operate, and it permeates
everything we do at Pennon.
Each Director has a duty under section 172 (1) of the Companies Act (s.172), to act in a way they consider, in good faith, would be most likely to promote the
success of the Company for the benefit of members and stakeholders as a whole, and in doing so, must have regard to a range of broader issues. Therefore,
inperforming their duties during the year, the Directors had regard to the each of the s.172 matters set out below:
s.172 duties Read more Pages
The long-term consequences
of our decisions
Strategic report 1 to 111
Our business model 22
Principal risks 55
Sustainability reporting 71
Our integrated
approach to ESG
67
Viability statement 65
Key activities of the
Board
124
The interests of our
employees
Strategic report 1 to 111
Investing in our people 25
How we listen 8
Diversity, equity and
Inclusion
28
Whistleblowing policy
and speak up
143
Purpose and culture
Our values
25
The importance of having
excellent business
relationships with suppliers,
customers and anyone else
who we impact
Our operational review 32
How we listen 8
How the Board engages
with stakeholders
126
The impacts our operations
have on our communities
and our environment
Our approach to ESG
and Net Zero
68
TCFD and TFND
disclosures
78
ESG Committee report 144
Ensuring we maintain our
reputation for the highest
standards of business
conduct
Non-Financial
Information Statement
110
Purpose and culture
Values
119
Modern Slavery 1
Anti-financial crime
framework
142
Whistleblowing policy
and speak up
143
The need to act fairly
between our shareholders
Stakeholder
Engagement
126
Voting at the AGM 126
How the Board fulfils its s.172 duty
To be able to fulfil its s.172 duty when making decisions, the Board is
supported in carefully considering all relevant factors to ensure the long-
term success of the Company.
Board information
All Board papers contain a s.172 information section to enable the
Board to consider stakeholder interests as part of their discussions and
decision-making.
Our Board directly and indirectly engages with our stakeholders. Read
more on pages 126 to 127.
Board strategic discussion
s.172 factors are considered in the Board’s discussions on strategy,
including how they underpin the Company’s long-term success.
The Company’s culture helps ensure there is proper consideration
of the impact of Board decisions on our stakeholders and the Board
considers the quality of information it has received and seeks
assurance where appropriate.
Board decision
Outcomes of each Board decision are assessed and further
engagement with stakeholders is undertaken, where appropriate.
As a result of the Board’s engagement, the necessary actions are taken.
128 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc128 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Key strategic decisions considered by the Board
Below are some of the key strategic issues considered, and decisions made, by the Board during the year and an explanation of how the Board considered the
matters in Section 172(1) (a) – (f) when taking those decisions and how they link to our strategy.
Key decision Outcome Board discussion and s.172 considerations
Link to
strategy
SES Water
acquisition
and
£180 million
equity capital
raise
In January 2024, the
Board approved the
acquisition of SES Water
and a £180 million equity
raise to ensure that the
Group remained within
the regulated water
business gearing range,
following completion of
the acquisition.
In making their decision, the directors considered the impact of the acquisition on all of our
stakeholders, and in particular:
Our Investors
The Board noted that the long-term financial benefits from value creation and the significant
increase in total RCV of the Group would benefit the Company’s investors.
Our People
The Board considered how the acquisition would be perceived by the Group’s workforce
and the positive impact job stability and career opportunities would have on SES employees,
following the acquisition. Welcoming SES employees to the Group would also enable access to
a new, wider and diverse talent pool in Southern England.
Our Customers
In addition to a more robust and reliable service to SES customers, greater advocacy,
involvement, and ownership in their local water company via the WaterShare+ scheme would
benefit SES customers.
£
Pennon Power
projects
acquisition
In FY2023/24, the Board
approved the acquisition
of four new renewable
energy generation
projects through its direct
subsidiary, Pennon Power
Limited.
To foster the long term growth of our environmental infrastructure and accelerate our Net Zero
plans, the Board considered the risks and opportunities the renewable projects would provide
to the Group and its stakeholders.
Our Environment and Communities
These projects would see Pennon generating low-cost and low-carbon electricity which would
reduce carbon emissions. In addition, the zero carbon electricity generated will power many
homes across the UK and foster a sustainable future.
Our Customers
Reduced operating costs thanks to renewable energy generation, would have a positive impact
on customer bills.
PR24
Business Plan
In October 2023, the
Board approved our PR24
Business Plan which sets
out what we intend to
deliver for our customers
and the environment
during the period 2025-
2030.
As part of their considerations, the Board discussed the £2.8 billion investment plan, which
involves engaging 250,000 of our stakeholders over a three-year period. The PR24 Business
Plan affects every one of our stakeholders.
Our People
The Board considered the impact of the PR24 Business Plan on the workforce. Around 2,000
jobs will be created, providing local people with rewarding careers in their home region, either
directly employed by South West Water or within the wider supply chain.
Our Customers
The Board considered the relationship between the cost of the scheme, the impact on bills, and
the need to ensure that these remain affordable for customers particularly in the cost of living
crisis. The Board judged that the impact of the four priorities within the plan would boost water
resources for customers across the region.
Our Environment
The Board considered the impact of the plan on the environment, and the need to ensure
that investments create a sustainable future and accelerate net zero and environmental gains
through creation of climate-independent water sources, and restoration schemes to boost
natural habitats and nurture healthier rivers and seas.
Our Regulators
As part of their discussions, the Board considered our regulators. The Board considers that the
plan meets Ofwat’s quality and ambition assessments and is aligned with Ofwat’s objectives for
PR24.
£
Interim
dividend
declaration
In November 2023, the
Board approved the
payment of an interim
dividend of 14.04p per
ordinary share.
As part of their discussion, the Board considered our stakeholders and the importance of
dividends for the long-term success of the Company.
Our Investors
The Board considered investor expectations and the considerations of investors who view
dividend payments as an important element of their investment at Pennon.
Our People and Customers
The Board considered the benefit to those employees and customers who participate in the
Company’s share schemes and WaterShare+ scheme respectively.
Strategic Priorities
Water Quality and
Resilience
£
Storm Overflows and
Pollutions
Net Zero and
Environmental Gains
Addressing Affordability and
Delivering for our Customers
129Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Composition, succession and evaluation
Training and development
In fulfilment of the Directors’ duties, the Board has been supported by the
advice and services of the Company Secretary and other functions of the
business. An established procedure whereby Directors can seek independent
professional advice at the Company’s expense to fulfil their duties is in place.
The Company Secretary is responsible for ensuring that the Board operates
in accordance with the governance framework and that information flows
effectively between the Directors and the Committees and between senior
management and non-executive directors.
The training needs of Directors are reviewed as part of the Board’s
performance review process each year. Training may include attendance
at external courses organised by professional advisors and internal
presentations from senior management.
During the year, updates were provided to the Board and Committees via
the Group General Counsel and Company Secretary and/or the Company’s
external advisors. These included updates on mandatory reporting and
recent legal or governance changes. Specifically, the Board received updates
on the Group’s preparations for meeting the enhanced requirements set out
within the 2024 UK Corporate Governance Code, particularly, in respect of
Audit, Risk and Internal Control.
Board Inductions
On their date of appointment to the Board, all new directors receive a
comprehensive and tailored induction programme coordinated by the Group
General Counsel and Company Secretary.
Pennon Board composition, independence, and experience
As at the date of this report, our Board comprises the Group Chair, five
Non-Executive Directors, two Group Executive Directors and the Group
General Counsel and Company Secretary. As at 31
st
March 2024, female
representation on the Board was at 63%, exceeding the Board’s target of 33%
and the target of the FTSE Women Leaders Review and the Listing Rules.
All of the Non-Executive Directors are considered by the Board to be
independent. Given her length of service, Gill Rider will be retiring as Group
Chair of Pennon at the end of the AGM on 24
th
July 2024. For continuity of
the existing strategic leadership of the Board, a robust and effective long
term succession plan as noted in 2022 and 2023 Annual Reports have
beenundertaken.
All Directors are subject to re-election each year. All the Non-Executive
Directors are considered to have the appropriate skills, experience in their
respective disciplines and personality to bring independent and objective
judgement to the Board’s deliberations. Their biographies on pages 116 to
117 demonstrate collectively a broad range of business, financial and other
relevant experience.
Loraine Woodhouse is Chair of the Audit Committee and, in accordance with
the UK Code and FCA Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rule 7.1.1, has
recent and relevant financial experience and competence in accounting and
auditing (as set out in her biography on page 117). The Board is satisfied that
the Audit Committee has financial literacy and competence relevant to the
sector in which the Group operates.
Time Commitment
All Non-Executive Directors are required to devote sufficient time to
meet their Board responsibilities and demonstrate commitment to their
role. During the year, the Nomination Committee considered the time
commitment of all the Non-Executive Directors and was satisfied that the
required time dedicated by each of them remains appropriate.
External appointments
All Directors are required to consult with the Chair and obtain Board approval
before taking on any additional appointments. Executive Directors are not
permitted to take on more than one non-executive directorship of a FTSE 100
company or other significant appointment. As part of the selection process
Steve Buck Induction programme
Following Steve’s appointment to the Board in November 2023, he
received a tailored induction programme, which included a formal
introduction with key stakeholders in the business, along with briefing
sessions from senior management on topics ranging from the Group’s
approach to its operational activities and regulatory, governance,
finance, health and safety and key risks and opportunities faced by
Pennon. Steve’s induction will include a number of site visits across the
region including a drinking water treatment site, a sewage treatment
site and a reservoir catchment project. He has had the opportunity
to meet local teams and ask questions about the business. Steve was
also given access to the Board portal which includes key Board and
Committee documents and Group information.
Board Performance Review
The Board undertakes a formal and rigorous review of its
performance and that of its Committees and Directors each
year. Having carried out an externally facilitated evaluation in
2023, this year the evaluation was carried out by means of an
internally facilitated online questionnaire, prepared by the Group
General Counsel and Company Secretary in consultation with the
Chair. Further information on the outcomes from the 2023 Board
performance review and the recommendations from the 2024
review can be found on pages 134 to 135.
for any new Board candidates, any significant external time commitments are
considered before an appointment is agreed.
Susan Davy continued as a non-executive director of Restore plc throughout
2023/24 and was appointed as Chair of Water UK, the membership body
representing the UK water industry, in September 2023. The Board is of the
opinion that the experience gained from external appointments provides
additional and different business experience and a fresh insight into the role
of an Executive Director.
Further information on the other business commitments of the Group Chair
and Pennon’s Non-Executive Directors is on pages 116 to 117.
130 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Nomination Committee report
Dear Shareholder
I am pleased to present the Nomination Committee’s (the Committee) report
for the year ended 31
st
March 2024.
This year, the Committee has overseen a number of planned changes to the Board.
As previously announced, in September 2023, Neil Cooper stepped down from
the Board having reached his maximum tenure. Iain Evans was appointed Senior
Independent Director as his successor. In addition, we welcomed Steve Buck to the
Board as our new Group Chief Financial Officer, following Paul Boote’s decision to
leave the Company as part of a planned relocation away from the South West. The
appointment of Steve is in line with our succession plan to ensure relevant skills and
diversity of perspective, given Steve’s previous knowledge of the water sector and
significant utilities experience.
As noted in last year’s Committee Report, a key focus for the Committee in 2023/24
was to appoint a successor for my role as Group Chair. The Inzito Partnership
were appointed as independent consultants, following a robust procurement
process, and have worked alongside the Committee in the rigorous selection
process, including meetings with appropriate stakeholders as well as the
interview process with Board members.
The Committee held four scheduled meetings during the year and also held
a number of ad-hoc meetings, in person and by Teams call, to fulfil the duties
set out in its terms of reference.
Only the members of the Committee are entitled to attend the Committee
meetings, but other regular invitees to Committee meetings during the year
included the Group Chief Executive Officer, the Group General Counsel and
Company Secretary and the Group Chief People Officer. Committee members are
also excluded from participating when their own positions are under discussion.
Gill Rider
Chair of the Nomination Committee
20
th
May 2024
Role of the Nomination Committee
Regularly review the structure, size and composition (including skills,
knowledge, independence, diversity and experience) required of the Board.
Consider succession planning for the Board and Senior Management,
overseeing the development of a diverse pipeline.
Identify and nominate candidates to fill Board vacancies.
Assist in the annual Board evaluation process to assess performance
and effectiveness of the Board and its Committees.
Evaluate the balance of skills, knowledge, independence, diversity and
experience on the Board.
Review the leadership needs of the Group, both executive and non-
executive, with a view to ensuring the continued success of the Group.
Review the Group’s policy on Diversity, Respect and Inclusion
(see www.pennon-group.co.uk/about-us/governance-and-remuneration),
including gender, and the progress against objectives.
Review membership of the Board Committees.
The Committee’s focus for 2023/24
Ensured that the Board has the appropriate mix of skills, experience and
diversity and oversaw the effectiveness of the Board’s succession plan.
Continuously reviewed the development and evolution of the Executive
leadership team and succession planning.
Conducted the annual review of Board effectiveness and Board composition.
Oversaw the annual review and approval of the Group policy on
Diversity, Respect and Inclusion and the Group’s progress on diversity
in line with the Parker Review, including the outcome of the FTSE
Women Leaders Review and the Group’s position on Gender and
Ethnicity Pay.
Reviewed the terms of reference for the Committee to ensure they
remain appropriate.
Gill Rider
Chair of the Nomination Committee
There has never been a more important
time for a responsible business to ensure
outstanding leadership and stewardship
and to promote diversity.
Committee
members
Date of
appointment
to Nomination
Committee Attendance
Gill Rider September 2012
Neil Cooper
1
September 2014
Iain Evans September 2018
Jon Butterworth July 2020
Claire Ighodaro July 2020
Loraine Woodhouse December 2022
Dorothy Burwell December 2022
1. Resigned 1
st
September 2023
131Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Nomination Committee report continued
Board diversity
At Pennon, we believe that a diverse and inclusive culture is a strategic
imperative, treating it in the same way we do each strategic priority - setting
the tone from the top, holding leaders accountable and delivering against
aclear action plan. The Committee maintains its strong interest in the
Group’s progress in championing diversity, whether in relation to gender,
ethnicity, or social mobility, and regularly reviews the demographics of the
workforce as well as the leadership.
We believe having a diverse mix of minds has helped to deliver a step
change in our culture, as a more caring and considerate business, that places
significant focus on wellbeing.
As of 31
st
March 2024, female representation on the Board stood at 63%.
In the 2024 edition of the FTSE Women Leaders Report, Pennon emerges
as a leader, proudly showcasing its commitment to diversity. The report,
independently conducted and backed by the Government, is a ringing
endorsement of Pennon’s relentless efforts to lead the charge in fostering
equality and inclusivity.
Despite progress across the FTSE, Pennon is still one of only a few
businesses in the UK to have both a female Chief Executive Officer and
Chair. Given this, we have continued our membership of the 30% Club, and
Gill Rider and Susan Davy are both ambassadors of 25 x 25, the initiative to
improve female representation in senior executive roles.
The Group is an advocate of Sir John Parker’s review of ethnic board
diversity, meeting the external targets required of a responsible and inclusive
business ahead of the required dates. For the second year running, in line
with our commitment to the Change the Race Ratio campaign, we have also
voluntarily published our ethnicity pay gap of 11.87% (mean). The Committee
will continue to monitor pay gaps. Building our representation across the
Group is a focus, given the area we serve has lower representation than the
national average, where ethnic representation is 6.9%. Our Group ethnic
diversity has increased slightly in the year to just over 3%.
Board Diversity, Respect and Inclusion Policy
The Board requires the Committee to review and monitor compliance with
the Board’s Diversity, Respect and Inclusion Policy and report on the targets,
achievement against those targets and overall compliance in the Annual
Report each year. The Policy was reviewed in March 2024.
The Board’s diversity and inclusion policy confirms that the Board is
committed to:
1. The search for Board candidates being conducted, and appointments
made, on merit, against objective criteria whilst promoting diversity of
gender, social and ethnic backgrounds. In this context, the Board will
endeavour to achieve and maintain:
a. A minimum of 33% female representation on the Board.
b. One Board member as a minimum who is racially or ethnically diverse.
c. A minimum of 33% female representation on the Group’s senior
management team.
d. Satisfying itself that plans for orderly succession of appointments to
the Board and to senior management maintain an appropriate balance
of skills and experience within the Group and on the Board and ensure
progressive refreshing of the Board.
The approach to Company-wide diversity is detailed on page 28 and is also
fully applicable to our Remuneration, Audit and Nomination Committees;
and as each Committee is composed of members of the Board, the Board’s
Diversity, Respect and Inclusion Policy detailed above similarly applies. I can
confirm we currently exceed the Policy targets.
Colleagues including our Board and leadership are asked to provide
personal information for the purposes of monitoring equality and for
statutory reporting purposes, including the FCA diversity disclosures and
gender and ethnicity pay gap report. This is collected during recruitment
and on-boarding and colleagues are asked to periodically review and
update as necessary. Information is stored on the Group’s HR management
system, including the data used to populate the table below. Employees are
encouraged to provide information on a voluntary basis.
FCA diversity disclosure table
The Committee is pleased to report against the FCA’s new diversity disclosure requirements, as set out in the table below. At Pennon ‘executive management’
is defined as the Pennon Executive Board. The figures in the table are stated as at 31
st
March 2024 and have been calculated based on diversity data provided
upon employment.
The ethnic representation of our Board and leadership
Number of
Boardmembers
% of the
Board
Number of senior Board
positions (CEO, CFO, SID, Chair)
Number in executive
management
% of executive
management
White, British or other White (incl. minority white groups)
6 75 4 8 100
Mixed / Multiple Ethnic Groups
0 0 0
Asian / Asian British
0 0 0
Black / African / Caribbean / Black British
2 25 0 0
Other ethnic group including Arab
0 0 0 0
Not specified / prefer not to disclose
0 0 0 0
The gender representation of our Board and leadership
Number of
Boardmembers
% of the
Board
Number of senior Board
positions (CEO, CFO, SID, Chair)
Number in executive
management
% of executive
management
Men
3 37 2 5 63
Women
5 63 2 3 37
Other categories
0 0 0
Not specified / prefer not to disclose
0 0 0
132 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Talent management and succession planning
The Committee, supported by the Group Chief People Officer, regularly
reviews both the executive and non-executive leadership as part of its
standing agenda, reviewing both short-and long-term skills requirements,
opportunities for positive support to minority groups, and early identification
of high potential. In line with our commitment to Change the Race Ratio,
we have set stretching targets to develop diversity in our leadership levels
below Executive Committee level, and the Committee will continue to review
progress on this important goal. As part of the regular reports received by
the Committee, rates of participation analysed by many characteristics are
provided, noting however that this is also subject to employees’ willingness to
disclose certain characteristics or sensitive information.
Appointment of our new Group Chair
As announced in the 2023 Annual Report, Gill Rider will be stepping down
from her role as Group Chair of the Board at the conclusion of the 2024 AGM
on 24
th
July 2024.
An update on the appointment of the new Group Chair will be disclosed on
the Regulatory Information Service and the Chair appointment process will
be included in the Annual Report and Accounts 2025.
Board performance review
The Board undertakes a formal and rigorous review of its performance
and that of its Committees and Directors each year. This ensures that
they continue to operate effectively and are identifying opportunities for
improvement and best practice, as well as helping to inform future agenda
items and areas of focus.
133Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
2023 Board performance review
Last year’s external performance review was facilitated, by Equity Culture, with the following conclusions:
Directors continued to demonstrate a high degree of effectiveness and collaboration.
The Board had a forward-thinking mindset.
The Board had a good understanding of opportunities for growth and risks facing the business.
The 2023 performance review identified several recommendations and action points for the Board to consider, which were set out in the Annual Report and
Accounts 2023. In November 2023, the Board received an update on the outcomes of each action, which are set out below:
Area of assessment Action Outcome
Pennon Board Board meeting
papers and
presentations
Review the structure of the
Boardpapers.
A new Board and Committee paper template was introduced
during the year. All papers are reviewed by the Company
Secretarial team.
Board oversight Continue to ensure appropriate
processes for monitoring, reporting
and addressing pollution incidents.
The Board receive operational updates at every meeting and the
Audit Committee review on an annual basis the effectiveness
of the internal control framework to ensure the appropriate
processes for monitoring and reporting are in place.
Group strategy and
governance
Key themes are developing
strategic lines of communication to
drive climate strategy and growth.
The Board held two strategy days during the year, in September
2023 and March 2024.
See page 122 for more information.
Communications
strategy
Ensure the Group has appropriate
capacity to meet its challenges.
Key themes are developing strategic lines of communication to
drive climate delivery and growth
Succession and
talent planning
The bench strength of the
Executive needs to be kept
underreview.
Ensure the Group has the appropriate capacity to meet
its challenges
Strategy The focus should remain on
ensuring that the Group has
the human resources to deliver
itsambitions.
The bench strength of the Executive needs to be kept
under review
Risk Top-level risks should be
reviewedregularly.
The focus should remain on ensuring that the Group has
the human resources to deliver its ambitions
Audit
Committee
Committee operation
and effectiveness
Continue with existing operations. The Audit Committee continued to focus on its existing
operations and key priority areas during the year.
See page 136 for more information on the Committee’s activities.
ESG
Committee
Committee operation
and effectiveness
Ensure sufficient flexibility to
further improve Net Zero activities
and outcomes.
Continue the vital focus on
environmental issues and CSOs.
Continue to review and assess
processes in this area.
During the year the Committee approved the creation of an
environmental advisory panel to provide independent advice and
help challenge our environmental activities, and to demonstrate
our commitment to focusing on environmental outcomes.
See page 144 for more information on the Committee’s activities.
Remuneration
Committee
Committee operation
and effectiveness
Continue to evolve the
remuneration framework and
build on existing processes.
The Reward strategy and framework was updated during the year
to reflect the Group’s composition, latest strategy and business
plans, changing employee expectations and our new Group values.
See page 148 for more information.
Nomination
Committee
Committee operation
and effectiveness
Continue with the existing
processes, focussed on succession.
The Committee received updates on succession planning during
the year.
See page 131 for more information on the Committee’s activities.
H&S
Committee
Committee operation
and effectiveness
As a developing Committee
continue deep dives into H&S
performance and incidents.
During the year, the Committee reviewed deep dives of High
Potential Incidents, with a particular focus on lessons learned,
getting to the root cause and encouraging a learning mindset.
See page 146 for more information.
Nomination Committee report continued
134 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
2024 Board performance review
This year the evaluation was carried out in March 2024 via an online
questionnaire created internally by the Group General Counsel and Company
Secretary in consultation with the Chair.
The questionnaire focused on the ongoing effectiveness of the Board during
the year in setting the Group’s strategy, satisfying itself that Pennon’s
culture and values were operating well, ensuring that the Board has a clear
understanding of the views of its shareholders and other stakeholders,
ensuring the Board takes the lead in promoting a strong health and safety
culture throughout the Group, and ensuring the Board has an appropriate
level of focus on risk appetite and the internal control framework, and
ensuring that the processes are in place to identify risk.
The review concluded that:
The Board continued to operate effectively and there was a culture of
openness and debate through the effective contribution of all directors.
The Board continued to provide appropriate leadership of the Group and
there are effective strategies, processes and plans in place.
The Board Committees are well run and have sufficient independent
membership to ensure that they can make high quality decisions that
address the diverse customer and stakeholder needs of the Group.
The 2024 Board and Committee performance reviews identified several
recommendations and action points for the Board to consider, which were
presented to the Board for discussion at its meeting in May 2024.
An update on the outcomes of the Board’s discussions of the 2024 Board
and Committee performance reviews will be provided in the Annual Report
and Accounts 2025.
135Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Audit Committee report
The Audit Committee is focused on
ensuring sound financial and risk
management to support the Group’s
strategy.
Role of the Audit Committee
Ensure the quality and integrity of the Group’s financial and regulatory
reporting.
Monitor and review the effectiveness of the internal control environment.
Challenge the scope and adequacy of the Group’s risk management
processes.
Review the Group’s policies on Risk Management, Treasury, Tax and
theDelegated Authorities Schedule.
The Committee’s focus for 2023/24
Ensure the 2024 Annual Report and Accounts are fair, balanced and
understandable.
In-depth review of the key financial reporting judgements.
Risk ”deep-dives” in key focus areas.
External audit tender.
Ensuring readiness for UK Corporate Governance Code changes.
Dear Shareholder
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Audit Committee’s
report for the year ended 31
st
March 2024. This is my first report as Audit
Committee Chair having succeeded Neil Cooper on 1
st
September 2023.
This report is intended to provide shareholders with an insight into the
work of the Audit Committee (‘the Committee’) together with details of how
the Committee has discharged its responsibilities throughout the year and
overseen the process of assurance over the integrity of the 2024 Annual
Report and Accounts (‘the 2024 Annual Report’).
As in previous years, we have focused on the following key priority areas:
Ensuring the quality and integrity of the Group’s financial reporting
through the assessment of accounting policy application given underlying
standards, challenging management through the review of accounting
judgements made in preparing financial reporting, and the Committee’s
assessment of whether the financial reporting of the Group is presented in
a fair, balanced and understandable manner.
Ensuring the 2024 Annual Report is aligned with the requirements of and
guidance from regulators, and that all matters reported on, and disclosed,
meet the needs of our various stakeholders.
Monitoring and reviewing the ongoing effectiveness of the Group’s risk
management and internal control environment, including the effectiveness
and independence of the Internal Audit function.
The Committee uses its collective expertise, with input from the External
Auditor, to provide a robust challenge to the approach and judgements made
by management in the treatment of financial matters and their resulting
disclosures within the financial statements. One of our key roles is to advise
the Board that we are satisfied that the 2024 Annual Report is fair, balanced
and understandable and that it provides the information necessary for
shareholders to assess the Group’s position, trends in performance, business
model and strategy. In doing so, we ensure that management’s disclosures
reflect the supporting detail, or challenge them to explain and justify their
explanation and, if necessary, re-present the information. As part of fulfilling
these commitments, we carefully consider the key financial reporting
judgements of the management as set out on page 139. Significant matters
considered by the Committee both during the year and in relation to the
year-end financial statements are laid out in this report. The External Auditor
supports this process in the course of the statutory audit.
Loraine Woodhouse
Chair of the Audit Committee
Committee
members
Date of
appointment to
Audit Committee Attendance
Loraine Woodhouse December 2022
Claire Ighodaro September 2019
Iain Evans September 2023
Neil Cooper
1
September 2014
1. Neil Cooper stepped down as Chair and as a member of the Committee on
1
st
September 2023
136 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
The Committee was pleased to advise the Board that this Report met these
criteria. Details of our review process can be found on page 139.
The Committee discharges its responsibilities throughout the year in
accordance with a schedule of business reflecting the annual external
reporting cycle of the Group, allowing for appropriate consideration at the
right point. This scheduling also allows for consideration on an ad-hoc basis
of events as they have arisen.
The Committee formally considers the effectiveness of the Group’s risk
management and internal control systems. This is achieved through
updates on the operation of risk management processes during the year
and the outcomes of key assurance activities, including from the Group’s
independent Internal Audit function. Additionally, the Audit Committee
undertakes risk deep dives focused on aspects of the Group’s principal risks.
During 2023/24 the Audit Committee has performed risk deep dives on the
following areas:
Engineering supply chain resilience.
Water quality.
Cyber security.
More detail on our risk management processes, principal risks and their
associated mitigation can be found on pages 55 to 64.
The Audit Committee has also been actively engaged and received regular
updates during the year on the Group’s preparations for meeting the
enhanced requirements set out within the 2024 UK Corporate Governance
Code, in particular those aspects in respect of Audit, Risk and Internal
Control. Good progress has been made with the initial phase focused on
financial reporting related processes and controls. The scope of these
preparations during 2024/25 will expand to broader operational, compliance
and reporting elements.
The Committee has considered the requirements for the Financial Reporting
Council’s ”Audit Committees and the External Audit: Minimum Standard”,
published in May 2023, and ensured that it complied with this standard in
conducting the tender for audit services and its ongoing oversight of the
external audit process, as set out in this report.
Alongside this focus on our risk processes, we formally reviewed the output
of the Group’s financial resilience and health assessments: for a 12-month
‘look forward’ period through our assessment of the Group’s going concern
status, and over a period of five years to assess the Group’s continuing
viability. This viability assessment has considered a range of financial
projections arising from the current challenging and complex external
environment with ongoing uncertainties in relation to economic growth,
inflation prospects and the impact of the PR24 pricing review for our
water businesses. These are modelled through internal scenarios around
the deployment of Group cash reserves and which now incorporate the
acquisition of SES Water. While the Group maintains a five-year viability
assessment period, appropriate for an acquisitive group, South West Water
has continued to use a longer assessment period to 2030, since
it has a greater visibility of future cash flows, being a regulated business. Our
viability statement is reported on page 65.
Throughout the year, the Group has remained focused on delivering a
resilient performance in UK water, despite a difficult period of cost inflation
and scrutiny of the water industry as a whole, as we execute our growth
strategy of utilising both organic and acquisitive levers to drive long-term
sustainable growth. We are focused on delivering sustainable results for all
stakeholders.
The acquisition of SES Water is subject to review by the CMA. During the
immediate period from acquisition on 10
th
January 2024 until CMA clearance
is obtained, the SES Water business is operated independently of the rest
of the Group. SES Water’s continuing governance processes were therefore
relied on by the Pennon Group Audit Committee in fulfilling its overall
Group responsibilities. The following matters have been considered by the
Committee in respect of the SES Water acquisition:
Considering and reviewing the provisional purchase price allocation
accounting and disclosure for the acquisition of SES Water in the full year
financial results for the year ended 31
st
March 2024.
Considering and approving the alignment of accounting policies of SES
Water with Pennon Group plc.
Reviewing and assessing the impact of the SES Water acquisition on the
Group’s principal risks.
Considering and approving any changes to the Group’s internal control
processes, including the effectiveness of the internal control environment,
and monitoring the external audit process in connection with the SES
Water acquisition.
Finally, I would like to thank Neil for his significant contribution to the
Committee over the years and for his help and encouragement as I joined the
Group. Equally, I would also like to extend my thanks to the members of the
Committee for their support as I settled into my new role as Chair.
Loraine Woodhouse
Chair of the Audit Committee
20
th
May 2024
137Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Audit Committee composition
All members of the Committee are Independent Non-Executive Directors of the Board. In accordance with the UK Code, the Board is satisfied that Loraine
Woodhouse and Claire Ighodaro, both of whom served on the Committee during the year under review, have recent and relevant financial experience and,
inaccordance with FCA Rule 7.1.1R of the FCA’s Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules, have competence in accounting or auditing.
Only members of the Committee have the right to attend Committee meetings. Other regular attendees at meetings, at the invitation of the Committee,
include the Chair of the Board, the Group Chief Executive Officer, the Group Chief Financial Officer, the Group General Counsel and Company Secretary,
Director of Risk and Assurance, Group Financial Controller and the External Auditor.
The Committee regularly holds private discussions with the External Auditor without management present. Further, the Committee Chair regularly
communicates with the Group Chief Financial Officer, the External Auditor and with Committee members outside the meetings to better understand
any issues or areas of concern.
Matters of significance in 2023/24
Financial reporting Reviewed and discussed reports from management on the financial statements, considered management’s significant
accounting judgements and the policies being applied, and assessed the findings of the statutory audit in respect
of the integrity of the financial reporting of full and half-year results.
Reviewed the internal assessment of going concern and longer-term viability on behalf of the Board.
Reviewed in detail the 2024 Annual Report and advised the Board that the presentation of the 2024 Annual Report
is fair, balanced and understandable in accordance with reporting requirements, including the consideration of climate
risk in the preparation of the financial statements, and recommended the Board gives approval for publication.
External auditor Oversaw the 2023/24 statutory audit, including the key audit risks and level of materiality applied by the
ExternalAuditor.
Assessed the effectiveness of the External Auditor during the year.
Agreed the statutory audit fee for the year ending 31
st
March 2024.
Reviewed and approved the non-audit services and related fees provided by the External Auditor for 2023/24.
Conducted a competitive tender process for the role of statutory auditor.
Internal controls and risk
management
Reviewed the effectiveness of the Group’s risk management framework and its integration into Board
and Committee Reporting.
Reviewed the Group’s Risk Appetite Statement prior to making a recommendation to the Board.
Monitored fraud reporting and incidents of whistleblowing, including a review of the Group’s whistleblowing
processes and procedures and reporting to the Board on this.
Reviewed the Group risk register as part of the Annual Report process and considered appropriate areas of focus
and prioritisation for the internal audit work programme for the financial year.
Carried out deep dives at Committee meetings on principal risk areas.
Governance Considered and approved Group accounting policies and judgements used in the preparation of the financial
statements, including any required alignments of Bristol Water’s accounting policies.
Reviewed and considered internal financial policies.
Confirmed compliance with the UK Code.
Held regular meetings with the external auditor and the Group Director of Risk and Assurance without
members of management being present.
Regarding monitoring of the integrity of the financial statements, which is a key responsibility of the Committee identified in the UK Code, the significant
areas of judgement considered in relation to the financial statements for the year ended 31
st
March 2024 are set out in the following table, together with
details of how each matter was addressed by the Committee. At the Committee’s meetings throughout the year, the Committee and the external auditor have
discussed the significant matters arising in respect of financial reporting, together with the areas of particular audit focus, as reported on in the independent
auditor’s report on pages 175 to 184. In addition to the significant matters set out in the table below, the Committee considered presentational disclosure matters
including the use of non-underlying performance metrics and ensuring a fair presentation of statutory and non-statutory performance and financialmeasures.
Audit Committee report continued
138 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
During the year, the Committee’s areas of focus included:
Area of focus How the matter was addressed by the Committee
Revenue recognition Given the nature of the Group’s revenue, the key areas of income statement judgement for South West Water,
Pennon Water Services and SES Water continue to be in respect of revenue recognition relating to income from water
services.
While the Committee relied on the operational businesses’ processes for assessment of water into supply, in the previous
financial year it challenged the robustness and timeliness of the methodology used, resulting in management streamlining
the calculation approach. The improvements that were implemented in FY23/24 continue to provide a more efficient
approach to the calculations required and the Committee continues to scrutinise the track record of accuracy by
comparing actual outturns with accruals at previous year ends to form a judgement about the quality of decision making.
The Committee also closely considered the work in respect of these areas at year end by the external auditor as well as
reviewing disclosures around revenue recognition accounting policies.
Bad and doubtful debts Regular updates on progress against debt collection targets and other contractual payments due are received by the
Board. Performance is monitored regularly across the Group against historical standards and compared to the track
records of other companies in the relevant sectors. The Committee was particularly mindful of the ongoing impacts of
affordability on the assessment of expected credit losses in determining the bad debt provision, noting the significant
increases in inflation arising from macroeconomic developments. At the year end, the external auditor reported on the
work it had performed, which, together with the detailed analysis reported, enabled the Committee to conclude that
management’s assessment of the year-end position and its provisions for expected credit losses were reasonable.
Going concern basis for the
preparation of the financial
statements and viability
statement
A report from the Group Chief Financial Officer on the financial performance of the Group, including forward-looking
estimates of covenant compliance and funding levels under different scenarios, including inflationary scenarios, is
provided to the Board on a periodic basis. Rolling five-year strategy projections, and the resultant headroom relative to
borrowings, are also regularly reviewed by the Board, including the application of scenarios to enable the Committee to
better understand the potential range of outcomes. At the end of each six-month period the Group Chief Financial Officer
prepares, for consideration by the Committee, a report focusing on the Group’s liquidity over the 12-month period from
the date of signing of either the Annual Report or half-year results. The Committee also reviewed a report from the Group
Chief Financial Officer on the Group’s financial viability over an appropriate period, in connection with the UK Corporate
Governance Code’s requirement for a viability statement to be given by the Board. The Board considers the appropriate
period to assess the Group’s viability remains unchanged at five years, which recognises both the longer-term visibility
in the regulatory environment of the South West Water and SES Water businesses and the corporate activity, including
acquisitions and other non-regulatory investments, such as the recent Bristol Water and SES Water acquisitions and our
investments in solar energy generation, undertaken by Pennon.
Similarly, this report also considered the viability of the Group, taking into account the potential manifestation of other
adverse events modelled from the Group’s principal risks and resultant sensitivity scenarios. In performing its own viability
assessment, South West Water uses a longer assessment period to 2030, noting a greater visibility of future cash flows,
being a regulated water business. Consideration of these reports and constructive challenge on the findings of the reports,
including the scenario testing carried out by management, has enabled the Committee to form its assessment and
satisfy itself that it remains appropriate for the Group to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in the
preparation of the financial statements and in addition advise the Board on providing the viability statement
set out on page 65.
Effectiveness of the external audit process
Receiving high-quality and effective audit services is of paramount importance to the Committee. We continue to carefully monitor the effectiveness of our
External Auditor as well as their independence, while recognising there is a need to use our External Auditor’s firm for certain non-audit services. We have
full regard to the FRC’s Ethical Standard and ensure that our procedures and safeguards meet these standards.
The External Auditor produced a detailed audit planning report in preparation for the year-end financial statements, which has assisted the auditor in delivering
the timely audit of the Group’s Annual Report and which was shared with, and discussed by, the Committee in advance.
The effectiveness review of the External Auditor is considered as part of the Committee’s annual performance evaluation, which also examines the relationship
and communications between the Committee and the external auditor. Further details of the Committee evaluation are provided on page 135. No issues
were raised during that review. The Committee concluded that the Auditor was effective during the year and that the relationship and communications were
open and constructive.
The Committee Chair has also met privately with the External Auditor to discuss key matters.
139Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Auditor independence
The Committee regards independence of the External Auditor as
absolutely crucial in safeguarding the integrity of the audit process and
takes responsibility for ensuring the three-way relationship between the
Committee, the External Auditor and management remains appropriate.
The External Auditor reported on its independence during the year, and
again since the year end, confirming to the Committee that, based on its
assessment, it was independent of the Group.
Provision of non-audit services
The Committee adopts a robust policy for the engagement of the External
Auditor’s firm for non-audit work. The Committee receives a regular report
covering the auditor’s fees including details of non-audit fees incurred.
Recurrent fees typically relate to agreed procedures regarding annual
regulatory reporting obligations to Ofwat; work which is most efficiently
andeffectively performed by the statutory auditor. The policy is for
non-audit fees not to exceed 70% of the audit fee for statutory work
and for the Committee Chair to approve all non-audit work performed
by the statutory auditor. The policy uses the average of the last three
years’ audit fees disclosed in the accounts reflecting that certain non-audit
fees for services required to be performed by the auditors are excluded
fromtheassessment.
The Committee carefully reviews non-audit work proposed for the
statutory auditor, taking into consideration whether it was necessary for
the auditor’s firm to carry out such work, and only grants approval for the
firm’s appointment if it was satisfied that the auditor’s independence and
objectivity would be safeguarded. If another accounting firm could provide
the required cost-effective level of experience and expertise in respect
of the non-audit services, then such firm would be chosen in preference
totheExternal Auditor.
The level of non-audit fees payable to the External Auditor for the past year
is 18% of the three-year average audit fee, which is within the Group’s 70%
non-audit fee limit.
The Group Chief Financial Officer regularly reports to the Committee on
the extent of services provided to the Company by the External Auditor
and the level of fees paid. The fees paid to the External Auditor’s firm for
non-audit services and for audit services are set out in note 7 to the financial
statements on page 204.
Statutory audit tender process and statement of
compliance with CMA order
The Group complies with the Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies
Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and
Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014.
We last undertook a formal comprehensive audit tender process for statutory
audit services in 2014. The current External Auditor, Ernst & Young LLP
(EY), were appointed following a comprehensive audit tender process and
approval by shareholders at the Company’s 2014 AGM. EY commenced their
appointment as auditor and presented their first report to shareholders for
the year ended 31
st
March 2015. The lead audit partner must change every
five years. Christabel Cowling, who has considerable audit experience of
other FTSE 100 utility companies, has held the role since 2019. This year-end
audit is EY’s tenth consecutive year in office as statutory auditor.
As announced in our annual report and accounts for FY 2023, the Committee
has run a full tender for the Group’s external audit services during the year
ending March 2024, before the next rotation becomes due. This allows
forany potential new audit firm to take up the role for the year ending
March 2025 and, if required, affords appropriate time for a smooth transition
ofresponsibilities.
Audit Committee report continued
Summary of the statutory audit tender process
The Committee’s primary objective throughout the tender process, and in
making its recommendation to the Board, was to review the audit approach
and ensure best practice in the delivery of the Group’s audit. Maximising
value to the group and its stakeholders in terms of: audit quality; reliability
of assurance; the identification of potential improvements to business and
accounting processes and the reporting thereof.
In conducting the tender and making an appointment ahead of 1
st
April 2024
for the audit for the year ending 31
st
March 2025, sufficient time was made
available for a firm to cease to provide non-audit services, as set out in the
FRC’s Revised Ethical Standard (2019) prior to commencing their tenure
and to allow a new auditor to shadow the incumbent during the audit for the
year ending 31
st
March 2024, if applicable. In addition, the tender process
had confirmed that all participants did not provide any services for which a
‘cooling in’ period may apply.
A timeline of the process is set out below:
2023
May
Committee confirmation of audit tender timetable.
August
Investor consultation on prospective participants.
September/October
Expression of Interest confirmations and individual meetings
between representatives of interested firms and Chair of the
Audit Committee and the Group CFO.
November
Issue of Request for Proposal (RFP) and provision of information
via dataroom.
December
Meetings with bidding firms to meet Pennon Group personnel
including finance, internal audit, information technology and
regulatory teams.
2024
January
RFP submissions and presentations to selection panel.
February
Meeting of Audit Committee to consider and discuss findings of
the selection panel and to make recommendation to the Board
on the proposed candidate.
Board consideration and approval of Audit Committee
recommendation to appoint its proposed candidate,
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, as auditor in respect of the year
ending 31
st
March 2025.
140 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
A working group of the Chair of the Audit Committee, the Group CFO and
the Group Financial Controller was established to direct the overall tender
process whilst the Audit Committee approved all key decisions as required.
The Audit Committee as a whole was kept fully appraised of the progress
of the tender by the Chair of the Committee. The Group Financial Controller
was responsible for leading on the logistics of the tender process. Ahead of
the request for proposal (RFP) being issued, four ‘challenger’ firms confirmed
that they did not wish to participate in the tender and a third ‘Big 4’ firm was
conflicted from participating. Industry sector expertise was an important
factor in the selection of the firms invited to tender, given the regulatory
complexities of the business. All three of the firms that participated
demonstrated considerable experience of the utility sector and/or water
sector and the industry experience of the key members of the audit teams
demonstrated the same.
A selection panel was established consisting of: the Chair of the Audit
Committee; all members of the Committee; the Group Chair; the Group
CEO, the Group CFO and the Group Financial Controller, thereby ensuring a
wide range of views were taken into account and a considerable amount of
financial expertise supported the Committee in the decision-making process.
Each firm’s proposal consisted of a written tender document and face-to-
face presentations. Their responses were evaluated by the selection panel
against the following criteria, as set out in the RFP:
Audit approach and overall audit quality assurance.
Quality, experience of the lead partner, team and firm and their ability
andtrack record of challenging management and delivering audit quality.
Approach to achieving a smooth audit transition, if relevant.
Service delivery, including value add from the audit.
Culture and reputation of the audit firm.
Performance during the proposal process.
Proposals were assessed on these criteria with pricing being a secondary
point of evaluation after the initial assessment.
Outcome of statutory audit tender process
Following the selection panel process, the Audit Committee met to
review and discuss the bidders’ proposals, how these proposals met
the assessment criteria, and a paper summarising the assessment was
prepared, following which the committee made its recommendation that
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) was its preferred candidate.
The recommendation was approved by the Board on 21
st
February 2024 .
The Board accepted the Committee’s recommendation that PwC would be
appointed as statutory auditor for the year ending 31
st
March 2025, subject
to shareholder approval at the Annual General Meeting in July 2024. There
are no contractual obligations that restrict the Committee’s choice of auditor;
the recommendation is free from third-party influence and no auditor liability
agreement has been entered into.
PwC were identified as the preferred candidate due to: the strength,
experience and breadth of its team in relation to the industry, regulation
and technology capabilities; PwC’s thorough consideration of the audit
scope and approach and how innovation will be deployed to enhance audit
approach and quality; PwC’s clear commitment to the transition process
with advanced levels of planning in how the process would be managed to
ensure audit quality; the proposed audit engagement partner and the entire
team demonstrated a genuine enthusiasm for driving further audit quality;
and demonstrated their capabilities to deploy technology to address key
audit risk areas. As noted above, in reaching the assessment, the Committee
considered the ranking of the firms before and after the consideration
of pricing. In both scenarios PwC proved to be the preferred candidate.
Colin Bates will be appointed as PwC’s audit engagement partner for the
year ending 31
st
March 2025, having shadowed EY during the 2023/24
auditprocess.
Internal audit
The internal audit activities of the Group are a key part of its internal control
and risk management framework. At Group level there is a long-standing and
effective centralised internal audit service, which supports the Committee
in delivering its responsibilities and has continued to operate effectively.
The internal audit charter was updated during the year to reflect the
requirements of the new Global Internal Audit Standards. The Group Internal
Audit Plan is set on a rolling six-month basis and was approved in March
2023 and September 2023, following a thorough review to ensure it provided
adequate coverage over the Group’s key risks for the year ahead and was
sufficiently flexible to respond to emerging risks. In developing the plan,
account is taken of the principal risks, the activities to be undertaken by
the External Auditor, and the Group’s annual and ongoing risk management
reviews. This approach seeks to ensure that there is a programme of internal
and external audit reviews focused on identified key risk areas throughout
the Group.
The Group Director of Risk and Assurance reported regularly through
the year to the Committee on the outcomes and findings of internal audit
activity. There were regular discussions, correspondence and private
meetings between the Director of Risk and Assurance and the Committee
Chair. The Committee continues to monitor the performance of the internal
audit function as part of its annual assessment of the effectiveness of the
function. As required by IIA standards, the next cyclical external review of
the internal audit function will take place before the end of 2026/27 (the last
having been undertaken in 2021/22).
Fair, balanced and understandable assessment
To enable the Committee to advise the Board in making its statement
that it considered that the Company’s Annual Report to be fair, balanced
and understandable (FBU) on page 174, the Committee applied a detailed
FBU review framework that takes account of the Group’s well-documented
verification process undertaken by management in conjunction with the
preparation of the 2024 Annual Report. This was in addition to the formal
process carried out by the External Auditor to enable the preparation of the
independent auditor’s report, which is set out on pages 175 to 184.
In preparing and finalising the 2024 Annual Report, the Committee
considered a report on the actions taken by management in accordance
with the FBU process and an FBU assessment undertaken by the Pennon
Executive. This assisted the Committee in carrying out its own assessment
and being able to advise the Board that it considered that the Annual Report
taken as a whole is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the
information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s position,
performance, business model and strategy.
Looking forward
During the forthcoming year, the Committee will remain focused on the key
areas of responsibility delegated to it by the Board, ensuring that standards
of good governance are maintained and that appropriate assurance is
obtained across all areas of the business. Particular focus will be given to
the Group’s principal risks, internal control environment and approach to
financial reporting, noting the volatility in the global economy. Developments
in reporting responsibilities, including those recommended by the Task Force
on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD), the consideration of climate
risk in preparation of the financial statements and the changes in the UK
Corporate Governance Code will be considered throughout the year.
141Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Audit, risk and internal control
Risk management and the Group’s system
of internal control
The Board is responsible for maintaining the Group’s system of internal
control to safeguard shareholders’ investments and the Group’s assets
and for reviewing its effectiveness. The system is designed to manage
rather than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and
can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material
misstatement or loss. An ongoing process for identifying, evaluating
and managing the significant risks faced by the Group has been in place
throughout the year and up to the date of the approval of this Annual
Report and Accounts and was last reviewed by the Board at its meeting
in March 2024.
The Group’s system of internal control is consistent with the Financial
Reporting Council’s (FRC) ‘Guidance on Risk Management, Internal
Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting’ (FRC Internal
Control Guidance).
The Board confirms it applies procedures in accordance with the UK
Corporate Governance Code and the FRC Internal Control Guidance, which
bring together elements of best practice for risk management and internal
control by companies. The Board’s risk framework described on pages 55
to64 of the Strategic Report provides for the identification of key risks,
including ESG risks, in relation to the achievement of the business objectives
of the Group, monitoring of such risks and ongoing and annual evaluation of
the overall process. Details of the key risks affecting the Group are set out
in the Strategic Report on pages 1 to 111.
Key performance indicators are in place to enable the Board to measure
the Company’s ESG performance on pages 42 to 44 and a number
of these are linked to remuneration incentives on page 151.
As part of the review evaluating the system of risk management and internal
control under the Group risk management policy, all Executive Directors
and senior managers are required to certify on an annual basis that they
have effective controls in place to manage risks and to operate in compliance
with legislation and Group procedures. This took place on March 2024.
The Group’s processes and policies serve to ensure that a culture of effective
control and risk management is embedded throughout the Group and that
the Group is able to react appropriately to new risks as they arise. New and
emerging risks are identified in further detail in the risk management section
on pages 55 to 64.
Code of Conduct and policies
The Code of Conduct and related policies set out Pennon’s commitment
to promoting and maintaining the highest ethical standards. Areas covered
in the Code of Conduct and related policies include our impact on the
environment and our communities, our workplace, and our business conduct.
The Code of Conduct sets out the values and principles by which we
operate and provides a framework for ethical business practices. It is further
supported by several policies that guide our workforce and suppliers, so that
we can identify and deal with suspected wrongdoing, fraud or malpractice,
maintain the highest standards of compliance, and apply consistently high
standards of ethics. We aim to maintain a culture that fosters the reporting
of any concerns, and trust and confidence that we will act upon them.
Our Code of Conduct and other key compliance policies can be found here:
https://www.pennon-group.co.uk/about-us/policies
Anti-financial crime framework
The anti–bribery and corruption, anti-tax avoidance, and anti-money
laundering policies were reviewed and consolidated (together with new
guidance to reflect the provisions of the Economic Crime and Corporate
Transparency Act 2023) into a new Board approved anti-financial crime
policy in March 2024. The new policy includes guidance on Pennon’s zero
tolerance approach to acts of bribery, fraud, money laundering and tax evasion.
The Policy outlines the requirements of Group companies to comply with
relevant legislative, ethical standards and best practice on preventing
financial crime, and provides information and guidance to those working
for and on Group’s behalf on how to spot ‘red flags’ that could indicate
a risk of financial crime. The policy is in the process of being rolled out
comprehensively into all parts of the Group, through the Company’s learning
management platform to track review and record understanding; this process
is complemented by online training for new joiners on the individual areas of
financial crime and annual refresher training for all employees on the Code
of Conduct (which incorporates anti-financial crime guidance) arranged
by the Legal Compliance team. The Group ensures compliance with the
policy in line with our risk-based approach by conducting ad hoc checks
on completion of the mandatory training set out above, providing specific
training to areas of potential higher risk (e.g. Procurement and Commercial
& Estates), and carrying out detailed investigations into allegations
of potential wrongdoing (whistle blows) received from employees,
customers and suppliers.
142 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
The potential consequences for colleagues and the Group itself are clearly
set out in the policy as are the processes for raising concerns. Any breaches
or failure to adhere to the Group’s strict standards of integrity and honesty
will be subject to disciplinary action, up to and including dismissal from
the Company. All employees are required to report any circumstances
or any suspicions of fraud, bribery, corruption or other irregularities,
either to a line manager or by using the Group’s confidential whistleblowing
service Speak Up.
The Legal Compliance team (in conjunction with the Internal Audit function
and Group Tax team) created a revised financial crime risk assessment
framework in April 2024 to incorporate the requirements of the Economic
Crime and Corporate Transparency Act 2023. The framework includes
an annual:
Combined business-wide bribery and fraud risk assessment process
led by the Legal Compliance team.
Tax evasion risk assessment led by the Group Tax team.
Review of the money laundering suspicious activity report process
led by the Head of Legal Compliance in conjunction with the Group
Treasury team.
The framework is complemented by the annual review of corporate policies
(led by the Legal Compliance team) relating to financial crime prevention.
These are presented to the Board for approval at their September meeting.
These include:
Code of Conduct (including introductory message stressing
the importance of compliance from Group CEO)
Gifts and Hospitality
Anti-Financial Crime Policy; and
Whistleblowing Policy and investigation process.
Allegations of financial crime are reported to the Audit Committee together
with investigation outcomes and details of any action taken, which
are disclosed to our external auditors. There were no confirmed cases
of bribery, corruption, fraud, or business ethics violations during the year.
Training and communications
Our comprehensive programme of training and internal communications
continues with targeted messaging and interactive training sessions.
This programme addresses the business’s key compliance risk areas and
has been designed to increase resilience, heighten awareness, and promote
a culture of doing the right thing. From 2024, colleagues will be required to
complete refresher compliance training (focussed on the Code of Conduct
which signposts to all Group policies) on a yearly basis to ensure that
continuous knowledge and understanding of our policies are maintained.
Whistleblowing policy – Speak Up
The Speak Up service encourages employees and our suppliers to raise
concerns about suspected wrongdoing or unlawful or unethical conduct,
explains how any such concerns should be raised and ensures that
employees and suppliers are able to do so without fear of reprisal.
The Group’s whistleblowing policy, investigator training programme
and investigation process were reviewed and reapproved in March 2024.
The whistleblowing policy now reflects the Ofwat best practice
recommendations published in November 2023 and specifically
encourages the reporting of:
Endangering someone’s health and safety.
Anything that is against the law.
Stealing or fraud.
Corrupt or dishonest activity.
Damage to the environment.
Covering up wrongdoing.
Abuse of authority.
Intentionally misreporting to a regulatory body.
Bullying, harassment and/or victimisation.
Tax evasion of the facilitation of tax evasion.
The Speak Up service comprises telephone and web-based reporting
channels operated for Pennon by independent provider NAVEX Global.
Following receipt of a report, the allegation will be triaged to assess
if the issue is a personal grievance or has a wider public interest element,
and an investigation started promptly if in the public interest to do so.
The investigation process is overseen by the Ethics Management Committee
and will be undertaken fairly, impartially, and thoroughly by appropriately
trained investigators with strict confidentiality being maintained at all
stages of the investigation. After each investigation, a confidential review
is undertaken by the Head of Legal Compliance to identify any lessons
learnt, or organisational improvements or training requirements.
Other improvements identified are always acted upon, while ensuring
the paramount requirement of operating a whistleblowing process that
protects the identity of individuals and the independence and integrity
of the process. Our whistleblowing process is designed to support our staff,
reflect shared responsibility, promote a positive culture, provide unique
insights and is central to our system of checks and balances.
143Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
ESG Committee report
Iain Evans
Chair of the ESG Committee
The ESG Committee (the Committee)
supports the Company’s ongoing
commitment to environmental
stewardship.
Dear Shareholder
I am pleased to report on the ESG Committee’s activities and achievements
during 2023/24. Paul Boote resigned as Group Chief Financial Officer and as
member of the Committee in December 2023, we are immensely grateful for
Paul’s contributions to our ESG obligations throughout the years. I continue
to be supported by an experienced Committee who focus on governing our
ESG activity and disclosure and ensuring we continue to be a responsible
business and creating a positive long-term impact on the environment and all
our stakeholders and I’d like to thank them for their work and input thisyear.
Our approach to ESG ensures that everything we do supports our
commitment providing environmental stewardship and supporting our local
communities and customers. A broad range of ESG topics were considered
by the Committee during the year while fulfilling its duties in accordance
with its terms of reference, which were also refreshed and approved during
the year. The Committee closely monitored its wide range of ESG measures,
targets and environmental KPIs alongside compliance and assurance
activities, which showed strong performance throughout the year. A strategic
leadership approach to areas of improvement, particularly in our energy
usage in renewable energy generation, pollution and spills incidents was
demonstrated, with remediation activities underway to ensure performances
are stronger for 2024/25. Our strong progress on existing regulatory
commitments and plans on our Group ESG targets, through to 2025, have
been further identified in “Our Integrated Approach to ESG” on page 67,
andthe key focus areas for the Committee in 2024/2025 are noted in the
“Focus areas for 2024/25” below.
Committee
members
Date of
appointment to the
ESG Committee Attendance
Iain Evans September 2018
Gill Rider September 2012
Susan Davy March 2018
Jon Butterworth July 2020
Dorothy Burwell December 2022
Paul Boote
1
July 2020
1. Paul ceased to be a member of the Committee following his resignation on 31
st
December 2023.
Role of the ESG Committee
Review the policies, management, initiatives and performance of the
Group with respect to the environment, workplace policies, Group
governance and corporate policies relating to responsible and ethical
business practices, the role of the Group in society and customer service
and engagement.
Review the overarching environmental performance of the business,
ensuring a focus on key areas of improvement.
Review the actions of the Group to determine the suitability of
theworkplace environmental policies and practices of key suppliers
andcontractors.
Review the extent and effectiveness of the Group’s external reporting
of sustainability performance and its participation in relevant external
benchmarking indices.
Regularly report to the Board.
Advise the Audit Committee of any material non-financial risks.
The key successes of the Committee’s focus for 2023/24
Reviewed the external 2023 ESG Assessment scores and approved the
work being undertaken to improve these.
Successfully achieved the majority of 2023/24 ESG targets.
Successful progress made against the majority of environmental KPIs,
including WINEP delivery, biodiversity and achieving 100% EDMs
installations.
Approved the creation of the environmental advisory panel for PR24.
Successfully achieved the framework for migration to new capital
delivery for PR24.
Carried out deep dive reviews on supply chain processes for the
Company.
Continued delivery of TCFD and TNFD recommendations including
detailed appraisal of transition risks and opportunities and scenario
analysis.
Preparation post the disbanding of TCFD for the new IFRS S2 climate-
related disclosures.
144 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
The Committee engaged in a deep dive on how we measure ESG
performance through our supply chain processes and ensured that
sustainable principles and practices are inherent in the Group’s activities.
Following this session, the Committee endorsed that, as part of its ESG
improvement programme, supplier ESG measures be assessed against
stakeholder, regulatory and investor requirements to ensure alignment with
our sustainability ambitions.
The Committee approved the creation of an environmental advisory panel in
September 2023, as part of the PR24 submission. The independent panel will
provide expert and independent advice, help challenge our environmental
activities, and demonstrate our commitment to focusing on environmental
outcomes, which are of great importance to our stakeholders.
In line with our TCFD requirements, we have disclosed climate-related
financial information on pages 78. These disclosures evidence our strategy
to reduce emissions within our operations and through our supply chain
to achieve Net Zero by 2030. The Committee had oversight of our climate
related governance, ensuring that climate change management was
integrated into our principal risks.
This Annual Report provides an integrated assessment to show how a
responsible approach to sustainability helps us to balance the immediate and
longer-term needs of society with the delivery of sustained commercialsuccess.
ESG performance
The ESG Committee continues to assess performance against a range
of challenging targets for the Group, set as part of the business planning
process. The Committee reviewed and monitored 2025 targets ensuring
that the metrics, ODIs, Operational Service assessments and ESG targets
continue to align with the strategic themes identified in the Committee’s
materiality assessment. The Committee agreed that the targets for 2024/25
should be published in this Annual Report on page 68.
In addition, the ESG Committee provides assessment and oversight of South
West Water’s performance against sustainability targets that are core to
the successful delivery of its five year business plan. This is consistent with
Ofwat’s requirement for independent governance of the regulated business.
As at 31
st
March 2024, Pennon achieved 15 of our 16 targets for 2023 and are
currently on track to meet our 2025 targets. Whilst we have continued to invest
in solar generation, energy usage has continued to be higher than the baseline
(driven by increased pumping and treatment to respond to the extreme wet
weather this year). This has resulted in generation as a proportion of total
usage being lower than targeted for the year..
Enhanced reporting and assurance
With a growing focus on ESG reporting, we are increasing our 2024 reporting
suite and providing enhanced disclosure through our SASB disclosure which
can be found on page 74, and our ESG databook which is available to view at
www.pennon-group.co.uk/sustainability.
Pennon’s ESG reporting is integrated throughout the strategic report and
specifically in the following sections:
Section Page
Chair’s letter 4
Chief Executive Officer’s review 5
Business model 22
Strategy overview 4
Key performance indicators 42
Environmental performance 23
Social performance 25
Governance performance 112
Stakeholder overview 126
Our people strategy 25
Our operations 32
Other related reporting including our Gender Pay Gap report, Climate
Change Adaptation Report and Net Zero plan can be found on our website
www.pennon-group.co.uk/sustainability.
Pennon’s ESG performance and reporting has been assured by DNV, an
independent management consultancy specialising in technical assurance
in the utility sector. DNV’s method of assurance includes testing the
assumptions, definitions, methods, and procedures that are followed in
the development of data and the auditing thereof to ensure accuracy and
consistency. The assurance statement can be found on our website at www.
pennon-group.co.uk/sustainability.
Certain disclosures within this Annual Report that relate to the sustainability
performance of South West Water and Bristol Water have been subject to
an independent audit of regulatory data conducted by Jacobs. DNV has
reviewed the consolidation of these into total Pennon data where stated, but
not their preparation.
Jacobs are engaged to independently audit South West Water’s and
Bristol Water’s technical (non-financial) data relating to our Outcome
Delivery Incentives published in its Annual Performance Report (APR);
this includes all regulatory targets, including a suite of environmental
performance indicators. This year, Turner and Townsend have conducted
an independent audit of other non-financial data, also included in the APR.
This includes allSouth West Water regulatory targets, including the suite
of environmental performance indicators. Jacobs provide a report on this
audit within SouthWest Water’s APR. Similarly, Turner & Townsend conduct
an independent audit of Bristol Water’s technical (non-financial) data,
alsopublished in theAPR.
Benchmarking
It’s important to us to ensure we are regularly benchmarked against the
expected industry standards. This ensures we are continuing to provide
up to date disclosure for our stakeholders. Certain leading indices assess
companies on their disclosures relating to stringent environmental, social
and governance criteria, and their capacity to capitalise on the benefits of
responsible business practice. Pennon is a constituent within the FTSE4Good
Index, Sustainalytics, CDP Climate Change, S&P Global CSA, and a number
of other leading external ESG assessments. FTSE4Good and similar leading
indices are designed to facilitate investment in companies that meet globally
recognised corporate responsibility standards.
Our latest external assessment scores as at 31
st
March 2024 are included on
page 67 with improvements and maintenance of our strong position seen
in all of the assessments. An action plan to enable the Group to become
asignatory of the UN Global Compact, the largest corporate sustainability
initiative is underway, and next steps in becoming SBTi verified have
beencompleted.
Focus areas for 2024/25
Embed the results of our extensive materiality assessment due to be
completed in 2024 to set our future environmental targets.
Review our ESG assessments in line with incoming legislation - UK
Sustainability Disclosure Standards (UK SDS).
Engage in diverse deep dive sessions across the ESG areas.
Further integration of ESG across the entire Group, including supply
chainmeasures.
Expansion of community impact evaluation and reporting.
Review performance on how the company is fulfilling its purpose and
itsexternal ESG benchmarking.
Undertake Committee governance matters such as its rolling calendar
of agenda items, annual Committee evaluation and examination of
Committee’s terms of reference.
Preparation for the disbanding of TCFD and the new IFRS S2 climate
related disclosures.
Iain Evans
ESG Committee Chair
20
th
May 2024
145Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Health and Safety Committee report
The Health and Safety Committee (the
Committee) promotes a culture of safety
within the Company.
Role of the Health & Safety Committee
Review and challenge to support the Board and Executive on all matters
connected to Health and Safety.
Review the extent and effectiveness of the Group’s reporting of health
and safety performance and compare to external benchmarks.
Regularly report to the Board.
Advise the Audit Committee of any material non-financial risks.
The Committee’s focus for 2023/24
During the year, the Committee considered a wide range of matters in the
course of fulfilling its duties in accordance with its terms ofreference:
Half yearly comprehensive reviews of the Group’s Health
&Safetyperformance.
A review of the tactical interventions to deliver in year improvements
inincident reduction.
A review of the HomeSafe 2025 strategy and plans to increase
robustness in Process Safety.
A review and challenge of high potential near-miss events to ensure
themes are identified and pragmatic solutions implemented.
Visiting operational sites to engage with front-line colleagues and the
wider Health and Safety teams.
Committee
members
Date of
appointment to
Health & Safety
Committee Attendance
Jon Butterworth November 2020
Iain Evans November 2020
Dorothy Burwell December 2022
Susan Davy November 2020
Paul Boote
1
November 2020
1. Paul Boote stepped down from the Board on 31
st
December 2023.
Dear Shareholder
I am pleased to provide an update on the Health & Safety (H&S) Committee’s
activities during the year.
I believe the key to ensuring we keep employees safe and well in the
workplace, is through empowering everyone to take responsibility for the
health, safety and wellbeing of each other and for themselves. Simply put, it’s
about culture, leadership and accountability. This underpins the HomeSafe
strategy and has been a welcome focus over the last 12 months. A personal
highlight for me this year, as Chair of the Committee, was celebrating Pennon
Water Services’ fourth lost time injury free year (employee and agency). This
is a great achievement that highlights the hard work of both the health and
safety teams and the Pennon Water Services’ employees who embed the
HomeSafe values into their work every day.
Our dedicated Board Committee, focused purely on H&S, ensures the Board
continues to support our HomeSafe strategy and the Group’s vision that
everyone goes home safe every day. We continue to strive to be a leader of
H&S by 2025 in our sector, and leadership from the top is critical. The Board
has dedicated time to visit operational sites, discuss and review performance,
offer support, encourage learning, and meet department and site leaders and
employees from across the business.
Reviewing the Group’s health and safety performance, effectiveness of health
and safety policies and procedures, including the continued roll-out of the
HomeSafe strategy, has been core, with significant improvements already
noted. I was delighted that the Committee was able to support the HomeSafe
Live event this year. The event, which changed formats from previous years,
was brought to life with engaging workshops delivered over six days at six
different venues within the South West. The interactive workshops had core
health and wellbeing messages featured throughout and allowed employees
to engage directly with senior leadership.
Importantly, the Committee reviews deep dives of High Potential Incidents
with a particular focus on lessons learned, getting to the root cause,
encouraging a learning mindset. These reviews highlight the improvements
in culture, leadership and accountability through open and honest
investigations seeking to learn and improve and deliver pragmatic solutions.
Jon Butterworth
Chair of the Health and Safety Committee
146 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Building on the first Pennon Group H&S conference I attended last year, the
Group held two more conferences through the year building on the themes
of Taking Ownership. These events were led by the Senior Leaders across
the Group demonstrating personal commitment and leadership in health
and safety. Over 2,300 colleagues attended, taking time to focus solely on
their role in supporting our HomeSafe ambitions. Along with other elements
within the HomeSafe plan, these events have supported a tangible increase
in overall ownership of HomeSafe and have undoubtedly contributed to the
step change reduction in incidents this year.
H&S Committee composition
All Board members are attendees and served throughout the year, with
support from the Group Chief People Officer and Pennon’s H&S Director.
Reporting
In addition to the regular Board report by the Group Chief Executive Officer,
detailed performance is reviewed quarterly by the Executive team, and six-
monthly by this Committee, focusing on performance, benchmarking, and
lead activities such as leadership and engagement, hazard rectification, asset
health, critical safety controls and working environment.
Leaders have taken accountability and driven significant improvements in
the lead areas. This has supported the step change reduction in outcome
metrics, with the Lost Time Injury Frequency Rate (LTIFR), employees and
agency, excluding contractors, reducing through the year by 50%.
The HomeSafe strategy continues to drive improvements and is regularly
reviewed to ensure it drives us towards our 2025 aims, and beyond.
The Committee will continue to review and challenge plans and performance
to support our HomeSafe ambitions, with a detailed roadmap to 2025 built on
six key pillars.
Jon Butterworth
Chair of the Health and Safety Committee
20
th
May 2024
HomeSafe
strategy
The Group’s flagship H&S programme,
HomeSafe, continues to provide the
framework for driving significant
improvements in all health and safety
activities and impacts. HomeSafe is
built on the six strategic pillars:
1. Managing Risk
2. Sharing and Learning
3. Working Together
4. Protecting Health
5. Enabling Leaders
6. Being Resilient
Read more on pages 28.
147Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
147Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Remuneration Committee report
The role of the Remuneration Committee
is to set and implement executive pay
ina fair and socially responsible manner.
Role of the Remuneration Committee
Ensure remuneration is aligned with the Group’s strategy and reflects
the values of the Group.
Determine the Remuneration Policy to ensure it remains appropriate,
considering shareholders’ views and best practice, supports attraction,
retention and motivation of Executive Directors .
Advise the Board on the framework of executive remuneration for the Group.
Set the remuneration level for the Chair, the Executive Directors
and senior executives of the Group and review the remuneration
arrangements of the wider workforce.
Approve the design and determine targets for any performance-related
pay schemes.
Determine the appropriate outturn of any incentive arrangements.
The Committee’s focus for 2023/24
Consider the remuneration and terms of engagement of the
Executive Directors, senior executives and Chair of the Group and the
remuneration of the wider workforce.
Determine the appropriate long-term incentive arrangements for
the Group over the next 3-5 years engaging with stakeholders as
appropriate.
Determine targets that remain stretching, relevant to the Group’s strategy
and values and reflect best practice and wider stakeholders’ views.
Committee
members
Date of
appointment to
Remuneration
Committee Attendance
Claire Ighodaro July 2020
Iain Evans September 2018
Loraine Woodhouse December 2022
Dorothy Burwell December 2022
Dear Shareholder
I am pleased to present the Directors’ remuneration report for the year
ended31
st
March 2024.
The Committee’s approach to Executive remuneration has always been
underpinned by doing what is right for our customers, investors, wider
stakeholders, the communities in which we operate and the environment.
Our values and integrity are reflected in the decisions we make, and in
focusing incentives on what matters most as a socially responsible business
and providing transparency on outcomes. Whether you are a shareholder,
a customer or the regulator, we all have a shared interest in ensuring water
companies are performance driven, sustainable, financially resilient, mindful
of our impact on the environment and able to make the substantial capital
investment required in infrastructure in order to ensure the long-term
viability of the sector. We continue to believe that the sector needs to
be able to attract the high-quality talent required to lead large, complex
organisations, by incentivising and rewarding management teams fairly
forthe outcomes achieved.
Claire Ighodaro
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
We are mindful of the views of the public and the regulator. Over the
course of the year, I have engaged with Ofwat and sought feedback on our
approach as well as contributing to wider sector considerations as to how
executive remuneration can evolve to ensure that all stakeholders can see
transparency and clarity in decisions on performance related pay, and I know
from my conversations with shareholders that this is a shared ambition too.
Turning to the performance in year, we have delivered record levels of
investment spend as we focus on underpinning our operations to deliver
improved performance and in driving cumulative RCV growth of 65% since
the start of K7, along with record support for customers of £100 million.
Our acquisition of SES Water in January 2024 was an important milestone
in our continuing strategy of growth within the water sector. We are fast-
tracking through the Competition and Markets Authority’s review of the
acquisition, and we look forward to welcoming a further 470 colleagues
to theGroup, securing jobs, as well as providing financial resilience and
improved investment for the c.750,000 people we serve in Sutton and East
Surrey. Our strong shareholder support continues to be demonstrated by
the over-subscription of our equity raise conducted in connection with
the acquisition. The development and excellent customer service of the
B2B retailers, Pennon Water Services and Water2Business, has doubled
profitability and market share.
Our ambitious business plan for the regulatory period 2025-30 was
submitted to Ofwat on 2
nd
October 2023, detailing our largest ever
investment of £2.8 billion in the region. The plan creates 2,000 jobs providing
valuable careers, supporting customers and communities across the South
West and the wider supply chain. Our customers, many of whom are also
shareholders through our unique WaterShare+ scheme, engaged in the
development of our plans, giving feedback and confirming what matters
mostto them now and for the future.
148 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Our performance over the last financial year has continued to deliver
outperformance on base returns, enabling reinvestment that will improve
service quality over the longer term. Although our profit before tax and
earnings per share results reflect the impact of exceptional levels of UK
inflation on our debt instruments, the underlying financial results remain
robust as demonstrated by EBITDA of £338.3 million. We also remain on track
to deliver our ambitious Net Zero programme by 2030 with our £59 million
investment in Pennon Power, on track to deliver 135 GWh annual storage.
Our investments in water storage with the opening of two mini reservoirs
have contributed to the achievement of 100% strategic reservoir capacity in
the year and ahead of target.
However, we recognise that there remains scope for improvement in our
wastewater services across Devon and Cornwall as we work towards our
stretching targets, and as weather impacts and increased flows have affected
the headline performance of pollutions and the use of storm overflows with a
re-profiled delivery plan to achieve 4-star rating for 2025.
Wider Workforce Remuneration
We are committed to ensuring remuneration for our front-line colleagues is
competitive, understanding that this is the right priority when the financial
landscape is challenging. We are proud that we have been an accredited
Living Wage Foundation payer since 2021, and in practice we had aligned our
pay rates to these recommended levels for some time prior to accreditation.
Our strong 2023 pay settlement ensured we remained in this position across
the Group despite both Living Wage Foundation rates and National Minimum
Wage rates increasing substantially.
The 2024 pay award reflects our most progressive pay award to date,
continuing to focus on front line roles with an increase valued at 4.6%
inclusive of 1 day additional holiday for the majority of colleagues. Those on
salaries above £50,000 will receive an increase valued at 4.4% inclusive of
holiday. We are proud that our employees will earn a minimum of £12.50 per
hour, which not only aligns with, but exceeds the real living wage by almost
£1,000 annually, underscoring our dedication to being an employer of choice.
During 2023/24 we updated our Group Reward Principles to reflect the
broader strategy, evolving composition of the Group and recent acquisition
activity which has expanded our workforce across multiple locations. Key
areas of focus included the addition of new Group Values, strengthening
wellbeing and incorporation of greater employee flexibility either in work
patterns or in choices of lifestyle benefits.
We also took time to reflect on our annual bonus for colleagues, ensuring
clear line of sight between their objectives and the Group strategy, our
customers and their communities. Our annual bonus plans allow our
colleagues to share in the Group’s success. We also offer highly competitive
retirement benefits to our employees, which include additional life
assuranceprotection.
Our HMRC-approved share schemes continue to be popular with c.50% of
colleagues participating in either the ShareSave or Share Incentive Plan.
We have once again provided expanded disclosure on our approach for the
wider workforce, and this is set out on page 155.
Remuneration Policy review
Our Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the AGM in July
2023, receiving strong shareholder support of 93.6%.
As flagged in last year’s Directors’ remuneration report, following the AGM
we undertook a thorough review of our pay structures in the context of
the recent business plan submission required by Ofwat and our strategic
priorities, with a focus on ensuring the approach to pay continues to drive
delivery of the long-term strategy.
As part of this process, we consulted with our largest shareholders and
other stakeholders on potentially moving to restricted stock as the primary
long-term incentive vehicle for senior executives. Whilst there were a range
of views from investors during consultation, we were pleased to note that the
majority of our major shareholders were supportive of making this change.
However, it was also very apparent that pay in the water sector continues
to attract significant external scrutiny and guidance from the regulator
continues to evolve. In this context we ultimately concluded that this was not
the right time to make wholesale changes to our pay model. We will continue
to consider the approach to executive remuneration over the coming years,
taking into account our business strategy and the evolving views of our
various stakeholders, including Ofwat.
I would like to thank investors who provided feedback during the
consultation process. We will continue to appropriately engage with
ourmajor investors regarding any potential changes in future years.
Although we are not making significant changes to pay at this juncture,
the Committee remain acutely aware of the challenges with recruiting and
retaining senior talent in the sector.
Incentive Outcomes
Following guidance provided by Ofwat, we have taken steps to ensure that
performance-related pay outcomes for the executive directors are funded
atthe Group level and will therefore not be funded by customers.
As well as considering formulaic results against targets, the Committee also
review outcomes in-the-round, utilising our holistic performance assessment
framework to ensure that outcomes are considered from a number
ofperspectives.
For 2023/24, we increased the portion of the annual bonus linked to
outcomes for our customers, communities, and the environment to 60%
consistent with regulator guidance with the balance based on a target linked
to financial resilience. Further changes to the detailed assessment were
made to capture feedback provided by Ofwat.
The Committee carefully considered the formulaic outcome of the annual
bonus of 46.5% of maximum and debated this at length. After applying
the Committee's discretion framework in respect of South West Water's
environmental and pollution performance, it was decided to reduce the
formulaic outturn to 38.5%. Furthermore, in recognition of the current
external environment, the Committee determined that no bonus would
bepaid to Executive Directors in respect of the year. This was consistent
with management’s recommendation for a zero bonus outturn.
Further details of incentive outcomes are set out in the main body of
thereport.
149Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Board changes
As previously announced, Paul Boote stepped down as CFO and from the
Board on 31
st
December 2023, as part of a planned relocation away from
the South West. Paul’s departure terms are consistent with the shareholder
approved Remuneration Policy. Further detail is set on out on page 163.
The Board were delighted to appoint Steve Buck as Group Chief Financial
Officer. Steve joined the Group and was appointed to the Board in November
2023, assuming the role of CFO effective 1
st
January 2024. Steve is a proven
CFO with considerable experience in the regulated utilities and energy
sector, and a demonstrable track record for driving performance.
Steve was appointed on a salary of £470,000, modestly positioned
3.6% higher than his previous salary within the water sector. Whilst we
recognise that this represents a material increase relative to the previous
incumbent, his uplift in salary is substantially lower than typical premia paid
to executives when changing roles. Steve’s salary in his previous role was
positioned between the median and upper quartile of FTSE 250 reference
points. Taking into account sector practice, the market pay levels observed
during the recruitment process, and most importantly Steve’s experience,
the Committee was comfortable that the salary had been appropriately
positioned. Other ongoing elements of Steve’s package are in line with the
Remuneration Policy.
Steve was also granted buyout awards in connection with awards forfeited
upon leaving his former employer on a broadly like-for-like basis. Whilst all of
these awards were due to be delivered in cash, it was considered appropriate
to deliver a portion of these in Pennon shares to provide alignment with
shareholders in line with best practice. Full details of Steve’s joining
arrangements are set out on page 162.
Implementation for 2024/25
For 2024/25 both the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have
been awarded salary increases of 4%. This is below the average increase
awarded to the wider workforce, where increases ranged from 4% to 4.2%,
with increases at the upper end of this range focused on our lowest earners.
With an additional day of holiday, overall value ranges from 4.4% to 4.6%.
In light of evolving Ofwat guidance the Committee is currently undertaking a
review of targets for variable incentives. Consistent with the approach taken
in prior years, the annual bonus will seek to include metrics that suitably
capture long-term financial resilience as well as metrics which are directly
linked to matters of importance for our customers, communities and the
environment. Annual objectives are deemed to be commercially sensitive,
and consistent with prior years full details of the metrics and targets will be
disclosed in next year's Directors’ Remuneration Report.
As part of the 2023 review of the Remuneration Policy, the performance
criteria for the LTIP were refined in order to incorporate an element directly
linked to Water Quality and the Environment. While the current intention is
to maintain a broadly similar structure for the 2024 awards, the detail is yet
to be finalised as the Committee is keen to ensure that the targets suitably
reflect the objectives for the next regulatory cycle, the acquisition of SES
Water and evolving Ofwat guidance. Once finalised, we intend to publish the
targets on the Company’s website
In line with the approach for 2023/24, performance-related pay outcomes for
the executive directors will be funded at Group level and will not be funded
by customers.
The Remuneration Committee remains committed to implementing a
measured and responsible approach to executive pay, whilst also recognising
the challenging roles of our Executive Directors. As a Committee we are
acutely aware of our responsibility to do the right thing and this has been
reflected in decisions made and voting support at previous AGMs. We look
forward to our continued dialogue with shareholders and your continued
support at the 2024 AGM.
Claire Ighodaro CBE
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
20
th
May 2024
150 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Directors’ remuneration report
At a glance
What is the structure of executive pay?
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
Base salary
Benefits
Retirement benefits
Bonus: 50% in cash 50% deferred into shares for three years
LTIP: subject to three-year performance period Subject to a two-year holding period
Shareholding guideline: Executive Directors are expected to build up a shareholding equivalent to 200% of salary
What safeguards are in place?
Robust performance
conditions
Variable pay linked to
a rounded assessment
of performance against
stretching targets
Review framework
Holistic review of
performance to consider if
formulaic incentive outcomes
are fair and appropriate
Deferral and holding
periods
Bonus (50%) and LTIP
awards are deferred for a
further period to provide
long-term alignment
Malus and clawback
Provisions in place for
variable pay to safeguard
against payments for failure
How does executive pay link to our strategy?
Performance measures
Customer
measures
Responsible
Business
Environment &
Pollutions
Water Quality &
Resilience Financial Resilience
Strategic pillars (1,2,3,4) (1,2,4) (1,2,3,4) (1,3) (1,2,3,4)
2023/24 bonus
2023 LTIP
Our strategic pillars: (1) Water Supply & Resilience (2) Storm Overflows & Pollution (3) Environmental Gain & Net Zero
(4) Addressing Affordability & Delivering for Customers
How did we perform?
Performance highlights
Group capital investment up 80%
on2022/23
2023/24 bonus measures
Water group gearing c.63.5%
Group Liquidity in excess of £1bn
100% bathing water quality
for the third consecutive year
9.9% growth in underlying EBITDA
Investing c.£145m
in renewable energy generation
Record support for customers
ofc.£100m
K7 to date
Customers, communities and the
environment: 60%
Financial resilience:
40%
Environmental – licensed
water business: 39%
Environment – Pennon Power: 5%
Customer service: 12%
Responsible business: 4%
RORE: 50%
Water quality and environment: 30%
Customer experience: 20%
Customer metrics: 15%
WaterShare+ participation: 5%
Storm overflow reduction: 10%
EPA: 10%
Wastewater pollution reduction: 10%
2023 LTIP measures
What were the remuneration outturns for 2023/24?
£860k
£186k
Steve Buck CFO
Susan Davy CEO
Fixed pay Bonus (cash) Bonus (shares) LTIP
151Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Summary of Remuneration Policy and Implementation in 2024/25
The current Directors’ remuneration policy was approved by shareholders at the Company’s AGM held on 20
th
July 2023 and can be found on pages 152 to 157
of the 2023 Annual Report and Accounts. A summary of the policy is set out below alongside detail on how we intend to implement the policy in 2024/25.
Fixed pay
Salaries generally reviewed annually,
with increases effective 1
st
April.
Benefits provided are consistent with
the market and level of seniority to
aid retention of key skills to assist in
meeting strategic objectives.
Pensions are aligned with maximum rate
available to wider workforce.
Salary
Salary increases of 4% effective for FY24/25 for Executive Directors. Increases are in line with the average increase
valued between 4.4% and 4.6% inclusive of additional holiday for the wider workforce.
Salaries from 1
st
April 2024:
Group Chief Executive – £511,290 Group Chief Financial Officer – £488,800
Benefits, including pension-related benefits
Benefits currently include the provision of a company vehicle, fuel, health insurance and life assurance.
Executive Directors pension-related benefits are in line with the maximum rate available to the wider workforce (10%
of salary).
Annual bonus
Maximum bonus potential is 125% of
base salary.
Normally 50% of any bonus is deferred
into shares released after three years.
Malus and clawback provisions apply.
FY24/25 – Continued strong link to customer, communities and the environment
In light of evolving Ofwat guidance the Committee is currently undertaking a review of targets for variable incentives.
Consistent with the approach taken in prior years, the annual bonus will seek to include metrics that suitably capture
long-term financial resilience as well as metrics which are directly linked to matters of importance for our customers,
communities and the environment. Annual objectives are deemed to be commercially sensitive, and therefore full
details of the metrics and targets will be disclosed in next year's Directors’ Remuneration Report.
Long-term incentive plan (LTIP)
Maximum annual award is 150% of base
salary.
3 year performance period, two-year
holding period.
Malus and clawback provisions apply.
2024 LTIP – Continued strong link to customer, communities and the environment
As part of the 2023 review of the Remuneration Policy, the performance criteria for the LTIP were refined in order
to incorporate an element directly linked to Water Quality and the Environment. While the current intention is to
maintain a broadly similar structure for the 2024 awards, the detail is yet to be finalised as the Committee is keen to
ensure that the targets suitably reflect the objectives for the next regulatory cycle, the acquisition of SES Water and
evolving Ofwat guidance. Once finalised, we intend to publish the targets on the Company’s website.
Shareholding requirements
During the course of their tenure, Executive Directors are expected to build up a shareholding equivalent to
200%ofsalary.
Departing Executive Directors will normally be expected to hold 200% of salary (or actual relevant holding, if lower)
on departure, with the guideline reducing to 100% of salary after 12 months.
152 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Annual report on remuneration
Oversight of Remuneration for the Wider Workforce
The Remuneration Committee considers oversight of remuneration for the
wider workforce as a key element of its remit and considers this when making
decisions regarding remuneration for the Executive Directors. The Committee
reviews a report on employee remuneration twice a year, either through a pay
dashboard, which contains information on elements of financial and non-
financial reward, the wider labour market, demographics and pay statistics
across the organisation or through a subject specific paper. This detail provides
important context to ensure that a consistent approach is adopted across the
Group workforce including the Executive Directors.
Developments in the financial and non-financial elements of the employee
proposition are reviewed regularly, as well as share scheme participation
and emerging reward trends. The Committee reflects on the position of our
gender and ethnicity pay. Feedback to the Committee from employees is
through RISE - our employee engagement forum through the Executive
Directors on matters concerning remuneration arrangements.
Our Reward Strategy and Approach for the Wider Workforce
Our well-established People Strategy across the Group is centred around
talented people doing great things for customers and each other and creating
the best place to work. The Reward strategy and framework which was
established in 2019 has been reviewed and updated during 2023/24. The
updated framework reflects our changed Group composition, our latest business
strategy and plans and changing employee expectations. The new Group values
(see page 154) are incorporated. The framework will continue to set our approach
for future developments in the reward landscape for colleagues.
Pennon’s Group Reward Strategy continues to have three aims:
Aim 1
Ensure reward decisions will support:
Our business strategy for delivering to customers
and communities, and promoting long-term
sustainable growth
Our People strategy and values
Our alignment to stakeholder expectations
(e.ginvestors and regulators)
Aim 2
Ensure the reward package offered
toemployees is:
Designed and delivered fairly
Set up to enable the business to attract and retain
the talent that it needs to be successful
Supports employee engagement and motivation
Allows employees to hare in Group success
Aim 3
Clearly communicate to relevant
stakeholders our employee reward and
recognition principles and framework
Rewarding our colleagues
Salary increases for wider workforce
As in 2023, we have focused our pay spend on those colleagues who have
needed most support during the cost-of-living crisis. The 2024 pay award
continues to focus on front line roles with an increase valued at 4.6% inclusive
of 1 day additional holiday for the majority of colleagues. Those on salaries
above £50,000 receive an increase valued at 4.4% inclusive of holiday. We are
proud that our employees will earn a minimum of £12.50 per hour, which not
only aligns with, but exceeds the real living wage by almost £1,000 annually,
underscoring our dedication to being an employer of choice. For colleagues
covered by collective pay bargaining, the award remains subject to ballot.
During the year, we have completed a pilot of new working patterns in our
drinking water function. This has been designed with our colleagues and
union representatives to enable teams to benefit from a greater level of
guaranteed pay whilst providing the business with more pro-active resource
availability and less dependence on call out arrangements which can be
disruptive to family life. Wewill continue to evaluate work patterns for the
mutual benefit of customers, colleagues and operational needs during 2024.
Wider workforce bonus arrangements
All colleagues across the Group are eligible to participate in variable pay
schemes. Senior bonus arrangements follow the model applied to the Executive
Directors for their annual bonus incentive. Forthe wider workforce, bonus
arrangements were reviewed in 2023/24 with a new scheme taking effect from
1
st
January 2024. The new scheme has been constructed to reflect stretching
targets which support delivery of our Business Plan for 2025-2030, focusing on
water quality and resilience, storm overflows and pollution, our net zero agenda
and customer service and affordability. The scheme maintains a measure for our
imperative of all colleagues going HomeSafe each and every day.
Financial wellbeing and wider benefits
We offer a comprehensive range of benefits which have been extended
over the past two years to include the roll out of a financial well-being and
education partner for colleagues and their families. This includes an ill-
health income protection policy which has provided support to a number of
colleagues in 2023/24. We continue to operate a range of discounts, green
initiatives and services to enhance our employeeproposition.
Saving for the future
We know that our colleagues value our responsible approach to pension
contributions. We are pleased that despite the cost-of-living crisis, 95% of
colleagues continue to participate in the defined contribution schemes.
Our ShareSave scheme was again launched in 2023, continuing to support
our belief that employees should have a stake and say in the business.
TheShareSave sits alongside our evergreen Share Incentive Plan providing
employees with monthly share purchase from pre-tax salary. The 2023
ShareSave scheme received strong support from our colleagues and we look
forward to extending this and the Share Incentive Plan (SIP) to colleagues
in South East and Surrey Water at the earliest opportunity. We have seen
strong growth in participation in the SIP this year of c. 30%. In line with our
scheme rules, shareholder approval will be sought at the 2024 AGM for the
continued operation of our HMRC-approved schemes.
Living Wage Foundation
We continue to pay above the Living Wage Foundation rates for all roles
excluding those colleagues who are on our apprenticeship arrangements.
Our accreditation as a Living Wage Foundation employer has been maintained
since 2021. We continue to focus our pay spend on lower paidroles.
Wider workforce remuneration dashboard
In accordance with the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code, the Committee
reviews the level of information provided on pay matters in the wider
organisation. The Wider Workforce Remuneration Dashboard provides the
Remuneration Committee with an overview of the approach to pay across
the Group, supplemented with topic specific papers:
Helps support the Committee in reviewing workforce remuneration
andrelated policies which continually evolves to provide greater insight
Provides an overview of pay arrangements across the business and key
statistics on pay in different areas of the business
Updates on progress on our Reward Strategy implementation
Has oversight of the wider remuneration landscape to provide external
context and industry specifics to inform on our benefits
Provides information on workforce demographics, gender pay, pay ratios,
pension and benefits and incentive outcomes indifferent areas.
The Committee intends to keep the content of the dashboard under review
to ensure it remains suitable.
153Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Remuneration Committee report continued
Our Group People Strategy
We have an approved people strategy
which outlines our priorities and
aspirations.
The role of reward underpins our people strategy, proactively supporting
our ambition to be an employer of choice, able to retain top talent and drive
business success, rather than a stand-alone strategic element.
1. Culture
2. Attracting & retaining talent
3. Training & competence
4. Compliance & process
5. Organisational Design
6. Leadership & Succession
Talented
people doing
great things
For our customers
and one another
Total Reward
Our people strategy is supported by our reward principles,
which deliver our overall total reward framework:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Underpinned by our
Pennonvalues
Supported by reward strategy
& governance, job evaluation &
benchmarking, systems & data
Total Reward
Base pay Variable pay
&allowances
Saving for
thefuture
Benefits
Support the delivery of
Pennon people strategy
Our new values
Be you
We want you to bring your best every
day. Be open and inclusive, work
together and win as one team. Let
your passion inspire those around you.
Be authentic, make your mark and
be you.
Be rock solid
We want you to be the one we all look
up to. Be trusted. Act with integrity
and make good on your promises.
Build trust, one relationship at a time.
Be rock solid.
Be the
Be the future
We encourage you to be curious and
challenge convention. Share ideas
with confidence and purpose, and help
share our future. Embrace change.
Drive progress. Own the challenge.
Bethe future.
154 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Our Reward framework supports our People Strategy:
Pillar Highlights
Base pay
The Group’s overarching principles for basic pay are as follows:
Base pay should reflect the level of skills, responsibilities and accountabilities of the job, plus the market and region in which the
business area operates.
We should maintain a market competitive edge to attract and retain talent. Market benchmarking against recognised surveys
isconducted regularly.
We should maintain our status as an accredited Real Living Wage Employer, guaranteeing base pay at or above the Living Wage
Foundation rates.
We should review pay annually with any resulting award being subject to affordability and business performance.
We should ensure all roles are mapped to a pay band and publish the broad pay bands by work level on the Company’s intranet
annually from 2024.
We should engage with RISE, the WaterShare Customer Panel and Recognised Trade Unions on pay decisions.
We should undertake equal pay and gender/ethnicity pay analysis from time to time to ensure we comply with current equality
legislation and provide equal total reward opportunities for roles of equal value.
Variable pay
The Group operates variable pay schemes, including annual bonus arrangements and all employees and temporary workers are eligible
to participate. Throughout bonus schemes, there is strong correlation in the targets, to align the whole organisation on goals linked to
customer, communities and the environment. The maximum bonus levels are based on seniority and level of responsibility. At leadership
level a portion of the bonus is deferred into shares for three years.
Long-term incentive share awards are available to senior executives and Executive Directors, consistent with market practice. Our front-
line teams receive overtime, call-out and standby payments, ensuring that when workloads are high, employees are fairly compensated. We
remain mindful of the need to balance working hours, customer demand and available resource against the health, safety, wellbeing of our
colleagues and following a successful pilot earlier in the year, our overarching principles on variable pay are as follows:
Provide every colleague with the opportunity to earn an element of variable reward using appropriate mechanisms for different
colleague populations, as agreed by each business area.
Have clear communication on rationale, purpose, performance measures, pay-out calculation and other rules for the variable pay
schemes, to ensure colleagues fully understand their total reward opportunities.
Ensure the performance measures included in the balanced scorecard are aligned to our business strategy, values and take into
consideration the views of shareholders, customers, regulators and other key stakeholders.
Encourage colleagues to have share ownership delivered through variable pay.
Remuneration Committee or relevant Executive Committee can apply appropriate discretion to bonus outturn, considering the ‘how’ as
well as the ‘what’.
Saving for
thefuture
We offer highly competitive retirement benefits to our employees, which include additional life assurance protection. Membership of the
Group pension scheme remains high with a 95% participation rate in our Defined Contribution (DC) scheme. As part of our Saving for
the Future, all employees can participate in our HM Revenue and Customs-approved ShareSave and Share Incentive Plan, with a strong
emphasis on employee buy-in and ownership. We look forward to extending eligibility to our South East and Surrey colleagues at the
earliest opportunity. Not only do our share schemes provide a mechanism for sharing in the long-term success of the Group but mean that
colleagues and customers have a say and stake in the business.
Our overarching principles on Saving for the Future are as follows:
Provide every colleague with the opportunity to build up share ownership.
Clearly communicate and promote the existing share schemes to ensure maximum participation.
Ongoing exploration of HMRC-approved tax advantaged share scheme opportunities for broader offerings.
Provide every colleague with the access to our Defined Contribution pension scheme with the choice of employee/employer contribution levels.
Provide company matching in our Defined Contribution pension scheme to further support our colleagues saving for retirement.
Provide access to a fully interactive pension administrative platform and drop in sessions to ensure employees understand the offering
and implications to make informed decisions.
Comply with the government required pension enrolment requirements.
Benefits
We operate a range of benefits of which the majority are available to all colleagues. These are selected for their ability to enable colleagues
to get the best value from their salary such as discounts, to ensure a work life balance which supports both family life and outside interests
through generous holiday entitlements or those designed to bring financial security such as income protection or life assurance. A range
of advisory services are available to support colleagues on occasions where additional support is needed, including financial support,
health and wellbeing, legal advice and a range of employee led support groups. From time to time, there may be necessary exceptions that
apply to our core benefits, reflecting TUPE transfers or preserved contractual benefits. The principles for our benefits are as follows:
Operate a set of core Group-wide benefits for all colleagues, and a wide range of other additional offerings to enable colleagues select
the most appropriate benefits tailored to their needs.
Ongoing evaluation of the effectiveness of the benefits offering, ensuring we take full advantage of our Group-wide purchasing power
with benefits providers, and we are aligned with our Fair Tax Strategy and HMRC guidelines.
Actively engage with employees to understand their needs to continue shaping our benefits proposition.
Adopt technology to enable easy access to our benefits from home or work.
Continue to focus on developing our wellbeing and flexible working provisions, and explore additional benefits provision opportunities
to support our broader ESG agenda (e.g. green voluntary benefits, volunteering days etc).
155Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Remuneration Committee report continued
Gender and Ethnicity pay reporting
We recognise our duty to contribute positively to society by cultivating an
environment that promotes social mobility, prioritises diversity and inclusion,
and ensures equitable treatment for all employees. Our aspiration is to
become the Employer of Choice across our region, where trust is paramount,
and every individual is valued for their contributions. Transparency lies
attheheart of our commitment to diversity and inclusion. Reporting serves
as a vital instrument in our journey towards openness, allowing us to candidly
assess the gender and ethnic diversity within our workforce. Moreover, it
enables us to share the proactive measures we have implemented and will
continue to pursue to enhance diversity across all levels and roles within
our organisation. We understand that fostering an inclusive workplace is
imperative not only for attracting talent but also for retaining our valued
colleagues and because it is the right thing to do.
During 2022/23, in line with our Change the Race Ratio commitments, we
voluntarily published our Ethnicity Pay Gap data for the first time. The results
reflect our journey in building representation of ethnic minority groups and
gender diversity across Pennon, noting that the South West, where a large
proportion of our business is based, has a lower diversity mix than other parts
of the UK. Our ethnicity pay gap is 0.17%. Across the Group we have been
working hard to attract a greater number of ethnically diverse candidates to
apply for job vacancies, and we offer dedicated support to new employees
through our graduate programme and support the 10,000 Black Interns
Programme. We will continue to work to progress our diversity actions to
build greater representation.
Our Group gender pay gap remained constant at 8.51%. As we look to
develop female representation at all levels, we continue to focus on creating
an environment for women to thrive and develop their careers and we have
seen female representation in the upper-quartile grow from 16.9% in 2018
tothe current level of 25.6%.
During the year we have been recognised for our progression in gender
equality by external bodies. Our placement in the FTSE 250 Women Leaders
Review reflected our high participation of female Board members resulting
inPennon ranking 3
rd
for Women on Boards in the FTSE 250 and 21
st
overall.
We are committed to deliver on our ambitions to build diversity and inclusion
across the Group and the water Industry.
Our Group Values
Our Group values were launched in 2023 and underpin our Reward
Strategy as well as our culture and will be reflected in individual and team
remuneration, recognising and rewarding colleagues who showcase the
Group values helping us to deliver what matters most to our customers
andcommunities in the regions we serve. More can be read on the launch
onpage 25.
Colleague engagement
RISE, our people forum has now been in place for 2 years, providing a two-
way dialogue for all colleagues across the Group. This is regularly attended
by senior leadership including the Group Chief Executive Officer, South
West Water Director of People and Culture, the Group Chief People Officer
and other members of the senior leadership. RISE is an established group
provoking healthy debate and discussion on areas that matter to employees
including reward. Representation is strong, with a RISE member for every
30 employees. This group continues to be a key source of dialogue and
employee views for shaping future reward developments. The Committee is
kept informed of themes and feedback from RISE discussions.
We hold regular meetings with the recognised trades union representatives,
keeping them informed of business developments and the People Strategy
and recognising their role for colleague feedback and the insights they can
provide on behalf of their members on a wide range of topics. Across the
Group we consult on the pay of all colleagues. This will either be through the
collective bargaining agreement in place with recognised trades unions or
through our RISE panel for those outside of these arrangements.
HomeSafe
Making sure our colleagues and contractors get HomeSafe every day is
fundamentally more important than remuneration. However, how we measure
our performance, reward colleagues living by our values and the culture we
create, has a direct influence on the health and safety of each other and we
will continue to support this important initiative through our wider workforce
remuneration principals and Executive Remuneration policy.
Be the
156 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
How our remuneration approach meets Section 40 of the UK Corporate Governance Code
Clarity – remuneration arrangements should be transparent and promote
effective engagement with shareholders and the workforce.
The Committee seeks to promote transparent disclosure of remuneration
arrangements, with full details of executive remuneration provided within
theRemuneration Report each year. Incentive outcomes and the performance
levels achieved against pre-set targets are clear.
Consistent frameworks for annual incentives are used throughout all levels
of the organisation, providing clarity of performance levels expected.
The Committee welcomes dialogue on remuneration arrangements, with
shareholders, our WaterShare+ Advisory panel and our colleagues either
through our RISE panel or other employee forums.
Simplicity – remuneration structures should avoid complexity and their
rationale and operation should be easy to understand.
The remuneration arrangements in place are simple, comprising base
pay, pension, benefits, short-term and long-term incentive awards and
infundamental construct remain consistent over time. Performance ranges
where applicable are straightforward in nature. Maximum remuneration levels
are set within the policy.
Risk – remuneration arrangements should ensure reputational and other
risks from excessive rewards, and behavioural risks that can arise from
target-based incentive plans, are identified and mitigated.
Remuneration arrangements are carefully considered by the Committee,
toensure they reflect our values and those of a responsible business.
Long-term sustainable performance is central to our delivery for all
stakeholders and this is reflected in our long-term incentive plan, balancing
both financial resilience and customer and environmental standards.
Allincentive payments are scrutinised by the Committee and levels of reward
positioned so that excess is avoided. The provisions for malus and clawback
are in place across all leadership schemes.
Predictability – the range of possible values of rewards to individual
directors and any other limits or discretions should be identified and
explained at the time of approving the policy.
The Remuneration Policy sets the maximum levels for variable remuneration
and for retirement benefits and other benefits, these are aligned to the
wider organisation. All incentive payments are carefully scrutinised by the
Committee using a discretion framework to assess audited results and making
adjustment as appropriate when considering wider performance outcomes.
Proportionality – the link between individual awards, the delivery of
strategy and the long-term performance of the company should be clear.
Outcomes should not reward poor performance.
Careful consideration is given to the stretching targets that are selected,
taking into account the long-term strategy of the Group and the expectations
of all our stakeholders.
Alignment to culture – incentive schemes should drive behaviours
consistent with company purpose, values and strategy.
Delivery for customers, communities, the environment and all stakeholders
is at the forefront of our incentive arrangements. The Committee receives
regular information on remuneration outcomes and arrangements for the
wider workforce, employee engagement and interacts with colleagues
acrossthe business.
Statement of consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Company
In setting executive remuneration the Committee takes account of employment market conditions and the pay and benefits differentials across
the Group. The Committee considers annual summary reports of employee remuneration and the terms and conditions of employment within each
operating company and has regard to these when considering remuneration for the Executive Directors and senior management. As part of this
assessment the Committee considers various metrics including data on the ratio between CEO and all-employee pay, gender pay statistics and
measures of employee engagement.
The Board engaged on remuneration matters with the wider workforce, through many mechanisms including the employee RISE and the Partnership
forum, the Big Chat and Open Door communications, on which more can be read on pages 25 to 27.
Statement of consideration of shareholder views
In developing this Remuneration Policy, the Committee took into account general good governance, best practice and evolving shareholder views.
We regularly engage with major shareholders to understand their views on executive pay and their feedback informs our decision-making and the
approach set out in this Policy.
As detailed on page 152 to the extent that a further review of the Policy is initiated later in the year the Committee would engage with our major
stakeholders as appropriate.
157Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Remuneration Committee report continued
Single total figure of remuneration table (audited)
Current Executive Directors Former Executive Director
Susan Davy (£000) Steve Buck
1
(£000) Paul Boote
2
(£000)
2023/24 2022/23 2023/24 2023/24 2022/23
Base salary 492 475 164 240 309
Benefits
3
21 21 6 7 16
Pension
4
49 48 16 24 31
Total fixed pay 562 543 186 271 356
Annual Bonus (cash) (forgone) Nil Nil Nil Nil 51
Annual Bonus (deferred shares) (forgone) Nil Nil Nil Nil 51
LTIP - deferred reinvestment of shares
5,6
298 Nil Nil 172 138
Total fixed, variable and deferred remuneration 860 543 186 443 596
Total variable pay (actual) 298 Nil Nil 172 240
Total variable pay (cash) Nil Nil Nil Nil 51
Total variable pay (forgone)
7,8
237 367 75 115
1. Remuneration for Steve Buck relates to the period from his appointment on 27
th
November 2023 until 31
st
March 2024.
2. Remuneration for Paul Boote relates to the period 1
st
April 2023 until he stepped down from his role and left the Group on 31
st
December 2023.
3. Benefits comprise a car allowance, fuel allowance, medical insurance, and income protection.
4. See page 162 for further information on retirement benefits.
5. For 2023/24, the 2021 LTIP has been valued based on the average share price during the three-month period to 31
st
March 2024 of 697p, together with an estimate of the accrued
dividends payable on the vesting shares. Of the vested amount, none of the award is attributable to share price appreciation over the performance period. The Committee did not
exercise any discretion in relation to share price changes. Vested awards are subject to a two-year holding period.
6. For 2022/23, the 2020 LTIP value for Paul Boote has been restated to reflect the share price at the date of vesting of 661p. The value includes accrued dividends over the vesting
period. The Committee did not exercise any discretion in relation to share price changes. These LTIP awards are subject to a two-year holding period.
7. For 2022/23, the CEO recommended that her bonus and 2020 LTIP award were forgone in full. An equivalent value was diverted into a future issuance under the Company’s
WaterShare+ scheme. The value of the forgone LTIP award reflects the share price at the date of vesting of 661p.
8. For 2023/24, in recognition of the current external environment, the Committee determined that no bonus would be paid to Executive Directors in respect of the year. This was
consistent with management’s recommendation for a zero bonus outturn.
Notes to the single figure table
Fixed pay
Details of fixed pay for Steve Buck can be found on page 162.
Retirement benefits for both Executive Directors have been set at 10% of salary since appointment, which is aligned to the rate available to the majority of the
wider workforce. Further detail on pension arrangements is set out on page 162.
Variable pay
Following guidance provided by Ofwat, we have taken steps to ensure that performance-related pay outcomes for the Executive Directors are funded at the
Group level and will not therefore be funded by customers.
158 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Annual bonus outturn for 2023/24
Consistent with prior years, the bonus is based on a rounded assessment of performance. In line with regulatory guidance, 60% of the bonus is linked to delivery
of stretching objectives for our customers, communities and the environment. The bonus includes a profit measure which ensures that the Company maintains
a focus on financial resilience, enabling us to invest in the future and deliver robust and sustainable performance for all of our stakeholders.
The Group Executive Directors are currently remunerated for delivery of the Group strategy, including Pennon Water Services, Water2Business, Pennon Power
and the respective licensed water businesses, which will now include SES Water, in one plan. Variable incentives are not recharged to the individual water
companies, but are instead funded at a Group level.
During the year and over recent months, Ofwat has provided substantial feedback regarding the operation of bonus schemes across the sector. In particular
Ofwat stressed the need for inclusion of metrics directly related to environmental performance and water quality in the annual bonus. Whilst these measures
were included in the 2024 LTIP award, they were not in the original bonus targets set for 2023/24. In direct response to Ofwat feedback, the scorecard linked
to customers, communities and the environment for 2023/24 was adapted by the Committee to include additional metrics which were considered to be of
particular importance to Ofwat and our customers. Although the inclusion of these additional metrics required a review of the weighting for individual measures,
the overall weighting on metrics relating to customers, communities and the environment remains unchanged at 60%.
The revised scorecard explicitly captures performance under a wide range of factors, reflecting the multiple areas which are important to our stakeholders.
Itisvital that the business continues to perform across these areas of focus. Further detail of the underlying targets is set out on page 160. The overall formulaic
outcome was 46.5% of maximum.
Consistent with prior years the Committee also undertook a holistic assessment of performance in order to determine whether the formulaic outturn remains
appropriate in the context of broader performance. This review considers performance from a number of different perspectives. For 2023/24 performance
theCommittee also considered the outcome against best practice principles recently developed in collaboration with sector peers. The framework used in this
assessment is summarised below.
Holistic performance assessment
Culture and conduct
Focus on significant health and safety,
culture and operational events
Alignment with customers, communities and the
environment
Including customer experience, water quality and resilience,
pollution incidents/ EPA and emissions reduction
Consideration of external environment
Including the shareholder, employee and
wider stakeholder experience
Input from other Board Committees
Including ESG and Health and Safety Committees, HR,
Compliance, Internal Audit andWaterShare plus panel
Broader financial, operating and strategic performance
Including impact of exceptional and one-off events
Sector best practice principles
Assessment versus best practice principles developed bysector
Formulaic
outcome
Determination
of final
outcome
The Committee carefully considered the formulaic outcome of the annual bonus of 46.5% of maximum and debated this at length. After applying the
Committee's discretion framework in respect of South West Water's environmental and pollution performance, it was decided to reduce the formulaic outturn
to 38.5%. Furthermore, in recognition of the current external environment, the Committee determined that no bonus would be paid to Executive Directors in
respect of the year. This was consistent with managements recommendation for a zero bonus outturn. As noted in the 2023 Annual Report and Accounts, the
Chief Executive Officer waived her entitlement to the bonus for FY 2022/23 and funds of an equivalent value were diverted into the next WaterShare+ issuance.
159Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Remuneration Committee report continued
Measure Weighting Targets Achievement Outcome
Financial resilience
Underlying PBT 40% Threshold – £38.02m
Maximum – £40.74m
Outcome (£16.8m / £19.3m excluding
SES) impacted by inflation impact on debt
instruments
0%
Environmental
Licensed water business environmental performance
South West Water
– Environment and
Pollution
18.5% EPA – towards 4*
Cat 1-2 Pollutions – Amber and above
Cat 1-3 Pollutions – 64
Numerical compliance – maintain high performance
GHG emissions - 68% reduction
EPA rating (2*) and Cat 1-3 below hurdle –
nilpayout
Numerical compliance and Cat 1-2 Pollutions
(Amber) within range
Renewables generation within range
8%
South West Water
- Water quality and
resilience
16.5% PCC (3 year) – 138.7
Leakage (3 year) – 109.3
Sewer Collapses – 14.76
Mains Repairs – 136.6
Water resource and resilience – water resource
storage to achieve 90%
Bathing water quality – 98%-100%
Enabling biodiversity - progress of K7 target 13,000
PCC within range
Leakage, sewer collapses and mains repairs
above target
Water resource plan ahead of schedule
Bathing water quality of 100%
Enabling biodiversity and GHG emissions
above target
16.5%
Bristol Water - Water
quality and resilience
3% Leakage (3 year) – 109.3
Main repairs – 132.7
PCC – 141.3
Leakage below hurdle – nil payout
Main repairs above target
PCC within range
2%
SES - Water quality
and resilience
1% Leakage – 21.6
PCC – 142.6
Leakage above target
PCC within range
1%
Pennon Power 5% Delivery against milestone events 4 sites acquired
Dunfermline construction contract signed
Preferred partner appointed for other 3
5%
Customer service
Licensed water business service performance
South West Water –
Customer service
4% Unplanned outage – 2.34
Supply – 5m 0s
CRI – 2
PSR:
Reach 5%
Attempted Contacts 90%
Actual Contacts 35%
Internal Flooding – 1.44
External flooding – 1,260
Unplanned outage, PSR and internal flooding
above target
Supply, CRI and external flooding below target
– nil payout
2.5%
Bristol Water –
Customer service
2% Unplanned outage – 2.34
Supply – 5m 0s
CRI – 2
PSR:
Reach 5%
Attempted Contacts 90%
Actual Contacts 35%
Unplanned outage within range
Supply and CRI below hurdle – nil payout
PSR above target
1.5%
SES – Customer
service
1% Supply – 5m 0s
CRI – 2
PSR
Supply, CRI and PSR above target 1%
B2B Retail
PWS Customer
Retention
5% Delivery against customer measures and Net Growth Retention of tendered contracts 100%
+1% Market Share (excl. de-reg)
Revenue retention c.97%, EBITDA +72% on
2023
5%
Responsible Business
Social and
governance
4% Sustainalytics – 80%
Fair Tax – maintain
Sustainable Financing – 75%
Health & Safety – 20 LTIs
Sustainalytics – 82.5%
Fair Tax – maintain
Sustainable Debt – 82%
Health & Safety – 15 LTIs
4%
160 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Long-term incentive outturn for 2023/24
The awards in the single figure table relate to the LTIP awards granted on 1
st
July 2021 which are due to vest on 1
st
July 2024. These share awards were subject
to performance targets relating to RORE, sustainable dividends and a basket of customer measures assessing average relative performance to water companies
over the three year period and PWS Trustpilot score. The 2021 awards were the first to include metrics related to customer performance in line with the sector
best practice. Awards granted in 2023 were further adapted to also included water quality metrics in order to further align with Ofwat guidance.
The table below provides an overview of performance against the targets set:
Measures
Threshold
(25% of maximum)
Maximum
(100% of maximum) Achievement
Vesting Outcome
(% of maximum)
RORE
(33% of award) 6% 8% 7.6% 85%
Sustainable dividend measure
(33%of award) 2.6x 3.6x 3.04 58%
Basket of Customer Measures
3
(33% of award)
C-MeX SWW (45%) 11th 1st 13 0%
C-MeX BRL(15%) 9th 1st 4 88.8%
R-MeX SWW (7.5%) 9th 1st 9 25%
R-MeX BRL (2.5%) 9th 1st 3 92.5%
D-MeX SWW (7.5%) 9th 1st 7 55%
D-MeX BRL (2.5%) 9th 1st 9 25%
MPS SWW (7.5%) 9th 1st 5 85%
MPS BRL(2.5%) 9th 1st 4 88.8%
Trustpilot Score (10%) 4.5 5 4.8 70%
Overall vesting outcome 60.2%
1. For below-threshold performance for any of the performance conditions, 0% vests in respect of that performance condition.
2. Straight-line vesting between points.
3. For the relative measures, 25% vesting for threshold performance, 85% vesting for upper-quartile performance and maximum vesting for market leading performance. Straight-line
vesting between these points. For these relative metrics, 75% is based on South West Water performance with the balance based on Bristol Water.
Assessment of overall performance
Vesting of the award is subject to an ‘underpin’ relating to overall Group performance. Consistent with the approach described for the annual bonus, the
Committee utilises a holistic performance assessment framework to support this review which considers performance from a number of different perspectives.
For the 2021 award, the following factors were noted:
The progress made against customer related metrics is fairly reflected in the scorecard.
The Group remains in a robust financial position, and is well-positioned for the next regulatory period with an efficiently funded balance sheet. Ongoing
efficiency programmes are keeping cost increases below inflation, despite impacts of the unprecedented wet weather. Our profitable B2B retailers have seen
a c.52% increase in EBITDA. Water group gearing is at 63.5% reflecting increased capital expenditure spend and timing of RCV build. Liquidity of £1.2 billion
has been raised since March 2023. There was also record support for our customers of £100 million (K7 to date).
We are making progress delivering on our four priorities. We have broken the drought cycle for Devon and Cornwall with 100% strategic reservoir capacity
achieved in April – ahead of target and we have maintained 100% bathing water quality for the third year in a row. We also remain on track to deliver our
ambitious Net Zero programme by 2030.
While performance in certain areas was impacted by climate factors – 2023 was the fifth wettest on record with rainfall in the second half of the year 50%
above the long-term average – it was recognised that there remains scope for improvement. The Group has re-profiled delivery of EPA 4-star until 2025,
maintaining the gains delivered in 2022. The Group had no Category 1 incidents in the year and both Category 2 incidents were investigated and determined
to be one-off in nature and not due to systemic issues. That said, this remains a top priority for the Board. Outstanding investigations and response in relation
to leakages and wastewater treatment were also considered when reviewing outcomes. As noted above, the bonus outcome has been reduced to nil.
The acquisition of SES Water represents a significant milestone and is consistent with our strategy. There was significant investor support for both the
acquisition and the £180m equity capital raise.
The Committee considered matters of broader culture and conduct and noted a number of factors including the roll out of Group-wide values and the
continued positive safety culture as demonstrated by the 46% reduction in lost time injuries.
Overall the Committee was satisfied that the vesting outcome of 60.2% of maximum represented a fair reflection of overall Group performance over the last
three years.
Vested awards for the CEO and former CFO will not be released in 2024. Instead awards will remain subject a two-year holding period and therefore participants
remain invested in the longer-term performance of the business. Awards are also subject to malus and clawback provisions. Consistent with guidance provided
by Ofwat, these awards to executive directors are funded at the Group level, rather than being recharged to the individual water companies, and will therefore
not be funded by customers. As noted in the 2023 Annual Report, the CEO waived her right to the vesting of the 2020 LTIP award in 2023.
161Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Remuneration Committee report continued
Retirement benefits and entitlements (audited information)
Details of the Directors’ pension entitlements and pension-related benefits during the year are as follows. Effective from 1
st
August 2020, the maximum pension
contribution made by the Company is 10% of salary.
Company contributions
to defined contribution
arrangements
(£000)
Cash allowances in
lieuofpension
(£000)
Total value for
the year
(£000)
Age and date
ofretirement
(for pension purposes)
Susan Davy 10 39 49 65 (17th May 2034)
Steve Buck 3 13 16
65 (16th February
2034)
Paul Boote - 24 24 n/a
Susan Davy received an overall pension benefit from the Company equivalent to 10% of her salary for the period 1
st
April 2023 to 31
st
March 2024. For2023/24
this comprised an employer’s contribution of £10,000 and a cash sum of £39,000. She is a member of Pennon Group’s defined contribution pension
arrangements and is entitled to access the retirement fund in the Master Trust from age 55.
Steve Buck received an overall pension benefit from the Company equivalent to 10% of his salary for the period 27
th
November 2023 to 31
st
March 2024.
For2023/24 this comprised an employer’s contribution of £3,333 and a cash sum of £13,045. He is a member of Pennon Group’s defined contribution pension
arrangements and is entitled to access the retirement fund in the Master Trust from age 55.
Paul Boote received a pension contribution of 10% of his salary for the year which included a period of contractual notice. This was paid as a cash allowance
of£23,986 and he is entitled to access the retirement fund in the Master Trust from age 55.
The employer’s contribution to the pension for Executive Directors is deducted from their overall retirement benefit.
No additional benefits will become receivable by a Director if the Director retires early.
Arrangements for the Incoming Group Chief Financial Officer
Steve Buck was appointed to the Board on 27
th
November 2023 and he was appointed to the role of Group Chief Financial Officer effective 1 January 2024. Steve
has been appointed on a salary of £470,000, modestly positioned 3.6% higher than his previous salary within the water sector. Whilst we recognise that this
represents a material increase relative to the previous incumbent, his uplift in salary is substantially lower than typical premia paid to executives when changing
roles. Steve’s salary in his previous role was positioned between the median and upper quartile of FTSE 250 reference points. The Committee considered sector
practice and market pay levels observed during the recruitment process, as well as Steve’s significant experience and knowledge of the sector, and is of the view
that his salary is appropriately positioned.
Steve’s incentive opportunity levels are aligned to the policy and consistent with the level awarded to the previous incumbent. While eligible for a pro-rated
2023/24 bonus in respect of the portion of the year employed, as noted above no bonus was paid. Steve has also been granted a 2023 LTIP award at the normal
award level of 150% of salary.
Steve is also being compensated in respect of variable remuneration forfeited as a result of leaving his previous employer. These buy-out awards are on a
broadly like-for-like basis. This includes eligibility for a cash payment in respect of the short-term (i.e. annual bonus) element of his variable pay, ordinarily
payable in 2024/25. The value of this award will be based on the actual performance as disclosed in the Anglian Water annual report. The value of this award
willbe disclosed in next year’s annual report once determined.
Steve will also be compensated in respect of his deferred bonus awards. Awards will vest and be released in line with the original timescales. The value of the
awards on grant are set out below. The original awards are also entitled to a CPIH based adjustment over the relevant vesting periods. The actual value of
awards will be included in the single figure table in the financial year of vesting.
2021 award – £183k – delivered in July 2024
2022 award – £228k – delivered in July 2024 and 50% in July 2025
2023 award – £259k – delivered in July 2025 and 50% in July 2026
Awards are also subject to malus and clawback provisions.
Consistent with the Remuneration Policy Steve will receive retirement benefits of 10% of salary consistent with benefit levels available to wider workforce.
Hewill also be provided with role-appropriate benefits including car and fuel allowance, medical insurance, and income protection. Steve was also eligible
foraone-off allowance in line with our Policy to facilitate relocation, up to a maximum of £75k per annum for two years.
162 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Arrangements for the Outgoing Group Chief Financial Officer
Paul Boote stepped down from the Board and left the Group on 31
st
December 2023. Paul will receive a payment in lieu of notice (in respect of salary, pension
and benefits) for the balance of his contractual notice period of 12 months (£207k). Health and car benefit will continue until the end of his 12-month notice
period. Paul also received a payment of £11,636 in respect of accrued but untaken holiday.
Paul was eligible for an annual bonus in respect of 2023/24, pro-rated based on the portion of the financial year employed. As detailed earlier in the report, zero
bonus will be paid.
Outstanding LTIP awards will be subject to time pro-rating based on the proportion of the performance period employed, with performance outcomes assessed
at the end of the relevant performance period. Awards remain subject to the two-year post-vesting holding. Any unvested deferred bonus awards and LTIP
awards within a holding period will be released in line with normal timescales. All awards remain subject to malus and clawback.
Paul will also be subject to the post-employment shareholding requirement.
All payments are in line with the Remuneration Policy.
Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration
Single figure of remuneration (audited)
2023/24 2022/23
Fees
(£000)
Taxable benefits
(£000)
Total fees
(£000)
Fees
(£000)
Taxable benefits
(£000)
Total fees
(£000)
Gill Rider 240 0 240 232 0 232
Iain Evans
1
85 0 85 76 0 76
Claire Ighodaro 78 0 78 76 0 76
Jon Butterworth 70 0 70 68 0 68
Loraine Woodhouse
2
74 0 74 23 0 23
Dorothy Burwell 65 0 65 21 0 21
Neil Cooper
3
38 0 38 88 0 88
1. Iain Evans was appointed as Senior Independent Director 1
st
September 2023.
2. Lorraine Woodhouse was appointed as Chair of Audit Committee effective 1
st
September 2023.
3. Neil Cooper stepped down as Senior Independent Director and Chair of Audit Committee 31
st
August 2023.
Non-Executive Directors’ fees and benefits
During the year, the fees for Non-Executive Directors and Chair were reviewed and increased with effect from 1
st
April 2024. Fees were increased by 4%,
whichisbelow the average increase awarded to the wider workforce which is valued between 4.4% and 4.6%, inclusive of holiday, depending on pay level, with
some receiving above this to maintain our real living wage commitment. The table below sets out the fee structure in full.
Non-Executive Director fees
Set at a market level to attract Non-Executive
Directors who have appropriate experience and
skills to assist in determining the Group’s strategy.
From 1 April 2024 From 1 April 2023
Chair fee
1
£249,455 £239,860
Basic Non-Executive Director fee £67,132 £64,550
Additional fees
Senior Independent Director £11,090 £10,660
Chair of Audit Committee £16,630 £15,990
Chair of Remuneration Committee £14,425 £13,870
Chair of ESG Committee £14,425 £13,870
Chair of Health and Safety Committee £5,545 £5,330
1. When appropriate for the efficient carrying out of her duties, the Chair is provided with a driver and a vehicle. She is entitled to expenses on the same basis as for other Non-Executive Directors.
163Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Remuneration Committee report continued
31 March 2014 31 March 2015 31 March 2016 31 March 2017 31 March 2018 31 March 2019 31 March 2020 31 March 2021 31 March 2022 31 March 2023
31 March 2024
0
50
100
150
200
250
Pennon Group FTSE 250
Directors’ service contracts and letters of appointment
The dates of Directors’ service contracts and letters of appointment and details of the unexpired term are shown below.
Executive Directors Date of appointment Notice period
Susan Davy 31 July 2020 12 months
Steve Buck 27 November 2023 12 months
Paul Boote 8 July 2020 12 months
1
1. Paul Boote stepped down from the Board 31 December 2023.
Non-Executive Directors Date of initial letter of appointment Expiry date of appointment
Gill Rider
1
22 June 2012 31 August 2024
Iain Evans 16 June 2018 31 August 2024
Claire Ighodaro 1 September 2019 31 August 2025
Jon Butterworth 1 August 2020 31 July 2026
Loraine Woodhouse 1 December 2022 30 November 2025
Dorothy Burwell 1 December 2022 30 November 2025
Neil Cooper
2
1 April 2016 31 August 2023
1. Gill Rider was appointed as Chair of the Board as of 31
st
July 2020 and as such is providing ongoing strategic support and continuity of the Board until 2024
2. Neil Cooper stepped down from the Board 31
st
August 2023.
The policy is for Executive Directors’ service contracts to provide for 12 months’ notice from either side. The contract has a normal retirement age of 67,
exceptwhere otherwise agreed by both the Executive Director and the Company.
The policy is for Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment to contain a three-month notice period from either side. All Non-Executive Directors are
subject to annual re-election and letters of appointment are for an initial three-year term.
Copies of Executive Directors’ service contracts and Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.
The dates of Directors’ service contracts and letters of appointment and details of the unexpired term are shown above.
Outside appointments
Executive Directors may accept one board appointment in another company. Board approval must be sought before accepting an appointment. Fees may be
retained by the Director. Susan Davy remained a non-executive director of Restore plc throughout 2023/24. Steve Buck does not hold any additional appointments.
No other outside company appointments are held by the Executive Directors other than with industry bodies or governmental or quasi-governmental agencies.
Additional contextual information
Historical TSR
The graph below shows the value, over the 10-year period ended on 31
st
March 2024, of £100 invested in Pennon Group on 1
st
April 2014 compared with
thevalue of £100 invested in the FTSE 250 Index. The FTSE 250 Index is a broad equity market index of which the Company was a constituent until the end
of the period.
Total shareholder return – since April 2014
164 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Historical Chief Executive Officer remuneration
As the Company did not have a Chief Executive Officer until 1
st
January 2016, the table below provides historical single figure information in the form of the
average remuneration of the Executive Directors for years up to and including 2014/15. Their remuneration was considered to be the most appropriate to use
asthey were the most senior executives in the Company.
From 2015/16 onwards the Chief Executive Officer’s remuneration for the year is shown.
2014/15 2015/16
1
2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21
2
2020/21
2
2021/22 2022/23
3
2023/24
4
Average
Executive
Director
Chris
Loughlin
Chris
Loughlin
Chris
Loughlin
Chris
Loughlin
Chris
Loughlin
Chris
Loughlin
Susan
Davy
Susan
Davy
Susan
Davy
Susan
Davy
Single figure
ofremuneration
(£000) 762 1,119 1,318 1,153 1,351 2,135 1,337 1,930 1,527 543 860
Annual bonus pay-out
(% of maximum) 68.2 84.0 84.0 87.0 91.0 78.0 79.2 78.1 30.7 0.0 0
LTIP vesting
(% of maximum) 0.0 37.9 20.4 0.0 32.0 86.6 89.9 89.9 88.2 0.0 60.2
1. Group Chief Executive Officer for the year, including remuneration received between 1
st
April 2015 and 31
st
December 2015 when in position as Chief Executive of South West Water.
2. Chris Loughlin stepped down as Chief Executive Officer on 31
st
July 2020 and was succeeded by Susan Davy. Consistent with the single figure, the figures for Susan Davy relate
to the whole of 2020/21, including the portion of the year when she was Chief Financial Officer. The LTIP award for Chris Loughlin was pro-rated to reflect service within the
performance period.
3. For 2022/23, Susan Davy recommended that her bonus and 2020 LTIP were forgone. An equivalent value was diverted for a future issuance under the Company’s
WaterShare+scheme.
4. For 2023/24, in recognition of the current external environment, the Committee determined that no bonus would be paid to Executive Directors in respect of the year. This was
consistent with management’s recommendation for a zero bonus outturn.
Percentage Change in Directors’ Remuneration
Percentage Change 2020/21 Percentage Change 2021/22 Percentage Change 2022/23 Percentage Change 2023/24
Salary/ Fees Benefits Bonus Salary/ Fees Benefits
6
Bonus Salary/ Fees Benefits
3
Bonus Salary/ fees Benefits Bonus
Executive Directors
Susan Davy 11% 0 35% 4% -23% –58% 0% -27% –100% 3.5% 0% 0%
Steve Buck
1
- - -
Paul Boote
2
37% 27% -45% 3.0% -6% -11% 3.5% -37% -100%
Non-Executive Directors
Gill Rider
3
126% 0% 28% 3.0% 3.5%
Iain Evans
4
4% 0% 1% 3.0% 12%
Neil Cooper
5
16% 0% 7.5% 3.0% 3.5%
Claire Ighodaro
3
97% 0% 9% 3.0% 3.5%
Jon Butterworth 0% 35% 3.0% 3.5%
Loraine Woodhouse
6
n/a 25%
Dorothy Burwell n/a 3.5%
All employees
Pennon Group plc -12% 3.1% 11% 3% –28% -11% 4% -30% -73% 12.8% -39% -3.4%
UK employees 1% 5.7% 18% 2% –19% -14% 4% -20% -45% 6% -21% -2.2%
1. Steve Buck was appointed to the Board 27
th
November 2023 and appointed as Chief Financial Officer 1
st
January 2024.
2. Paul Boote stepped down from the Board and his role as Chief Financial Officer 31
st
December 2023. Comparison is based on full-year equivalent. Benefit reduction is attributed to
reduced vehicle emissions, reducing P11d value.
3. The percentage change for 2020/21 for Gill Rider reflects her appointment as Chair and increase in fees, and for Claire Ighodaro a combination of change of role to Remuneration
Committee Chair and her first full year on the Board.
4. Iain Evans was appointed as Senior Independent Director effective 1
st
September 2023 leading to an increase in fees.
5. Neil Cooper stepped down from the Board 31
st
August 2023. Comparison is based on full-year equivalent.
6. Loraine Woodhouse was appointed as Chair of Audit Committee 1
st
September 2023 leading to an increase in fees. Comparison is based on full-year equivalent for 2022/23.
7. The percentage change in benefits is attributed to a reduction in the cost of vehicle leasing costs and reduced cost in healthcare premium.
Relative importance of spend on pay
2022/23
(£ million)
2023/24
(£ million)
Percentage
Change
Overall expenditure on pay
1,
98.9 114.8 16.1%
Distributions to ordinary shareholders 101.5 111.6 10%
Purchase of property, plant, and equipment (cash flow) 323.3 598 84.9%
1. Excludes non-underlying items
The above table illustrates the relative importance of spend on pay compared with distributions to equity holders. The purchase of property, plant, and
equipment (cash flow) has also been included as this was the most significant outgoing for the Company in the past financial year. Where relevant the numbers
have been provided for the continuing Group to enable year on year comparability.
165Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Chief Executive Officer pay ratio
Our CEO pay ratio stands at 22:1 for the median employee for 2023/24. Had the CEO received the annual bonus shown in the single figure table, as amount forgone,
theratio would have been 28:1. The ratio is higher than in 2022/23 when the CEO opted to forgo her variable pay for that year. It is lower than the ratio in preceding years.
The changes are partially due to our strategy of developing pay for front line roles, which has led to an increase in median pay.
Year Method 25
th
percentile (P25) pay ratio Median (P50) pay ratio 75
th
percentile (P75) pay ratio
2023/24 actual outcomes A 29:1 22:1 17:1
2023/24 outcome with bonus amount forgone A 37:1 28:1 22:1
2022/23
1
actual outcomes A 20:1 16:1 12:1
2022/23
2
formulaic outcomes A 34:1 26:1 20:1
2021/22 A 59:1 44:1 36:1
2020/21
3
A 95:1 69:1 55:1
2019/20 A 87:1 68:1 50:1
1. For 2022/23, the CEO recommended that her bonus and 2020 LTIP award were forgone. An amount of the equivalent value was to be diverted into a future issuance under the
Company’s WaterShare+ scheme. The CEO pay ratio for this year therefore does not include any variable incentive pay.
2. This shows the values for 2022/23 had the CEO accepted her variable incentive pay awards in 2023.
3. The CEO ratio for 2021/22 is lower than previous years, partially due to the lower salary and pension benefit received by Susan Davy, compared to her predecessor. The total single
figure used in the ratio in 2020/21 was a combined total single figure pro-rated to reflect the change in CEO mid-year.
Option A has been used for the calculations as it is the most statistically accurate approach. The employees at the lower quartile, median and upper quartile
(P25, P50 and P75 respectively) have been determined based on a calculation of total remuneration for the financial year 1
st
April 2023 to 31
st
March 2024.
Base salary for part-time employees and new joiners within the applicable period has been converted to full-time equivalents for the purpose of the calculations.
The total singe figure for the CEO for 2022/23 was not subject to restating as variable pay was foregone. The restated value for the ratio illustrating the
formulaic outturn for 2022/23 has led to a reduction in the CEO ratio for the median employee from 28:1 to 26:1.
The validated P11D data for 2022/23 did not lead to any adjustments to the ratio. Monthly pay-rolling of P11d information was introduced for the 2023 financial
year and now reflects actual values in year.
For 2023/24 the total remuneration for the employees identified at P25, P50 and P75 is £29,617, £39,071 and £50,343 respectively. The base salary of 2023/24
for the employees identified at P25, P50 and P75 is £27,500, £28,117 and £44,853 respectively. Further detail on our approach to pay in the wider organisation
isset out on page 153. As the Committee spends a considerable amount of time on matters relating to remuneration arrangements for the wider workforce,
weare comfortable that the median pay ratio is consistent with our wider policies on pay, reward and progression and reward for the Group as a whole.
Share awards and shareholding disclosures (audited information)
Share awards granted during 2023/24
The table below sets out details of share awards made in the year to Executive Directors.
Executive Director Type of interest Basis of award
Face value
£000
Percentage vesting at
thresholdperformance
Performance/ restricted
periodand date
Susan Davy
LTIP 150% of salary
737
25% of maximum
21 July 2026
Steve Buck
1
705 08 Feb 2027
Paul Boote
2
480 21 July 2026
Susan Davy
3
Deferred Bonus Shares 50% of bonus awarded
0
n/a
17 July 2026
Steve Buck 0
Paul Boote 51
1. The award to Steve Buck was made on 8
th
February 2024 following appointment on 27
th
November 2023. The award was made in full as the award from previous employment in
2023 was forfeited. The award will be subject to the same performance criteria and performance period as for other recipients. Vesting and release will occur at the 3
rd
and 5
th
year
anniversary following the grant on 8
th
February 2024.
2. The 2023 LTIP award for Paul Boote will be reduced at vesting to reflect completed service in the performance period of 1
st
April 2023 to 31
st
December 2023.
3. Susan Davy waived her award under the annual bonus plan in 2023 with the equivalent value being diverted to a future issuance under the WaterShare+ scheme, resulting in a
nildeferred bonus award.
LTIP awards were calculated using the share price of £7.142 for all participants (including Steve Buck), being the average closing price over the five dealing days
preceding the normal date of grant for the 2023 LTIP, which was 21
st
July 2023. LTIP awards are also subject to an additional two-year holding period. Deferred
bonus awards were calculated using the average share price at which shares were purchased on the market on 18
th
July 2023 to satisfy the award, which
was£7.003.
Remuneration Committee report continued
166 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Directors’ shareholding and interest in shares
The Remuneration Committee believes that the interests of Executive Directors and senior management should be closely aligned with the interests
ofshareholders.
To support this the Committee operates shareholding guidelines of 200% of salary for both the Chief Executive Officer and Group Finance Director. Deferred
bonuses and LTIP awards subject to a holding period only may count towards the guidelines on a net-of-tax basis. Shareholding requirements are noted
onpage 152.
On 12
nd
January 2024 the Group conducted an Equity Capital raise which included a non-pre-emptive placing of new ordinary shares of 61.05 pence each in
the capital of the Company to both existing institutional shareholders and new institutional investors. Susan Davy and Steven Buck respectively acquired 8,356
and2,054 ordinary shares in this transaction at a price of £7.30 per share.
The beneficial interests of the Executive Directors in the ordinary shares (61.05p each) of the Company as at 31
st
March 2024 and 31
st
March 2023 together
withtheir shareholding guideline obligation and interest are shown in the table below.
Share interests
(including
connected
parties) at
31 March 2024
Share interests
(including
connected
parties) at
31 March 2023
Vested LTIP
awards in
holding period
1
Deferred bonus
shares
1
SAYE
Performance
shares (subject
to performance
conditions)
Shareholding
guideline
Shareholding
guideline met?
Susan Davy 189,940 132,887 80,994 21,894 2,047 234,377 200% Yes
Steven Buck
2
2,054 0 0 0 0 98,711 200% No
Paul Boote
3
43,674 29,554 36,955 20,108 2,047 151,285 200% No
1. These shares awards are not subject to further performance criteria and may therefore count towards the guideline on a net-of-tax basis.
2. Steve Buck was appointed on 27
th
November 2023. It is therefore expected that his shareholding will be built up over the course of his tenure.
3. Performance shares for Paul Boote will be pro-rated at time of vesting to reflect service during the performance period.
Since 1
st
April 2024, 122 additional ordinary shares in the Company have been acquired by Susan Davy as a result of her direct participation in the Company’s
Share Incentive Plan and reinvestment of dividends under that Plan via the Dividend Reinvestment Plan (DRIP). There have been no other changes in the
beneficial or non-beneficial interests of the above Directors in the ordinary shares of the Company between 1
st
April 2024 and 1
st
May 2024.
Non-Executive Directors’ shareholding
The beneficial interests of the Non-Executive Directors, including the beneficial interests of their spouses, civil partners, children, and stepchildren, in the
ordinary shares of the Company are shown in the table below.
Director Shares held at 31 March 2024 Shares held at 31 March 2023
Gill Rider 4,554 2,407
Neil Cooper
Iain Evans
Claire Ighodaro
Jon Butterworth 2,054
Loraine Woodhouse 2,054
Dorothy Burwell 2,054
There have been no changes in the beneficial interests or the non-beneficial interests of the above Directors in the ordinary shares of the Company between
1
st
April 2024 and 1
st
May 2024.
There is no formal shareholding guideline for the Non-Executive Directors; however, they are encouraged to purchase shares in the Company.
Shareholder dilution
The Company can satisfy awards under its share plans with new issue shares or shares issued from treasury up to a maximum of 10% of its issued share capital
in a rolling 10-year period to employees under its share plans. Within this 10% limit the Company can only issue (as newly issued shares or from treasury)
5%ofits issued share capital to satisfy awards under discretionary or executive plans. The percentage of shares awarded within these guidelines and the
headroom remaining available as at 31
st
March 2024 is as set out below:
Awarded Headroom Total
Discretionary schemes 1.4% 3.6% 5%
All schemes 4.1% 5.9% 10%
167Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Details of share awards
(a) Long-term incentive plan
In addition to the above beneficial interests, the following Directors have or had a contingent interest in the number of ordinary shares (of nominal value
of61.05p each) of the Company shown below, representing the maximum number of shares to which they would become entitled under the plan should
therelevant criteria be met in full. In 2021 ordinary shares were consolidated at a ratio of 3:2 following the payment of a special dividend to shareholders.
Forsimplicity, outstanding LTIP awards did not accrue an entitlement to the special dividend and were therefore unaffected by the consolidation.
Director and date
of award
Vested
awards held
at 1 April
2023
1,2
Conditional
awards held
at 1 April
2023
Conditional
awards made
in year
Market price
upon award
year
Vesting
in year
3
Value of shares
upon vesting
(before tax)
2023
Vested
awards held
at 31 March
2024
4
Vested
awards
released in
year
5
Conditional
awards held
at 31 March
2024
Date of end
qualifying
conditions to
be fulfilled
Expected
date of
release
Susan Davy
02/07/18 78,875 790.12p 928 84,554 01/07/21 01/07/23
04/07/19 80,994 - 752.72p 786 80,994 03/07/22 03/07/24
03/08/20
6
63,812 1071.90p 0 0 0 02/08/23 02/08/25
01/07/21 62,456 1140.80p 62,456 30/06/24 30/06/26
13/06/22 68,668 1037.60p 68,668 12/06/25 12/06/27
21/07/23 103,253 714.00p 103,253 20/07/26 20/07/28
Steven Buck
7
08/02/24 98,711 714.00p 98,711 08/02/27 08/02/29
Paul Boote
8
02/07/18 20,836 790.12p 245 22,336 01/07/21 01/07/23
04/07/19 16,049 - 752.72p 156 16,049 03/07/22 03/07/24
03/08/20 41,982 1071.90p 20,906 138 20,906 02/08/23 02/08/25
01/07/21 39,446 1140.80p 39,446 30/06/24 30/06/26
13/06/22 44,670 1037.60p 44,670 12/06/25 12/06/27
21/07/23 67,169 714.00p 67,169 20/07/26 20/07/28
1. 89.9% of the award shares granted on 2
nd
July 2018 vested on 1
st
July 2021 at a market price of £11.7698 per share.
2. 88.2% of the awards shares granted on 4
th
July 2019 vested on 3
rd
July 2022 at a market price of £9.705 per share.
3. 44.9% of the awards granted on 3
rd
August 2020 vested on 2
nd
August 2023 at a market price of £6.61 per share.
In respect of (1), (2) and (3) above, the total number of shares that vested included additional shares equivalent in value to such number of shares as could have been acquired by
reinvesting the dividends which would otherwise have been received on the vested shares during the three-year performance period. The balance of the award lapsed.
4. Vested award; no longer subject to performance conditions.
5. Awards released in year at a market price of £9.8717 per share, inclusive of additional shares equivalent in value to such number of shares as could have been acquired
byreinvesting the dividends which would otherwise have been received on the vested shares during the two-year holding period.
6. The CEO recommended that her 2020 LTIP award was forgone.
7. Award made to Steven Buck following appointment in the FY 23/24 with the 2023 performance conditions and award price.
8. Paul Boote’s LTIP awards include those he received in his previous position as Director of Treasury, Tax and Group Finance, in which he will retain an interest following
hisappointment to the Board as Group Finance Director on 8 July 2020.
Remuneration Committee report continued
168 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
(b) Annual incentive bonus plan – deferred bonus shares (long-term incentive element)
The following Directors had or have a contingent interest in the number of ordinary shares of the Company shown below, representing the total number
ofshares to which they have or would become entitled under the deferred bonus element of the Annual Incentive Bonus Plan (the bonus plan) at the end of the
relevant restricted period:
Director and date of award
Restricted
awards held at
1 April2023
Restricted awards
made in year
Market price of
each share upon
award in year
Restricted awards
post-share
consolidation
(restated)
1
Released in year
2
Value of shares
upon release
(before tax)
£000
Restricted
awards held at
31 March2024
Date of end of
restricted period
Susan Davy
04/07/20 15,011 1079.47p 10,007 10,007 70 13/07/23
30/06/21 18,993 1150.45p 12,661 12,661 29/06/24
19/07/22 9,233 987.94p n/a 9,233 18/07/25
18/07/23 0
Paul Boote
3
04/07/20 5,026 1079.47p 3,350 3,350 23 13/07/23
30/06/21 10,469 1150.45p 6,979 6,979 29/06/24
19/07/22 5,831 987.94p n/a 5,831 18/07/25
18/07/23 7,298 700.32p n/a 7,298 17/07/26
1. All shares held under the AIBP at the 5
th
July 2021, were adjusted on that date to reflect the share consolidation activity at a ratio of 3:2 into shares of 61.05p each.
2. These shares were released on 13
th
July 2023 at 701p per share.
3. Paul Boote’s deferred bonus share awards will be retained and released in line with the usual schedule.
During the year, the Directors received dividends on the above shares in accordance with the conditions of the bonus plan as follows: Susan Davy £9,592; Paul
Boote £8,809.
(c) Sharesave Scheme
Details of options to subscribe for ordinary shares (61.05p each) of the Company under the all-employee Sharesave Scheme were:
Market value
Date of award
Options held at
1
st
April 2023
Granted
inyear
Exercised
in year
Exercise price
per share
Market price of each
share on exercising
Market value of each
share at 31
st
March 2024
Options held at
31
st
March 2024 Exercise period/ maturity date
Susan Davy
06/07/21 2,047 879.00p 647.50p 2,047 01/09/24–28/02/25
Paul Boote
06/07/21 2,047 879.00p 647.50p 2,047 01/01/24–30/06/24
Malus and Clawback
Malus and Clawback provisions are embedded in the employment contracts of Executive Directors and relevant scheme documentation.
Malus and clawback provisions apply to all incentive awards. These provisions enable awards to either be forfeited prior to delivery, repaid or made subject
to further conditions where the Committee considers it appropriate in the event of any significant adverse circumstances. For awards granted under the term
of this policy, the circumstances in which malus and clawback may be applied include a financial misstatement, error in calculation, material failure of risk
management, serious reputational damage, serious corporate failure or misconduct.
In respect of the annual bonus, clawback may be applied for the period of three years following determination of the cash bonus. Under the LTIP, clawback may
be applied until the end of the holding period.
The Committee have not applied any action under the provisions of malus and clawback during 2023/24.
The Remuneration Committee and its advisors
Claire Ighodaro, Lorraine Woodhouse and Dorothy Burwell were members of the Remuneration Committee throughout the year. Iain Evans joined the Committee
on his appointment to Senior Independent Director on 1
st
September 2023, succeeding Neil Cooper. Gill Rider, Jon Butterworth and Susan Davy attend by
invitation as required. During the year, the Committee received advice or services which materially assisted the Committee in the consideration of remuneration
matters from Adele Barker (Group Chief People Officer) and from Deloitte LLP.
During 2018/19, Deloitte LLP was reappointed directly by the Committee with a refreshed advisory team, following a comprehensive re-tendering process.
Deloitte LLP’s fees in respect of advice which materially assisted the Committee during 2023/24 were £165,300 (arrived at from an hourly rate basis of
charging). During the year, Deloitte LLP also provided broader reward services to the Group. Deloitte LLP is a member of the Remuneration Consultants Group
and as such voluntarily operates under the code of conduct in relation to executive remuneration consulting in the UK. The Committee is satisfied that the
advice it has received from Deloitte LLP has been objective and independent.
169Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Statement of voting at general meeting
The table below sets out the voting by the Company’s shareholders on the resolutions to approve the Directors’ remuneration report and remuneration policy
atthe 2023 AGM and the remuneration policy, including votes for, against and withheld.
Annual report on remuneration (2023 AGM)
For % (including votes at the Chair’s discretion) 98.51
Against % 1.49
Withheld number 12,550,917
Remuneration policy (2023 AGM)
For % (including votes at the Chair’s discretion) 93.63
Against % 6.37
Withheld number 48,501
A vote withheld is not counted in the calculation of the proportion of votes for and against a resolution.
Directors’ remuneration report compliance
This Directors’ remuneration report has been prepared in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 and the Large and Medium- sized
Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013. It also complies with the requirements of the Financial Conduct Authority’s
Listing Rules and the Disclosure and Transparency Rules. The UK Corporate Governance Code also sets out principles of good governance relating to directors’
remuneration, and this report describes how these principles are applied in practice. The Committee confirms that throughout the financial year the Company
has complied with these governance rules and best practice provisions. The above regulations also require the external auditor to report to shareholders on
the audited information within the annual report on remuneration which is part of the Directors’ remuneration report. The external auditor is obliged to state
whether, in its opinion, the relevant sections have been prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.
The external auditor’s opinion is set out on pages 175 to 184 and the audited sections of the annual report on remuneration are identified in this report.
On behalf of the Board
Claire Ighodaro CBE
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
20
th
May 2024
Remuneration Committee report continued
170 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Directors’ report
This Directors’ Report (including pages 112 to 174, which form part of this
report) fulfils the requirements of the corporate governance statement for
the purposes of the FCA’s Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules.
Cautionary statement: This Annual Report has been prepared for, and only for
the members of the Company, as a body, and no other persons. The Company, its
directors, employees, agents or advisers do not accept or assume responsibility
to any other person to whom this document is shown or into whose hands it
may come and any such responsibility or liability is expressly disclaimed. By their
nature, the statements concerning the risks and uncertainties facing the Group
in this Annual Report involve uncertainty since future events and circumstances
can cause results and developments to differ materially from those anticipated.
The forward-looking statements reflect knowledge and information available at
the date of preparation of this Annual Report and the Company undertakes no
obligation to update these forward-looking statements. Nothing in this Annual
Report should be construed as a profit forecast.
Corporate
Articles of Association: The Articles of Association may only be
amended by special resolution of the shareholders. There will be proposed
amendments to the current Articles, put forward at the 2024 AGM. Details
of these amendments can be found in the Notice of Meeting, which is
available on our website. The current Articles were adopted as the Articles
of Association of the Company at the conclusion of the 2023 AGM and are
available on our website.
Auditors: The External Auditor for the 2023/24 financial year was Ernst &
Young LLP. The Independent Auditors’ Report starting on page 175 sets out
the information contained In the Annual Report which has been audited by
the External Auditor. The Audit Committee considered the performance and
audit fees of the External Auditors and the level of non-audit work undertaken.
Following a formal comprehensive audit tender it is recommended to the Board
that a resolution for the appointment of PrincewaterhouseCoopers LLP as the
Company’s auditor, in respect of the year ending 31
st
March 2025, be proposed
to shareholders at the AGM on 24
th
July 2024.
Change of control: No person holds securities in the Company
carrying special rights with regard to control of the Company. All of the
Company’s share schemes contain provisions relating to a change of
control. Outstanding awards and options would normally vest and become
exercisable on a change of control, subject to the satisfaction of any
performance conditions proration for time where appropriate.
There are a number of agreements that take effect, alter or terminate
upon a change of control of the Company following a takeover bid, such as
bank loan agreements, Eurobond documentation, hybrid capital securities
documentation, private placement debt and employees’ share plan. This
may result in certain funding agreements being altered or repaid early.
Theimpact of employees’ share plans is not considered significant.
Other Agreements: There are no agreements between the Company and
its Directors or employees providing for compensation for loss of office or
employment that occurs because of a takeover bid.
Final dividend: The Board recommends a final dividend of 30.33 pence
per ordinary share to be paid on 5
th
September 2024 to shareholders
on theregister on 26
th
July 2024, making a total dividend for the year
of44.37 pence per share. The aggregate cost of the final dividend will
be £126.9 million, resulting in a transfer from reserves of £135.4 million.
TheStrategic Report on pages 1 to 111 analyses the Group’s financial
resultsin more detail and sets out other financial information.
Political Contributions: The Company has authority, in accordance with
Section 366 of the Companies Act 2006, to make political donations to
political parties, political organisations and incur political expenditure subject
to limits approved by shareholders. No political donations were made or
political expenditure incurred and no contributions were made to a non-UK
political party (2022/23: nil)
Other Contributions: During the year, the Group provided a total of
£35,000 in charitable donations (2022/23: £25,000).
Introduction
The Directors present their Annual Report and Accounts for the year ending
31
st
March 2024. The Directors’ Report comprises this report and the entire
Governance section including the Chair’s Governance Statement. It has been
prepared in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006
and regulations made under it. In accordance with the Financial Conduct
Authority Listing Rules, the information to be included in the 2024 Annual
Report and Accounts, where applicable (under Listing Rule 9.8.4), is set out
in this Directors Report. Other information relevant to this Report, and which
is incorporated by reference, can be located as follows:
Information Page Number
Particulars of important events affecting the
Company and/or its subsidiaries which have
occurred since the year end
4 to 7
Likely future developments of the Company 4 to 7
Risk management systems 55 to 64
Certain employee and employee engagement
matters as well as the disclosures below
24 to 31
How the Board have engaged with employees
and had regard for employee interests
126
Business relationships/engagement with
suppliers, customers and others
8 to 12, 126 to 127
Carbon and greenhouse gas emissions, energy
consumption and energy efficiency action
71 to 77
Financial risk management
3 of the notes to the
financial statements
Financial instruments 47 to 54, and notes 2(n)
and 18 of the notes to
the financial statements
Andrew Garard
Group General Counsel and Company Secretary
171Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Directors’ Report continued
Directors
Details of the Directors who served in the year and to the date of this
Report can be found on pages 116 to 117. Biographies for Directors currently
in office can be found on pages 116 to 117 and on our website. During the
year, NeilCooper resigned as a Director of the Company on 1
st
September
2023, Paul Boote resigned as a Director of the Company on 31
st
December
2023 and Steve Buck was appointed as a Director of the Company on 27
th
November 2023.
The appointment and replacement of Directors is governed by the Articles
ofAssociation, the UK Corporate Governance Code, the Companies Act
2006 and related legislation. The Directors may from time to time appoint
one or more Directors. Any such Director shall hold office only until the
next AGM and shall then be eligible for appointment by the Company’s
shareholders In accordance with the Corporate Governance Code. Subject
toannual shareholder approval, Non-Executive Directors are appointed for
an initial three-year period and annually thereafter. Each Director will retire
and submit themselves for election at the forthcoming AGM.
Conflicts of Interest: The Board has adopted a Conflicts of Interest Policy.
The Board has considered in detail the current external appointments of the
Directors that may give rise situational conflicts and, where appropriate, has
authorised potential conflicts. Such authorisation can be reviewed at any
time but is always subject to annual review.
Purchase of own ordinary shares: Subject to applicable law and the
Company’s Articles of Association, the Directors may exercise all powers
of the Company, including the power to authorise the Issue and/or market
purchase of the Company’s shares (subject to an appropriate authority
beinggiven in general meeting by the shareholders to the Directors).
TheArticles and a schedule of Matters Reserved for the Board can be
foundon our website.
At the 2023 AGM, the Directors were given the authority to purchase up
to a maximum number of 26,131,096 of the Company’s ordinary shares at a
minimum price of the nominal value of the share and a maximum price of not
more than the higher of:
i) 5% of the average of the middle market quotations for such ordinary
shares as derived from the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List
for the five business days immediately preceding the day on which that
ordinary share Is purchased; and
ii) an amount equal to the higher of the price of the last independent
trade of an ordinary share and the highest current independent bid for
an ordinary share on the trading venue where the purchase is carried out
(the Share Buy-Back Authority).
In the period from 1
st
April 2023 until 20
th
May 2024, no further ordinary
shares of 61.05 pence each in Pennon were repurchased using the Share
Buy-Back Authority. All shares purchased under the Share Buy-Back
Authority have been cancelled. Information on transactions in own shares
is also publicly available via the regulatory information service and on
Pennon’s website at www.pennon-group.co.uk/investor-information/rns-
announcements.
No shares were made subject to a lien or charge during the year under
review and up to the date of approval of this Annual Report and Accounts.
Asat 1
st
April 2024, 5,628 shares were held in treasury, representing 0.002%
of the issued share capital. No treasury shares were re-issued during the year.
Directors’ insurance and indemnities: The Company has maintained
Directors’ and officers’ liability insurance for the benefit of the Company,
theDirectors and its officers throughout the year. The Company has entered
into qualifying third-party indemnity arrangements for the benefit of all its
Directors in a form and scope that complies with the requirements of the
Companies Act 2006 and which were in force throughout the year and
remain in force.
Disclosures
Listing Rule 9.8.4 disclosures: There is no information to be disclosed
under Listing Rule (9.8.4R.) The Company has no long-term incentive
arrangements in place under LR 9.4.2R where the only participant is a
Director and the arrangement is established specifically to facilitate, in
unusual circumstances, the recruitment or retention of the individual.
Financial Risk Management: The Directors have carried out a robust
assessment of the principal and emerging risks facing the Group, including
In relation to its business model, future performance, solvency and liquidity.
Details of our principal risks and association mitigations are set out on pages
55 to 64. Note 3 to the Financial Statements gives details of the Group’s
financial risk management policies and related exposures. This note is
incorporated by reference and deemed to form part of this Report.
Going Concern: The going concern basis has been adopted in preparing
these financial statements. At 31
st
March 2024 the Group has access
to undrawn committed funds and cash and cash deposits totalling
£601.4 million, including cash and other short-term deposits of £171.4 million
and £430.0 million of undrawn facilities. Cash and other short-term deposits
include £26.0 million of restricted funds deposited with lessors which are
available for access, subject to being replaced by an equivalent valued
security. Considering this the Group has a headroom of �435 million,
including the impact of £98 million of loans and facilities due for maturity or
renewal within the going concern period through to 31
st
May 2025.
In making their assessment, the Directors reviewed the principal risks and
considered which risks might threaten the Group’s going concern status,
to do this the Group’s business plan has been stress-tested. Whilst the
Group’s risk management processes seek to mitigate the impact of principal
risks as set out on pages 55 to 64, individual sensitivities against these
risks have been identified. These sensitivities, which are ascribed a value
with reference to risk weighting, factoring in the likelihood of occurrence
and financial impact, were applied to the baseline financial forecast which
uses the Group’s annual budget for FY 2024/25, including the impact of the
acquisition of Sutton and East Surrey Holdings Limited, and longer-term
strategic business plan for the remainder of the going concern period to
31
st
May 2025. The risks and sensitivities include consideration of: legislative
impacts such as change in government policy and non-compliance with
laws and regulations, macro-economic impacts such as inflation and
interest rate increases, regulatory impacts such as the ongoing Ofwat price
and tariff review, i.e. PR24, covering the period from April 2025 to March
2030, and operational impacts such as ensuring adequate water resources
and failure of operational assets. A combined stress testing scenario has
been performed to assess the overall impact of these individual scenarios
impacting the Group collectively. The combined weighted impact of the risks
occurring is c.£80 million, this value is considered equivalent to an extreme
one-off event that could occur within a year, the probability of such an event
happening is deemed unlikely. Through this testing, it has been determined
that none of the individual principal risks would in isolation, or in aggregate,
compromise the going concern of the Group over the going concern period,
the assessment has been considered by reviewing the impact on the
solvency position as well as debt and interest covenants. In the combined
scenario to ensure that the Group was able to continue as a going concern,
additional mitigations could be deployed to reduce gearing and increase
covenant headroom. In the combined stress test scenario, the group has
sufficient liquidity and covenant headroom which reflects that no mitigations
would be needed by the Group. However if required additional mitigations
could be deployed to reduce gearing and increase covenant headroom.
Examples of mitigations could include: reduction in discretionary operational
expenditure, deferral of capital expenditure and/or cancellation of non-
essential capital expenditure, reduction in the amount of dividend payable,
and raising additional funding.
172 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
In addition, we have modelled a reverse engineered scenario that could
possibly compromise the Group’s solvency over the going concern
assessment period. This scenario builds on the factors above and
additionally assumes all the Group’s principal risks are incurred within the
going concern period, with no probability weightings attached. The Board
considered the likelihood of this scenario on the Group’s solvency over
the going concern period as remote, given this would require all of the
principal risks to be incurred at maximum impact within the same time frame,
without implementing controllable mitigations, as noted above, or raising
additionalfunding.
We have considered the Group’s funding position and financial projections,
which take into account a range of possible impacts, including the
refinancing required within and immediately after the going concern
assessment period. Subsequent to the year end date, the Group has secured
a £150 million private placement and a £350 million liquidity facility, which
reflects on the Group’s ability to secure finance. Having considered these
factors, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group will meet
the requirements of its covenants and has adequate resources tocontinue
in operational existence for the period to at least the end of the going
concern assessment period of 31
st
May 2025, and that there are no material
uncertainties to disclose. For this reason, they continue to adopt thegoing
concern basis in preparing the financial statements.
Data: As part of our business activity, the Group processes large amounts of
personal data. The Group recognises that to enable this use of personal data
it is critical that we continue to build on our approach to applying privacy in
a lawful and ethical way. A programme of work to support this has been led
by our data governance team. The work includes making improvements to
our data governance framework and delivering our data privacy function. We
have a number of policies, procedures and tools to support this. Compliance
with these policies is mandatory. All colleagues undergo regular training to
remind them of their responsibilities under these policies.
Employment policies and employee involvement
Continuous Improvement: The Group has a culture of continuous
improvement through investment in people at all levels within the Group.
TheGroup is committed to pursuing equality and diversity in all its
employment activities including recruitment, training, career development
and promotion and ensuring there is no bias or discrimination in the
treatment of people. In particular, applications for employment are welcomed
from persons with disabilities, and special arrangements and adjustments
as necessary are made to ensure that applicants are treated fairly when
attending for interview or for pre-employment aptitude tests. Wherever
possible the opportunity is taken to retrain people who become disabled
during their employment to maintain their employment within the Group.
Policies: The Group has policies in place covering health and safety, equal
opportunities, diversity and inclusion, ethics and employee relations. Further
detail of the contents of the diversity and inclusion policy are set out in the
report of the Nomination Committee on page 132. Also, information regarding
the employee diversity is provided on page 28. The Board’s activities in
relation to assessing and monitoring culture can be found in the Corporate
Governance Statement on page 112.
Freedom of Association: Pennon respects the right to freedom of
association and employees are consulted regularly about changes which
may affect them either through their trade union appointed representatives
or consultation groups or by means of their elected representatives at the
Employee Engagement Forum. These forums, together with regular meetings
with particular groups of employees, are used to ensure that employees
are kept up to date with the business performance of their employer
and the financial and economic factors affecting the performance of the
Group. The Group also cascades information to all employees to provide
them with important and up-to-date information about key events and to
obtain feedback from them on a monthly basis. Further details of employee
engagement and employment matters relating to the Group are set out on
pages 25 to 31 of the Strategic Report.
Share Ownership: The Group encourages share ownership among its
employees by operating an HMRC approved Sharesave Scheme and Share
Incentive Plan. Following shareholder approval at the 2014 AGM, this scheme
and plan were amended to provide for the increased savings limits approved
by the Government. At 31
st
March 2024, approximately 36% (2023: 43%) of
the Group’s employees were participating in these plans.
Modern Slavery Act: Our people are fundamental to our business, and we
remain committed and passionate about supporting our staff, customers
and communities to thrive in creating an environment where everyone
can feel safe and supported. We have a clear zero-tolerance approach to
modern slavery and are committed to playing our part in helping eradicate it
by having systems and processes to monitor, assess and reduce the risk of
forced labour and human trafficking.
We remain focused on improving our risk assessment and the widening of
our engagement. We have continued to engage and raise awareness, through
internal training, and by continuing as a member of Slave Free Alliance. We
are part of a utilities sector working group which shares best practice across
our industry. We will continue to work hard to tackle this issue collaboratively
with our partners, employees, suppliers, and peers, to evolve our approach
to ensure it remains effective. Our latest Modern Slavery Statement can be
found here: www.pennon-group.co.uk/sites/default/files/attachments/pdf/
pennon-modern-slavery-statement-2023.pdf.
Greenhouse gas emissions: Details of our GHG emissions can be found in
the Strategic Report on page 72.
Energy usage: Details of our Energy usage can be found in the Strategic
Report on page 71.
Research and development: Research and development within the
Group involving water and wastewater treatment processes amounted to
£0.6 million during the year (2022/23: £0.8 million).
Overseas branches: The Company has no overseas branches.
Shares
Issued Share Capital: Details of the Company’s issued share capital,
consisting of ordinary shares of nominal value 61.05 pence each are set out
in note 33 to the financial statements. All of the issued shares are fully paid
up and quoted on the London Stock Exchange.
On 12
th
January 2024 the Company issued 24,657,535 ordinary shares of
61.05 pence each in the Company following a £180 million equity raise. More
information can be found on page 47.
In addition, the Company issued and allotted 72,299 ordinary shares in the
Company under the terms of the Pennon Sharesave Plan 2014.
Rights: The rights attaching to the Company’s ordinary shares are set out
inthe Articles of Association. There are no securities carrying special rights.
Restrictions: There are no restrictions on the transfer of issued ordinary
shares of the Company or on the exercise of voting rights attached to
them,except:
where the Company has exercised its right to suspend their voting rights
ortoprohibit their transfer following the omission of their holder or any person
interested in them to provide the Company with information requested by
itinaccordance with Part 22 of the Companies Act 2006; or
where their holder is precluded from exercising voting rights by the Financial
Conduct Authority’s Listing Rules or the City Code on Takeovers and Mergers.
There are no persons with special rights regarding control of the Company.
No shares issued under the employee share schemes have rights with regard
to control of the Company that are not exercisable directly by the employee.
Substantial Shareholders:
Details of significant direct or indirect holdings of securities of the Company
are set out in the shareholder analysis on page 245. The Company is
not aware of any agreements between shareholders which may result in
restrictions on the transfer of securities or on voting rights.
173Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Authority to Purchase Own Shares: The Directors also intend to renew
the power to make purchases of the Company’s own shares in issue as set
out above up to an aggregate nominal value of:
i. £58,209,077 (such amount to be reduced by any shares allotted
orrights granted under (ii) below in excess of £58,209,077); and
ii. £116,418,155 by way of a pre-emptive offer (such amount to be
reduced by any shares allotted or rights granted from (i) above),
similar to that approved by shareholders at the 2023 AGM. In
addition, shareholders approved at the 2023 AGM, resolutions giving
the Directors a limited authority to allot shares for cash other than
pro rata to existing shareholders. These resolutions remain valid
until the conclusion of this year’s AGM. Similar resolutions will be
proposed at the 2024 AGM. The Directors have no present intention
to issue ordinary shares other than pursuant to the Company’s
employee share schemes.
iii. The Directors were also given the authority by shareholders at the
2019 AGM, to allot a single non-cumulative redeemable preference
share of one penny nominal value (the WaterShare+ Share), the
rights and restrictions in relation to which are set out in Article 5A
of the Company’s Articles of Association. The share was allotted
on20
th
October 2020.
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the Group
financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations.
Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial statements for
each financial year. Under that law the Directors have elected to prepare
the Group and parent company financial statements in accordance with UK
adopted international accounting standards (IFRSs) in conformity with the
Companies Act 2006. Under company law the Directors must not approve
the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and
fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and the Company and of the
profit or loss of the Group for the year.
In preparing these financial statements the Directors are required to:
select suitable accounting policies in accordance with IAS 8 Accounting
Policies, Changes in Estimates and Errors and then apply them
consistently;
make judgments and accounting estimates that are reasonable
andprudent;
present information, including accounting policies, in a manner that
provides relevant, reliable, comparable and understandable information;
provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specific
requirements of IFRSs is insufficient to enable users to understand the
impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions of the
Group’s financial position and financial performance;
in respect of the Group financial statements, state whether UK adopted
international accounting standards in conformity with the Companies
Act2006 have been followed, subject to any material departures
disclosed and explained in the financial statements;
in respect of the parent company financial statements, state whether
UK adopted international accounting standards in conformity with the
Companies Act 2006 have been followed; and
prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless
it is appropriate to presume that the Company and/or Group will not
continue in business.
The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that
are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s and Group’s transactions
and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of
the Group and the Company; and enable them to ensure that the Company
and Group financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006.
They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Group and
the Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention
and detection of fraud and other irregularities. Under applicable law and
regulations, the Directors are also responsible for preparing a Strategic
Report, Directors’ Report, Directors’ Remuneration Report and Corporate
Governance Statement that comply with the law and those regulations.
TheDirectors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the
corporate and financial information included on the Company’s website.
Each of the Directors, whose names and functions are listed on pages 116 to
117, confirms that, to the best of her or his knowledge:
The consolidated financial statements, prepared in accordance with
UK adopted international accounting standards in conformity with the
Companies Act 2006 give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities,
financial position and profit of the parent company and undertakings
included in the consolidation taken as a whole.
The Annual Report, including the Strategic Report (pages 1 to 111), includes
a fair review of the development and performance of the business during
the year and the position of the Company and undertakings included in the
consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal
risks and uncertainties they face.
They consider that the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and
understandable, and provides the information necessary for shareholders to
assess the Company’s position, performance, business model and strategy.
Statement as to disclosure of information to the auditor
i. So far as each of the Directors in office at the date of the signing of
the report is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which
the Company’s auditor is unaware; and
ii. Each of the Directors has taken all the steps each Director ought
to have taken individually as a Director in order to make herself or
himself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that
the Company’s auditor is aware of that information.
The Directors’ Report consisting of pages 112 to 174 was approved by the
Board on 20
th
May 2024.
By order of the Board
Andrew Garard
Group General Counsel and Company Secretary
20
th
May 2024
Directors’ Report continued
174 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Independent Auditor’s report to the members
of Pennon Group plc
Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’
use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the
financial statements is appropriate. Our evaluation of the directors’
assessment of the group and parent company’s ability to continue to adopt
the going concern basis of accounting included the following procedures:
We obtained an understanding of the process undertaken by
management to perform the going concern assessment.
We have obtained management’s going concern assessment, including
the cash flow forecast, liquidity requirements and forecast covenant
calculations for the going concern period which covers the period from
approval of the 2024 financial statements through to 31 May 2025, and
have tested this for arithmetical accuracy. Management has modelled a
downside scenario in their cash flow forecast and covenant calculations
in order to incorporate unexpected changes in the forecast liquidity and
covenant compliance of the group.
We have challenged the forecasts used for the going concern assessment
period, agreed the data to the Board approved plan and, where applicable,
corroborated the data with audit information from other areas, including
capital commitments, impairment and deferred tax asset recoverability
testing. We have evaluated the appropriateness of the key assumptions
in management’s forecasts including revenue growth, by comparing these
to year-to-date performance and through consideration of historical
forecasting accuracy and the impact of regulatory price increases.
The largest component of the group’s operations is the regulated
water business, undertaken by South West Water Limited, which is
subject to five-year price control periods which set the basis of allowed
tariff changes. The current period runs to March 2025 and the tariffs
allowable for the next five year period to 31 March 2030 are currently
under review by Ofwat. We have compared the key assumptions in the
group’s regulated water business forecasts to the business plans and
pricing determinations submitted to Ofwat, for consistency. In addition to
this we confirmed that, within the downside scenario, management has
considered the risk of changes to the proposed tariffs and the impact this
could have on forecast liquidity and covenant compliance of the group.
We have evaluated management’s stress test modelling including
management’s downside scenario and specific risk register probability-
weighted scenarios, to understand the impact on the group’s liquidity
andcovenant ratios. Management has also modelled a reverse engineered
scenario (reverse stress test) assuming all the principal risks materialise
within the going concern period with no probability weightings attached.
We assessed the reasonableness of management’s stress test scenarios
byperforming our own sensitivity analysis for severe but plausible scenarios.
We have compared the risks identified and modelled in the cash flow
forecasts of management’s downside scenario to the group risk register and
evaluated the quantification by management. We have considered whether
there are other alternative risks that should be taken into consideration
based on our knowledge of the business. Our procedures included
evaluating management’s assessment of the impact of climate change
within the going concern period, including the principal risk of availability
of sufficient water resources to meet current and future demand, as well
assufficiency of funds available to the Group to support the required
capitalexpenditure.
We have compared facilities assumed in the forecasts to supporting loan
documentation and to covenant terms. For facilities, where changes to
terms are not finalised or facilities are unagreed at the date of approval of
the financial statements, we have evaluated the impact on covenants and
liquidity headroom based on existing terms.
We have evaluated, including assistance from our specialist, events
impacting the group immediately after the end of the going concern
assessment period, including the effects of maturity of loans and facilities
on the group’s ability to continue as a going concern.
We performed testing to consider the likelihood of a scenario causing a
liquidity issue or breach of covenants, including the impact of controllable
mitigating actions, where relevant.
Opinion
In our opinion:
Pennon Group plc’s group financial statements and parent company
financial statements (the “financial statements”) give a true and fair
view of the state of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs
asat31 March 2024 and of the group’s loss for the year then ended;
the group financial statements have been properly prepared in
accordance with UK adopted international accounting standards;
the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared
in accordance with UK adopted international accounting standards as
applied in accordance with section 408 of the Companies Act 2006; and
the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the
requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
We have audited the financial statements of Pennon Group plc (the ‘parent
company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘group’) for the year ended 31 March
2024 which comprise:
Group Parent company
Consolidated balance sheet as at
31 March 2024
Balance sheet as at 31 March 2024
Consolidated income statement for
the year then ended
Statement of changes in equity for
the year then ended
Consolidated statement of
comprehensive income for the year
then ended
Statement of cash flows for the year
then ended
Consolidated statement of changes
in equity for the year then ended
Related notes 1 to 44 to the financial
statements, including material
accounting policy information
Consolidated statement of cash flows
for the year then ended
Related notes 1 to 44 to the financial
statements, including material
accounting policy information
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation
is applicable law and UK adopted international accounting standards and as
regards the parent company financial statements, as applied in accordance
with section 408 of the Companies Act 2006.
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on
Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under
those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for
the audit of the financial statements section of our report. We believe that
the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide
abasis for our opinion.
Independence
We are independent of the group and parent in accordance with the ethical
requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the
UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest
entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance
with these requirements.
The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not
provided to the group or the parent company and we remain independent
ofthe group and the parent company in conducting the audit.
175Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Pennon Group plc continued
We have reviewed the group’s going concern disclosures included in the
annual report in order to assess whether the disclosures were appropriate
and in conformity with the reporting standards.
We observed at 31 March 2024, the group had access to undrawn committed
facilities of £430.0 million and cash and short-term and other deposits
totalling £171.4 million (£134.1 million excluding restricted funds). The group
generated positive net cash flows from operating activities of £148.9 million.
Subsequent to the year end date, the group has secured a £150 million
private placement and a £350 million liquidity facility. Management’s
forecasts indicate there is headroom in the base case and in the downside
scenario. Management considers the reverse engineered scenario, that all
the group’s principal risks are incurred within the going concern period with
no probability weightings attached, to be remote.
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material
uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively,
may cast significant doubt on the group and parent company’s ability to
continue as a going concern for a period to 31 May 2025.
In relation to the group and parent company’s reporting on how they have
applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing material to
add or draw attention to in relation to the directors’ statement in the financial
statements about whether the directors considered it appropriate to adopt
the going concern basis of accounting.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to
going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report. However,
because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this statement
is not a guarantee as to the group’s ability to continue as a going concern.
Overview of our audit approach
Audit scope We performed an audit of the complete financial
information of three components and specified audit
procedures on a further three components.
The components where we performed full audit
procedures accounted for 100% of Earnings before
interest, taxes and non-underlying items, 96% of
Revenue and 90% of Total assets.
Key audit
matters
Revenue recognition across the group’s operations
in relation to accrued income relating to
measuredsupplies
Valuation of the expected credit loss provision
forcustomer balances across the group
Capitalisation of costs relating to the capital
programme
Materiality Overall Group materiality of £8.3m which represents
5%of the Group’s earnings before interest, taxes
andnon- underlying items.
An overview of the scope of the parent company
andgroup audits
Tailoring the scope
Our assessment of audit risk, our evaluation of materiality and our allocation
of performance materiality determine our audit scope for each company
within the Group. Taken together, this enables us to form an opinion on the
consolidated financial statements. We take into account size, risk profile, the
organisation of the group and effectiveness of group-wide controls, changes
in the business environment, the potential impact of climate change and
other factors such as recent Internal audit results when assessing the level
ofwork to be performed at each company.
In assessing the risk of material misstatement to the Group financial
statements, and to ensure we had adequate quantitative coverage of
significant accounts in the financial statements, of the seven reporting
components of the Group, we selected six components covering the entities,
Pennon Group plc, South West Water Limited, Pennon Water Services
Limited, Bristol Water plc, Pennon Power Limited and Sutton and East Surrey
Group Holdings Limited, which represent the principal business units within
the Group.
Of the six components selected, we performed an audit of the complete
financial information of three components (“full scope components”) which
were selected based on their size or risk characteristics. For the current
year, the full scope components contributed 100% (2023: 100%) of the
Group’s earnings before interest and taxes and non-underlying items, 96%
(2023: 100%) of the Group’s Revenue and 90% (2023: 94%) of the Group’s
Total assets.
For the remaining three components (“specified procedures scope
components”), we performed specified audit procedures on specific accounts
within that component that we considered had the potential for the greatest
impact on the significant accounts in the financial statements either because
of the size of these accounts or their risk profile. The audit scope of these
components may not have included testing of all significant accounts of the
component but will have contributed to the coverage of significant accounts
tested for the Group.
The remaining component accounts for not more than 1% of the group’s
earnings before interest, taxes and non-underlying items. For these
components, we performed other procedures, including analytical review,
testing of consolidation journals and intercompany eliminations to respond to
any potential risks of material misstatement to the Group financial statements.
Changes from the prior year
Following the acquisition of Sutton and East Surrey Group Holdings Limited,
we included this as a specified audit procedures scope component based on
its size and risk characteristics and a non-EY firm performed the specified
procedures under the instructions of the primary audit engagement team.
Pennon Power Limited a dormant company in prior year acquired four
companies with future renewable energy generation capacity in the current
year. Following the acquisition activity within Pennon Power Limited we
included this entity as specified audit procedures scope component based
on its size and risk characteristics and these procedures were performed by
EY primary audit team.
176 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Involvement with component teams
In establishing our overall approach to the Group audit, we determined the
type of work that needed to be undertaken at each of the components
by us, as the primary audit engagement team, or by component auditors,
including non-EY firms, operating under our instruction. The audit teams for
Pennon Group plc, South West Water and Pennon Water Services are led
by the Senior Statutory Auditor with a non-EY firm auditing the specified
procedures scope component, Sutton and East Surrey Group Holdings Ltd.
Where the work was performed by component auditors, we determined the
appropriate level of involvement to enable us to determine that sufficient
audit evidence had been obtained as a basis for our opinion on the Group
asa whole.
The primary team interacted regularly with the component teams where
appropriate during various stages of the audit, reviewed relevant working
papers and were responsible for the scope and direction of the audit process.
This, together with the additional procedures performed at Group level, gave
us appropriate evidence for our opinion on the Group financial statements.
We maintained regular open dialogue with all component audit teams in
addition to holding formal meetings to ensure that we were fully aware of
their progress and results of their procedures. The Senior Statutory Auditor
discussed the planned audit approach with the component teams and
any issues arising from their work, attended meetings with management
and reviewed key audit working papers on risk areas. This, together with
the additional procedures performed at group level, gave us appropriate
evidence for our opinion on the group financial statements.
Climate change
Stakeholders are increasingly interested in how climate change will impact
Pennon Group plc. The group has determined that the most significant future
impacts from climate change on their operations will be from physical and
transitional climate-related risk. These are explained on pages 78-109 in the
required Task Force On Climate Related Financial Disclosures and on pages
55 to 64 in the principal risks and uncertainties. They have also explained
their climate commitments on pages 69 to 70. All of these disclosures form
part of the “Other information,” rather than the audited financial statements.
Our procedures on these unaudited disclosures therefore consisted solely
of considering whether they are materially inconsistent with the financial
statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or
otherwiseappear to be materially misstated, in line with our responsibilities
on “Other information”.
In planning and performing our audit we assessed the potential impacts
of climate change on the group’s business and any consequential material
impact on its financial statements.
The group has explained in their basis of preparation to the financial
statements how they have reflected the impact of climate change in their
financial statements including how this aligns with their commitment to
the aspirations of the Paris Agreement to achieve net zero emissions by
2050 which forms part of their disclosures within the Task Force on Climate
related Financial Disclosures which forms part of “Other information”.
Significant judgements and estimates relating to climate change are included
in note 2(a) Basis of preparation and note 4 Critical accounting judgements
and estimates. These disclosures also explain where governmental and
societal responses to climate change risks are still developing, and where
the degree of certainty of these changes means that they cannot be taken
into account when determining asset and liability valuations under the
requirements of UK adopted international accounting standards. In Note 4 to
the financial statements supplementary narrative explanation of the impact
of climate change on long life assets and availability of sufficient funds for the
required capital expenditure, has been provided, concluding that the Group
continues to have sufficient funding in place and there is no specific impact
on useful lives of long life assets as at 31 March 2024.
Our audit effort in considering the impact of climate change on the financial
statements was focused on evaluating management’s assessment of the
impact of climate risk, physical and transition, their climate commitments,
the effects of material climate risks disclosed on pages 78-109 and the
significant judgements and estimates disclosed in note 4 and whether these
have been appropriately reflected in asset values where these are impacted
by future cash flows and associated sensitivity disclosures (see notes 2(a)
Basis of preparation), following the requirements of UK adopted international
accounting standards. As part of this evaluation, we performed our own
risk assessment , supported by our climate change internal specialists, to
determine the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements from
climate change which needed to be considered in our audit.
We also challenged the Directors’ considerations of climate change risks in
their assessment of going concern and viability and associated disclosures.
Where considerations of climate change were relevant to our assessment of
going concern, these are described above.
Based on our work we have not identified the impact of climate change
on the financial statements to be a key audit matter or to impact a key
auditmatter.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment,
were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements of the
current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material
misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters
included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy,
the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the
engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit
of the financial statements as a whole, and in our opinion thereon, and we
donot provide a separate opinion on these matters.
177Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Risk Our response to the risk
Key observations communicated
to the Audit Committee
Revenue recognition across the group’s
operations in relation to accrued
income relating to measured supplies
(2024: £157.4 million, 2023: £132.8 million)
Refer to the Audit Committee Report (page
139); Accounting policies (page 193); and
Note 22 of the Consolidated Financial
Statements (page 215)
The Group’s revenue streams relate to the
provision of water and sewerage services by
South West Water, Pennon Water Services
and Sutton and East Surrey Group Holdings.
ISAs (UK & Ireland) presume there is a risk
of fraud relating to revenue recognition. For
the Group, given targets associated with
financial performance and pressures to meet
market expectations, there is an incentive to
overstate revenue.
This risk over revenue recognition specifically
arises in the following judgemental areas,
where there is opportunity to overstate
revenue.
Income from measured water services
requires an estimation of the amount of
unbilled charges at the period end. This is
calculated using a combination of system
generated information, based on previous
customer volume usage and the last meter
reading date, together with management
judgements for a number of different factors
not included in the system generated accrual,
such as seasonality and operational data
trends regarding consumption.
The risk remained consistent in the
currentyear.
Procedures to respond to this risk were performed by the
component teams.
We obtained an understanding of the process, by performing
walkthroughs of the supply of measured services, meter reading
and related billing in order to assess the completeness of
adjustments to reflect the accrual or deferral of revenue at the
year-end;
For the South West Water operations, we tested key controls
linked to system generated information and around the estimation
process for measured revenue;
For the South West Water operations, we obtained internal and
external data on factors that influence demand from customers,
weather patterns and leaks in infrastructure networks and formed
an expectation of the impact of these matters on revenue to
compare to assumptions used in management’s estimate;
For the South West Water and Pennon Water Services operations,
we obtained a system report of invoices raised post year end
based on actual meter readings taken since the year end.
We selected a sample of items from the report to compare to
supporting evidence. We compared this report to the year end
assumptions used to accrue income for these customer accounts,
to assess the reliability of the assumptions used to determine
accrued income. For Sutton and East Surrey, we performed an
analysis by comparing the accrued revenue to the bills raised post
year-end for all customers and tested a sample of customers.
We performed analytical procedures by comparing revenue
balances for the year against expectations and obtained support
for significant variances;
We used data analytics to understand the journal entries posted
as part of the revenue, trade receivables and accrued income to
cash collection process to identify transactions that were outside
of our expectation and agreed these to underlying supporting
documentation and business rationale;
In performing our journal testing, we paid increased attention to
entries impacting revenue, focusing on non-system postings and
those raised in the last two weeks of the year.
We concluded that the estimation
process undertaken by management to
calculate the measured income accrual
reflected latest operational factors in the
key assumptions and that the income
accrual was appropriately determined.
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Pennon Group plc continued
178 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Risk Our response to the risk
Key observations communicated
to the Audit Committee
Valuation of the expected credit
loss provision for customer balances
across the Group (2024: £125.3 million,
2023: £106.5 million)
Refer to the Audit Committee Report (page
139); Accounting policies (page 195); and
Note 22 of the Consolidated Financial
Statements (page 215)
The expected credit loss provision is
calculated using a combination of system
generated information on historic debt
recovery rates and management’s judgement
of the future likely recovery rates.
There is a risk that the assumptions, used
by management in calculating the expected
credit loss provision, may be susceptible
tomanagement bias and the valuation of
theprovision against customer balances
maybe misstated.
Management’s key assumptions include:
that the historic level of collections is
indicative of the ability to collect at the
same levels in the future; and
that the risk of non-recovery from
customers varies, depending on factors
such as whether the household customer
no longer occupies a property in the area,
has previously paid/not paid, is/is not on a
payment plan etc., and for non-household
customers depends on the general
economic performance of the business
sector they operate within.
In particular, the ongoing cost of living crisis
has had a significant impact on the economy
and the customers of the Group, which
increases the risk relating to recovery of
customer balances.
The risk has remained consistent in the
current year.
Procedures to respond to this risk were performed by the
component teams.
We performed a walkthrough of the process for calculating
the expected credit loss provision and assessed the design
effectiveness of the key controls;
For the South West Water operations, for the debt relating to
household customers, we tested operating effectiveness of key
controls over billing systems and integrity of data and the reports
utilised to generate the ageing and categorisation of debt within
the component’s billing systems. For debt relating to non-
household customers, we tested the accuracy of data and reports
by obtaining underlying evidence to support the parameters
reliedupon by management in calculating the expected credit
lossprovision;
We tested latest information on collection rates and evaluated
howthis data was used in the preparation of the expected credit
loss provision;
For the South West Water and Sutton and East Surrey operations,
we utilised collection trends to determine our own range of
the likely ultimate collection of debts existing at the balance
sheet date, including performing several scenario analyses and
compared these to the provision recorded by management,
including assessing assumptions for evidence of management bias;
We assessed the assumptions used by management in
determining amounts provided against different categories and
age of debt, by comparing these assumptions to historic collection
rates and by considering the impact of changes in the methods
adopted operationally by management to collect debt, and in the
external environment;
For the South West Water and Pennon Water Services operations,
we considered whether historic collection performance evidenced
behaviour patterns assumed by management depending on
categorisation of household and business sector for non-
household customers;
For the South West Water operations, for debt relating to
household customers, we utilised collection information over
previous periods, with sensitivities to consider the impact of a
deterioration which might arise from a downturn in the economy,
to determine an acceptable range of the likely ultimate collection
of debts existing at the balance sheet date and compared this to
the provision recorded by management;
For the South West Water and Pennon Water Services operations,
for debt relating to non-household customers, we tested
management’s segmentation by business sector and risk factors
considered for each sector, regarding non-recovery of debt. We
compared this analysis with information on actual collections, by
sector, in the current year and since the balance sheet date; and
We tested the appropriateness of journal entries and adjustments
impacting the expected credit loss provision, particularly those
raised close to the balance sheet date.
We concluded that the expected credit
loss provision of £125.3 million is within
an acceptable range and reflects
the recent history of collection of
outstanding debts and considerations
of the impact on future collections
from the current macroeconomic
environment.
179Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Risk Our response to the risk
Key observations communicated
to the Audit Committee
Capitalisation of costs relating to the
capital programme (2024: £604.5 million,
2023: £353.7 million)
Accounting policies (page 194); and Note
17 of the Consolidated Financial Statements
(page 210)
The group has a substantial capital
programme which has been agreed with
Ofwat and therefore incurs significant annual
expenditure in relation to the development
and maintenance of both infrastructure and
non-infrastructure assets.
There is judgement involved in allocation
of costs between operating and capital
expenditure given the nature of certain
projects which include both repairs and
maintenance as well as asset enhancement.
Therefore, there is a potential for
misstatement between the income statement
and the statement of financial position.
In addition, internal expenditure including
staff costs to support capital projects is
capitalised only if it can be demonstrated
that it is directly attributable to the asset,
provides probable economic benefit to the
company and can be measured reliably. There
is a risk that costs capitalised do not meet
thesecriteria.
Due to the level of judgement involved,
wehave determined that there is a potential
for fraud through possible manipulation
ofthisbalance.
The risk is new in the current year due to the
increased level of capital spend in the year.
Procedures to respond to this risk were performed by the South
West Water component team.
We performed a walkthrough of the process for capitalising fixed
assets and assessed the design effectiveness of the key controls;
We evaluated capital and operating or finance costs, and assessed
whether these are appropriately classified and recalculated the
amounts included as capital additions to ensure they agree with
the underlying supporting documentation;
For a sample of capitalised additions, we evaluated the
appropriateness of the classification as capital by considering the
nature of the expenditure with reference to invoice, certificate
or timesheets relating to a specific project or asset. We also
considered the judgements management applied in capitalising
certain staff costs and overheads;
We tested a sample of items allocated to expenditure in the
income statement and verified whether they are correctly
classified by considering the nature of projects i.e., repairs and
maintenance or asset enhancement, to which the expenditure
relates;
We analysed assets commissioned during the year, on a sample
basis, and obtained confirmation from project managers of their
use in the business;
We made inquiries of project managers to gain an understanding
of the on-going capital projects of the Group and how costs are
reviewed and determined as capital expenditures that meet the
Group’s capitalisation policy;
We selected a sample of manual journal entries to record
additions within fixed assets, which resulted from a credit posting
to an operating expenditure account and checked whether the
capitalisation of such expense was appropriately authorised and in
accordance with the capitalisation policy.
We concluded that management
has applied the capitalisation policy
appropriately in determining the
expenditure to be capitalised.
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Pennon Group plc continued
180 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Our application of materiality
We apply the concept of materiality in planning and performing the audit, in
evaluating the effect of identified misstatements on the audit and in forming
our audit opinion.
Materiality
The magnitude of an omission or misstatement that, individually or in
the aggregate, could reasonably be expected to influence the economic
decisions of the users of the financial statements. Materiality provides a basis
for determining the nature and extent of our audit procedures.
We determined materiality for the Group to be £8.3 million
(2023: £7.2 million), which is 5% (2023: 5%) of the group’s earnings before
interest, taxes and non-underlying items. We believe that the group’s
earnings before interest, taxes and non-underlying items provides us with
an appropriate measure of the underlying performance of the group, as this
excludes the impact of higher interest costs on the group’s index-linked debt,
driven by the significantly higher levels of inflation and is a measure of focus
for users of the financial statements. Therefore, given this focus, we consider
this is the most appropriate basis to use for calculating materiality.
We determined materiality for the Parent Company to be £8.9 million
(2023: £11.0 million), which is 1% (2023: 1%) of equity. We consider that equity
is the most appropriate measure given the parent company is an investment
holding company with no revenue. Where procedures were performed as part
of the group audit, we performed our procedures to the group materiality
level which was lower than the Parent Company materiality.
During the course of our audit, we reassessed initial materiality using the
consolidated results for the year. Based on the materiality measure of
underlying earnings before interest and tax, we have updated our Planning
Materiality to £8.3 million.
Starting basis
Reported earnings before interest and taxes £140.4 million
(2023: reported profit before taxation £109.4 million)
Adjustments
Non-underlying items (refer to Note 6) increase basis by £25.9 million
(2023: £43.7 million increase)
Materiality
Totals £166.3 million earnings before interest, taxes and non-underlying items
(2023: £153.1 million earnings before interest, taxes and non-underlying items)
Materiality of £8.3 million (2023: £7.2 million) (5% of earnings before interest, taxes and non-underlying items)
(2023: 5% of earnings before interest, taxes and non-underlying items)
181Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Performance materiality
The application of materiality at the individual account or balance level.
Itis set at an amount to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability
that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected misstatements
exceedsmateriality.
On the basis of our risk assessments, together with our assessment of the
Group’s overall control environment, our judgement was that performance
materiality was 75% (2023: 75%) of our planning materiality, namely
£6.2 million (2023: £5.4 million). We have set performance materiality at
this percentage based on our assessment of the group’s internal control
environment and the extent and nature of audit findings identified in the
prior period. This basis isconsistent with prior year.
Audit work at component locations for the purpose of obtaining audit
coverage over significant financial statement accounts is undertaken
based on a percentage of total performance materiality. The performance
materiality set for each component is based on the relative scale and risk
of the component to the Group as a whole and our assessment of the
risk of misstatement at that component. In the current year, the range
of performance materiality allocated to components was £1.3 million to
£5.6 million (2023: £1.6 million to £4.8 million).
Reporting threshold
An amount below which identified misstatements are considered as being
clearly trivial.
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them all
uncorrected audit differences in excess of £0.4 million (2023: £0.4 million),
which is set at 5% of planning materiality, as well as differences below that
threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.
We evaluate any uncorrected misstatements against both the quantitative
measures of materiality discussed above and in light of other relevant
qualitative considerations in forming our opinion.
Other information
The other information comprises the information included in the annual
report set out on pages 1 to 174 and 239 to 247, other than the financial
statements and our auditor’s report thereon. The directors are responsible
for the other information contained within the annual report.
Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information
and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this report, we do not
express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.
Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider
whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial
statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit, or
otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such material
inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to
determine whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the financial
statements themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we
conclude that there is a material misstatement of the other information,
weare required to report that fact.
We have nothing to report in this regard.
Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies
Act 2006
In our opinion, the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited
has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:
the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report
for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is
consistent with the financial statements; and
the strategic report and the directors’ report have been prepared in
accordance with applicable legal requirements.
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Pennon Group plc continued
182 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Matters on which we are required to report by exception
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and the
parent company and its environment obtained in the course of the audit,
we have not identified material misstatements in the strategic report or the
directors’report.
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to
which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:
adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company,
or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches
not visited by us; or
the parent company financial statements and the part of the Directors’
Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the
accounting records and returns; or
certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not
made; or
we have not received all the information and explanations we require
forour audit
Corporate Governance Statement
We have reviewed the directors’ statement in relation to going concern,
longer-term viability and that part of the Corporate Governance Statement
relating to the group and company’s compliance with the provisions of the
UK Corporate Governance Code specified for our review by the Listing Rules.
Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that
each of the following elements of the Corporate Governance Statement
is materially consistent with the financial statements or our knowledge
obtained during the audit:
Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting
the going concern basis of accounting and any material uncertainties
identified set out on page 172;
Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the company’s prospects,
the period this assessment covers and why the period is appropriate set
out on page 65;
Director’s statement on whether it has a reasonable expectation that the
group will be able to continue in operation and meets its liabilities set out
on page 172;
Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on
page174;
Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the
emerging and principal risks set out on page 55;
The section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness
of risk management and internal control systems set out on page 55; and;
The section describing the work of the audit committee set out on
page136.
Responsibilities of directors
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement set out
on page 174, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial
statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for
such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the
preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement,
whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for
assessing the group and parent company’s ability to continue as a going
concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using
the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to
liquidate the group or the parent company or to cease operations, or have no
realistic alternative but to do so.
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial
statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the
financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement,
whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes
our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a
guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always
detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from
fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate,
they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of
users taken on the basis of these financial statements.
Explanation as to what extent the audit was considered capable
of detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and
regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined
above, to detect irregularities, including fraud. The risk of not detecting a
material misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting
one resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by,
for example, forgery or intentional misrepresentations, or through collusion.
The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities,
including fraud is detailed below.
However, the primary responsibility for the prevention and detection of
fraud rests with both those charged with governance of the company and
management.
We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks
that are applicable to the group and determined that the most
significantare;
Companies Act 2006
Financial Reporting Council (FRC) and the UK Corporate
GovernanceCode
Tax legislation (governed by HM Revenue & Customs)
Health and Safety legislation
Environment Agency environmental permits
Ofwat regulations
UK listing rules
183Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
We understood how Pennon Group plc is complying with those
frameworks by reading internal policies and codes of conduct and
assessing the entity level control environment, including the level of
oversight of those charged with governance. We made enquiries of
the group’s legal counsel, regulatory team and internal audit of known
instances of non-compliance or suspected non-compliance with
laws and regulations. We corroborated our enquiries through review
of correspondence with regulatory bodies. We designed our audit
procedures to identify non-compliance with such laws and regulations
identified in the paragraph above. As well as enquiry and attendance at
meetings, our procedures involved a review of the reporting to the above
committees and a review of board meetings and other committee minutes
to identify any non-compliance with laws and regulations. Our procedures
also involved journal entry testing, with a focus on journals meeting our
defined risk criteria based on our understanding of the business.
We assessed the susceptibility of the group’s financial statements to
material misstatement, including how fraud might occur by making
enquiries of senior management, including the Chief Executive Officer,
Chief Financial Officer, Head of Internal Audit and Audit Committee Chair.
We planned our audit to identify risks of management override, tested
higher risk journal entries and performed audit procedures to address the
potential for management bias, particularly over areas involving significant
estimation and judgement. Further discussion of our approach to address
the identified risks of management override are set out in the key audit
matters section of our report.
Based on this understanding we designed our audit procedures to identify
non-compliance with such laws and regulations. Our procedures involved
making enquiries of key management, those charged with governance
and legal counsel, reviewing key policies, inspecting legal registers and
correspondence with regulators and reading key management meeting
minutes. We involved our internal specialists where appropriate. We also
completed procedures to conclude on the compliance of significant
disclosures in the Annual Report and Accounts with the requirements of
the relevant accounting standards, UK legislation and the UK Corporate
Governance Code.
We communicated regularly with the component teams and attended key
meetings with the component teams, management and legal counsel in
order to identify and communicate any instances of non-compliance with
laws and regulations.
The group operates in the water sector which is highly regulated. As
such the Senior Statutory Auditor reviewed the experience and expertise
of the engagement team to ensure that the team had the appropriate
competence and capabilities, which included the use of specialists
whereappropriate.
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial
statements is located on the
Financial Reporting Council’s website at https://www.frc.org.uk/
auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report.
Other matters we are required to address
Following the recommendation from the audit committee, we were
appointed by the company on to audit the financial statements for the
year ending 31 March 2015 and subsequent financial periods.
The period of total uninterrupted engagement including previous
renewals and reappointments is 10 years, covering the years ending
31 March 2015 to 31 March 2024.
The audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the
auditcommittee.
Use of our report
This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in
accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit
work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members
those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for
no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or
assume responsibility to anyone other than the company and the company’s
members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we
have formed.
Christabel Cowling (Senior statutory auditor)
for and on behalf of Ernst & Young LLP, Statutory Auditor
London
21 May 2024
Independent Auditor’s report to the members of Pennon Group plc continued
184 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Financial Statements
Consolidated income statement
For the year ended 31
st
March 2024
Notes
Before non-Non-underlying Non-underlying
underlying items Before non-items
items(note 6) Total underlying items (note 6) Total
2024202420242023 2023 2023
£m £m£m£m £m £m
Revenue
5
9 07.8
907.8
825.0
(27.8)
797.2
Operating costs
7
Employ
ment costs
(114.8)
(0. 7)
(115.5)
(102.2)
(102.2)
Raw materials and consumables used
(51.8)
(51.8)
(33.6)
(33.6)
Other operating expenses
(395.8)
(25.2)
(421.0)
(373.6)
(15.9)
(389.5)
Trade receivables impairment
(7.1)
(7.1)
(7.8)
(7.8)
Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and
amortisation
5
338.3
(25.9)
312.4
307.8
(43.7)
264.1
Depreciation and amortisation
7
(172.0)
(172.0)
(154.7)
(154.7)
Operating profit/(loss)
5
166.3
(25 .9)
140.4
153.1
(43.7)
109.4
Finance income
8
12.6
12.6
9.2
1 8.4
27 .6
Finance costs
8
(162.8)
(162.8)
(145.8)
(145.8)
Net finance costs
8
(150.2)
(150.2)
(13 6.6)
18.4
(118.2)
Share of post-tax profit from associated
companies 20
0.7
0.7
0.3
0.3
Profit/(loss) before tax
5
16.8
(25.9)
(9.1)
16.8
(25.3)
(8.5)
Taxation (charge)/credit
9
(4.3)
4.9
0.6
3.6
5.3
8.9
Profit/(loss) for the year
12.5
(21.0)
(8.5)
20.4
(20.0)
0.4
Attributable to:
Ordi
nary shareholders of the parent
(9.5)
0.1
Non-controlling interests
1.0
0.3
Earnings per ordinary share (
p
e
n
c
e
p
e
r
s
h
a
r
e
)
11
Basic
(3.6)
Diluted (3.6)
)
The above results were derived from continuing operations.
The notes on pages 191 to 238 form part of these financial statements.
185Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Financial Statements continued
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the year ended 31
st
March 2024
Notes
Before non-Non-underlyingNon-underlying
underlyingitems Before non- items
items (note 6)Total underlying items (note 6) Total
2024202420242023 2023 2023
£m £m£m£m £m £m
Profit/(loss) for the year
12.5
(21.0)
(8.5)
20.4
(20.0)
0.4
Other comprehensive (loss)/income
Items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss
R
emeasurement of defined benefit obligations
30
(7.7)
(7.7)
(39.0)
(39.0)
Income tax on items that will not be reclassified
9
2.2
2.2
9.8
9.8
Total items that will not be reclassified to
profit or loss
(5.5)
(5.5)
(29.2)
(29.2)
Items that may be reclassified subsequently
to profit or loss
Cash flow hedges
(16.4)
(16.4)
29.1
29.1
Income tax on items that may be reclassified
9
4.1
4.1
(7.3)
(7.3)
Total items that may be reclassified subsequently
to profit or loss
(12.3)
(12. 3)
21.8
21.8
Other comprehensive (loss)/income for the year
net of tax
36
(17.8)
(17.8)
(7.4)
(7.4)
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year
(5. 3)
(21.0)
(26.3)
13.0
(20.0)
(7.0)
Total comprehensive (loss)/income attributable to:
Ordinary shareholders of the parent
(27.3)
(7.3)
Non-controlling interests
1.0
0.3
The notes on pages 191 to 238 form part of these financial statements.
186 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Balance sheets
At 31
st
March 2024
Group
Company
20242023 2024 2023
Notes£m£m £m £m
Asset
s
Non-current assets
Goodwi
ll
15
179.5
163.9
Other intangible assets
16
67.7
14.9
Property, plant and equipment
17
5,361.6
4,476.9
0.1
0.1
Other non-current assets
19
8.7
23.2
54.1
26.1
Financial assets at fair value through profit
24
0.9
1.3
0.9
1.3
Deferred tax assets
31
20.7
18.6
Derivative financial instruments
23
17.4
33.2
0.2
0.5
Investments in subsidiary undertakings
20
1,153.2
1,316.6
Investments in associated companies
20
1.0
0.3
Retirement benefit obligations
30
26.6
29.3
3.5
4.7
5,663.4
4 ,743.0
1,232.7
1,367.9
Current asset
s
Inventories
21
13.2
10.0
Trade and other receivables
22
353.7
238.0
151.8
80.4
Current tax receivable
27
6.0
8.4
Derivative financial instruments
23
23.4
20.7
1.0
0.6
Cash and cash deposits
25
171.4
165.4
79.2
104.1
567.7
442.5
232.0
185.1
Liabilities
C
urrent liabilities
Borrowi
ngs
28
(238.2)
(124.7)
(8.0)
(279.1)
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit
24
(2.6)
(2.6)
(0.1)
(0.1)
Derivative financial instruments
23
(5.4)
(2.4)
(0.1)
Trade and other payables
26
(341.2)
(225.4)
(11.5)
(6.3)
Current tax liabilities
27
(3.2)
(3.4)
Provisions
32
(0.4)
(587.4
)
(355.5)
(22.9
)
(288.9)
Net current (liabilities
)
/
asset
s
(19.7
)
87.0
209.1
(103.8)
Non-current liabilities
Borrowi
ngs
28
(3,742.4)
(3,006.1)
(245.6)
(155.7)
Other non-current liabilities
29
(154.9)
(155.3)
(8.5)
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit
24
(31.8)
(34.0)
Derivative financial instruments
23
(3.3)
(2.4)
Deferred tax liabilities
31
(548.3)
(507.0)
Provisions
32
(0.4)
(4,481.1
)
(3,704.8)
(245.6
)
(164.2)
Net assets
1,1 62.6
1,125.2
(1,1
9
6.2
)
1,099.9
Shareholders’ equit
y
Share capital
33
174.6
159.5
174.6
159.5
Share premium account
34
398.2
237.6
398.2
237.6
Capital redemption reserve
35
157.1
157.1
157.1
157.1
Retained earnings and other reserves
36
431.3
570.6
466.3
545.7
Total shareholders’ equit
y
1,161.2
1,124.8
1,1
9
6.2
1,099.9
Non-controlling interests
1.4
0.4
Total equity
1,162.6
1,125.2
1,1
9
6.2
1,099.9
The profit for the year attributable to ordinary shareholders’ equity dealt with in the accounts of the Parent Company is £34.4 million (2023 £8.4
million). The notes on pages 191 to 238 form part of these financial statements.
The financial statements on pages 185 to 238 were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 20
th
May 2024 and were signed on its
behalf by:
Susan Davy
Chief Executive Officer
Pennon Group plc
Registered Office: Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, Devon, England EX2 7HR. Registered in England Number 2366640.
187Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Financial Statements continued
Statements of changes in equity
At 31
st
March 2024
Retained
ShareCapitalearnings
Share premiumredemptionand other Non-
capital account reserve reserves controlling Total
(note 33) (note 34)(note 35) (note 36) interests equity
£m£m£m£m £m £m
Group
At 31 March 2022
161.7
235.5
154.7
722.6
0.1
1,274.6
Profit for the year
0.1
0.3
0.4
Other comprehensive loss for the year
(7.4)
(7.4)
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year
(7.3)
0.3
(7.0)
Transactions with equity shareholders:
Dividends paid
(101.6)
(101.6)
Shares purchased for cancellation (including related expenses)
(4 0.0)
(40. 0)
Shares cancelled (note 33)
(2.4)
2.4
Adjustment in respect of share-based payments
(net of tax)
1.9
1.9
Own shares acquired by the Pennon Employee Share Trust in
respect of share options granted
(5.0)
(5.0)
Proceeds from shares issued under the Sharesave Scheme
0.2
2.1
2.3
Total transactions with equity shareholders
(2.2)
2.1
2.4
(144.7)
(142.4)
At 31 March 2023
159.5
237.6
157.1
570.6
0.4
1,125.2
(Loss)/Profit for the year
(9.5)
1.0
(8.5)
Other comprehensive loss for the year
(17.8) (17.8)
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year
(27.3)
1.0
(26.3)
Transactions with equity shareholders:
Dividends paid
(111.7) (111.7)
Shares issued
15.1
164.9
180.0
Transaction costs arising on shares issued (4.7)
(4.7)
Adjustment in respect of share-based payments
(net of tax)
1.1 1.1
Own shares acquired by the Pennon Employee Share Trust in
respect of share options granted
(1.4) (1.4)
Proceeds from shares issued under the Sharesave Scheme 0.4
0.4
Total transactions with equity shareholders
15.1
160.6
(112.0) 63.7
At 31 March 2024
174.6
398.2
157.1
431.3
1.4
1,162.6
The notes on pages 191 to 238 form part of these financial statements.
188 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Statements of changes in equity (continued)
For the year ended 31
st
March 2024
Share
capital
(note 33)
£m
Share
premium
account
(note 34)
£m
Capital
redemption
reserve
(note 35)
£m
Retained
earnings
and other
reserves
(note 36)
£m
Total
equity
£m
Company
At 31 March 2022 161.7 235.5 154.7 689.1 1,241.0
Profit for the year 8.4 8.4
Other comprehensive loss for the year (6.1) (6.1)
Total comprehensive income for the year 2.3 2.3
Transactions with equity shareholders:
Dividends paid (101.6) (101.6)
Shares purchased for cancellation (including related expenses) (40.0) (40.0)
Shares cancelled (note 33) (2.4) 2.4
Adjustment in respect of share-based payments
(net of tax) 1.3 1.3
Charge in respect of share options vesting (5.4) (5.4)
Proceeds from shares issued under the Sharesave Scheme 0.2 2.1 2.3
Total transactions with equity shareholders (2.2) 2.1 2.4 (145.7) (143.4)
At 31 March 2023 159.5 237.6 157.1 545.7 1,099.9
Profit for the year
34.4 34.4
Other comprehensive loss for the year
(1.0) (1.0)
Total comprehensive income for the year
33.4 33.4
Transactions with equity shareholders:
Dividends paid
(111.7) (111.7)
Shares issued
15.1
164.9
180.0
Transaction costs arising on shares issued
(4.7)
(4.7)
Adjustment in respect of share-based payments
(net of tax)
1.1 1.1
Charge in respect of share options vesting (2.2) (2.2)
Proceeds from shares issued under the Sharesave Scheme
0.4
0.4
Total transactions with equity shareholders 15.1 160.6
(112.8) 62.9
At 31 March 2024 174.6 398.2 157.1 466.3 1,196.2
The notes on pages 191 to 238 form part of these financial statements.
189Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Financial Statements continued
Cash flow statements
For the year ended 31
st
March 2024
Group
Company
2023
20242023 2024 Restated*
Notes£m£m £m £m
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash generated/(outflow) from operations
37
26 1.7
313 .7
(9.2)
34.2
Interest paid
37
(116.2)
(159.7)
(11.9)
(7.7)
Tax received/(paid)
3.4
(1.4)
0.2
0.6
Net cash generated/(outflow) from operating activities
148.9
152.6
(20.9)
27.1
Cash flows from investing activities
Interest received
7.1
4.9
8.2
6.1
Dividends received
0.5
15.7
Movement of restricted deposits
146.1
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
(555.1)
(326.6)
(0.1)
Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired
20, 43
(62.7)
Deposit of restricted cash
(4.3)
Purchase of intangible assets
(43.8)
(4.6)
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
0.8
0.7
Loans to subsidiary undertakings
(178.0)
(73.1)
Repayment of loans by subsidiaries
123.1
Investment in subsidiary undertakings
20
(120.3)
Net cash (used in)/received from investing activities
(658.0)
(179.5)
(166.6)
(51.3)
Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from issuance of ordinary shares
175.7
2.3
175.7
2.3
Purchase of ordinary shares by the Pennon Employee Share Trust
(1.4)
(5.0)
(1.4)
(5.4)
Proceeds from new borrowing
574.5
233.0
100.0
Repayment of borrowings
(168.7)
(210.3)
(33.7)
Cash inflows from lease financing arrangements
64.8
40 .2
Lease principal repayments (including net recoverable VAT paid / recovered)
(22.4)
(99.2)
Dividends paid
(111.7)
(101.6)
(111.7)
(101.6)
Repurchase of own shares and associated fees
(40.0)
(40.0)
Net cash received from/(used in) financing activities
510.8
(180.6)
162.6
(178.4)
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
1.7
(207.5)
(24.9)
(202.6)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year
25
143.7
351.2
104.1
306.7
Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year
25
145.4
1 43.7
79.2
104.1
*See note 2
The notes on pages 191 to 238 form part of these financial statements.
190 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Notes to the Financial Statements
1. General information
Pennon Group plc is a company registered in the United Kingdom under
the Companies Act 2006. The address of the registered office is given
on page 246. Pennon Group’s business is operated through its principal
subsidiaries. South West Water Limited, provides water and wastewater
services in Devon, Cornwall and parts of Dorset and Somerset and water
only services in parts of Dorset, Hampshire, Wiltshire and Bristol. Pennon
Group is the majority shareholder of Pennon Water Services Limited,
a company providing water and wastewater retail services to non-
household customer accounts across Great Britain. Bristol Water
Holdings Limited owns a 30% share in Water 2 Business Limited, a joint
venture with Wessex Water, operating in the same sector as Pennon
Water Services Limited.
On 10 January 2024, the Company acquired 100% of the issued capital
of Sumisho Osaka Gas Water UK Limited (which has subsequently been
renamed Sutton and East Surrey Group Holdings Limited), the holding
company of Sutton and East Surrey Water plc (“SES Water”) and Sutton
and East Surrey Water Services (“SESWS”) a company providing water
and wastewater retail services to non-household customer accounts
along with certain other ancillary businesses, for £90.2 million from
Sumitomo Corporation and Osaka Gas. SES Water is a regulated water
only company serving a population of approximately 750,000 customers
in the South East region. On 8 January 2024, an Initial Enforcement
Order (IEO) was issued by the Competition and Markets Authority
(CMA) regarding the Group's acquisition of Sutton and East Surrey
Group Holdings Limited (SES). The IEO did not prevent the Group from
completing its acquisition of SES, but required Pennon and SES to
remain operationally separate, and in the form in which each had existed
prior to the IEO coming into force, until the completion of the CMA’s
review. The Group duly completed its acquisition of SES on 10 January
2024. The Group has been exposed to the variable returns from the
results and performance of SES since that date.
The CMA has granted a number of derogations to the IEO in order to
permit the Group oversight of SES’ activities, for the purposes of, among
other things, maintaining SES’ financial position and ensuring that the
Group as whole (including SES) is able to comply with its corporate
governance obligations. These include derogations granted on 9
January 2024 allowing the Group to exercise its rights as shareholder in
connection with certain reserved matters, to require SES to appoint
individuals to certain internal management functions, and to nominate
an observer to attend meetings of SES’ board of directors.
On 3 May 2024 the Group offered to provide separate reporting
information for Sutton and East Surrey Water plc from the rest of the
Group’s water businesses post-Merger to allow Ofwat the ability to make
comparisons between water enterprises, a similar remedy was accepted
by the CMA following the acquisition of Bristol Water plc in 2021. The
CMA considers that there are reasonable grounds for believing that the
undertakings offered by the Group, or a modified version of them, might
be accepted by the CMA. The Group therefore remains reasonably
certain that approval of the acquisition will be granted in the coming
months.
The Group has considered the requirements of IFRS 10 Consolidated
Financial Statements and – in light of the foregoing – has determined
that Pennon Group plc should consolidate SES’ results within the
Group’s financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2024 as from
the date of the acquisition, i.e. 10 January 2024. The impact of
consolidating SES from this date is disclosed in note 43.
2. Principal accounting policies
The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of these
financial statements are set out below. These policies have been
consistently applied to the years presented.
(a) Basis of preparation
These financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost
accounting basis (except for fair value items, principally acquisitions,
transfers of assets from customers and certain financial instruments as
described in accounting policy notes (b), (u) and (n) respectively) and
in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards
and, as regards the parent company financial statements, as applied
in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.
The Company has taken advantage of section 408 of the Companies
Act 2006 not to present the parent company profit and loss account.
These financial statements are presented in pounds sterling and all
values rounded to the nearest one-hundred thousand pounds, except
when otherwise indicated.
A summary of the principal accounting policies is set out below,
together with an explanation where changes have been made to
previous policies on the adoption of new accounting standards and
interpretations in the year.
The going concern basis has been adopted in preparing these financial
statements. At 31 March 2024 the Group has access to undrawn
committed funds and cash and cash deposits totalling £601.4 million,
including cash and other short-term deposits of £171.4 million and £430.0
million of undrawn facilities. Cash and other short-term deposits include
£26.0 million of restricted funds deposited with lessors which are available
for access, subject to being replaced by an equivalent valued security.
Considering this the Group has a headroom of £435 million, including the
impact of £98 million of loans and facilities due for maturity or renewal
within the going concern period through to 31 May 2025.
In making their assessment, the Directors reviewed the principal risks
and considered which risks might threaten the Group’s going concern
status, to do this the Group’s business plan has been stress-tested.
Whilst the Group’s risk management processes seek to mitigate the
impact of principal risks as set out on pages 55 to 64, individual
sensitivities against these risks have been identified. These sensitivities,
which are ascribed a value with reference to risk weighting, factoring in
the likelihood of occurrence and financial impact, were applied to the
baseline financial forecast which uses the Group’s annual budget for FY
2024/25, including the impact of the acquisition of Sutton and East
Surrey Group Holdings Limited, and longer-term strategic business plan
for the remainder of the going concern period to 31 May 2025. The risks
and sensitivities include consideration of: legislative impacts such as
change in government policy and non-compliance with laws and
regulations, macro-economic impacts such as inflation and interest rate
increases, regulatory impacts such as the ongoing Ofwat price and tariff
review, i.e. PR24, covering the period from April 2025 to March 2030, and
operational impacts such as ensuring adequate water resources and
failure of operational assets. A combined stress testing scenario has
been performed to assess the overall impact of these individual
scenarios impacting the Group collectively. The combined weighted
impact of the risks occurring is c.£80 million, this value is considered
equivalent to an extreme one-off event that could occur within a year,
the probability of such an event happening is deemed unlikely. Through
this testing, it has been determined that none of the individual principal
risks would in isolation, or in aggregate, compromise the going concern
of the Group over the going concern period, the assessment has been
considered by reviewing the impact on the solvency position as well as
debt and interest covenants. In the combined scenario to ensure that
the Group was able to continue as a going concern, additional
mitigations could be deployed to reduce gearing and increase covenant
headroom. In the combined stress test scenario, the group has sufficient
liquidity and covenant headroom which reflects that no mitigations
would be needed by the Group. However if required additional
mitigations could be deployed to reduce gearing and increase covenant
headroom. Examples of mitigations could include: reduction in
discretionary operational expenditure, deferral of capital expenditure
and/or cancellation of non-essential capital expenditure, reduction in the
amount of dividend payable, and raising additional funding.
191Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
2. Principal accounting policies continued
In addition, we have modelled a reverse engineered scenario that could
possibly compromise the Group’s solvency over the going concern
assessment period. This scenario builds on the factors above and
additionally assumes all the Group’s principal risks are incurred within
the going concern period, with no probability weightings attached. The
Board considered the likelihood of this scenario on the Group’s solvency
over the going concern period as remote, given this would require all of
the principal risks to be incurred at maximum impact within the same
time frame, without implementing controllable mitigations, as noted
above, or raising additional funding.
We have considered the Group’s funding position and financial
projections, which take into account a range of possible impacts,
including the refinancing required within and immediately after the
going concern assessment period. Subsequent to the year end date, the
Group has secured a £150 million private placement and a £350 million
liquidity facility, which reflects on the Group’s ability to secure finance.
Having considered these factors, the Directors have a reasonable
expectation that that the Group will meet the requirements of its
covenants and has adequate resources to continue in operational
existence for the period to at least the end of the going concern
assessment period of 31 May 2025, and that there are no material
uncertainties to disclose. For this reason, they continue to adopt the
going concern basis in preparing the financial statements.
In preparing the financial statements management has considered the
impact of climate change, taking into account the relevant disclosures in
the Strategic Report, including those made in accordance with the
recommendations of the Taskforce on Climate-related Financial
Disclosure. The expected environmental impact of climate change on
the water business has been modelled noting that the physical risks are
increasing. It is likely that the Group will need to invest to protect certain
assets such as sewage works and pumping stations against sea level
inundation and these considerations form part of the planning process
for new capital expenditure. Longer term investment, outlined in the
strategic plans, will be needed to manage future risks. To achieve this,
combined regulatory and government support within their policy
frameworks will be essential. Whilst it is estimated additional spend will
be required to manage future risks, the current available information and
assessment did not identify any risks regarding the sufficiency of funds
available to the Group to support this additional spend or any risk that
would require the useful economic lives of assets to be reduced in the
year or identify the need for impairment that would impact the carrying
values of such assets or have any other impact on the financial
statements. The impact assessments will be continuously updated to
reflect the latest available information on the impact of climate change.
New standards or interpretations which were mandatory for the first
time in the year beginning 1 April 2023 did not have a material impact on
the net assets or results of the Group and the parent company.
New standards or interpretations due to be adopted from 1 April 2024
are not expected to have a material impact on the Group’s and the
parent company’s net assets or results. Existing borrowing covenants
are not impacted by changes in accounting standards.
Prior period restatement (parent company cash flow statement)
Management considered the FRC’s (Financial Reporting Council’s)
Annual Review of Corporate Reporting 2022/2023 published in October
2023 and performed a review of the parent company statement of cash
flow. Management review has identified that £73.1 million of loan
extended to subsidiary had been incorrectly classified within cash flows
from operating activities as opposed to cash flows from investing
activities. As such the prior period parent company statement of cash
flow in respect of the “Cash generated/(outflow) from operations” and
“Net cash generated/(outflow) from operating activities” have been
restated from £38.9 million cash outflow to a cash inflow of £34.2 million
and £46.0 million cash outflow to a cash inflow of £27.1 million
respectively. Furthermore, cash flow from “Loans to subsidiary
undertakings” has increased from £nil to a cash outflow of £73.1 million
and “Net cash (used in)/received from investing activities” of £21.8
million cash inflow has decreased to a cash outflow of £51.3 million. In
addition to this within Note 37 “Analysis of cash flows given in the
statement of cash flows” the prior period amounts relating to
“Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables” of £31.0 million
cash outflow has decreased to a cash inflow of £42.1 million and
amounts in respect of “Cash generated/(outflow) from operations” of
£38.9 million cash outflow has decreased to a cash inflow of £34.2
million. There is no other impact on the parent company balance sheet
or statement of changes in equity.
(b) Basis of consolidation
The Group financial statements include the results of Pennon Group plc
and its subsidiaries and joint ventures.
The results of subsidiaries and joint ventures are included from the date
of acquisition or incorporation and excluded from the date of disposal.
The results of subsidiaries are consolidated where the Group is exposed
to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity
and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the
entity. The results of joint ventures are accounted for on an equity basis.
Intra-group trading, loan balances and transactions are eliminated
on consolidation.
The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for the
purchase of subsidiaries. The excess of the value transferred to the
seller in return for control of the acquired business, together with the fair
value of any previously held equity interest in that business over the
Group’s share of the fair value of the identifiable net assets, is recorded
as goodwill.
192 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
2. Principal accounting policies continued
(c) Revenue recognition
Group revenue is recognised following delivery of performance
obligations and an assessment of when control over the product or
service is transferred to the customer. Revenue is only recognised when
collection of consideration is highly probable.
Revenue is recognised either when the performance obligation in the
contract has been performed (point in time recognition) or ‘over time’ as
the performance obligations to the customer are satisfied. For each
obligation satisfied over time, the Group applies a revenue recognition
method that accurately reflects performance in transferring control of the
services to the customer.
Where a contract with a customer includes more than one performance
obligation, revenue is allocated to each obligation in proportion to a fair
value assessment of the total contract sales value split across the
services provided.
At the inception of a contract the total transaction price is estimated,
being the fair value to which the Group expects to be entitled under the
contract, including any variable consideration. Variable consideration is
based on the most likely outcome of the performance obligations.
Revenue excludes value added tax, trade discounts and revenue arising
from transactions between Group companies.
Water (domestic and non-household retail)
For most of the services provided to domestic customers, contract
terms are implied through statute and regulation in the absence of
formal, written contracts. South West Water and SES Water have a duty
under legislation to provide domestic customers with services
regardless of payment and are not permitted to disconnect domestic
customers for non-payment of bills. Charges are set via the periodic
review price-setting process, regulated by Ofwat.
In respect of ongoing, continuous services to customers, such as the
provision of drinking water and wastewater services, revenue is
recognised over time.
Customers with an unmeasured supply are billed at the start of the year
for the full amount of the annual charge but typically take advantage of
a choice of payment arrangements to pay by regular instalments. The
performance obligation has been assessed as standing ready to provide
water and sewerage services when required by our customers, and
accordingly revenue is recognised under IFRS 15 as the stand-ready
obligation is fulfilled over time.
Customers with a metered supply are sent up to four bills per year, based
either on actual meter readings or estimated usage. For these customers,
revenue includes an estimation of the amount of unbilled usage at the
period end. Payment options for domestic customers include an annual
meter payment plan where customers agree to pay a fixed amount per
month which is adjusted to reflect actual consumption at the end of
the year. Revenue is recognised as water is supplied, based on estimate
usage for unbilled elements.
A range of regulated services is offered to property developers and owners
who require connection to the water and sewerage networks or need the
networks to be extended or altered. Typically, these customers pay an
estimate of the charges in advance as a deposit, which is treated as a
contract liability and are billed or refunded the difference between the
estimate and actual costs on completion of the work.
The principle components of these contributions are as follows:
i) Where the performance obligation relates solely to a connection to the
network, revenue is recognised at the point of connection when the
customer is deemed to obtain control.
ii) Where assets are constructed or provided by the Group or assets
transferred to the Group, it is considered that there is an explicit or
implied performance obligation to provide an ongoing water and/or
wastewater service, with the result that revenue is recognised over a
time no longer than the economic life of assets provided by or
transferred to the Group.
Pennon Water Services provides specialist retail water and wastewater
services to business customers. It raises bills and recognises revenue
in accordance with its contracts with customers and in line with the
limits established for the non-household periodic price-setting process
where applicable.
Contract assets and liabilities
A trade receivable is recognised when the Group has an unconditional
right to receive consideration in exchange for performance obligations
already fulfilled. A contract asset is recognised when the Group has
fulfilled some of its performance obligations but has not yet obtained an
unconditional right to receive consideration. The amounts for contract
assets, when applicable, are disclosed within note 19 (Other non-current
assets) and note 22 (Trade and other receivables) as appropriate.
A contract liability is recognised when consideration is received in
advance of the Group performing its performance obligations to
customers, including, when appropriate, transfers of assets from
customers (per paragraph (u) below). The value of contract liabilities
is disclosed within note 26 (Trade and other payables) and note 29
(Other non-current liabilities) as appropriate.
(d) Segmental reporting
Each of the Group’s business segments provides services which are
subject to risks and returns which are different from those of the other
business segments. The Group’s internal organisation and management
structure and its system of internal financial reporting are based
primarily on business segments.
The Group is organised into two operating segments. The water segment
comprises the regulated water and wastewater services undertaken by
South West Water and the regulated water services undertaken by SES
Water. The non-household retail business reflects the services provided by
Pennon Water Services and SESWS. Other segments, including Pennon
Group plc, are not reportable segments as they are not reported to Chief
Decision makers. Segmental revenue and results include transactions
between businesses. Inter-segmental transactions are eliminated on
consolidation.
(e) Goodwill
Goodwill arising on consolidation from the acquisition of subsidiary
undertakings represents the excess of the purchase consideration
over the fair value of net assets acquired, less any subsequent
impairment charges.
Goodwill is recognised as an asset and reviewed for impairment at least
annually. Any impairment is recognised immediately in the income
statement and is not subsequently reversed. For the purpose of
impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business combination is
allocated to each of the cash generating units (CGUs) or group of CGUs,
that is expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. Each
unit or group of units to which goodwill is allocated represents the lowest
level within the entity at which the goodwill is monitored for internal
reporting purposes. Goodwill is allocated and monitored at the
reportable operating segment level. Further details are contained in
accounting policy (i).
When a subsidiary undertaking is sold, the profit or loss on disposal is
determined after including the attributable amount of goodwill.
193Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
2. P
rincipal accounting policies continued
(f) Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets include assets acquired in business combination
and are capitalised at fair value at the date of acquisition. Following
initial recognition, finite life intangible assets are amortised on a straight-
line basis over their estimated useful lives, with the expense charged to
the income statement through operating costs.
(g) Property, plant and equipment
i) Infrastructure assets (being water mains and sewers, impounding and
pumped raw water storage reservoirs, dams, pipelines and sea outfalls)
Infrastructure assets were included at fair value on transition to IFRS,
and subsequent additions are recorded at cost less accumulated
depreciation and impairment charges. Expenditure to increase capacity
or enhance infrastructure assets is capitalised where it can be reliably
measured, and it is probable that incremental future economic benefits
will flow to the Group. The cost of day to day servicing of infrastructure
components is recognised in the income statement as it arises.
Infrastructure assets are depreciated evenly over their useful economic
lives, and are principally:
Dams and impounding reservoirs
100 to 200 years
Water mains
60 to 180 years
Sewers
75 to 150 years
Assets in the course of construction are not depreciated until
commissioned.
ii) Other assets (being property, overground plant and equipment)
Other assets are included at cost less accumulated depreciation.
Freehold land is not depreciated. Other assets are depreciated evenly to
their residual value over their estimated economic lives, and are
principally:
Land and buildings – freehold 10 to 80 years
buildings
Land and buildings – leasehold Over the estimated economic lives
buildings or the lease period, whichever is the
shorter
Operational properties
15 to 100 years
Fixed plant
10 to 30 years
Vehicles, mobile plant and
computers
4 to 20 years
Assets in the course of construction are not depreciated until
commissioned.
The cost of assets includes directly attributable labour and overhead costs
which are incremental to the Group. Borrowing costs directly attributable
to the construction of a qualifying asset (an asset necessarily taking a
substantial period of time to be prepared for its intended use) are
capitalised as part of the asset. Assets transferred from customers are
recognised at fair value as set out in accounting policy (u).
The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed annually.
Gains and losses on disposal are determined by comparing sale
proceeds with carrying amounts. These are included in the income
statement.
(h) Leased assets
All are accounted for by recognising a right-of-use asset and a lease
liability except for:
Low value assets; and
Leases with a duration of 12 months or less.
Contracts are initially measured at the present value of contractual
payments due to the lessor over the lease term, with the discount rate
determined by reference to the rate inherent in the lease unless this is not
readily determinable, in which case the Group’s incremental borrowing rate
on commencement of the lease is used. After initial measurement, lease
payments are allocated between the liability and finance cost. The finance
cost is charged to profit and loss over the lease period to produce a
constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability
for each period. The interest element of cash payments in respect of these
leases is included within interest payments in determining net cash
generated from operating activities. The capital element of the cash
payment is included within cash flows from financing activities. Right-of-
use assets are amortised on a straight-line basis over the remaining term
of the lease or the remaining economic life of the asset if shorter. When the
Group revisits its estimate of lease term (because, for example, it
reassesses an extension option), it adjusts the carrying amount of the
lease liability to reflect the payments to make over the revised term, which
is discounted at the same discount rate that applied on lease
commencement. In these circumstances an equivalent adjustment is made
to the carrying value of the right-of-use asset, with the revised carrying
amount being amortised over the remaining (revised) lease term.
Assets are included as property, plant and equipment as right-of-use
assets at the present value of the minimum lease payments and are
depreciated over their estimated economic lives or the finance lease
period, whichever is the shorter. The corresponding liability is recorded
as borrowings. The interest element of the rental costs is charged
against profits using the actuarial method over the period of the lease.
The Group regularly uses sale and leaseback transactions to finance its
capital programme. A sale and leaseback transaction is where the Group
sells an asset and immediately reacquires the use of the asset by
entering into a lease with the buyer. Each transaction is assessed as to
whether it meets the criteria within IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from contracts with
customers’ for a sale to have occurred. If the sale criteria are met a lease
liability is recognised, the associated property, plant and equipment
asset is derecognised, and a right-of-use asset is recognised at the
proportion of the carrying value relating to the right retained. Any gain
or loss arising relates to the rights transferred to the buyer. If the criteria
for a sale under IFRS 15 have not been met the asset is not
derecognised and no sale is recorded.
(i) Impairment of non-financial assets
Assets with an indefinite useful life are not subject to amortisation and
are tested annually for impairment, or whenever events or changes in
circumstance indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable.
Assets subject to amortisation or depreciation are tested for impairment
whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying
amount may not be recoverable.
An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which an asset’s
carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable
amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value, less costs to sell, and value-
in-use. For the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at
the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash flows
(CGUs). Value-in-use represents the present value of projected future
cash flows expected to be derived from a CGU, discounted using a pre-
tax discount rate which reflects an assessment of the market cost of
capital of the CGU. Impairments are charged to the income statement in
the year in which they arise.
Non-financial assets other than goodwill that have been impaired are
reviewed for possible reversal of the impairment at each reporting date.
Where a previously impaired asset or CGU’s recoverable amount is in
excess of its carrying amount, previous impairments are reversed to the
carrying value that would have expected to be recognised had the
original impairment not occurred.
(j) Parent company: Investment in subsidiary undertakings
Investments in subsidiary undertakings are initially recorded at cost,
being the fair value of the consideration paid. Subsequently investments
are reviewed for impairment on an individual basis annually or if events
or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be
fully recoverable.
(k) Investment in associated companies
Associated companies are entities over which the Group exercises joint
control. Investments in associated companies are accounted for using
the equity method of accounting. Any excess of the cost of acquisition
over the Group’s share of the fair values of the identifiable net assets of
the associated company at the date of acquisition is recognised as
goodwill and is included in the carrying value of the investment in the
associated company.
1 94 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
2. Principal accounting policies continued
The carrying value of the Group’s investment is adjusted for the Group’s
share of post-acquisition profits or losses recognised in the income
statement and statement of comprehensive income. Losses of an
associated company in excess of the Group’s interest are not recognised
unless the Group has a legal or constructive obligation to fund those
losses.
(l) Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. The
cost of finished goods and work in progress includes raw materials and
the cost of bringing stocks to their present location and condition. It
excludes borrowing costs. Net realisable value is the estimated selling
price less cost to sell. The costs of items of inventory are determined
using weighted average costs.
(m) Cash and cash deposits
Cash and cash deposits comprise cash in hand and short-term deposits
held at banks. Bank overdrafts are offset against cash balances where
there is a legally enforceable right to offset and there is an intention to
settle the balances on a net basis. Otherwise, overdrafts are included
within current borrowings.
(n) Financial instruments
Financial instruments are recognised and measured in accordance with
IFRS 9. The Group classifies its financial instruments in the following
categories:
i) Debt instruments at amortised cost
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised at fair value, net of
transaction costs incurred. Following initial recognition, interest-bearing
loans and borrowings are subsequently stated at amortised cost using
the effective interest method. Gains and losses are recognised in the
income statement when instruments are derecognised or impaired.
Premia, discounts and other costs and fees are recognised in the income
statement through amortisation.
Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has an
unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least 12
months after the balance sheet date.
ii) Trade receivables
Trade receivables do not carry any interest receivable and are
recognised initially at fair value and subsequently at amortised cost
using the effective interest method, less provision for expected credit
losses (ECLs). In accordance with IFRS 9, each Group entity performs
an impairment analysis at each reporting date to measure the ECLs.
Each entity does not track changes in credit risk but instead recognises
a loss allowance based on lifetime ECLs at each reporting date. Each
subsidiary has established a provision matrix that is based on its
historical credit loss experience, adjusted for forward-looking factors
specific to the receivables and the economic environment.
iii) Trade payables
Trade payables are not interest-bearing and are recognised initially at
fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the
effective interest method.
iv) Derivative financial instruments and hedging activities
The Group uses derivative financial instruments, principally interest rate
swaps, cross-currency interest rate swaps and inflation swaps to hedge
risks associated with interest rate and exchange rate fluctuations.
Derivative instruments are initially recognised at fair value on the date
the derivative contract is entered into and subsequently remeasured at
fair value for the reported balance sheet.
The Group designates certain hedging derivatives as either:
A hedge of a highly probable forecast transaction or change in the
cash flows of a recognised asset or liability (a cash flow hedge); or
A hedge of the exposure to change in the fair value of a recognised
asset or liability (a fair value hedge).
The gain or loss on remeasurement is recognised in the income
statement except for cash flow hedges which meet the conditions for
hedge accounting, when the portion of the gain or loss on the hedging
instrument which is determined to be an effective hedge is recognised
directly in equity, and the ineffective portion in the income statement.
The gains or losses deferred in equity in this way are subsequently
recognised in the income statement in the same period in which the
hedged underlying transaction or firm commitment is recognised in the
income statement.
In order to qualify for hedge accounting, the Group is required to
document in advance the relationship between the item being hedged
and the hedging instrument. The Group is also required to document
and demonstrate an assessment of the relationship between the hedged
item and the hedging instrument which shows that the hedge will be
highly effective on an ongoing basis. This effectiveness testing is
reperformed at the end of each reporting period to ensure that the
hedge remains highly effective.
The full fair value of a hedging derivative is apportioned on a straight-
line basis between non-current and current assets and liabilities based
on the remaining maturity of the hedging derivative.
Derivative financial instruments deemed held for trading, which are
not subject to hedge accounting, are classified as a current asset or
liability with any change in fair value recognised immediately in the
income statement.
The Group uses cross-currency swaps for some of its foreign currency
denominated private placement borrowings. The swaps either have the
effect of (i) converting variable rate foreign currency borrowings into
fixed rate sterling borrowings, (ii) converting fixed rate foreign currency
borrowings into fixed rate sterling borrowings, or (iii) converting fixed
rate foreign currency borrowings into floating rate sterling borrowings .
v) Financial instruments at fair value through profit
Financial instruments at fair value through profit reflect the fair value
movement of the hedged risk on a hedged item through a fair value
hedging relationship. The fair values of these financial instruments are
initially recognised on the date the hedging relationship is entered into
and thereafter remeasured at each subsequent balance sheet date. The
gain or loss on remeasurement for the period is recognised in the
income statement.
vi) Receivables due from subsidiary undertakings
Amounts owed by subsidiaries are classified and recorded at amortised
cost and reduced by allowances for ECLs. Estimated future credit losses
are first recorded on initial recognition of a receivable and are based on
estimated probability of default. Individual balances are written off when
management deems them not to be collectible.
(o) Taxation including deferred tax
The tax charge for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is
recognised in the income statement, except to the extent that it relates
to items recognised in the statement of comprehensive income or
directly in equity. In this case the tax is also recognised in the statement
of comprehensive income or directly in equity as appropriate.
Current tax is calculated on the basis of tax laws enacted or
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Management
periodically evaluates tax items subject to interpretation and establishes
provisions on individual tax items, where in the judgement of
management, the position is uncertain. The Group includes a number of
companies, including the parent company, which are part of a tax group
for certain aspects of the tax legislation. One of these aspects relates to
group relief whereby current tax liabilities can be offset by current tax
losses arising in other companies within the same tax group. Payments
for group relief are included within the current tax disclosures.
Deferred tax is provided in full on temporary differences between the
carrying amount of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and
the tax base, except where they arise from initial recognition of an asset
or liability in a transaction, other than a business combination, that at the
time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or
loss. Deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that it is
probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the
assets can be realised. Deferred tax is determined using the tax rates
enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, and
expected to apply when the deferred tax liability is settled or the
deferred tax asset is realised.
195Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
2. Principal accounting policies continued
The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development
(OECD)/G20 inclusive Framework on Base Erosion and Profit Shifting
published the Pillar Two model rules designed to address the tax
challenges arising from the digitalisation of the global economy.
It is unclear if the Pillar Two model rules created additional temporary
differences, whether to remeasure deferred taxes for the Pillar Two model
rules and which tax rate to use to measure deferred tax. In response to
this uncertainty, the IASB and AASB on 23 May 2023 and 27 June 2023,
respectively, introduced a mandatory temporary exception to the
requirements of IAS12, ‘Income taxes’ under which a company does not
recognise or disclose information about deferred tax assets and liabilities
relating to the proposed Pillar Two model rules. The Group applied the
temporary exception at 31 March 2024.
Pillar Two legislation has been enacted in the UK which is the only jurisdiction
in which the Group operates. The legislation will be effective for the Group’s
financial year beginning 1 April 2024. The Group has performed an
assessment of the Group’s potential exposure to Pillar Two income taxes.
This assessment is based on the most recent financial information
available regarding the financial performance of the constituent entities
in the Group. Based on the assessment performed, the Pillar Two
effective tax rates in the only jurisdiction in which the Group operates,
i.e. the UK is above 15% and management is not currently aware of any
circumstances under which this might change. Therefore, the Group
does not expect a potential exposure to Pillar Two top-up taxes.
(p) Provisions
Provisions are made where there is a present legal or constructive
obligation as a result of a past event and it is probable that there will be
an outflow of economic benefits to settle this obligation and a reliable
estimate of this amount can be made. Where the effect of the time value
of money is material the current amount of a provision is the present
value of the expenditures expected to be required to settle obligations.
The unwinding of the discount to present value is included as notional
interest within finance costs.
(q) Share capital and treasury shares
Ordinary shares are classified as equity.
Where the Company purchases the Company’s equity share capital
(treasury shares) the consideration paid, including any directly attributable
costs, is deducted from equity until the shares are cancelled or reissued.
Where such shares are subsequently reissued, any consideration received,
net of any directly attributable transaction costs, is included in equity.
The Group balance sheet includes the shares held by the Pennon Group
plc Employee Benefit Trust, relating to employee share-based payments,
which have not vested at the balance sheet date. These are shown as a
deduction from shareholders’ equity until such time as they vest.
Share buy-back scheme and tender offer
Shares purchased for cancellation are deducted from retained earnings
at the total consideration paid or payable, including any related
expenses. Where the Group has an irrevocable commitment to purchase
shares for cancellation at the balance sheet date, a liability is recognised
in other creditors based on the share price at the balance sheet date
and retained earnings reduced by the amount of the liability.
Shares purchased and held by the Group (treasury shares) are deducted
from the treasury reserve at the total consideration paid or payable. On
cancellation of treasury shares, the cost is transferred from the treasury
reserve to retained earnings.
When treasury shares are issued at below cost, an amount representing
the difference between the cost of those shares and issue proceeds is
transferred to retained earnings. No gain or loss is recognised in the
consolidated income statement on the purchase, sale, issue or
cancellation of the Group’s own equity instruments.
(r) Dividend distributions
Dividend distributions are recognised as a liability in the financial
statements in the period in which the dividends are approved by
the Company’s shareholders. Interim dividends are recognised when
paid, final dividends when approved by shareholders at the Annual
General Meeting.
(s) Employee benefits
i) Retirement benefit obligations
The Group operates defined benefit and defined contribution
pension schemes.
Defined benefit pension schemes
The liability recognised in the balance sheet in respect of defined benefit
pension plans is the present value of the defined benefit obligation at
the end of the year less the fair value of plan assets. If the value of a
plan’s assets exceeds the present value of its obligations, the resulting
surplus is only recognised if the Group has an unconditional right to
that surplus.
The defined benefit obligation is calculated by independent actuaries
who advise on the selection of Directors’ best estimates of assumptions,
using the projected unit credit method. The present value of the defined
benefit obligation is determined by discounting the estimated future
cash outflows using interest rates of high-quality corporate bonds, and
that have terms to maturity approximating to the terms of the related
pension obligation. The increase in liabilities of the Group’s defined
benefit pension schemes, expected to arise from employee service in the
year, is charged against operating profit.
Changes in benefits granted by the employer are recognised
immediately as a past service cost in the income statement.
Actuarial gains and losses arising from experience adjustments and
changes in actuarial assumptions are charged or credited to equity in
the statement of comprehensive income in the period in which they
arise.
Defined contribution scheme
Costs of the defined contribution pension scheme are charged to the
income statement in the year in which they arise. The Group has no
further payment obligations once the contributions have been paid.
ii) Share-based payment
The Group operates a number of equity-settled, share-based payment
plans for employees. The fair value of the employee services required in
exchange for the grant is recognised as an expense over the vesting
period of the grant.
Fair values are calculated using an appropriate pricing model. Non-
market-based vesting conditions are adjusted for assumptions as to the
number of shares which are expected to vest.
(t) Fair values
The fair value of interest rate, inflation and cross currency swaps is
based on the market price to transfer the asset or liability at the balance
sheet date in an ordinary transaction between market participants.
The fair values of short-term deposits, loans and overdrafts with a
maturity of less than one year are assumed to approximate to their book
values. In the case of non-current bank loans and other loans, the fair
value of financial liabilities for disclosure purposes is estimated by
discounting the future contractual cash flows at the current market
interest rate available to the Group for similar financial instruments.
(u) Transfers of assets from customers
Where an item of property, plant and equipment that must be used to
connect customers to the network is received from a customer, or where
cash is received from a customer for the acquisition or construction of
such an item, that asset is recorded and measured on initial recognition
at its fair value. The credit created by the recognition of the asset is
recognised as a contract liability on the balance sheet. The contract
liability reduces, and revenue is recognised in the income statement, as
performance obligations are satisfied. The period over which the credit is
recognised depends upon the nature of the service provided, as
determined by the agreement with the customer. Where the service
provided is solely a connection to the network, the credit is recognised
at the point of connection. If the agreement does not specify a period,
revenue is recognised over a period no longer than the economic life of
the transferred asset used to provide the ongoing service.
The fair value of assets on transfer from customers is determined using
a cost valuation approach allowing for depreciation.
196 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
2. Principal accounting policies continued
(v) Foreign exchange
Transactions denominated in foreign currencies are translated at the
exchange rate at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and
liabilities denominated in a foreign currency are translated at the closing
balance sheet rate. The resulting gain or loss is recognised in the
income statement.
(w) Non-underlying items
Non-underlying items are those that in the Directors’ view should be
separately disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence to enable
a full understanding of the Group’s financial performance.
(x) Grants and contributions
Grants and contributions receivable in respect of property, plant and
equipment which provide the customer with ongoing access to the
water and sewerage networks, are treated as contract liabilities and
released to revenue over the economic life of those elements of
property, plant and equipment. Grants and contributions receivable in
respect of expenses charged against profits in the year have been
included in the income statement.
Government grants are recognised where there is reasonable certainty
that the grant will be received and all attached conditions will be
complied with. When the grant relates to an expense item, it is
recognised on a systematic basis over the periods that the related costs,
for which it is intended to compensate, are expensed. The income from
such grants is presented in the financial statements as a deduction from
the expense to which it relates.
(y) Variable consideration
Variable consideration in connection with the purchase of individual
assets outside of business combinations is recognised as a financial
liability at fair value when the amount of consideration payable is
contingent upon future events that are not within the direct control of
the group. Initial recognition of the financial liability is at fair value. Where
the variability of the consideration is directly linked to the quality or
output of the asset received then any changes in the consideration is
recognised by adjusting the carrying amount of the related asset.
(z) Acquisitions of groups of assets that do not constitute a
business
The identifiable assets and liabilities in acquisitions of groups of assets
that do not constitute a business, initially measured at an amount other
than cost, are measured at the amounts specified in the relevant
accounting standards. The residual transaction price is then allocated to
the remaining identifiable assets and liabilities based on their relative fair
values at the date of the acquisition. Details of acquisitions in the year
meeting this definition can be found in note 16.
3. Financial risk management
(a) Financial risk factors
The Group’s activities expose it to a variety of financial risks: liquidity
risk; market risk (interest rate and foreign currency risk); credit risk and
inflation risk.
The Group’s treasury function seeks to ensure that sufficient funding is
available to meet foreseeable needs and to maintain reasonable
headroom for contingencies and manages inflation and interest rate risk.
The principal financial risks faced by the Group relate to liquidity,
interest rate and credit counterparty risk.
These risks and treasury operations are managed by the Group Chief
Financial Officer in accordance with policies established by the Board.
Major transactions are individually approved by the Board. Treasury
activities are reported to the Board and are subject to review by internal
audit.
Financial instruments are used to raise finance, manage risk, optimise
the use of surplus funds and manage overall interest rate performance.
The Group does not engage in speculative activity.
i) Liquidity risk
The Group actively maintains a mixture of long-term and short-term
committed facilities which are designed to ensure the Group has
sufficient available funds for operations and planned expansions
equivalent to at least one year’s forecast requirements at all times.
Details of undrawn committed facilities and short-term facilities are
provided in note 28.
Refinancing risk is managed under a Group policy that requires that no more
than 20% of Group net borrowings should mature in any financial year.
The Group and water business have entered into covenants with
lenders. While terms vary, these typically provide for limits on gearing
(primarily based on the water business’s regulatory capital value and
unregulated EBITDA) and interest cover. Existing covenants are not
impacted by subsequent changes to accounting standards.
197Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
3. Financial risk management continued
Contractual undiscounted cash flows, including interest payments, at the balance sheet date were:
Due within Due between Due between Due over
1 year 1 and 2 years 2 and 5 years 5 years Total
£m £m £m £m £m
Group
31 March 2024
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Borrowings excluding lease liabilities
186.3
191.0
335.2
2,145.0
2,857.5
Interest payments on borrowings
114.3
101.4
277.8
832.2
1,325.7
Lease liabilities including interest
89.8
153.6
215.5
1,192.6
1,651.5
Trade and other payables
330.6
330.6
Derivative contracts
Derivative contracts – net (receipts)/payments
(19.1)
(6.5)
(9.3)
(3.8)
(38.7)
31 March 2023
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Borrowings excluding lease liabilities
92.7
64.4
364.3
1,544.7
2,066.1
Interest payments on borrowings
86.7
83.0
208.3
768.7
1,146.7
Lease liabilities including interest
70.9
88.5
282.1
1,243.7
1,685.2
Trade and other payables
221.7
221.7
Derivative contracts
Derivative contracts – net (receipts)/payments
(0.8)
(4.6)
(0.6)
0.3
(5.7)
Company
31 March 2024
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Borrowings (including intercompany borrowings)
8.0
49.7
96.0
99.9
253.6
Interest payments on borrowings
15.3
12.1
26.1
3.8
57.3
Trade and other payables
11.5
11.5
31 March 2023
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Borrowings (including intercompany borrowings)
279.1
8.8
146.9
434.8
Interest payments on borrowings
9.6
9.3
6.7
6.0
31.6
Trade and other payables
6.3
6.3
ii) Market risk
The treasury policy states at least 60% of the Group’s debt should be fixed, this is managed through fixed rate debt and the use of derivatives to
ensure these levels are met. Of the Group’s net borrowings a proportion is RPI index-linked. The interest rate for index-linked debt is based mainly
upon an RPI measure; due to current Ofwat methodology the Group has considered other index linked indices which are also used in determining the
amount of revenue from customers of South West Water. The Group uses a combination of fixed rate, index-linked borrowings and fixed rate interest
swaps as cash flow hedges of future variable interest payments to achieve this policy. The notional principal amounts of the interest rate swaps are
used to determine settlement under those swaps and are not therefore an exposure for the Group. These instruments are analysed in note 23.
The Group has no significant interest-bearing assets upon which the net return fluctuates from market risk. Deposit interest receivable is expected to
largely fluctuate in line with interest payable on floating rate borrowings. Consequently, the Group’s income and cash generated from operations (note
37) are largely independent of changes in market interest rates.
For 2024 if interest rates on variable net borrowings had been on average 1% higher/lower with all other variables held constant, post-tax profit for the
year and equity would have increased/decreased by £7.6 million (2023 post tax profit for the year and equity would have increased/decreased by £6.4
million), for the equity sensitivity fair value, with derivative impacts excluded. This provides an indication of the changes which could be expected and
can be multiplied to support sensitivity analysis, the expected volatility is within the range of 0%-2%.
For 2024 if the indices on index-linked borrowings had been on average 1% higher/lower with all other variables held constant, post-tax profit for the
year and equity would have decreased/increased by £5.5 million (2023 post tax profit for the year and equity would have increased/decreased by £3.8
million). This provides an indication of the changes which could be expected and can be multiplied to support sensitivity analysis, the expected
volatility is within the range of 0%-2%.
Foreign currency risk occurs at transactional and translation level from borrowings and transactions in foreign currencies. These risks are managed
through forward contracts, which provide certainty over foreign currency risk.
iii) Credit risk
Credit counterparty risk arises from cash and cash deposits, derivative financial instruments and exposure to customers, including outstanding
receivables. Further information on the credit risk relating to trade and other receivables is given in note 22.
Counterparty risk arises from the investment of surplus funds and from the use of derivative financial instruments. The Board has agreed a policy for
managing such risk which is controlled through credit limits, counterparty approvals, and rigorous monitoring procedures.
The Group has no other significant concentration of credit risk. The Group’s surplus funds are managed by the Group’s treasury function and are
usually placed in short-term fixed interest deposits or the overnight money markets. Deposit counterparties must meet Board approved minimum
criteria based on their short-term credit ratings and therefore be of good credit quality.
198 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
3. Financial risk management continued
iv) Inflation risk
Market inflation has caused inflationary pressures across the Group, the Group has index linked facilities which are predominantly Retail Price Index
(RPI) linked.
Inflation risk arises if the indexes increase meaning the Group will either be paying or accreting the inflation, this could put pressure on the gearing or
interest cover ratios.
Inflation risk is mitigated through the index linked nature of our revenues and RCV calculations.
(b) Capital risk management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern in order to provide returns for
shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders and to maintain an optimal capital structure to minimise the cost of capital.
The Group’s policy is to have a minimum of 12 months pre-funding of projected capital expenditure. At 31 March 2024 the Group had cash and
facilities, including restricted funds, of £601 million (2023 £420 million), meeting this objective.
In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Group seeks to maintain a balance of returns to shareholders through dividends and an
appropriate capital structure of debt and equity for each business segment and the Group.
The Group monitors capital on the basis of the gearing ratio. This ratio is calculated as net borrowings divided by total capital. Net borrowings are
analysed in note 38 and calculated as total borrowings less cash and cash deposits. Total capital is calculated as total shareholders’ equity plus net
borrowings. The Group currently manages a net borrowings position of £3,809.2 million (2023 2,965.4 million).
The gearing ratios at the balance sheet date were:
2024 2023
£m £m
Net borrowings (note 38)
3,809.2
2,965.4
Total equity
1,162.6
1,125.2
Total capital
4,971.8
4,090.6
Gearing ratio
76.6%
72.6%
The water segment is also monitored on the basis of the ratio of its net borrowings to regulatory capital value. Ofwat’s notional gearing target for the
K7 (2020-25) regulatory period is set at 60%. The table below reflects South West Water Limited’s group of companies. The water segment also now
includes SES Water, ultimately the ratio of net borrowings to Regulatory Capital Value for the water segment will include SES Water, however this is
excluded for the current financial year to aid comparison.
South West Water
2024 2023
£m £m
Shadow Regulatory Capital Value
5,186.4
4,715.9
Net borrowings
3,294.7
2,865.3
Net borrowings/Regulatory Capital Value
63.5%
60.8%
The Group has entered into covenants with lenders and, while terms vary, these typically provide for limits on gearing and interest cover. The Group
has been in compliance with its covenants during the year.
(c) Determination of fair values
The Group uses the following hierarchy for determining the fair value of financial instruments by valuation technique:
Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (level 1)
Inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (that is, as prices) or indirectly
(that is, derived from prices) (level 2)
Inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (that is, unobservable inputs) (level 3).
The Group’s financial instruments are valued principally using level 2 measures as analysed in note 23.
The fair value of financial instruments not traded in an active market (for example over-the-counter derivatives) is determined by using valuation
techniques. A variety of methods and assumptions are used based on market conditions existing at each balance sheet date. Quoted market prices
or dealer quotes for similar instruments are used for long-term debt. Other techniques, such as estimated discounted cash flows, are used to
determine fair value for the remaining financial instruments. The fair value of interest rate swaps is calculated as the present value of the estimated
future cash flows.
The carrying values, less expected credit losses, of trade receivables and payables are assumed to approximate to their fair values.
199Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
4. Cri
tical accounting judgements and estimates
The Group’s principal accounting policies are set out in note 2.
Management is required to exercise significant judgement and make use
of estimates and assumptions in the application of these policies.
Estimates are based on factors including historical experience and
expectations of future events that management believe to be
reasonable. However, given the judgemental nature of such estimates,
actual results could be different from the assumptions used.
Estimates
Provision for doubtful debts
The Group has a material level of exposure to collection of trade
receivables. Provisions in respect of these balances are calculated with
reference to historical credit loss experience, adjusted for forward-
looking factors which by their nature are subject to uncertainty. Analysis
of actual recovery compared with provisioning levels have not, to date,
resulted in material variances.
Under its regular review procedures at the balance sheet date, the
Group applies a simplified approach in calculating ECLs for trade
receivables and contract assets. Therefore, the Group does not track
changes in credit risk but instead recognises a loss allowance based on
lifetime ECLs at each reporting date. Each subsidiary has established a
provision matrix that is informed by its historical credit loss experience,
adjusted for forward-looking factors specific to the receivables and the
economic environment. The Group's policy is to write-off trade
receivables where the expectation of recovery is considered highly
unlikely.
The actual level of debt collected may differ from the estimated levels
of recovery. As at 31 March 2024 the Group’s current trade receivables
were £375.3 million (2023 £280.3 million), against which £125.3 million
(2023 £106.5 million) had been provided for ECLs (note 22). Whilst the
provisions are considered to be appropriate, changes in estimation basis
or in economic conditions could lead to a change in the level of
provisions recorded and consequently the charge or credit to the
Income Statement. In determining the allowance for ECLs a provisioning
matrix is applied to the debt of customers in Devon, Cornwall and
Bournemouth, as set out in note 22. An increase/decrease in the
provision rates for current occupiers of 1% would lead to an
increase/decrease in the level of provision by £1.4 million.
Retirement benefit obligations
The Group operates defined benefit pension schemes for which
actuarial valuations are carried out as determined by the trustees at
intervals of not more than three years. The most recent triennial
valuation of the main scheme was as at 31 March 2022, the outcome of
which is summarised in note 30.
The pension cost and liabilities under IAS 19 are assessed in accordance
with Directors’ best estimates using the advice of an independent
qualified actuary and assumptions in the latest actuarial valuation. The
assumptions are based on member data supplied to the actuary and
market observations for interest rates and inflation, supplemented by
discussions between the actuary and management. The mortality
assumption uses a scheme-specific calculation based on CMI 2022
actuarial tables with an allowance for future longevity improvement. The
principal assumptions used to measure schemes’ liabilities, sensitivities
to changes in those assumptions and future funding obligations are set
out in note 30.
Judgements
Non-underlying items
In establishing which items are disclosed separately as non-underlying,
to enable a full understanding of the Group’s financial performance,
the Directors exercise their judgement in assessing the size, nature
or incidence of specific items. See note 6 for further details.
Goodwill allocation
Goodwill arising on the acquisition of Surrey and East Sutton Water is
allocated to the group of cash-generating units that are expected to
benefit from the synergies of the combination, the ‘Water CGU’. The
Water CGU comprises the regions of South West Water, Bournemouth
Water, Bristol Water and Surrey and East Sutton Water. The Water CGU,
excluding SES, operates under one management structure with
functional integration across the operating segment generating the
synergies of the combination. SES continues to operate under separate
management whilst Pennon operates under the CMA’s Initial
Enforcement Order (IEO). The expected synergies from the acquisition
can only begin to be recognised once merger clearance is granted by
the CMA. The recoverable amount is the higher of fair value, less costs
to sell, and value-in-use. Value-in-use represents the present value of
projected future cash flows expected to be derived from a CGU,
discounted using a pre-tax discount rate which reflects an assessment
of the market cost of capital of the CGU. Impairments are charged to the
income statement in the year in which they arise.
Other estimates
Revenue recognition
Management assessed and resolved that the level of estimation for
revenue recognition of accrued revenue relating to water and
wastewater should not be considered critical as the estimates are largely
calculated on a systematic basis and have not, to date, resulted in a
material adjustment within the following 12-month period. However,
management consider the total level of estimation of accrued revenue
relating to water and wastewater to be material and highlight this as a
material other estimate.
Acquisition accounting
The acquisition of SES Water in January 2024 has been accounted for
using the acquisition method under IFRS 3. The identifiable assets,
liabilities and contingent liabilities are recognised at their fair value at
date of acquisition. The fair value of the net assets identified were
determined with assistance from independent experts using professional
valuation techniques appropriate to the individual category of asset or
liability. Calculating the fair values of net assets, notably the fair values of
property, plant and equipment given the nature of the infrastructure
assets acquired, involves estimation and consequently the fair value
exercise is recorded as an other accounting estimate. The depreciation
charge is sensitive to the value of property, plant and equipment, a
higher or lower fair value calculation would lead to a change in the
depreciation charge in the period following acquisition.
Capitalisation and determination of useful economic lives of property,
plant and equipment
The property, plant and equipment of the Group relates primarily to
infrastructure assets (being water mains and sewers, impounding and
pumped raw water storage reservoirs, dams, pipelines and sea outfalls)
as well as other assets which include fixed plant and operational
properties. Given the nature of these assets, the Group incurs
expenditure including both asset enhancement as well as repairs and
maintenance, which involves judgement in allocation of costs between
operating and capital expenditure. The Group continues to apply a
consistent policy and approach on capitalisation of property, plant and
equipment. The useful economic lives of these types of asset vary from
10 to 200 years. Asset lives are reviewed annually and amended where
changes are made to assumptions relating to the expected life of the
asset from judgement around usage and performance experience,
technological advancement and other relevant factors. Overall
assessments on the impact of climate change on long life assets have
been completed and will be continuously updated for the latest available
information. The most recent assessment of the impact on climate
change, which includes the potential to mitigate adverse impacts, has
not identified any specific impact on the useful economic lives of long
life assets. Environmental factors and climate change form part of the
planning process for new capital expenditure, where the Group
continues apply a consistent policy on capitalisation. The depreciation
charge is sensitive to amendments of the useful economic lives of these
assets, a significant change in the estimated life of these assets could
have a material impact on depreciation, this is therefore noted as a
material other estimate.
200 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
5. Segmental information
Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with internal reporting provided to the Chief Operating Decision-Maker (CODM), which has
been identified as the Pennon Group plc Board. The earnings measures below are used by the Board in making decisions.
The Group is organised into two operating segments. The water segment comprises the regulated water and wastewater services undertaken by
South West Water and the regulated water services undertaken by SES Water. The non-household retail segment (business retail) reflects the services
provided by Pennon Water Services and SESWS.
Segment assets include goodwill and other intangible assets, property, plant and equipment, inventories, trade and other receivables and cash and
cash deposits. Segment liabilities comprise operating liabilities and borrowings and exclude taxation. The other segment liabilities include the
Company’s financing arrangements and Group taxation liabilities. Capital expenditure comprises additions to property, plant and equipment.
2024 2023
£m £m
Revenue
Water
745.8
701.3
Non-household retail
253.5
218.0
Other
11.8
8.6
Less intra-segment trading
(103.3)
(102.9)
Total underlying revenue
907.8
825.0
Water non-underlying revenue (note 6)
(27.8)
907.8
797.2
Operating profit/(loss) before depreciation, amortisation and non-underlying items (Underlying EBITDA)
Water
335.8
308.4
Non-household retail
7.7
4.3
Other
(5.2)
(4.9)
338.3
307.8
Operating profit/(loss) before non-underlying items
Water
169.9
159.4
Non-household retail
6.9
3.6
Other
(10.5)
(9.9)
166.3
153.1
Profit before tax and non-underlying items
Water
11.8
14.1
Non-household retail
4.9
1.8
Other
0.1
0.9
16.8
16.8
(Loss)/profit before tax
Water
(13.4)
(29.6)
Non-household retail
4.9
1.8
Other
(0.6)
19.3
(9.1)
(8.5)
1
1. Intra-segment transactions between and to different segments are under normal market-based commercial terms and conditions. Intra-segment revenue of the other segment is at cost.
Non-
household
Water retail Other Eliminations Group
£m £m £m £m £m
Balance sheet
31 March 2024
Assets (excluding carrying value in associated companies)
5,794.9
209.7
432.4
(215.6)
6,221.4
Carrying value in associated companies
9.7
9.7
Total assets
5,794.9
209.7
442.1
(215.6)
6,231.1
Liabilities
(4,838.2)
(130.6)
(315.3)
215.6
(5,068.5)
Net assets
956.7
79.1
126.8
1,162.6
31 March 2023
Assets (excluding carrying value in associated companies)
4,925.3
59.3
594.6
(403.3)
5,175.9
Carrying value in associated companies
9.6
9.6
Total assets
4,925.3
59.3
604.2
(403.3)
5,185.5
Liabilities
(3,925.2)
(55.4)
(483.0)
403.3
(4,060.3)
Net assets
1,000.1
3.9
121.2
1,125.2
201Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
5. Segmental information continue d
Segment liabilities of the water segment comprise of operating liabilities and borrowings. The other segment includes Company only assets and
liabilities as well as Group taxation liabilities and should be considered in conjunction with the eliminations column.
Notes
Non-household Other and
Water retail eliminations Group
£m £m £m £m
Other information
31 March 2024
Intangible asset additions
16
4.2
0.4
40.4
45.0
Amortisation of other intangible assets
7
3.5
0.2
3.7
Capital expenditure (Property, plant and equipment)
17
585.6
0.1
15.2
600.9
Depreciation
7
162.4
0.5
5.4
168.3
Finance income
8
7.2
0.4
5.0
12.6
Finance costs
8
165.3
2.4
(4.9)
162.8
31 March 2023
Intangible asset additions
16
4.5
0.1
4.6
Amortisation of other intangible assets
7
3.4
0.2
3.6
Capital expenditure (Property, plant and equipment)
17
353.6
0.1
353.7
Depreciation
7
145.6
0.5
5.0
151.1
Finance income
8
6.2
0.1
21.3
27.6
Finance costs
8
151.5
1.9
(7.6)
145.8
Finance income and costs above reflect the segment in which the amounts arise and exclude intercompany transactions.
All revenue is generated in the United Kingdom. The grouping of revenue streams by how they are affected by economic factors, as required by IFRS 15, is as follows:
Year ended 31 March 2024
Non-household
Water retail Other Total
£m £m £m £m
Segment revenue – underlying
745.8
253.5
11.8
1,011.1
Inter-segment revenue
(91.4)
(0.2)
(11.7)
(103.3)
Revenue from external customers
654.4
253.3
0.1
907.8
Significant service lines
Water
654.4
654.4
Non-household retail
253.3
253.3
Other
0.1
0.1
654.4
253.3
0.1
907.8
Year ended 31 March 2023
Non-household
Water retail Other Total
£m £m £m £m
Segment revenue – underlying
701.3
218.0
8.6
927.9
Segment revenue – non-underlying (note 6)
(27.8)
(27.8)
Inter-segment revenue
(94.7)
(8.2)
(102.9)
Revenue from external customers
578.8
218.0
0.4
797.2
Significant service lines
Water
578.8
578.8
Non-household retail
218.0
218.0
Other
0.4
0.4
578.8
218.0
0.4
797.2
The Group’s country of domicile is the United Kingdom and this is the country in which it generates the majority of its revenue. The Group’s non-
current assets are all located in the United Kingdom.
The results of the SES Water Group are shown below, the amounts are included in the Water and Non-household retail segments:
£m
Revenues from SES Water Group
Revenue
35.7
Inter-segment revenue (0.1)
Revenue from external customers
35.6
Profit from SES Water Group
Operating profit before depreciation, amortisation and non-underlying items (Underlying EBITDA)
3.6
Operating result before non-underlying item
Loss before tax before non-underlying items (2.5)
Loss before tax (2.7)
202 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
6. Non-underlying items
Non-underlying items are those that in the Directors’ view should be separately disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence to enable a full
understanding of the Group’s financial performance in the year and business trends over time. The presentation of results is consistent with internal
performance monitoring.
R
R
e
e
v
v
e
e
n
n
u
u
e
e
Notes
2024 2023
£m £m
WaterShare+
(20.2)
Drought incentive
(7.6)
Operating costs
Transformation
3
(13.9)
SES Water Group acquisition costs
4
(9.6)
Drought costs
2
(1.8)
(9.4)
Renewables Projects acquisition costs
(0.6)
WaterShare+
(2.2)
Bristol Water integration costs
6
(4.3)
Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation
(25.9)
(43.7)
Bond redemption
7
8
18.4
Net tax credit arising on non-underlying items above
9
4.9
4.7
Deferred tax change in rate
9
0.6
Net non-underlying charge
(21.0)
(20.0)
1
2
5
1
8
9
1. In September 2020, the Group offered its WaterShare+ scheme to its customers whereby customers could choose to accept a credit on their bill or take shares in Pennon Group
plc. The scheme operated again in the year ended 31 March 2023. The value of the rebate equated to £13 per customer and the total value of £20.2 million was recognised in full as
a non-underlying reduction to revenue in the year ended 31 March 2023. £19.9 million of the WaterShare+ credits were taken as credits on customers’ bills, with the balance of £0.3
million being taken as shares in Pennon Group Plc. This item was non-underlying in nature given its individual size and its non-recurring nature. Additional costs of £2.2 million were
incurred in relation to the offering.
2. 2022 was one of the driest and hottest years on record. Elevated demand on the South West Water region from increased tourism and the hot, dry weather led to an approximate
15% increase in distribution input in the year against the expected level from 2017 included in the drought plan. The combination of these individually extreme factors led to
extremely low water storage levels in the Colliford Water Resource Zone, with the main supply of Colliford reservoir falling to around 14% capacity in October. A drought was
declared by the Environment Agency in Devon and Cornwall in August 2022. In order to react to the drought and water shortage, South West Water invoked a series of emergency
measures and one-off expenditure to ensure the region could be supplied with water over the summer and continuing into 2023. Due to the exceptional combination of these
events and the significance of the emergency actions, certain costs have been classified as non-underlying given their size, nature and non-recurring incidence. The costs directly
addressing these exceptional circumstances include charges for drought permits, water tankering and other water saving measures. In November 2022, South West Water asked
households in Cornwall to reduce water usage as part of the ‘Stop The Drop’ campaign to increase reservoir levels. Household customers were offered a £30 bill credit if Colliford
reservoir reached 30% storage capacity by 31 December 2022 from a low of around 14%. In December 2022 the company announced the water level in Colliford reservoir reached
30% and as a result all household customers in Cornwall received a £30 credit on their bill. This one-off incentive was provided as part of the response to the drought conditions in
the Cornwall area in order to further prompt customers to reduce water usage. The total value of the bill credits amounted to £7.6 million.
3. £13.9 million of costs were incurred in connection with the setting up of a business transformation programme in South West Water following the merger of Bristol Water into South
West Water, £0.7 million of which were employment costs. These implementation costs are one-off in nature and incidence, with the benefits from incurring these costs expected to
endure into the future on a recurring basis. The programme is still ongoing with further costs of c.£8 million are expected to be incurred in the year ending 31 March 2025.
4. The Group incurred expenses of £9.6 million in the year in connection with the acquisition of SES Water Group and the related investigation by the Competition and Markets
Authority (CMA). Due to the one-off nature and incidence of the costs they have been classified as non-underlying.
5. Expenses in connection with the strategic review of renewal energy generating investments, not directly attributable to the intangible assets acquired, totalled £0.6 million. Due to
the one-off nature and incidence of the costs they have been classified as non-underlying.
6. The Group incurred expenses of £4.3 million in the year ended 31 March 2023. These related to the integration and statutory transfer of Bristol Water into South West Water. These
costs are classified as non-underlying due to their non-recurring nature.
7. On 17 October 2022 Bristol Water plc gave notice of redemption of the £40 million bonds due to be repaid in March 2041. The bonds were redeemed as part of the statutory
transfer of the business of Bristol Water to South West Water. The Group carrying value of the bonds at redemption was £91.3 million. The bonds were redeemed on 17 November
2022 for £72.3 million, and the difference arising on early settlement was credited to finance costs in the prior year. Associated legal costs of c.£1 million were also incurred in
relation to the bond redemption. The redemption of the bonds is non-recurring and of a material value, hence the credit has been treated as non-underlying.
8. The net tax credit arising on non-underlying items, relates to a deferred tax credit in respect of tax losses carried forward, generated by business transformation costs. The prior
year credit reflected a £2.8 million current tax credit in respect of losses carried back against prior year profits. The prior year also included a deferred tax credit of £1.9 million
relating to tax losses carried forwards and the deferred tax unwind of the fair value adjustment in relation to the Bristol Water bond terminated in the prior year.
9. Following the Chancellor's Budget on 4 March 2021 and subsequent substantial enactment of the Finance Act on 24 May 2021, the UK's main rate of corporation tax increased to
25% from 1 April 2023. All deferred tax assets and liabilities were therefore reviewed and where they will crystallise after 1 April 2023 were recalculated to crystallise at 25%. This
charge is considered non-underlying due to it arising from a material legislative change and its treatment is consistent with that applied in relation to previous changes in
corporation tax rates. A £0.6 million deferred tax credit in respect of rate change arose in the year ended 31 March 2023, in respect of tax losses carried forwards which will be
relieved at 25%.
203Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
7. Operating costs
Notes
2024 2023
£m £m
Employment costs
13
114.8
102.2
Raw materials and consumables
51.8
33.6
Other operating expenses before non-underlying items include:
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment
(0.8)
(0.4)
Short-term/low value asset lease expense
3.6
5.3
Government grant receivable
(18.6)
Trade receivables impairment
22
7.1
7.8
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment:
Owned assets
17
133.7
118.3
Under leases
17
34.6
32.8
Amortisation of other intangible assets
16
3.7
3.6
During the prior year the group received financial support from the UK Government’s Energy Relief Bill Scheme totalling £18.6 million. Operating costs
include a charge of £25.9 million (2023 £15.9 million) relating to non-underlying items, as detailed in note 6.
Fees payable to the Company’s auditor in the year were:
2024 2023
£000 £000
Fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates for the audit of parent company and consolidated financial statements
465
384
Fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates for other services:
The audit of Company’s subsidiaries
969
932
Audit-related assurance services
133
120
Other non-audit services
111
43
Total fees
1,678
1,479
Fees payable to the Company’s auditor in respect of Pennon Group pension schemes:
Audit
35
55
Expenses reimbursed to the auditor in relation to the audit of the Group were £107,000 (2023 £79,000).
A description of the work of the Audit Committee is set out in its report on pages 136 to 143 which includes an explanation of how the auditor’s
objectivity and independence are safeguarded when non-audit services are provided by the auditor’s firm.
8. Net finance costs
2024 2023
Finance Finance Finance Finance
cost income Total cost income Total
Notes £m £m £m £m £m £m
Cost of servicing debt
Bank borrowings and overdrafts
(113.0)
(113.0)
(111.3)
(111.3)
Interest element of lease payments
(44.0)
(44.0)
(30.8)
(30.8)
Other finance costs
(5.8)
(5.8)
(3.7)
(3.7)
Interest received
7.1
7.1
4.9
4.9
Net gains on derivative financial instruments
3.8
3.8
2.3
2.3
(162.8)
10.9
(151.9)
(145.8)
7.2
(138.6)
Notional interest
Retirement benefit obligations
30
1.7
1.7
2.0
2.0
Net finance costs (underlying)
(162.8)
12.6
(150.2)
(145.8)
9.2
(136.6)
Finance income (non-underlying)
6
18.4
18.4
Net finance costs (including non-underlying)
(162.8)
12.6
(150.2)
(145.8)
27.6
(118.2)
In addition to the above, finance costs of £15.5 million (2023 £5.0 million) have been capitalised on qualifying assets included in property, plant and
equipment, at an average borrowing rate of 6.4% (2023 5.7%).
Other finance costs include £1.1 million (2023 £1.1 million) of dividends payable on listed preference shares issued by Bristol Water plc, which are
classified as debt (see note 28).
204 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
9. Tax
ation
Non- Non-
underlying underlying
Before non- items Before non- items
underlying items (note 6) Total underlying items (note 6) Total
2024 2024 2024 2023 2023 2023
£m £m £m £m £m £m
Analysis of charge/(credit) in year
Current tax credit
(0.6)
(0.6)
(2.7)
(2.8)
(5.5)
Deferred tax – other
4.9
(4.9)
(0.6)
(1.9)
(2.5)
Deferred tax arising on change of rate of corporation tax
(0.3)
(0.6)
(0.9)
Total deferred tax charge/(credit)
4.9
(4.9)
(0.9)
(2.5)
(3.4)
Tax charge/(credit) for year
4.3
(4.9)
(0.6)
(3.6)
(5.3)
(8.9)
UK corporation tax is calculated at 25% (2023 19%) of the estimated assessable profit for the year.
UK corporation tax for the Group is stated after a credit relating to prior year current tax of £0.6 million (2023 £2.7 million credit) and a prior year
deferred tax charge of £nil (2023 £1.0 million charge). These items relate to prior year adjustments in respect of additional interest deductions due in
accordance with UK tax legislation.
The tax for the year differs from the theoretical amount which would arise using the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 25% (2023 19%) as
follows:
2024 2023
£m £m
Reconciliation of total tax credit
Loss before tax
(9.1)
(8.5)
Loss multiplied by the standard rate of UK corporation tax of 25% (2023 19%)
(2.3)
(1.6)
Effects of:
E
xpenses/(income) not deductible for tax purposes
1.6
(0.4)
Joint venture profits not taxable
(0.2)
(0.1)
Adjustments to tax charge in respect of prior years
(0.6)
(1.7)
Change in UK tax rates
(1.0)
Depreciation charged on non-qualifying assets
0.9
0.7
Other
(4.8)
Tax credit for year
(0.6)
(8.9)
2024 2023
£m £m
Reconciliation of current tax credit
Loss before tax
(9.1)
(8.5)
Loss multiplied by the standard rate of UK corporation tax of 25% (2023 19%)
(2.3)
(1.6)
Effects of:
Relie
f for capital allowances in place of depreciation
(37.0)
(37.6)
Disallowance of depreciation charged in the accounts
36.5
24.4
Other timing differences
(5.3)
(11.1)
Expenses/(income) not deductible for tax purposes
1.6
(0.4)
Joint venture profits not taxable
(0.2)
(0.1)
Accounting policy alignment adjustment on acquisition of Bristol Water
5.0
Adjustments to tax charge in respect of prior years
(0.6)
(2.7)
Depreciation charged on non-qualifying assets
0.9
0.7
Tax losses carried forward
9.3
18.6
Relief for capitalised interest and foreign exchange gains/losses
(3.5)
(0.7)
Current tax credit for year
(0.6)
(5.5)
The Group's current tax credit is lower than the UK headline rate of 25%, primarily due to losses generated which are carried forward to offset against
future taxable profit.
The Group benefits from the 100% full expensing and 50% enhanced allowances in respect of qualifying spend relating to certain qualifying assets
(largely plant and machinery). The Group incurs significant capital expenditure each year as it maintains and enhances it assets for the benefit of its
customers, communities and the environment. These enhanced allowances have increased capital allowance claims for the year and contributed
significantly to the current tax credit for the year. There is also a consequently higher deferred tax liability and charge due to the additional capital
allowance deductions.
205Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
9. Tax
ation continued
Certain types of expenditure are not deductible for tax purposes. These types of expenditure are set out in tax legislation. The main category of
expenditure not deductible during the year are acquisition costs relating to the purchase of the SES Group and various renewables businesses, where
these are classified as capital in nature for tax purposes.
Profits from joint ventures are included in the consolidated accounts on an after tax basis, as such these profits are not taxable in the Group accounts.
The accounting policy alignment relates to Bristol Water plc aligning their accounting policy in relation to deferred income to that of South West Water
on acquisition. Despite the accounting adjustments reflecting these the restated 2022 figures, for tax purposes the adjustment was subject to
corporation tax during the year ended 31 March 2023. This was a one-off item in that year.
Adjustments to the tax charge in respect of prior year arise from the return to provision adjustments booked, having completed and submitted the
corporation tax returns for the year ended 31 March 2023 in March 2024, as well as submitting an amended return for the year ended 31 March 2021 as
a result of the closure of Viridor enquiries, which have a subsequent affect on the Group. These are routine items with any adjustments reflected in the
current year’s tax charge.
Depreciation charge on non-qualifying assets generates a permanent adjustment which increases the tax charge. Non-qualifying assets are those
which do not qualify for writing down tax allowances including certain fixed assets typically in relation to older buildings and premises where tax relief
is not available.
Tax losses generated in the year and carried forward generate a deferred tax rather than current tax credit, hence the adjustment to current tax.
When utilised, the adjustment will be reflected through a movement from deferred to current tax.
Other timing differences relate to the timing of relief for items including pensions, general provisions and financial derivatives. The reduction in the
year relates mainly to additional pension contributions made to fund deficits in the scheme.
Immediate tax relief is available in respect of capitalised interest and foreign exchange gains/losses.
In addition to the amounts recognised in the income statement, the following tax charges/(credits) (which include the effect of the change in tax rate)
were recognised:
2024 2023
£m £m
Amounts recognised directly in other comprehensive income
Deferred tax credit on defined benefit pension schemes
(2.2)
(9.8)
Deferred tax (credit)/charge on cash flow hedges
(4.1)
7.3
Amounts recognised directly in equity
Deferred tax charge on share-based payments
0.1
0.5
Factors affecting future tax charges
The Chancellor announced in the November 2023 Autumn statement that full expensing on qualifying plant and machinery has been made permanent.
This applies to plant and machinery with an expected life of less than 25 years. The 50% first year allowance on long life plant and machinery has also
been made permanent.
Pillar Two legislation has been enacted in the UK which is the only jurisdiction in which the Group operates. The legislation will be effective for the
Group’s financial year beginning 1 April 2024. The Group has performed an assessment of the Group’s potential exposure to Pillar two income taxes.
This assessment is based on the most recent financial information available regarding the financial performance of the constituent entities in the
Group. Based on the assessment performed, the Pillar Two effective tax rates in the only jurisdiction in which the Group operates i.e. the UK, is above
15% and management is not currently aware of any circumstances under which this might change. Therefore, the Group does not expect a potential
exposure to Pillar Two top-up taxes.
10. Profit of the parent company
2024 2023
£m £m
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders’ equity dealt within the accounts of the parent company
34.4
8.4
As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, no income statement or statement of comprehensive income is presented for the Company.
11. Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share are calculated by dividing the earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders by the weighted average number of ordinary
shares outstanding during the year, excluding those held in the employee share trust (note 36), which are treated as cancelled.
For diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue is adjusted to include all dilutive potential ordinary shares. The
Group has two types of dilutive potential ordinary shares – those share options granted to employees where the exercise price is less than the average
market price of the Company’s ordinary shares during the year; and the contingently issuable shares under the Group’s Performance and Co-investment
Plan, the long-term incentive plan and the deferred shares element of the Annual Incentive Bonus Plan, based on performance criteria for the vesting of
the awards.
Potential ordinary shares, as discussed above, that could dilute basic earnings per share in the future, were not included in the calculation for statutory
earnings per share because they were anti-dilutive for the current year. The weighted average number of shares and earnings used in the calculations
are detailed in the table below.
2024
2023
Number of shares (millions)
For basic earnings per share
266.6
261.9
Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares from share options
0.9
For diluted earnings per share
266.6
262.8
206 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
11. Earnings per share continued
Basic and diluted earnings per ordinary share
Earnings per ordinary share before non-underlying items and deferred tax are presented as the Directors believe that this measure provides a more
useful year on year comparison of business trends and performance. Deferred tax is excluded as the Directors believe it reflects a distortive effect of
changes in corporation tax rates and the level of long-term capital investment. Earnings per share have been calculated as follows:
2024
2023
(Loss)/profit
Earnings per share
Profit
Earnings per share
after tax after tax
£m
Basic p
Diluted p
£m
Basic p
Diluted p
Statutory earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders
of the parent
(9.5)
(3.6)
(3.6)
0.1
Deferred tax charge/(credit) before non-underlying items
4.9
1.9
1.9
(0.9)
(0.3)
(0.3)
Non-underlying items (net of tax)
21.0
7.9
7.9
20.0
7.6
7.6
Adjusted earnings
16.4
6.2
6.2
19.2
7.3
7.3
12. Dividends
2024 2023
£m £m
Amounts recognised as distributions to ordinary equity holders in the year
Interim dividend paid for the year ended 31 March 2023 12.96p (2022 11.70p)
per share
33.9
31.6
Final dividend paid for the year ended 31 March 2023 29.77p (2022 26.8 3p)
per share
77.8
70.0
111.7
101.6
Proposed dividends
Proposed interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2024 14.04p (2023 12.96p)
per share
40.2
33.9
Proposed final dividend for the year ended 31 March 2024 30 .33p (2023 29.77p)
per share
86.7
77.8
126.9
111.7
The proposed interim and final dividends have not been included as liabilities in these financial statements.
The proposed interim dividend for 2024 was paid on 5 April 2024 and the proposed final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders at the AGM.
13. Employment costs
Notes
2024 2023
£m £m
Wages and salaries
134.9
110.0
Social security costs
14.2
12.1
Pension costs
30
13.8
11.0
Share-based payments
33
1.1
2.4
Total employment costs
164.0
135.5
Charged:
Employment costs (excluding non-underlying items)
114.8
102.2
Employment costs (non-underlying items)
0.7
Capital schemes – property, plant and equipment
47.8
32.7
Research and development
0.7
0.6
Total employment costs
164.0
135.5
Details of Directors’ emoluments are set out in note 14. There are no personnel, other than Directors, who as key management exercise authority and
responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Group. Members of other executive committees assist the Directors in their
duties but do not hold authority to control the activities of the Group.
2024
2023
Employees (average full-time equivalent number)
The average monthly number of employees (including Executive Directors) was:
Water
3,051
2,639
Non-household retail
192
158
Other
90
67
Total
3,333
2,864
207Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
14. Directors’ emoluments
2024 2023
£000 £000
Executive Directors:
Salary
895
784
Performance-related bonus paid or payable
51
Share-based payments
1,103
786
Other emoluments, including payments in lieu of pension provision
111
111
Non-Executive Directors
649
583
2,758
2,315
The cost of share-based payments represents the amount charged to the income statement, as described in note 33. The aggregate gains on vesting
of Directors’ share-based awards amounted to a total of £nil (2023 £142,000).
Total emoluments include nil (2023 nil) payable to Directors for services as directors of subsidiary undertakings.
At 31 March 2024 no Directors (2023 none) are accruing retirement benefits under defined benefit pension schemes in respect of which the Group
contributed.
At 31 March 2024 two Directors (2023 two) are members of the Group’s defined contribution pension scheme in respect of which the Group
contributed £13,000 (2023 £4,000).
At 31 March 2024 two Directors received payments in lieu of pension provision (2023 two).
More detailed information concerning Directors’ emoluments (including pensions and the highest paid Director) and share interests is shown in the
Directors’ remuneration report on pages 148 to 170.
15. Goodwill
£m
Cost:
At 1 April 2022
163.9
At 31 March 2023
163.9
Acquisition of SES Water Group (note 43)
15.6
At 31 March 2024
179.5
Carrying amount:
At 1 April 2022
163.9
At 31 March 2023
163.9
At 31 March 2024 179.5
Goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated at acquisition to the CGU expected to benefit from that business combination. During the
year ended 31 March 2024, the Group acquired the SES Water Group, adding £15.6 million to goodwill (see note 43).
All goodwill represents the water business, therefore this is the lowest level at which goodwill is monitored and tested.
Impairment testing of goodwill
The Group tests goodwill for impairment annually, or more frequently if there are any indications that impairment may have arisen.
The recoverable amount of the water business segment is assessed using level 2 fair value hierarchy techniques, with reference to the market value of
the water business, using a market-based observable premium, based on historical water industry merger and acquisition activity, to regulated capital
value as defined by Ofwat.
The results of tests performed during the year demonstrate significant headroom in the water CGU, and it is judged that no reasonable change in the
key assumptions would cause the carrying amount of the CGUs to exceed the recoverable amount.
208 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
16. Other intangible assets
Renewable
Energy Software
Generation development Total
£m £m £m
Cost:
At 1 April 2022
19.6
19.6
Additions
4.6
4.6
Disposals
(1.9)
(1.9)
At 31 March 2023
22.3
22.3
Arising on acquisitions
11.6
11.6
Additions
40.3
4.7
45.0
Disposals
(1.3)
(1.3)
At 31 March 2024
40.3
37.3
77.6
Accumulated amortisation:
At 1 April 2022
5.7
5.7
Charge for year
3.6
3.6
Disposals
(1.9)
(1.9)
At 31 March 2023
7.4
7.4
Charge for year
3.7
3.7
Disposals
(1.2)
(1.2)
At 31 March 2024
9.9
9.9
Carrying amount:
At 1 April 2022
13.9
13.9
At 31 March 2023
14.9
14.9
At 31 March 2024
40.3
27.4
67.7
Computer software is amortised over the useful life of the assets which at acquisition was ten years. The average remaining life is one year (2023 one
year).
Additions to intangible assets during the period include £40.3m as a result of acquiring renewable energy sites with rights to generate energy in the
future. The sites acquired have been accounted for under “asset purchase” accounting as opposed to “business combination” accounting, having
considered the facts and circumstances surrounding the sites acquired. The intangible assets acquired relate to energy generation rights on all four
sites purchased and a battery energy storage system on a single site, these assets will be amortised over periods expected to be between 35 to 45
years in line with the rights acquired, these assets will be tested for impairment annually until they are available for use.
The carrying values of other intangible assets are reviewed annually or when events or changes in circumstance indicate that the carrying amounts
may not be fully recoverable.
209Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
17. Property, plant and equipment
Fixed and mobile
Land and Infrastructure Operational plant, vehicles and Construction
buildings assets properties computers in progress Total
£m £m £m £m £m £m
Group
Cost:
At 31 March 2022
186.7
2,754.4
952.3
2,250.3
184.2
6,327.9
Additions
0.7
52.3
11.4
85.3
204.0
353.7
Assets adopted at fair value
14.3
14.3
Disposals
(0.3)
(1.5)
(0.6)
(2.4)
(4.8)
Transfers/reclassifications
1.7
43.8
8.5
43.8
(97.8)
At 31 March 2023
188.8
2,863.3
971.6
2,377.0
290.4
6,691.1
Additions
1.3
65.0
14.3
118.6
405.3
604.5
Arising on acquisition
7.8
247.0
92.2
89.4
5.2
441.6
Assets adopted at fair value 10.6
10.6
Disposals (1.4) (3.4) (4.8)
Transfers/reclassifications
1.3
36.7
12.5
82.6
(133.1)
At 31 March 2024
199.2
3,221.2
1,090.6
2,664.2
567.8
7,743.0
Accumulated depreciation:
At 31 March 2022
23.1
368.1
311.9
1,360.8
2,063.9
Charge for year
4.5
36.3
20.6
93.4
154.8
Disposals
(0.3)
(1.5)
(0.4)
(2.3)
(4.5)
At 31 March 2023
27.3
402.9
332.1
1,451.9
2,214.2
Charge for year
4.3
41.0
21.4
105.3
172.0
Disposals (1.4) (3.4) (4.8)
At 31 March 2024
31.6
442.5
353.5
1,553.8
2,381.4
Net book value:
At 31 March 2022
163.6
2,386.3
640.4
889.5
184.2
4,264.0
At 31 March 2023
161.5
2,460.4
639.5
925.1
290.4
4,476.9
At 31 March 2024
167.6
2,778.7
737.1
1,110.4
567.8
5,361.6
Of the total depreciation charge of £172.0 million (2023 £154.8 million), £1.5 million (2023 £1.5 million) has been charged to capital projects, £2.2 million
(2023 £2.2 million) has been offset by deferred income and £168.3 million (2023 £151.1 million) has been charged against profits. Asset lives and
residual values are reviewed annually. During the year borrowing costs of £15.5 million (2023 £5.0 million) have been capitalised on qualifying assets, at
an average borrowing rate of 6.4% (2023 5.7%).
Groups of assets forming cash generating units are reviewed for indicators of impairment. No indicators of impairment were identified during the year.
Asset lives are reviewed annually. No significant changes were required in 2023/24.
210 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
17. Property, plant and equipment continued
The Group leases many assets as a lessee, across several categories of asset. Right-of-use assets held under leases included in property, plant and
equipment above were:
Fixed and mobile
Land and Infrastructure Operational plant, vehicles and Construction
buildings assets properties computers in progress Total
£m £m £m £m £m £m
Group
Cost:
At 1 April 2022
35.8
399.7
375.6
381.7
1,192.8
Additions
0.1
19.3
0.5
20.9
40.8
Disposals
(0.5)
(35.1)
(41.0)
(13.6)
(90.2)
At 31 March 2023
35.4
383.9
335.1
389.0
1,143.4
Additions
1.8
20.1
1.8
44.9
5.5
74.1
Arising on acquisition
0.8
0.8
Disposals
(0.9)
(0.9)
At 31 March 2024
37.2
404.0
336.9
433.8
5.5
1,217.4
Accumulated depreciation:
At 31 March 2022
4.1
79.6
102.7
184.5
370.9
Charge for year
1.2
4.9
6.0
20.7
32.8
Disposals
(0.2)
(14.7)
(18.1)
(13.4)
(46.4)
At 31 March 2023
5.1
69.8
90.6
191.8
357.3
Charge for year
1.2
5.3
5.8
22.3
34.6
Disposals
(0.8)
(0.8)
At 31 March 2024
6.3
75.1
96.4
213.3
391.1
Net book amount:
At 31 March 2022
31.7
320.1
272.9
197.2
821.9
At 31 March 2023
30.3
314.1
244.5
197.2
786.1
At 31 March 2024
30.9
328.9
240.5
220.5
5.5
826.3
When the group enters into sale and leaseback arrangements, the accounting for the arrangement depends on whether the transaction meets the
criteria within IFRS 15 for a sale to have occurred. If the sale criteria are met, the associated property, plant and equipment asset is derecognised, and a
right-of-use asset is recognised at the proportion of the carrying value relating to the right retained. If the criteria for a sale under IFRS 15 have not
been met the asset is not derecognised, but is reclassified to right-of-use assets (within property, plant and equipment). Right of use assets includes
assets held under sale and leaseback arrangements with a carrying value of £789.8 million (2023 £785.2 million).
Fixed and mobile plant,
vehicles and computers
£m
Company
Cost:
At 31 March 2022
0.3
At 31 March 2023
0.3
At 31 March 2024
0.3
Accumulated depreciation:
At 31 March 2022
0.2
At 31 March 2023
0.2
At 31 March 2024
0.2
Net book value:
At 31 March 2022
0.1
At 31 March 2023
0.1
At 31 March 2024
0.1
Asset lives and residual values are reviewed annually.
211Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
18. Financial instruments by category
The accounting policies for financial instruments that have been applied to line items are:
Fair value
Amortised cost
Derivatives used Derivatives used Debt Trade
for fair value for cash flow instruments at receivables and
hedging hedging amortised cost trade payables Total
Notes £m £m £m £m £m
Group
31 March 2024
Financial assets
Amounts owed by joint ventures
19
8.7
8.7
Trade receivables
22
250.0
250.0
Derivative financial instruments
23
0.3
40.5
40.8
Cash and cash deposits
25
171.4
171.4
Total
0.3
40.5
180.1
250.0
470.9
F
i
n
a
n
c
i
a
l
l
i
a
b
i
l
i
t
i
e
s
Borrowings
28
(3,980.6)
(3,980.6)
Derivative financial instruments
23
(8.7)
(8.7)
Trade and other payables
26
(327.5)
(327.5)
Total
(8.7)
(3,980.6)
(327.5)
(4,316.8)
31 March 2023
Financial assets
Amounts owed by joint ventures
19
9.3
9.3
Trade receivables
22
173.8
173.8
Derivative financial instruments
23
0.4
53.5
53.9
Cash and cash deposits
25
165.4
165.4
Total
0.4
53.5
174.7
173.8
402.4
Financial liabilities
Borrowings
28
(3,130.8)
(3,130.8)
Derivative financial instruments
26
(4.8)
(4.8)
Trade and other payables
26
(218.3)
(218.3)
Total
(4.8)
(3,130.8)
(218.3)
(3,353.9)
Company
31 March 2024
Financial assets
Amounts owed by subsidiaries
19,22
202.6
202.6
Other receivables
22
2.5
2.5
Derivative financial instruments
23
0.3
0.9
1.2
Cash and cash deposits
25
79.2
79.2
Total
0.3
0.9
284.3
285.5
Financial liabilities
Borrowings
28
(253.6)
(253.6)
Derivative financial instruments
26
(0.1)
(0.1)
Trade and other payables
26
(11.1)
(11.1)
Total
(0.1)
(253.6)
(11.1)
(264.7)
31 March 2023
Financial assets
Amounts owed by subsidiaries
19, 22
101.8
101.8
Other receivables
22
3.4
3.4
Derivative financial instruments
23
0.4
0.7
1.1
Cash and cash deposits
25
104.1
104.1
Total
0.4
0.7
209.3
210.4
Financial liabilities
Borrowings
28
(434.8)
(434.8)
Trade and other payables
26
(5.9)
(5.9)
Total
(434.8)
(5.9)
(440.7)
s
212 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
19. Other non-current assets
Non-current receivables
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings
54.1
26.1
Amounts owed by related parties (note 42)
8.7
9.3
Other receivables
13.9
8.7
23.2
54.1
26.1
Non-current receivables were due:
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Between 1 and 2 years
8.7
13.9
8.0
5.2
Over 2 years and less than 5 years
9.3
24.1
15.7
Over 5 years
22.0
5.2
8.7
23.2
54.1
26.1
The fair values of non-current receivables were:
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings
54.1
26.1
Amounts owed by joint ventures
8.7
9.3
Other receivables
13.0
8.7
22.3
54.1
26.1
The fair values of the above non-current receivables are valued using level 2 measures.
20. Investments
Subsidiary undertakings
£m
Company
At 31 March 2022
1,310.8
Investment in subsidiary undertakings:
Bristol Water disposal
(407.5)
South West Water share acquisition
413.3
At 31 March 2023
1,316.6
Investment in subsidiary undertakings:
SES Water Group acquisition
90.2
SES Water Group share issue
5.0
Pennon Power share acquisition
25.0
Impairment of investment in subsidiary undertakings
(283.6)
At 31 March 2024 1,153.2
The recoverable amount of investments is determined based on fair value or value-in-use calculations, which are set out in note 15.
On 10 January 2024 the Company acquired 100% of the issued share capital of Sumisho Osaka Gas Water UK Limited, which has subsequently been
renamed Sutton and East Surrey Group Holdings Limited (‘SESGHL’). SESGHL is the holding company of the SESGHL Group which comprises Sutton
and East Surrey Water plc (‘SES Water’), a regulated water only company, and certain other ancillary businesses.
On 1 February 2024, the Company subscribed for 25,000 new ordinary shares in its wholly-owned subsidiary undertaking, Pennon Power Limited, for
consideration of £25,000,000.
On 28 March 2024, the Company subscribed for 10,000,000 new ordinary shares in Sutton and East Surrey Group Holdings Limited, for consideration
of £5,000,000.
During the year, the Company received a dividend of £283.6 million from its subsidiary, Viridor Waste 2 Limited, reducing that entity’s net assets to £nil.
Accordingly, the Company impaired its investment in Viridor Waste 2 Limited.
During the prior year, as part of the statutory licence transfer of Bristol Water to South West Water, the Company transferred its shareholding in Bristol
Water plc to South West Water Limited for £413 million. The consideration was satisfied through the Company subscribing for an additional £1 of share
capital of South West Water Limited at a premium of £413 million.
213Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
20. Investments continued
Investment in associates and joint ventures
Place of
business/country of
Name of entity
Principal activity
incorporation
% of ownership
Measurement method
Water 2 Business Limited (“W2B”)
National retailer in the non-household market
England
30%
Equity
and provides retail water services to non-
household customers
Bristol Wessex Billing Services Limited (“BWBSL”)
Meter reading, billing, debt recovery and
England
50%
Equity
customer contact management services
Searchlight Collection Limited
Debt collection services
England
50%
Equity
The carrying value of the Group’s share of these investments in associates and joint ventures at 31 March 2024 is £1.0 million (2023 £0.3 million). The
Group’s share of the profits and other comprehensive income of these investments in associates and joint ventures for the year ended 31 March 2024
is £0.7 million (2023 £0.3 million).
The Group’s joint ventures and associates are all private companies and there are no quoted market prices available for the shares.
Summarised
financial information for the joint ventures and investments in associates is set out below:
Summarised balance sheets
2024 2023
£m £m
W2B
BWBSL
Searchlight
W2B
BWBSL
Searchlight
Current
Cash and cash equivalents
1.3
1.5
1.3
Other current assets
66.9
2.1
0.1
60.1
2.2
0.1
Total current assets
66.9
3.4
0.1
61.6
3.5
0.1
Non-current assets
4.9
5.5
Financial liabilities (excluding trade payables)
(1.2)
Current liabilities (including trade payables)
(37.9)
(3.4)
(35.0)
(3.5)
Total current liabilities
(39.1)
(3.4)
(35.0)
(3.5)
Non-current liabilities
(29.4)
(31.1)
Net assets
3.3
0.1
1.0
0.1
Summarised statement of comprehensive income
2024 2023
£m £m
W2B
BWBSL
Searchlight
W2B
BWBSL
Searchlight
Revenue
278.3
18.5
0.2
232.9
17.5
0.3
Cost of sales and other operating expenses
(273.1)
(18.5)
(0.2)
(228.7)
(17.5)
(0.3)
Interest
(1.9)
(1.3)
Pre-tax profit
3.3
2.9
Taxation charge
(1.0)
(0.7)
Total comprehensive income
2.3
2.2
The information above reflects the amounts presented in the financial statements of the associates (and not the Group’s share of these amounts)
adjusted for differences in accounting policies between the Group and associates.
W2B’s year-end date is 30 June.
BWBSL’s and Searchlight’s year
ends are 31 March. The Group's carrying amount of the investments held is £1.0 million (2023 £0.3 million) which comprises 30% of the Group's share
of equity of W2B. For BWBSL and Searchlight, the net equity is £nil (2023 £nil). The Group’s share of profit from associated companies is £0.7 million
(2023 £0.3 million) which comprises 30% of the Group’s share of W2B, restricted by brought forward losses.
21. Inventories
Group
2024 2023
£m £m
Raw materials and consumables
11.0
10.0
Work in progress
1.6
Finished goods
0.6
13.2
10.0
214 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
22. Trade and other receivables – current
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Trade receivables
375.3
280.3
Less: allowance for expected credit losses in respect of trade receivables
(125.3)
(106.5)
Net trade receivables
250.0
173.8
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings
148.5
75.7
Amounts owed by associated companies
0.2
0.1
Other receivables
38.7
20.8
2.5
3.4
Accrued income
45.5
34.1
Prepayments
19.3
9.2
0.8
1.3
353.7
238.0
151.8
80.4
Trade receivables include accrued income relating to customers with water budget payment plans. Trade receivables have increased year on year, due
to the acquisition of Sutton and East Surrey Water, and the effect in the prior year of one-off bill reductions in the final quarter in relation to
Watershare+ and the drought incentive along with tariff increases in the South West Water region.
Accrued income includes £28.3 million (2023 £25.7 million) in respect of metered accrual revenue in the retail water business. Metered accrual revenue
relates to performance obligations that have been fully extinguished in providing services to customers prior to the reporting date. Payment in respect
of these services is a matter of time following issuance of invoices.
The Directors consider that the carrying amounts of trade and other receivables approximate to their fair value.
There is no concentration of credit risk in trade receivables. The Group has a large number of customers who are dispersed and there is no significant
loss on trade receivables expected that has not been provided for.
The Group applies the simplified approach in calculating the expected credit losses for trade receivables allowing a provision matrix to be used which
is based on the expected life of trade receivables, default rates for different customer categories within the collection process and forward-looking
information.
As at 31 March, an analysis of the ageing of trade receivables is as follows:
2024 2023
£m £m
Group
Not due
40.9
57.5
Past due 1 – 30 days
45.7
14.7
Past due 31 – 120 days
29.5
17.1
More than 120 days
259.2
191.0
375.3
280.3
The aged trade receivables above are taken directly from aged sales ledger records.
The Group’s operating businesses specifically review separate categories of debt to identify an appropriate allowance for expected credit losses as
outlined in note 2 (n) ii). South West Water Limited and SES Water have a duty under legislation to continue to provide domestic customers with
services regardless of payment. Given the different nature of customer demographics within South West Water’s operating area, SES Water’s operating
area and the non-household retail business of Pennon Water Services and SESWS, different provision matrices are adopted by each business. The
provision matrix adopted for household customers in the most significant operating region of Devon, Cornwall & Bournemouth is outlined in the table
below, showing the range of provision rates dependent on phase of collection. The table also includes the gross debt and provision rates for other
customer areas:
Trade
receivables
2024
£m
A
A
l
l
l
l
o
o
w
w
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
e
e
x
x
p
p
e
e
c
c
t
t
e
e
d
d
c
c
r
r
e
e
d
d
i
i
t
t
l
l
o
o
s
s
s
s
e
e
s
s
2024
£m
Trade
receivables
2023
£m
Allowance for
expected
credit losses
2023
£m
Devon, Cornwall & Bournemouth (household customers)
Current occupier < 12 months: 1% - 30% 44.8 0.2 35.3 0.2
Current occupier 12 24 months: 10% – 60% 23.1 3.2 14.6 2.8
Current occupier 24 36 months: 15% – 80% 11.5 2.8 10.8 3.4
Current occupier > 36 months: 20% – 100% 89.2 48.2 90.4 49.5
Previous occupier: 55% – 100%
53.3 31.3 51.9 31.3
Bristol
37.8 8.6 31.0 5.4
SES
53.3 16.7
Pennon Water Services (Non-household retail)
40.6 14.3 38.3 13.5
Other 21.7
8.0 0.4
375.3
125.3 280.3 106.5
215Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
22. Trade and other receivables – current continued
No material expected credit loss provision has been recognised in respect of amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings.
The movement in the allowance for expected credit losses in respect of trade receivables was:
2024
£m
2023
£m
At 1 April 106.5 100.4
Arising on acquisition 19.8
Provision for expected credit losses 7.1 7.8
Receivables written off during the year as uncollectable
(8.1) (1.7)
At 31 March
125.3 106.5
23. Derivative financial instruments
Group Company
2024
£m
2023
£m
2024
£m
2023
£m
Derivatives used for cash flow hedging
Non-current assets 17.2 32.9 0.2
Current assets
23.3 20.6 1.0 0.5
Current liabilities
(5.4) (2.4) (0.1)
Non-current liabilities
(3.3) (2.4)
Derivatives used for fair value hedging
Non-current assets 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.3
Current assets
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
The Group’s financial risks and risk management policies are set out in note 3. The fair value of derivatives is split between current and non-current
assets or liabilities based on the maturity of the cash flows. The ineffective portion recognised in the income statement arising from hedging
relationships was £nil (2023 £nil).
A net £16.4 million debit (2023 £29.1 million credit) was recognised in other comprehensive income for cash flow hedges, including a £0.2 million credit
(2023: £nil) recognised in profit and loss relating to cash flow hedges previously recognised through other comprehensive income and recorded in the
hedging reserve.
Interest rate swaps, primarily cash flow hedges, and fixed rate borrowings are used to manage the mix of fixed and floating rates to ensure at least 60%
of Group net borrowings are at fixed rate.
At 31 March 2024 the Group had interest rate swaps to swap from floating to fixed rate and hedged financial liabilities with a notional value of £939.0
million and a weighted average maturity of 3.5 years (2023 £853 million, with 3.4 years). The weighted average interest rate of the swaps for their
nominal amount was 1.85% (2023 1.54%).
The Group had cross currency swaps and hedged financial liabilities with a notional value of £64 million and a weighted average maturity of 4.5 years.
The weighted average exchange rate of the swaps for their nominal amount was 0.80.
The Group has established a hedge ratio of 1:1 for the hedging relationships as the underlying risks of the swaps are identical to the hedged risk
components. To test the hedge effectiveness, the Group uses the hypothetical derivative method and compares the changes in the fair value of the
hedging instrument against the changes in fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk.
The hedge ineffectiveness can arise from:
Different interest rate curve applied to discount the hedged item and hedging instrument
Differences in timing of cash flows of the hedged item and hedging instrument
The counterparties’ credit risk differently impacting the fair value movements of the hedging instrument and hedged item
The impact of the hedging instrument on the statement of financial position is as follows:
G
G
r
r
o
o
u
u
p
p
Notional
amount
£m
Carrying
amount
£m Line item in the statement of financial position
Change in fair value used for measuring
ineffectiveness in the period
£m
A
A
s
s
a
a
t
t
3
3
1
1
M
M
a
a
r
r
c
c
h
h
2
2
0
0
2
2
4
4
Interest rate swaps 939.4 38.0 Derivative financial instruments (14.4)
RPI swaps 300.0 (4.6) Derivative financial instruments (0.2)
Cross currency swaps 64.1 (1.3) Derivative financial instruments (2.4)
As at 31 March 2023
Interest rate swaps 853.4 52.4 Derivative financial instruments 33.6
RPI swaps 300.0 (4.4) Derivative financial instruments (4.4)
Cross currency swaps 24.0 1.1 Derivative financial instruments (0.5)
C
C
o
o
m
m
p
p
a
a
n
n
y
y
Notional
amount
£m
Carrying
amount
£m
Line item in the statement of financial position
Change in fair value used for measuring
ineffectiveness in the period
£m
A
A
s
s
a
a
t
t
3
3
1
1
M
M
a
a
r
r
c
c
h
h
2
2
0
0
2
2
4
4
Cross currency swaps 24.0 0.8 Derivative financial instruments (0.3)
As at 31 March 2023
Cross currency swaps 24.0 1.1 Derivative financial instruments (0.5)
216 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
23. Derivative financial instruments contin ued
The periods for which the cash flow hedges are expected to affect future profit or loss are as follows:
Due within
1 year
£m
Due between
1 and 2 years
£m
Due between
2 and 5 years
£m
Due over
5 years
£m
Total
£m
Group
31 March 2024
Assets 23.3 3.9 9.1 4.2 40.5
Liabilities
(5.4) (0.7) (2.0) (0.6) (8.7)
31 March 2023
Assets 20.8 19.0 8.8 5.3 53.9
Liabilities (2.4) (2.0) (0.2) (0.2) (4.8)
Company
31 March 2024
Assets 0.9 0.9
Liabilities
(0.1) (0.1)
31 March 2023
Assets 0.5 0.2 0.7
Liabilities
Valuation hierarchy
The Group uses the following hierarchy for determining the fair value of financial instruments by valuation technique:
Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (level 1)
Inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (that is, as prices) or indirectly
(that is, derived from prices) (level 2)
Inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (that is, unobservable inputs) (level 3).
The fair value of financial instruments not traded in an active market (level 2, for example over-the-counter derivatives) is determined by using
valuation techniques. A variety of methods and assumptions are used based on market conditions existing at each balance sheet date. Quoted market
prices or dealer quotes for similar instruments are used for long-term debt. Other techniques, such as estimated discounted cash flows, are used to
determine fair value for the remaining financial instruments. The fair value of interest rate swaps is calculated as the present value of the estimated
future cash flows.
The Group’s financial derivatives are valued using level 2 measures:
Group Company
2024
£m
2023
£m
2024
£m
2023
£m
Assets
Derivatives used for cash flow hedging 40.5 53.5 0.9 0.7
Derivatives used for fair value hedging
0.3 0.4 0.3 0.4
Total assets
40.8 53.9 1.2 1.1
Liabilities
Derivatives used for cash flow hedging (8.7) (4.8) (0.1)
Total liabilities
(8.7) (4.8) (0.1)
24. Financial instruments at fair value through profit
Group Company
2024
£m
2023
£m
2024
£m
2023
£m
Current liabilities 2.6 2.6 0.1 0.1
Non-current liabilities 31.8 34.0
Non-current assets
0.9 1.3 0.9 1.3
Financial instruments at fair value through profit reflect the fair value movement of the hedged risk on the hedged item which had been designated in
a fair value hedging relationship.
The hedged item was the £150 million bond issued by South West Water Finance Plc in 2010 which matures in July 2040 (see note 28). The hedging
relationship was de-designated in previous periods at which point the fair value amount recognised at that point ceased to be revalued. The fixed
financial liability at the point of de-designation is released to the income statement over the remaining life of the debt.
217Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
25. Cash and cash deposits
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Cash at bank and in hand
78.8
69.7
29.2
34.0
Short-term bank deposits
50.0
25.0
50.0
25.0
Other deposits
42.6
70.7
45.1
Total cash and cash deposits
171.4
165.4
79.2
104.1
Group short-term deposits have an average maturity of one working day (2023 one working day).
Group other deposits have an average maturity of 73 days (2023 45 days).
Group other deposits include restricted funds of £26.0 million (2023 £21.7 million) to settle long-term lease liabilities (note 28) and £11.3 million (2023
£nil) held in an instant access account under the terms of other loan agreements. Restricted funds are available for access, subject to being replaced
by an equivalent valued security.
For the purposes of the cash flow statement cash and cash equivalents comprise:
Group Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Cash and cash deposits as above
171.4
165.4
79.2
104.1
Less: deposits with a maturity of three months or more (restricted funds)
(26.0)
(21.7)
145.4
143.7
79.2
104.1
26. Trade and other payables – current
Group Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Trade payables
227.5
150.7
2.6
2.0
Contract liabilities
10.6
3.7
Other tax and social security
3.1
3.4
0.4
0.4
Accruals
37.4
44.3
7.4
2.3
Other payables
62.6
23.3
1.1
1.6
Amounts owed to joint venture
341.2
225.4
11.5
6.3
The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other payables approximates to their fair value.
The movement in the contract liabilities was:
Group
2024 2023
Contract liabilities £m £m
At 1 April
159.0
140.5
Revenue recognised in the year
(4.8)
(6.4)
Consideration received in advance of completion of performance obligations
5.9
24.9
Amounts acquired on acquisition
5.4
At 31 March
165.5
159.0
The analysis of contract liabilities between current and non-current is:
Group
2024 2023
£m £m
Current
10.6
3.7
Non-current (note 29)
154.9
155.3
165.5
159.0
Performance obligations related to the current contract liabilities balance above are expected to be satisfied, and revenue will be recognised, within the
financial year ended 31 March 2025.
218 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
27. Current tax assets/(liabilities)
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2024
£m £m £m £m
Current year debtor/(creditor)
0.4
3.1
(0.4)
(0.2)
Prior year tax items
5.6
5.3
(2.8)
(3.2)
6.0
8.4
(3.2)
(3.4)
28. Borrowings
Group Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Current
Bank and other loans
178.3
92.7
Private placements
8.0
8.0
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings
279.1
186.3
92.7
8.0
279.1
Leases
51.9
32.0
Total current borrowings
238.2
124.7
8.0
279.1
Non-current
Bank and other loans
732.2
697.0
148.9
49.8
Private placements
719.1
305.3
96.7
105.9
Fixed rate bonds
210.0
214.6
RPI index-linked bonds
997.4
744.0
Listed preference shares
12.5
12.5
2,671.2
1,973.4
245.6
155.7
Leases
1,071.2
1,032.7
Total non-current borrowings
3,742.4
3,006.1
245.6
155.7
Total borrowings
3,980.6
3,130.8
253.6
434.8
South West Water Finance Plc issued a £150 million fixed rate bond in July 2010 maturing in 2040 with a cash coupon of 5.875%.
South West Water Finance Plc issued a £200 million RPI index-linked bond in July 2008 maturing in 2057 with a cash coupon of 1.99%. Bournemouth
Water Limited issued a £65 million RPI index-linked bond in April 2005 maturing in 2033 with a cash coupon of 3.084%. This instrument was
transferred to South West Water Limited in April 2017. Prior to acquisition by Pennon, Bristol Water Plc issued RPI index-linked bonds totalling £91
million maturing in 2032 with a cash coupon of 3.635%. These were transferred to South West Water Limited in February 2023.
Sutton and East Surrey Water Plc issued a £100 million RPI index-linked bond in March 2001 maturing in 2031 with a cash coupon of 2.874%.
Fair value adjustments of £125.7 million (2023 £124.0 million) in relation to the acquisition of Bournemouth Water Limited, Bristol Water Plc and SES
Water have been allocated to the instruments to which they relate.
The listed preference shares were issued by Bristol Water Plc at £1 in 1992. They are held by external shareholders and are listed on the London Stock
Exchange. Shareholders are entitled to receive dividends at 8.75% per annum on the par value of the shares on a cumulative basis; these dividends are
payable half yearly on 1 April and 1 October. On winding up, the preference shareholders rank ahead of Bristol Water ordinary shareholders and are
entitled to receive £1 per share and any dividends accrued but unpaid in respect of their shares. In the event that dividends on the preference shares
are in arrears for six months or more, holders of the preference shares become entitled to vote at general meetings of members. The authorised
preference share capital consists of 14,000,000 8.75% irredeemable cumulative preference shares of £1 each. The preference shares are classified as
liabilities in the consolidated balance sheet of the Group and the related dividends are classified as finance costs.
219Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
28. Borrowings continued
The fair values of borrowings are valued using level 2 measures, unless otherwise stated below, (as set out in note 23) were:
2024
2023
Book value Fair value Book value Fair value
£m £m £m £m
Group
Bank and other loans
178.3
178.3
92.7
92.7
Private placement
8.0
8.0
186.3
186.3
92.7
92.7
Leases
51.9
32.0
Total current borrowings
238.2
186.3
124.7
92.7
Group
Bank and other loans
732.2
704.7
697.0
684.1
Private placements
719.1
737.2
305.3
288.2
Fixed rate bonds (level 1)
136.2
145.2
135.8
137.8
Fixed rate bonds
73.8
64.6
78.8
66.8
RPI index-linked bonds (level 1)
216.4
230.5
RPI index-linked bond
781.0
658.6
744.0
614.5
Listed preference shares
12.5
20.1
12.5
21.5
2,671.2
2,560.9
1,973.4
1,812.9
Leases
1,071.2
1,032.7
Total non-current borrowings
3,742.4
2,560.9
3,006.1
1,812.9
Total borrowings
3,980.6
2,747.2
3,130.8
1,905.6
Company
Private placements
8.0
8.0
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings
279.1
279.1
Total current borrowings
8.0
8.0
279.1
279.1
Bank and other loans
148.9
148.4
49.8
50.4
Private placements
96.7
97.1
105.9
105.7
Total non-current borrowings
245.6
245.5
155.7
156.1
Total borrowings
253.6
253.5
434.8
435.2
Under IFRS 13 the disclosure of the fair value of leases is not required.
Where market values are not available, fair values of borrowings have been calculated by discounting expected future cash flows at prevailing interest rates.
During the year, as part of its ongoing programme to renew and raise new financing, the Group entered into £200 million of new terms loans and leasing
facility arrangements, with an average maturity of 6 years, £300 million private placements with an average maturity of 12 years, £25 million 20 year private
placement and £100 million of new and renewed revolving credit facilities.
The maturity of non-current borrowings, excluding leases, was:
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Between 1 and 2 years
191.0
64.4
49.7
8.7
Over 2 years and less than 5 years
335.2
364.2
96.0
147.0
Over 5 years
2,145.0
1,544.8
99.9
2,671.2
1,973.4
245.6
155.7
The weighted average maturity of non-current borrowings, excluding leases, was 12.0 years (2023 13.2 years).
Undrawn committed borrowing facilities at the balance sheet date were:
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Floating rate:
Expiring within 1 year
50.0
119.8
80.0
Expiring after 1 year
380.0
135.0
125.0
25.0
430.0
254.8
125.0
105.0
220 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
28. Borrowings continued
Information on leases
The Group has leases for various assets as shown in note 17.
The maturity of lease liabilities was:
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Within 1 year
51.9
32.0
Over 1 year and less than 5 years
187.4
181.7
Over 5 years
883.8
851.0
1,123.1
1,064.7
Analysed as:
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Current
51.9
32.0
Non-current
1,071.2
1,032.7
1,123.1
1,064.7
For the purposes of calculating debt or borrowings under the Group’s financing agreements, all of which were negotiated under IFRS prior to the
implementation of IFRS 16, borrowings that were previously categorised as operating leases under IAS 17 are excluded from the definition of debt. As at
31 March 2024 the carrying value of leases previously categorised as IAS 17 operating leases was £36.4 million (2023 £37.3 million).
The Group does not face a significant liquidity risk with regard to its lease liabilities. Lease liabilities are monitored within the Group’s treasury function.
The discount rate used to calculate the lease liabilities above involves estimation. Where the Group cannot readily determine the rate implicit in the
lease the Group uses an estimated incremental borrowing rate (IBR). At 31 March 2024 the range of IBRs used was between 6.1% and 6.8% (2023
between 2.6% and 3.9%) and the weighted average IBR across all leases was 6.3% (2023 3.3%). If the weighted average rate used increased or
decreased by 10bps, this would result in a c.1.0% increase or reduction in the present value of lease liabilities recognised at 31 March 2024 (2023
c.1.1%).
The period for repayment of certain leases includes an agreement to deposit with the lessor group amounts equal to the difference between the
original and revised payments due. The accumulated deposits, £25.9 million at 31 March 2024 (2023 £21.6 million), are currently being held to settle the
lease liabilitysubject to rights to release by negotiation with the lessor. The deposits are subject to a registered charge given as security to the lessor
for the balance outstanding.
Cash outflows in respect of leasing relate to principal repayments of £19.0 million (2023 £120.3 million) and interest repayments of £53.1 million (2023
£100.5 million), in addition to inflows from lease financing arrangements of £64.8 million (2023 £40.2 million).
Other information required to be disclosed under IFRS 16 is included in note 17 .
29. Other non-current liabilities
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings
8.5
Contract liabilities
154.9
155.3
154.9
155.3
8.5
Non-current contract liabilities relate to consideration received in advance of the Group performing its performance obligations to customers where
performance obligations will not be completed within 12 months of the balance sheet date. The overall movement in total contract liabilities is
disclosed in note 26. Contract liabilities reflect the fair value of assets transferred from customers in the water segment. The majority of the contract
liabilities included above are expected to unwind after five years.
30. Retirement benefit obligations
During the year the Group operated a number of defined benefit pension schemes and also defined contribution schemes. The principal plan within
the Group is the Pennon Group Pension Scheme (PGPS), which is a funded defined benefit, final salary pension scheme in the UK. Following the
acquisition of Bristol Water and SES, the Group also assumed defined benefit obligations through Bristol Water’s and SES’s membership of Water
Companies Pension Scheme (‘WCPS’).
The Group’s pension schemes are established under trust law and comply with all relevant UK legislation. The assets of the Group’s pension schemes
are held in separate trustee administered funds. The trustees of the funds are required to act in the best interest of the funds’ beneficiaries. The
appointment of schemes’ trustees is determined by the schemes’ trust documentation. The Group has a policy for the PGPS that one-half of all
trustees, other than the Chair, are nominated by members of the schemes, including pensioners.
Bristol Water’s membership of WCPS is through a separate section of that scheme. The assets of the section are held separately from those of the
Group and are invested by discretionary fund managers appointed by the trustees of the scheme. The employees in the section ceased to earn
additional defined benefit pensions on 31 March 2016. There were no employer contributions to the scheme from that date and from 30 June 2016,
with the agreement of the trustees, deficit contributions also ceased. All eligible employees were offered membership of a stakeholder pension scheme.
In 2018 the trustees of the Bristol Water section of the WCPS purchased a bulk annuity policy to insure the benefits for members of the section.
Following this the method for valuing the liabilities of the pension scheme has remained the same. However, the scheme assets, in the form of the
insurance policy, now materially match the value of the liabilities. The process to buy up and wind up the scheme is continuing, including discussions
regarding the release of the surplus on completion of this process.
221Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
30. Retirement benefit obligations continued
SES’s membership of WCPS is through a separate section of that scheme. The assets of the section are held separately from those of the Group and
are invested by discretionary fund managers appointed by the trustees of the scheme. The employees in the section ceased to earn additional defined
benefit pensions on 31 March 2019.
With effect from 31 March 2023 the trustees of the SES section of the WCPS purchased a bulk annuity policy to insure the benefits for members of the
section. Following this the method for valuing the liabilities of the pension scheme has remained the same. However, the scheme assets, in the form of
the insurance policy, now materially match the value of the liabilities.
PGPS is closed to future accrual.
In June 2023, the High Court handed down a decision (Virgin Media Limited v NTL Pension Trustees II Limited and others) which potentially has
implications for the validity of amendments made by schemes, including the PGPS and other Group defined benefit schemes, which were contracted-
out on a salary-related basis between 6 April 1997 and the abolition of contracting-out in 2016. This decision has been appealed and is due to be
reconsidered by the Court of Appeal in June 2024. The impact will therefore be uncertain for some time to come. Given this uncertainty, the updated
valuation as at 31 March 2024 does not reflect the High Court ruling as it is currently unclear as to whether any additional liabilities might arise, and if
they were to arise, how they would be reliably measured. The case is subject to appeal in 2024 and following the outcome of the appeal and any DWP
response, management will conclude whether any subsequent actions or amendments to IAS 19 liabilities are required.
Defined contribution schemes
Pension costs for defined contribution schemes were £12.0 million (2023 £9.4 million).
Defined benefit schemes
Assumptions
The principal actuarial assumptions at 31 March were:
2024 2023
% %
Rate of increase in pensionable pay
2.6
2.7
Rate of increase for current and future pensions
2.8
2.8
Rate used to discount schemes’ liabilities and expected return on schemes’ assets
4.8
4.7
Inflation
3.2
3.3
Mortality
Assumptions regarding future mortality experience are set based on actuarial advice in accordance with published statistics and experience. The
mortality assumption uses a scheme-specific calculation based on CMI 2022 actuarial tables with an allowance for future longevity improvement.
The average life expectancy in years of a member having retired at age 62 on the balance sheet date is projected as:
2024
2023
Male
24.1
24.2
Female
26.8
26.7
The average life expectancy in years of a future pensioner retiring at age 62, 20 years after the balance sheet date, is projected as:
2024
2023
Male
25.5
25.6
Female
28.3
28.2
The sensitivities regarding the principal assumptions used to measure the schemes’ liabilities are:
Change in Impact on
assumption schemes’ liabilities
Rate of increase in current and future pensions
+/– 0.5%
+/– 4.8%
Rate used to discount schemes’ liabilities
+/– 0.5%
–/+ 6.2%
Inflation
+/– 0.5%
+/– 4.4%
Life expectancy
+/– 1 year
+/– 3.9%
The sensitivity analysis shows the effect of changes in the principal assumptions used for the measurement of the pension liability. The method used
to calculate the sensitivities is approximate and has been determined taking into account the duration of the liabilities and the overall profile of each
scheme’s membership. This is the same approach as has been adopted in previous years.
The amounts recognised in the balance sheet were:
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Present value of financial obligations
(774.2)
(719.5)
(138.0)
(139.5)
Fair value of plan assets
806.2
753.2
141.5
144.2
Surplus/(deficit) of funded plans
32.0
33.7
3.5
4.7
Less: restriction of surplus
(5.4)
(4.4)
Net asset/(liability) recognised in the balance sheet
26.6
29.3
3.5
4.7
222 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
30. Retirement benefit obligations continued
The movement in the net defined benefit obligation over the accounting period is as follows:
2024
2023
Present value Fair value Present value Fair value
of obligation of plan assets Total of obligation of plan assets Total
£m £m £m £m £m £m
At 1 April
(719.5)
748.8
29.3
(985.9)
1,052.2
66.3
Acquisition SES Water Group
(66.8)
70.1
3.3
Current service cost
(1.2)
(0.6)
(1.8)
(1.0)
(0.6)
(1.6)
Past service cost, curtailments and gains/losses on settlements
(0.2)
(0.2)
Interest (expense)/income
(33.5)
35.2
1.7
(26.5)
28.5
2.0
(101.7)
104.7
3.0
(27.5)
27.9
0.4
Remeasurements:
Loss on plan assets excluding amounts included in interest expense
(13.6)
(13.6)
(288.7)
(288.7)
Gain/(loss) from change in demographic assumptions
5.9
5.9
9.7
9.7
Gain from change in financial assumptions
13.7
13.7
266.0
266.0
Experience (losses)/gains
(14.9)
1.2
(13.7)
(25.9)
(0.1)
(26.0)
4.7
(12.4)
(7.7)
249.8
(288.8)
(39.0)
Contributions:
Employers
2.0
2.0
1.6
1.6
Payments from plans:
Benefit payments
42.3
(42.3)
44.1
(44.1)
42.3
(40.3)
2.0
44.1
(42.5)
1.6
At 31 March
(774.2)
800.8
26.6
(719.5)
748.8
29.3
Recognition of surplus on principal pension scheme
In accordance with IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits’ the value of the net pension scheme surplus that can be recognised in the statement of financial
position is restricted to the present value of economic benefits available in the form of refunds from the scheme or reductions in future contributions.
In respect of the Group’s principal pension scheme, PGPS, the surplus has been recognised as the Group believes that ultimately it has an
unconditional right to a refund of any surplus assuming the full settlement of the plan’s liabilities in a single event, such as a scheme wind up.
Bristol Water
The Group believes that it has an unconditional right to a refund of surplus and that the gross pension surplus can be recognised. This benefit is only
available as a refund as no additional defined pension benefits are being earned. Under UK tax legislation a tax deduction of 25% (2023 35%) is applied
to a refund from a UK pension scheme, before it is passed to the employer. This tax deduction has been applied to restrict the value of the surplus
recognised for this scheme. The effect of the change in the rate of tax in the year of £1.2 million is presented within Experience (losses)/gains.
Sutton and East Surrey Water
The Group believes that it has an unconditional right to a refund of surplus and that the gross pension surplus can be recognised. This benefit is only
available as a refund as no additional defined pension benefits are being earned. Under UK tax legislation a tax deduction of 25% is applied to a refund
from a UK pension scheme, before it is passed to the employer. This tax deduction has been applied to restrict the value of the surplus recognised for
this scheme.
The movement in the Company’s net defined benefit obligation over the accounting period is as follows:
2024
2023
Present value Fair value Present value Fair value
of obligation of plan assets Total of obligation of plan assets Total
£m £m £m £m £m £m
At 1 April
(139.5)
144.2
4.7
(190.7)
203.1
12.4
Current service cost
(0.4)
(0.4)
(0.4)
(0.4)
Interest (expense)/income
(6.4)
6.6
0.2
(5.2)
5.6
0.4
(6.8)
6.6
(0.2)
(5.6)
5.6
Remeasurements:
Loss on plan assets excluding amounts included in interest expense
(2.1)
(2.1)
(56.4)
(56.4)
Gain from change in demographic assumptions
1.1
1.1
2.0
2.0
Gain from change in financial assumptions
2.8
2.8
52.6
52.6
Experience losses
(3.2)
(3.2)
(6.2)
(6.2)
0.7
(2.1)
(1.4)
48.4
(56.4)
(8.0)
Contributions:
Employers
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
Payments from plans:
Benefit payments
7.7
(7.7)
8.4
(8.4)
7.7
(7.3)
0.4
8.4
(8.1)
0.3
At 31 March
(137.9)
141.4
3.5
(139.5)
144.2
4.7
223Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
30. Retirement benefit obligations continued
The schemes’ assets relating to the Group were:
2024
2023
Quoted Prices not Quoted Prices not
prices in quoted in prices in quoted in
active market active market Fund active market active market Fund
£m £m % £m £m %
Equities
163.7
20
124.3
17
Government bonds
13.5
2
14.4
2
Other bonds
117.2
55.7
22
175.8
72.1
33
Diversified growth
38.8
5
43.9
6
Property/Infrastructure
41.2
32.6
9
19.0
22.4
5
Insurance linked security
44.2
165.8
26
41.2
107.0
20
LDI investments
96.5
12
109.2
14
Other (including cash funds)
10.1
21.5
4
6.3
13.2
3
525.2
275.6
100
534.1
214.7
100
The Company’s share of the schemes’ assets at the balance sheet date was:
2024
2023
Quoted Prices not Quoted Prices not
prices in quoted in prices in quoted in
active market active market Fund active market active market Fund
£m £m % £m £m %
Equities
37.7
27
28.5
20
Government bonds
3.1
2
3.3
2
Other bonds
27.0
12.8
28
40.3
16.5
39
Diversified growth
8.9
6
10.1
7
Property/Infrastructure
9.5
7.5
12
4.4
5.2
7
Insurance linked security
10.2
7
9.5
7
LDI investments
22.3
16
25.1
17
Other
2.4
2
1.4
1
121.1
20.3
100
122.6
21.7
100
Through its defined benefit pension plan, the Group is exposed to a number of risks, the most significant of which are detailed below:
Asset volatility The liabilities are calculated using a discount rate set with reference to corporate bond yields; if assets underperform this yield, this will
create a deficit. The schemes hold a proportion of growth assets (equities and diversified growth funds) which are expected to outperform
corporate bonds in the long term, but can give rise to volatility and risk in the short term. As the funding of the schemes improves, an
increasing proportion of the schemes’ assets are invested in less volatile asset classes such as cash and bonds which more closely reflect
market movements in the schemes’ liabilities. The allocation to growth assets is monitored such that it is suitable with the schemes’ long-
term objectives.
Changes in bond
yields
A decrease in corporate bond yields will increase the schemes’ liabilities, although this will be partially offset by an increase in the value of
the schemes’ bond holdings.
Inflation risk The majority of the schemes’ benefit obligations are linked to inflation, and higher inflation will lead to higher liabilities (although, in most
cases, caps on the level of inflationary increases are in place to protect against extreme inflation). The scheme uses LDIs (‘Liability Driven
Investment Funds’) within the asset portfolios to hedge against the value of liabilities changing as a result of movements in long-term
interest rates and inflation expectations. The structure allows the scheme to both hedge against the risks and retain capital investment in
assets that are expected to generate higher returns. Whilst LDIs are an integral part of the hedging strategy, risk management and
monitoring strategies are in place to ensure that the collateral requirements to maintain these structures are closely managed.
Life expectancy The majority of the schemes’ obligations are to provide benefits for the life of the member, so increases in life expectancy will result in an
increase in the liabilities.
In conjunction with its investment advisers, the trustees have structured the schemes’ investments with the objective of balancing investment returns
and levels of risk. The asset allocation for the main scheme has three principal elements:
Holding of cash funds and bonds which are expected to be less volatile than most other asset classes and reflects market movements in the
schemes’ liabilities
A proportion of equities with fund managers having freedom in making investment decisions to maximise returns, and
Investment of a proportion of the schemes’ assets in alternative asset classes which give the potential for diversification (currently property,
insurance linked securities and diversified growth).
The liabilities of the defined benefit schemes are measured by using the projected unit credit method which is an accrued benefits valuation method in
which the scheme liabilities make allowance for projected increases in pensionable pay.
224 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
30. Retirement benefit obligations continued
As funding of our principal pension scheme has improved the investment portfolio has been de-risked through increasing the scheme’s real gilts hedging
position through LDIs (Liability Driven Investments), which are commonly used by UK pension schemes.
The weighted average duration of the defined benefit obligation is 12 to 13 years (2023: 12 to 15 years).
The 2022 triennial actuarial valuation of the principal defined benefit scheme was agreed in 2024 with an actuarial valuation surplus of £7.6 million. No
deficit recovery contributions are required as a result of the 2022 valuation. Additional contributions of £2.0 million were paid into the scheme in
respect of scheme expenses (2023: £1.6 million). The Group monitors funding levels on an annual basis and the Group expects to pay only scheme
expenses of around £1.8 million, during the year ended 31 March 2025.
The last formal actuarial valuation of the Bristol Water section of the WCPS was at 31 March 2017. The last formal valuation of the SES section of the
WCPS was at 31 March 2022.
31. Deferred tax
Deferred tax is provided in full on temporary differences under the liability method using enacted tax rates.
Movements on deferred tax were:
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Liabilities/(assets) at 1 April
507.0
512.4
(18.6)
(13.1)
Charged/(credited) to the income statement
4.9
(0.9)
(0.7)
(2.4)
(Credited)/charged to other comprehensive income
(6.3)
(2.5)
(0.3)
(2.0)
Credited to equity, including impact of change in tax rate
0.1
0.5
0.2
Other non-underlying credits in the income statement
(4.9)
(2.5)
(1.1)
(1.3)
Amounts relating to acquired operations
47.5
Liabilities/(assets) at 31 March
548.3
507.0
(20.7)
(18.6)
Deferred tax assets have been recognised in respect of all temporary differences where it is probable that these assets will be recovered.
The majority of the Group’s deferred tax assets and liabilities are expected to be recovered over more than one year. All deferred tax assets and
liabilities within the same jurisdiction are offset where the taxable temporary differences are expected to reverse in the same periods as the deductible
temporary differences and there is a right of offset.
The movements in deferred tax assets and liabilities were:
Group
Deferred tax liabilities
Short-term
liabilities Retirement
Accelerated Fair value including benefit
Derivatives tax depreciation adjustments provisions obligations Total
£m £m £m £m £m £m
At 1 April 2022
459.6
95.7
6.1
9.7
571.1
Charged/(credited) to the income statement
13.6
(1.2)
(4.6)
3.0
10.8
Charged/(credited) to equity
(9.8)
(9.8)
Reclassification
2.9
2.9
At 31 March 2023
2.9
473.2
94.5
1.5
2.9
575.0
Charged/(credited) to the income statement
0.5
5.8
(5.5)
3.4
2.5
6.7
Credited to other comprehensive income
(4.1)
(2.2)
(6.3)
Reclassification
4.2
4.2
Transferred in on acquisition of SES
(3.5)
43.3
15.6
(0.9)
54.5
At 31 March 2024
522.3
104.6
4.9
2.3
634.1
225Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
31. Deferred tax continued
Deferred tax assets
Share-based Fair value
Derivatives payments Tax losses adjustment Total
£m £m £m £m £m
At 1 April 2022
(4.7)
(2.0)
(10.6)
(41.4)
(58.7)
Charged/(credited) to the income statement
0.3
0.5
(14.7)
2.2
(11.7)
Non-underlying (credit)/charge to the income statement
(10.6)
8.1
(2.5)
Charged to other comprehensive income
7.3
7.3
Reclassification to deferred tax liabilities
(2.9)
(2.9)
Charged to equity, including impact on change in tax rate
0.5
0.5
At 31 March 2023
(1.0)
(35.9)
(31.1)
(68.0)
Charged/(credited) to the income statement
0.3
(5.1)
3.0
(1.8)
Non-underlying credit to the income statement
(4.9)
(4.9)
Reclassification to deferred tax liabilities
(4.2)
(4.2)
Charged to equity
0.1
0.1
Transferred in on acquisition of SES
(7.0)
(7.0)
At 31 March 2024
(4.2)
(0.6)
(52.9)
(28.1)
(85.8)
Net liability
At 31 March 2023
507.0
At 31 March 2024 548.3
Deferred tax assets not recognised
G
G
r
r
o
o
s
s
s
s
Tax losses and
Short-term non-trade loan
liabilities relationship
Accelerated including deficits available
tax depreciation provisions indefinitely Total
£m £m £m £m
At 31 March 2023
(Credited)/charged to the income statement
(0.1)
0.2
0.1
Transferred in on acquisition from SES
0.4
0.3
21.8
22.5
At 31 March 2024
0.4
0.2
22.0
22.6
T
t
Short-term
liabilities Tax losses
Accelerated including available
tax depreciation provisions indefinitely Total
T
a
x
e
f
f
e
c
t
£m £m £m £m
At 31 March 2023
Transferred in on acquisition from SES
0.1
5.5
5.6
At 31 March 2024
0.1
5.5
5.6
Following the acquisition of SES Water, the Group has acquired temporary differences for which no deferred tax asset is recognised in relation to post
2017 tax losses (£13.2 million), non-trade deficits carried forwards in relation to the UK's corporate interest restriction rules (£8.7 million), fixed assets
(£0.4 million) and provisions (£0.2 million). The Group has concluded that it is appropriate to continue not to recognise a deferred tax asset on these
temporary differences. While the Group is in a net deferred tax liability position, the Group consider there is not a right to offset these deferred tax
assets against deferred tax liabilities. In addition, whilst the assets are available indefinitely, there is uncertainty regarding the availability of suitable
future taxable profits.
Company
Deferred tax assets
Retirement
benefit Share-based
obligations payments Tax losses Total
£m £m £m £m
At 1 April 2022
(1.3)
(1.2)
(10.6)
(13.1)
Charged/(credited) to the income statement
2.0
0.3
(4.7)
(2.4)
Non-underlying credit to the income statement
(1.3)
(1.3)
Credited to other comprehensive income
(2.0)
(2.0)
Charged to equity, including impact on change in tax rate 0.2 0.2
At 31 March 2023
(1.3)
(0.7)
(16.6)
(18.6)
Charged/(credited) to the income statement
2.5
0.2
(3.4)
(0.7)
Non-underlying credit to the income statement
(1.1)
(1.1)
Credited to other comprehensive income
(0.3)
(0.3)
At 31 March 2024
0.9
(0.5)
(21.1)
(20.7)
226 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
31. Deferred tax continued
Deferred tax (credited)/charged to equity or other comprehensive income during the year was:
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Remeasurement of defined benefit obligations
(2.2)
(9.8)
(0.3)
(2.0)
Cash flow hedges
(4.1)
7.3
Share-based payments
0.1
0.5
0.2
(6.2)
(2.0)
(0.3)
(1.8)
Capital allowances are available when a business incurs qualifying expenditure on capital items such as infrastructure assets. Capital allowances
provide tax relief on these items in place of accounting depreciation which is not tax deductible. Over the period of ownership of an asset, cumulative
depreciation and capital allowances will equalise. Capital allowance rates are set by the UK Government and every business receives the same rate of
allowance. Capital allowance rates typically vary from 3% up to 100%. Depreciation periods vary from 4 to 200 years. Due to the group's continuing
capital investment programme, deductions for capital allowances are expected to exceed depreciation in future years.
The different accounting treatment of property, plant and equipment for tax and accounting purposes means that the taxable income of the Group is not
the same as the profit reported in the financial statements. The adjustments for this are reflected in the current tax reconciliation. As explained in note 9,
the Government has introduced permanent full expensing and 50% first year allowances for certain qualifying expenditure. This provides an increase in
current tax relief for the Group with a consequently higher deferred tax liability and charge due to the additional capital allowance deductions.
Short term temporary differences arise on items such as retirement benefit obligations, derivatives and share based payments because the treatment of
such items are different for tax and accounting purposes. These differences reverse over future years following that in which they arise, as is reflected in the
deferred tax charge in these financial statements. Specifically, retirement benefit obligations will crystallise over the life of the pension scheme and/or the
period when spreading applies (this can be up to three years for spreading purposes), whilst share based payments will crystallise over the remaining life of
the share schemes which are up to 5 years. Short term liabilities including provisions will typically crystallise in the following year.
The fair value liability relates to the revaluation of tangible fixed assets on the acquisition of Bournemouth Water, Bristol Water and SES Water. The fair
value asset relates to the revaluation of debt on the acquisition of Bournemouth Water and Bristol Water. These items will be released over their
remaining life which is up to 141 years.
Where interest charges or other costs are capitalised in the accounts, tax relief is either given as the charges are incurred or when the costs are taken
to the income statement.
Derivatives reflect the fair value movements on treasury derivatives, these can fluctuate considerably each year. The balance will crystallise when
derivative items are either terminated or mature, the life of these items can be up to ten years.
Tax losses relate to trading losses and non-trade deficits carried forwards in relation to the UK's corporate interest restriction rules. These are
available indefinitely. With respect to trading losses, these are recognised on the basis the UK Group has taxable temporary differences that are
expected to reverse in the same periods as the unused tax losses and there is a right of offset. With respect to the non-trade deficits, current forecasts
indicate that these deficits will be utilised over the next 25 to 35 years on the basis the group does not retract any of its existing Public Benefit
Exemption elections.
32. Provisions
Restructuring Other Total
£m £m £m
Group
At 1 April 2023
0.4
0.4
Utilised
(0.4)
(0.4)
Arising on acquisition
0.4
0.4
At 31 March 2024
0.4
0.4
The restructuring provision related principally to severance costs.
33. Share capital
Allotted, called–up and fully paid
Number of shares
Treasury Ordinary
shares shares £m
Group and Company
At 1 April 2022 ordinary shares of 61.05p each
5,628
264,846,948
161.7
For consideration of £2.3 million, shares issued under the Company’s Sharesave Scheme
379,044
0.2
Shares cancelled
(3,910,503)
(2.4)
At 31 March 2023 ordinary shares of 61.05p each
5,628
261,315,489
159.5
For consideration of £0.5 million, shares issued under the Company’s Sharesave Scheme
72,299
Shares issued
24,657,535
15.1
At 31 March 2024 ordinary shares of 61.05p each
5,628
286,045,323
174.6
Shares held as treasury shares may be sold or reissued for any of the Company’s share schemes or cancelled.
227Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
33. Share capital continued
During the year the Group issued 24,657,535 new ordinary shares of 61.05 pence each in connection with the acquisition of SES Water Group (see note 43).
The equity capital raise will be used to reduce leverage in the enlarged group following the acquisition.
During the year ended 31 March 2023, the Group concluded the Buy-back programme, with the total aggregate cost of the programme being £239.5
million. The Group purchased £39.9 million of ordinary shares from the market at an average ordinary share price of 1,022 pence during the year ended
31 March 2023. The shares acquired under the tender offer were immediately cancelled, creating a capital redemption reserve of £2.4 million.
Employee share schemes
The Group operates a number of equity-settled share plans for the benefit of employees. Details of each plan are:
i) Sharesave Scheme
An all-employee savings-related plan is operated that enables employees, including Executive Directors, to invest up to a maximum of £500 per month
for three or five years. These savings can then be used to buy ordinary shares, at a price set at a 17% or 20% discount to the market value at the start
of the savings period, at the third or fifth year anniversary of the option being granted. Options expire six months following the exercise date and,
except for certain specific circumstances such as redundancy, lapse if the employee leaves the Group before the option exercise period commences.
Outstanding options to subscribe for ordinary shares of 61.05 pence each under the Company’s share option schemes are:
Date granted and Period when Thousands of shares in respect of
subscription price options normally which options outstanding at
fully paid exercisable 31 March
2024
2023
3 July 2018
635p
2021 – 2023
1
100
9 July 2019
620p
2022 – 2024
69
84
19 July 2020
928p
2023 – 2025
30
193
6 July 2021
879p
2024 – 2026
306
552
5 July 2022
828p
2025 – 2027
302
533
4 July 2023
663p
2026 – 2028
753
1,461
1,462
The number and weighted average exercise price of Sharesave options are:
2024
2023
Weighted
average Weighted
Number of exercise Number of average exercise
ordinary shares price per share ordinary shares price per share
(thousands) (p) (thousands) (p)
At 1 April
1,462
835
1,501
789
Granted
847
663
598
828
Forfeited
(617)
828
(215)
781
Exercised
(72)
639
(379)
633
Expired
(159)
859
(43)
859
At 31 March
1,461
746
1,462
835
The weighted average price of the Company’s shares at the date of exercise of Sharesave options during the year was 689 pence (2023 927 pence).
The options outstanding at 31 March 2024 had a weighted average exercise price of 746 pence (2023 835 pence) and a weighted average remaining
contractual life of 2.0 years (2023 1.91 years). The number of exercisable Sharesave options at 31 March 2024 was 1,000 (2023 1,000) and the
weighted average exercise price of exercisable Sharesave options was 799 pence (2023 620 pence).
The aggregate fair value of Sharesave options granted during the year was £0.7 million (2023 £0.7 million), determined using the Black-Scholes
valuation model. The significant inputs into the valuation model at the date of issue of the options were:
2024
2023
Weighted average share price (pence)
700
957
Weighted average exercise price (pence)
663
828
Expected volatility
26%
25%
Expected life
3.4 years
3.3 years
Risk-free rate
4.5%
1.3%
Expected dividend yield
6.1%
4.0%
Expected volatility was determined by calculating the historical volatility of the Group’s share price over the previous three years and five years periods
depending on the life of the scheme.
228 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
33. Share capital continued
ii) Long-term incentive plan (LTIP)
Executive Directors and senior management receive an annual grant of conditional shares. Share awards vest subject to the achievement of specific
performance conditions measured over a performance period of not less than three years. More details concerning LTIPs, including performance
conditions, is shown in the Directors’ remuneration report on pages 148 to 170.
The number and price of shares in the LTIP are:
2024
2023
Weighted Weighted
Number of average exercise Number of average exercise
ordinary shares price per share ordinary shares price per share
(thousands) (p) (thousands) (p)
At 1 April
880
990
1,170
902
Granted
553
714
255
1,038
Vested
(125)
784
(357)
790
Lapsed
(186)
1,069
(188)
876
At 31 March
1,122
863
880
990
The awards outstanding at 31 March 2024 had a weighted exercise price of 863 pence (2023 990 pence) and a weighted average remaining
contractual life of 2.6 years (2023 2.6 years).
The aggregate fair value of awards granted during the year was £1.8 million (2023 £1.1 million), determined from market value. No option pricing
methodology is applied since the vesting of the shares depends on non-market performance vesting conditions.
In the prior year, having reflected on the exceptional economic backdrop and in particular the cost-of-living crises faced by many of our customers, the
CEO recommended that the Remuneration Committee consider lapsing her bonus and 2020 LTIP awards in full, and diverting an equivalent value into
the Group’s Watershare+ scheme. The Watershare+ scheme directly benefits the Group’s customers by either providing money off their bill or via
ownership of Pennon Group plc shares. While recognising the performance delivered, the Remuneration Committee accepted and approved the CEO’s
recommendation regarding her awards.
iii) Annual Incentive Bonus Plan – deferred shares
Awards under the plan to Executive Directors and senior management involve the release of ordinary shares in the Company to participants. There is
no performance condition since vesting is conditional upon continuous service with the Group for a period of three years from the award. The number
and weighted average price of shares in the Annual Incentive Bonus Plan are:
2024
2023
Weighted Weighted
Number of average exercise Number of average exercise
ordinary shares price per share ordinary shares price per share
(thousands) (p) (thousands) (p)
At 1 April
141
1,065
206
955
Granted
124
700
54
988
Vested
(41)
1,079
(110)
756
Lapsed
(7)
972
(9)
1,001
At 31 March
217
863
141
1,065
The awards outstanding at 31 March 2024 had a weighted average exercise price of 863 pence (2023 1,065 pence) and a weighted average remaining
contractual life of 1.3 years (2023 1.3 years). The Company’s share price at the date of the awards ranged from 700 pence to 1,141 pence (2023 988
pence to 1,141 pence).
The aggregate fair value of awards granted during the year was £0.9 million (2023 £0.5 million), determined from market value. No option pricing
methodology is applied since dividends paid on the shares are receivable by the participants in the scheme.
Further details of the plans and options granted to Directors, included above, are shown in the Directors’ remuneration report.
34. Share premium account
£m
Group and Company
At 1 April 2022
235.5
Shares issued under the Sharesave Scheme
2.1
At 31 March 2023
237.6
Shares issued under the Sharesave Scheme
0.4
Other shares issued
164.9
402.9
Less: Transaction costs arising on share issues
(4.7)
At 31 March 2024 398.2
229Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
35. Capital redemption reserve
The capital redemption reserve represents the redemption of B shares and cancellation of deferred shares arising from a capital return to shareholders
undertaken during 2006, together with the redemption of shares during the years ended 31 March 2023 and 31 March 2022.
£m
Group and Company
At 1 April 2022
154.7
Share capital redeemed
2.4
At 31 March 2023
157.1
At 31 March 2024
157.1
36. Retained earnings and other reserves
Own Hedging Retained
shares reserve earnings Total
£m £m £m £m
Group
At 31 March 2022
(3.9)
17.1
709.4
722.6
Profit for the year
0.1
0.1
Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the year
21.8
(29.2)
(7.4)
Dividends paid relating to 2022
(101.6)
(101.6)
Credit to equity in respect of share-based payments (net of tax)
1.9
1.9
Charge in respect of share options vesting
5.4
(5.4)
Own shares acquired by the Pennon Employee Share Trust in respect of share options granted
(5.0)
(5.0)
Shares purchased for cancellation (included related expenses)
(40.0)
(40.0)
At 31 March 2023
(3.5)
38.9
535.2
570.6
Loss for the year
(9.5)
(9.5)
Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the year
(12.3)
(5.5)
(17.8)
Dividends paid relating to 2023
(111.7)
(111.7)
Credit to equity in respect of share-based payments (net of tax)
1.1
1.1
Charge in respect of share options vesting
2.2
(2.2)
Own shares acquired by the Pennon Employee Share Trust in respect of share options granted
(1.4)
(1.4)
At 31 March 2024
(2.7)
26.6
407.4
431.3
The own shares reserve represents the cost of ordinary shares in Pennon Group plc issued to or purchased in the market and held by the Pennon
Group plc Employee Benefit Trust to satisfy awards under the Group’s Annual Incentive Bonus Plan.
The market value of the 162,024 ordinary shares (2023 152,000 ordinary shares) held by the Trust at 31 March 2024 was £1.0 million
(2023 £1.2 million).
Retained
earnings Total
£m £m
Company
At 1 April 2022
689.1
689.1
Profit for the year
8.4
8.4
Other comprehensive loss for the year
(6.1)
(6.1)
Dividends paid relating to 2022
(101.6)
(101.6)
Shares purchased for cancellation (including related expenses)
(40.0)
(40.0)
Credit to equity in respect of share-based payments (net of tax)
1.3
1.3
Charge in respect of share options vesting
(5.4)
(5.4)
At 31 March 2023
545.7
545.7
Profit for the year
34.4
34.4
Other comprehensive loss for the year
(1.0)
(1.0)
Dividends paid relating to 2023
(111.7)
(111.7)
Credit to equity in respect of share-based payments (net of tax)
1.1
1.1
Charge in respect of share options vesting
(2.2)
(2.2)
At 31 March 2024
466.3
466.3
In making decisions about the level of dividends to be proposed the Directors take steps to check that retained earnings reflect realised profits and are
therefore distributable within the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
230 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
37. Analysis of cash flows given in the statement of cash flows
Reconciliation of profit for the year to cash generated from operations:
Cash generated from operations
Group
Company
2023
2024 2023 2024 Restated*
£m £m £m £m
(Loss)/profit for the year
(8.5)
0.4
34.4
8.4
Adjustments for:
Share-based payments
1.2
2.4
1.1
1.5
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment
(0.7)
(0.4)
Depreciation charge
168.2
151.1
Amortisation of intangible assets
3.7
3.6
Investment impairment charge
283.7
Non-underlying bond early redemption gain
(18.4)
Share of post-tax profit from associated companies
(0.7)
(0.3)
Finance income (before non-underlying items)
(12.6)
(9.2)
(14.7)
(11.8)
Finance costs (before non-underlying items)
162.8
145.8
17.5
13.3
Dividends receivable
(333.2)
(15.7)
Taxation credit
(0.6)
(8.9)
(2.2)
(4.3)
Changes in working capital:
Increase in inventories
(1.1)
(2.3)
(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables
(47.6)
15.9
(0.4)
42.1
(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables
(2.0)
34.6
4.6
0.6
Increase/(decrease) in retirement benefit obligations from contributions
0.1
Decrease in provisions
(0.4)
(0.6)
Cash generated/(outflow) from operations
261.7
313.7
(9.2)
34.2
Reconciliation of total interest paid:
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Interest paid in operating activities
116.2
159.7
11.9
7.7
Interest paid in investing activities
5.0
Total interest paid
116.2
164.7
11.9
7.7
* See note 2.
During the year, the Group completed a number of sale and leaseback transactions in respect of its infrastructure assets as part of its ongoing
financing arrangements. Cash proceeds of £64.8 million (2023 £40.2 million) were received and a gain of £nil (2023 £nil) was recognised. These assets
are being leased back at market rentals over varying lease terms from 9.0 to 9.5 years.
231Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
38. Net borrowings
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Cash and cash deposits
171.4
165.4
79.2
104.1
Borrowings – current
Bank and other current borrowings
(186.3)
(92.7)
(8.0)
Lease obligations
(51.9)
(32.0)
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings
(279.1)
Total current borrowings
(238.2)
(124.7)
(8.0)
(279.1)
Borrowings – non-current
Bank and other non-current borrowings
(2,658.7)
(1,960.9)
(245.6)
(155.7)
Listed preference shares
(12.5)
(12.5)
Lease obligations
(1,071.2)
(1,032.7)
Total non-current borrowings
(3,742.4)
(3,006.1)
(245.6)
(155.7)
Total net borrowings
(3,809.2)
(2,965.4)
(174.4)
(330.7)
The movements in net borrowings during the periods presented were as follows:
Group
Net borrowings Transfer between Net borrowings
at 1 April non-current Other non-cash at 31 March
2022 Cash flows and current movements 2023
£m £m £m £m £m
Cash and cash deposits
519.0
(353.6)
165.4
Bank and other current borrowings
(70.0)
20.4
(43.3)
0.2
(92.7)
Current lease obligations
(170.2)
221.1
(49.1)
(33.8)
(32.0)
Bank and other non-current borrowings
(1,907.4)
(57.2)
43.3
(39.6)
(1,960.9)
Listed preference shares
(12.5)
(12.5)
Non-current lease obligations
(1,041.8)
(40.2)
49.1
0.2
(1,032.7)
Net borrowings
(2,682.9)
(209.5)
(73.0)
(2,965.4)
Net borrowings Transfer between Net borrowings
at 1 April SES Water Group non-current Other non-cash at 31 March
2023 acquisition Cash flows and current movements 2024
£m £m £m £m £m £m
Cash and cash deposits
165.4
6.0
171.4
Bank and other current borrowings
(92.7)
(58.5)
52.9
(88.8)
0.8
(186.3)
Current lease obligations
(32.0)
(0.7)
20.2
(33.8)
(5.6)
(51.9)
Bank and other non-current borrowings
(1,960.9)
(300.4)
(458.7)
88.8
(27.5)
(2,658.7)
Listed preference shares
(12.5)
(12.5)
Non-current lease obligations
(1,032.7)
(0.5)
(64.8)
33.8
(7.0)
(1,071.2)
Net borrowings
(2,965.4)
(360.1)
(444.4)
(39.3)
(3,809.2)
Other non-cash movements for the Group in 2024 includes the increase in borrowings from interest which is rolled into the amount repayable. Cash
flows of £6.0 million include the cash acquired on acquisition of SES Water Group of £27.5 million (see note 43).
232 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
38. Net borrowings continued
The movements in net borrowings during the periods presented were as follows:
Company
Net Net
borrowings Other borrowings
at 1 April non-cash at 31 March
2022 Cash flows movements 2023
£m £m £m £m
Cash and cash deposits
306.7
(202.6)
104.1
Bank and other loans due within one year
(30.0)
30.0
Amounts due to subsidiary undertakings
(282.8)
3.7
(279.1)
Bank and other loans due after one year
(154.5)
(1.2)
(155.7)
(160.6)
(168.9)
(1.2)
(330.7)
Net borrowings Transfer between Net borrowings
at 1 April non-current Other non-cash at 31 March
2023 Cash flows and current movements 2024
£m £m £m £m £m
Cash and cash deposits
104.1
(24.9)
79.2
Bank and other loans due within one year
(8.5)
0.5
(8.0)
Amounts due to subsidiary undertakings
(279.1)
279.1
Bank and other loans due after one year
(155.7)
(100.0)
8.5
1.6
(245.6)
(330.7)
(124.9)
281.2
(174.4)
The non-cash movement of £279.1 million is due to the extinguishment of an intercompany loan payable to Viridor Waste 2 Limited. As detailed in note
20, the Company received a dividend in specie of £283.6 million from the subsidiary which fully extinguished the outstanding loan.
233Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
39. Subsidiary and joint venture undertakings at 31 March 2024
Country of incorporation, registration
Principal subsidiary companies
Registered office address
and principal operations
Water
Bristol Water Plc
Bridgwater Road, Bristol, BS13 7AT
England
South West Water Limited*
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
South West Water Finance Plc
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
South West Water Customer Services Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Sutton and East Surrey Water Plc
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
Non-household retail
Pennon Water Services Limited*
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Sutton and East Surrey Water Services Limited
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
Other
Advanced Minerals Limited
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
Allmat (East Surrey) Limited
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
Dunfermline Solar Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
East Surrey Holdings Limited
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
EEB16 Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
EEB17 Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
EEB31 Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Peninsula Insurance Limited*
Level 5, Mill Court, La Charroterie, St Peter Port, GY1 1EJ
Guernsey
Pennon Power Limited*
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
SES Business Water Limited
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
SES Home Services Limited
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
Sutton and East Surrey Group Holdings Limited*
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
SESW Holding Company Limited
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
Surrey Downs Estates Limited
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
Surrey Downs Property Investment Limited
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
The Cheam Group Plc
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
(1)
(1)
(2)
* Indicates the shares are held directly by Pennon Group plc, the Company.
1. 80% of share capital owned by Pennon Group plc. All shares in issue are ordinary shares.
2. Captive insurance company established with the specific objective of financing risks emanating from within the Group.
Other trading companies
Registered office address
Country of incorporation
Bristol Water Core Holdings Limited
Bridgwater Road, Bristol, BS13 7AT
England
Bristol Water Holdings Limited
Bridgwater Road, Bristol, BS13 7AT
England
Bristol Water Holdings UK Limited*
Bridgwater Road, Bristol, BS13 7AT
England
Peninsula Properties (Exeter) Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Peninsula Trustees Limited*
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Pennon Defined Contribution Pension Trustee Limited*
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Pennon Pension Trustees Limited*
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Pennon Trustee Limited*
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Viridor Waste 2 Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Dormant companies
Registered office address
Country of incorporation
Avon Valley Water Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Pennon Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
Pennon Share Scheme Trustees Limited*
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
SES Water Limited
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
Source for Business Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
SWW Pension Trustees Limited*
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
The Calcite Factory B.V
Moezelhavenweg 9, 1043 AM, Amsterdam
Netherlands
The Sutton District Water Plc
66-64 London Road, Redhill, RH1 1LJ
England
(1)
The subsidiary undertakings are wholly owned unless stated otherwise and all shares in issue are ordinary shares. All companies above are
consolidated in the Group financial statements.
Joint Ventures and Associates
Registered office address
Country of incorporation
Stake (%)
Bristol Wessex Billing Services Limited
1 Clevedon Walk, Nailsea, Bristol, BS48 1WA
England
50
CREWW Executive Board Limited
Peninsula House, Rydon Lane, Exeter, EX2 7HR
England
50
Searchlight Collections Limited PO BOX 930 Galmington Office, Galmington Trading Estate, England 50
Cornishway West, Taunton, Somerset, TA1 9LQ
Water 2 Business Limited
21e Somerset Square, Nailsea, Bristol, United Kingdom,
England
30
BS48 1RQ
234 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
39. Subsidiary and joint venture undertakings at 31 March 2024 continued
Subsidiary audit exemption
Pennon Group plc has issued guarantees over the liabilities of the following companies at 31 March 2024 under section 479C of Companies Act 2006
and these entities are exempt from the requirements of the Act relating to the audit of individual accounts by virtue of section 479A of the Act.
Company
Company number
Bristol Water Core Holdings Limited
04637554
Bristol Water Holdings Limited
02630760
Bristol Water Holdings UK Limited
04789566
Dunfermline Solar Limited
12683727
EEB16 Limited
10789260
EEB17 Limited
10790759
EEB31 Limited
11780715
Peninsula Properties (Exeter) Limited
02307220
Pennon Power Limited
00736732
South West Water Customer Services Limited
07620338
Viridor Waste 2 Limited
02298543
40. Contingencies
Contingent liabilities
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Guarantees:
Performance bonds
13.8
9.7
13.8
9.7
13.8
9.7
13.8
9.7
Guarantees in respect of performance bonds relate to changes to the collateral requirements for the non-household retail business with other
wholesalers. The possibility of the bond being required is remote hence the fair value of the bond is not material.
Other contractual and litigation uncertainties
Ofwat and the Environment Agency announced an industry-wide investigation into sewage treatment works on 18 November 2021. On 27 June 2022,
as part of its ongoing investigation, Ofwat announced enforcement action against South West Water Limited, the company is now included alongside
the five companies that received enforcement notices in March 2022. The Group continues to work openly with Ofwat to comply with the notice as
part of this ongoing investigation. The Group has undertaken its own internal investigation and investment interventions have been undertaken at a
small number of our sites. In addition, the Group has looked for opportunities for additional future investment to include further storm storage and an
extension of its sewer misuse programme which has been shared with Ofwat. Ofwat have yet to formally respond on the investigation and the timing of
a response is unknown, although has been potentially indicated for Summer 2024.
Until such time that an initial response is received, the potential outcome of these investigations continues to be unknown. Ofwat has a range of
options that it could apply from closing the investigation with no further action, agreeing to formal S.19 undertakings through to fining the Group up to
10% of its revenue in relation to the regulated wastewater business. Given the wide range of possible outcomes therefore the potential outcome of this
investigation continues to be unknown, and it is not possible to estimate any obligations arising from the investigation with any certainty.
On 23 May 2023 Ofwat announced an investigation into South West Water's 2021/22 operational performance data relating to leakage and per capita
consumption. This operational performance data was reported in South West Water's Annual Performance Report 2021/22. This report is subject to
assurance processes which include independent checks and balances carried out by an external technical auditor. The Group continues to work
openly and constructively with Ofwat to comply with the formal notice issued to South West Water as part of this investigation. The Group has
undertaken its own internal investigation into the data and third party experts have concluded the calculations are within a tolerance as reported, as a
result there were no detrimental impacts to customers through Outcome Delivery Incentives (‘ODIs’). The Group recognises opportunities to enhance
data quality to improve the estimation process and these have been shared with Ofwat.
Until such time that an initial response is received, the potential outcome of these investigations continues to be unknown. Ofwat has a range of
options that it could apply from closing the investigation with no further action, agreeing to formal S.19 undertakings through to fining the Group up to
10% of its revenue in relation to the regulated drinking water business. Given the wide range of possible outcomes therefore the potential outcome of
this investigation continues to be unknown, and it is not possible to estimate any obligations arising from the investigation with any certainty.
On 2 February 2024 summons were received by South West Water Limited from the EA in relation to alleged breaches of environmental permits
relating to the illegal water discharge activity at 7 locations with a total of 30 charges. The initial court hearing took place on 16 April 2024 at which the
company entered no plea, proceedings have been adjourned to 3 July 2024. In May 2024 the EA withdrew 6 of the 30 charges. The potential outcome
of the remaining prosecutions is currently unknown.
The Group establishes provisions in connection with contracts and litigation where it has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past
events and where it is more likely than not an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be reliably estimated.
Where it is uncertain that these conditions are met, a contingent liability is disclosed unless the likelihood of the obligation arising is remote or the
matter is not deemed material.
235Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
41. Capital commitments
Group
Company
2024 2023 2024 2023
£m £m £m £m
Contracted but not provided
211.5
72.0
42. Related party transactions
Group companies entered into the following transactions with joint ventures which were not members of the Group. Bristol Wessex Billing Services
Limited and Water 2 Business Limited are joint venture investments of Bristol Water Holdings Limited.
2024 2023
£m £m
Sales of goods and services
Water 2 Business Limited
19.8
17.9
Purchase of goods and services
Bristol Wessex Billing Services Limited
4.0
3.5
Year-end balances
2024 2023
£m £m
Receivables due from related parties
Water 2 Business Limited (including loan receivable of £8.7 million (2023 £9.3 million)
8.9
10.8
Bristol Wessex Billing Services Limited
1.6
Payables due to related parties
Bristol Wessex Billing Services Limited
3.0
The receivables due from related parties are unsecured and will be settled in cash. No guarantees have been given or received. No provisions have
been made, or are considered necessary, for doubtful debts in respect of these amounts due.
The loans to Water 2 Business Limited are due to be repaid on 31 July 2027 and carry interest at SONIA plus 2.00%.
Company
The following transactions with subsidiary undertakings occurred in the year:
2024 2023
£m £m
Sales of goods and services (management fees)
10.9
7.9
Purchase of goods and services (support services)
0.3
0.5
Interest receivable
4.9
3.0
Dividends received
333.2
15.7
Sales of goods and services to subsidiary undertakings are at cost. Purchases of goods and services from subsidiary undertakings are under normal
commercial terms and conditions which would also be available to unrelated third parties.
Year-end balances
2024 2023
£m £m
Receivables due from subsidiary undertakings
Loans
154.1
99.2
Trading balances and other receivables
48.5
2.6
The loan balance comprises three loans. A loan with a balance of £26.1 million is due for repayment in instalments over a five-year period following a
receipt of a request to repay. No request to repay has been issued at the current time. Interest on £13.1 million (2023 £13.1 million) of the loan has been
charged at a fixed rate of 5%. Interest on £13.0 million (2023 £13.0 million) of the loan has been charged at Bank of England base rate +3.0%. A loan
with a balance of £28.0 million is due for repayment in instalments over a ten-year period following a receipt of a request to repay. No request to repay
has been issued at the current time. Interest on the loan has been charged at Bank of England base rate +3.0%. A loan with a balance of £100.0 million
is due for repayment within one month. Interest on the loan has been charged at Bank of England base rate +1.0%. A loan with a balance of £73.1
million was repaid on 16 May 2023. This loan was issued on 16 November 2022 to Bristol Water plc and novated to South West Water limited on 1
February 2023. Interest was charged on the loan balance at Bank of England base rate +0.75%.
No material expected credit loss provision has been recognised in respect of loans to subsidiaries (2023 nil).
2024 2023
£m £m
Payables due to subsidiary undertakings
Loans
279.1
Trading balances
8.5
The loans from subsidiary undertakings are unsecured and interest-free without any terms for repayment.
236 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
43. Acquisition of SES Water Group
On 10 January 2024, the Pennon Group acquired 100% of the issued share capital of Sumisho Osaka Gas Water UK Limited, which has subsequently
been renamed Sutton and East Surrey Group Holdings Limited (‘SESGHL’). SESGHL is the holding company of the SES Water Group which comprises
Sutton and East Surrey Water plc (‘SES Water’), a regulated water only company, and certain other ancillary businesses. The purpose of the acquisition
was to expand the Group’s presence in water supply across Southern England.
The acquisition of SESGHL is currently under review by the Competition and Markets Authority, and the SESGHL Group has been consolidated into
Pennon Group plc’s consolidated financial statements from 10 January 2024 due to management’s assessment of obtaining control of SESGHL as of
that date in accordance with IFRS 10.
Revenue and profit contribution
For the period 9 January 2024 to 31 March 2024, SES Water Group contributed revenue of £35.7 million and loss before tax of £2.7 million to the
Group’s result. If the acquisition had occurred on 1 April 2023, management estimates that consolidated revenue would have been £1,031.1 million and
consolidated loss for the year would have been £12.4 million. In determining these amounts, management have assumed the fair value adjustments,
determined provisionally, that arose on the date of the acquisition would have been the same had the acquisition occurred on 1 April 2023.
The details of the business combination are as follows:
£m
Fair value of consideration transferred
Amount settled in cash
90.2
Total consideration transferred 90.2
Fair value of assets and liabilities recognised on acquisition
Property, plant and equipment
441.6
Intangible assets 11.6
Inventories 2.1
Trade and other receivables 61.4
Cash and cash deposits 27.5
Current tax receivable 0.4
Borrowings (360.1)
Trade and other payables (65.3)
Retirement benefit obligations 3.3
Deferred tax liabilities (47.5)
Provisions (0.4)
Identifiable net assets 74.6
Goodwill on acquisition
15.6
Outflow of cash to acquire subsidiary, net of cash acquired
Consideration for equity settled in cash
90.2
Cash and cash equivalents acquired
(27.5)
Net cash outflow on acquisition 62.7
Acquisition costs paid charged to expenses
9.6
Acquisition related costs
Acquisition related costs of £9.6 million are not included as part of the consideration transferred and were recognised as an expense in the
consolidated income statement within other operating expenses.
237Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
43. Acquisition of SES Water Group continued
Adjustments made to the carrying values of SES Water Group at acquisition
The net assets recognised in the 31 March 2024 financial statements were based on a provisional assessment of their fair value, whilst all necessary
information is finalised to complete the valuation exercise. The initial significant fair value adjustments are described further below and have been
incorporated into the 10 January 2024 fair value balance sheet.
Acquired receivables
The provisional fair value of trade and other receivables acquired as part of the business combination amounted to £32.9 million with a gross
contractual amount of £35.1 million. At the acquisition date the Group’s best estimate of the contractual cash flows expected not to be collected
amounted to £2.2 million.
Goodwill
Goodwill is attributable to the recognition of deferred tax liabilities on fair value gains recognised as part of the acquisition. None of the goodwill
recognised is expected to be deductible for tax purposes. Goodwill has been allocated to the water segment. The acquisition of the SES Water Group
provides a strategic fit for Pennon Group plc as the Group expands its presence in water supply across Southern England.
44. Events after the reporting period
On 15
th
May 2024 outbreak of cryptosporidium was detected in the water supply in the Brixham area of Devon, causing South West Water to issue a
notice to boil water before consuming. All customers issued with a notice to boil water have been offered with compensation of a bank payment or bill
credit of £215 per household, the total cost to the Group being c.£3.5 million.
238 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Alternative performance measures
Alternative performance measures (APMs) are financial measures used in this report that are not defined by International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).
The Directors believe that these APMs assist in providing additional useful information on the underlying trends, performance and position of the Group as well
as enhancing the comparability of information between reporting periods.
As the Group defines the APMs they might not be directly comparable to other companies’ APMs. They are not intended to be a substitute for, or superior to,
IFRS measurements. In 2023/24, the following APMs were added or amended to those presented previously:
The APM for 'Basic adjusted earnings per share (adjusted for share consolidation)' has been discontinued as the impact of the share consolidation is
reflected in both the current and prior year.
Underlying earnings
Underlying earnings are presented alongside statutory results as the Directors believe they provide a more useful comparison on business trends and
performance. Note 6 in the notes to the financial statements provides more detail on non-underlying items, and a reconciliation of underlying earnings for the
current year and the prior year is as follows:
Non-underlying items
Underlying earnings reconciliation
31
st
March 2024 Underlying Drought costs SES acquisition Renewables acquisition Transformation Statutory results Earnings per share
£m £m £m £m £m £m p
EBITDA (see below) 338.3 (1.8) (9.6) (0.6) (13.9) 312.4
Operating profit 166.3 (1.8) (9.6) (0.6) (13.9) 140.4
Profit before tax 16.8 (1.8) (9.6) (0.6) (13.9) (9.1)
Taxation (4.3) 0.5 0.9 0.1 3.4 0.6
Profit after tax (8.5)
Non-controlling interests (1.0)
Profit after tax attributable
to shareholders (9.5) (3.6)
Non-underlying items
Underlying earnings reconciliation
31
st
March 2023 Underlying Integration costs WaterShare+ Drought incentive Drought costs Bond redemption Statutory results
Earnings
per share
£m £m £m £m £m £m £m p
EBITDA (see below) 307.8 (4.3) (22.4) (7.6) (9.4) - 264.1
Operating profit 153.1 (4.3) (22.4) (7.6) (9.4) - 109.4
Profit before tax 16.8 (4.3) (22.4) (7.6) (9.4) 18.4 (8.5)
Taxation 3.6 1.1 5.5 1.5 1.8 (4.6) 8.9
Profit after tax 0.4
Non-controlling interests (0.3)
Profit after tax attributable
to shareholders 0.1 -
Underlying EBITDA
Underlying EBITDA (earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation and non-underlying items) is used to assess and monitor operational underlying
performance.
239Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Effective interest rate
A measure of the mean average interest rate payable on net debt associated with South West Water Limited’s group of companies, including Bristol Water plc,
which excludes interest costs not directly associated with net debt. This measure is presented to assess and monitor the relative cost of financing for South
West Water.
2024
£m
2023
£m
Net finance costs before non-underlying items (note 8) 150.2 136.6
Remove: net finance income before non-underlying items not associated with South West Water
Limited’s group of companies 5.3 8.7
Net finance costs before non-underlying items associated with South West Water
Limited’s group of companies 155.5 145.3
Net interest on retirement benefit obligations associated with South West Water
Limited’s group of companies 1.4 1.6
Capitalised interest 14.1 5.0
Net finance costs for effective interest rate calculation 171.0 151.9
Group net debt (opening) (note 38) 2,965.4 2,682.9
Remove: opening net debt not associated with South West Water Limited’s group of companies (100.1) (43.8)
Opening net debt for calculation 2,865.3 2,639.1
Group net debt (opening) (note 38) 3,809.2 2,965.4
Remove: closing net debt not associated with South West Water Limited’s group of companies (514.5) (100.1)
Closing net debt for calculation 3,294.7 2,865.3
Average net debt (opening net debt + closing net debt divided by 2) 3,080.0 2,752.2
Effective interest rate (%) 5.6 5.5
Effective cash cost of interest
Effective cash cost of interest is calculated on the same basis as the effective interest cost calculation above, but excludes finance costs that are not paid in
cash, but accrete to the carrying value of debt (principally the inflationary impact of indexation on index-linked debt).
2024
£m
2023
£m
Net finance costs for effective interest rate calculation (as above) 171.0 151.9
Remove non-cash interest accrued (income statement indexation charge) (55.5) (66.8)
Net finance costs for effective cash cost of interest calculation 115.5 85.1
Opening net debt (as above) 2,865.3 2,639.1
Closing net debt (as above) 3,294.7 2,865.3
Average net debt (opening net debt + closing net debt divided by 2) 3,080.0 2,752.2
Effective cash cost of interest (%) 3.8 3.1
Alternative performance measures continued
240 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Underlying interest cover
Underlying net finance costs (excluding pensions net interest cost) divided by operating profit before non-underlying items.
2024
£m
2023
£m
Net finance costs after non-underlying items (note 8) 150.2 136.6
Net interest on retirement benefit obligations (note 8) 1.7 2.0
Net finance costs for interest cover calculation 151.9 138.6
Operating profit before non-underlying items (see ‘Underlying earnings’ above) 166.3 153.1
Interest cover (times) 1.1 1.1
EBITDA dividend cover
Underlying EBITDA for the Group divided by proposed combined interim and final dividends.
2024
£m
2023
£m
Underlying EBITDA (see ‘Underlying earnings’ above) 338.3 307.8
Proposed dividends (note 12) 126.9 111.7
EBITDA dividend cover (times) 2.7 2.8
Group dividend cover
Proposed dividends divided by profit for the year before non-underlying items and deferred tax.
2024
£m
2023
£m
Proposed dividends (note 12) 126.9 111.7
(Loss)/profit for the year attributable to ordinary shareholders (9.5) 0.1
Deferred tax charge/(credit) before non-underlying items (note 9) 4.9 (0.9)
Non-underlying items after tax in profit for the year (note 6) 21.0 20.0
Adjusted profit for dividend cover calculation 16.4 19.2
Dividend cover (times) 0.1 0.2
Capital investment
Property, plant and equipment and intangible asset additions. The measure is presented to assess and monitor the total capital investment by
the Group.
2024
£m
2023
£m
Additions to property, plant and equipment (note 17) 604.5 353.7
Additions to intangible assets (note 16) 45.0 4.6
Capital investment 649.5 358.3
Capital payments
Payments for property, plant and equipment (PPE) and intangible asset additions, net of proceeds from sale of PPE and intangible assets. The measure is
presented to assess and monitor the net cash spend on PPE and intangible assets.
2024
£m
2023
£m
Cash flow statements: purchase of property, plant and equipment 555.1 326.6
Cash flow statements: purchase of intangible assets 43.8 4.6
Cash flow statements: proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment (0.8) (0.7)
Capital payments relating to the Group 598.1 330.5
241Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Return on capital employed
The total of underlying operating profit divided by capital employed (net debt plus total equity invested).
2024
£m
2023
£m
Capital employed (opening):
Net debt (note 38) 2,965.4 2,682.9
Total equity invested (notes 33, 34, 35) 554.2 551.9
Opening capital employed for return on capital employed calculation 3,519.6 3,234.8
Capital employed (closing):
Net debt (note 38) 3,809.2 2,965.4
Total equity invested (notes 33, 34, 35) 729.9 554.2
Closing capital employed for return on capital employed calculation 4,539.1 3,519.6
Underlying operating profit (see ‘Underlying earnings’ above) 166.3 153.1
Capital employed for return on capital employed calculation
(opening capital employed + closing capital employed divided by 2) 4,029.4 3,377.2
Return on capital employed (%) 4.1 4.5
Return on Regulated Equity (RoRE)
This is a key regulatory metric which represents the returns to shareholders expressed as a percentage of regulated equity.
Returns are made up of a base return (set by Ofwat, the water business regulator, at c.3.9% and c.4.4% for Bristol Water for the period 2020-25) plus totex
outperformance, financing outperformance and ODI outperformance. Returns are calculated post tax and post sharing (only a proportion of returns are
attributed to shareholders and shown within RORE). The three different types of return calculated and added to the base return are:
Totex outperformance – totex is defined below and outperformance is the difference between actual reported results for the regulated business compared to
the Final Determination (Ofwat published document at the start of a regulatory period), in a constant price base
Financing outperformance – is based on the difference between a company’s actual effective interest rate compared with Ofwat’s allowed cost of debt
ODI outperformance – the net reward or penalty a company earns based on a number of different key performance indicators, again set in the Final
Determination
Regulated equity is a notional proportion of regulated capital value (RCV) which is set by Ofwat at the start of every five-year regulatory period, adjusted
foractual inflation. For 2020-25, the notional equity proportion is 40.0%.
Further information on this metric can be found in South West Water’s annual performance report and regulatory reporting, published in July each year.
Themost recent can be found at: www.southwestwater.co.uk/about-us/how-are-we-performing.
Totex
Operating costs and capital expenditure of the regulated water and wastewater business (based on the Regulated Accounting Guidelines).
Outcome Delivery Incentives (ODIs)
ODIs are designed to incentivise companies to deliver improvements to service and outcomes based on customers’ priorities and preferences. If a company
exceeds these targets a reward can be earned through future higher revenues. If a company fails to meet them, they can incur a penalty through lower future
allowed revenues.
Regulatory Capital Value (RCV)
RCV has been developed for regulatory purposes and is primarily used in setting price limits.
RCV is widely used by the investment community as a proxy for the market value of the regulated business and forms part of covenant debt limits.
Shadow RCV reflects the addition of anticipated regulatory adjustments which amend RCV at the end of a regulatory period. These changes are accrued
duetoperformance through ODIs, changes in levels of totex expenditure, changes in inflation rates and other regulatory adjustments.
Alternative performance measures continued
242 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Five-year financial summary
Continuing operations
1
Total Group
2024
£m
2023
£m
2022
£m
2021
£m
2020
£m
2020
£m
Income statement
Revenue before non–underlying items 907.8 825.0 792.3 644.6 636.7 1,389.9
Operating profit before non–underlying items 166.3 153.1 237.2 215.3 245.5 361.5
Net finance costs before non–underlying items (150.2) (136.6) (93.7) (58.3) (62.5) (88.7)
Share of profit in joint ventures 0.7 0.3 14.8
Profit before tax and non–underlying items 16.8 16.8 143.5 157.0 183.0 287.6
Net non–underlying items before tax (25.9) (25.3) (15.8) (24.9) 10.1 13.9
Taxation charge 0.6 8.9 (112.1) (24.8) (70.6) (95.2)
(Loss)/profit for the year (8.5) 0.4 15.6 107.3 122.5 206.3
Attributable to:
Ordinary shareholders of the parent (9.5) 0.1 15.4 107.5 116.6 200.4
Perpetual capital security holders 7.0 7.0
Non–controlling interests (1.0) 0.3 0.2 (0.2) (1.1) (1.1)
Dividends proposed/declared 126.9 111.7 102.0 91.8 184.3 184.3
Earnings per ordinary share (basic):
From continuing and discontinuing operations
Earnings per share (3.6p) 4.9p 25.5p 27.7p 47.7p
Deferred tax before non–underlying items 1.8p (0.3p) 2.6p 1.6p 2.4p 7.9p
Non–underlying items (net of tax) 7.9p 7.6p 36.5p 4.8p 5.3p 6.9p
Non–controlling interests’ share of non–underlying items (0.2p) (0.2p)
Adjustment for full year depreciation charge in the Disposal Group (0.6p)
Earnings per share before non–underlying and deferred tax 6.2p 7.3p 44.3p 31.9p 35.2p 61.7p
Declared dividends per share 44.37p 42.73p 38.53p 21.74p 43.77p 43.77p
2024
£m
2023
£m
2022
£m
2021
£m
2020
£m
Capital expenditure
Acquisitions (including investment in joint ventures) 90.2 425.1
Property, plant and equipment 604.5 353.7 237.3 168.3 326.8
Intangibles 45.0 4.6 3.6 0.2 0.7
Balance sheet
Non–current assets 5,663.4 4,743.0 4,527.0 3,277.1 3,226.0
Net current (liabilities)/assets
2
(19.7) 87.0 389.5 2,919.1 2,595.8
Non–current liabilities (4,481.1) (3,704.8) (3,641.9) (3,211.4) (4,109.7)
Net assets 1,162.6 1,125.2 1274.6 2,984.8 1,712.1
Number of employees (average full time equivalent for year)
Water 3,051 2,639 2,394 1,745 1,623
Waste management 2,986
Non–household retail 191 158 177 160 143
Other businesses 90 67 65 82 101
3,334 2,864 2,636 1,987 4,853
1. Continuing operations comparative values for 2020 and 2021 are presented excluding discontinued operations following the sale of Viridor (with associated assets held for sale
atMarch 2021, resulting in no ‘Total Group’ comparative for this period). Results for 2022 to 2024 reflect the current Group totals, but remain classified as ’Continuing operations’ in
this table for comparative purposes.
2. Net current assets for 2020 includes assets held for sale of £2,675.3 million and liabilities directly associated with assets classified as held for sale of £756.3 million.
243Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Glossary
C-MeX customer measure of experience, a mechanism to incentivise water companies to provide an excellent customer experience
for residential customers, across both the retail and wholesale parts of the value chain
CPI consumer price index, a measure of inflation in a representative sample of retail goods and services using a geometric mean
and excluding e.g. housing costs
CPIH consumer price index, a measure of inflation in a representative sample of retail goods and services using a geometric mean,
including owner occupiers’ housing costs
DNV an independent management consultancy specialising in technical assurance in the utility sector
EBITDA earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation
ESG environmental, social and governance
Fair Tax Mark an independent certification scheme which recognises organisations that demonstrate they are paying the right amount
of corporation tax at the right time. In December 2018, Pennon became the first water services and waste management utility
to receive it
GHG greenhouse gases
HomeSafe our health & safety improvement programme
K7 the current regulatory price review period
KPI key performance indicator, our measures of business performance against the key targets monitored by Board and Pennon
Executive
LTIFR lost time injury frequency rate
ODI outcome delivery incentives, 15 of which are common across all water companies while others are bespoke to South West Water
Ofwat The Water Services Regulation Authority, or Ofwat, is the body responsible for economic regulation of the privatised water and
sewerage industry in England and Wales
ROCE return on capital employed
RoRE return on regulated equity
RPI retail price index, a measure of inflation in a representative sample of retail goods and services using an arithmetic mean
STEM science, technology, engineering and mathematics
Sustainable Financing
Framework
the way we link financial impacts with sustainability impacts; the Framework aligns with the Green Bond Principles, the Social Bond
Principles and the Green Loan Principles
TCFD Task force on climate-related financial disclosures
Totex total expenditure
TUPE Transfer of Undertakings (Protection of Employment) Regulations 2006 as amended
WaterShare the programme through which we shared the benefits of outperformance against our 2015-20 business plan targets with
watercustomers
WaterShare+ the enhanced benefit sharing mechanism introduced for water customers under our 2020-25 New Deal business plan
WaterShare+
Advisory Panel
established to protect the interests of our customers. The Panel provides an independent review of our business plan commitments
and Board pledges
244 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
Shareholder information
Financial calendar, including Dividend Reinvestment Plan (DRIP) alternative
Financial year end 31
st
March 2024
Full Year Results 2023/24 21st May 2024
Annual Report and Accounts Published 10th June 2024
Annual General Meeting 2024 24th July 2024
Ordinary shares quoted ex-dividend 25th July 2024*
Record date for final dividend 26th July 2024*
Final date for receipt of DRIP applications 8th August 2024*
Final dividend payment date 5th September 2024*
Trading Statement 26th September 2024
Half Year Results 2024/25 28th November 2024
* Subject to obtaining shareholder approval at the 2024 Annual General Meeting.
Shareholder analysis at 31
st
March 2024
Number of holding of shares
Number of
shareholders
% of total
shareholders
% of ordinary
shares
1-100 2,469 17.1 0.02
101-1,000 6,991 48.3 1.18
1,001-5,000 4,095 28.4 3
5,001-50,000 634 4.4 2.5
50,001-100,000 74 0.5 1.9
100,001+ 186 1.3 91.4
14,449
Number of
accounts
% of total
accounts
% of total
shares
Individuals 13,744 95.1 5.8
Companies 617 4.3 84.3
Trust companies (pension funds etc.) 5
Banks and nominees 83 0.6 9.9
14,449
Major Shareholders as at 31
st
March 2024
Shareholder
Shareholding in
Pennon Group plc
shares
% of issued
share capital
Lazard Asset Management 24,804,242 8.67
KBI Global Investors 15,290,447 5.35
Nuance Investments 15,197,966 5.31
Impax Asset Management 15,072,205 5.27
BlackRock 13,463,388 4.71
ClearBridge Investments 12,659,843 4.43
Pictet Asset Management 11,733,667 4.10
Legal & General Investment Management 10,193,253 3.56
Vanguard Group 10,055,380 3.52
As at 20
th
May 2024, the Company has been notified of the following holdings of voting rights in the ordinary share capital of the Company: BlackRock on 25
th
April 2024 of 16,733,301 shares (5.85%); and Amundi Asset Management on 10
th
April 2024 of 14,630,777 shares (5.11%). The percentage of voting rights detailed
above was calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures were made in accordance with Rule 5 of the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules.
245Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
Shareholder information continued
Registrar
All enquiries concerning shareholdings including notification of change
ofaddress, loss of a share certificate or dividend payments should be made
to the Company’s registrar, Link Group, who can be contacted asfollows:
Link Group
Pennon Group Share Register
Central Square
29 Wellington Street
Leeds
LS1 4DL
Telephone: 0371 664 9234 (calls are charged at standard geographic
rateand will vary by provider).
Lines are open 8.30am-5.30pm Monday-Friday, excluding public holidays
inEngland and Wales.
Overseas telephone: +44 371 664 9234
(calls outside the United Kingdom will be charged at the applicable
international rate).
Email: pennon@linkgroup.co.uk
Website: www.signalshares.com
ShareGift service
Through ShareGift, an independent charity share donation scheme,
shareholders who only have a small number of shares with a value
that makes it uneconomical to sell them can donate such shares to
charity. Donations can be made by completion of a simple share transfer
form whichis available from the Company’s registrar, Link Group,
orbycontactingShareGift on 020 7930 3737 (www.sharegift.org).
Individual savings accounts
Shareholders may gain tax advantages by holding their shares in the
Company in an Individual Savings Account (ISA).
Dividend Reinvestment Plan (DRIP)
Subject to obtaining shareholder approval at the 2024 Annual General
Meeting for the payment of a final dividend for the year ended 31
st
March
2024, full details of the DRIP and how to participate will be published on
the Company’s website at www.pennon-group.co.uk/dividends/dividend-
reinvestment-plan-drip.
The full timetable for offering the DRIP is given opposite.
The DRIP provides shareholders with an opportunity to invest the cash
dividend they receive on their Pennon Group plc shares to buy further shares
in the Company at preferable dealing rates.
Corporate information
Registered office
Peninsula House
Rydon Lane
Exeter
Devon
EX2 7HR
Company registration number: 2366640
Company Secretary
Andrew Garard
Corporate brokers
Barclays Bank plc
Morgan Stanley & Co. International plc
Independent auditors
Ernst & Young LLP
Online portfolio service
The online portfolio service, provided by Link Group, gives shareholders
access to more information on their investments. Details of the portfolio
service are available online at www.signalshares.com.
Electronic communications
The Company has passed a resolution which allows it to communicate with
its shareholders by means of its website.
Shareholders currently receiving a printed copy of the annual report who
now wish to sign up to receive all future shareholder communications
electronically can do so by registering with Link Group’s share portal.
Go to http://www.signalshares.com to register, select ‘Account Registration’
and then follow the on-screen instructions by inputting your surname, your
Investor Code (which can be found on your proxy form) and your postcode,
as well as entering an email address and selecting a password.
By registering to receive your shareholder communications electronically,
youwill also automatically receive your dividend confirmations electronically.
Electronic proxy voting
Pennon encourages the use of electronic proxy voting and no longer
provides paper proxy forms alongside the AGM Notice. We believe that
is both more efficient and consistent with our important environmental
sustainability responsibilities and objectives.
You may register your proxy votes via www.signalshares.com.
Registering your vote electronically is entirely secure and ensures the
privacy of your personal information. Alternatively, if you wish to vote by post
you may request a hard copy proxy form by contacting our registrar, Link
Asset Services. Contact details are provided above.
Pennon’s website
http://www.pennon-group.co.uk provides news and details of the Company’s
activities plus links to its subsidiaries’ websites.
The Investor Information section contains up-to-date information for
shareholders including detailed share price information, financial results,
dividend payment dates and amounts, and stock exchange announcements.
There is also a comprehensive shareholder services section which includes
information on buying, selling and transferring shares, and how to notify
achange in personal circumstances, for example, a change of address.
Beware of share fraud
The following is taken from the ScamSmart section of the Financial Conduct
Authority’s website (www.fca.org.uk/scamsmart).
Fraudsters use persuasive and high-pressure tactics to lure investors
into scams. They may offer to sell shares that turn out to be worthless
ornon-existent, or to buy shares at an inflated price in return for an
upfrontpayment.
While high profits are promised, if you buy or sell shares in this way you
willprobably lose your money.
246 Annual Report and Accounts 2024 « Pennon Group plc
How to avoid share fraud
Keep in mind that firms authorised by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA)
are unlikely to contact you out of the blue with an offer to buy orsell shares.
Do not get into a conversation; note the name of the person and firm
contacting you and then end the call.
Check the Financial Services Register from http://www.fca.org.uk to see
iftheperson and firm contacting you is authorised by the FCA.
Beware of fraudsters claiming to be from an authorised firm, copying
itswebsite or giving you false contact details.
Use the firm’s contact details listed on the Register if you want to call itback.
Call the FCA on 0800 111 6768 if the firm does not have contact details
onthe Register or you are told they are out of date.
Search the FCA Warning List of unauthorised firms at
www.fca.org.uk/scamsmart.
Consider that if you buy or sell shares from an unauthorised firm you will
not have access to the Financial Ombudsman Service or Financial Services
Compensation Scheme. Seek impartial advice from a financial adviser before
you make an investment.
Remember: if it sounds too good to be true, it probably is!
5,000 people contact the Financial Conduct Authority about share fraud
each year, with victims losing an average of £20,000.
Report a scam
If you are approached by fraudsters, please tell the FCA using the share
fraudreporting form at http://www.fca.org.uk/scams where you can find out
more about investment scams. You can also call the FCA Consumer Helpline
on 0800 111 6768.
If you have already paid money to share fraudsters you can report this
atanytime to Action Fraud using their Online Fraud Report Tool at
www.actionfraud.police.uk/reporting-fraud-and-cyber-crime or by calling
0300 123 2040.
247Pennon Group plc » Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic report Governance Financial statements Other information
This report is printed on paper certified in accordance with the FSC® (Forest
Stewardship Council®) and is recyclable and acid-free.
Pureprint Ltd is FSC certified and ISO 14001 certified showing that it is
committed to all round excellence and improving environmental performance
is an important part of this strategy.
Pureprint Ltd aims to reduce at source the eff ect its operations have on
the environment and is committed to continual improvement, prevention of
pollution and compliance with any legislation or industry standards.
Pureprint Ltd is a Carbon / Neutral® Printing Company.
The paper is Carbon Balanced with the World Land Trust, an international
conservation charity, who off set carbon emissions through the purchase and
preservation of high conservation value land.
Through protecting standing forests, under threat of clearance, carbon is
locked in that would otherwise be released. These protected forests are then
able to continue absorbing carbon from the atmosphere, referred to as
REDD (Reduced Emissions from Deforestation and forest Degradation).
This is now recognised as one of the most cost-eff ective and swiftest ways
to arrest the rise in atmospheric CO
2
and global warming eff ects. Additional
to the carbon benefits is the flora and fauna this land preserves, including
a number of species identified at risk of extinction on the IUCN Red List of
Threatened Species.
Consultancy and design by Black Sun Global
www.blacksun-global.com
CBP025216
This report is printed on paper certified in accordance with the FSC®
(Forest Stewardship Council®) and is recyclable and acid-free.
Pureprint Ltd is FSC certified and ISO 14001 certified showing that it is
committed to all round excellence and improving environmental
performance is an important part of this strategy.
Pureprint Ltd aims to reduce at source the effect its operations have on
the environment and is committed to continual improvement, prevention
of pollution and compliance with any legislation or industry standards.
Pureprint Ltd is a Carbon / Neutral® Printing Company.
The paper is Carbon Balanced with the World Land Trust, an international
conservation charity, who offset carbon emissions through the purchase
and preservation of high conservation value land.
Through protecting standing forests, under threat of clearance, carbon is
locked in that would otherwise be released. These protected forests are
then able to continue absorbing carbon from the atmosphere, referred to
as REDD (Reduced Emissions from Deforestation and forest Degradation).
This is now recognised as one of the most cost-effective and swiftest
ways to arrest the rise in atmospheric CO
2
and global warming effects.
Additional to the carbon benefits is the flora and fauna this land preserves,
including a number of species identified at risk of extinction on the IUCN
Red List of Threatened Species.
Designed by Black Sun Plc
CBP012760
This report is printed on paper certified in accordance with the FSC® (Forest
Stewardship Council®) and is recyclable and acid-free.
Pureprint Ltd is FSC certified and ISO 14001 certified showing that it is
committed to all round excellence and improving environmental performance
is an important part of this strategy.
Pureprint Ltd aims to reduce at source the eff ect its operations have on
the environment and is committed to continual improvement, prevention of
pollution and compliance with any legislation or industry standards.
Pureprint Ltd is a Carbon / Neutral® Printing Company.
The paper is Carbon Balanced with the World Land Trust, an international
conservation charity, who off set carbon emissions through the purchase and
preservation of high conservation value land.
Through protecting standing forests, under threat of clearance, carbon is
locked in that would otherwise be released. These protected forests are then
able to continue absorbing carbon from the atmosphere, referred to as
REDD (Reduced Emissions from Deforestation and forest Degradation).
This is now recognised as one of the most cost-eff ective and swiftest ways
to arrest the rise in atmospheric CO
2
and global warming eff ects. Additional
to the carbon benefits is the flora and fauna this land preserves, including
a number of species identified at risk of extinction on the IUCN Red List of
Threatened Species.
Consultancy and design by Black Sun Global
www.blacksun-global.com
CBP025216
This report is printed on paper certified in accordance with the FSC®
(Forest Stewardship Council®) and is recyclable and acid-free.
Pureprint Ltd is FSC certified and ISO 14001 certified showing that it is
committed to all round excellence and improving environmental
performance is an important part of this strategy.
Pureprint Ltd aims to reduce at source the effect its operations have on
the environment and is committed to continual improvement, prevention
of pollution and compliance with any legislation or industry standards.
Pureprint Ltd is a Carbon / Neutral® Printing Company.
The paper is Carbon Balanced with the World Land Trust, an international
conservation charity, who offset carbon emissions through the purchase
and preservation of high conservation value land.
Through protecting standing forests, under threat of clearance, carbon is
locked in that would otherwise be released. These protected forests are
then able to continue absorbing carbon from the atmosphere, referred to
as REDD (Reduced Emissions from Deforestation and forest Degradation).
This is now recognised as one of the most cost-effective and swiftest
ways to arrest the rise in atmospheric CO
2
and global warming effects.
Additional to the carbon benefits is the flora and fauna this land preserves,
including a number of species identified at risk of extinction on the IUCN
Red List of Threatened Species.
Designed by Black Sun Plc
CBP012760
Pennon Group plc
Peninsula House
Rydon Lane
Exeter
Devon
England EX2 7HR
www.pennon-group.co.uk
Registered in England & Wales
Registered Number: 2366640
Annual Report and Accounts 2024